The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutDDW-2024-004231 For the Construction of the Cottonwoods Connection District Project No.: SA021 Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 Technical Specifications January 4, 2024 OWNER Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy 3430 East Danish Road Cottonwood Heights, Utah 84093 ENGINEER Hazen and Sawyer 10619 South Jordan Gateway, Suite 130 South Jordan, UT 84095 1/3/2024 Bids will be received at the Utah Public Procurement Place until 12:00 pm on February 5, 2024 (https://bids.sciquest.com/apps/Router/PublicEvent?CustomerOrg=StateOfUtah ). Technical Specifications Volume 1 of 4: Divisions 00 – 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Table of Contents Cottonwoods Connection Page -1 COTTONWOODS CONNECTION PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Volume 1 – Divisions 00 through 13 Volume 2 – Divisions 26 through 46 Section DIVISION 00 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 00030 Notice Inviting Bids 00040 List of Prequalified General Contractors 00100 Instructions to Bidders 00300 Bid 00310 Bid Schedule 00320 Bid Bond 00330 Information Required of Bidder CONTRACTUAL DOCUMENTS 00500 Agreement 00510 Preselection Contract Assignment 00610 Performance Bond 00620 Payment Bond 00630 Notice of Award 00631 Notice to Proceed 00632 Application for Payment 00633 Change Order Form 00634 Notice of Substantial Completion 00635 Certificate of Final Completion 00636 Consent of Surety for Final Payment 00637 Affidavit of Payment 00638 Chlorine Risk Management Requirements CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00700 General Conditions Article 1 – Definitions Article 2 – Preliminary Matters Article 3 – Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse Article 4 – Availability of Lands; Physical Conditions; Reference Points Article 5 – Bonds and Insurance Article 6 – Contractor's Responsibilities Article 7 – Other Work Article 8 – Owner's Responsibilities Article 9 – Engineer's Status During Construction Article 10 – Changes in the Work Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Table of Contents Cottonwoods Connection Page -2 Article 11 – Change of Contract Price Article 12 – Change of Contract Time Article 13 – Warranty and Guarantee; Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work Article 14 – Payments to Contractor, Liquidated Damages and Completion Article 15 – Suspension of Work and Termination Article 16 – Notice Article 17 – Subcontract Limitations Article 18 – Patents and Copyrights TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 20 00 Measurement and Payment 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 01 29 73 Schedule of Values 01 29 76 Progress Payment Procedures 01 31 13 Coordination 01 31 19 Project Meetings 01 32 00 Construction Progress Schedule 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 35 10 Pipe Loading Restrictions 01 35 20 Confined Space Entry Plan 01 42 00 References 01 43 33 Manufacturer’s Field Services 01 45 16.13 Contractor Quality Control 01 45 23 Testing Services Furnished by Contractor 01 45 33 Special Inspections 01 50 00 Permits 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities 01 52 00 Construction Facilities 01 55 00 Contractor Access and Parking 01 55 50 Traffic Control 01 55 58 Temporary Pavement Markings 01 57 00 Temporary Controls 01 57 13 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control 01 57 40 Temporary Pumping Systems 01 57 52 Dewatering and Flow Diversion for Streamwork 01 58 00 Utility Relocation Requirements 01 61 00 Product Requirements and Options 01 65 00 Product Delivery Requirements 01 66 00 Product Storage and Protection Requirements 01 71 23 Field Engineering 01 71 33 Protection of Work and Property Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Table of Contents Cottonwoods Connection Page -3 DIVISION 01 (continued) 01 73 00 Execution of Work 01 73 23 Anchorage and Bracing of Nonstructural Components 01 74 00 Cleaning and Waste Management 01 75 00 Checkout and Startup Procedures 01 77 19 Closeout Requirements 01 78 23 Operations and Maintenance Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documents DIVISION 02 02 41 00 Site Demolition DIVISION 03 03 11 00 Concrete Formwork 03 15 00 Concrete Accessories 03 15 16 Joints in Concrete 03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel 03 30 00 Cast in Place Concrete 03 35 00 Concrete Finishes 03 39 00 Concrete Curing 03 40 00 Precast Concrete 03 60 00 Grout DIVISION 05 05 05 13 Galvanizing 05 05 23 Metal Fastening 05 10 00 Metal Materials 05 12 00 Structural Steel 05 13 00 Stainless Steel 05 14 00 Structural Aluminum 05 50 00 Metal Fabrication 05 51 33 Ladders 05 52 00 Guards and Railings 05 53 00 Gratings, Checkered Floor Plates, and Access Doors 05 55 00 Steel Treads and Nosings DIVISION 07 07 13 50 Waterproofing 07 21 00 Building Insulation 07 90 00 Joint Fillers, Sealants, and Caulking DIVISION 09 09 90 00 Painting 09 90 10 Pipeline Coatings and Linings 09 97 00 Special Coating Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Table of Contents Cottonwoods Connection Page -4 DIVISION 13 13 34 23.26 Pre-Fabricated Equipment Centers DIVISION 26 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Requirements 26 05 19 Low Voltage Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.16 Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 60 Low Voltage Electric Motors 26 09 16 Electric Controls and Relays 26 22 00 Low-Voltage Transformers 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 42 00 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection 26 42 10 Galvanic Cathodic Protection 26 43 13 Surge Protective Devices 26 50 00 Lighting DIVISION 31 31 00 01 Earthwork 31 05 16 Aggregate Materials 31 05 19 Geotextiles 31 10 00 Clearing, Grubbing, and Site Preparation 31 23 19 Dewatering 31 23 24 Flowable Fill 31 23 33 Trenching and Backfill 31 25 00 Erosion and Sedimentation Control 31 42 00 Gravity Retaining Walls DIVISION 32 32 10 00 Paving and Surfacing 32 11 00 Surface Restoration 32 31 13 Steel Fencing 32 90 00 Final Grading and Landscaping DIVISION 33 33 05 39.23 Reinforced Concrete Pipe 33 05 61 Utility Structures 33 71 19 Underground Electrical DIVISION 40 40 05 00 Basic Mechanical Requirements 40 05 05 Piping General Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Table of Contents Cottonwoods Connection Page -5 DIVISION 40 (continued) 40 05 07 Pipe Supports 40 05 19 Ductile Iron Pipe 40 05 19.05 Earthquake Resistant Ductile Iron Pipe 40 05 24.23 Steel Pipe for Water Service 40 05 31 PVC, CPVC Pipe 40 05 33 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe 40 05 41 Piping Expansion Compensation 40 05 51 Valves, General 40 05 57 Valve Operators and Electric Valve Actuators 40 05 61 Gate Valves 40 05 62 Eccentric Plug Valve 40 05 63 Ball Valves 40 05 33 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe 40 05 64.10 Double Eccentric Butterfly Valves 40 06 65.23 Check Valves 40 05 78 Air Valves for Water Service 40 05 97 Piping and Equipment Identification Systems 40 06 20 Process Pipe, Valve, and Gate Schedule 40 61 13 Process Control System General Provisions 40 61 15 Process Control System Submittals 40 61 21 Process Control System Testing 40 61 21.71 Factory Witness Test 40 61 21.72 Field Testing 40 61 21.73 Final Acceptance Test 40 61 23 Signal Coordination Requirements 40 61 24 Quality Assurance 40 61 26 Process Control System Training 40 61 90 Schedules and Control Descriptions, General 40 61 91 Process Control System Instrument List 40 61 93 Process Control System Input/Output List 40 61 96 Process Control Descriptions 40 62 00 Computer System Hardware and Ancillaries 40 63 43 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) 40 66 00 Network and Communication Equipment 40 66 33 Fiber Optic System 40 67 00 Control System Equipment Panels and Racks 40 67 63 Uninterruptible Power Systems 40 68 00.13 Process Control Software (Modify Existing) 40 70 00 Instrumentation For Process Systems 40 71 13.13 Inline Magnetic Flow Meters 40 71 79.16 Flow Switches 40 72 76.26 Level Switches (Floats) 40 73 13 Pressure and Differential Pressure Gauges 40 73 20 Pressure Transmitters 40 74 63 Temperature Transmitters Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Table of Contents Cottonwoods Connection Page -6 DIVISION 40 (continued) 40 75 13 ph-ORP Analyzers 40 75 16 Conductivity Analyzers 40 75 53 Turbidity Analyzers 40 77 26.26 Intrusion Switch – Magnetic 40 78 00 Panel Mounted Instruments 40 78 59 Power Supplies 40 79 00 Miscellaneous Instruments, Valves, and Fittings DIVISION 43 43 23 31.33 Vertical Multistage Centrifugal Pump DIVISION 46 46 00 00 Equipment General Provisions VOLUME 3: DRAWINGS VOLUME 4: STEEL PIPE PRE-SELECTION PACKAGE APPENDIX A: GEOTECHNICAL REPORT “Geotechnical/Geological Study – Cottonwoods Connection” dated November 29, 2023 Prepared by Gerhart Cole and Delve Underground (GC Project Number 22-1491) APPENDIX B: APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS Approved Shop Drawings for welded steel pipe for CC-1 Pipeline Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/24 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Notice Inviting Bids Cottonwoods Connection Page 00030-1 00030 NOTICE INVITING BIDS RECEIPT OF BIDS: Sealed Bids will be received through the Utah Public Procurement Place (https://bids.sciquest.com/apps/Router/PublicEvent?CustomerOrg=StateOfUtah) on behalf of the Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy (MWDSLS) OWNER of the WORK until 12:00 pm, on February 5, 2024, for construction of the Cottonwoods Connection (Project). Any Bids received after the specified time or through a method other than the Utah Procurement Place will not be considered. Refer to Instructions to Bidders for documents required for a complete Bid. OBTAINING CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents are entitled “Documents for the Construction of the Cottonwoods Connection Project .” All Contract Documents may be obtained through the Utah Public Procurement Place beginning the date that the Invitation for Bids is issued. Only prequalified Contractors may download the Contract Documents. No printed copies will be provided. The costs to prepare Bids as described in the Contract Documents are the sole responsibility of the Contractor. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The Project consists of installation of welded steel pipe (WSP) for raw and finished water conveyance, constructing new vaults, utility relocations, surface improvements and restoration, and all labor and appurtenances for a complete and functional project. A detailed description of the work is provided in Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work. The Contractor is expected to coordinate with the WSP supplier previously selected for the Project such that all necessary items are included in Contractor’s bid, including sales tax for WSP. The Project is comprised of three (3) separate pipeline schedules . The pipelines are interconnected to convey raw or finished water north or south: Cottonwoods Connector – Schedule 1 (CC-1), Salt Lake Aqueduct Replacement (SLAR), and Cottonwoods Connector – Schedule 2 (CC-2); relocations are required for the existing Salt Lake Aqueduct (SLA) and Little Cottonwood Conduit (LCC). The three (3) separate pipeline schedules are divided into the following six (6) packages as described in Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work: 1. Schedule A (CC-1) a. Package A-1 (CC-1 East): 36-inch diameter pipe b. Package A-2 (CC-1 West): 36-inch diameter pipe 2. Schedule B (CC-2): 36-inch diameter pipe 3. Schedule C (SLAR) a. Package C-1 (SLAR): 60-, 66-, and 72-inch diameter pipe b. Package C-2 (SLA): 69-inch diameter pipe c. Package C-3 (LCC): 36-inch diameter pipe Consultant Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/24 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Notice Inviting Bids Cottonwoods Connection Page 00030-2 Bidders shall prepare a base bid for each pipeline schedule (A, B, and C) that the bidder intends to construct. A bidder may provide a bid for any or all three (3) pipeline schedules. Several bid alternates are listed, including an addition or deduction if a bidder is selected for all pipeline schedules, as summarized in Section 00 310 – Bid Form. The timeline of performance shall be as described in Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work. The timeline of selection activities is provided in the following table. Date Selection Process January 4, 2024 Issue Invitation for Bids January 11, 2024 Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference at Owner’s Office (9 am MT) January 25, 2024 End of Inquiries, Questions, and Interpretation Period (3 pm MT) January 26, 2024 Final Addendum Issued (if required) February 5, 2024 Bid submittal due (12 pm MT) February 26, 2024 Anticipated Notice of Award after Board Meeting OWNER will NOT fund the Project through a federal or state loan; there are no federal cross-cutter requirements. OWNER is using a loan through the Board of Water Resources that has minor reporting requirements. The selected CONTRACTOR will be required to assist OWNER in ensuring compliance; effort is expected to be minimal. These requirements may include: • Federal Funding Accountability and Transparency Act reporting • Equal Employment Opportunity and Civil Rights • American Iron and Steel Requirement • Build America, Buy America (BABA) • Prevailing Wage (Davis-Bacon) • Record Keeping and Reporting Requirements • Business License and Taxes • Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, and Other Responsibility Matters • Financial Accountability • Federal wage provisions compliance carries reporting and other requirements. SITE OF WORK: The Project is located in Cottonwood Heights, UT, between the mouth of Big Cottonwood Canyon and the Little Cottonwood Water Treatment Plant. Refer to the Drawings for a Project Overview Map. PRE-BID CONFERENCE: A mandatory Pre-bid Conference will be conducted on January 11, 2024, at 9:00 am at MWDSLS’s Office. Prospective Bidders are required to attend. The purpose of the Pre-bid Conference is to discuss the scope of the Project, Consultant Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/24 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Notice Inviting Bids Cottonwoods Connection Page 00030-3 bidding requirements, and to acquaint the Bidders with site conditions. Detailed technical questions may be submitted in writing and will be formally answered, if warranted, by addenda later. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will not be legally binding. COMPLETION OF WORK: All WORK shall be completed by June 30, 2026. Time is of the essence. PREQUALIFIED CONTRACTORS: The OWNER has selected Prequalified General Contractors as eligible to Bid and construct the Project. A list of Prequalified General Contractors is provided in the Contract Documents in Section 00 040 – List of Prequalified General Contractors. Only Prequalified General Contractors shall be allowed to submit Bids on this Contract . OPENING OF BIDS: The Bids will be opened electronically. AWARD OF CONTRACT: The Contract will be awarded as described in Instructions to Bidders. BID GUARANTEE: Each Bid shall be accompanied by a certified or cashier’s check, or bid bond in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total bid price payable to the Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy as a guarantee that the Bidder, if his Bid is accepted, will promptly execute the contract, provide evidence of insurance, and furnish necessary performance bonds and payment bonds. PROJECT ADMINISTRATION: All questions relative to this Project prior to the opening of Bids shall be directed to the ENGINEER for the project. Hazen and Sawyer 10619 South Jordan Gateway, Suite 130 South Jordan, UT 84095 Contact: Jeremy Williams 385.342.1082 jswilliams@hazenandsawyer.com It shall be understood, however, that no interpretations of the drawings or specifications will be made except in writing signed by the ENGINEER, nor will any "or equal" products be considered for approval prior to award of a contract. OWNER'S RIGHTS RESERVED: The OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, to waive any informality in a Bid, and to make awards in the interest of the OWNER. OWNER reserves the right to request a CONTRACTOR to clarify any part of his bid. Response to such requests must be made in writing and will become part of the bid. Unsolicited supplementary information and materials received after the deadline will not be considered in the evaluation. Consultant Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/24 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Notice Inviting Bids Cottonwoods Connection Page 00030-4 OWNER is subject to the Utah Government Records Access Management and Act, Utah Code Ann. § 63G-2-101, et. seq. (GRAMA). All bids are ordinarily public documents once an award is made. A Contractor who desires to request protected status of any information submitted in the bid must specifically identify the information that the Contractor desires to protect and the reasons that the information should be afforded protection under Utah State law. In making this request, the responder will comply with the requirements of Utah Code Ann. § 63G -2-305, Utah Code Ann. § 63G- 2-309, and all other applicable requirements of law. MWDSLS will not be bound by any instructions, etc. contained in a bid, but rather, will only be governed by GRAMA and MWDSLS GRAMA regulations. - END NOTICE INVITING BIDS - Consultant Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 List of Prequalified General Contractors Cottonwoods Connection Page 00040-1 00040 LIST OF PREQUALIFIED GENERAL CONTRACTORS The Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy authorized use of a prequalification procedure to determine and select General Contractors eligible to bid and construct the Cottonwoods Connection Project. Based upon the Statements of Qualifications received in response to the District’s Prequalification Documents for Contractors, only the following General Contractors are prequalified to bid and construct the project . General Contractors 1. COP Construction LLC 555 W 1100 N North Salt Lake, UT 84054 2. VanCon, Inc. 1825 N Mountain Spring Pkwy Springville, UT 84663 3. Whitaker Construction Co., Inc. 44 S 1050 W Brigham City, UT 84302 4. WW Clyde and Co. 869 N 1500 W Orem, UT 84057 Consultant THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Instructions to Bidders Cottonwoods Connection Page 00100-1 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FORM OF BID: The Bid shall consist of the following documents on the forms contained herein: 1. 00300 Bid 2. 00310 Bid Schedule 3. 00320 Bid Bond 4. 00330 Information Required of Bidder DELIVERY OF BID: The Bid shall be delivered by the time and to the place stipulated in the Notice Inviting Bids. It is the Bidder's sole responsibility to see that his Bid is received complete and in proper time. WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS: Bids shall be unconditionally accepted without alteration or correction, excepting that Bidder may withdraw his Bid through the Utah Procurement Place prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of Bids. OPENING OF BIDS: The Bids will be opened electronically. MODIFICATIONS AND ALTERNATIVE BIDS: Unauthorized conditions, limitations, or provisions attached to a Bid may render it non-responsive and may cause its rejection. The completed Bid forms shall be without interlineations, alterations, or erasures. Alternative Bids will not be considered unless called for. Bids received by means other than those described in the Notice Inviting Bids will not be considered. Modified bids will not be considered. DISCREPANCIES IN BIDS: In the event there is more than one bid item in a bid schedule, the Bidder shall furnish a price for all bid items in the schedule; failure to do so may render the Bid non-responsive and subject to rejection. In the event there are unit price bid items in a bid schedule and the "amount" indicated for a unit price bid item does not equal the product of the unit price and quantity, the unit price shall govern and the "amount" will be corrected accordingly, and the Bidder shall be bound by said correction. In the event there is more than one bid item in a bid schedule and the total indicated for the schedule does not agree with the sum of the prices bid on the individual items, the prices bid on the individual items shall govern and the total for the schedul e will be corrected accordingly, and the Bidder shall be bound by said correction. BID SECURITY: Each Bid shall be accompanied by an approved bid bond in the amount stated in the Notice Inviting Bids. Said bond shall be given as a guarantee that the Bidder, if awarded the WORK, will execute the Agreement within 10 calendar days after receipt of the Agreement from the OWNER, and will furnish the necessary insurance certificates , Payment Bond and Performance Bond; each of said bonds to be in the amount stated in the Notice Inviting Bids. The Bidder shall use the bid bond bound herein, and the Surety shall be licensed to issue surety bonds in the State of Utah. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Instructions to Bidders Cottonwoods Connection Page 00100-2 BIDDER'S EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE : 1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid, to: a. Examine the Contract Documents thoroughly. b. Examine thoroughly the contract for pipe that will be assigned to the CONTRACTOR. c. Visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance, or furnishing of the WORK. d. Consider federal, state and local laws and regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the WORK. e. Study and carefully correlate the Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents. f. Notify the ENGINEER of all conflicts, errors, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 2. Reference is made to the General Conditions for identification of: a. Those reports of exploration and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the ENGINEER in preparation of the Contract Documents. b. Those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Utilities as defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions) which are at or contiguous to the site and which were utilized in the preparation of the Contract Documents. Copies of such reports and drawings are available for inspection at the office of the ENGINEER. 3. Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to underground facilities at/or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished by the owners of such underground facilities or others. The OWNER has no responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof including any damages whatsoever that may be incurred by the Bidder through his reliance thereon, unless it is expressly provided otherwise in the General Conditions. 4. Before submitting a Bid, the Bidder shall conduct such examination, investigations, studies, and tests as are necessary to satisfy themselves as to: the nature and location of the physical conditions, (surface, subsurface and underground facilities), the general and local conditions particularly those bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials, availability of labor, avail ability of utilities, local weather conditions, the character of equipment and Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Instructions to Bidders Cottonwoods Connection Page 00100-3 facilities required preliminary to and during the prosecution of the WORK; any and all other conditions that may in any way affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of materials in accordance with the Contract Documents. All such examination, investigation, studies, tests and the like shall be at the Bidder's expense. Upon reasonable request in advance, the OWNER shall provide each Bidder reasonable access to the site to conduct such explorations, examination, investigation and tests as each Bidder may determine necessary for the submission of a Bid. The Bidder shall fill all holes, clean and restore the site to its former condition upon the completion of such activities. The submission of a Bid hereunder shall be considered prima facie evidence that the Bidder has made such examination as is set forth in the above paragraph and is knowledgeable as to the location and site conditions surrounding the WORK and the conditions to be encountered in performing the WORK and as to the requirements, conditions and terms of the Contract Documents. The OWNER has no responsibility for: (1) any oral representations made by any of its officers or agents during or prior to the execution of the Agreement; (2) information contained in any reports, subsurface studies, or other information which may be made available for the Bidder's information and which are not included as Contract Documents; or (3) any understanding or representations by the OWNER or by others which are not expressly stated in the Contract Documents, unless such responsibility is expressly assumed by the OWNER or its representatives in the Contract Documents. Such information shall be deemed to be for the information of the Bidder and the Bidder shall have the obligation of evaluating any such information as to its accuracy and effect. The OWNER will not be liable or responsible for any such information or any conclusions that may be drawn therefrom by the Bidder. The lands upon which the WORK is to be performed, and the terms relating to the use of those lands, including applicable easements, agreements, terms for use of city streets etc. in performing the WORK are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto that are required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Bidder. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the OWNER unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 5. The submission of a Bid shall constitute an incontrovertible representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article, and that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the WORK required by the Contract Documents in compliance with such techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents; and that such techniques, sequences or procedures Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Instructions to Bidders Cottonwoods Connection Page 00100-4 described in the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing the WORK. QUANTITIES OF WORK: 1. The quantities of WORK or material stated in the Bid Schedule are supplied only to give an indication of the general scope of the WORK; the OWNER does not expressly or by implication agree that the actual amount of WORK or material will correspond therewith. The OWNER reserves the right after award of the contract to increase or decrease the quantities of any unit price item of the WORK by an amount up to and including 25 percent of the quantity of any bid item, or to omit portions of such WORK as may be deemed necessary or expedient by the ENGINEER or OWNER, without a change in the unit price. Such right to revise and omit shall include the right to delete any bid item in its entirety, or to add additional bid items in quantities up to and including an aggregate total amount not to exceed 25 percent of the total Contract Price. 2. The Bidder nor the ultimate CONTRACTOR on the Project shall at no time after the submittal of a Bid make or have any claim for damages or anticipated profits or loss of profit or otherwise because of any difference between the quantities of WORK actually done and material furnished and those stated in said unit price items of the Bid. PREQUALIFIED CONTRACTORS: The OWNER has selected prequalified General Contractors as eligible to bid and construct the Project. A list of prequalified General Contractors is provided in the Contract Documents . Only prequalified General Contractors shall be allowed to submit bids on this Contract . DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS: More than one Bid from an individual, firm partnership, corporation, or association under the same or different names will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that any Bidder is interested in more than one Bid for the WORK contemplated will cause the rejection of all bids in which such Bidder is interested. If there is reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, all Bids will be rejected. RELEASE OF BID BONDS: Upon request of any Bidder, the OWNER will return and release any surety bid bond accompanying a bid that was not considered in making the award. All other bid guarantees will be held and maintained until the Agreement has been executed. AWARD OF CONTRACT: Award of the contract, if it be awarded, will be based primarily on the lowest overall cost to the OWNER, and will be made to a responsive and responsible Bidder whose Bid complies with all the requirements prescribed. Any such award will be made by written notice and within 60 calendar days after opening of the Bids, unless a longer waiting period is expressly allowed in the Notice Inviting Bids. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Instructions to Bidders Cottonwoods Connection Page 00100-5 Unless otherwise indicated, an award will not be made for less than all the bid items in an individual bid schedule. In the event the entire WORK is contained in more than one bid schedule, the OWNER may award schedules individually or in combination. In the case of two bid schedules which are alternate to each other, only one of such alternate schedules will be awarded. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT: The Bidder to whom the award is made shall execute a written contract with the OWNER on the Agreement form provided, shall secure all insurance and shall furnish all certificates and bonds required by the Contract Documents within 10 calendar days after receipt of the Notice of Award from the OWNER. Failure or refusal to execute the Agreement as herein provided or to conform to any of the stipulated requirements in connection therewith shall be just cause for annulment of the award an d enforcement of the bid guarantee. If the successful Bidder refuses or fails to execute the Agreement, the OWNER may award the contract to the second lowest responsible Bidder, or reject all Bids and readvertise the Project for rebidding. If the second lowest responsible Bidder refuses or fails to execute the Agreement, the OWNER may award the contract to the third lowest responsible Bidder. On the failure or refusal of such second or third lowest Bidder to execute the Agreement, each such Bidder's guarant ees shall be subject to enforcement. ISSUANCE OF NOTICE TO PROCEED: The OWNER intends to execute the Agreement and issue the Notice to Proceed specifying the Project start date within ten calendar days after its receipt of the executed Agreement, bonds and insurance certificates from the successful Bidder. If the Contract Time is expressed as a completion date, rather than a number of calendar days, then any delay by the OWNER beyond the ten days in issuing the Notice to Proceed shall extend the completion date by the number of days of the delay. SUBSTITUTE AND “OR-EQUAL” ITEMS: The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding Documents without consideration of possible substitute of “or-equal” items. Whenever it is specified or described in the Bidding Documents that a substitute or “or -equal” item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by Bidder if acceptable to ENGINEER, application for such acceptance will not be considered by ENGINEER until after the Effective Date of the Agreement. The procedure for submission of any such application by Bidder and consideration by ENGINEER is set forth in the General Conditions and the Supplementary General Conditions. PRE-BID CONFERENCE: A mandatory Pre-Bid Conference will be held at 9:00 am on January 11, 2024, at OWNER’s offices, 3430 East Danish Road, Cottonwood Heights, UT 84093. Representatives of OWNER and ENGINEER will be present to discuss the Project. Prospective Bidders are required to attend. ENGINEER will transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as ENGINEER considers necessary in response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will not be binding or legally effective. Those bidders not attending the pre-bid conference shall have their bids rejected. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Instructions to Bidders Cottonwoods Connection Page 00100-6 OWNER PURCHASED EQUIPMENT: None. OWNER PROVIDED SERVICES: The OWNER will provide the following services for the Project, see Division 40 68 00 of the Specifications. 1) OWNER will provide programming for network switches 2) Pre-selected Instrumentation and C ontrol System subcontractor shall provide system integration and HMI and SCADA programming. Contact: SKM Engineering Mark Jeppsen, PE mark.jeppsen@skmeng.com 801.677.0011 PARTNERING: The OWNER intends to participate in a partnering process with Bidder. The objectives of the process will be to achieve effective and efficient performance of the WORK and completion of the WORK within the Contract Price and Contract Time, all in accordance with the Contract Documents. Participation in the partnering process will be voluntary. To initiate the process, within 14 days after the Notice to Proceed the key personnel of OWNER, ENGINEER, Bidder, and Bidder’s major subcontractors will be invited to attend a teaming workshop to develop a partnering statement. The workshop will be conducted by a neutral facilitator at a time and location agreed to by the OWNER and Bidder. The facilitator will be selected by the OWNER, subject to approval by Bidder. Cost of the facilitator and facilities for the initial workshop will be paid by the OWNER. Thereafter, all facilitator-related and facilities costs will be shared equally by the OWNER and Bidder with no change in Contract Price. Each party will pay all costs associated with the participation of its own personnel. A primary objective of the partnering process is to maximize the potential for resolution of disputes in a timely and non-adversarial manner. The use of alternative dispute resolution (ADR) methods will be encouraged in order to promote and maintain amicable working relationships among the parties. In the event that ADR procedures are unsuccessful, the dispute resolution provisions set forth in the Contract Documents will be employed. These provisions express the intent and spirit of the partnering process, and nothing stated herein or in the partnering statement shall change in any way the rights, responsibilities, and obligations of the parties as set forth in the Contract Documents. The partnering statement will not be a part of the Contract Documents and will not modify any defense, claim, obligation, or right that otherwise exists. - END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/24 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Bid Cottonwoods Connection Page 00300-1 00300 BID TO: METROPOLITAN WATER DISTRICT OF SALT LAKE & SANDY The undersigned Bidder hereby proposes to furnish all labor, services, materials, equipment, tools, supplies, transportation, utilities, supervision and all other items and facilities necessary to perform all work required under the OWNER’s Contract Documents entitled “Documents for the Construction of the Cottonwoods Connection Project ” and all addenda issued by said OWNER prior to opening of the Bids. The undersigned Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addendum No. Addendum Date Bidder agrees that, within 10 calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award from OWNER, he will: (1) execute the Agreement in the required form; (2) secure the required insurance and bonds; and (3) furnish the required insurance certificates, all as descr ibed in the Contract Documents. Bidder agrees that if he fails to timely execute the contract, or secure the required insurance or bonds or provide the required certificates, all as described in the Contract Documents, then the bid guarantee furnished by Bidder shall be subject to enforcement. OWNER may enforce the bid guarantee by making demand upon the surety without further notice to or demand upon Bidder for all of OWNER’s damages (including attorney’s fees, costs of administration and delay damages) resulting from Bidder’s failure to timely execute the contract, secure the required insurance and bonds and provide the required certificates, all as described in the Contract Documents. If Bidder shall timely execute the Agreement, secure the required insurance and bonds, and furnish the required insurance certificates all as described in the Contract Documents the bid bond shall become void. It is further understood that this Bid may not be withdrawn for a period of 60 days after the date set for the opening thereof, unless otherwise required by law. Bidder further agrees to complete all WORK required under the contract within the time described by the Contract Documents, and to accept in full payment therefore the price(s) named in the attached Bid Schedule(s). Dated: Bidder: By: (Signature) Title: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/24 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Bid Cottonwoods Connection Page 00300-2 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Bid Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 00310-1 00310 BID SCHEDULE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 BIDDER A. Name and Address B. Telephone Number C. Email Address D. Tax Identification Number E. Bidder holds license number , issued by the Utah State Department of Commerce, Occupational and Professional Licensing Division, on the ___ day of __________________, 20___. Bidder is licensed to practice as a __________________ contractor. License renewal date is the ___ day of ________________________, 20___. 1.02 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT A. Name of Project: Cottonwoods Connection B. MWDSLS Project Number: SA021. Quote Number: . 1.03 SCHEDULES TO BE ADDED TO THE AGREEMENT A. This Bid Schedule contains the schedules of prices which will be incorporated into the Agreement by reference. 1.04 TAXES A. The Bidder agrees that all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes are included in the stated bid prices for the WORK unless provision is made herein for the Bidder to separately itemize the estimated amount of tax. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Bid Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 00310-2 1.05 SCHEDULES OF PRICES A. Bid Schedule A (CC-1): Construction of a 36-inch diameter WSP from the existing Salt Lake Aqueduct along Fort Union Boulevard and Big Cottonwood Road to the Big Cottonwood Water Treatment Plant. Consisting of two packages: a. Bid Schedule A; Package A-1 (CC-1 East): Construction of a 36-inch diameter WSP across Wasatch Boulevard and east to the Big Cottonwood Water Treatment Plant. b. Bid Schedule A; Package A-2 (CC-1 West): Construction of a 36-inch diameter WSP west of Wasatch Boulevard in Fort Union Boulevard. B. Bid Schedule B (CC-2): Construction of a 36-inch diameter WSP at the Little Cottonwood Water Treatment Plant. C. Bid Schedule C (SLAR): Construction of a 60-, 66-, and 72-inch diameter WSP between the Little Cottonwood Water Treatment Plant and Fort Union Boulevard. a. Bid Schedule C; Package C-1 (SLAR): Construction of a 60-, 66-, and 72- inch diameter WSP between the Little Cottonwood Water Treatment Plant and Fort Union Boulevard. b. Bid Schedule C; Package C-2 (SLA): Construction of a 69-inch diameter WSP to relocate a portion of the existing Salt Lake Aqueduct. c. Bid Schedule C; Package C-3 (LCC): Construction of a 36-inch diameter WSP to relocate a portion of the existing Little Cottonwood Conduit. D. Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the amount as listed below. Total bid amount(s) shall be shown in words and numbers. In case of discrepancy, the bid amount shown in words will govern. E. Bidder may provide a bid for any one (1) or all three (3) Bid Schedules. F. Mobilization costs shall be limited to 3% of the Contract price and will be paid in two monthly progress payments. Each of the two payments will be 50% of the total amount for mobilization. G. Demobilization shall be limited to 3% of the Contract price and shall be included with the application for payment following substantial completion. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Bid Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 00310-3 H. Lump Sum Base Bid for Schedule A: BID FORM, Schedule A, (CC-1) Item Description Amount in Numbers 01 PRE-SELECTED WELDED STEEL PIPE1: $ 1,383,313.00 02 Sales Tax for Welded Steel Pipe $ 03 Mobilization $ 04 Clearing, Grubbing, Tree Removal $ 05 Demolition, Asphalt Removal $ 06 Excavation $ 07 Pipe Bedding $ 08 Pipe Connections (Couplings, etc.) $ 09 Pipe Installation $ 10 Welding $ 11 Backfill $ 12 Imported Material $ 13 Exported Material $ 14 Manholes, Appurtenances $ 15 Cathodic Protection $ 16 Surface Restoration $ 17 Utility Relocations $ 18 Concrete / CLSM $ 19 Electrical $ 20 Instrumentation $ 21 Fiber $ 22 Construction Staking, QA/QC $ 23 Startup $ 24 Supervision and General Items $ 25 Traffic Control $ 26 27 28 Demobilization $ TOTAL SCHEDULE A BASE BID PRICE (SUM ITEMS 01-28): including sales tax, labor, and all necessary materials to complete all project work for a complete and operable system. $ TOTAL SCHEDULE A BASE BID PRICE in Words: Notes: 1) Includes bid items 1B, 2B, and 3B from WSP Supplier’s Bid Form 5.05 Bid Alternate 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Bid Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 00310-4 I. Lump Sum Base Bid for Schedule B: BID FORM, Schedule B (CC-2) Item Description Amount in Numbers 01 PRE-SELECTED WELDED STEEL PIPE1: $ 485,706.00 02 Sales Tax for Welded Steel Pipe $ 03 Mobilization $ 04 Clearing, Grubbing, Tree Removal $ 05 Demolition, Asphalt Removal $ 06 Excavation $ 07 Pipe Bedding $ 08 Pipe Connections (Couplings, etc.) $ 09 Pipe Installation $ 10 Welding $ 11 Backfill $ 12 Imported Material $ 13 Exported Material $ 14 Manholes, Appurtenances $ 15 Cathodic Protection $ 16 Surface Restoration $ 17 Utility Relocations $ 18 Concrete / CLSM $ 19 Electrical $ 20 Instrumentation $ 21 Fiber $ 22 Construction Staking, QA/QC $ 23 Startup $ 24 Supervision and General Items $ 25 Traffic Control $ 26 27 28 Demobilization $ TOTAL SCHEDULE B BASE BID PRICE (SUM ITEMS 01-28): including sales tax, labor, and all necessary materials to complete all project work for a complete and operable system. $ TOTAL SCHEDULE B BASE BID PRICE in Words: Notes: 1) Includes bid item 4B from WSP Supplier’s Bid Form 5.05 Bid Alternate 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Bid Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 00310-5 J. Lump Sum Base Bid for Schedule C: BID FORM, Schedule C, (SLAR, SLA, LCC) Item Description Amount in Numbers 01 PRE-SELECTED WELDED STEEL PIPE1: $ 8,458,676.00 02 Sales Tax for Welded Steel Pipe $ 03 Mobilization $ 04 Clearing, Grubbing, Tree Removal $ 05 Demolition, Asphalt Removal $ 06 Excavation $ 07 Pipe Bedding $ 08 Pipe Connections (Couplings, etc.) $ 09 Pipe Installation $ 10 Welding $ 11 Backfill $ 12 Imported Material $ 13 Exported Material $ 14 Manholes, Appurtenances $ 15 Cathodic Protection $ 16 Surface Restoration $ 17 Utility Relocations $ 18 Concrete / CLSM $ 19 Electrical $ 20 Instrumentation $ 21 Fiber $ 22 Construction Staking, QA/QC $ 23 Startup $ 24 Supervision and General Items $ 25 Traffic Control $ 26 Integration (SKM) $ 189,007.00 27 28 29 Demobilization $ TOTAL SCHEDULE C BASE BID PRICE (SUM ITEMS 01- 29): including sales tax, labor, and all necessary materials to complete all project work for a complete and operable system. $ TOTAL SCHEDULE C BASE BID PRICE in Words: Notes: 1) Includes bid items 5B-9B from WSP Supplier’s Bid Form 5.05 Bid Alternate 1 and bid item 0 from WSP Supplier’s Bid Form 5.04 Base Bid Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Bid Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 00310-6 K. Unit Price Bid Items: Provide unit prices for potential additional or deducted work. Bidder acknowledges that each Unit Price Bid Item includes an amount considered by Bidder to be adequate to cover all costs, including overhead and profit, for each separately identified item. UNIT PRICE BID ITEM SCHEDULE ITEM DESCRPTION UNIT UNIT PRICE TOTAL AMOUNT 1 Standby Daily Rate Day $ $ 2 Rock Excavation Cubic Yard $ $ 3 Additional Asphalt Pavement (4” of asphalt over 8” state-spec road base) Square Foot $ $ 4 Dewatering Day $ $ 5 CLSM Backfill Cubic Yard $ $ 6 $ $ 7 $ $ 8 $ $ 9 $ $ 10 $ $ Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Bid Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 00310-7 L. Alternative Bid Item No. 1: ALTERNATE BID ITEM NO. 1 CC-2, HDPE instead of Welded Steel DESCRIPTION: Under Alternate Bid Item No. 1, construct CC-2 with HDPE pipe instead of Welded Steel Pipe. TOTAL ALTERNATE BID ITEM NO. 1 PRICE (in numbers): CIRCLE ONE: ADDITIVE OR DEDUCTIVE $ TOTAL ALTERNATE BID ITEM NO. 1 PRICE (in words): M. Alternative Bid Item No. 2: ALTERNATE BID ITEM NO. 2 Selection for multiple bid schedules DESCRIPTION: Under Alternate Bid Item No. 2, adjust the total amount of all submitted bid schedules for the Bidder to construct all submitted bid schedules under one contract . TOTAL ALTERNATE BID ITEM NO. 2 PRICE (in numbers): CIRCLE ONE: ADDITIVE OR DEDUCTIVE $ TOTAL ALTERNATE BID ITEM NO. 2 PRICE (in words): Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Bid Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 00310-8 1.06 BASIS OF AWARD Basis of award shall be any combination of the TOTAL SINGLE PRIME BASE BID PRICE and ALTERNATE BID ITEM AMOUNTS, at the sole discretion of OWNER. Item Description Item Bid Price 1 Schedule A, CC-1 $ 2 Schedule B, CC-2 $ 3 Schedule C, SLAR / SLA / LCC $ 4 Alternate Bid Item No. 2 $ TOTAL SINGLE PRIME BASE BID AMOUNT (SUM OF ITEMS 1-4) $ TOTAL SINGLE PRIME BASE BID AMOUNT IN WORDS: - END OF BID SCHEDULE – Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/01/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Bid Bond Cottonwoods Connection Page 00320-1 00320 BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that as Principal, and as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy (hereinafter called "OWNER") in the sum of _________________________________ dollars, (not less than five percent of the total amount of the bid) for the payment of which sum, will and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, Principal has submitted a Bid to OWNER to perform all WORK required under the OWNER's Contract Documents entitled “Documents for the Construction of the Cottonwoods Connection Project" (hereafter called the “Project”). NOW THEREFORE, if Principal is awarded a contract by OWNER for the construction of the Project and, within the time and in the manner required under the heading "Instructions to Bidders" enters into the written contract entitled "Agreement" bound with said Contract Documents, furnishes the required certificates of insurance, and furnishes the required Performance Bond and Payment Bond within 10 calendar days after receipt of such contract from OWNER, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. In the event suit is brought upon this bond by OWNER and judgement is recovered, Surety shall pay all costs incurred by OWNER in such suit, including a reasonable attorney's fee to be fixed by the court. SIGNED AND SEALED, this ___ day of __________________, 20___. (SEAL) (SEAL) (Principal) (Surety) By: (Signature) By: (Signature) (SEAL AND NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF SURETY) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Information Required of Bidder Cottonwoods Connection Page 00330-1 00330 INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDER The Bidder shall furnish the following information. Failure to comply with this requirement may render the Bid non-responsive and subject to rejection. Additional sheets may be attached as required. A. BIDDER INFORMATION 1. Bidder’s name: 2. Bidder’s address: 3. Bidder’s telephone number: 4. Bidder’s email address: 5. Contractor’s License Primary Classification: Utah State License No.: Supplemental Classification Held, if any: 6. Number of years as a contractor in construction work of this type: 7. Name and title of officers of Bidder’s firm: 8. Name of person who inspected site of proposed work for your firm: Name: Date of Inspection: 9. Name and telephone number of surety company and agent who will provide the required bonds on this contract: 10. ATTACH TO THIS BID the experience resume of the person who is designated Project Manager. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Information Required of Bidder Cottonwoods Connection Page 00330-2 11. ATTACH TO THIS BID the experience resume of the person who is designated Project Superintendent. 12. ATTACH TO THIS BID a description of the Bidder’s plan or layout for performing the WORK and plan for construction. B. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS 1. The CONTRACTOR shall perform more than 60% of the WORK with his own forces, such that less than 40% of the WORK shall be performed by Subcontractors . Failure to comply with this requirement may render the Bid non -responsive and subject to rejection. 2. Bidder shall list the name and location of the place of business for each subcontractor who will perform work below. Work to be Performed Subcontractor Name and Address Value of Subcontracted Work Dollars Percent of Bid Welding $ Concrete $ Reinforcement Steel Supplier $ Paving $ Clearing, Grubbing, Tree Removal $ Traffic Control $ Survey and Staking $ Mechanical $ Electrical $ Instrumentation and Controls $ - END OF INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDER - Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Agreement Cottonwoods Connection Page 00500-1 00500 AGREEMENT An Agreement made as of the ___ day of __________________, 20___, by and between Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy (OWNER) and ___________________________ a Utah corporation qualified to do business and doing business in the State of Utah (CONTRACTOR). TERMS OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: ARTICLE 1 WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all WORK as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Cottonwoods Connection. The WORK is generally described as follows: Furnishing all labor, supervision, services, materials, equipment, and supplies (except for such materials, equipment, and services as may be stipulated in the Contract Documents to be furnished by the OWNER); furnishing and removing all plant machinery, temporary structures, tools, supplies, transportation, utilities, and all other items, facilities and equipment, and to do everything required by this Agreement and the Contract Documents; accepting all responsibility for and paying for all loss and damage arising out of the nature of the WORK, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen difficulties which may arise during the prosecution of the WORK until its acceptance by OWNER, and for all risks of every description connected with the WORK; also for all expenses resulting from the suspension or discontinuance of work, except as in the Contract Documents are expressly stipulated to be borne by OWNER. ARTICLE 2 ENGINEER The Project has been designed by Hazen and Sawyer who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who will assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACT TIME 3.1 The WORK shall be substantially complete, in accordance with paragraph 14.08 and 14.09 of the General Conditions, on or before June 30, 2026. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Agreement Cottonwoods Connection Page 00500-2 3.2 Liquidated Damages: OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that the OWNER will suffer financial loss if the WORK is not completed within the time specified in paragraph 3.1 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. This includes, but is not limited to, additional construction management fees; additional costs for staff overtime; loss of available water supply; loss of water revenue; water service contract penalties; staff overtime; additional engineering fees; and delay of other construction activities. They also recognize the delays, expense and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the WORK is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any proof of loss, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the amount specified in the Supplementary General Conditions for each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 3.1 until the WORK is substantially complete. If, after Substantial Completion, CONTRACTOR neglects, refuses or fails to complete the remaining WORK within 45 days or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the amount specified in the Supplementary General Conditions for each day that expires after the 45 days until the WORK is complete and ready for final payment. ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT PRICE OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents, at those prices stated in the CONTRACTOR’s Bid. The total contract price is $______________________________________________________. ARTICLE 5 PAYMENT PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1 Progress Payments: OWNER shall make progress payments on the basis of CONTRACTOR’s Applications for Payment, as recommended by ENGINEER, on or about the fifteenth day of each month during construction. Progress payments for lump sum bids will be based on a schedule of values or lump sum price breakdown. Progress payments for unit price bids will be based on the actual number of units completed. 5.2 Final Payment: Upon final completion and acceptance of the WORK, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER, as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Agreement Cottonwoods Connection Page 00500-3 5.3 Retainage: The OWNER may retain a portion of the balance due to the CONTRACTOR in an interest bearing account as described in Article 14 of the General Conditions. Upon final completion of the Project, to the satisfaction of the OWNER, the retainage, with interest, shall be paid to the CONTRACTOR. ARTICLE 6 INTEREST All monies not paid when due as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions shall be placed in an interest -bearing account for the benefit of the CONTRACTOR. ARTICLE 7 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION In order to induce OWNER to enter into the Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 7.1 CONTRACTOR has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, WORK, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the WORK. 7.2 CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all exploration reports and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are identified in the Supplementary General Conditions, as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions, and accepts the Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings upon which CONTRACTOR is entitled to rely. 7.3 CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraph 7.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the WORK as CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the WORK at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 7.4 CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Utilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Utilities. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Agreement Cottonwoods Connection Page 00500-4 7.5 CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all observations, examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.6 CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR. ARTICLE 8 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents for the Cottonwoods Connection, which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the WORK, consist of the following: 1. This Agreement 2. Performance and Payment Bonds 3. Notice of Award 4. Notice to Proceed 5. General Conditions 6. Preselection Contract Assignment and attached Cottonwoods Connection Project Welded Steel Pipe Preselection agreement 7. Notice Inviting Bids 8. Instructions to Bidders 9. Information Required of Bidder 10. Technical Specifications 11. Drawings 12. Addenda 13. CONTRACTOR's Bid 14. Change Orders (if any) 15. Purchase Orders (if any). The CONTRACTOR (1) acknowledges that he has received a copy of each document, specified above, (2) acknowledges that he has read and understands each document specified above and (3) agrees to every term, condition and contract obligation set forth in each document specified above. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.03 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 9 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 9.1 OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree to negotiate all disputes between them in good faith for a period of 30 days from the date of notice prior to exercising their rights in Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Agreement Cottonwoods Connection Page 00500-5 the following provisions. As used in this provision “good faith” means only that both parties will meet at reasonable times, with a view toward reaching a consensus, and does not impose an obligation to act on either party in such a way that may then be contrary to that party’s own best interests as seen by that party. 9.2 Any controversy or claim arising out of or relating to this Agreement, or the breach thereof, that is not resolved by negotiation will be mediated before an impartial, experienced, and qualified mediator selected by the parties. The parties will mutually agree on a qualified, experienced mediator. If the parties cannot agree on a mediator, one may be appointed by a court of competent jurisdiction. Each party will bear its own costs and expenses and an equal share of the costs of mediation. 9.3 If the controversy or claim is not resolved by mediation it will be resolved by binding arbitration in accordance with American Arbitration Association’s (AAA) then most current version of its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules. The arbitration will not be administered by the AAA without the consent of both parties unless such AAA administration is necessary to arbitrate this matter as described here. Judgment on the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered in any court having personal and subject matter jurisdiction of the matter. Claims will be heard by a single arbitrator. If the parties are unable to agree on an arbitrator within ten (10) business days of a request to arbitrate, the arbitrator will be selected using the AAA’s list process as provided in its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules. The place of arbitration will be Salt Lake City, Utah. The arbitration will be governed by the laws of the State of Utah. Each party will, upon written request of the other party, promptly provide the other with copies of all relevant documents. Any additional discovery or disclosures may be ordered in the discretion of the arbitrator. Hearings will take place pursuant to the standard procedures of the Construction Arbitration Rules that contemplate in person hearings. Time is of the essence for any arbitration under this Agreement and arbitration proceedings will take place within ninety (90) days of appointment of an arbitrator and awards rendered within sixty (60) days thereafter. The arbitrator must agree to these limits prior to accepting appointment. The arbitrator will have no authority to award punitive damages or consequential damages, or other damages not measured by the prevailing party’s actual damages, except as may be expressly required by this Agreement or statute. Each party will bear its own costs and expenses and an equal share of the arbitrators' and administrative fees of arbitration. The award of the arbitrator will be accompanied by a reasoned opinion. Except as may be required by law, neither a party nor an arbitrator may disclose the existence, content, or results of any arbitration hereunder without the prior written consent of both parties. Notwithstanding any language to the contrary in the contract documents, the parties hereby agree: that the Underlying Award may be appealed pursuant to the AAA’s Optional Appellate Arbitration Rules (Appellate Rules); that the Underlying Award rendered by the arbitrator(s) will, at a minimum, be a reasoned award; and that the Underlying Award will not be considered final until after the time for filing the notice of appeal pursuant to the Appellate Rules has expired. Appeals must be initiated within thirty (30) days of receipt of an Underlying Award, as defined by Rule A-3 of the Appellate Rules, by Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Agreement Cottonwoods Connection Page 00500-6 filing a Notice of Appeal with any AAA office. Following the appeal process the decision rendered by the appeal tribunal may be entered in any court having personal and subject matter jurisdiction of the matter. ARTICLE 10 MISCELLANEOUS 10.1 Terms used in this Agreement are defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions. 10.2 No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation, monies that may become due and monies that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 10.3 Any notice to be given hereunder shall be deemed given when sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid to the parties at their respective addresses stated below or at any other address when notice of such change of address has been given as provided in this Article. 10.4 The OWNER may, at reasonable times, inspect the part of the plant or place of business of a contractor or any subcontractor which is related to the performance of any contract awarded or to be awarded by the OWNER. CONTRACTOR: OWNER: METROPOLITAN WATER DISTRICT OF SALT LAKE & SANDY UTAH LICENSE # 3430 EAST DANISH ROAD COTTONWOOD HEIGHTS, UT 84093 By: By: Its: Its: General Manager Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No. SA021 Preselection Contract Assignment Cottonwoods Connection Page 00510-1 00510 PRESELECTION CONTRACT ASSIGNMENT FOR VALUE RECEIVED, Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy, Assignor, hereby assigns, transfers, and sets over to [Contractor], of [Address], Assignee, all of Assignor’s right, title and interest in and to the following contract (a copy of which is attached hereto and incorporated by reference as though fully set forth herein), to wit: Cottonwoods Connection Project Welded Steel Pipe Preselection THIS ASSIGNMENT IS MADE pursuant to and in accordance with terms of the Contract Documents and Specifications entered into by and between Assignor and Assignee for the Cottonwoods Connection Project, District Project No. SA021, dated the ___ day of ____________, 20 ___. ASSIGNOR HEREBY DELEGATES to Assignee and Assignee, upon execution hereof, hereby expressly assumes all of the obligations and duties to be performed by Assignor under the aforesaid contract in accordance with the terms thereof and as provided in said Contract Documents and Specifications. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Assignor has executed this Assignment this ___ day of __________________, 20 ___. ASSIGNOR: Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy By: Title: General Manger Attest: Title: [Contractor], Assignee, on this ___ day of __________________, 20___, hereby accepts the assignment of the above-described Purchase Orders, subject to the terms and conditions thereof and in accordance with the terms of this Assignment. ASSIGNEE: By: Title: Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No. SA021 Preselection Contract Assignment Cottonwoods Connection Page 00510-2 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Performance Bond Cottonwoods Connection Page 00610-1 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That __________________, as CONTRACTOR, and __________________ as Surety, are held firmly bound unto the Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy hereinafter called "OWNER" and Salt Lake City Corporation in the sum of $__________________ for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, CONTRACTOR has been awarded and is about to enter into the annexed Agreement with OWNER to perform all work required under the OWNER’s Contract Documents entitled “Contract Documents for the Construction of Cottonwoods Connection Project.” NOW THEREFORE, if CONTRACTOR shall perform all the requirements of the Agreement required to be performed on his part, at the times and in the manner specified therein, then this obligation shall be null and void. Otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, that any alterations in the work to be done or the materials to be furnished, or changes in the time of completion, which may be made pursuant to the terms of the Agreement, shall not in any way release CONTRACTOR or Surety thereunder, nor shall any extensions of the time granted under the provisions of the Agreement release either the CONTRACTOR or Surety, and notice of such alterations or extensions of the work, materials or time to complete made under the Agreement is hereby waived by Surety. This Bond is furnished in compliance and in accordance with 14-1-18, et. seq., Utah Code Ann., as amended, and 63G-6a-1103 Utah Code Ann., as amended. SIGNED AND SEALED, this ___ day of __________________, 20___. (SEAL) (SEAL) (Contractor) (Surety) By: By: (Signature) (Signature) (SEAL AND NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF SURETY) Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Performance Bond Cottonwoods Connection Page 00610-2 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Payment Bond Cottonwoods Connection Page 00620-1 00620 PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That __________________ as CONTRACTOR, and __________________, as Surety, are held firmly bound unto the Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy hereinafter called "OWNER" and Salt Lake City Corporation in the sum of $__________________ for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, CONTRACTOR has been awarded and is about to enter into the annexed Agreement with OWNER to perform all work required under the OWNER’s Contract Documents entitled “Contract Documents for the Construction of Cottonwoods Connection Project.” NOW THEREFORE, if said CONTRACTOR, or subcontractor, fails to pay for any materials, equipment, or other supplies, or for rental of same, used in connection with the performance of work contracted to be done, or for amounts due under applicable State law for any work or labor thereon, said Surety will pay for the same in an amount not exceeding the sum specified above, and, in the event suit is brought upon this bond, a reasonable attorney's fee to be fixed by the court. This bond shall inure to the benefit of any persons, companies, or corporations entitled to file claims under applicable State law. PROVIDED, that any alterations in the work to be done or the materials to be furnished, or changes in the time of completion, which may be made pursuant to the terms of the Agreement, shall not in any way release CONTRACTOR or Surety thereunder, nor shall any extensions of time granted under the provisions of said contract release either CONTRACTOR or the Surety, and notice of such alterations or extensions of the work, materials or time to complete made under the Agreement is hereby waived by Surety. This bond is furnished in compliance and in accordance with 14-1-18, et. seq., Utah Code Ann., as amended, and 63G-6a-1103 Utah Code Ann., as amended. SIGNED AND SEALED, this ___ day of __________________, 20___. (SEAL) (SEAL) (Contractor) (Surety) By: By: (Signature) (Signature) (SEAL AND NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF SURETY) Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Payment Bond Cottonwoods Connection Page 00620-2 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Notice of Award Cottonwoods Connection Page 00630-1 00630 CONDITIONAL NOTICE OF AWARD To: Project: Cottonwoods Connection Owner: Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy You are hereby notified that the OWNER has conditionally accepted your Bid for the above- referenced Project in the amount of $____________________________, pending authorization from the District’s Board of Trustees on _________________, _____, 20___. You must execute the Agreement , and furnish the required Performance Bond, Payment Bond, and Certificates of Insurance within ten (10) calendar days from the date of this notice to you. An acknowledged copy of this Notice of Award must be returned to the OWNER within ten calendar days of this notice to you. Dated this ___ day of __________________, 20___. Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy By: Annalee Munsey Title: General Manager ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE Receipt and acceptance of this Notice of Award is hereby acknowledged by: This ___ day of __________________, 20___. By: Title: Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Notice of Award Cottonwoods Connection Page 00630-2 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Notice to Proceed Cottonwoods Connection Page 00631-1 00631 NOTICE TO PROCEED To: [CONTRACTOR] Project: Cottonwoods Connection OWNER: Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy You are hereby notified to commence WORK on the above-referenced Project as of __________________ ___, 20___. You are to complete the WORK [on or before __________________ ___, 20___.; within ___ days of this notice]. An acknowledged copy of this Notice to Proceed must be returned to the OWNER within [# business/calendar] days of this notice. Dated this ___ day of __________________, 20___. Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy By: Annalee Munsey Title: General Manager ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE Receipt and acceptance of this Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged by: This ___ day of __________________, 20___. By: Title: Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Notice to Proceed Cottonwoods Connection Page 00631-2 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Application for Payment Cottonwoods Connection Page 00632-1 00632 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT DATE SHEET ___ OF ___ Payment Application Number ______ Period from ____________ to ____________, 20___. PROJECT: Cottonwoods Connection MWDSLS Project No.: SA021 CONTRACTOR: Address: ENGINEER: Hazen and Sawyer 1 ORIGINAL CONTRACT PRICE:.............................................. $ 2 NET CHANGE ORDERS APPROVED TO DATE: ................... $ (Attach Summary Sheet) 3 REVISED CONTRACT AMOUNT: .......................................... $ (Sum of Lines 1 & 2) 4 TOTAL VALUE OF WORK COMPLETED TO DATE: ............... $ (Attached Payment Breakdown) 5 PERCENT PROJECT COMPLETE: ........................................ % (Divide Line 4 by 3 and multiply by 100) 6 MATERIALS ON HAND: ......................................................... $ (80% of Value, Listing Attached) 7 SUBTOTAL (Sum of Lines 4 and 6):........................................ $ 8 LESS AMOUNT RETAINED (5%): .......................................... $ 9 SUBTOTAL (Line 7 - Line 8): .................................................. $ 10 LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS: .............................................. $ 11 CURRENT PAYMENT DUE: ................................................... $ (Difference between Line 9 & 10) Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Application for Payment Cottonwoods Connection Page 00632-2 Application for Payment (continued) CONTRACTOR’S Certification: The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that (1) all previous progress payments received from OWNER for work done under the Contract referred to herein have been applied to discharge in full all obligations of CONTRACTOR incurred in connection with work covered by prior Applications for Payment numbered ___ inclusive; and (2) title to all materials and equipment incorporated in said WORK or otherwise listed in or covered by this Application for Payment will pass to OWNER at time of payment free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests and encumbrances (except such as covered by bond acceptable to OWNER). Dated: CONTRACTOR By: ENGINEER’s Recommendation: This Application (with accompanying documentation) meets the requirements of the Contract Documents and payment of the CURRENT PAYMENT DUE is recommended. ENGINEER Dated: Project Representative Dated: Project Manager OWNER Dated: Project Manager Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Change Order Cottonwoods Connection Page 00633-1 00633 CHANGE ORDER Order No. Date: Name of Project: Cottonwoods Connection MWDSLS Project No: SA021 CONTRACTOR: Contract Date: The following changes are hereby made to the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Total Change to CONTRACT PRICE: Increase (Decrease) $ Original CONTRACT PRICE: $ Current CONTRACT PRICE adjusted by previous CHANGE ORDER(S): $ The new CONTRACT PRICE including this CHANGE ORDER is $ The CONTRACT TIME is increased (decreased) by ___ calendar days. The date for substantial completion of the WORK is ___ __________________, 20___. The CONTRACTOR agrees to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work as necessary to complete the change order items for the price named herein, which includes all supervision and miscellaneous costs. This change order constitutes full and mutual accord and satisfaction for all time and all costs related to this change. By acceptance of this change order the CONTRACTOR agrees that the change order represents an equitable adjustment to the Contract, and further agrees to waive all right to file a claim arising out of or as a result of this change. This document becomes part of the Contract Documents, and all provisions will apply hereto, upon approval by the OWNER. Recommended: ENGINEER Date Recommended: Project Representative Date Recommended: Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy Date Project Manager Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Change Order Cottonwoods Connection Page 00633-2 By signing below, MWDSLS’s general manager certifies that the expenditure of this change order amount is properly authorized by MWDSLS ’s board of trustees consistent with MWDSLS’s budget and financial management policies and the instructions of the board of trustees. Final Approval: Approved: CONTRACTOR Date Approved: Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy Date General Manager Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Notice of Substantial Completion Cottonwoods Connection Page 00634-1 00634 NOTICE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROJECT: Cottonwoods Connection OWNER: Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER: Hazen and Sawyer DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: Authorized representatives of the OWNER, CONTRACTOR AND ENGINEER have inspected the Project and the Project is hereby declared to be substantially complete, as defined in the Contract Documents. ENGINEER The CONTRACTOR hereby acknowledges this Notice of Substantial Completion and agrees to complete all remaining items of work within 45 days. CONTRACTOR The OWNER hereby accepts the Project as substantially complete and will take possession of the Project at ___ [am/pm] on ___ __________________, 20___. OWNER Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Notice of Substantial Completion Cottonwoods Connection Page 00634-2 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Certificate of Final Completion Cottonwoods Connection Page 00635-1 00635 CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATE OF FINAL COMPLETION TO: Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy 3430 East Danish Road Cottonwood Heights, Utah 84093 FROM: PROJECT: Cottonwoods Connection This is to certify that I, ______________________________, am an authorized official of ________________________________________________ working in the capacity of ___________________________ and have been properly authorized by said firm or corporation to sign the following statements pertaining to the subject contract: I know of my own personal knowledge, and do hereby certify, that the WORK of the contract described above has been performed and all materials used and installed to date are in accordance with, and in conformity to, the Contract Documents. The WORK is now complete in all parts and requirements, excepting the attached list of minor deficiencies and the reasons for each being incomplete to date, for which exemption from final payment requirements is requested in conformance to Article 14.09A of the General Conditions (if no exemptions requested, write "none") _________. The WORK is now ready for your final inspection. The following items required from the CONTRACTOR prior to application for final payment (such as O&M Manuals, guarantees, record drawings, lien waivers, consent of surety, affidavit of payment, etc.,) are submitted herewith, if any: __________________ ________________________________________________________________ _______________. I understand that neither the issuance by the ENGINEER of a Notice of Completion, nor the acceptance thereof by the OWNER, shall operate as a bar of claim against the CONTRACTOR under the terms of the guarantee provisions of the Contract Documents. SIGNATURE: DATE: Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Certificate of Final Completion Cottonwoods Connection Page 00635-2 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Consent of Surety for Final Payment Cottonwoods Connection Page 00636-1 00636 CONSENT OF SURETY FOR FINAL PAYMENT Project Name: Cottonwoods Connection Location: Cottonwood Heights, UT Type of Contract: Amount of Contract: In accordance with the provisions of the above-named contract between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, the following named Surety: on the Payment Bond of the following named CONTRACTOR: hereby approves of final payment to the CONTRACTOR, and further agrees that said final payment to the CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the Surety of any of its obligations to the following named OWNER (as set forth in said Surety’s bond): Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy 3430 East Danish Road Cottonwood Heights, UT 84093 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand and seal this ___ day of __________________, 20 ___. (Name of Surety) (Signature of Authorized Representative) (Name of Authorized Representative) Title: Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 Consent of Surety for Final Payment Cottonwoods Connection Page 00636-2 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA-021 Affidavit of Payment Cottonwoods Connection Page 00637-1 00637 AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT To All Whom It May Concern: WHEREAS, the undersigned has been employed by the Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy to furnish labor and materials under a contract dated _____________________ 20___ for the project named “Cottonwoods Connection," in the County of Salt Lake, State of Utah, of which Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy is the OWNER. NOW, THEREFORE, this ___ day of __________________, 20___, the undersigned, as the CONTRACTOR for the above-named Contract pursuant to the Conditions of the Contract hereby certifies that, except as listed below, he has paid in full or has otherwise satisfied all obligations for all materials and equipment furnished, for all work, labor, and services performed, and for all known indebtedness and claims against the CONTRACTOR for damages arising in any manner in connection with the performance of the Contract referenced above for which the OWNER or his property might in any way be held responsible. EXCEPTIONS:_____________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ (If none, write "None." If required by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish bond satisfactory to the OWNER for each exception.) CONTRACTOR (Affix corporate seal here) (Signature of Authorized Representative) Title: Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA-021 Affidavit of Payment Cottonwoods Connection Page 00637-2 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No. SA-021 Chlorine Risk Management Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 00638-1 00638 CHLORINE RISK MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS The WORK associated with Schedule B (CC-2) and parts of Schedule C (SLAR and SLA) is performed at the Little Cottonwood Water Treatment Plant (LCWTP) site where gaseous chlorine is actively used in the water treatment process. The CONTRACTOR shall be able to accomplish the WORK without compromising the safety and health of those at or near the facility. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that its employees and Subcontractors are trained to: 1. Perform work safely. 2. Be aware of provisions of the OWNER's EPA Risk Management Program (RMP) / OSHA Process Safety Management (PSM) plan applicable to OWNER’s chlorination facilities used for the chlorination system. All work done in and adjacent to chlorination systems area or portion of OWNER’s facility used for the chlorination system must comply with the Owner’s safe work practices described in the OWNERS RMP Manual and JSAs. 3. Be aware of potential hazards related to work in or near the OWNER’s chlorination system or portion of OWNER’s facility used for the chlorination system. The Contractor is responsible for informing all of its employees, Subcontractors and agents who work in or adjacent to the chlorination facilities used for the chlorination system of the requirements of the OWNER’s Chlorine Risk Management Program Plan and any information communicated to the CONTRACTOR by the OWNER regarding chlorine hazards, emergency res ponse plans and other process safety information. All work performed in or adjacent to the chlorination facilities used for the chlorination system must be done in accordance with all requirements of 29 CFR 1910.119. Applicability The Little Cottonwood Water Treatment Plant operates a gaseous chlorine system. The CONTRACTOR, its employees, Subcontractors, and agents should be aware of emergency procedures in the event of a chlorine leak during work hours. CONTRACTOR BRIEFING OWNER will provide a briefing for CONTRACTOR prior to CONTRACTOR commencing the work. The purpose of this briefing is to make the CONTRACTOR aware of the OWNER's RMP requirements. Upon arriving at the plant for the first time to perform work, the CONTRACTOR’s Project Manager, Superintendent, and foreman will be presented the attached Form 000638-1. The CONTRACTOR must read and sign the form. The training will familiarize CONTRACTOR with the following: • The known hazards caused by an accidental release of chlorine. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No. SA-021 Chlorine Risk Management Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 00638-2 • Safe work practices including procedures for handling chemicals, lockout / tagout, hot work permit ting, and equipment and piping disassembly. • Applicable provisions of the emergency response plan. During the briefing, the following CONTRACTOR access control procedures will be reviewed: • CONTRACTOR’s employees, Subcontractors, employees of Subcontractors, Suppliers, employees of Suppliers and others are restricted from entering all regulated process areas (chlorination system and portion of chemical building used for chlorination system) unless access is required to perform their work. • CONTRACTOR’s employees, Subcontractors, employees of Subcontractors, Suppliers, employees of Suppliers and others entering a regulated process area (chlorination system and portion of chemical building used for chlorination system) must inform the on-duty Senior Operator, in person or by telephone before entering. In addition to the CONTRACTOR briefing discussed above, CONTRACTOR and its Subcontractors w orking in and around the OWNER’s chlorine facility should receive a walk-through of the process that points out the chemical and equipment locations and the emergency response alarms and evacuation routes. The CONTRACTOR has a responsibility to see that he has this information. After receiving this information, the CONTRACTOR shall inform his employees and Subcontractors about this information. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No. SA-021 Chlorine Risk Management Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 00638-3 FORM 00638-1 CONTRACTOR PROCESS SAFETY MANAGEMENT BRIEFING FORM In accordance with EPA 40 CFR Part 68 Chemical Accident Prevention Requirements: Risk Management Programs Under the Clean Air Act Section 112(r)(7) and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.119 Process Safety Management (PSM) of Highly Hazardous Materials, I have received a safety briefing from OWNER personnel covering chlorine hazards, safe work practices including lockout/tagout, hot work, and emergency response proc edures. In no way should this briefing be construed as replacing the required CONTRACTOR employee safety traini ng. I further understand that the OWNER expects CONTRACTOR, including their Subcontractors, Suppliers, agents, and employees of such, to perform construction activities under OSHA required regulations and the OWNER procedures and that they have received all of the required associated training. It is understood that all information presented to me by the OWNER staff shall be disseminated to all persons, Subcontractors, Suppliers and agents employed either directly or indirectly by us. I agree to submit docum entation as requested by the OWNER to verify that our employees, Subcontractors, Suppliers and any other parties working directly or indirectly for us are conveyed the information required and have received any required training. I agree to submit a written statement indicating whether our work presents any unique hazards and a description of those hazards. The OWNER is not responsible for training CONTRACTOR, nor does the OWNER assume or undertake any duty to CONTRACTOR or its employees, Subcontractors , or Suppliers by complying with OWNER’s chlorine risk management program. Date Signature Print Name Company Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No. SA-021 Chlorine Risk Management Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 00638-1 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-1 GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS Wherever used in these General Conditions or in the other Contract Documents and printed with initial or all capital letters, the following terms have the meanings indicated: Addenda – Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which make additions, deletions, or revisions to the Contract Documents. Agreement – The written contract between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR for the performance of the WORK pursuant to the Contract Documents. Documents incorporated into the contract by reference become part of the contract and of the Agreement. Application for Payment – The form furnished by the ENGINEER and completed by the CONTRACTOR to request progress or final payment including supporting documentation to substantiate the amounts for which payment is requested. Bid – The offer or proposal of a Bidder, submitted on the prescribed form, setting forth the price or prices for the WORK to be performed. Bidder – Any person, firm, or corporation submitting a Bid for the WORK. Bonds – Performance and Payment Bonds and other instruments which protect the OWNER against loss due to inability or refusal of the CONTRACTOR to perform pursuant to the Contract Documents. Change Order – A document recommended by the ENGINEER, which is signed by the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the WORK, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. Construction Manager – As designated by the OWNER to assist OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. CONSTRUCTION MANAGER will conduct daily observations of the WORK, assist OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE with scope development for Change Orders and advise as to progress of the WORK with respect to schedule, budget, and quality. Contract Documents – The documents which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the WORK, consisting of the Drawings, Technical Specifications, General Conditions, Notice Inviting Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Addenda, CONTRACTOR’s Bid, Information Required of Bidder, Agreement, Preselection Contract Assignment and attached Cottonwoods Connection Project Welded Steel Pipe Preselection agreement, Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Notice of Award, Notice To Proceed, Change Orders, and Purchase Orders. Only printed or hard copies of the documents listed above are Contract Documents. RA 00 L CO 700 Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-2 Contract Price – The total monies payable by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR for completion of the WORK under the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contract Time – The number of successive Days or the date stated in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the WORK. The Contract Time begins to run on the date specified in the Notice to Proceed. CONTRACTOR – The person, firm, or corporation with whom the OWNER has executed the Agreement. Day – A calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective Work – Work that: is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient; does not conform to the Contract Documents; does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; has been damaged prior to the ENGINEER’s recommendation of final payment. Drawings – The drawings, plans, maps, profiles, diagrams, and other graphic representations which show the character, location, nature, extent, and scope of the WORK. Effective Date of the Agreement – The date indicated in the Agreement on which it was executed. ENGINEER – Hazen & Sawyer. Field Order – A written order issued by the ENGINEER which requires minor changes in the WORK, but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or Contract Time. General Requirements – Division 01 of the Technical Specifications. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations – Includes any and all applicable state, federal and local statutes, common law, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and/or orders. Notice of Award – The OWNER’s written notice to the apparent successful Bidder stating that upon compliance with the conditions precedent enumerated therein by the apparent successful Bidder within the time specified, the OWNER will enter into the Agreement. Notice to Proceed – The OWNER’s written notice to the CONTRACTOR authorizing the CONTRACTOR to proceed with the work and establishing the date of commencement of the Contract Time. OWNER – The Metropolitan Water District of Salt Lake & Sandy. OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE – As designated by the OWNER. OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE will provide decisions on contractual matters, recommend approval of Change Orders as recommended by the ENGINEER and represent the OWNER in policy matters. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-3 Partial Utilization – Placing a portion of the WORK in service for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) before reaching Subs tantial Completion of the WORK. Project – A unit of total construction of which the WORK to be provided under the Contract Documents, may be the whole, or a part thereof. Project Representative – The authorized representative of the ENGINEER who is assigned to the site or any part thereof. Shop Drawings – All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for the CONTRACTOR to illustrate some portion of WORK and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instruction, and diagrams to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the WORK. Specifications – (Same definition as for Technical Specifications hereinafter). Subcontractor – An individual, firm, or corporation having a direct contract with the CONTRACTOR or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the WORK. Substantial Completion – That state of construction when the WORK has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of the ENGINEER as evidenced by the Notice of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the WORK can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to any work refer to substantial completion thereof. Supplementary General Conditions – The part of the Contract Documents which makes additions, deletions, or revisions to these General Conditions. Supplier – A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor. Technical Data – The factual information contained in reports describing physical conditions, including exploration method, plans, logs, laboratory test methods and factual data. Technical Data does not include conclusions, interpretations, interpolations, extrapolations or opinions contained in reports or reached by the CONTRACTOR. Technical Specifications – Those portions of the Contact Documents consisting of the General Requirements and written technical descriptions of products and execution of the WORK. Underground Utilities – All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed under ground to furnish any of the following services or materials: water, sewage and drainage removal, electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, traf fic, or other control systems. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-4 WORK – The entire construction required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. WORK is the result of performing services, furnishing labor and supervision, and furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 DELIVERY OF BONDS/INSURANCE CERTIFICATES A. The CONTRACTOR shall deliver to the OWNER the Bonds and insurance certificates required by the Contract Documents within 10 days after receiving the Notice of Award from the OWNER. 2.02 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS A. The OWNER shall furnish the CONTRACTOR 1 electronic copy of the Contract Documents (Specifications and Drawings).. 2.03 STARTING THE PROJECT A. The CONTRACTOR shall begin construction of the WORK within 10 days after the commencement date stated in the Notice to Proceed, but shall not commence construction prior to the commencement date. 2.04 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION A. Before undertaking each part of the WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents to check and verify pertinent figures and dimensions shown thereon with all applicable field measurements. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to the ENGINEER any conflict, error, or discrepancy which the CONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from the ENGINEER before proceeding with any work affected thereby. B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER for review those documents called for under the Section entitled “Contractor Submittals” in the General Requirements. 2.05 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. The CONTRACTOR shall attend a preconstruction conference with the OWNER, the ENGINEER and others as appropriate to discuss the construction of the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2.06 FINALIZING SCHEDULES A. At least 7 days before the CONTRACTOR’s submittal of its first Application for Payment, the CONTRACTOR, the ENGINEER, and others Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-5 as appropriate will meet to finalize the schedules submitted in accordance with the General Requirements. ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 INTENT A. The Contract Documents comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the WORK. The Contract Documents are complementary, what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. The Contract Documents will be construed in accordance with the law of the place of the Project. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe the WORK, functionally complete, to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. All work, materials, or equipment that may be reasonably inferred from the Contract Documents as being required to produce the completed work shall be supplied whether or not specifically called for. When words which have a well-known technical or trade meaning are used to describe work, materials, or equipment such words shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Reference to standard specifications, manuals, or codes or any technical society, organization, or association, or to the Laws or Regulations of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids, except as may be otherwise specifically stated. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual, or code (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents) shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR, or the ENGINEER or any of their consultants, agents, or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. C. If, during the performance of the WORK, the CONTRACTOR finds a conflict, error or discrepancy in the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately report it to the ENGINEER in writing and before proceeding with the work affected thereby. The ENGINEER shall then make a written interpretation, clarification, or correction as the ENGINEER determines appropriate. 3.02 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. In resolving conflicts resulting from conflicts, errors, or discrepancies in any of the Contract Documents, the order of precedence shall be as follows: 1. Change Orders Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-6 2. Agreement 3. Addenda 4. General Conditions 5. Technical Specifications 6. Referenced Standard Specifications 7. Drawings 8. CONTRACTOR’S Bid (Bid Form). B. With reference to the Drawings the order of precedence is as follows: 1. Figures govern over scaled dimensions 2. Detail drawings govern over general drawings 3. Addenda/change order drawings govern over general drawings 4. Contract Drawings govern over standard drawings. 3.03 AMENDING AND SUPPLEMENTING CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents may be amended by a Change Order (pursuant to Article 10) to provide for additions, deletions or revisions in the WORK or to modify terms and conditions. 3.04 REUSE OF DOCUMENTS A. Neither the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, Supplier, nor any other person or organization performing any of the WORK under a contract with the OWNER shall have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Technical Specifications, or other documents used on the WORK, and they shall not reuse or reproduce any of them on the extensions of the Project or any other project without the written consent of the OWNER and the ENGINEER. B. The Contract Documents are for official use only and are exempt from the Freedom of Information Act (FOIA) (exemption 2). All Contract Documents and any copies made from them shall be returned to the office of the OWNER upon project completion. No refunds will be made for returned documents. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-7 ARTICLE 4 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.01 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS A. The OWNER shall furnish the lands, rights-of-way and easements upon which the WORK is to be performed and for access thereto, together with other lands designated for the use of the CONTRACTOR in the Contract Documents. Easements or other adequate property interest for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing major facilities will be obtained and paid for by the OWNER, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall be interpreted as giving the CONTRACTOR exclusive occupancy of the lands or rights-of-way provided. The CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall not enter upon nor use any property not under the control of the OWNER until a written temporary construction easement agreement or other appropriate agreement has been executed by the CONTRACTOR and the property owner, and a copy of the easement furnished to the ENGINEER prior to its use. Neither the OWNER nor the ENGINEER shall be liable for any claims or damages resulting from the CONTRACTOR’s unauthorized trespass or use of any properties. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all of the terms and conditions of all easements and agreements relating to use of lands, including the agreements between OWNER and Cottonwood Heights City. 4.02 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS – SUBSURFACE AND EXISTING STRUCTURES A. Explorations and Reports: In the preparation of the Drawings and Specifications, ENGINEER relied upon the following exploration reports and subsurface conditions tests at the Site: 1. Report dated November 29, 2023, prepared by Gerhart Cole, entitled: “Geotechnical / Geological Study Cottonwoods Connection [Revision 1]” 2. Report dated June 30, 2023, prepared by D.G. Honegger Consulting, entitled: “Analysis of SLAR and CC-1 Pipelines Response to Seismic Slope Displacement” B. Existing Structures: In the preparation of the Drawings and Specifications, ENGINEER relied upon the following drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface and subsurface structures (except Underground Utilities referred to in Paragraph 4.04 herein) which are at or contiguous to the site: 1. Design drawings for the LCWTP: Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-8 a. 1957 LCWTP Record Drawings b. 1999 New Admin Building c. 2000 New Chemical Building d. 2003 LCWTP Expansion, Ozone e. 2004 On-Site Improvements C. Copies of full reports itemized in 4.02.A and 4.02.B that are not included with Bidding Documents may be examined at the office of OWNER during regular business hours. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the technical data contained therein upon which the CONTRACTOR may rely as identified and established above are incorporated therein by reference. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for the interpretation, extrapolation or interpolation of all technical as well as nontechnical data and its reliance on the completeness, opinions and interpretation of the reports. CONTRACTOR is not entitled to rely upon other information and data utilized by ENGINEER in the preparation of Drawings and Specifications. 4.03 DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS A. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER upon encountering any of the following unforeseen conditions, hereinafter called “differing site conditions,” during the prosecution of the WORK. 1. Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site of the WORK which could not reasonably have been discovered through diligent inspection by CONTRACTOR before his Bid was submitted which differs materially from those indicated, described, or delineated in the Contract Documents including those reports and documents discussed in Paragraph 4.02; and 2. Physical conditions at the site of the WORK of an unusual nature which could not reasonably have been discovered through diligent inspection by CONTRACTOR before his Bid was submitted and which differ materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents including those reports and documents discussed in Paragraph 4.02. The CONTRACTOR’s notice to the ENGINEER shall be in writing and delivered before the differing site conditions are disturbed, but in no event later than 14 days after their discovery. B. The ENGINEER will review the alleged differing site conditions, determine the necessity of obtaining additional explorations or tests with respect to verifying their existence and extent and advise the OWNER in writing of the ENGINEER’s findings and conclusions. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-9 C. If the OWNER concludes that because of newly discovered conditions a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Change Order will be issued as provided in Article 10 to reflect and document the consequences of the differing site conditions. D. In each such case, an increase or decrease in the Contract Price or an extension or shortening of the Contract Time, or any combination thereof, will be allowable to the extent that they are attributable to the differing site conditions. If the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR are unable to agree as to the amount or length of the Change Order, a claim may be made as provided in Articles 11 and 12. E. The CONTRACTOR’s failure to give written notice of differing site conditions within 14 days of their discovery and before they are disturbed shall constitute a waiver of all claims in connection therewith, whether direct or consequential in nature. 4.04 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS – UNDERGROUND UTILITIES A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Utilities at or contiguous to the site are based on information and data furnished to the OWNER or the ENGINEER by the owners of Underground Utilities or by others. Unless it is expressly provided in the Supplementary General Conditions, the OWNER and the ENGINEER shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any Underground Utilities information or data. The CONTRACTOR’s responsibility relating to underground utilities are: review and check all information and data, locate all Underground Utilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, coordinate the WORK with the owners of Underground Utilities during construction, safeguard and protect the Underground Utilities, and repair any damage to Underground Utilities resulting from the WORK. The cost of all these activities will be considered as having been included in the Contract Price. B. Not Shown or Indicated: If an Underground Utility not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the site and which the CONTRACTOR could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of, the CONTRACTOR shall identify the owner of the Underground Utility, give written notice of the location to that owner and notify the ENGINEER. 4.05 REFERENCE POINTS A. The ENGINEER will provide one benchmark, near or on the site of the WORK, and will provide two points near or on the site to establish a base line for use by the CONTRACTOR in laying out the WORK. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, the CONTRACTOR Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-10 shall furnish all other lines, grades, and benchmarks required for proper execution of the WORK. B. The CONTRACTOR shall preserve all benchmarks, stakes, and other survey marks. In case of their removal or destruction by its own employees or by its subcontractor’s employees, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the accurate replacement of reference points by professionally qualified personnel at no additional cost to the OWNER. ARTICLE 5 – BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01 PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT AND OTHER BONDS A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in the amount of 100% of the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all the CONTRACTOR’s obligations under the Contract Documents. The Performance Bond shall remain in effect at least until one year after the date of Notice of Completion, except as otherwise provided by Law or Regulation or by the Contract Documents. After the ENGINEER issues the Notice of Completion, the amount of the Performance Bond may be reduced to 10 percent of the Contract Price, or $1,000, whichever is greater. The CONTRACTOR shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary General Conditions. B. If the surety on any Bond furnished by the CONTRACTOR is declared a bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the WORK is located, the CONTRACTOR shall within 7 days after written approval by the OWNER of a substitute Bond and Surety substitute the approved Bond and Surety. 5.02 INSURANCE A. The CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain the insurance required under this paragraph. This insurance shall include the specific coverages set out herein and be written for not less than the limits of liability and coverages provided in this section, or required by law, whichever is greater. The CONTRACTOR’s liabilities under the Agreement shall not be deemed limited in any way to the insurance coverage required. B. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the OWNER with certificates indicating the type, amount, class of operations covered, effective dates and expiration dates of all policies and in a form acceptable to the OWNER. All insurance shall remain in effect until the OWNER issues the Notice of Final Completion and at all times thereafter when the CONTRACTOR may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective work in accordance with Paragraph 13.01B or completing punch list items required by the Notice of Substantial Completion. All liability insurance policies shall be occurrence and not claims made policies. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-11 C. Minimum Limits of Insurance. Except as approved in writing by OWNER in advance of the work to be performed, CONTRACTOR and all of CONTRACTOR’s subcontractors shall maintain limits no less than: 1. GENERAL LIABILITY (including claims arising from: premises- operations, independent contractors, products-completed operations, personal and advertising injury, and liability assumed under an insured contract.): a Combined Single Limit (Bodily Injury and Property Damage): i $2,000,000 Per Occurrence b Personal Injury (including completed operations and products liability): i $2,000,000 Each Occurrence c General Aggregate: i $3,000,000 d Products - Comp/OP Aggregate: i $3,000,000 e Limits to apply to this project individually. 2. AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY: a $2,000,000 Per Occurrence b “Any Auto” coverage required. 3. WORKERS’ COMPENSATION and EMPLOYERS LIABILITY: a Workers’ compensation statutory limits. b Employers Liability statutory limits. 4. CONTRACTORS POLLUTION LIABILITY: a $1,000,000 Per Claim b $1,000,000 Aggregate c Coverage applies to this project individually. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-12 D. DEDUCTIBLES AND SELF-INSURED RETENTIONS. Any deductibles or self-insured retention (SIRs) must be declared to and approved by the OWNER in writing. At the option of the OWNER, either the insurer may be required to reduce or eliminate such deductibles or SIRs as respects the OWNER, its trustees, officers, and employees as additional insureds; or the CONTRACTOR may be required to procure a bond or other instrument guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigations, claim distribution, and defense expenses of the OWNER, its trustees, officers, and employees as additional insureds. The OWNER does not ordinarily approve deductibles in an amount exceeding 2.5% of the required minimum limits described above or $50,000, whichever is less. The OWNER does not ordinarily approve SIRs in an amount exceeding 1.0% of the required minimum limits described above or $20,000, whichever is less. With respect to any deductible or SIR, the CONTRACTOR shall pay for costs related to losses, investigations, claim distribution, and defense expenses of the OWNER, its trustees, officers, and employees as additional insureds that would otherwise be covered by an insurer under the coverages described in these insurance requirements if no deductible or SIR existed. E. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS. The General Liability, Automobile Liability, and Pollution Liability Coverages are to contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions: 1. OWNER, Salt Lake City, ENGINEER, and City of Cottonwood Heights, and their respective trustees, elected or appointed officials, officers, and employees are to be covered as additional insureds as respects: claims arising out of the Work, including completed operations. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to OWNER, its trustees, officers, and employees. 2. Additional insured coverage shall be on a primary basis for ongoing and completed work. A waiver with respect to OWNER, ENGINEER and city of Cottonwood Heights, and their respective trustees, elected or appointed officials, officers, and employees of Worker’s Compensation subrogation shall be provided. F. ACCEPTABILITY OF INSURERS. Insurance and bonds are to be placed with insurers admitted in the State of Utah with a Bests’ rating of no less than A-, IX, and in the limits as listed in this document, unless approved in writing by the OWNER. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-13 G. VERIFICATION OF COVERAGE. CONTRACTOR and all of CONTRACTOR’s subcontractors shall furnish OWNER, ENGINEER and city of Cottonwood Heights with certificates of insurance and with original endorsements effecting coverage required by this clause. The certificates and endorsements are to be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The certificates and endorsements are to be provided on forms acceptable to the OWNER and city of Cottonwood Heights before WORK commences. OWNER and city of Cottonwood Heights reserve the right to require complete, certified copies of all required insurance policies, with all endorsements, at any time. CONTRACTOR shall provide an insurance certificate and an endorsement evidencing compliance with this provision at least annually. From time to time OWNER may increase the requirement for a liability limit by providing reasonable written notice to CONTRACTOR of such a change. ARTICLE 6 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.01 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE A. The CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the WORK competently and efficiently, devoting the attention and applying the skills and expertise necessary to perform the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incidental thereto. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for ensuring that the finished WORK complies accurately with the Contract Documents. B. The CONTRACTOR shall employ the superintendent named in “Information Required of Bidder” on the work site at all times during the progress of the WORK. The superintendent shall not be replaced without the OWNER’s written consent. The superintendent will be the CONTRACTOR’s representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of the CONTRACTOR. All communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall issue all its communications to the OWNER through the ENGINEER. C. The CONTRACTOR’s superintendent, or OWNER-approved representative shall be present at the site of the WORK at all times while work is in progress. Failure to observe this requirement shall be considered suspension of the WORK by the CONTRACTOR until the superintendent is again present at the site. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-14 6.02 LABOR, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide skilled, competent and suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the WORK and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. B. Except in connection with the safety or protection of persons at the WORK, or property at the site or adjacent thereto, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours (7:00 a.m. – 6:00 p.m., Monday through Friday), and the CONTRACTOR will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday or any legal holiday observed by the OWNER without the OWNER’s written consent given after prior written notice to the ENGINEER. Except as otherwise provided in this Paragraph, the CONTRACTOR shall receive no additional compensation for overtime work, i.e., work in excess of 8 hours in any one calendar day or 40 hours in any one calendar week, even though such overtime work may be required under emergency conditions and may be ordered by the ENGINEER in writing. Additional compensation will be paid the CONTRACTOR for overtime work in the event extra work is ordered by the ENGINEER and the Change Order specifically authorizes the use of overtime work, but only to the extent that the CONTRACTOR pays overtime wages on a regular basis being paid (>40 hours per week) for overtime work of a similar nature in the same locality. C. All costs of inspection and testing performed during overtime work approved solely for the convenience of the CONTRACTOR shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. The OWNER shall have the authority to deduct the costs of all inspection and testing from any partial payments otherwise due to the CONTRACTOR. D. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish, erect, maintain and remove the construction plant, and temporary works and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment, machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance testing, start-up and completion of the WORK. E. All materials and equipment incorporated into the WORK shall be of new and good quality, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall apply, install, connect, erect, use, clean, and condition all material and equipment in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer and Supplier except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-15 6.03 ADJUSTING PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit any adjustments in the progress schedule to the ENGINEER for acceptance in accordance with the provisions for “Contractor Submittals” in the General Requirements. 6.04 SUBSTITUTES AND “OR-EQUAL” ITEMS A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or-equal” item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to ENGINEER for review under the circumstances described below. 1. “Or-Equal” Items: If in ENGINEER’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by ENGINEER as an “or-equal” item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in ENGINEER’s sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this paragraph 6.04.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a in the exercise of reasonable judgment ENGINEER determines that: (i) it is at least equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; (ii) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole, and; b CONTRACTOR certifies that: (i) there is no increase in cost to the OWNER; and (ii) it will conform substantially, even with deviations, to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. 2. Substitute Items a If in ENGINEER’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR does not qualify as an “or-equal” item under paragraph 6.04.A.1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-16 b CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow ENGINEER to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefore. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by ENGINEER from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. c The procedure for review by ENGINEER will be as set forth in paragraph 6.04.A.2.d, as supplemented in the General Requirements and as ENGINEER may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. d CONTRACTOR shall first make written application to ENGINEER for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that CONTRACTOR seeks to furnish or use. The application shall certify that the proposed substitute item will perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, be similar in substance to that specified, and be suited to the same use as that specified. The application will state the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will prejudice CONTRACTOR’s achievement of Substantial Completion on time, whether or not use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item and whether or not incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. All variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified will be identified in the application, and available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services will be indicated. The application will also contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change, all of which will be considered by ENGINEER in evaluating the proposed substitute item. ENGINEER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-17 technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information to allow ENGINEER, in ENGINEER’s sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The procedure for review by ENGINEER will be similar to that provided in subparagraph 6.04.A.2. C. ENGINEER’s Evaluation: ENGINEER will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to paragraphs 6.04.A and 6.04.B. ENGINEER will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or-equal” or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until ENGINEER’s review is complete, which will be evidenced by either a Change Order for a substitute or an approved Shop Drawing for an “or- equal”. ENGINEER will advise CONTRACTOR in writing of any negative determination. D. Special Guarantee: OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish at CONTRACTOR’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. E. ENGINEER’s Cost Reimbursement: ENGINEER will record time required by ENGINEER and ENGINEER’s Consultants in evaluating substitute proposed or submitted by CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraphs 6.04.A.2 and 6.04.B and in making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) occasioned thereby. Whether or not ENGINEER approves a substitute item so proposed or submitted by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for the charges of ENGINEER and ENGINEER’s Consultants for evaluating each such proposed substitute. F. CONTRACTOR’s Expense: CONTRACTOR shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or “or-equal” at CONTRACTOR’s expense. 6.05 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to the OWNER and the ENGINEER for the acts and omissions of its subcontractors and their employees to the same extent as the CONTRACTOR is responsible for the acts and omissions of its own employees. Nothing contained in this paragraph shall create any contractual relationship between any subcontractor and the OWNER or the ENGINEER nor relieve the CONTRACTOR of any liability or obligation under the Agreement. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-18 6.06 PERMITS A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary General Conditions, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses from the agencies having jurisdiction, including furnishing the insurance and bonds required by such agencies. The costs incurred by the CONTRACTOR in compliance with this paragraph shall not be made the basis for claims for additional compensation. The OWNER shall assist the CONTRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the WORK, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, including all utility connection charges for utilities required by the WORK. B. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs when any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others when issued in the construction of the WORK or incorporated into the WORK. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for incorporation into or use in the construction of the WORK and if to the actual knowledge of the OWNER or the ENGINEER its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of these rights shall be disclosed by the OWNER in the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the OWNER and the ENGINEER and anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them from and against all claims, damages, losses, and expenses (including attorneys' fees and court costs) arising out of any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the WORK or resulting from the incorporation in the WORK of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. C. CONTRACTOR shall obtain a SWPPP construction general permit if disturbing more than 1 acre, and a fugitive dust permit if disturbing over 0.25 acres. Both permits are issued by the Utah Department of Environmental Quality. For bid purposes, the CONTRACTOR’S bid price shall include $500 for the fee. The Contract Price will be adjusted by Change Order once the actual permit fee is determined. 6.07 LAWS AND REGULATIONS A. The CONTRACTOR shall observe and comply with all Laws and Regulations which in any manner affect those engaged or employed on the WORK, the materials used in the WORK, or the conduct of the WORK. If any discrepancy or inconsistency should be discovered in the Contract Documents in relation to any Laws or Regulations, the CONTRACTOR shall report the same in writing to the ENGINEER. Notwithstanding any Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-19 immunity otherwise provided by applicable workers’ compensation statutes, the CONTRACTOR shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the OWNER, the ENGINEER and their officers, agents, and employees against all claims arising from violation of any Laws or Regulations, by CONTRACTOR or by its employees or subcontractors. This indemnity provision is intended to provide the greatest protection of the OWNER and ENGINEER allowed by law. Any particular law or regulation specified or referred to elsewhere in the Contract Documents shall not in any way limit the obligation of the CONTRACTOR to comply with all other provisions of federal, state, and local laws and regulations. 6.08 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY A. The CONTRACTOR agrees not to discriminate against anyone because of race, national origin, ancestry, color, religion, sex, age, or disability. The CONTRACTOR agrees to abide by all applicable civil rights Laws and Regulations. B. CONTRACTOR shall become familiar with, and strictly comply with, any and all employment verification requirements applicable to the OWNER and applicable to CONTRACTOR or any subcontractor or Supplier. CONTRACTOR shall assure that all subcontracts relating to the WORK contain a similar mandate. CONTRACTOR shall take all reasonable steps to assure compliance by all subcontractors on the WORK. CONTRACTOR shall regularly confirm the compliance of all subcontractors on the WORK. CONTRACTOR and all subcontractors on the WORK shall maintain records that will allow the OWNER to confirm compliance and make them available to the OWNER upon request. 6.09 TAXES A. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the WORK. 6.10 USE OF PREMISES A. The CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment, stored materials and equipment, and other operations of workers to (1) the Project site, (2) the land and areas identified for the CONTRACTOR’s use in the Contract Documents, and (3) other lands whose use is acquired by Laws and Regulations, rights-of-way, permits, and easements. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to the owner and occupant of such lands for any damage to the lands or areas contiguous thereto, resulting from the performance of the WORK or otherwise. Should any claim be made against the OWNER or the ENGINEER by owner or Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-20 occupant of lands because of the performance of the WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly settle the claim by agreement, or resolve the claim through litigation. The CONTRACTOR shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify, defend, and hold the OWNER and the ENGINEER harmless from and against all claims, damages, losses, and expenses (including, but not limited to, fees of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and court costs) arising directly, indirectly, or consequentially out of any action, legal or equitable, brought by any owner or occupant of land against the OWNER or the ENGINEER to the extent the claim is based or arises out of the CONTRACTOR’s performance of the WORK. 6.11 SAFETY AND PROTECTION A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the WORK. The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. All persons on or near the work site and other persons and organizations who may be affected by activities on or near the work site. 2. All the WORK and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and 3. Other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, and utilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. B. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations (whether referred to herein or not) of any public body having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury, or loss and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. The CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property and utilities when prosecution of the WORK may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property. C. Unless the CONTRACTOR otherwise designates in writing a different individual as the responsible individual, the CONTRACTOR’s superintendent shall be CONTRACTOR’s representative at the site whose duties shall include providing all persons on the work site with a reasonably safe environment and the prevention of accidents. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-21 6.12 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES A. After checking and verifying all field measurements and after complying with the applicable procedures specified in the General Requirements, the CONTRACTOR shall submit all shop drawings to the ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the approved schedule for shop drawings submittals specified in the General Requirements. B. The CONTRACTOR shall also submit to the ENGINEER for review and approval all samples in accordance with the approved schedule of sample submittals specified in the General Requirements. C. Before submitting shop drawings or samples, the CONTRACTOR shall determine and verify all quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data with respect thereto and review or coordinate each shop drawing or sample with other shop drawings and samples and with the requirements of the WORK and the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall stamp each shop drawing, certifying his review. If the same shop drawings require re-submittal more than two times, the CONTRACTOR shall pay for the costs of ENGINEER’s and OWNER’s subsequent review(s). 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall carry on the WORK and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the OWNER. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any dispute or disagreement, except as the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER may otherwise mutually agree in writing. 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION A. CONTRACTOR shall defend, indemnify and hold OWNER and its officers, trustees and employees harmless, including costs and attorneys’ fees, from any claim, demand, action or cause of action: (i) alleging that OWNER was at fault in failing to supervise, inspect, direct, instruct, warn or otherwise manage or control CONTRACTOR or any employee, agent or Subcontractor of CONTRACTOR, or (ii) alleging that OWNER knew of, should have known of, or had constructive knowledge of a dangerous condition created by CONTRACTOR or any employee, agent or Subcontractor of CONTRACTOR; or (iii) alleging OWNER is vicariously liable for acts of CONTRACTOR or any employee, agent or Subcontractor of CONTRACTOR (under the Peculiar Risk Doctrine or otherwise. This defense and indemnity obligation is not intended to hold OWNER or its officers, trustees, or employees harmless from any claim that is not derivative of CONTRACTOR as described. In no event shall any fault of Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-22 CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR’s employees or contractors be reapportioned to OWNER, its officers, trustees or employees. CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold OWNER and its officers, trustees and employees harmless from any such reapportionment of fault. The described duty to defend and indemnify is not intended to run to the benefit of any OWNER liability insurer to the extent such insurer would be responsible for defense costs or indemnity beyond OWNER’s deductible or self-insured retention. B. The indemnification obligation under this Paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation of the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for the CONTRACTOR or any such subcontractor or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. 6.15 CONTRACTOR’S DAILY REPORTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall complete a daily report indicating manpower, major equipment, subcontractors, weather conditions, etc., involved in the performance of the WORK. The daily report shall be completed on forms prepared by the CONTRACTOR and acceptable to the ENGINEER, and shall be submitted to the ENGINEER at the conclusion of each workday. 6.16 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT A. The CONTRACTOR shall not assign, sublet, sell, transfer, or otherwise dispose of the Agreement or any portion thereof, or its right, title, or interested therein, or obligations thereunder, without the written consent of the OWNER except as imposed by law. If the CONTRACTOR violates this provision, the Agreement may be terminated at the option of the OWNER. In such event, the OWNER shall be relieved of all liability and obligations to the CONTRACTOR and to its assignee or transferee, growing out of such termination. ARTICLE 7 – OTHER WORK 7.01 RELATED WORK A. The OWNER may perform other work related to the Project at the site by the OWNER's own forces, have other work performed by utility owners, or let other direct contracts for the performance of the other work which may contain General Conditions similar to these. If the fact that such other work is to be performed was not noted in the Contact Documents, written notice thereof will be given to the CONTRACTOR prior to commencing any other work. B. The CONTRACTOR shall afford each utility owner and other contractor who is a party to a direct contract (or the OWNER, if the OWNER is Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-23 performing the additional work with the OWNER's employees) proper and safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of the other work. The CONTRACTOR shall properly connect and coordinate the WORK with the other work. The CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the WORK that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and integrate with the other work. The CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and shall only cut or alter their work with the written consent of the ENGINEER and the others whose work will be affected. C. If the proper execution or results of any part of the CONTRACTOR’s work depends upon the integration of work with the completion of other work by any other contractor or utility owner (or the OWNER), the CONTRACTOR shall inspect and report to the ENGINEER in writing all delays, defects, or deficiencies in the other work that renders it unavailable or unsuitable for proper integration with the CONTRACTOR’s work. Except for the results or effects of material latent defects and deficiencies in the other work which could not reasonably have been discovered by the CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR’s failure to report will constitute an acceptance of the other work as fit and proper for integration with the CONTRACTOR’s work and as a waiver of any claim for additional time or compensation associated with the integration of the CONTRACTOR’s work with the other work. 7.02 COORDINATION A. If the OWNER contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, a coordinator will be identified to the extent that the coordinator can be identified at this time, in the Supplementary General Conditions and delegated the authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors. The specific matters over which the coordinator has authority and the extent of the coordinator’s authority and responsibility will be itemized in the Supplementary General Conditions or in a notice to the CONTRACTOR at such time as the identity of the coordinator is determined. ARTICLE 8 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.01 COMMUNICATIONS A. The OWNER shall issue all its communications to the CONTRACTOR through the ENGINEER. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-24 8.02 PAYMENTS A. The OWNER shall make payments to the CONTRACTOR as provided in Article 14. 8.03 LANDS, EASEMENTS, AND SURVEYS A. The OWNER’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. The OWNER shall identify and make available to the CONTRACTOR copies of exploration reports and subsurface conditions tests at the site and in existing structures which have been utilized by the ENGINEER in preparing the Drawings and Technical Specifications as set forth in Paragraph 4.02. 8.04 CHANGE ORDERS A. The OWNER shall execute approved Change Orders for the conditions described in Paragraph 10.01D. B. When funds are not budgeted to support continuation of performance in a subsequent fiscal period, the contract shall be canceled and the contractor shall be reimbursed for the reasonable value of any non-recurring costs incurred but not amortized in the price of the supplies or services delivered under the contract. 8.05 INSPECTIONS AND TESTS A. The OWNER’s responsibility with respect to inspection, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 13.03B. 8.06 SUSPENSION OF WORK A. In connection with the OWNER’s right to stop work or suspend work, see Paragraphs 13.04 and 15.01. Paragraphs 15.02 and 15.03 deal with the OWNER’s right to terminate services of the CONTRACTOR under certain circumstances. ARTICLE 9 – ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.01 OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE A. The ENGINEER will be the OWNER’s representative during the construction period. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of the ENGINEER as the OWNER’s representative during construction are set forth in a separate agreement with the OWNER and are summarized hereafter. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-25 9.02 VISITS TO SITE A. The ENGINEER will make visits to the site during construction to observe and inspect the progress and quality of the WORK and to determine, in general if the WORK is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.03 PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE A. The ENGINEER will furnish a Project Representative to observe and inspect the performance of the WORK. The Project Representative and/or other authorized agents of the ENGINEER shall serve as the primary contact(s) with the Contractor during the construction phase. All submittals shall be delivered to, and communications between the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR shall be handled by, the Project Representative and/or other authorized agents. The Project Representative shall be the primary authorized representative of the OWNER and the ENGINEER in all on-site relations with the CONTRACTOR. 9.04 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS A. The ENGINEER will issue, with reasonable promptness written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings or otherwise) as the ENGINEER may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with or reasonably inferable from the overall intent of the Contract Documents. 9.05 AUTHORIZED VARIATIONS IN WORK A. The ENGINEER may authorize minor variations in the WORK as described in the Contact Documents when such variations do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and are consistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents. These variations shall be accomplished by issuing a Field Order. The issuance of a Field Order requires the CONTRACTOR to perform the work described in the order promptly. If the CONTRACTOR believes that a Field Order justifies an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, the CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11 and 12. 9.06 REJECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK A. The ENGINEER is authorized to reject work which the ENGINEER believes to be defective and require special inspection or testing of the WORK as provided in Paragraph 13.03G, whether or not the WORK is fabricated, installed, or completed. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-26 9.07 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS A. The ENGINEER will review for approval all CONTRACTOR submittals, including shop drawings, samples, substitutes, and “or equal” items, etc., in accordance with the procedures set forth in the General Requirements. B. In connection with the ENGINEER’s responsibilities as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12. C. In connection with the ENGINEER’s responsibilities as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14. 9.08 DISPUTES, CLAIMS AND OTHER MATTERS A. All claims, disputes, and other matters concerning the acceptability of the WORK, the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance of the WORK, and claims for changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time under Articles 11 and 12 will be referred to the ENGINEER in writing with a request for formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. The ENGINEER will render a decision in writing within 30 days of receipt of the request. Written notice of each claim, dispute, or other matter will be delivered by the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the occurrence of the event. Written supporting data will be submitted to the ENGINEER with the written claim unless the ENGINEER allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurat e data in support of the claim. B. When reviewing the claim or dispute, the ENGINEER will not show partiality to the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR and will incur no liability in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith. The ENGINEER’s rendering of a decision with respect to any claim, dispute, or other matter (except any which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided in Paragraph 14.12) shall be a condition precedent to the OWNER’s or the CONTRACTOR’s exercise of their rights or remedies under the Contract Documents or by Law or Regulations with respect to the claim, dispute, or other matter. 9.09 LIMITATION ON ENGINEER’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Neither the ENGINEER’s authority to act pursuant to its agreement with the OWNER, nor the description of that authority under this Article 9, nor any other description of the ENGINEER’s responsibility in the Contract Documents nor any decision made by the ENGINEER in good faith either to exercise or not exercise its authority shall give rise to any duty or responsibility on the part of the ENGINEER to the CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any surety or any other person or organization performing any part of the WORK. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-27 B. Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms “as ordered,” “as directed,” “as required,” as allowed,” “as reviewed,” “as approved,” or terms of like effect or import are used, or the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” or “satisfactory” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe a requirement, direction, review, or judgement of the ENGINEER as to the WORK, it is intended that such requirement, direction, review, or judgment will be solely to evaluate the WORK for compliance with the Contract Documents, unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise. The use of any such term or adjective shall not be effective to assign to the ENGINEER any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the WORK or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of its agreement with the OWNER. C. The ENGINEER will not be responsible for the CONTRACTOR’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction not specified in the Contact Documents. Neither the OWNER nor the ENGINEER shall have any responsibility for safety precautions or programs on site or for the safety of CONTRACTOR’s employees, Subcontractors, employees of Subcontractors, Suppliers, employees of Suppliers, or others on site. D. The ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR nor of any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other person or organization performing any of the WORK to the extent that such acts or omissions are not reasonably discoverable considering the level of observation and inspection required by the ENGINEER’s agreement with the OWNER. ARTICLE 10 – CHANGES IN THE WORK 10.01 GENERAL A. Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the OWNER may at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the WORK; these will be authorized by a written Field Order issued by the ENGINEER and/or a Change Order. Upon receipt of any of these documents, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the work involved pursuant to the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. B. If the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR are unable to agree upon the increase or decrease in the Contract Price or an extension or shortening of the Contract Time, if any, that should be allowed as a result of a Field Order, a claim may be made therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-28 C. The CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price nor an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contact Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented by Change Order, except in the case of an emergency and except in the case of uncovering work provided in the Paragraph 13.03G. D. The OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the WORK which are ordered by the OWNER pursuant to Paragraph 10.01A; 2. Changes required because of acceptance of defective work under Paragraph 13.06; 3. Changes in the Contract Price or Contact Time which are agreed to by the parties; 4. Adjustments for inflation under GC 9.05 of the Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection contract documents ; or 5. Any other changes agreed to by the parties. 6. Any construction contract change order which increases the contract amount shall have the prior written certification of the OWNER’s general manager that the expenditure of the change order amount is properly authorized by the OWNER’s board of trustees consistent with the OWNER’s budget and financial management policies and the instructions of the board of trustees. E. If the provisions of any Bond require notice of any change to be given to a surety, the giving of these notices will be the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility. The CONTRACTOR shall provide for the amount of each applicable Bond to be adjusted accordingly. 10.02 ALLOWABLE QUANTITY VARIATIONS A. Whenever a unit price and quantity have been established for a bid item in the Contract Documents, the quantity stated may be increased or decreased to a maximum of 25 percent with no change in the unit price. An adjustment in the quantity in excess of 25 percent will be sufficient to justify a change in the unit price. All changes in the quantities of bid items shall be documented by Change Order. B. In the event a part of the WORK is to be entirely eliminated and no lump sum or unit price is named in the Contract Documents to cover the eliminated work, the price of the eliminated work shall be agreed upon in Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-29 writing by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. If the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR fail to agree upon the price of the eliminated work, the price shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Article 11. ARTICLE 11 – CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE 11.01 GENERAL A. The Contact Price constitutes the total compensation payable to the CONTRACTOR for performing the WORK. Except as directed by Change Orders, all duties, responsibilities, and obligations assigned to or undertaken by the CONTRACTOR shall be at its expense without change in the Contract Price. B. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for an increase in the Contact Price shall be based on written notice delivered by the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered with the claim, unless the ENGINEER allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the CONTRACTOR’s written statement that the amount claimed covers all known amounts (direct, indirect, and consequential) to which the CONTRACTOR is entitled as a result of the occurrence of the event. If the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree on the amount involved, all claims for adjustment in the Contract Price shall be determined by the ENGINEER in accordance with Paragraph 9.08A. No claim for an adjustment in the Contact Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. C. The value of any work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contact Price shall be determined in one of the following ways: 1. Where the work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of unit prices to the quantities of the items involved. 2. By mutual acceptance of a lump sum, which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.04. 3. On the basis of the cost of work (determined as provided in Paragraphs 11.02 and 11.03) plus a CONTRACTOR’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.04). Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-30 11.02 COST OF WORK (BASED ON TIME AND MATERIALS) A. General: The term “cost of work” means the sum of all costs necessarily incurred and paid by the CONTRACTOR for labor, materials, and equipment in the proper performance of work. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by the OWNER, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project. B. Labor: The cost of labor used in performing work by the CONTRACTOR, a Subcontractor, or other forces will be the sum of the following: 1. The actual wages paid plus any employer payments to, or on behalf of workers for fringe benefits including health and welfare, pension, vacation, and similar purposes. The cost of labor may include the rates paid to foremen when determined by the ENGINEER that the services of foremen do not constitute a part of the overhead allowance. 2. All payments imposed by state and federal laws including, but not limited to, compensation insurance, and social security payments. 3. The amount paid for subsistence and travel required by collective bargaining agreements, or in accordance with the regular practice of the employer. At the beginning of the extra work and as later requested by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish the ENGINEER proof of labor compensation rates being paid. C. Materials: The cost of materials used in performing work will be the cost to the purchaser, whether CONTRACTOR or Subcontractor, from the Supplier thereof, except as the following are applicable: 1. Trade discounts available to the purchase shall be credited to the OWNER notwithstanding the fact that such discounts may not have been taken by the CONTRACTOR. 2. For materials secured by other than a direct purchase and direct billing to the purchaser, the cost shall be deemed to be the price paid to the actual Supplier as determined by the ENGINEER. Markup except for actual costs incurred in the handling of such materials will not be allowed. 3. Payment for materials from sources owned wholly or in part by the purchaser shall not exceed the price paid by the purchaser for similar materials from these sources on extra work items or current wholesale price for the materials delivered to the work site, whichever is lower. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-31 4. If, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the cost of material is excessive, or the CONTRACTOR does not furnish satisfactory evidence of the cost of the material, then the cost shall be deemed to be the lowest current wholesale price for the quantity concerned, delivered to the work site less trade discount. The OWNER reserves the right to furnish materials for the extra work and no claim shall be made by the CONTRACTOR for costs and profit on such materials. D. Equipment: The CONTRACTOR will be paid for the use of equipment at the rental rate listed for the equipment specified in the Rental Rate Blue Book published by Dataquest, Inc. The rental rate will be used to compute payments for equipment whether the equipment is under the CONTRACTOR’s control through direct ownership, leasing, renting, or another method of acquisition. The rental rate to be applied for use of each item of equipment shall be the rate resulting in the least total cost to the OWNER for the total period of use. 1. All equipment shall, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, be in good working condition and suitable for the purpose for which the equipment is to be used. 2. Before construction equipment is used on the extra work, the CONTRACTOR shall plainly stencil or stamp an identifying number thereon at a conspicuous location, and shall furnish to the ENGINEER, in duplicate, a description of the equipment and its identifying number. 3. Unless otherwise specified, manufacturers' ratings and manufacturer-approved modifications shall be used to classify equipment for the determination of applicable rental rates. Equipment which has no direct power unit shall be powered by a unit of at least the minimum rating recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Individual pieces of equipment or tools having a replacement value of $100 or less, whether or not consumed by use, shall be considered to be small tools and no payment will be made therefore. 5. Rental time will not be allowed while equipment is inoperative due to breakdowns. E. Equipment on the Work: The rental time to be paid for equipment used on the WORK shall be the time the equipment is in productive operation on the extra work being performed and, in addition, shall include the time required to move the equipment to the location of the extra work and Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-32 return it to the original location or to another location that requires no more moving time than that required to return it to its original location. Moving time will not be paid if the equipment is used on other than the extra work, even though located at the site of the extra work. Loading and transporting costs will be allowed, in lieu of moving time, when the equipment is moved by means other than its own power. However, no payment will be made for loading and transporting costs when the equipment is used on other than the extra work even though located at the site of the extra work. The following shall be used in computing the rental time of equipment on the WORK. 1. When hourly rates are listed, any part of an hour less than 30 minutes of operation shall be considered to be 1/2-hour of operation, and any part of an hour in excess of 30 minutes will be considered one hour of operation. 2. When daily rates are listed, any part of a day less than 4 hours operation shall be considered to be 1/2-day of operation. When owner-operated equipment is used to perform extra work to be paid for on a time and materials basis, the CONTRACTOR will be paid for the equipment and operator, as set forth in Paragraph (3), (4), and (5), following. 3. Payment for the equipment will be made in accordance with the provisions in Paragraph 11.02D, herein. 4. Payment for the cost of labor and subsistence or travel allowance will be made at the rates paid by the CONTRACTOR to other workers operating similar equipment already on the WORK, or in the absence of such labor, established by collective bargaining agreements for the type of workmen and location of the extra work, whether or not the operator is actually covered by such an agreement. A labor surcharge will be added to the cost of labor described herein in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 11.02B, herein, which surcharge shall constitute full compensation for payments imposed by state and federal laws and all payments made to on behalf of workers other than actual wages. 5. To the direct cost of equipment rental and labor, computed as provided herein, will be added the allowances for equipment rental and labor as provided in Paragraph 11.04, herein. 11.03 SPECIAL SERVICES A. Special work or services are defined as that work characterized by extraordinary complexity, sophistication, or innovation or a combination of the foregoing attributes which are unique to the construction industry. The Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-33 following may be considered by the ENGINEER in making estimates for payment for special services: 1. When the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR, by agreement, determine that a special service or work is required which cannot be performed by the forces of the CONTRACTOR or those of any of its Subcontractors, the special service or work may be performed by an entity especially skilled in the work to be performed. After validation of invoices and determination of market values by the ENGINEER, invoices for special services or work based upon the current fair market value thereof may be accepted without complete itemization of labor, material, and equipment rental cost. 2. When the CONTRACTOR is required to perform work necessitating special fabrication or machining process in a fabrication or a machine shop facility away from the job site, the charges for that portion of the work performed at the off-site facility may by agreement, be accepted as a special service and accordingly, the invoices from the work may be accepted without detailed itemization. 3. All invoices for special services will be adjusted by deducting all trade discounts offered or available, whether the discounts were taken or not. In lieu of the allowances for overhead and profit specified in Paragraph 11.04, herein, an allowance of 5 percent will be added to invoices for special services. B. All work performed hereunder shall be subject to all of the provisions of the Contract Documents and the CONTRACTOR’s sureties shall be bound with reference hereto as under the original Agreement. Copies of all amendments to surety bonds or supplemental surety bonds shall be submitted to the OWNER for review prior to the performance of any work hereunder. 11.04 CONTRACTOR’S FEE A. Work ordered on the basis of time and materials will be paid for at the actual necessary cost as determined by the ENGINEER, plus allowances for overhead and profit. For extra work involving a combination of increases and decreases in the WORK, the actual necessary cost will be the arithmetic sum of the additive and deductive costs. The allowance for overhead and profit shall include full compensation for superintendence, bond and insurance premiums, taxes, office expenses, and all other items of expense or cost not included in the cost of labor, materials, or equipment provided for under Paragraphs 11.02B, C, and D herein, including extended overhead and home office overhead. The allowance Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-34 for overhead and profit will be made in accordance with the following schedule: OVERHEAD AND PROFIT ALLOWANCE Labor ..................... 10 percent Materials ................ 10 percent Equipment ............. 10 percent B. It is understood that labor, materials, and equipment may be furnished by the CONTRACTOR or by a Subcontractor, and that the allowance specified herein shall be applied to the labor, materials, and equipment costs of the Subcontractor, to which the CONTRACTOR may add 5 percent of the Subcontractor’s total cost of work. Regardless of the number of hierarchical tiers of Subcontractors, the 5- percent markup may be applied one time only for each separate work transaction. ARTICLE 12 – CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME 12.01 GENERAL A. The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for an extension of the Contract time shall be based on written notice delivered by the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within 30 days after such occurrence (unless the ENGINEER allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by the CONTRACTOR’s written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the CONTRACTOR has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. Claims for adjustment in the Contract Time shall be determined by the ENGINEER in accordance with Paragraph 9.08 if the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. B. The Contract Time will be extended in an amount equal to time lost if the CONTRACTOR makes a claim as provided in Paragraph 12.01A and the ENGINEER determines that the delay was caused by events beyond the control of the CONTRACTOR. Examples of events beyond the control of the CONTRACTOR include acts or neglect by the OWNER or others performing additional work as contemplated by Article 7, or by acts of God or of the public enemy, fire, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, labor disputes, sabotage, or freight embargoes. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-35 C. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence. D. None of the aforesaid time extensions shall entitle the CONTRACTOR to any adjustment in the Contract Price or any damages for delay. Furthermore, the CONTRACTOR hereby indemnifies and holds harmless the OWNER and ENGINEER, their officers, agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses (including lost property and attorney's fees) arising out of or resulting from the temporary suspension of work whether for the OWNER’s convenience as defined in Article 15.01A or for whatever other reasons including the stoppage of work by the ENGINEER for the CONTRACTOR’s failure to comply with any order issued by the ENGINEER. 12.02 EXTENSIONS OF THE TIME FOR DELAY DUE TO INCLEMENT WEATHER A. “Inclement weather” is any weather condition or conditions resulting immediately therefrom, causing the CONTRACTOR to suspend construction operations or preventing the CONTRACTOR from proceeding with at least 75 percent of the normal labor and equipment force engaged on the WORK. B. Should the CONTRACTOR prepare to begin work at the regular starting time at the beginning of any regular work shift on any day on which inclement weather, or its effects on the condition of the WORK prevents work from beginning at the usual starting time and the crew is dismissed as a result thereof, the CONTRACTOR will not be charged for a working day whether or not conditions change thereafter during the day and the major portion of the day could be considered to be suitable for construction operations. C. The CONTRACTOR shall base its construction schedule upon the inclusion of the number of days of inclement weather specified in the Supplementary General Conditions. No extension of the Contact Time due to inclement weather will be considered until after the stated number of days of inclement weather has been reached. However, no reduction in Contract Time will be made if the number of inclement weather days is not reached. D. The CONTRACTOR’s construction schedule shall be based on the inclusion of at least 7 days of unseasonable inclement weather delays. 12.03 EXTENSIONS OF TIME FOR OTHER DELAYS A. If the CONTRACTOR is delayed in completion of the WORK beyond the Contract Time, by acts of God or of the public enemy, fire, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, labor disputes, industry-wide shortage of raw materials, sabotage or freight embargoes, the CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-36 No such adjustment will be made unless the CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER in writing of the causes of delay within 15 calendar days from the beginning of any such delay. The ENGINEER shall ascertain the facts and the extent of the delay. No adjustment in time shall be made for delays resulting from noncompliance with the Contract Documents, accidents, failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to carry out the provisions of the Contract Documents including failure to provide materials, equipment or workmanship meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents; the occurrence of such events shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from the necessity of maintaining the required progress. B. If the CONTRACTOR is delayed in completing the WORK beyond the Contract Time by reason of shortages of raw materials required for CONTRACTOR-furnished items, the CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time in like manner as if the WORK had been suspended for the convenience and benefit of the OWNER; provided, however, that the CONTRACTOR shall furnish documentation acceptable to the OWNER and ENGINEER that he placed or attempted to place firm orders with Suppliers at a reasonable time in advance of the required date of delivery of the items in question, that such shortages shall have developed following the date such orders were placed or attempts made to place same, that said shortages are general throughout the affected industry, that said shortages are shortages of raw materials required to manufacture CONTRACTOR-furnished items and not simply failure of CONTRACTOR’s Suppliers to manufacture, assemble or ship items on time, and that the CONTRACTOR shall, to the degree possible, have made revisions in the sequence of his operations, within the terms of the Contract Documents, to offset the expected delay. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER, in writing, concerning the cause of delay, within 15 calendar days of the beginning of such delay. The validity of any claim by the CONTRACTOR to an adjustment in the Contract Time shall be determined by the OWNER acting through the ENGINEER, and his findings thereon shall be based on the ENGINEER’s knowledge and observations of the events involved and documentation submitted by the CONTRACTOR, showing all applicable facts relative to the foregoing provisions. Only the physical shortage of raw materials will be considered under these provisions as a cause for adjustment of time and no consideration will be given to any claim that items could not be obtained at a reasonable, practical, or economical cost or price, unless it is shown to the satisfaction of the OWNER that such items could have been obtained only at exorbitant prices entirely out of line with current rates taking into account the quantities involved and the usual practices in obtaining such quantities. C. If the CONTRACTOR is delayed in completion of the WORK by any act of the ENGINEER or of the OWNER not authorized by the Contract Documents, an adjustment in the Contract Time will be made by the Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-37 OWNER in like manner as if the WORK had been suspended for the convenience and benefit of the OWNER. In the event of such delay, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER in writing of the causes of delay within 15 calendar days from the beginning of any such delay. ARTICLE 13 – WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE; TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.01 WARRANTY, GUARANTEE AND CORRECTION PERIOD A. The CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to the OWNER and the ENGINEER that all work, equipment, materials and workmanship are in accordance with the Contract Documents and are not defective. Reasonably prompt notice of defects discovered by the OWNER or ENGINEER shall be given to the CONTRACTOR. All defective work, whether or not in place, may be rejected, corrected, or accepted a s provided in this Article 13. B. If within one (1) year after the date of final completion, as set by the Contractor’s Certificate of Final Completion, or a longer period of time prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee or specific provisions of the Contract Documents, any part of the WORK is found to be defective, the OWNER shall notify the CONTRACTOR in writing and the CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to the OWNER and in accordance with the OWNER’s written notification, either correct the defective work, or, if it has been rejected by the OWNER, remove it from the site and replace it with non-defective work. In the event the CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply with the notification, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the OWNER may have the defective work corrected or rejected work removed and replaced. All direct, indirect, and consequential costs of the removal and replacement including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals will be paid by the CONTRACTOR. This paragraph shall not be construed to limit nor diminish the CONTRACTOR’s absolute guarantee to complete the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. With respect to the WORK’s proximity to the Reservoir Overflow Structure CONTRACTOR shall warranty the structure against settling for one (1) year after the date of final completion or until a follow-up survey is performed as described in Paragraphs 4.05 and 13.03 of the Supplementary General Conditions, whichever is longer. Upon completion of the survey, the OWNER will review the survey and inspect the Reservoir Overflow Structure. If any part of the WORK is found to be defective, the OWNER shall notify the CONTRACTOR in writing and the CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to the OWNER and in Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-38 accordance with the OWNER’s written notification, either correct the defective work, or, if it has been rejected by the OWNER, remove it from the site and replace it with non-defective work. In the event the CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply with the notification, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the OWNER may have the defective work corrected or rejected work removed and replaced. All direct, indirect, and consequential costs of the removal and replacement including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals will be paid by the CONTRACTOR. This paragraph shall not be construed to limit nor diminish the CONTRACTOR’s absolute guarantee to complete the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13.02 ACCESS TO WORK A. The ENGINEER, other representatives of the OWNER, testing agencies, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests shall have access to the work at reasonable times for their observation, inspections, and testing. The CONTRACTOR shall provide proper and safe conditions for their access. 13.03 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER timely notice of readiness of the WORK for all required inspections, tests, or approvals. B. If Laws or Regulations of any public body other than the OWNER, with jurisdiction over the WORK require any work to be specifically inspected, tested, or approved, the CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs in connection therewith. The CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspection or testing required in connection with the OWNER’s or the ENGINEER’s acceptance of a Supplier of materials or equipment proposed as a substitution or "or - equal" to be incorporated in the WORK and of materials or equipment submitted for review prior to the CONTRACTOR’s purchase for incorporation in the WORK. The cost of all inspections, tests, and approvals, with the exception of the above which are required by the Contract Documents, shall be paid by the OWNER (unless otherwise specified). C. The ENGINEER will make, or has made, such inspections and test as the ENGINEER deems necessary to see that the WORK is being accomplished in accordance with the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR, without additional cost to the OWNER, shall provide the labor and equipment necessary to make the WORK available for inspections. Unless otherwise specified in the Supplementary General Conditions, all other costs of inspection and testing will be borne by the Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-39 OWNER. In the event the inspections or tests reveal non -compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall bear the cost of corrective measures deemed necessary by the ENGINEER, as well as the cost of subsequent re-inspection and retesting. Neither observations by the ENGINEER nor inspections, tests, or approvals by others shall relieve the CONTRACTOR from the CONTRACTOR’s obligation to perform the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. All inspections, tests, or approvals other than those required by Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction shall be performed by properly licensed organizations selected by the OWNER. E. If any work (including the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered without the ENGINEER’s written authorization, it must, if requested by the ENGINEER, be uncovered for testing, inspection, and observation. The uncovering shall be at the CONTRACTOR’s expense unless the CONTRACTOR timely notified the ENGINEER of the CONTRACTOR’s intention to cover the same and the ENGINEER failed to act with reasonable promptness in response to the notice. F. If any work is covered contrary to the written request of the ENGINEER, it must, if requested by the ENGINEER, be uncovered for the ENGINEER’s observation at the CONTRACTOR’s expense. G. If the ENGINEER considers it necessary or advisable that covered work be observed, inspected or tested by the ENGINEER or others, the ENGINEER shall direct the CONTRACTOR to uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing that portion of the work in question. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with the ENGINEER’s direction and furnish all necessary labor, material, and equipment. If the work is defective, the CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect and consequential costs of uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing and of satisfactory reconstruction of the work, including, but not limited to, fees and charges for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. However, if the work is not defective, the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both. The increase in Contract Time and Contract Price shall be the CONTRACTOR’s actual time and costs directly attributable to uncovering and exposing the work. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent of the changes, the CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefore as provided in Articles 11 and 12. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-40 13.04 OWNER MAY STOP THE WORK A. If the WORK is defective, or the CONTRACTOR fails to perform work in such a way that the completed WORK will conform to the Contract Documents, the OWNER may order the CONTRACTOR to stop the WORK, or any portion thereof, until the cause for the order has been eliminated. This right of the OWNER to stop the WORK shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of the CONTRACTOR or any other party. 13.05 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK A. When directed by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly correct all defective work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the work has been rejected by the ENGINEER, remove it from the site and replace it with non-defective work. The CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect and consequential costs of correction or removal, including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals made necessary thereby. If the CONTRACTOR does not correct the defective work within 30 days, the OWNER may correct the WORK and charge the CONTRACTOR for the cost of correcting the defective WORK. 13.06 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective work, the OWNER prefers to accept the work, the OWNER may do so. The CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect, and consequential costs attributable to the OWNER’s evaluation of and determination to accept the defective work. If any acceptance of defective work occurs prior to final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contact Documents with respect to the WORK, and the OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. ARTICLE 14 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR, LIQUIDATED DAMAGES AND COMPLETION 14.01 LUMP SUM BID A. A schedule of values or lump sum price breakdown will serve as the basis for progress payments for a lump sum Bid and will be incorporated into the form of Application for Payment included in the Contract Documents. 14.02 UNIT PRICE BID A. Progress payments for a unit price Bid will be based on the number of units completed. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-41 14.03 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT A. Unless otherwise prescribed by the OWNER, on the 25th of each month, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER for review and approval, an Application for Payment completed and signed by the CONTRACTOR covering the WORK completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as required by the Contract Documents. B. The Application for Payment shall identify, as a sub-total, the amount of the CONTRACTOR’s Total Earnings to Date, plus the Net Value of Materials On-site which have not yet been incorporated in the WORK. C. The Net Payment Due to the CONTRACTOR shall be the above- mentioned sub-total, from which shall be deducted the retainage amount and the total amount of all previous payments made to the CONTRACTOR. D. The OWNER may retain five percent of the amount otherwise due to the Contractor as retainage. Monies retained shall be placed in an interest- bearing account for the benefit of the CONTRACTOR. E. Except as otherwise provided in the Supplementary General Conditions, the value of materials stored at the site shall be valued at 80 percent of the value of the materials. This amount shall be based upon the value of all acceptable materials and equipment stored at the site or at another location agreed to in writing by the OWNER; provided, each individual item has a value of more that $5,000 and will become a permanent part of the WORK. The Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that the CONTRACTOR has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all liens, charges, security interests, and encumbrances (which are hereinafter referred to as “Liens”) and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance and other arrangements to protect the OWNER’s interest therein, all of which will be satisfactory to the OWNER. 14.04 CONTRACTOR’S WARRANTY OF TITLE A. The CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all work, materials, and equipment covered by an Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the WORK or not, will pass to the OWNER no later than the time of final payment, free and clear of all liens. 14.05 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT A. The ENGINEER will, within 7 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-42 present the Application to the OWNER, or return the Application to the CONTRACTOR indicating in writing the ENGINEER’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, the CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 30 days after presentation of the Application for Payment with the ENGINEER’s recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.05B) become due and when due will be paid by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR. B. The OWNER may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the ENGINEER to compensate for claims made by the OWNER on account of the CONTRACTOR’s performance of the WORK or other items entitling the OWNER to a credit against the amount recommended, but the OWNER must give the CONTRACTOR written notice within 7 days (with a copy to the ENGINEER) stating the reasons for such action. 14.06 PARTIAL UTILIZATION A. The OWNER may utilize or place into service any item of equipment or other usable portion of the WORK at any time prior to completion of the WORK. The OWNER shall notify the CONTRACTOR in writing of its intent to exercise this right. The notice will identify the equipment or specific portion or portions of the WORK to be utilized or otherwise placed into service. B. It shall be understood by the CONTRACTOR that until such written notification is issued, all responsibility for care and maintenance of all items or portions of the WORK to be partially utilized shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. Upon the issuance of a notice of partial utilization, the ENGINEER will deliver to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities and insurance. Upon the OWNER’s acceptance of these recommendations, the ENGINEER’s aforesaid recommendation will be binding on the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR until final payment. C. The CONTRACTOR shall retain full responsibility for satisfactory completion of the WORK, regardless of whether a portion thereof has been partially utilized by the OWNER, and the CONTRACTOR’s 1-year correction period shall commence only after the date of Final Completion for the WORK. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-43 14.07 DAMAGES A. The CONTRACTOR shall, as provided in the Agreement, pay to the OWNER as fixed, agreed, and liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, for each calendar day’s delay in completion of the Work beyond the Contract Time for Substantial Completion in the amount of $ 5,000. The CONTRACTOR shall, as provided in the Agreement, pay to the OWNER as fixed, agreed, and liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, for each calendar day’s delay in completion of the Work beyond the Contract Time for Final Completion in the amount of $ 1,000. B. All times specified in the Contract Documents are hereby declared to be of the essence. 14.08 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. When the CONTRACTOR considers the WORK ready for its intended use, the CONTRACTOR will notify the OWNER and the ENGINEER in writing that the WORK is Substantially Complete. Within a reasonable time thereafter, the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER shall make an inspection of the WORK to determine the status of completion. If the ENGINEER does not consider the WORK Substantially Complete, the ENGINEER will notify the OWNER and CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If the ENGINEER considers the WORK Substantially Complete, the ENGINEER will prepare and deliver to the OWNER for its execution the Notice of Substantial Completion signed by the ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR, which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. B. The Notice of Substantial Completion shall be a release by the CONTRACTOR of the OWNER and its agents from all claims and liability to the CONTRACTOR for anything done or furnished for, or relating to, the WORK or for any act or neglect of the OWNER or of any person relating to or affecting the WORK, to the date of Substantial Completion, except demands against the OWNER for the remainder of the amounts kept or retained from progress payments and excepting pending, unresolved claims filed in writing prior to the date of Substantial Completion. At the time of delivery of the Notice of Substantial Completion, the ENGINEER will deliver to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, if applicable, a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities and insurance. Upon the OWNER’s acceptance of these recommendations, the ENGINEER’s recommendation will be binding on the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR until final payment. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-44 C. The OWNER, upon written notice to the CONTRACTOR, shall have the right to exclude the CONTRACTOR from the WORK after the date of Substantial Completion, and complete all or portions of the WORK at the CONTRACTOR’s expense. 14.09 COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT A. Upon written certification from the CONTRACTOR that the WORK is complete (if a Notice of Substantial Completion has been issued this certification must occur within 45 days of that date), the ENGINEER will make a final inspection with the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. If the OWNER and ENGINEER do not consider the WORK complete, the ENGINEER will notify the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the WORK is incomplete or defective. The CONTRACTOR shall immediately take the measures necessary to remedy these deficiencies. If the ENGINEER and OWNER consider the WORK complete, the CONTRACTOR may proceed to file its application for final payment pursuant to this Article. At the request of the CONTRACTOR, the ENGINEER may recommend to the OWNER that certain minor deficiencies in the WORK that do not prevent the entire WORK from being used by the OWNER for its intended use, and the completion of which will be unavoidably delayed due to no fault of the CONTRACTOR, be exempted from being completed prerequisite to final payment. These outstanding items of pickup work, or “punch list items,” shall be listed on the Notice of Substantial Completion, together with the recommended time limits for their completion, and extended warranty requirements for those items and the value of such items. B. After the issuance of the Notice of Completion and after the CONTRACTOR has completed corrections that have not been exempted to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and delivered to the ENGINEER all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents and other documents, all as required by the Contract Documents; and after the ENGINEER has indicated that the WORK is acceptable, the CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final application for payment shall be accompanied by all documentation called for in the Contract Documents and other data and schedules as the OWNER or ENGINEER may reasonably require, including an affidavit of the CONTRACTOR that all labor, services, material, equipment and other indebtedness connected with the WORK for which the OWNER or his property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied, and a consent of the payment bond surety to final payment, all in forms approved by the OWNER. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-45 14.10 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. If, on the basis of the ENGINEER’s observation of the WORK during construction and final inspection, and the ENGINEER’s review of the final application for payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER is satisfied that the WORK has been completed and the CONTRACTOR has fulfilled all of his obligations under the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of the final application for payment, indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the application to the OWNER for payment. Thereupon, the ENGINEER will give written notice to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR that the WORK is acceptable by executing the Notice of Completion. Otherwise, the ENGINEER will return the application to the CONTRACTOR, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case the CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the application. B. Within 45 calendar days after the Notice of Completion, the OWNER will make final payment including all deducted retainage and interest to the CONTRACTOR. The OWNER’s remittance of final payment shall be the OWNER’s acceptance of the WORK if formal acceptance of the WORK is not indicated otherwise. The final payment shall be that amount remaining after deducting all prior payments and all amounts to be kept or retained under the provisions of the Contract, including the following items: 1. Liquidated or actual damages, as applicable. 2. Two times the value of any outstanding items of pickup work or “punch list items”, indicated on the ENGINEER’s Notice of Completion as being yet uncompleted. 14.11 CONTRACTOR’S CONTINUING OBLIGATIONS A. The CONTRACTOR’s obligation to perform and complete the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. Neither recommendation of any progress or final payment by the ENGINEER, nor the issuance of a Notice of Substantial Completion or Notice of Completion, nor payment by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents, nor any use or occupancy of the WORK or any part thereof by the OWNER, nor any act of acceptance by the OWNER nor any failure to do so, nor any review of a shop drawing or sample submittal, will constitute an acceptance of work or materials not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of the CONTRACTOR’s obligation to perform the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-46 14.12 FINAL PAYMENT TERMINATES LIABILITY OF OWNER A. Final payment is defined as the last progress payment made to the CONTRACTOR for earned funds, less deductions listed in Paragraph 14.10B herein. The acceptance by the CONTRACTOR of the final payment referred to in Paragraph 14.10 herein, shall be a release of the OWNER and its agents from all claims of liability to the CONTRACTOR for anything done or furnished for, or relating to, the work or for any act or neglect of the OWNER or of any person relating to or affecting the work, except demands against the OWNER for the remainder, if any, of the amounts kept or retained under the provisions of Paragraph 14.10 herein; and excepting pending, unresolved claims filed prior to the date of the Notice of Substantial Completion. ARTICLE 15 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.01 SUSPENSION OF WORK BY OWNER A. The OWNER acting through the ENGINEER may, by written notice to the Contractor, temporarily suspend the WORK, in whole or in part, for a period or periods of time, but not to exceed 90 days, for the convenience and benefit of the OWNER upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following: (1) unsuitable weather; (2) delay in delivery of OWNER - furnished equipment or materials, or such other conditions as are considered unfavorable for prosecution of the work; (3) shortfall in construction funds; (4) constraints imposed by public entities, public utilities, property owners or legal proceedings; (5) failure or delay in acquisition of easements or right-of-way by the OWNER; or (6) other conditions which, in the opinion of the OWNER, warrant a delay in the WORK. Suspended WORK shall be resumed by the CONTRACTOR within 10 calendar days of receipt from the ENGINEER of written notice to resume work. Whenever the OWNER temporarily suspends work for any conditions enumerated in this Article, the CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time as specified in Article 12.03 C. B. The suspension of work shall be effective upon receipt by the CONTRACTOR of a written order suspending the work and shall be terminated upon receipt by the Contractor of a written order terminating the suspension. C. The CONTRACTOR hereby indemnifies and holds harmless the OWNER and ENGINEER, their officers, agents and employees, from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses, including lost profits and attorney's fees, arising out of or resulting from the temporary suspension of the WORK, whether for the OWNER’s convenience described in this Article or for whatever other reasons, including the stoppage of work by Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-47 the ENGINEER for the CONTRACTOR’s failure to comply with any order issued by the ENGINEER. 15.02 TERMINATION OF AGREEMENT BY OWNER (CONTRACTOR DEFAULT) A. In the event of default by the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may give written notice to the CONTRACTOR of OWNER’s intent to terminate the Agreement. The notice shall state the event of default and the time allowed to remedy the default. It shall be considered a default by the CONTRACTOR whenever the CONTRACTOR shall: (1) declare bankruptcy, become insolvent, or assign its assets for the benefit of its creditors; (2) fail to provide materials or workmanship meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents; (3) disregard or violate provisions of the Contract Documents or ENGINEER’s instructions, (4) fail to prosecute the WORK according to the approved progress schedule; or, (5) fail to provide a qualified superintendent, competent workmen, or materials or equipment meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. If the CONTRACTOR fails to remedy the conditions constituting default within the time allowed, the OWNER may then issue a Notice of Termination. B. In the event the Agreement is terminated in accordance with Paragraph 15.02A, the OWNER may take possession of the WORK and may complete the WORK by whatever method or means the OWNER may select. The cost of completing the WORK shall be deducted from the balance which would have been due the CONTRACTOR had the Agreement not been terminated and the WORK completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such cost exceeds the balance which would have been due, the CONTRACTOR shall pay the excess amount to the OWNER. If such cost is less than the balance which would have been due, the CONTRACTOR shall have no claim to the difference. 15.03 TERMINATION OF AGREEMENT BY OWNER (FOR CONVENIENCE) A. The OWNER may terminate the Agreement at any time if it is found that reasons beyond the control of either the OWNER or CONTRACTOR make it impossible or against the OWNER’s interests to complete the WORK. In such a case, the CONTRACTOR shall have no claims against the OWNER except: (1) for the value of the work, as determined by the ENGINEER, performed by the CONTRACTOR up to the date the Agreement is terminated; and, (2) for the cost of materials and equipment on hand, in transit, or on definite commitment, as of the date the Agreement is terminated, which would be needed in the WORK and which meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. The value of work performed and the cost of materials and equipment delivered to the site, as mentioned above, shall be determined by the ENGINEER in accordance with the procedure prescribed from making the final Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-48 application for payment and final payment under Paragraphs 14.09 and 14.10. 15.04 TERMINATION OF AGREEMENT BY CONTRACTOR A. The CONTRACTOR may terminate the Agreement upon 10 days written notice to the OWNER, whenever: (1) the WORK has been suspended under the provisions of Paragraph 15.01, for more than 90 consecutive days through no fault or negligence of the CONTRACTOR, and notice to resume work or to terminate the agreement has not been received from the OWNER within this time period; or, (2) the OWNER should fail to pay the CONTRACTOR any monies due him in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents and within 60 days after presentation to the OWNER by the CONTRACTOR of a request therefor, unless within said 10-day period the OWNER shall have remedied the condition upon which the payment delay was based. In the event of such termination, the CONTRACTOR shall have no claims against the OWNER except for those claims specifically enumerated in Paragraph 15.03, and as determined in accordance with the requirements of that paragraph. ARTICLE 16 – NOTICE 16.01 GIVING NOTICE A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 16.02 TITLE TO MATERIALS FOUND ON THE WORK A. The OWNER reserves the right to retain title to all soils, stone, sand, gravel, and other materials developed and obtained from excavations and other operations connected with the WORK. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, neither the CONTRACTOR nor any Subcontractor shall have any right, title, or interest in or to any such materials. The CONTRACTOR will be permitted to use in the WORK, without charge, any such materials which meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. 16.03 RIGHT TO AUDIT A. If the CONTRACTOR submits a claim to the OWNER for additional compensation, the OWNER shall have the right, as a condition to considering the claim, and as a basis for evaluation of the claim, and until the claim has been settled, to audit the CONTRACTOR’s books. This Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-49 right shall include the right to examine books, records, documents, and other evidence and accounting procedures and practices, sufficient to discover and verify all direct and indirect costs of whatever nature claimed to have been incurred or anticipated to be incurred and for which the claim has been submitted. The right to audit shall include the right to inspect the CONTRACTOR’s plants, or such parts thereof, as may be or have been engaged in the performance of the WORK. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the right to audit encompasses all subcontracts and is binding upon subcontractors. The right to examine and inspect herein provided for shall be exercisable through such representatives as the OWNER deems desirable during the CONTRACTOR’s normal business hours at the office of the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall make available to the OWNER for auditing, all relevant accounting records and documents, and other financial data, and upon request, shall submit true copies of requested records to the OWNER. 16.04 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. If the CONTRACTOR during the course of work observes the existence of hazardous material, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly notify the OWNER and the ENGINEER. The OWNER shall consult with the ENGINEER regarding removal or encapsulation of the hazardous material and the CONTRACTOR shall not perform any work pertinent to the hazardous material prior to receipt or special instruction from the OWNER through the ENGINEER. ARTICLE 17 – SUBCONTRACT LIMITATIONS 17.01 SUBCONTRACT LIMITATIONS A. In addition to the provisions of Paragraph 6.05 of the General Conditions, the CONTRACTOR shall perform not less than 60 percent of the WORK with its own forces (i.e., without subcontracting). The 60 percent requirement shall be understood to refer to the WORK, the value of which totals not less than 60 percent of the Contract Price. ARTICLE 18 – PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS 18.01 PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and save harmless the OWNER, the ENGINEER, and their officers, agents, and employees, against all claims or liability arising from the use of any patented or copyrighted design, device, material, or process by the CONTRACTOR or any of his subcontractors in the performance of the WORK. – END OF SECTION – Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 01/04/2024 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA021 General Conditions Cottonwoods Connection Page 00700-50 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS District Project No.: SA061 Summary of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 11 00-1 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes: 1. Location and Description of Work 2. Construction Contracts, This Project 3. Construction Contracts, Other Projects 4. Work by Others 5. Work by OWNER 6. OWNER Furnished Equipment and Materials 7. OWNER Assigned Procurement Contracts 8. OWNER Pre-selected Equipment and Materials 9. Sequence and Progress of Work 10. Contractor’s Use of Site 11. Easements and Rights -of-Way 12. Notices to OWNERs and Authorities of Properties Adjacent to the Work 13. Salvage of Equipment and Materials 14. Partial Utilization by OWNER 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 31 13 – Coordination 1.03 LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work included in this contract includes all services, labor, equipment, supplies, and materials required to construct the proposed improvements, including the contract previously executed for pipe supply, and sales tax. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS District Project No.: SA061 Summary of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 11 00-2 B. The Cottonwoods Connection Project (Project) is a project to construct new pipelines that, when interconnected, will provide a resilient regional water supply and add additional capacity and flexibility to exchange water supplies between MWDSLS and Salt Lake City Corporation both in the near and long term. The Project is comprised of three separate pipeline schedules that are interconnected to convey raw or finished water north or south. Contractors may bid on any one (1) or all three (3) schedules: 1. Schedule A, Cottonwoods Connector – Schedule 1 (CC-1) Work; includes construction of 36-inch welded steel pipe (WSP), outlets for future connections, air valve and blow off structures, cathodic protection facilities, and associated appurtenances. Note that this section includes heavy -wall pipe with full penetration butt welds to mitigate fault crossings and slope stability issues. This schedule is bid in two distinct packages: a. Schedule A, Package A-1; includes construction crossing Wasatch Boulevard and east to the Big Cottonwood Water Treatment Plant. This schedule has specific coordination efforts due to UDOT rehabilitation activities as described in Section 01 31 13. b. Schedule A, Package A-2; includes construction in Fort Union Boulevard. 2. Schedule B, Cottonwoods Connector – Schedule 2 (CC-2) Work; includes construction of 36-inch WSP (base bid) or HDPE pipe (bid alternate), site improvements, and asphalt replacement. a. Little Cottonwood Water Treatment Plant (LCWTP) improvements: pavement replacement, curb and gutter, drainage improvements, vehicle gate replacements, pedestrian gate installation, and entrance sign site improvements. 3. Schedule C, Salt Lake Aqueduct Replacement (SLAR) Work; includes construction of 60-, 66-, and 72-inch WSP for the SLAR, outlets for future connections, turnout vaults, air valve and blow of structures, cathodic protection facilities, and associated appurtenances. Schedule C Work also includes installation of 69-inch WSP to relocate a portion of the Salt Lake Aqueduct (SLA) and installation of 36- inch WSP to relocate a portion of the Little Cottonwood Conduit (LCC). This schedule is bid in three distinct packages : a. Schedule C, Package C-1 SLAR including: 1) SLAR/CC-2 bifurcation and meter vault and site improvements. 2) SLAR/CC-1 bifurcation and valve vault and site improvements. 3) Grading and drainage improvements north of the 10 M illion Gallon (MG) Reservoir. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS District Project No.: SA061 Summary of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 11 00-3 b. Schedule C, Package C-2 Demolition and relocation of the Salt Lake Aqueduct. Specific coordination efforts for this package are described in Section 01 31 13. c. Schedule C, Package C-3 Demolition and relocation of the Little Cottonwood Conduit. Specific coordination efforts for this package are described in Section 01 31 13. 4. Utility relocations (Schedules A , B, and C). 5. Fiber optic conduit and pull boxes (Schedules A , B, and C). 1.04 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS, THIS PROJECT A. See Article 8 of the Agreement (00 500). 1.05 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS, OTHER PROJECTS A. If multiple contractors are selected to perform the work described in the three (3) bid schedules A-C, each contractor shall coordinate with the other selected contractor (s). 1.06 WORK BY OTHERS A. OWNER is constructing an aquifer storage and recovery (ASR) facility on the LCWTP site. Contractor shall coordinate with the ASR contractor for parking, staging, storing, and traffic in and out of the LCWTP site. 1.07 WORK BY OWNER A. OWNER is responsible for continuous operation and maintenance of the SLA , LCC, and LCWTP, including regular chemical deliveries to the LCWTP. Contractor shall not impact OWNER’s ability to deliver both quantity and quality of water. B. OWNER will perform the following in connection with the Work: Operate all existing valves, gates, pumps, equipment, and appurtenances that will affect OWNER’s operation, unless otherwise specified or indicated. C. Receiving shipments and bulk chemical deliveries for offload at one of two chemical buildings on the LCWTP site. Contractor shall schedule work to avoid obstructing offloading activities and shall move vehicles as needed to accommodate deliveries. See Section 01 31 13 – Coordination for a full list of work restrictions. 1.08 OWNER-ASSIGNED PRE-SELECTION DOCUMENTS A. Volume 4 of the Contract Documents Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS District Project No.: SA061 Summary of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 11 00-4 1.09 OWNER PRE -SELECTED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Welded steel pipe: 1. Schedule A: 36 -inch WSP. 2. Schedule B: 36 -inch WSP (if Deductive Alternate is not used). 3. Schedule C: 36 -, 60 -, 66 -, 69 -, and 72 -inch WSP. 1.10 SEQUENCE AND PROGRESS OF WORK A. Requirements for sequencing and coordinating with OWNER’s operations, including maintenance of plant operations during construction, and requirements for tie -ins and shutdowns, are in Section 01 31 13 − Coordination. 1.11 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF SITE A. Contractors’ use of the Site shall be confined to the areas shown. Contractor shall share use of the Site with other contractors and others specified in this Section. B. Move stored products that interfere with operations of OWNER, other contractors, or others performing work for OWNER. 1.12 EASEMENTS AND RIGHTS -OF-WAY A. Easements and rights-of -way will be provided by OWNER in accordance with the General Conditions. Confine construction operations to within OWNER’s property, public rights-of -way, easements obtained by OWNER, and the limits shown. Use care in placing construction tools, equipment, excavated materials, and products to be incorporated into the Work to avoid damaging property and interfering with traffic. Do not enter private property outside the construction li mits without permission from the OWNER of the property. 1.13 NOTICES TO OWNERS AND AUTHORITIES OF PROPERTIES ADJACENT TO THE WORK A. Contractor shall retain a qualified public involvement firm to interact with and n otify owners of affected properties and adjacent properties and utilities when execution of the Work may affect their property, facilities, or use of property. The qualified firm shall have a minimum of five years of experience with public projects, including three similar pipeline projects. B. When it is necessary to temporarily obstruc t access to property, or when utility service connection will be interrupted, provide notices a minimum of two weeks in advance to enable affected persons to provide for their needs. Conform notices to Laws and Regulations and, whether delivered orally or in writing, include appropriate information concerning the interruption and instructions on how to limit inconvenienc e caused. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS District Project No.: SA061 Summary of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 11 00-5 C. Notify utility owners and other concerned entities at least 48 hours prior to cutting or closing streets or other traffic areas or excavating near Underground Facilities or exposed utilities. 1.14 PARTIAL UTILIZATION BY OWNER A. OWNER reserves the right to enter and use portions of the Work prior to Certificate of Substantial Completion being issued by Engineer. B. OWNER shall be responsible to prevent premature connections by private and public parties, persons or groups of persons, before Engineer issues Certificate of Substantial Completion for the portion of Work being partially utilized by OWNER. C. Contractor shall cooperate with OWNER, OWNER’s agents, and Engineer to accelerate completion of Work designed for partial utilization by OWNER in accordance with Contractor’s progress schedule. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/7/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Measurement and Payment Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 20 00-1 SECTION 01 20 00 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes requirements for measuring and paying for the various items of work outlined in Section 00 40 00 – Bid Form necessary to complete the Project. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 00 40 00 – Bid Form B. Section 01 29 73 – Schedule of Values 1.03 MEASUREMENT A. Weighing, measuring, and metering devices used to measure quantity of materials for Work shall be suitable for purpose intended and conform to tolerances and specifications as specified in National Institute of Standards and Technology, Handbook 44. B. Whenever pay quantities of material are determined by weight, material shall be weighed on scales furnished by Contractor and certified accurate by state agency responsible. Weight or load slip shall be obtained from weigher and delivered to Owner’s representative at point of delivery of material. C. If material is shipped by rail, car weights will be accepted provided that actual weight of material only will be paid for and not minimum car weight used for assessing freight tariff, and provided further that car weights will not be acceptable for material to be passed through mixing plants. D. Vehicles used to haul material being paid for by weight shall be weighed empty daily and at such additional times as required by Engineer. Each vehicle shall bear a plainly legible identification mark. E. Materials that are specified for measurement by the cubic yard measured in the vehicle shall be hauled in vehicles of such type and size that actual contents may be readily and accurately determined. Unless all vehicles are of uniform capacity, each vehicle must bear a plainly legible identification mark indicating its water level capacity. Vehicles shall be loaded to at least their water level capacity. Loads hauled in vehicles not meeting above requirements or loads of a quantity less than the capacity of the vehicle, measured after being leveled off as above provided, will be subject to rejection, and no compensation will be allowed for such material. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/7/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Measurement and Payment Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 20 00-2 F. Quantities Based on Profile Elevations: Existing ground profiles shown on Drawings were taken from a topographic map drawn with contour intervals of 1 foot with supplementary spot elevations. G. Quantities will be based on ground profiles shown. Field surveys will not be made to confirm accuracy of elevations shown. H. Units of measure shown in Section 00 40 00 – Bid Form shall be as follows, unless specified otherwise: Item Method of Measurement CY Cubic Yard – field measure by Engineer within limits specified or shown CY-VM Cubic Yard – measured in vehicle by volume DAY Standard 8 hour work day EA Each – Field count by Engineer GAL Gallon – field measure by Engineer LB Pound(s) – weight measure by scale LF Linear Foot – field measure by Engineer SF Square Foot SY Square Yard TON Ton – weight measure by scale (2,000 pounds) 1.04 BID ITEMS – GENERAL A. Lump sump item in this Section refers to and includes at a minimum the items listed in the Bid Form and constitute all items for completing the Work. B. Compensation for all services, items, materials, and equipment shall be included in prices stipulated for lump sum pay item listed in this Section and included in the Contract. C. No direct or separate payment will be made for providing miscellaneous temporary or accessory works, bonds, insurance, or other requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, and other requirements of the Contract Documents. D. Lump sum bid price shall include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item. E. Include all additional Work items, services, goods, resources, and manpower necessary for installation of the Work to provide a completely functional system in accordance with the Contract Documents. Include these costs associated with providing a completely functional system within the listed items on the Bid Form and as specified herein. F. See Section 01 29 73 – Schedule of Values for additional information and requirements. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/7/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Measurement and Payment Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 20 00-3 1.05 LUMP SUM BID ITEMS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF COTTONWOODS CONNECTION PROJECT SCHEDULES A, B, AND C A. No measurement shall be made for any of these bid items. However, monthly progress payments will be based on CONTRACTOR’s Schedule of Values (lump sum price breakdown) as described in Section 01 29 73 – Schedule of Values. B. Payment for these items will be made at the lump sum prices named in the Bid separately for each Schedule and shall constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to, all pipe, pipeline appurtenances, valves, earthwork, reinforced cast in place and pre-cast concrete structures, surface restoration, mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, testing, and startup. C. Payment shall include all compensation to be received by the CONTRACTOR for furnishing all tools, equipment, supplies, and manufactured articles, and for all labor, operations, and incidentals appurtenant to the items of work being described, as necessary to complete the various items of the WORK all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including all appurtenances thereto, and including all costs of permits, and cost of compliance with the regulations of public agencies having jurisdiction, including Safety and Health Requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration of the U.S. Department of Labor (OSHA). No separate payment will be made for any item that is not specifically set forth in the Schedule of Vaues, and all costs therefor shall be included in the prices named in the Schedule of Vaues for the various appurtenant items of work. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Substitution Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 25 00-1 SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes procedural requirements for product substitutions and/or substitute construction methods or procedures when construction methods or procedures are specified. B. Requests for substitutions of equipment and material shall conform to the requirements of the General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions. C. Procedures for substitution requests and review including evaluation, reimbursement, acceptance, and determination shall be in accordance with General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. The following words or terms are not defined but, when used in this Section, have the following meaning: 1. “Acceptable Manufacturers” considered for substitution include Suppliers of equipment and material of proven reliability, and as manufactured by reputable manufacturers having experience in the production of specified equipment and material. Equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the industry accepted practices and shall operate satisfactorily when installed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. “Products” includes materials, equipment, machinery, components, fixtures, systems, and other goods incorporated in the Work. Products do not include machinery and equipment used for preparing, fabricating, conveying, erecting, or installing the Work. Products include Owner-furnished goods incorporated in the Work where use of such goods is specifically required in the Contract Documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. As defined in Part 2 herein. PART 2 – EXECUTION 2.01 GENERAL A. All costs associated with incorporation of a substitution shall be borne by the Contractor, including but not limited to, the cost of redesign and construction provisions. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 05 - 0 4 - 2 0 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Substitution Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 25 00-2 B. If Engineer does not approve the proposed substitute, Contractor shall provide the specified product, manufacturer, method, or procedure, as applicable. C. Approval of a substitution request will not relieve Contractor from requirement for submitting Shop Drawings as set forth in the Contract Documents. D. All costs associated with Engineer’s review of a substitution shall be recorded by Engineer, submitted to Owner, and charged to Contractor. 2.02 CONTRACTOR PREREQUISITES A. In submitting a request for substitution, Contractor represents that: 1. Contractor has investigated proposed substitution and determined that it is equivalent to item, product, method, or procedure specified, as applicable. 2. Contractor will provide the same or better guarantees or warranties for proposed substitution as for the specified product, manufacturer, method, or procedure, as applicable. 3. Contractor waives all Claims for additional costs or extension of time related to proposed substitution that subsequently may become apparent. B. Contractor shall submit references for a minimum of five (5) successful installations of the manufacturer’s equipment of the same model, size, and type as specified in the Contract Documents. 2.03 DENIAL OF REVIEW A. A proposed substitution will not be accepted for review if: 1. Approval would require changes in design concept or a substantial revision of the Contract Documents. 2. Approval would delay completion of the Work or the work of other contractors. 3. Substitution request is indicated or implied on a Shop Drawing or other submittal, or on a request for interpretation or clarification, and is not accompanied by Contractor’s formal request for substitution. 4. If the substitution is not clearly substantiated by performance criteria as providing an equivalent or superior performing installation. 2.04 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE A. Requests for approval of substitute products or items will be considered for a period of 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. After end of specified period, Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Substitution Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 25 00-3 requests will be considered only in case of unavailability of a specified product or other conditions beyond Contractor’s control. B. Submit copies of request for substitution. C. Submit a separate request for each substitution. D. Include the following information with each request in addition to the requirements of the General Conditions and information required on substitution request forms: 1. Product identification, including manufacturer’s name and address. 2. Manufacturer’s literature with product description, performance and test data, and reference standards with which product complies. 3. Samples, if appropriate. 4. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used, and date of installation. 5. Certified tests, where applicable, by an independent laboratory attesting the proposed substitution is equal. 6. Cost information for the proposed substitution and the specified products. 7. Lead time information for the proposed substitution and specified products. 8. All other submittal requirements indicated in the individual Specification Sections associated with the specified equipment and material. 2.05 CONSTRUCTION METHODS SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE A. Where construction methods or procedures are specified, for a period of 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement, Engineer will consider Contractor’s written requests for substitute construction methods or procedures specified. B. Submit copies of request for substitution. C. Submit a separate request for each substitution. D. Include the following information with each request in addition to the requirements of the General Conditions and information required on substitution request forms: 1. Detailed description of proposed method or procedure. 2. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the specified method or procedure. 3. Drawings illustrating method or procedure. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Substitution Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 25 00-4 4. Other data required by Engineer to establish that proposed substitution is equivalent to specified method or procedure. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contract Modification Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 26 00-1 SECTION 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes provisions that expand the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions related to the following: 1. Requests for interpretation. 2. Field Orders 3. Work Change Directives 4. Proposal requests 5. Change Proposals 6. Change Orders 7. Cost of the Work B. The following forms have been appended to the end of this section for Contractor’s use: 1. 2013 EJCDC Form C-942, Field Order 2. 2013 EJCDC Form C-940, Work Change Directive 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (EJCDC) Construction Related Documents 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Contract modification documents to Engineer’s contact person and address in the Contract Documents. B. Requests for Interpretation 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 03 2 6 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contract Modification Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 26 00-2 1. Submit written or electronic requests for interpretation to Engineer. Contractor and Owner may submit requests for interpretation. 2. Submit request for interpretation to obtain clarification or interpretation of the Contract Documents. Report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies in the Contract Documents using requests for interpretation. 3. Do not submit request for interpretation when other form of communication is appropriate, such as submittals, requests for substitutions or “or equals”, notices, ordinary correspondence, or other form of communication. Improperly prepared or inappropriate requests for interpretation will be returned without response or action. 4. Submit each request for interpretation on a form acceptable to Engineer. a. Number each request for interpretation as follows: Numbering system shall be the Contract number and designation followed by a hyphen and three- digit sequential number. b. In space provided on form, describe the interpretation requested. Provide additional sheets as necessary. Include text and sketches as required in sufficient detail for engineer’s response. c. When applicable, request for interpretation shall include Contractor’s recommended resolution. C. Change Proposals 1. Submit written Change Proposal to Engineer in response to each proposal request, and when Contractor believes a change in the Contract Price or Contract Times or other change to the terms of the Contract is required. 2. Each Change Proposal shall be submitted on a Change Proposal form acceptable to Engineer. 3. Number each Change Proposal as follows: a. Numbering system shall be the Contract number and designation followed by a hyphen and three-digit sequential number. Example: First Change Proposal for the general contract for project named “Contract 23” would be, “Proposal No. 23-001”. 4. In space provided on form: a. Describe scope of each proposed change. Include text and sketches on additional sheets as required to provide detail sufficient for Engineer’s review and response. If a change item is submitted in response to proposal request, write in as scope, “In accordance with Change Proposal Request No.” Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contract Modification Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 26 00-3 followed by the proposal request number. Provide written clarifications, if any, to scope of change. b. Provide justification for each proposed change. If change is in response to proposal request, write in as justification, “In accordance with Change Proposal Request No.” followed by the proposal request number. c. List the total change in the Contract Price and Contract Times for each proposed change. 5. Unless otherwise directed by Engineer, attach to the Change Proposal detailed breakdowns of pricing (Cost of the Work and Contractor’s fee) including: a. List of Work tasks to accomplish the change. b. For each task, labor cost breakdown including labor classification, total hours per labor classification, and hourly cost rate for each labor classification. c. Construction equipment and machinery to be used, including manufacturer, model, and year of manufacture, and number of hours for each. d. Detailed breakdown of materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, including quantities, unit costs, and total cost, with Supplier’s written quotations. e. Breakdowns of the Cost of the Work and fee for Subcontractors, including labor, construction equipment and machinery, and materials and equipment incorporated into the Work, other costs, and Subcontractor fees. f. Breakdown of other costs eligible, in accordance with the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. g. Other information required by Engineer. h. Contractor’s fees applied to eligible Contractor costs and eligible Subcontractor costs. PART 2 – EXECUTION 2.01 GENERAL A. Always retain a complete copy of each Contract modification document with all related documents and Engineer’s response at Contractor’s office and at the Site. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contract Modification Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 26 00-4 2.02 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION A. Submit one original (hard copy or electronic) of each request for interpretation. Submit each request for interpretation with separate letter of transmittal if hard copies are submitted. B. Engineer will provide timely review of requests for interpretation. Allow sufficient time for review and response. C. Engineer will maintain log of requests for interpretation. Copy of log will be provided upon request. D. Engineer will provide written response to each request for interpretation. One copy of Engineer’s response will be distributed to: 1. Contractor 2. Owner 3. Engineer 4. Project Representative E. If Engineer requests additional information to make an interpretation, provide information requested within ten (10) days, unless Engineer allows additional time, via correspondence referring to request for interpretation number. F. If Contractor or Owner believes that a change in the Contract Price or Contract Times or other change to the Contract is required, notify Engineer in writing before proceeding with the Work associated with the request for interpretation. 2.03 FIELD ORDERS A. General 1. Field Orders, when required, will be initiated and issued by Engineer. 2. Field Orders authorize minor variations in the Work but do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Field Orders will be in the form of Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (EJCDC) document C-942, “Field Order” or other Engineer’s accepted form. 4. Engineer will maintain a log of Field Orders issued. B. Procedure 1. Electronic copies of Field Orders will be maintained, stored, and distributed by electronic construction document management system. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contract Modification Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 26 00-5 2. Contractor shall acknowledge receipt by signing and returning one copy to Engineer. 3. Field Orders will be incorporated into subsequent Change Orders, as a no-cost change to the Contract. 4. If Contractor or Owner believes that a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times or other change to the Contract is required, immediately notify Engineer in writing before proceeding with the Work associated with the Field Order. 5. If the Field Order is unclear, submit request for interpretation. 6. Effective date of the Field Order shall be the date of signature by Engineer, unless otherwise indicated thereon. 2.04 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. General 1. Work Change Directives, when required, order additions, deletions, or revisions to the Work. 2. Work Change Directives do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times but are evidence that the parties to the Contract expect that the change ordered or documented by the Work Change Directive will be incorporated in subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Work Change Directives will be in the form of EJCDC document C-940, “Work Change Directive” or other Engineer’s accepted form. B. Procedure 1. Three originals of Work Change Directive signed by Owner and Engineer will be furnished to Contractor, who shall promptly sign each original Work Change Directive and, within five days of receipt, return all originals to Engineer. 2. Original, signed Work Change Directives will be distributed as follows: a. Contractor: One original b. Owner: One original c. Engineer: One original 3. One hard copy of each Work Change Directive will be distributed to Project Representative . Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contract Modification Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 26 00-6 4. When required by Engineer, document for the Work performed under each separate Work Change Directive, for each day, the number and type of workers employed and hours worked; equipment used including manufacturer, model, and year of equipment, and number of hours; materials used, receipts for and descriptions of materials and equipment incorporated into the Work, invoices and labor and equipment breakdowns for Subcontractors and Suppliers, and other information required by Owner or Engineer, in a format acceptable to Engineer. Submit this documentation to Engineer as a Change Proposal. 5. Effective Date of Work Change Directive shall be the date of signature by Owner, unless otherwise indicated thereon. 2.05 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. General 1. Owner may, in anticipation of ordering an addition, deletion, or revision to the Work, request Contractor to prepare a detailed proposal of cost and times to perform contemplated change. 2. Proposal request will include reference number for tracking purposes and detailed description of and reason for proposed change, and such additional information as appropriate and as may be required for Contractor to accurately estimate cost and time impact on Project. 3. Proposal request is for information only; Contractor is neither authorized to execute proposed change nor to stop Work in progress as result of such request. 4. Owner’s request for proposal or Contractor’s failure to submit such proposal within the required time period will not justify a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times (or Milestones). 5. Proposal requests will be furnished using the proposal request form included with this Section. B. Procedure 1. One copy of each signed proposal request will be furnished to Contractor with one copy each to: a. Owner b. Engineer c. Resident Project Representative (RPR) 2. Submit request for interpretation to clarify conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies in proposal request. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contract Modification Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 26 00-7 3. Upon receipt of proposal request, Contractor shall prepare and submit a Change Proposal, in accordance with this Section, for the proposed Work described in the proposal request. 2.06 CHANGE PROPOSALS A. Submit to Engineer one original and one copy of each Change Proposal with accompanying documentation, and simultaneously submit two copies to Owner. Submit each Change Proposal with separate letter of transmittal. B. Contractor’s written proposal shall be transmitted to Engineer promptly, but not later than 14 days after Contractor’s receipt of Owner’s written request. Proposal shall remain firm for a maximum period of 45 days after receipt by Engineer. C. Engineer will review Change Proposal and either request additional information from Contractor or provide to Owner recommendation regarding approval of the Change Proposal. D. When Engineer requests additional information to render a decision, submit required information within five days of receipt of Engineer’s request, unless Engineer allows more time. Submit the required information via correspondence that refers to Change Proposal number. E. Upon completing review, one copy of Engineer’s written response, if any, will be distributed to: 1. Contractor 2. Owner 3. Engineer 4. Resident Project Representative (RPR) F. If Change Proposal is recommended for approval by Engineer and approved by Owner, a Change Order will be issued. G. If parties do not agree on terms for the change, Owner or Contractor may file a Claim against the other, in accordance with the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. 2.07 CHANGE ORDERS A. General 1. Change Orders will be recommended by Engineer and signed by Owner, and Contractor, to authorize additions, deletions, or revisions to the Work, or changes to the Contract Price or Contract Times. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contract Modification Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 26 00-8 2. Change Orders will use the form attached on page 01 26 00-14 of this Section. B. Procedure 1. Engineer will prepare six copies of proposed Change Order and transmit such with Engineer’s written recommendation and request to Contractor for signature. 2. Contractor shall, upon receipt, either: (i) promptly sign copies, retaining one for its file, and return remaining five copies to Engineer for Owner’s signature, or (ii) return unsigned five copies with written justification for not executing Change Order. 3. Engineer will, upon receipt of Contractor signed copies, promptly forward Engineer’s written recommendation and partially executed five copies for Owner’s signature, or if Contractor fails to execute the Change Order, Engineer will promptly so notify Owner and transmit Contractor’s justification to Owner. 4. Upon receipt of Contractor-executed Change Order, Owner will promptly either: a. Execute Change Order, retaining one copy for its file and returning four copies to Engineer; or b. Return to Engineer unsigned copies with written justification for not executing Change Order. 5. Upon receipt of Owner-executed Change Order, Engineer will transmit two copies to Contractor, one copy to Resident Project Representative or other field representative, and retain one copy, or if Owner fails to execute the Change Order, Engineer will promptly so notify Contractor and transmit Owner’s justification to Contractor. 6. Upon receipt of Owner-executed Change Order, Contractor shall: a. Perform Work covered by Change Order. b. Revise Schedule of Values to adjust Contract Price and submit with next Application for Payment. c. Revise Progress Schedule to reflect changes in Contract Times, if any, and to adjust times for other items of Work affected by change. d. Enter changes in Project record documents after completion of change related Work. C. In signing a Change Order, Owner and Contractor acknowledge and agree that: 1. Stipulated compensation (Contract Price or Contract Times, or both) set forth includes payment for (i) the Cost of the Work covered by the Change Order, (ii) Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contract Modification Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 26 00-9 Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit, (iii) interruption of Progress Schedule, (iv) delay and impact, including cumulative impact, on other Work under the Contract Documents, and (v) extended overheads. 2. Change Order constitutes full mutual accord and satisfaction for the change to the Work. 3. Unless otherwise stated in the Change Order, all requirements of the original Contract Documents apply to the Work covered by the Change Order. 2.08 COST OF THE WORK A. In determining the supplemental costs allowed in Paragraph 11.02 of Section 00700 – General Conditions for rental equipment and machinery, the following will apply. B. Rental of construction equipment and machinery and the parts thereof having a replacement value in excess of $1,000, whether owned by Contractor or rented or leased from others, shall meet the following requirements: 1. Full rental costs for leased equipment shall not exceed rates listed in the Rental Rate Blue Book published by Equipment Watch, San Jose, California, as adjusted to the regional area of the Project. Owned equipment costs shall not exceed the single shift rates established in the Cost Reference Guide (CRG) also published by Equipment Watch. The most recent published edition in effect at commencement of actual equipment use shall be used. 2. Rates shall apply to equipment in good working condition. Equipment not in good condition, or larger than required, may be rejected by Engineer or accepted at reduced rates. 3. Leased Equipment: For equipment leased or rented in arm’s length transactions from outside vendors, maximum rates shall be determined by the following actual usage/Blue Book Payment Category: a. Less than 8 hours: Hourly Rate. b. 8 or more hours but less than 7 days: Daily Rate. c. 7 or more days but less than 30 days: Weekly Rate. d. 30 days or more: Monthly Rate. 4. Arm’s length rental and lease transactions are those in which the firm involved in the rental or lease of equipment is not associated with, owned by, have common management, directorship, facilities and/or stockholders with the firm renting the equipment. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contract Modification Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 26 00-10 5. Leased Equipment in Use: Actual equipment use time documented by Engineer shall be the basis that equipment was on and utilized at the Project Site. In addition to the leasing rate above, equipment operational costs shall be paid at the estimated hourly operating cost rate set forth in the Blue Book if not already included in the lease rate. Hours of operation shall be based upon actual equipment usage to the nearest quarter hour, as recorded by Engineer. 6. Leased Equipment, When Idle (Standby): Idle or standby equipment is equipment onsite or in transit to and from the Work Site and necessary to perform the Work under the modification, but not in actual use. Idle equipment time, as documented by Engineer, shall be paid at the leasing rate determined above, excluding operational costs. 7. Owned and Other Equipment in Use: Equipment rates for owned equipment or equipment provided in other than arm’s length transaction shall not exceed the single shift total hourly costs rate developed in accordance with the CRG and as modified herein for multiple shifts. This total hourly rate will be paid for each hour the equipment actually performs work. Hours of operation shall be based upon actual equipment usage as recorded by Engineer. This rate shall represent payment in full for Contractor’s direct costs. 8. Owned and Other Equipment, When Idle (Standby): Equipment necessary to be onsite to perform the Work on single shift operations, but not utilized, shall be paid for at the ownership hourly expense rate developed in accordance with the CRG, provided its presence and necessity onsite has been documented by Engineer. Payment for idle time of portions of a normal workday, in conjunction with original contract Work, will not be allowed. In no event shall idle time claimed in a day for a particular piece of equipment exceed the normal Work or shift schedule established for the Project. It is agreed that this rate shall represent payment in full for Contractor’s direct costs. When Engineer determines that the equipment is not needed to continuously remain at the Work Site, payment will be limited to actual hours in use. 9. Owned and Other Equipment, Multiple Shifts: For multiple shift operations, the CRG single shift total hourly costs rate shall apply to the operating equipment during the first shift. For subsequent shifts, up to 2 in a 24-hour day, operating rate shall be the sum of the total hourly CRG operating cost and 60 percent of the CRG ownership and overhaul expense. Payment for idle or standby time for second and third shifts shall be 20 percent of the CRG ownership and overhaul expense. 10. When necessary to obtain owned equipment from sources beyond the Project limits, the actual cost to transfer equipment to the Work Site and return it to its original location will be allowed as an additional item of expense. Move-in and move-out allowances will not be made for equipment brought to the Project if the equipment is also used on original Contract or related Work. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contract Modification Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 26 00-11 11. If the move-out destination is not to the original location, payment for move-out will not exceed payment for move-in. 12. If move is made by common carrier, the allowance will be the amount paid for the freight. If equipment is hauled with Contractor’s own forces, rental will be allowed for the hauling unit plus the hauling unit operator’s wage. If equipment is transferred under its own power, the rental will be 75 percent of the appropriate total hourly costs for the equipment, without attachments, plus the equipment operator’s wage. 13. Charges for time utilized in servicing equipment to ready it for use prior to moving and similar charges will not be allowed. 14. When a breakdown occurs on any piece of owned equipment, payment shall cease for that equipment and any other owned equipment idled by the breakdown. 15. If any part of the Work is shut down by Owner, standby time will be paid during nonoperating hours if diversion of equipment to other Work is not practicable. Engineer reserves the right to cease standby time payment when an extended shutdown is anticipated. 16. If a rate has not been established in the CRG for owned equipment, Contractor may: a. If approved by Engineer, use the rate of the most similar model found, considering such characteristics as manufacturer, capacity, horsepower, age, and fuel type, or b. Request Equipment Watch to furnish a written response for a rate on the equipment, which shall be presented to Engineer for approval; or c. Request Engineer to establish a rate. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Contract Modification Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 26 00-12 Field Order No. Date of Issuance: Effective Date: Owner: Owner’s Contract No.: Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.: Engineer: Engineer's Project No.: Project: Contract Name: Contractor is hereby directed to promptly execute this Field Order, issued in accordance with General Conditions Paragraph 9.04, for minor changes in the Work without changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Contractor considers that a change in Contract Price or Contract Times is required, submit a Change Proposal before proceeding with this Work. Reference: Specification(s)Drawing(s) / Detail(s) Description: Attachments: ISSUED: RECEIVED: By:By: Engineer (Authorized Signature)Contractor (Authorized Signature) Title:Title: Date:Date: Copy to: Owner Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 Contract Modification Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 26 00-13 Work Change Directive No._______ Date of Issuance:Effective Date: Owner:Owner’s Contract No.: Contractor:Contractor’s Project No.: Engineer:Engineer's Project No.: Project:Contract Name: Contractor is directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s): Description: Attachments: [List documents supporting change] Purpose for Work Change Directive: Directive to proceed promptly with the Work described herein, prior to agreeing to changes on Contract Price and Contract Time, is issued due to: [check one or both of the following] Non-agreement on pricing of proposed change. Necessity to proceed for schedule or other Project reasons. Estimated Change in Contract Price and Contract Times (non-binding, preliminary): Contract Price $ [increase] [decrease]. Contract Time days [increase] [decrease]. Basis of estimated change in Contract Price: Lump Sum Unit Price Cost of the Work Other RECOMMENDED:AUTHORIZED BY:RECEIVED: By:By:By: Engineer (Authorized Signature)Owner (Authorized Signature)Contractor (Authorized Signature) Title:Title:Title: Date:Date: Date: Approved by Funding Agency (if applicable) By: Date: Title: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 26 00-14 Change Order No. Date of Issuance:Effective Date: Owner:Owner's Contract No.: Contractor:Contractor’s Project No.: Engineer:Engineer's Project No.: Project:Contract Name: The Contract is modified as follows upon execution of this Change Order: Description: Attachments: [List documents supporting change] CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIMES [note changes in Milestones if applicable] Original Contract Price:Original Contract Times: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for Final Payment: days or dates [Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change Orders No. to No. : [Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change Orders No. to No. : Substantial Completion: $ Ready for Final Payment: days Contract Price prior to this Change Order:Contract Times prior to this Change Order: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for Final Payment: days or dates [Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order:[Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for Final Payment: days or dates Contract Price incorporating this Change Order:Contract Times with all approved Change Orders: Substantial Completion: $ Ready for Final Payment: days or dates RECOMMENDED:ACCEPTED:ACCEPTED: By:By:By: Engineer (if required)Owner (Authorized Signature)Contractor (Authorized Signature) Title:Title:Title: Date:Date: Date: Approved Funding Agency (if required) By: Date: Title: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – District Project No.: SA061 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 26 00-15 END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Schedule of Values Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 29 73-1 SECTION 01 29 73 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes general requirements for preliminary and final Schedule of Values. B. Schedule of Values and the Progress Schedule updates specified in Section 01 32 00  Construction Progress Schedule, shall be basis for preparing each Application for Payment. Schedule of Values may be used as a basis for negotiating price of changes, if any, in the Work. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Schedule B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide all required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Submit the following: 1. Seven copies of preliminary Schedule of Value and one electronic copy of preliminary Schedule of Values. a. Incorporate Engineer’s comments into the Schedule of Values and resubmit to Engineer. Engineer may require corrections and re-submittals until Schedule of Values is acceptable. 2. Seven copies of Schedule of Values and one electronic copy of Schedule of Values. C. Time Frame for Submittals: 1. Submit preliminary Schedule of Values within ten days of date that the Contract Times commence running in accordance with the Notice to Proceed. 2. Submittal of the Schedule of Values shall be in accordance with the General Conditions. Engineer will not accept Applications for Payment without an acceptable Schedule of Values. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Schedule of Values Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 29 73-2 3. When required by Engineer, promptly submit updated Schedule of Values to include cost breakdowns for changes in the Contract Price. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL PREPARATION AND FORMAT 1. Schedule of Values shall include breakdown of costs for materials and equipment, installation, and other costs used in preparing the Bid by Contractor and each Subcontractor. List purchase and delivery costs for materials and equipment for which Contractor may apply for payment as stored materials. 2. Provide Schedule of Values with separate sections for each Bid Schedule. 3. Include separate amounts for each Specification Section in the Contract Documents by structure, building, and work area. 4. Identify each line item with number corresponding to the associated Specification Section number. List sub-items of major products or systems, as appropriate or when requested by Engineer. 5. Include in Schedule of Values unit price payment items with their associated quantity. Provide in the Schedule of Values detailed breakdown of unit prices when required by Engineer. 6. Include in Schedule of Values itemized list of Work for each major part of the Contract, for each payment item specified in Section 01 20 00 – Measurement and Payment. 7. Sum of individual values shown on the Schedule of Values shall equal the total of associated payment item. Sum of payment item totals in the Schedule of Values shall equal the Contract Price. 8. Include in each line item a directly proportional amount of Contractor’s overhead and profit. Do not include overhead and profit as separate item(s). 9. Include separate line item for each allowance, and for each unit price item. 10. An unbalanced or front-end loaded schedule will not be acceptable. 3.02 SPECIFIC ITEM REQUIREMENTS A. Bonds and Insurance 03 2 6 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Schedule of Values Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 29 73-3 1. Include a line item for bonds and insurance in an amount not exceeding two percent (2%) of the Contract Price. This may be applied for in the first Application for Payment. B. General Conditions, Permits, and Schedule 1. Include items for the General Conditions, permits (when applicable), construction Progress Schedule, and other items required by Engineer. Include such items in Applications for Payment on schedule accepted by Engineer. C. Site Maintenance 1. Line items for Site maintenance such as dust control, snow removal, compliance with storm water pollution prevention plans and permits, spill prevention control and countermeasures plans, and for construction photographic documentation; temporary utilities and temporary facilities, field offices, temporary controls, field engineering, and similar Work shall be included in the Schedule of Values and proportioned in Applications for Payment throughout duration of the Work. D. Mobilization and Demobilization 1. Include separate line items under each appropriate payment item for mobilization and demobilization. Document for Engineer the activities included in mobilization and demobilization line items. a. Mobilization will be limited to two percent (2%) of the Contract Price, and will be paid in two payments, each of 50 percent (50%) of total amount for mobilization. b. Demobilization shall be at least one percent of the Contract Price and shall be included with the Application for Payment following Substantial Completion, or other schedule accepted by Engineer. E. Submittals, Manuals, Testing, and Training 1. Costs for submittals, operations and maintenance manuals, field testing, and training of operations and maintenance personnel shall be as follows, unless otherwise accepted by Engineer: a. Up to three percent of total cost (including overhead and profit) for the equipment and material may be apportioned to submittal preparation and finalization and included in the Application of Payment following Engineer providing acceptable submittal review disposition. b. Up to three percent of total cost (including overhead and profit) for the preparation and final submittal of operations and maintenance manuals may be apportioned to submittal preparation and finalization and included in the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Schedule of Values Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 29 73-4 Application of Payment following Engineer providing acceptable submittal review disposition. c. Up to three percent of total cost of each item (including overhead and profit), including materials and equipment, and installation, may be apportioned to testing and included in the Application for Payment following Engineer’s acceptance of the associated written Site testing report(s). d. Up to three percent of total cost of each item (including overhead and profit) for planning, attending (including travel and expenses), and conducting training of operations and maintenance personnel and included in the Application of Payment following successful completion of training to the satisfaction of Owner and Engineer. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Progress Payment Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 29 76-1 SECTION 01 29 76 PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for progress payments to the Contractor by the Owner. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 00700 – General Conditions B. Section 00800 – Supplementary General Conditions C. Section 01 20 00 – Measurement and Payment D. Section 01 77 19  Closeout Requirements PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Contractor’s request for payment shall be in accordance with the Agreement, General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, and the Specifications. 3.02 PROCEDURE 1. Review quantities and the Work proposed for inclusion in each progress payment with Project Representative. Application for Payment shall cover only the Work and quantities recommended by the Project Representative. 2. Submit to Engineer five originals of each complete Application for Payment and other documents to accompany the Application for Payment. 3. Engineer will act on request for payment in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. 3.03 SCHEDULE OF ESTIMATED PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Show estimated payment requests throughout Contract Times aggregating initial Contract Price. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 03 2 6 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Progress Payment Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 29 76-2 END OF SECTION B. Base estimated progress payments on initially acceptable progress schedule. Adjust to reflect subsequent adjustments in progress schedule and Contract Price as reflected by modifications to the Contract Documents. 3.04 REQUIREMENTS A. Complete Application for Payment form, including summary/signature page, progress estimate sheets, and stored materials summary. Progress estimate sheets shall have the same level of detail as the Schedule of Values. B. Round values to nearest dollar. C. For materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but suitably stored, submit documentation in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Legibly indicate on invoice or bill of sale the specific materials or equipment included in the payment request and corresponding bid/payment item number for each. D. Contractor’s Affidavit is required for payment application and requests beginning with the second application for payment. E. For payment requests that include payment for Work under an allowance, submit documentation acceptable to Owner of the authorization of allowance Work. F. For payment requests (other than request for final payment) that include reduction or payment of retainage in an amount greater than that required in the Contract Documents, submit on form acceptable to Owner consent of surety to partial release or reduction of retainage. G. Requirements for request for final payment are in the General Conditions, as modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and Section 01 77 19  Closeout Requirements. 3.05 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. See Section 01 20 00 – Measurement and Payment, Section 00700 – General Conditions, and Section 00800 – Supplementary General Conditions for additional information and requirements. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS District Project No.: SA061 Coordination Cottonwoods Connection 01 31 13-1 SECTION 01 31 13 COORDINATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes requirements related to coordinating with OWNER (MWDSLS, or District), Salt Lake City Department of Public Utilities (SLCDPU), Cottonwood Heights City (CHC), Utah Department of Transportation (UDOT), Murray City, and Cottonwood Improvement District. B. Adhere to APWA Utah Standard Specification Section 01 31 13 – Coordination except where changes are specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. None. 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. APWA Utah Standard Specifications, Section 01 31 13 – Coordination (APWA Standard Specifications). 1.04 APWA STANDARD SPECIFICATION MODIFICATIONS A. Modify language in Section 1.1 A as follows: A. Coordination among LICENSEE, LICENSEE’s Contractor, CONTRACTOR’s employees and Subcontractors, and any utility company, separate contractor, property owner, DISTRICT, and authority having jurisdiction. Add the following to Section 1.7: E. The Salt Lake Aqueduct (SLA), Point of the Mountain Aqueduct (POMA), and Little Cottonwood Conduit (LCC) are pipelines that remain in service year-round or need to be placed in service quickly and are critical to the water supply of hundreds of thousands of people. Service interruptions of either the SLA, POMA, or LCC must be expressly authorized by DISTRICT’S General Manager and are not permitted except in very extraordinary circumstances. Unauthorized interruptions to service of the SLA or POMA will not be tolerated and could resul t in the responsible party paying any and all incidental and consequential damages including, but not limited to: 1. Lost revenue from water sales; 2. Engineering personnel time; 3. Operation and maintenance personnel time; 4. All costs required to return the affected pipeline back to its full service Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS District Project No.: SA061 Coordination Cottonwoods Connection 01 31 13-2 capacity; 5. Any costs incurred by DISTRICT’s member cities that are over and above the normal costs associated with the affected pipeline; 6. The value of the water which could not be used due to the interruption; and 7. Third party claims tied to lack of water. F. Unauthorized interruptions of service will likely result in criminal and civil actions, particularly if determined to be willful or negligent. DISTRICT will participate in, and direct vigorous enforcement activities against, any persons who cause, or who are associated with causing, any unauthorized interruptions in service of the SLA or POMA. Add Section 1.8 to Part 1 as follows: 1.8 COORDINATING WITH MWDSLS A. Prior Notice: 1. Following the issuance of a License Agreement, Temporary Use Permit or Notice to Proceed, the LICENSEE or CONTRACTOR shall invite DISTRICT to any Pre-Construction Meeting. 2. The LICENSEE or CONTRACTOR shall contact DISTRICT either in writing or by phone at least one week in advance of any planned test excavation or construction activities within DISTRICT rights-of -way. 3. LICENSEE or CONTRACTOR shall give DISTRICT 2 to 7 working Days notice prior to the commencement of construction work within DISTRICT rights-of -way. 4. For specific requirements on test excavations and potholing refer to Section 31 23 16 EXCAVATION. B. Record Drawings: Within 30 days of completion of construction, the LICENSEE or CONTRACTOR shall provide DISTRICT 1 physical copy and one electronic copy (in a format acceptable to DISTRICT) of record drawings. The record drawings shall include, but not be limited to, X,Y,Z GPS coordinates of DISTRICT facilities, utility crossings, manholes, drains, power poles, etc. A topographic survey shall be completed to document any changes to grade. C. Construction Activities: 1. LICENSEE shall designate a representative for field operations who shall be the sole representative of the LICENSEE or CONTRACTOR and all of LICENSEE’s or CONTRACTOR’s contractors and Subcontractors in dealings with DISTRICT, and shall provide their name, mailing address, email address, and telephone number to DISTRICT prior to commencement of construction. 2. LICENSEE shall limit construction to approved plans and specifications. 3. All activities within Aqueduct Corridors shall comply with the Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS District Project No.: SA061 Coordination Cottonwoods Connection 01 31 13-3 requirements found in DISTRICT Construction Standards. 4. LICENSEE shall notify DISTRICT upon completion of construction. 5. Within 60 days after conclusion of construction operations, all construction equipment, materials, and related litter and debris, including vegetative cover accumulated through land clearing, shall be disposed of in an appropriate manner away from DISTRICT rights -of-way. 1.05 OWNER-ASSIGNED CONTRACTS A. See Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work B. Once the contract is assigned, the Contractor is responsible for coordination with WSP supplier for all contract/construction documentation, scheduling, receiving, storing , protection, and installation of material as if the WSP supplier were selected by the Contractor at bid opening. 1.06 PROJECT MILESTONES A. General: Include the Milestones specified herein as part of the Progress Schedule required in Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Schedule. B. Project Milestones (M): 1. M1a: Substantial Completion for Schedule A-1 (CC-1 East) as defined in Volume 4 of the Contract Documents, including all work within the roadway and public right of way, pavement restoration , and all other work required for the Utah Department of Transportation to begin their resurfacing project: June 30, 2024. Note that crossing Big Cottonwood Creek can be deferred to M1b, at contractor’s option. 2. M1b: Substantial Completion for Schedule A-2 (CC-1 West) as defined in Volume 4 of the Contract Documents: October 25, 2024. 3. M1c: Final Completion for Schedule A: October 31, 2025. 4. M2: Substantial Completion for Schedules B and C: June 30, 2026. 5. M3: Final Completion for Schedules B and C : August 15 , 2026. 1.07 WORK SEQUENCING/CONSTRAINTS A. Work shall be scheduled, sequenced, and performed in a manner which minimizes disruption to the public, to other construction activities along the alignment, and does not impact operation of the Salt Lake Aqueduct (SLA), Little Cottonwood Conduit (LCC), or the Little Cottonwood Water Treatment Plant (LCWTP). The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and planning of its construction activities and to integrate the construction and schedule constraints into the performance of the Work. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS District Project No.: SA061 Coordination Cottonwoods Connection 01 31 13-4 B. Traffic Controls. Conform to Section 01 55 50, Traffic Control. C. Replacement and Restoration of Existing Roadways: Place permanent surface courses only between April 15 and October 15, unless authorized in writing by the Engineer. The Contractor is encouraged to complete as much of the Work within paved streets as possible and where feasible during the paving season while still adhering to the Work constraints specified herein. 1. Weather and Seasonal Limitations for Paving: a. Place permanent surface course only between April 15 and October 15, unless authorized in writing by the Engineer. An extended warranty period, additional pavement depth, and/or other considerations may be required for paving after October 15 and before April 15. b. Place permanent paving when the air temperature in the shade is above 50 degrees and rising. c. Do not place asphalt when frozen materials are present in the base or sub - base. d. For cold weather patching, emergencies, or all bituminous paving done after October 15 and before April 15 not authorized in writing by Engineer , these areas will be considered temporary and shall be removed and replaced. 2. Temporary Surfacing: a. Minimum 2 inches thick, except within major intersections and other critical locations. b. Minimum 3 inches thick within 50 feet of major intersections and other critical locations. c. Place as soon as the condition of the backfill is suitable and leave in -place until ready for permanent resurfacing. d. Maintain temporary surfacing and pavement markings until removal and replacement with permanent surface course. D. Protection of Work and Property: Conform to Section 01 52 00, Construction Facilities E. Utility Coordination and Relocations: As specified in Section 01 58 00, Utility Relocation Requirements. F. State Route 190 (Big Cottonwood Canyon Road): Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS District Project No.: SA061 Coordination Cottonwoods Connection 01 31 13-5 1. Work may be started no earlier than April 15, 2024, and shall be completed no later than June 30, 2024, for CC-1 from Station 231+00 to 244+75 (not including the creek crossing, the crossing may be completed after this deadline). 2. Perform work Sunday through Thursday each week. Cover open trenches with plates at the end of each shift. 3. Coordinate construction schedule with UDOT and UDOT’s resurfacing contractor to not impede the SR-190 re -pavement project. G. Salt Lake Aqueduct Operations: 1. The SLA must remain in operation year-round with only minimal and pre-planned outages during low flow periods, typically between November 1 and March 31 each year. Schedule work to accommodate SLA operations. 2. SLA Relocation: a. Submit to Engineer plan for construction of SLA relocation a minimum 6 months in advance of planned relocation work. Include detailed schedule of construction, testing, tie-ins, required SLA outage, etc., plan for limits of construction of relocated SLA to protect existing SLA while in operation prior to tie-ins, and other information as needed to protect existing SLA while in operation, minimized SLA outage, and address anticipated issues during the SLA relocation. b. The shutdown for tie -ins is limited to seven consecutive calendar days, including draining and refilling. Draining the SLA takes approximately two days; refilling the SLA also takes approximately two days. Note that the LCC must be in operation while the SLA is down, so an LCC relocation cannot coincide with the SLA relocation. c. Meet with OWNER and Engineer prior to preparing submission of relocation plan to discuss and understand SLA operations. d. Meet with OWNER and Engineer minimum one month and again one week before start of SLA relocation to discuss any changes to SLA operations and review relocation plan. 3. Danish Road Access and Restoration: a. Complete utility relocations between SLAR Station 14+00 and 23+50 in coordination with SLA relocation and SLAR construction to minimize residential access impacts on Danish Road. b. Complete c onstruction of Salt Lake Aqueduct Replacement (SLAR) Station 14+00 to 23+50 immediately after SLA relocation to minimize residential access impacts on Danish Road. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS District Project No.: SA061 Coordination Cottonwoods Connection 01 31 13-6 c. Complete SLAR construction and any utility relocation Work between Station 23+50 and 27+25 immediately before or after the SLA relocation and SLAR Work from Station 14+00 to 23+50 to minimize residential access impacts on Danish Road. H. Little Cottonwood Conduit Operations: 1. The Little Cottonwood Conduit (LCC) must remain in operation year -round with only minimal and pre-planned outages during low flow periods, typically between October 1 and April 30 each year. Schedule work to accommodate LCC operations and deliveries. 2. The SLA and LCC cannot be taken out of service at the same time. 3. Coordinate draining of LCC with SLCDPU. Draining is estimated to take up to one week and will require schedule coordination. 4. LCC Relocation (finished water): a. Submit to Engineer plan for construction of LCC relocation minimum 6 months in advance of planned relocation work. Include detailed schedule of construction, testing, tie-ins, required LCC outage, etc., plan for limits of construction of relocated LCC to protect existing LCC while in operation prior to tie-ins, and other information as needed to protect existing LCC while in operation, minimized LCC outage, and address anticipated issues during the LCC relocation. b. Each shutdown for tie-ins is limited to thirty consecutive calendar days, including draining and refilling. Draining the LCC takes approximately two days; refilling the LCC also takes approximately two days. c. Meet with OWNER, SLCDPU, and Engineer prior to preparing submission of relocation plan to discuss and understand LCC operations. d. Meet with OWNER, SLCDPU and Engineer minimum one month and again one week before start of LCC relocation to discuss any changes to LCC operations and review relocation plan. 5. Complete LCC Relocation prior to permitting access from staging area across existing LCC. No other LCC crossing locations are permitted. I. Little Cottonwood Water Treatment Plant Operations: 1. The Little Cottonwood Water Treatment Plant (LCWTP) must remain in operation year-round with no outages. No work shall take place within the LCWTP site along the east access road between June 1 and August 31 to avoid interference with frequent bulk chemical deliveries. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS District Project No.: SA061 Coordination Cottonwoods Connection 01 31 13-7 2. The raw water section of the LCC is an important supply for the LCWTP; the LCC can accommodate minimal and pre -planned outages only during low flow periods, typically between October 1 and December 31 each year. Schedule work to accommodate LCWTP operations and chemical deliveries and LCC operations. 3. CC-2 Tie-in to the LCC (raw water): a. Submit to Engineer plan for construction of CC-2 connection to the raw water LCC a minimum 6 months in advance of planned tie-in work. Include detailed schedule of construction, testing, tie-in, required LCC outage, etc., plan for limits of construction of CC-2 to protect existing utilities in operation prior to tie-in, and other information as needed to protect existing utilities, minimize LCWTP outage, and address anticipated issues during the tie-in. b. The shutdown for tie -ins is limited to fourteen consecutive calendar days, including draining and refilling. Draining the LCC takes approximately one day; refilling the LCC also takes approximately one day. c. Meet with OWNER and Engineer prior to preparing submission of tie-in plan to discuss and understand LCWTP operations. d. Meet with OWNER and Engineer minimum one month and again one week before start of tie-in to discuss any changes to LC WTP operations and review tie-in plan. J. Murray City Water Coordination: 1. Murray City waterline must remain in service throughout construction. 2. Meet with Owner, Murray City, and Engineer minimum one month and again one week prior to construction activities to discuss plan to protect existing utility in the pipeline and vault construction corridor. 3. Submit to Owner Murray City, and Engineer a plan a minimum of 6 months in advance of construction, detailing the approach of the pipeline installation along Fort Union Boulevard and SLAR/CC -1 vault construction. Include detail of protection and maintain op erations of the Murray City facilities in the submitted plan, including limits of construction of SLAR/CC -1 vault and any other information and measures needed to protect existing utilities and address anticipated issues during construction. a. Multiple joints of existing Murray City waterline cannot be exposed at a time. 4. Notify Owner of potholing at least 24 hours in advance. K. Cottonwood Improvement District Coordination: Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS District Project No.: SA061 Coordination Cottonwoods Connection 01 31 13-8 1. Cottonwood Improvement District (CID) sanitary sewers must remain in service throughout construction. 2. Meet with Owner, CID, and Engineer minimum one month and again one week prior to construction activities to discuss plan to protect existing utilities in the pipelines and vault construction corridor. 3. Submit to Owner, CID, and Engineer a plan a minimum of 6 months in advance of construction, detailing the approach of the pipeline installation at Fort Union Boulevard and SLAR/CC-1 vault construction. Include detail of protection of CID facilities in the submitted plan. Plan for limits of construction of SLAR/CC -1 vault to protect existing utilities in operations prior to construction, and any other information as needed to protect existing utilities and address anticipated issues during construction. 4. Notify Owner of potholing at least 24 hours in advance. L. Big Cottonwood Creek Crossing (BCCr): 1. Meet with Owner, SLCDPU, and Engineer minimum one month and again one week before start of BCCr crossing to discuss construction plan. 2. Submit to Engineer a dewatering and flow diversion plan in accordance with Section 01 57 52. 1.08 OBLIGATIONS WITH THE CITY OF COTTONWOOD HEIGHTS A. OWNER has entered into an agreement with the City of Cottonwood Heights for the Project. Contractor shall uphold all of OWNER’s obligations for construction; if there is a conflict between the requirements below and the Drawings and/or Specifications, the more stringent requirement shall govern. B. Standards. The work performed in any City street will conform to the requirements of the following then -current standards that are generally applicable to work in City streets: 1. OSHA standards; 2. Salt Lake County “Standard Plans for Public Works Construction,” and the “City of Cottonwood Heights Street Cut Standards” (except to the extent these may be inconsistent with this Agreement) made available to OWNER; and 3. The Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) (except to the extent it may be inconsistent with this Agreement) made available to the OWNER. C. Unattended Job Site. Where a job site is left unattended before completion of the work, signage with minimum two-inch-high letters will be attached to a barricade or otherwise posted at the site, indicating the contractor’s name, local telephone number of a responsible party, and after-hours local telephone number of a responsible party. Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS District Project No.: SA061 Coordination Cottonwoods Connection 01 31 13-9 D. Excavations. All excavations will be conducted in a manner that will to the greatest extent practicable minimize interference with or interruption of vehicle and pedestrian travel. All reasonable steps will be taken to minimize inconvenience to residents and businesses fronting on the public way. E. Barricades. Suitable, adequate, and sufficient barricades and/or other structures will be available and used where necessary to reasonably minimize the risk of accidents involving property or persons. Barricades must be in place until all equipment is removed from the site and the excavation has been backfilled and a proper temporary gravel surface is in place. From sunset to sunrise, all barricades and excavations must be clearly outlined by reasonably adequate signal lights, flares, reflective markers, etc. F. Notice of street closures, detours. The following will be notified at least 48 hours in advance of any planned excavation in a City street requiring street closure or traffic detour, except in the event of an emergency, in which case notice shall be provided as reasonable under the circumstances: 1. Cottonwood Heights Police Department; 2. Utah Transit Authority; 3. Canyons School District; 4. United States Postal Service; 5. Cottonwood Heights Public Works Department; and 6. Cottonwood Heights Fire Department. G. The Contractor will reasonably coordinate street closures and traffic detours with the City. H. Cottonwood Heights City work hours are as follows: 1. Monday – Saturday: 7:30am – 6:30pm 2. Sunday: 9:00am – 6:00pm I. Restoration of Street Surfaces. Except as otherwise described below, to the greatest extent practicable the surface of any City street disturbed by the Project will be restored to its original condition and any removed or damaged pavement will be replaced with the same type and depth of pavement as that which is adjoining, including the gravel base material. Refills will be properly compacted. All restoration will conform to the applicable then-current City standards that are generally applicable to work i n City streets. 1. Danish Road. Because Danish Road was recently repaved , the Contractor will replace four inches of asphalt the entire width of the excavated pavement from Hazen and Sawyer Consultant Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS District Project No.: SA061 Coordination Cottonwoods Connection 01 31 13-10 street edge to street edge and to a distance of five feet from each side of the excavation north and south. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Project Meetings Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 31 19-1 SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes requirements related to Project meetings and communication including, but not limited to, the pre-construction meeting, construction progress meetings, and emergency contact information. B. Owner will schedule physical arrangements for meetings throughout progress of the Work, prepare meeting agenda with regular participant input and distribute with written notice of each meeting, preside at meetings, record minutes to include significant proceedings and decisions, and reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within 5 days after each meeting to participants and parties affected by meeting decisions. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 00700 – General Conditions B. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Schedule C. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures D. Section 01 35 20 – Confined Space Entry Plan 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide all submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. See Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Schedule for schedule submittal requirements. C. Pre-Construction Meeting Submittals 1. Submit the following preliminary schedules in accordance with the General Conditions prior to the pre-construction meeting: 1) Initial Progress Schedule 2) Schedule of Submittals 3) Schedule of Values 2. Submit the following items in accordance with the General Conditions during or prior to the pre-construction meeting: 03 2 6 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Project Meetings Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 31 19-2 a. Contractor’s safety and first aid procedures. b. Confined space entry plan per Section 01 35 20 – Confined Space Entry Plan c. List of emergency contact information as follows: 1) Provide list of emergency contact information for 24-hour use throughout the Project. Emergency contact information shall be updated and kept current throughout the Project. If personnel or contact information change, provide updated emergency contact information list at the next progress meeting. 2) Contractor’s list of emergency contact information shall include: a) Contractor’s project manager’s office, field office, cellular, and home telephone numbers. b) Contractor’s Site superintendent’s office, field office, cellular, and home telephone numbers. c) Contractor’s foreman’s field office, cellular (if available), and home telephone numbers. d) Major Subcontractors’ and Suppliers’ office, cellular, and home telephone numbers of project manager and foreman (when applicable). 3) Additional Emergency Contact Information: a) Owner’s Project Manager: office, cellular, and home telephone numbers. b) Owner’s central 24-hour emergency telephone number. c) Engineer’s project engineer’s office, cellular, and home telephone numbers. d) Project Representative’s office, field office, cellular, and home telephone numbers. e) Owner’s Site Representative’s office, field office, cellular, and home telephone numbers. f) Emergency telephone numbers, including “Emergency: Dial 911”, and seven-digit telephone numbers for the hospital, ambulance, police, and fire department nearest to the Site. Provide names of each of these institutions. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Project Meetings Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 31 19-3 g) Other involved entities as applicable. D. Project Progress Meeting Submittals 1. List of Work accomplished since the previous progress meeting. 2. Up-to-date Progress Schedule. 3. Up-to-date Schedule of Submittals. 4. Detailed “look-ahead” schedule of Work planned through the next progress meeting, with specific starting and ending dates for each activity, including shutdowns, deliveries of important materials and equipment, Milestones (if any), and important activities affecting the Owner, Project, and Site. 5. When applicable, list of upcoming, planned time off (with dates) for personnel with significant roles on the Project, and the designated contact person in their absence. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. The purpose of this meeting is to designate responsible personnel, establish working relationships, discuss preliminary schedules submitted by Contractor, and review administrative and procedural requirements for the Project. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters will be established. B. Meeting will be held after execution of the Contract and before Work starts at the Site. Engineer will establish the date, time, and location of conference and notify the interested and involved parties. C. Provide pre-construction meeting submittals with sufficient number of copies for each attendee. D. Required Attendees 1. Contractor a. Project manager b. Site superintendent c. Safety representative Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Project Meetings Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 31 19-4 d. Major Subcontractors 1) _________________________ 2. Owner 3. Engineer 4. Project Representative 5. Owner’s Representative 6. Cottonwood Heights City Representative 7. Representatives of governmental or other regulatory agencies E. Anticipated Meeting Agenda (minimum) a. Procedural requirements 1) Designation of responsible personnel 2) Use of Site and Owner’s requirements, including general regards for community relations 3) Delivery of materials and equipment to the Site 4) Safety and first aid procedures 5) Confined space entry plan 6) Security procedures 7) Housekeeping procedures b. Administrative requirements 1) Distribution of Contract Documents 2) Shop Drawing submittal procedures 3) Maintaining record documents at the Site 4) Contract modification procedures 5) Processing of Payment Application c. Site mobilization requirements Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Project Meetings Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 31 19-5 1) Working hours, overtime, and holidays 2) Field offices, trailers, and staging areas 3) Temporary facilities and utilities, including usage and coordination 4) Temporary controls, such as sediment and erosion control, noise, dust, storm water, and other measures 5) Access to Site, access roads, and parking for construction vehicles 6) Protection of traffic and existing property, including site barriers and temporary fencing 7) Security 8) Storage of materials and equipment 9) Reference points and benchmarks, surveys and layouts 10) Site maintenance during the project, including cleaning and removal of trash and debris 11) Site restoration d. Schedules 1) Preliminary construction schedule 2) Critical work sequencing 3) Preliminary Shop Drawing submittal schedule 4) Preliminary Schedule of Values e. ______________ 3.02 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULES REVIEW MEETING A. As set forth in Section 00700 – General Conditions and Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Schedule. 3.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Progress meetings will be held throughout the Project. Contractor shall attend each progress meeting prepared to discuss in detail all items on the agenda. B. Engineer will preside at progress meetings and will prepare and distribute minutes of progress meetings to all meeting participants and others as requested. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Project Meetings Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 31 19-6 C. Meetings will occur every month on a day and time agreeable to Owner, Engineer, and Contractor. D. Meetings will be held at Engineer’s Field Office at the Site or other location mutually agreed upon by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer. E. Additional meetings may be conducted as progress of Work requires at a mutually agreed date, time and location. F. Progress meetings frequency shall be conducted as specified in this Section, unless modified and agreed upon by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer. Additional meetings may be conducted as progress of Work requires. G. Contractor shall provide submittals specified in this Section prior to each progress meeting. H. Anticipated Attendees 1. Contractor, including project manager, site superintendent, safety representative, and representatives of Subcontractors and Suppliers as required. 2. Engineer, including project manager (or designated representative), Project Representative (if any), others as required by Engineer. 3. Owner, including Owner’s Representative (if any). 4. Cottonwood Heights City Representative. 5. Subcontractors, only with Engineer’s approval or request, as required in the agenda. 6. Anticipated Meeting Agenda (minimum) a. Review, comment, and amendment (if required) of minutes of previous progress meeting b. Review of progress since the previous progress meeting c. Planned progress through next 30 – 60 days d. Review of Progress Schedule 1) Contract Times, including Milestones (if any) 2) Critical path. 3) Schedules for fabrication and delivery of materials and equipment 4) Corrective measures, if required Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Project Meetings Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 31 19-7 e. Submittals 1) Review of status of critical submittals 2) Review revisions to schedule of submittals f. Contract Modifications 1) Requests for interpretation 2) Clarification notices 3) Field Orders 4) Proposal requests 5) Change Proposals 6) Work Change Directives 7) Change Orders 8) Claims g. Applications for progress payments h. Problems, conflicts, and observations i. Quality standards, testing, and inspections j. Coordination between parties k. Site management issues, including access, security, maintenance and protection of traffic, maintenance, cleaning, and other Site issues. l. Safety m. Permits n. Record documents status o. Punch list status, as applicable p. Other business 3.04 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual Specification sections, convene at Site prior to commencing the Work of that section. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Project Meetings Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 31 19-8 B. Require attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by, the Work of that section. C. Notify Engineer 7 days in advance of meeting date. D. Provide suggested agenda to Engineer to include reviewing conditions of installation, preparation and installation or application procedures, and coordination with related Work and work of others. 3.05 OTHER MEETINGS A. In accordance with Contract Documents and as may be required by Owner and Engineer. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Construction Progress Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 32 00-1 SECTION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes detailed requirements and/or procedures for various schedule deliverables including, but not limited to, the Preliminary Project Schedule, Project Schedule Updates, Project Schedule development, Time Impact Analysis, and Recovery Schedules B. Develop, revise, and provide all information and input required for the Project Schedule for the performance of the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents in general and this Section. The Progress Schedule shall incorporate the requirements of General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and all items specified in this section. C. Except as otherwise provided herein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the planning, scheduling, coordination, and execution of the Work is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 00700 – General Conditions B. Section 01 26 00 – Contract Modification Procedures C. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: An element of the construction work that has the following specific characteristics: consumes time, consumes resources, has a definable start and finish, is assignable, and is measurable. B. Constraint: An imposed date on the Progress Schedule or an imposed tie between Activities. The Contract Times are Constraints. C. CPM Progress Schedule: Computerized Progress Schedule in Critical Path Method (CPM) format which accounts for the entire Work, defines the interrelationships between elements of the Work, reflects the uncompleted Work, and indicates the sequence with which the Work has been completed, indicates the sequence in which uncompleted Work will be completed, and indicates the duration of each Activity. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 10 - 1 3 - 2 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Construction Progress Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 32 00-2 D. Critical Path: The continuous chain of Activities with the longest duration for completion within the Contract Times. E. Early Start: The earliest possible date an Activity can start according to the assigned relationships among Activities. F. Early Finish: The earliest possible date an Activity can finish according to the assigned relationships among the Activities. G. Late Finish: The latest possible date an Activity can finish without extending the Contract Times. H. Late Start: The latest possible date an Activity can start without extending the Contract Times. I. Total Float: The total number of days that an Activity (or chain of Activities) can be delayed without affecting the Contract Times. Total float for each Activity shall be calculated as the difference between Early Finish and Late Finish. J. Network Diagram: A time-scaled logic diagram depicting the durations and relationships of the Activities. K. Work Areas, Area, or System: A logical breakdown of the Project elements or a group of Activities which, when collectively assembled, are readily identifiable on the Project (for example, yard piping, a structure or building, a treatment process, or other logical grouping). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide all submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures and this Section. B. Schedule submittals shall include the electronic native file format (i.e., scheduling software file), and a PDF file of the schedule’s logic diagram. C. Action/Informational Submittals 1. Initial Progress Schedules a. Preliminary Progress Schedule b. Acceptable Progress Schedule (Baseline) 1) Baseline schedule shall be reviewed and approved prior to first Application of Payment per Section 00700 – General Conditions, Article 2.06. 2. Progress Schedule Updates Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Construction Progress Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 32 00-3 a. Shall include updated Progress Schedule and Schedule Narrative Report. b. Submit updated Progress Schedule at each progress meeting. If a Progress Schedule remains unchanged from one progress meeting to the next, submit a written statement to that effect. 3. Time Impact Analyses 4. Recovery Schedule 5. Progress Schedule Preparer and Staff Qualifications PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT SCHEDULE DEVELOPMENT A. The schedule shall cover the entire Contact Time, and the Work shall be scheduled to complete the Project within the Contract Time. B. The Schedule’s Late Finish Date shall equal the Contract Completion Date. C. All activities except for the NTP and Final Completion shall have a predecessor and a successor. No open-ended activities will be permitted. Note that NTP shall have a successor or successors and Final Completion shall have a predecessor or predecessors. D. Proposed durations assigned to each activity shall be the Contractor’s best estimate of time required to complete the activity, considering the scope and resources planned for the activity. E. The durations of activities shall be expressed in whole working days, with a maximum duration of 20 workdays each, unless otherwise approved or directed by the Engineer or the Owner. The duration of non-construction activities including mobilization, shop drawings and sample submittals, fabrication of materials and equipment, and delivery of materials and equipment may exceed this limitation. F. The Schedule shall incorporate in detail all elements of the Work contained within the Contract Documents. Specific elements of the Work to incorporate into the schedule include but are not limited to the following: 1. Notice to Proceed. 2. Mobilization and demobilization. 3. Submittals including O&M Manuals Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Construction Progress Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 32 00-4 a. Note that durations for Engineer review time shall be 30 working days unless specified elsewhere in these Contract Documents. 4. Fabrication and procurement activities. 5. Temporary construction activities and relocations 6. Permitting 7. Erosion control 8. Site clearing 9. Site restoration 10. All requirements for coordination with Owner operations 11. Concrete curing and form removal 12. All testing activities 13. Inspections as required by local authorities. 14. Interim Milestones as defined by this Contact or as deemed critical as the project progresses. 15. All requirements related to facility startup and commissioning. 16. Substantial Completion (including the period for performing the punchlist) 17. Final Completion 3.02 INITIAL PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Type and Organization of Progress Schedules 1. Prepare one Progress Schedule covering the entire Project using Primavera Planner (P6 or newer), or Microsoft Project scheduling software. 2. Indicate first date of each work week. 3. Indicate concise description of the Work represented by the activity and related Specification Section number. The Work related to each activity shall be limited to one work trade and one construction area. B. Submitted PDF files shall be in a Gantt Chart Format and shall show the following: 1. Activity identification number. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Construction Progress Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 32 00-5 2. Activity description. 3. Activity duration (in workdays). 4. Activity percent complete 5. Start, Early Start, Late Start, Finish, Early Finish, and Late Finish Dates 6. Total Float for each Activity. 7. Critical Path denoted. C. Organization 1. Group shop drawings, samples and other submittals into a separate sub schedule that is part of the Progress Schedule. 2. Group deliveries of materials and equipment into a separate sub-schedule that is part of the Progress Schedule. 3. Group construction into Work Area sub-schedules (that are part of the Progress Schedule) by Activity. 4. Clearly indicate the Critical Path on the Progress Schedule. 5. Organize each Work Area sub-schedule by Specification Section number. D. Preliminary Progress Schedule: 1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer the Preliminary Progress Schedule within ten (10) days after the Contract Times commence running. E. Initial Acceptance of Progress Schedule 1. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment, schedule a conference at the Site for review of the Preliminary Progress Schedule. a. Attendees shall include Contractor, Engineer, Owner, and others as required. b. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the Progress Schedule. c. Owner reserves the right to not make progress payment to Contractor until acceptable Progress Schedule, and other reports and schedule-related documents required are submitted to Engineer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Construction Progress Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 32 00-6 2. Initially-accepted Progress Schedule shall be identified as the Baseline Progress Schedule. The Baseline Progress Schedule shall not be revised without Owner and Engineer approval. 3.03 PROJECT SCHEDULE UPDATES A. Project Schedule Updates shall be prepared monthly throughout the entire Contract Time and until Project Final Completion. The Engineer will not recommend progress payments by the Owner until a complete Project Schedule Update (including Schedule Narrative Report) is received, reviewed, and accepted by the Engineer. B. The update to the Progress Schedule shall be based on retained logic. Progress override logic is not allowed. C. Required scheduling software, and schedule organization, format, and content for updated Progress Schedules are identical to that required in this Section for initial Progress Schedules. D. For all Project Schedule Updates, the percent complete reported for individual Activities shall be based on Work accepted and paid for the by Owner in monthly pay applications. Failure to comply with this requirement will result in rejection of the submitted update. Rejection of the Project Schedule Update will in turn result in the Engineer not recommending progress payments by the Owner. E. Monthly Progress Schedule Updates shall be accompanied by a Schedule Narrative Report. The report shall: 1. Describe Work completed within the preceding month. 2. Describe Work planned for the following month (including a look-ahead schedule). 3. Identify proposed changes or revisions to the Baseline Progress Schedule. 4. Identify all Work performed out of sequence. 5. Identify problem areas. 6. Identify current or anticipated conditions which may delay the Work. 3.04 TIME IMPACT ANALYSIS A. General 1. Prepare and submit a time impact analysis when one or more of the following occurs: a. Change Order proposal is prepared. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Construction Progress Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 32 00-7 b. Work Change Directive is issued that will affect the Progress Schedule. c. When delays are experienced. 2. Time impact analysis shall illustrate the influence of each Change Order, Work Change Directive, or delay. 3. Each time impact analysis shall include a sketch (fragnet) demonstrating how Contractor proposes to incorporate the changes in the Project or, as applicable, delays into the Progress Schedule. Fragnet shall include all logic, and additions required as result of said Change Order, Work Change Directive, or delay. 4. Fragnet shall show all CPM logic revisions for the Work associated with the Change Order, Work Change Directive, or delay and its relationship to other Activities. 5. Timing of Time Impact Analysis a. Submit each time impact analysis within 7 days after the following, as applicable: 1) Start of the delay. 2) After the submittal of Change Order proposal to Engineer 3) After Contractor’s Receipt of Work Change Directive. b. When General Contractor does not submit time impact analysis for a specific change or delay under the General Contract, within the specified period of time for such submittal, such non-submittal shall be construed that no extension of the Contract Times is required. B. Evaluation by Engineer and Acceptance 1. Engineer’s evaluation of each time impact analysis comprised of complete information will be completed in timely manner after Engineer’s receipt. Changes in the Contract Times will be made only by Change Order. 2. When mutual agreement is reached between the parties, on effect of the change or delay in the Project, incorporate into the next Progress Schedule and update the associated fragnets illustrating the influence of changes and delays. 3.05 RECOVERY SCHEDULES A. General 1. When an updated Progress Schedule indicates that the ability to comply with the Contract Times falls 30 or more days behind schedule, and there is no excusable Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Construction Progress Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 32 00-8 delay, Change Order, or Work Change Directive to support an extension of the Contract Times, Contractor shall prepare and submit a Progress Schedule demonstrating Contractor’s plan to accelerate the Project to achieve compliance with the Contract Times (i.e., “recovery schedule”) for Engineer’s acceptance. 2. Submit recovery schedule within 14 days after submittal of updated Progress Schedule where need for recovery schedule is indicated. B. Implementation of Recovery Schedule 1. At no additional cost to Owner, Contractor shall do one or more of the following: a. Furnish additional labor and construction equipment. b. Employ additional work shifts. c. Expedite procurement of materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. d. Other measures necessary to complete the Work within the Contract Times. 2. Upon acceptance of recovery schedule by Engineer, incorporate recovery schedule into the next Progress Schedule update. C. Contractor’s refusal, failure, or neglect to submit a recovery schedule shall constitute reasonable evidence that Contractor is not prosecuting the Work or separable part thereof with the diligence that will ensure completion within the Contract Times. Such lack of action shall constitute sufficient basis for Owner to exercise remedies available to Owner under the Contract Documents 3.06 USE OF FLOAT A. Total Float and Contract Float belong to the Project and may be used by Owner, Engineer, or Contractor to accommodate modifications, regardless of origination, in the Work or to mitigate the effect of events that may delay performance or completion of the Work. B. Changes or delays that influence scheduled Work Activities with Float and that do not extend the critical path will not be justification for an extension in Contract Times. 3.07 SCHEDULE ACCEPTANCE A. Engineer’s acceptance will demonstrate agreement that: 1. Proposed schedule is accepted with respect to: a. Contract Times, including Final Completion and all intermediate Milestones are within the specified times. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Construction Progress Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 32 00-9 b. Specified Work sequences and constraints are shown as specified. c. Specified pre-selected Material arrival dates, or range of dates, are included. d. Access restrictions are accurately reflected. e. Startup and testing times are as specified. f. Submittal review times are as specified. 2. In all other respects, Engineer’s acceptance of Contractor’s schedule indicates that, in Engineer’s judgement, schedule represents reasonable plan for constructing Project in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer’s review will not make any change in Contract requirements. Lack of comment on any aspect of schedule that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents will not thereby indicate acceptance of that change, unless Contractor has explicitly called the nonconformance to Engineer’s attention in submittal. Schedule remains Contractor’s responsibility and Contractor retains responsibility for performing all activities, for activity durations, and for activity sequences required to construct Project in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Unacceptable Preliminary Progress Schedule: 1. Make requested corrections; resubmit within 10 days. 2. Until acceptable to Engineer as Baseline Progress Schedule, continue review and revision process, during which time Contractor shall update schedule on a monthly basis to reflect actual progress and occurrences to date. C. Unacceptable Detailed Progress Schedule: 1. Make requested corrections; resubmit within 10 days. 2. Until acceptable to Engineer as Baseline Progress Schedule, continue review and revision process. 3.08 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT TIMES A. Reference Section 00700 – General Conditions and Section 01 26 00 – Contract Modification Procedures. B. Evaluation and reconciliation of Adjustments of Contract Times shall be based on the Updated Progress Schedule at the time of proposed adjustment or claimed delay. C. Claims Based on Contract Times: 1. Where Engineer has not yet rendered formal decision on Contractor’s Claim for adjustment of Contract Times, and parties are unable to agree as to amount of Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Construction Progress Schedule Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 32 00-10 adjustment to be reflected in Progress Schedule, Contractor shall reflect an interim adjustment in the Progress Schedule as acceptable to Engineer. 2. It is understood and agreed that such interim acceptance will not be binding on either Contractor or Owner, and will be made only for the purpose of continuing to schedule Work until such time as formal decision has been rendered as to an adjustment, if any, of the Contract Times. 3. Contractor shall revise Progress Schedule prepared thereafter in accordance with Engineer’s formal decision. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Submittal Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 33 00-1 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes requirements for providing submittals in accordance with the General Conditions as modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and this Section. B. Contractor is responsible to confirm and correct dimensions at the Site, for information pertaining to the fabrication processes and to techniques of construction, and for coordinating the work of all trades. C. Contractor’s signature of submittal’s stamp and letter of transmittal shall be Contractor’s representation that Contractor has met his obligations under the Contract Documents relative to that submittal. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 25 00  Substitution Procedures B. Section 01 78 23  Operation and Maintenance Data C. Section 01 78 39  Project Record Documents D. Section 01 78 43  Spare Parts and Extra Material. E. Section 01 79 00  Instruction of Owner’s Personnel. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittal: Written and graphic information submitted by Contractor that requires Engineer’s approval. B. Informational Submittal: Information submitted by Contractor that does not require Engineer’s approval. 1.04 TYPES OF SUBMITTALS A. When the type of submittal is not specified and is not defined in this Section, Engineer will determine the type of submittal. 1. Action/Informational Submittals a. Shop Drawings. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Submittal Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 33 00-2 b. Product data. c. Delegated design submittals in accordance with the General Conditions and as modified by the Supplemental Conditions. d. Samples. e. Testing plans, procedures, and testing limitations. f. Design data not sealed and signed by a design professional retained by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier. g. Pre-construction test and evaluation reports, such as reports on pilot testing, subsurface investigations, potential Hazardous Environmental Conditions, and similar reports. h. Supplier instructions, including installation data, and instructions for handling, starting-up, and troubleshooting. i. Sustainable design submittals (other than sustainable design closeout documentation). j. Lesson plans for training and instruction of Owner’s personnel. 2. Closeout Submittals: a. Maintenance contracts. b. Operations and maintenance data. c. Bonds, such as maintenance bonds and bonds for a specific product or system. d. Warranty documentation. e. Record documentation. f. Sustainable design closeout documentation. g. Software. 3. Maintenance Material Submittals: a. Maintenance materials schedule and checklist. b. Spare parts. c. Extra stock materials. 05 - 0 4 - 2 0 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Submittal Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 33 00-3 d. Tools. 4. Quality Assurance Submittals: a. Performance affidavits. b. Certificates. c. Source quality control submittals (other than testing plans, procedures, and testing limitations), including results of shop testing. d. Field or Site quality control submittals (other than testing plans, procedures, and testing limitations), including results of operating and acceptability tests at the Site. e. Supplier reports. f. Special procedure submittals, including health and safety plans and other procedural submittals. g. Qualifications statements. 1.05 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall submit electronic copy of submittals for Engineer’s review via [Procore Document Management] [Construction Management Information System (CMIS)], unless otherwise specified in individual Specification Sections. Acceptable electronic formats are Adobe PDF, Microsoft Word, Autodesk DWF and AutoCAD. B. Submittals shall be furnished in [hard copy format]; [two dimensional PDF]; [three dimensional Revit file format]; [three dimensional Revit file format and accompanied by two dimensional PDF format]. C. Submittal shall be accompanied by letter of transmittal containing date, project title, Contractor’s name, number and title of submittal, list of relevant Specification Sections, notification of deviations from Contract Documents, and other material required for Engineer’s review. D. Provide submittals well in advance of the Work following Engineer’s approval or acceptance of the associated submittal. Work covered by a submittal will not be included in progress payments until approval or acceptance of related submittals has been obtained in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Submittals shall be provided by Contractor with at least thirty (30) working days for review and processing. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Submittal Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 33 00-4 1.06 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS A. Provide a Schedule of Submittals according to the following requirements: 1. Timing a. Provide submittal within time frames specified in the Contract Documents. b. Provide an updated Schedule of Submittals with each submittal of the updated Progress Schedule. 2. Content a. Shall be in accordance with the General Conditions as modified by the Supplementary Conditions, and this Section. b. Requirements for content of preliminary Schedule of Submittals and subsequent submittals of the Schedule of Submittals are identical. c. Identify submittals required in the Contract Documents. Updates of Schedule of Submittals shall show scheduled dates and actual dates for completed tasks. Indicate submittals that are on the Project’s critical path. d. Indicate the following for each submittal: 1) Date when submittals are requested and received from Supplier. 2) Date when certification is received from Supplier and when submitted to Engineer. 3) Date when submittals are submitted to Engineer and returned with disposition from Engineer. 4) Date when submittals are revised by Supplier and submitted to Engineer. 5) Date when submittals are returned with “Furnish as Submitted” (FAS) or “Furnish as Corrected” (FAC) disposition from Engineer. 6) Date when approved submittals are returned to Supplier. 7) Date of Supplier scheduled delivery of equipment and material. 8) Date of actual delivery of equipment and material. 9) Whether submittal will be for a substitution or “equal”. Procedures for substitutions and “or equals” are specified in the General Conditions and the Section 01 25 00  Substitution Procedures. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Submittal Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 33 00-5 10) For submittals for materials or equipment, date by which material or equipment must be at the Site to avoid delaying the Work and to avoid delaying the work of other contractors. 3. Prepare Schedule of Submittals using same software, and in same format, specified for Progress Schedules. 4. Coordinate Schedule of Submittals with the Progress Schedule. 5. Schedule of Submittals that is not compatible with the Progress Schedule, or that does not indicate submittals on the Project’s critical path, or that places extraordinary demands on Engineer for time and resources, is unacceptable. Do not include submittals not required by the Contract Documents. 6. In preparing the Schedule of Submittals: a. Consider the nature and complexity of each submittal, and allow sufficient time for review and revision. b. Reasonable time shall be allowed for Engineer’s review and processing of submittals, for submittals to be revised and resubmitted, and for returning submittals to Contractor. c. Identify and schedule submittals that are expected to have long anticipated review times. 1.07 ACTION/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following Submittals in accordance with the individual Specification Sections, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Product Data a. Catalog cut-sheets b. Descriptive bulletins/brochures/specifications c. Material of construction data, including details on all components including applicable ASTM designations. d. Lifting, erection, installation, and adjustment instructions, and recommendations. e. Finish/treatment data, including interior and exterior shop coating systems. f. Equipment/material weight/loading data, including total uncrated weight of the equipment plus the approximate weight of shipped materials. Support locations and loads that will be transmitted to bases and foundations Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Submittal Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 33 00-6 following installation. Size, placement, and embedment requirements of anchor bolts. g. Complete information regarding location, type, size, and length of all field welds in accordance with "Standard Welding Symbols" AWS A2.0 of the American Welding Society. Special conditions shall be fully explained by notes and details. h. Engineering design data, calculations, and system analyses i. Digital system documentation j. Operating sequence descriptions k. Software/programming documentation l. Manufacturer’s instructions 2. Shop Drawings a. Equipment and material layout drawings, including panel layout drawings. b. System schematics and diagrams including, but not limited to, piping systems; HVAC and ventilation systems; process equipment systems; electrical operating systems; wiring diagrams; controls, alarm and communication systems. c. Layout and installation drawings (interior and exterior) for all pipes, valves, fittings, sewers, drains, heating and ventilation ducts, all electrical, heating, ventilating and other conduits, plumbing lines, electrical cable trays, lighting fixture layouts, and circuiting, instrumentation, interconnection wiring diagrams, communications, power supply, alarm circuits, etc. d. Layout and installation drawings shall show connections to structures, equipment, sleeves, valves, fittings, etc. e. Drawings shall show the location and type of all supports, hangers, foundations, etc., and the required clearances to operate valves, equipment, etc. f. Drawings for pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., shall show all 3 inch and larger electrical conduits and pressure piping, electrical cable trays, heating and ventilation ducts or pipes, structure, manholes or any other feature within four (4) feet (measured as the clear dimension) from the pipe duct, conduit, etc., for which the profile is drawn. g. Equipment and material schedules. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Submittal Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 33 00-7 3. Delegated design submittals, which include documents prepared, sealed, and signed by a design professional retained by Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier for materials and equipment to be incorporated into the completed Work. Delegated design submittals do not include submittals related to temporary construction unless specified otherwise in the related Specification Section. Delegated design submittals include: design drawings, design data including calculations, specifications, certifications, and other submittals prepared by such design professional. B. Samples 1. General Requirements a. Conform submittal of Samples to the General Conditions as modified by the Supplementary Conditions, this Section, and the Specification Section in which the Sample is specified. b. Furnish at the same time Samples and submittals that are related to the same unit of Work or Specification Section. Engineer will not review submittals without associated Samples and will not review Samples without associated submittals. c. Samples shall clearly illustrate functional characteristics of product, all related parts and attachments, and full range of color, texture, pattern, and material. 2. Submittal Requirements a. Securely label or tag Samples with submittal identification number. Label or tag shall not cover, conceal, or alter appearance or features of Sample. Label or tag shall not be separated from the Sample. b. Submit number of Samples required in Specifications. If number of Samples is not specified in the associated Specification Section, provide at least one identical Samples of each item required for Engineer’s approval. If Contractor requires Sample(s) for Contractor’s use, notify Engineer in writing and provide additional Sample(s). Contractor is responsible for furnishing, shipping, and transporting additional Samples. c. Deliver one Sample to Engineer’s field office at the Site. Deliver balance of Samples to location directed by Engineer. 1.08 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following Closeout Submittals in accordance with the individual Specification Sections, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Maintenance contracts Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Submittal Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 33 00-8 2. Bonds for specific products or systems 3. Warranty documentation 4. Sustainable design closeout documentation. 5. Software programming and documentation. B. On documents such as maintenance contracts and bonds, include on each document furnished original signature of entity issuing the document. C. Operations and Maintenance Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23  Operations and Maintenance Data. D. Record Documentation: Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 39  Project Record Documents. E. Disposition: Dispositions and meanings are the same as specified for Informational Submittals. 1.09 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.10 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review, coordinate, and verify submittals with Subcontractors, Manufacturers, and Suppliers, including field measurements at Site, in accordance with the General Conditions and as modified by Supplemental Conditions prior to submitting material for Engineer’s review. B. Clearly and concisely indicate and mark equipment and material being submitted to meet the intent of the Contract Documents. Equipment and material not being submitted shall be deleted, stricken through, or otherwise designated not being submitted. Equipment and material data sheets shall be included once with cross references throughout the submittal. Multiple equipment and material data sheets for the same item within a submittal may receive a rejected disposition until corrected. 1. Individual Specification Sections require a Compliance, Deviations, and Exceptions (CD&E) letter to be included with the submittal. When specified, submittals provided without the CD&E letter shall receive a rejected disposition without review. 2. CD&E letter requirements a. Include a copy of entire Specification section with each paragraph and subparagraph noted with “C”, “D”, or “E” to indicate if equipment and material being provided is in compliance (C), deviates (D), or exceptions (E) are taken with the Contract Documents. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Submittal Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 33 00-9 1) Compliance (C): Full compliance with the specified requirement. 2) Deviation (D): Deviation from the specified requirement. 3) Exception (E): Exception with the specified requirement. b. Include all comments, deviations and exceptions taken to the Contract Documents by the Contractor and Equipment Manufacturer/Supplier. c. Any requirements with the letter "D" or "E" beside them shall be provided with a full typewritten explanation of the deviation/exception. Handwritten explanation of the deviations/exceptions is not acceptable. d. Address deviations and exceptions taken to each Contract Drawing related to the Specification section. C. Provide Contractor’s stamp of approval certifying submittal material has been reviewed and conform to the Contract Documents prior to submitting material for Engineer’s review. D. Provide written notice of deviations or variations that submittal may have with the Contract Documents. E. Provide bound, dated, labeled, tabulated, and consecutively numbered submittals as specified in the individual Specification Section. Label shall contain the following: 1. Specification Section. 2. Referenced Drawing number. 3. Subcontractor or Supplier name. 4. Type of equipment and/or materials. F. Perform the following after receiving Engineer’s review disposition: 1. Order, fabricate, or ship equipment and materials included in the submittal (pending Engineer’s review of source quality control submittals) with the following disposition: a. “Furnish as Submitted” (FAS). b. “Furnish as Corrected” (FAC). c. “Furnish as Corrected – Confirm” (FACC), only portions of Work that do not require resubmittal for Engineer’s review. 2. Resubmittal requirements: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Submittal Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 33 00-10 a. Partial resubmittal of “Furnish as Corrected – Confirm” (FACC) returned dispositions, until Engineer’s disposition is either “Furnish as Submitted” (FAS) or “Furnish as Corrected” (FAC). b. Full resubmittal of material with Engineer’s disposition of “Revise and Resubmit” (R&R), until Engineer’s disposition is “Furnish as Submitted” (FAS), “Furnish as Corrected” (FAC), or “Furnish as Corrected – Confirm” (FACC) that requires a partial resubmittal. c. Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner if submittals are not approved within the number of specified submittals in accordance with the General Conditions. Engineer’s charges shall include, but not limited to, additional review effort, meetings, and conference calls with Contractor, Subcontractor, or Supplier. 1.11 ENGINEER’S REVIEW A. Engineer’s review of the Contractor’s submittal shall not relieve Contractor’s responsibility under the Contract Document in accordance with the General Conditions and as modified in the Supplemental Conditions. An acceptance of a submittal shall be intended to mean the Engineer does not have specific objection to the submitted material, subject to conformance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. B. Engineer’s review of Contractor’s submittal shall be confined to general arrangement and compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall not be for the purpose of checking dimensions, weights, clearances, fittings, tolerances, interferences, coordination of Subcontractor work, etc. C. Review Dispositions: 1. “Furnish as Submitted” (FAS) – No exceptions are taken. 2. “Furnish as Corrected” (FAC) – Minor corrections are noted for Contractor’s correction. 3. “Furnish as Corrected – Confirm” (FACC) – Corrections are noted and partial resubmittal shall be made as noted. 4. “Revise and Resubmit” (R&R) – Corrections are noted and complete resubmittal shall be made. Submittal does not conform to applicable requirements of the Contract Documents and is not acceptable. Revise submittal and re-submit to indicate acceptability and conformance with the Contract Documents. 5. “Receipt Acknowledged” (RA) – a. Information included in submittal conforms to the applicable requirements of the Contract Documents and is acceptable. No further action by Contractor is required relative to this submittal, and the Work covered by the submittal Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Submittal Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 33 00-11 may proceed, and products with submittals with this disposition may be shipped or operated, as applicable. b. Information included in submittal is for Project record purposes and does not require Engineer’s review or approval. 6. “Rejected” (R) – Information included in submittal does not conform to the applicable requirements of the Contract Documents and is unacceptable. Contractor shall submit products and materials as specified in the Contract Documents or provide required information for substitution as specified in the Contract Documents for consideration by Engineer. D. Electronic Submittal Return to Contractor: Electronic submittals shall be returned electronically with dispositions provided. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pipe Loading Restrictions Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 35 10-1 SECTION 01 35 10 PIPE LOADING RESTRICTIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes requirements regarding loading restrictions on District pipelines. B. The Salt Lake Aqueduct (SLA) contains both steel and reinforced concrete pipe (RCP). Rebar reinforcement in the RCP varies from Type A (less reinforcement) to Type D (more reinforcement). C. Vehicular and construction equipment traffic and/or material stockpiling of any kind is not allowed over Type A SLA pipe unless adequate protection is provided and prior written approval given by District. D. Vehicular traffic exceeding HS-20 loading is not allowed over SLA Type B, C, or D class pipe unless adequate protection is provided and prior written approval given by District. E. Stockpiling of materials, equipment or debris of any kind shall not be done within 15 feet of the SLA, unless otherwise approved by the District. 1.2 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 1.01 SUBMITTALS B. Informational 1. Provide all submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 2. Temporary pipe protection details and calculations a. Details and calculations shall be stamped by a licensed structural engineer and submitted to the District for review and approval. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pipe Loading Restrictions Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 35 10-2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY PIPE PROTECTION DETAILS AND CALCULATIONS A. Gain District approval on submitted details and calculations prior to applying loads of any kind on the SLA. B. All expenses related to the temporary pipe protection details, drawings and calculations shall be borne by Contractor including review costs incurred by District to have information reviewed by a District-selected structural engineer. C. Vehicle access will not be granted unless Contractor can adequately demonstrate that vehicle loads will not negatively impact District facilities. D. The intent of the pipe protection details and calculations is to demonstrate that loads are being distributed or shed away from the SLA. E. No structures are allowed within the SLA right-of-way corridors. 3.2 DELINEATION OF PROHIBITED PIPE LOADING A. Clearly mark all prohibited SLA loading areas identified on drawings prior to start of construction regardless of requirements in Paragraph 3.01. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Confined Space Entry Plan Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 35 20-1 SECTION 01 35 20 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PLAN PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. Owner has determined that portions of the Site may constitute confined spaces or permit-required confined spaces, as defined in this Section. B. Provide appropriate measures, including labor, supervision, equipment, protective devices, and incidentals, to protect the health and safety of personnel at the Site relative to confined spaces, and who may be affected by the Work in confined spaces including, without limitation: employees and agents of Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, Owner, and Engineer, while engaged in performance of their respective duties at Site. C. Comply with requirements of Owner’s confined space entry program, if any. 1.2 REFERENCE SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 1.3 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 29, Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards. B. CFR, Title 29, Part 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. The following words or terms are not defined but, when used in this Section, have the following meaning: 1. “Confined spaces” are areas on or about the Site as defined in 29 CFR 1910.146(b) and 29 CFR 1926.1202. Confined spaces include, but are not limited to: storage tanks, process vessels, bins, boilers and similar spaces; ventilation or exhaust ducts and stacks; manholes, underground utility vaults and chambers, sewers, pipelines, tunnels; and open-topped spaces greater than four feet deep, such as pits, tubs, vaults, and vessels. 2. “Entry permit” means the written or printed document provided by the employer of personnel entering permit-required confined space, to allow and control entry into permit-required confined space and that contains the information specified in 29 CFR 1910.146(f) and 29 CFR 1926.1206. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 10 2 9 2 0 2 0 J L Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Confined Space Entry Plan Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 35 20-2 3. “Permit-required confined space” means confined space as defined in 29 CFR 1926.146(b) and 29 CFR 1926.1202 and that has one or more of the following characteristics: a. Contains or has potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere. b. Contains material that has potential for engulfing an entrant. c. Has internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated by inwardly converging walls or floors, or by floor that slopes downward and tapers to a smaller cross-section. d. Contains other recognized serious safety or health hazard. 4. “Hot work permit” means the written authorization of employer of personnel entering a confined space to perform operations, such as riveting, welding, cutting, burning, and heating, capable of providing a source of ignition. 5. “Host Employer” means the employer that owns or manages the property where construction is taking place. 6. “Controlling Contractor” is the employer that has overall responsibility for construction at the worksite. B. Comply with Laws and Regulations related to protecting personnel working in or entering confined spaces, including: 1. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 29, Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards. 2. CFR, Title 29, Part 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Provide all required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures with the following exceptions: 1. If acceptable, written response for Submittals required in this Section will not be returned to Contractor. 2. If submittals under this Section are furnished to Engineer, Engineer will forward all submittals under this Section to Owner without review. B. Provide a site-specific confined space entry plan, submitted upon request of Owner. 1. Review the host employer’s existing confined space inventory and entry procedures, if available, in order to prepare Site- and task-specific confined space entry plans which shall be incorporated into Contractor’s Site-specific health and Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Confined Space Entry Plan Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 35 20-3 safety plan. Maintain a copy of the confined space entry plan at the Site for access by employees, Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Confined space entry plan shall include: a. Results of Contractor’s Site-specific hazard assessment to identify confined spaces that are permit-required confined spaces, including list of all such spaces that will be accessed for the Work. Update the list as required throughout the Project. b. Requirements for safeguarding access to, and restricting non-permitted personnel from access to, permit-required confined spaces during the Work. c. Project-specific procedures to be followed when entering or accessing permit-required confined spaces. d. Documentation of training provided to each person that will enter, or work in conjunction with entry to, permit-required confined spaces e. Updates to the plan by adding copies of permits issued and records of entry to permit-required confined spaces, as required in this Section. f. Confined Space Safety requirements, such as: 1) Evidence that personnel entering confined space are trained in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1207and 29 CFR 1910.146(g). 2) Evidence of compliance with 29 CFR 1926 Subpart AA and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3) Completed permit(s) and completed associated data sheets for each instance of access to permit-required confined spaces. File completed permits and data sheets in the Site-specific confined space entry plan and submit in accordance with this Section. 4) Permit for entry to permit-required confined space(s). 5) Permit for hot work in permit-required confined space(s). 6) Complete confined space data sheet. C. For each time personnel enter a confined space, copies of completed permits required for confined space entry, and completed confined space data sheets shall be submitted upon request of Owner. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Confined Space Entry Plan Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 35 20-4 PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION A. Contractor must provide own forced air and other confined space mitigation measures. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 References Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 42 00-1 SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes abbreviations, acronyms, and definitions to be used throughout the Contract Documents. B. See the Section 00700 – General Conditions and Section 00800 – Supplementary General Conditions for additional definitions and terminology applicable to all the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCE TO STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF TECHNICAL SOCIETIES A. Reference to standards and specifications of technical societies and reporting and resolving discrepancies associated therewith shall be as provided in Article 3 of the General Conditions, and as may otherwise be required herein and in the individual Specification sections. B. Work specified by reference to published standard or specification of government agency, technical association, trade association, professional society or institute, testing agency, or other organization shall meet requirements or surpass minimum standards of quality for materials and workmanship established by designated standard or specification. C. Where so specified, products or workmanship shall also meet or exceed additional prescriptive or performance requirements included within Contract Documents to establish a higher or more stringent standard of quality than required by referenced standard. D. Where two or more standards are specified to establish quality, product and workmanship shall meet or exceed requirements of most stringent. E. Where both a standard and a brand name are specified for a product in Contract Documents, proprietary product named shall meet or exceed requirements of specified reference standard. F. Copies of standards and specifications of technical societies: 1. Copies of applicable referenced standards have not been bound in these Contract Documents. 2. Where copies of standards are needed by Contractor, obtain a copy or copies directly from publication source and maintain in an orderly manner at the Site as 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 References Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 42 00-2 Work Site records, available to Contractor’s personnel, Subcontractors, Owner, and Engineer. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. The following terminology is used in the Specifications and not defined in Section 00700 – General Conditions: 1. “Indicated” refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar locations in the Contract Documents. 2. “Shown”, “noted”, “scheduled”, and “specified” are used to help the user locate the reference without limitation on the location. 3. “Installer”, “applicator”, or “erector” is Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor, either as an employee or subcontractor, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application or similar Work. Installers shall be experienced in the Work that installer is engaged to perform. 4. “Experienced”, when used with the term “installer” means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated; being familiar with Laws and Regulations; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and complying with requirements of the Supplier of the material or equipment being installed. 5. Trades: Use of a term such as “carpentry” does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as “carpenter”, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents or required by Laws or Regulations. Such terminology also does not imply that specified requirements apply exclusively to trade personnel of the corresponding generic name. 6. “Assigned specialists” and similar terms: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities be performed by specialists recognized as experts in those operations. Engage said specialists for those activities, and their engagement is a requirement over which Contractor has no option. These requirements do not conflict with enforcement of building codes and other Laws and Regulations. Also, such requirements are not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. Such assignments shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 References Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 42 00-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Manufacturer’s Field Services Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 43 33-1 SECTION 01 43 33 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes requirements related to manufacturer’s field services such as certificates of compliance and training. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Schedule B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures C. Section 01 78 23 – Operation and Maintenance Data D. Section 01 91 14 – Equipment Testing and Facility Startup 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide all submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Informational Submittals 1. Training Schedule a. Submit, in accordance with requirements of this specification, not less than 21 days prior to start of equipment installation and revise as necessary for acceptance. 2. Lesson Plan a. Submit, in accordance with requirements of this specification, proposed lesson plan not less than 21 days prior to scheduled training and revise as necessary for acceptance. 3. Training Session Tapes a. Furnish Owner with one complete set of DVDs fully indexed and cataloged with printed label stating session and date taped. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification of Manufacturer’s Representative 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Manufacturer’s Field Services Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 43 33-2 1. Authorized representative of the manufacturer, factory trained, and experienced in the technical applications, installation, operation, and maintenance of respective equipment, subsystem, or system, with full authority by the equipment manufacturer to issue the certifications required of the manufacturer. Additional qualifications may be specified elsewhere. 2. Representative subject to acceptance by Engineer. No substitute representatives will be allowed unless prior written approval by such has been given. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FULFILLMENT OF SPECIFIED MINIMUM SERVICES A. Furnish manufacturers’ services when required by an individual specification section, to meet the requirements of this section. B. Where time is necessary in excess of that stated in the Specifications for manufacturers’ services, or when a minimum time is not specified, the time required to perform the specified services shall be considered incidental. C. Schedule manufacturer’ services to avoid conflict with other onsite testing or other manufacturers’ onsite services. D. Determine, before scheduling services, that all conditions necessary to allow successful testing have been met. E. Only those days of service approved by Engineer will be credited to fulfill the specified minimum services. F. When specified in individual specification sections, manufacturer’s onsite services shall include: 1. Assistance during product (system, subsystem, or component) installation to include observation, guidance, instruction of Contractor’s assembly, erection, installation or application procedures. 2. Inspection, checking, and adjustment as required for product (system, subsystem, or component) to function as warranted by manufacturer and necessary to furnish Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. Providing, on a daily basis, copies of all manufacturers’ representatives field notes and data to Engineer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Manufacturer’s Field Services Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 43 33-3 4. Revisiting the Site as required to correct problems and until installation and operation are acceptable to Engineer. 5. Resolution of assembly or installation problems attributable to, or associated with, respective manufacturer’s products and systems. 6. Assistance during functional and performance testing, and facility startup and evaluation. 7. Training of Owner’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of respective product as required. 8. Additional requirements may be specified elsewhere. 3.02 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE A. When so specified, a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, a copy of which is attached to this section, shall be completed in full, signed by the entity supplying the product, material, or service, and submitted prior to shipment of product or material or the execution of the services. B. Engineer may permit use of certain materials or assemblies prior to sampling and testing if accompanied by accepted certification of compliance. C. Such form shall certify that the proposed product, material, or service complies with that specified. Attach supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. D. May reflect recent or previous test results on material or product, if acceptable to Engineer. 3.03 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION A. When so specified, a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation form, a copy of which is attached to this section, shall be completed and signed by the equipment manufacturer’s representative. B. Such form shall certify that the signing party is a duly authorized representative of the manufacturer, is empowered by the manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate their equipment and is authorized to make recommendations required to assure that the equipment is complete and operational. 3.04 TRAINING A. General 1. Furnish manufacturers’ representatives for detailed classroom and hands-on training to Owner’s personnel on operation and maintenance of specified product Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Manufacturer’s Field Services Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 43 33-4 (system, subsystem, component) and as may be required in applicable Specifications. 2. Furnish trained, articulate personnel to coordinate and expedite training, to be present during training coordination meetings with Owner, and familiar with operation and maintenance manual information specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 3. Manufacturer’s representative shall be familiar with facility operation and maintenance requirements as well as with specified equipment. 4. Furnish complete training materials, to include operation and maintenance data, to be retained by each trainee. B. Training Schedule 1. List specified equipment and systems that require training services and show: a. Respective manufacturer. b. Estimated dates for installation completion. c. Estimated training dates. 2. Allow for multiple sessions when several shifts are involved. 3. Adjust schedule to ensure training of appropriate personnel as deemed necessary by Owner, and to allow full participation by manufacturers’ representatives. Adjust schedule for interruptions in operability of equipment. 4. Coordinate with Section 01 32 00, Construction Progress Schedule. C. Lesson Plan 1. When manufacturer or vendor training of Owner personnel is specified, prepare a lesson plan for each required course containing the following minimum information: a. Title and objectives. b. Recommended attendees (e.g., managers, engineers, operators, maintenance). c. Course description, outline of course content, and estimated class duration. d. Format (e.g., lecture, self-study, demonstration, hands-on). e. Instruction materials and equipment requirements. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Manufacturer’s Field Services Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 43 33-5 f. Resumes of instructors providing the training. D. Pre-startup Training 1. None. E. Post-startup Training 1. None. F. Taping of Training Sessions 1. Furnish audio and color video taping of pre-startup and post-startup instruction sessions, including manufacturers’ representatives’ hands-on equipment instruction and classroom sessions. 2. Use DVD format, suitable for playback on standard equipment available commercially in the United States. 3.05 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following “End of Section”, are part of this Specification. 1. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance. 2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contractor Quality Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 16.13-1 SECTION 01 45 16.13 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes requirements related to Contractor’s quality control system such as meetings, processes, personnel, plans, reports, testing, and inspection. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. ASTM D3740, Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. B. ASTM E329, Use in the Evaluation of Testing and Inspection Agencies as Used in Construction. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Contractor Quality Control (CQC): The means by which Contractor ensures that the construction, to include that performed by subcontractors and suppliers, complies with the requirements of the Contract. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Provide all submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Informational Submittals 1. CQC Plan a. Submit, not later than 30 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed. 2. CQC Report a. Submit, weekly, an original and one copy in report form. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All Work is subject to Owner’s quality assurance inspection and testing at all locations and at all reasonable times before acceptance to ensure strict compliance with the terms of the Contract Documents. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contractor Quality Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 16.13-2 B. Owner’s quality assurance inspections and tests are for the sole benefit of Owner and do not: 1. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures 2. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for damage to or loss of the material before acceptance 3. Constitute or imply acceptance; or 4. Affect the continuing rights of Owner after acceptance of the completed Work. C. The presence or absence of a quality assurance inspector does not relieve Contractor from any Contract requirement. D. Promptly furnish all facilities, labor, and material reasonably needed for performing such safe and convenient inspections and tests as may be required by Engineer. E. Owner may charge Contractor for any additional cost of inspection or test when Work is not ready at the time specified by Contractor for inspection or test, or when prior rejection makes re-inspection or retest necessary. Quality assurance inspections and tests will be performed in a manner that will not unnecessarily delay the Work. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Maintain an adequate inspection system and perform such inspections as will ensure that the Work conforms to the Contract Documents. B. Maintain complete inspection records and make them available at all times to Owner and Engineer. C. The quality control system shall consist of plans, procedures, and organization necessary to produce an end product that complies with the Contract Documents. The system shall cover all construction and demolition operations, both onsite and offsite, including Work by subcontractors, fabricators, suppliers and purchasing agents, and shall be keyed to the proposed construction sequence. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contractor Quality Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 16.13-3 3.02 COORDINATION MEETING A. After the Preconstruction Conference, but before start of construction, and prior to acceptance of the CQC Plan, schedule a meeting with Engineer and Owner to discuss the quality control system. B. Develop a mutual understanding of the system details, including the forms for recording the CQC operations, control activities, testing, administration of the system for both onsite and offsite Work, and the interrelationship of Contractor’s management and control with the Owner’s Quality Assurance. C. There may be occasions when subsequent conferences may be called by either party to reconfirm mutual understandings and/or address deficiencies in the CQC system or procedures that may require corrective action by Contractor. 3.03 QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION A. CQC System Manager 1. Designate an individual within Contractor’s organization who will be responsible for overall management of CQC and have the authority to act in CQC matters for the Contractor. 2. CQC System Manager may perform other duties on the Project. 3. CQC System Manager shall be an experienced construction person, with a minimum of 3 years construction experience on similar type Work. 4. CQC System Manager shall report to the Contractor’s project manager or someone higher in the organization. Project manager in this context shall mean the individual with responsibility for the overall quality and production management of the Project. 5. CQC System Manager shall be onsite during construction; periods of absence may not exceed 2 weeks at any one time. 6. Identify an alternate for CQC System Manager to serve with full authority during the System Manager’s absence. The requirements for the alternate will be the same as for designated CQC System Manager. B. CQC Staff 1. Designate a CQC staff, available at the Site at all times during progress, with complete authority to take any action necessary to ensure compliance with the Contract. CQC staff members shall be subject to acceptance by Engineer. 2. CQC staff shall take direction from CQC System Manager in matters pertaining to QC. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contractor Quality Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 16.13-4 3. CQC staff must be of sufficient size to ensure adequate QC coverage of Work phases, work shifts, and work crews involved in the construction. These personnel may perform other duties, but must be fully qualified by experience and technical training to perform their assigned QC responsibilities and must be allowed sufficient time to carry out these responsibilities. 4. The actual strength of the CQC staff may vary during any specific Work period to cover the needs of the Project. Add additional staff when necessary for a proper CQC organization. C. Organizational Changes 1. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance before replacing any member of the CQC staff. Requests for changes shall include name, qualifications, duties, and responsibilities of the proposed replacement. 3.04 QUALITY CONTROL PHASING A. CQC shall include at least three phases of control to be conducted by CQC System Manager for all definable features of Work, as follows: 1. Preparatory Phase a. Notify Owner at least 48 hours in advance of beginning any of the required action of the preparatory phase. b. This phase shall include a meeting conducted by the CQC System Manager and attended by the superintendent, other CQC personnel (as applicable), and the foreman responsible for the definable feature. The CQC System Manager shall instruct applicable CQC staff as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet Contract requirements. c. Document the results of the preparatory phase meeting by separate minutes prepared by the CQC System Manager and attached to the QC report. d. Perform prior to beginning Work on each definable feature of Work: 1) Review applicable Contract Specifications. 2) Review applicable Contract Drawings. 3) Verify that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. 4) Verify that provisions have been made to provide required control inspection and testing. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contractor Quality Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 16.13-5 5) Examine the Work area to verify that all required preliminary Work has been completed and is in compliance with the Contract. 6) Perform a physical examination of required materials, equipment, and sample Work to verify that they are on hand, conform to approved Shop Drawing or submitted data, and are properly stored. 7) Review the appropriate activity hazard analysis to verify safety requirements are met. 8) Review procedures for constructing the Work, including repetitive deficiencies. 9) Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for that phase of the Work. 10) Check to verify that the plan for the Work to be performed, if so required, has been accepted by Engineer. 2. Initial Phase: a. Accomplish at the beginning of a definable feature of Work: 1) Notify Owner at least 48 hours in advance of beginning the initial phase. 2) Perform prior to beginning Work on each definable feature of Work: a) Review minutes of the preparatory meeting. b) Check preliminary Work to verify compliance with Contract requirements. c) Verify required control inspection and testing. d) Establish level of workmanship and verify that it meets minimum acceptable workmanship standards. Comparison with sample panels is appropriate. e) Resolve all differences. f) Check safety to include compliance with and upgrading of the safety plan and activity hazard analysis. Review the activity analysis with each worker. 3) Separate minutes of this phase shall be prepared by the CQC System Manager and attached to the QC report. Exact location of initial phase Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contractor Quality Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 16.13-6 shall be indicated for future reference and comparison with follow-up phases. 4) The initial phase should be repeated for each new crew to work onsite, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase a. Perform daily checks to verify continuing compliance with Contract requirements, including control testing, until completion of the particular feature of Work. b. Daily checks shall be made a matter of record in the CQC documentation and shall document specific results of inspections for all features of Work for the day or shift. c. Conduct final follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional features of Work that will be affected by the deficient Work. Constructing upon or concealing nonconforming Work will not be allowed. 4. Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases: Additional preparatory and initial phases may be conducted on the same definable features of Work as determined by Owner if the quality of ongoing Work is unacceptable; or if there are changes in the applicable QC staff or in the onsite production supervision or work crew; or if work on a definable feature is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity, or if other problems develop. 3.05 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PLAN A. General 1. Plan shall identify personnel, procedures, control, instructions, test, records, and forms to be used. 2. An interim plan for the first 30 days of operation will be considered. 3. Construction will be permitted to begin only after acceptance of the CQC Plan or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the particular feature of Work to be started. 4. Work outside of the features of Work included in an accepted interim plan will not be permitted to begin until acceptance of a CQC Plan or another interim plan containing the additional features of Work to be started. B. Content 1. Plan shall cover the intended CQC organization for the entire Contract and shall include the following, as a minimum: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contractor Quality Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 16.13-7 a. Organization: Description of the quality control organization, including a chart showing lines of authority and acknowledgment that the CQC staff will implement the three-phase control system (see Paragraph QC Phasing) for all aspects of the Work specified. b. CQC Staff: The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of each person assigned a QC function. c. Letters of Authority: A copy of a letter to the CQC System Manager signed by an authorized official of the firm, describing the responsibilities and delegating sufficient authorities to adequately perform the functions of the CQC System Manager, including authority to stop Work which is not in compliance with the Contract. The CQC System Manager shall issue letters of direction to all other various quality control representatives outlining duties, authorities and responsibilities. Copies of these letters will also be furnished to Owner. d. Submittals: Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing submittals, including those of subcontractors, offsite fabricators, suppliers and purchasing agents. e. Testing: Control, verification and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test to include the test name, frequency, specification paragraph containing the test requirements, the personnel and laboratory responsible for each type of test, and an estimate of the number of tests required. f. Procedures for tracking preparatory, initial, and follow-up control phases and control, verification, and acceptance tests, including documentation. g. Procedures for tracking deficiencies from identification through acceptable corrective action. These procedures will establish verification that identified deficiencies have been corrected. h. Reporting procedures, including proposed reporting formats; include a copy of the CQC report form. C. Acceptance of Plans: Acceptance of the Contractor’s basic and addendum CQC plans is required prior to the start of construction. Acceptance is conditional and will be predicated on satisfactory performance during the construction. Owner reserves the right to require Contractor to make changes in the CQC plan and operations including removal of personnel, as necessary, to obtain the quality specified. D. Notification of Changes: After acceptance of the CQC plan, Contractor shall notify Engineer, in writing, a minimum of 7 calendar days prior to any proposed change. Proposed changes are subject to acceptance by Engineer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contractor Quality Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 16.13-8 3.06 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL REPORT A. As a minimum, prepare a CQC report for every 7 calendar days. Account for all days throughout the life of the Contract. Reports shall be signed and dated by CQC System Manager. Include copies of test reports and copies of reports prepared by QC staff. B. Maintain current records of quality control operations, activities, and tests performed, including the Work of subcontractors and suppliers. C. Records shall be on an acceptable form and shall be a complete description of inspections, the results of inspections, daily activities, tests, and other items, including but not limited to the following: 1. Contractor/subcontractor and their areas of responsibility. 2. Operating plant/equipment with hours worked, idle, or down for repair. 3. Work performed today, giving location, description, and by whom. When a network schedule is used, identify each phase of Work performed each day by activity number. 4. Test and/or control activities performed with results and references to specifications/plan requirements. The control phase should be identified (Preparatory, Initial, Follow-up). List deficiencies noted along with corrective action. 5. Material received with statement as to its acceptability and storage. 6. Identify submittals reviewed, with Contract reference, by whom, and action taken. 7. Offsite surveillance activities, including actions taken. 8. Job safety evaluations stating what was checked, results, and instructions or corrective actions. 9. List instructions given/received and conflicts in Drawings and/or Specifications. 10. Contractor’s verification statement. 11. Indicate a description of trades working on the Project; the number of personnel working; weather conditions encountered; and any delays encountered. 12. These records shall cover both conforming and deficient features and shall include a statement that equipment and materials incorporated in file work and workmanship comply with the Contract. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contractor Quality Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 16.13-9 3.07 SUBMITTAL QUALITY CONTROL A. Submittals shall be as specified in Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. The CQC organization shall be responsible for certifying that all submittals are in compliance with the Contract requirements. Owner will furnish copies of test report forms upon request by Contractor. Contractor may use other forms as approved. 3.08 TESTING QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Procedure 1. Perform tests specified or required to verify that control measures are adequate to provide a product which conforms to Contract requirements. Procure services of a licensed testing laboratory. Perform the following activities and record the following data: a. Verify testing procedures comply with contract requirements. b. Verify facilities and testing equipment are available and comply with testing standards. c. Check test instrument calibration data against certified standards. d. Verify recording forms and test identification control number system, including all of the test documentation requirements, have been prepared. e. Documentation 1) Record results of all tests taken, both passing and failing, on the CQC report for the date taken. 2) Include specification paragraph reference, location where tests were taken, and the sequential control number identifying the test. 3) Actual test reports may be submitted later, if approved by Engineer, with a reference to the test number and date taken. 4) Provide directly to Engineer an information copy of tests performed by an offsite or commercial test facility. Test results shall be signed by an engineer registered in the state where the tests are performed. 5) Failure to submit timely test reports, as stated, may result in nonpayment for related Work performed and disapproval of the test facility for this Contract. B. Testing Laboratories Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contractor Quality Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 16.13-10 1. Laboratory facilities, including personnel and equipment, utilized for testing soils, concrete, asphalt and steel shall meet criteria detailed in ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329, and be accredited by the American Association of Laboratory Accreditation (AALA), National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), or other approved national accreditation authority. Personnel performing concrete testing shall be certified by the American Concrete Institute (ACI). 3.09 COMPLETION INSPECTION A. CQC System Manager shall conduct an inspection of the Work at the completion of all Work or any milestone established by a completion time stated in the Contract. B. Punchlist 1. CQC System Manager shall develop a punchlist of items which do not conform to the Contract requirements. 2. Include punchlist in the CQC report, indicating the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. 3. CQC System Manager or staff shall make a second inspection to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected and so notify the Owner. 4. These inspections and any deficiency corrections required will be accomplished within the time stated for completion of the entire Work or any particular increment thereof if the Project is divided into increments by separate completion dates. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Testing Services Furnished by Contractor Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 23-1 SECTION 01 45 23 TESTING SERVICES FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. This specification addresses requirements for testing services specifically required to be provided by the Contractor. This section does not apply to any testing required to be provided by the Owner or Owner’s representative. B. This section does not apply to any Special Inspections as required by Section 01 45 33. Special Inspections cannot be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the Governing Building Code. C. Employ and pay for an independent testing entity to perform specified services covered by this specification. Entity selected shall be subject to approval by Engineer. D. Inspection, sampling, and testing shall be as specified in the individual Specification Sections. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 01 45 33 – Special Inspections 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. ASTM E329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing B. NIST’s Standard Reference Materials (SRM), ISO 17025, General Requirements for the Competence of Testing and Calibration Laboratories 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit copies of material and product test reports where required by the Contract Documents and as requested by Engineer in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Provide the following Quality Assurance Submittals 1. Qualifications statement indicating experience and facilities for tests required under the Contract Documents. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Testing Services Furnished by Contractor Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 23-2 2. Copy of report of inspection of facilities during most recent NIST inspection tour. Include memorandum of remedies for deficiencies reported during inspection. 3. Copy of certificate of calibration for each instrument or measuring device proposed for use, by accredited calibration agency. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM E329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. B. Laboratory shall be authorized to operate in the State of Utah. Where applicable, laboratory shall be certified by the authority having jurisdiction for the types of testing required. C. Testing equipment used by laboratory will be calibrated at maximum twelve month intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either NIST’s Standard Reference Materials (SRM), ISO 17025, General Requirements for the Competence of Testing and Calibration Laboratories, or certified by State, Commonwealth, or local bureau of weights and measures, or values of natural physical constants generally accepted in the engineering and scientific community. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES: A. Provide representative samples of materials in required quantities to laboratory to be tested. B. Provide labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to the Work to be tested, and where required, to Suppliers’ operations. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Site. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For testing entity’s exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples. 5. Forms for preparing concrete test beams and cylinders. C. Notify testing entity and Engineer sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Testing Services Furnished by Contractor Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 23-3 D. Arrange with testing entity and pay for additional services, sampling, and testing required for Contractor’s convenience. E. Provide the preliminary design mix proposed for concrete, and other material mixes to the testing entity that require testing by the testing laboratory. 3.02 TESTING ENTITY’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with Contractor and Engineer and provide qualified personnel promptly when notified. B. Perform specified inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and methods of construction; comply with applicable standards; ascertain compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Promptly notify Engineer and Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies in the Work observed during performance of services. D. Submit specified quantity of report copies of inspections and tests to Contractor and Engineer. E. Perform additional tests and services as required to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.03 REPORT REQUIREMENTS A. Submit test reports electronically and include the following information: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title, number, and name of the Site. 3. Testing laboratory name and address. 4. Name and signature of inspector or person obtaining samples. 5. Date of inspection or sampling. 6. Record of temperature and weather. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of material or product tested and associated Specification Section. 9. Location in the Project. 10. Type of inspection or test. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Testing Services Furnished by Contractor Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 23-4 11. Results of tests and observations regarding compliance with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-1 SECTION 01 45 33 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. This Section defines the requirements for Special Inspections as required by Section 1704 of the International Building Code (IBC) and any State or local amendments. B. Either the Engineer of Record (EOR) or Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge (RDPIRC) will prepare a Statement of Special Inspections, which identifies the type and extent of required Special Inspections. C. The Owner will retain one or more Special Inspections Agencies to perform Special Inspection services. These Agencies shall be independent from the Contractor and approved by the Building Official. The EOR may perform Special Inspection services where qualifications for a specific inspection task are met. D. The Contractor shall plan and conduct his operations as to schedule and allow Special Inspections, providing adequate time and safe access for inspections. The Contractor shall coordinate requirements for Special Inspections with the Special Inspections Agency. E. Special Inspections shall be in addition to inspections performed by Building Officials that are specified in IBC Section 104. F. Special Inspections shall be in addition to any Structural Observations required by IBC Section 1704.6. G. Special Inspections do not supersede other inspections and testing required by the Contract Documents to satisfy the Contractor’s quality control responsibility. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with quality control requirements as required by other Sections of the Specifications. H. Special Inspections shall not relieve Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete work in accordance with Contract Documents. Results of Special Inspections activities, including any discrepancies that are noted or not noted, shall never constitute an acceptance of work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents. I. This Section does not apply to construction equipment, shoring, earth retention systems, and temporary structures used by the Contractor in construction and not detailed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction and any associated building code requirements. 11 3 0 2 0 2 2 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-2 J. Special Inspections requirements apply to work detailed in other Sections of the Specifications. Special Inspections requirements shall be in addition to any other inspection or quality control requirements detailed in other Sections of the Specifications. See individual Specification Sections for type of work in question. K. The contractor shall be responsible for welding inspections. L. The owner will be responsible for materials testing and will be performed under a separate contract. 1.02 REFERENCE SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 1.03 REFEFENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the Specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents and all other documents referenced in the Specifications. All referenced codes and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. International Building Code 2. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 3. TMS 402/TMS 602 – Building Code for Masonry Structures/Specifications for Masonry Structures 4. AISC – Code of Standard Practice 5. AISC 341 – Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings 6. AISC 360 – Specification for Structural Steel Buildings 7. AISC 348 – Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts 8. AWS – Structural Welding Code 9. ADMI – Aluminum Design Manual: A Specification for Aluminum Structures 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Periodic Special Inspections: The part-time or intermittent observation of work requiring Special Inspection by a Special Inspector who is present in the area where the work has been or is being performed and at the completion of the work. B. Continuous Special Inspections: The full-time observation of work requiring Special Inspection by a Special Inspector who is present in the area where the work is being performed. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-3 C. Engineer of Record (EOR): The engineer of each system in responsible charge for the design of each specific building system including structural, mechanical, electrical, and architectural components D. Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge (RDPIRC): The RDPIRC in charge of Special Inspections during construction for each specific building system including structural, mechanical, electrical, and architectural components. The RDPIRC shall be a currently Registered Professional Engineer in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. The EOR may serve in this role. E. Special Inspections Agency: An established and recognized agency regularly engaged in conducting tests or furnishing inspection services, which has been approved by the Building Official and is retained by the Owner. The EOR may serve in this role where qualifications for specific inspection tasks are met. F. Special Inspector: Individual employed by or retained by the Special Inspections Agency who is qualified in inspection of specific aspects or components of the construction and conducts inspection activities in these specific aspects of the construction, as required by this Section. The EOR may serve in this role where qualifications for specific inspection tasks are met. G. Statement of Special Inspections: Document prepared by the EOR or RDPIRC and submitted to the Building Official which identifies the type and extent of required Special Inspections. H. Approved Fabricator: Fabricator who has been registered and approved by the Building Official to manufacture or fabricate specific components of the construction without Special Inspections. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 1. Submit a written statement of responsibility to the Building Official and RDPIRC prior to beginning work. A statement is required from each Contractor who has responsibility for construction or fabrication of a main wind- or seismic-force- resisting system, designated seismic system, or a wind- or seismic-resisting- component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections. 2. Submit qualifications of any fabricators that may qualify as Approved Fabricators to the Special Inspections Agency for review. B. The Special Inspections Agency shall submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 1. The Special Inspections Agency shall provide a statement of qualifications showing relative experience, training, and certification(s) for each Special Inspector to the Building Official, if requested. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-4 2. The Special Inspections Agency shall review fabricator qualifications and submit them to the Building Official for approval as an Approved Fabricator if requested. 3. Special Inspectors shall keep detailed inspection records, including all inspections, tests, similar services, and any discrepancies and corrections. Any discrepancies and corrections shall be reported to the Building Official, the EOR, and the RDPIRC in all required reports, unless otherwise required by the Building Official. 4. The Special Inspections Agency shall submit Interim Reports to the Building Official and the RDPIRC documenting required Special Inspections and correction of any discrepancies at the frequency specified in the Statement of Special Inspections. 5. The Special Inspections Agency shall submit to the Building Official and the RDPIRC a Final Report documenting required Special Inspections and correction of any discrepancies. The Final Report shall be submitted at a point in time agreed upon by the Owner and the Building Official at the Pre-inspection Meeting. 6. Where work is done by Approved Fabricators, the Special Inspections Agency shall coordinate the submittal of a certificate of compliance to the Building Official, the EOR, and the RDPIRC. 1.06 SPECIAL INSPECTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Special Inspectors shall meet minimum qualifications established by the Building Official and shall be approved by the Building Official. 1.07 OFF-SITE FABRICATIONS A. When structural elements or assemblies are fabricated off site, Special Inspections shall be performed in the fabricator’s shop unless the fabricator is an Approved Fabricator. Special Inspections are not required if work is done on the premises of an Approved Fabricator. B. Fabricators shall maintain detailed fabrication and quality control procedures to ensure workmanship and conformance with Contract Documents and reference standards. The Special Inspections Agency shall review the fabricator’s quality control procedures and coordinate required Special Inspections with the fabricator and the Contractor. C. Contractor shall submit qualifications of fabricators seeking Approved Fabricator status to the Special Inspections Agency for review. Approval as an Approved Fabricator shall be given by the Building Official upon the recommendation of the Special Inspections Agency or upon review of the fabricator’s written fabrication procedures and quality control manuals that provide a basis for control of materials and workmanship, with periodic auditing of fabrication and quality control practices by an Approved Agency or the Building Official. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-5 D. At completion of fabrication, the Approved Fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance to the Owner or the RDPIRC for submittal to the Building Official stating that the work was performed in accordance with the approved Contract Documents. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PRE-INSPECTION MEETING A. At least two weeks prior to beginning work, a Pre-inspection Meeting shall be held to discuss the Special Inspection procedures and submittals. The following parties shall participate: EOR, RDPIRC, Special Inspections Agency representative, Contractor, Subcontractors, Testing Agencies, and Building Official. The type of meeting (in-person or teleconference) and location of meeting shall be determined by the Building Official. 3.02 STATEMENT AND SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. The Special Inspections Agency and all Special Inspectors are required to comply with all requirements of the Statement of Special Inspections and the Schedule of Special Inspections. Together, these documents identify materials, systems, components, and work that are required to have Special Inspections, the type and extent of Special Inspections, and whether they will be continuous or periodic. The Schedule of Special Inspections is included at the end of this Section. A form which may be used for the Statement of Special Inspections is also included at the end of this Section. 3.03 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AGENCY REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Special Inspections Agency shall be an established and recognized agency regularly engaged in conducting tests or furnishing inspection services, which has been approved by the Building Official and is retained by the Owner. The Agency shall demonstrate competence, to the satisfaction of the Building Official, for the inspection of the specific aspects of construction or operation requiring Special Inspection. B. The Special Inspections Agency shall maintain detailed inspection records, including a copy at the jobsite, and all records shall be available upon request by the EOR, RDPIRC or the Building Official. The Agency shall submit all required reports to the EOR, RDPIRC and Building Official. Where EOR approval is required for corrections, the Special Inspector shall maintain copies of all related correspondence and submit with all required reports. The Agency shall coordinate all required Special Inspection activities with the Special Inspectors, the Contractor, and any fabricators and shall coordinate designation of fabricators as Approved Fabricators when requested. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-6 3.04 SPECIAL INSPECTORS’ REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES A. All Special Inspectors shall meet the qualification requirements determined by the Building Official for the specific type of inspection services they will be providing and shall be approved by the Building Official. Special Inspectors shall submit written documentation demonstrating their competence and experience or training to the Building Official for approval of their qualifications. B. Special Inspections shall be performed in accordance with all requirements of the Statement of Special Inspections, the Schedule of Special Inspections, the IBC, and any State or local amendments. Special Inspectors shall maintain detailed inspection records, including a copy at the jobsite, and all records shall be available upon request by the EOR, RDPIRC, or the Building Official. Special Inspectors shall submit all required reports to the RDPIRC and the Building Official. Where EOR approval is required for corrections, the Special Inspector shall maintain copies of all related correspondence and submit with all required reports. Special Inspectors shall coordinate inspection requirements and time when inspections can be conducted with the Contractor. C. Any discrepancies in work noted by the Special Inspector shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contractor for correction. Special Inspectors shall coordinate correction of discrepancies with the Contractor. Any corrections of discrepancies that result in changes to the work as shown on the Contract Documents shall be approved by the EOR. If noted discrepancies are not corrected, the Special Inspector shall notify the Contractor, the EOR, the RDPIRC and the Building Official. All noted discrepancies and corrections shall be documented in all inspection records and all required reports. 3.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Each Contractor responsible for the construction or fabrication of a main wind- or seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or a wind- or seismic- resisting-component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections shall submit a Statement of Responsibility to the Building Official, RDPIRC, and EOR prior to the commencement of work. The Statement of Responsibility shall contain acknowledgement of the specific requirements contained in the Statement of Special Inspections. B. The Contractor shall coordinate requirements of Special Inspections with the Special Inspections Agency and the Special Inspectors and shall provide adequate time and access to conduct inspections. The Contractor is solely responsible for providing safe access and any necessary safety equipment required to conduct inspections. The Special Inspector shall not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for the Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of the Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-7 C. Special Inspections shall not relieve the Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Results of Special Inspections activities, including any discrepancies that are noted or not noted, shall never constitute an acceptance of work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. The Contractor shall provide advance notice of work to be conducted that will require Special Inspections. If the Special Inspector is delayed in inspecting the work due to inadequate notice or completion of the work, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost of additional subsequent Special Inspections. E. The Contractor shall promptly correct any discrepancies noted by the Special Inspectors. Any corrections of discrepancies that result in changes to the work as shown on the Contract Documents shall be approved by the EOR. Where EOR approval is required, the Contractor shall report the discrepancy to the EOR in accordance with provisions of the General Conditions. The EOR will authorize any changes to the Contract Documents required for the correction in accordance with provisions of the General Conditions. Copies of all correspondence related to the correction shall be submitted concurrently to the Special Inspections Agency. 3.06 BUILDING OFFICIAL OR AUTHORITY RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Building Official will approve qualifications of the Special Inspections Agency, all Special Inspectors, and any Approved Fabricators. The Building Official will approve all forms submitted by the Contractor, any Approved Fabricators, the EOR, the RDPIRC, the Special Inspections Agency, and the Special Inspectors. The Building Official and the Special Inspections Agency shall agree to the frequency of Interim Reports and the submittal deadline for the Final Report. 3.07 RDPIRC RESPONSIBILITIES A. The RDPIRC shall complete the Statement of Special Inspections and the Schedule of Special Inspections, unless previously completed by the EOR. The Statement of Special Inspections form included in this Section shall be used unless the Building Official has a preferred form for the Statement of Special Inspections, in which case the Building Official’s form may be used and shall be completed by the RDPIRC. B. The RDPIRC shall review and coordinate certain aspects of the project, as determined by the Building Official, for compatibility with the design of the building, structure or building system, including, but not limited to, submittal documents prepared by others, deferred submittal documents and phased submittal documents. 3.08 OWNER RESPONSIBILITES A. The Owner will retain a Special Inspections Agency to perform Special Inspections during construction. The Special Inspections Agency will retain the RDPIRC. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-8 3.09 MINIMUM INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Detailed requirements for Special Inspections are shown in the Statement of Special Inspections and the Schedule of Special Inspections, which references the IBC, applicable code standards, and any State or local amendments. Special Inspections shall be performed in accordance with all requirements of the Statement of Special Inspections, the Schedule of Special Inspections, the IBC, and any State or local amendments. Additional requirements for specific materials listed in other Sections of these Specifications shall also be satisfied. The frequency of inspections shall be continuous or periodic as indicated in the Schedule of Special Inspections and in accordance with applicable building codes. 3.10 REPORTS A. Special Inspectors shall maintain detailed inspection records, including a copy at the jobsite, and all records shall be available upon request by the EOR, RDPIRC or the Building Official. The Special Inspections Agency shall submit all required reports to the Building Official, EOR, and RDPIRC as agreed upon with the Building Official. Reports shall indicate the inspections and testing performed and whether work inspected was or was not completed in conformance to Contract Documents and any corrective measures taken. Where EOR approval is required for corrections, the Agency shall maintain copies of all related correspondence and submit with all required reports. 3.11 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FORMS A. This Section includes forms which may be used to meet requirements for written documentation during the performance of Special Inspections in accordance with the IBC. These forms may be replaced with forms meeting IBC requirements provided by the Building Official if available. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-9 1.1 SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS—STEEL CONSTRUCTION (IBC 2018) Frequency Applicable to projectInspection Task CONT PER Y/N Agent Reference Standard IBC Reference 1. Inspection Tasks Prior to Welding: Welder qualification records and continuity records Y 1)Quality Assurance provided by inspector O Y a. 2)Quality Control provided by fabricator, erector, or contractor P Y b.WPS available P Y c.Manufacturer certifications for welding consumables available P Y d.Material identification (type/grade) O Y e.Welder identification systema O N Fit-up of groove welds (including joint geometry) N 1)Joint preparations N 2)Dimensions (alignment, root opening, root face, bevel) N 3)Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces) N 4)Tacking (tack weld quality and location) N f. 5)Backing type and fit (if applicable) O N AISC 360 Section N.5.4 1705.2.1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-10 Frequency Applicable to projectInspection Task CONT PER Y/N Agent Reference Standard IBC Reference Fit-up of CJP groove welds of HSS T-, Y- and K-joints without backing (including joint geometry) - Quality Assurance provided by inspector N 1)Joint preparations N 2)Dimensions (alignment, root opening, root face, bevel) N 3)Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces) N g. 4)Tacking (tack weld quality and location) O N Fit-up of CJP groove welds of HSS T-, Y- and K-joints without backing (including joint geometry) - Quality Control provided by fabricator, erector, or contractor N 1)Joint preparations N 2)Dimensions (alignment, root opening, root face, bevel) N 3)Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces) N h. 4)Tacking (tack weld quality and location) P N i. Configuration and finish of access holes O N Fit-up of fillet welds Y 1)Dimensions (alignment, gaps at root) Y 2)Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces) Y j. 3)Tacking (tack weld quality and location) O Y AISC 360 Section N.5.4 1705.2.1 k.Check welding equipment O Y a Fabricator or erector, as applicable, shall maintain a system by which a welder who has welded a joint or member can be identified. Stamps, if used, shall be the low-stress type. 2. Inspection Tasks During Welding:AISC 360 1705.2.1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-11 Frequency Applicable to projectInspection Task CONT PER Y/N Agent Reference Standard IBC Reference Control and handling of welding consumables Y 1)Packaging Y a. 2)Exposure control O Y b.No welding over cracked tack welds O Y Environmental conditions Y 1)Wind speed within limits Y c. 2)Precipitation and temperature O Y WPS followed Y 1)Settings on welding equipment Y 2)Travel speed Y 3)Selected welding materials Y 4)Shielding gas type/flow rate Y 5)Preheat applied Y 6)Interpass temperature maintained (min/max) Y d. 7)Proper position (F, V, H, OH) O Y Welding techniques N 1)Interpass and final cleaning N 2)Each pass within profile limitations N e. 3)Each pass meets quality requirements O N f.Placement and installation of steel headed stud anchors P N Section N.5.4 3. Inspection Tasks After Welding: a.Welds cleaned O Y b.Size, length, and location of welds P Y AISC 360 Section N.5.4 1705.2.1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-12 Frequency Applicable to projectInspection Task CONT PER Y/N Agent Reference Standard IBC Reference Welds meet visual acceptance criteria Y 1)Crack prohibition Y 2)Weld/base-metal fusion Y 3)Crater cross section Y 4)Weld profiles Y 5)Weld size Y 6)Undercut Y c. 7)Porosity P Y d.Arc strikes P Y e.k-areab P Y f.Weld access holes in rolled heavy shapes and built-up heavy shapesc P N g.Backing removed and weld tabs removed (if required) P Y h.Repair activities P Y i.Document acceptance or rejection of welded joint or member P Y j.No prohibited welds have been added without the approval of the EOR O Y b When welding of doubler plates, continuity plates or stiffeners has been performed in the k-area, visually inspect the web k-area for cracks within 3 in. of the weld. c After rolled heavy shapes (see AISC 360 Section A3.1c) and built-up heavy shapes (see AISC 360 Section A3.1d) are welded, visually inspect the weld access hole for cracks. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-13 Frequency Applicable to projectInspection Task CONT PER Y/N Agent Reference Standard IBC Reference 4. Inspection Tasks Prior to Bolting: Manufacturer’s certifications available for fastener materials Y 1)Quality Assurance provided by inspector O N a. 2)Quality Control provided by fabricator, erector, or contractor P Y b.Fasteners marked in accordance with ASTM requirements O Y c.Correct fasteners selected for the joint detail (grade, type, bolt length if threads are to be excluded from shear plane) O Y d.Correct bolting procedure selected for joint detail O Y e.Connecting elements, including the appropriate faying surface condition and hole preparation, if specified, meet applicable requirements O N Pre-installation verification testing by installation personnel observed and documented for fastener assemblies and methods used N 1)Quality Assurance provided by inspector O N f. 2)Quality Control provided by fabricator, erector, or contractor P Y g.Protected storage provided for bolts, nuts, washers, and other fastener components O Y AISC 360 Section N.5.6 1705.2.1 5. Inspection Tasks During Bolting: a.Fastener assemblies placed in all holes and washers and nuts are positioned as required O Y b.Joint brought to the snug- tight condition prior to the pre-tensioning operation O Y AISC 360 Section N.5.6 1705.2.1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-14 Frequency Applicable to projectInspection Task CONT PER Y/N Agent Reference Standard IBC Reference c.Fastener component not turned by the wrench prevented from rotating O Y d.Fasteners are pre- tensioned in accordance with the RCSC Specification, progressing systematically from the most rigid point toward the free edges O Y 6. Inspection Tasks After Bolting: a.Document acceptance or rejection of bolted connections P Y AISC 360 Section N.5.6 1705.2.1 7. Steel elements of composite construction prior to concrete placement: a.Placement and installation of steel deck P N b.Placement and installation of steel headed stud anchors P N c.Document acceptance or rejection of steel elements P N AISC 360 Section N.6 1705.2.1 Structural Steel Definitions: Observe (O) – the inspector shall observe these items on a random basis. Operations need not be delayed pending these inspections. Perform (P) – these tasks shall be performed for each welded joint or member. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-15 2. SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS—CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION (IBC 2018) Frequency Applicable to project Inspection Task CONT PER Y/N Agent Reference Standard IBC Reference 1. Inspect reinforcement, including prestressing tendons, and verify placement X Y ACI 318: Ch 20, 25.2, 25.3, 26.6.1-26.6.3 1705.3, 1908.4 2. Reinforcing bar welding: a.Verify weldability of reinforcing bars other than ASTM A706 X N b.Inspect single-pass fillet welds, maximum 5/16” X N c.Inspect all other welds X N AWS D1.4, ACI 318: 26.6.4 1705.3 3. Inspect anchors cast in concrete X Y ACI 318: 17.8.2 1705.3 4. Inspect anchors post-installed in hardened concrete members f: Y a.Adhesive anchors installed in horizontally or upwardly inclined orientations to resist sustained tension loads Y b.Mechanical anchors and adhesive anchors not defined in 4. a X X Y ACI 318:17.8.2.4, ACI 318: 17.8.2 1705.3 5. Verify use of required design mix X Y ACI 318: Ch 19, 26.4.3, 26.4.4 1705.3, 1904.1, 1904.2, 1908.2, 1908.3 6. Prior to concrete placement, fabricate specimens for strength tests, perform slump and air content tests, and determine the temperature of the concrete X Y ASTM C172, ASTM C31, ACI 318: 26.5, 26.12 1705.3, 1908.10 7. Inspect concrete and shotcrete placement for proper application techniques X Y ACI 318: 26.5 1705.3, 1908.6, 1908.7, 1908.8 8. Verify maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques X Y ACI 318: 26.5.3-26.5.5 1705.3, 1908.9 9. Inspect formwork for shape, location, and dimensions of the concrete member being formed X Y ACI 318: 26.11.1.2(b) 1705.3 e Where applicable, see IBC Section 1705.12, Special Inspections for seismic resistance. f Specific requirements for special inspection shall be included in the research report for the anchor issued by an approved source in accordance with 17.8.2 in ACI 318, or other qualification procedures. Where specific requirements are not provided, special inspection requirements shall be specified by the registered design professional and shall be approved by the building official prior to the commencement of the work. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-16 3. SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS—PRECAST CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION (IBC 2018) Frequency Applicable to projectInspection Task CONT PER Y/N Agent Reference Standard IBC Referenceg 1. Inspect prestressed concrete for: N a.Application of prestressing forces N b.Grouting of bonded prestressing tendons X N ACI 318: 26.10 1705.3 2. Inspect erection of precast concrete members X Y ACI 318: 26.9 1705.3 3. Verify in-situ concrete strength, prior to stressing of tendons in post-tensioned concrete and prior to removal of shores and forms from beams and structural slabs. X N ACI 318: 26.11.2 1705.3 g Where applicable, see IBC Section 1705.12, Special Inspections for seismic resistance Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-17 4. SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS—SOILS (IBC 2018) Frequency Applicable to project Inspection Task CONT PER Y/N Agent Reference Standard IBC Reference 1. Verify materials below shallow foundations are adequate to achieve the design bearing capacity X Y 2. Verify excavations are extended to proper depth and have reached proper material X Y 3. Perform classification and testing of compacted fill materials X Y 4. Verify use of proper materials, densities and lift thicknesses during placement and compaction of compacted fill X Y 5. Prior to placement of compacted fill, inspect subgrade and verify that site has been prepared properly X Y 1705.6 9. Special Inspections Agency Contact Information: 1. 2. 3. 4. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-18 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS PROJECT: LOCATION: PERMIT APPLICANT: APPLICANT’S ADDRESS: ARCHITECT OF RECORD: STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD: MECHANICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD: ELECTRICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD: REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL IN RESPONSIBLE CHARGE: This Statement of Special Inspections is submitted in accordance with Section 1704 of the International Building Code. It shall be considered in conjunction with the Schedule of Special Inspections included in this Specification Section 01 45 33. If applicable, it includes Requirements for Seismic Resistance and/or Requirements for Wind Resistance. Are Requirements for Seismic Resistance included in the Statement of Special Inspections? Yes No Are Requirements for Wind Resistance included in the Statement of Special Inspections? Yes No The Special Inspector(s) shall keep detailed records of all inspections, including a copy at the jobsite. All records shall be available upon request by the Engineer or the Building Official. Any discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contractor. If the discrepancies are not corrected, the discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Building Official and the Engineer prior to completion of that phase of work. The Special Inspections Agency shall furnish Interim Reports to the Building Official and to the Engineer at the frequency indicated in the Statement of Special Inspections. A Final Report shall be submitted to the Building Official and the Engineer at the time agreed upon by the Owner and the Building Official. Frequency of Interim Report submittals to the Building Official: ___ Weekly ___ Bi-Weekly ___ Monthly Other; specify:____________________ Frequency of Interim Report submittals to the Engineer: ___ Weekly ___ Bi-Weekly ___ Monthly Other; specify:____________________ Special Inspections do not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents. Jobsite safety and means and methods of construction are solely the responsibility of the Contractor. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-19 Statement of Special Inspections Prepared by: Type or print name Signature Date Building Official’s Acceptance: Type or print name Signature Date Registered Design Professional’s Seal Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-20 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS REQUIREMENTS FOR SEISMIC RESISTANCE See the Schedule of Special Inspections for inspection and testing requirements. Seismic Design Category: D Statement of Special Inspection for Seismic Resistance Required (Yes/No): Yes Description of seismic force-resisting system subject to special inspection and testing for seismic resistance: Description of designated seismic systems in accordance with Chapter 13 of ASCE 7 subject to special inspection and testing for seismic resistance. Special inspector shall verify that the label, anchorage and mounting of these systems conforms to the Contract Documents and Approved Submittals: Description of additional seismic systems and components requiring special inspections: Description of additional seismic systems and components requiring testing: Statement of Responsibility: Each Contractor responsible for the construction or fabrication of a system or component described above must submit a Statement of Responsibility. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-21 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS REQUIREMENTS FOR WIND RESISTANCE See the Schedule of Special Inspections for inspection and testing requirements. Basic Wind Speed (3 second gust): __________ m.p.h. Wind Exposure Category: __________ Statement of Special Inspection for Wind Resistance Required (Yes/No): ___No________ Description of main wind force-resisting system subject to special inspection for wind resistance: Description of wind force-resisting components subject to special inspection for wind resistance: Statement of Responsibility: Each Contractor responsible for the construction or fabrication of a system or component described above must submit a Statement of Responsibility. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-22 INTERIM REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS City/County of: Inspection Type(s) Coverage: Project Name/Address: Continuous Periodic Describe Inspections Made, Including Locations: Tests Made: Date:Total Inspection Time Each Day Hours: List items requiring Special Inspection, and any discrepancies and corrections. If Engineer approval is required for any corrections, note this, and indicate that approval was obtained. Attach copies of all related correspondence. Comments: To the best of my knowledge, work inspected was in accordance with the Contract Documents and applicable standards except as noted above. Signed:Date: Print Full Name: I.D.: Phone Number: This report is to be submitted to the Building Official and the Engineer. A copy shall be maintained at the jobsite. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-23 FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS PROJECT: LOCATION: PERMIT APPLICANT: APPLICANT’S ADDRESS: ARCHITECT OF RECORD: STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD: MECHANICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD: ELECTRICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD: REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL IN RESPONSIBLE CHARGE: To the best of my information, knowledge, and belief, Special Inspections required for this Project in accordance with Section 1704 of the International Building Code and any State or local amendments have been performed, and all work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and all applicable standards, except as indicated. The Special Inspection program does not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents. Jobsite safety and means and methods of construction are solely the responsibility of the Contractor. This Final Report includes information submitted in previous Interim Reports numbered _______ to __________________, as well as any Special Inspections, discrepancies, and corrections occurring since the last Interim Report, dated _____________________________. All items requiring Special Inspection are listed below. All inspections, tests, and similar services that were performed are listed and any discrepancies and corrections are indicated. If Engineer approval was required for any corrections, this is noted, and copies of all related correspondence are attached. (Attach 8 ½”x11” continuation sheet(s) if required to complete the description of corrections) Prepared By: Special Inspection Agency: Type or print name Signature Date Special Inspector’s Seal Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-24 CONTRACTOR’S STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY Each Contractor responsible for the construction or fabrication of a main-wind- or seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or a wind- or seismic-resisting-component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections must submit this Statement of Responsibility prior to commencement of work on the system or component. Project: Contractor’s Name: Address: License No.: Description of building systems and components included in Statement of Responsibility: Contractor’s Acknowledgement of Special Requirements I hereby acknowledge that I have received, read, and understand the Statement of Special Inspections and its requirements. Name and Title (type or print) Signature Date Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-25 FABRICATOR’S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE Each approved fabricator that is exempt from Special Inspection of shop fabrication and implementation procedures per Section 1704 of the International Building Code must submit this Fabricator’s Certificate of Compliance at the completion of fabrication. Project: Fabricator’s Name: Address: Description of structural members and assemblies that have been fabricated: I hereby certify that items described above were fabricated on my premises in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and applicable standards. Name and Title (type or print) Signature Date Attach copy of Building Official’s approval of fabricator as an Approved Fabricator. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-26 NOTIFICATION OF FAILURE TO CORRECT DISCREPANCY City/County of: Project Name/Address: List discrepancies, proposed correction, and Contractor response. If Engineer approval is required for any corrections, note this, and indicate whether approval was obtained. Attach copies of all related correspondence. Comments: Signed:Date: Print Full Name: I.D.: Phone Number: This report is to be submitted to the Building Official, the Contractor, and the Engineer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Inspections Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 45 33-27 END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Permits Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 50 00-1 SECTION 01 50 00 PERMITS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. This section lists the known required permits and known requirements of these permits for the Work. The Contractor should note that the list is not necessarily complete and additional permits may be required to execute the Work and Contractor is responsible for obtaining all required permits. B. Completeness of the list of Contractor-obtained permits is not guaranteed. The absence of information does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for determining and verifying the extent of permits required, of obtaining such permits, and complying with the conditions of each permit. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 31 13 – Coordination 1.03 PERMITS OBTAINED BY OWNER A. The following permits have been, or will be, obtained by the Owner for this Project. Copies of the permits and their requirements are available for review at the Owner’s office. No additional compensation or Contract Extensions shall be granted to Contractor because of delays by Owner to obtain any permit, unless the Contractor is unable to proceed and complete the Work because of such delays as demonstrated by the Contractor’s approved Project schedule. See Section 01 31 13 – Coordination, for other agency and contact information. 1. Plan Review (pipeline design), Utah Division of Drinking Water, engineering review of pipeline for ultimate use as a drinking water facility, see Drinking Water Plan Review Program - Utah Department of Environmental Quality 2. New Source Approval, Utah Division of Drinking Water, new source approval of Little Cottonwood Creek supplies for Big Cottonwood Water Treatment Plant and Big Cottonwood Creek supplies for Little Cottonwood Water Treatment Plant, see New Source Approval (Wells, Springs, and Surface Water Treatment Plants) - Utah Department of Environmental Quality 3. Stream Alteration Program permit, Utah Division of Water Rights, stream alteration permit for pipeline crossing of Big Cottonwood Creek, see Stream Alteration (utah.gov) 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Permits Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 50 00-2 4. Stream Alteration Program permit, Utah Division of Water Rights, stream alteration permit for pipeline crossing of Little Willow Creek (aka Deaf Smith Fork), see Stream Alteration (utah.gov) 5.Flood Control Permit, Salt Lake County Public Works, flood control permit for pipeline crossing of Big Cottonwood Creek, see Flood Control Permits - Public Works-Flood Control | SLCo 6. Buidling Permit, Cottonwood Heights, building permit for construction of underground vaults, see Building Permits - Cottonwood Heights PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. During the Bid period, the Contractor shall review all permits and the requirements of all permits and shall structure the Bid to meet the requirements of the listed permits. Include in the Bid the cost of obtaining all necessary permits, including application fees, bonds, and other costs, and the costs of complying with the conditions of all permits, including the conditions of permits obtained by the Owner. Any permit fees listed in this Section are estimates and for Contractor’s information only. The Contractor shall verify and pay all actual fees. B. The Contractor shall obtain all permits required for the execution of the Work that have not been obtained by the Owner, as indicated in this Section. Submit copies of all Contractor-obtained permits to the Engineer and keep a copy of each onsite. Comply with the conditions of all Owner- and Contractor-obtained permits. 3.02 PERMITS TO BE OBTAINED BY CONTRACTOR A. The following permits shall be obtained by Contractor. Completeness of this list is not guaranteed. Contractor is required to obtain all necessary permits. See Section 01 31 13 – Coordination, for other agency and contact information. 1. Any permits required as part of permits obtained by Owner. See Section 01 50 00 Part 1.03. 2. Encroachment Permit, Utah Department of Transportation (UDOT), encroachment permit for work within UDOT rights-of-way, see Encroachment Permits | UDOT (utah.gov) 3. Right-of-way/Road Excavation Permit, Cottonwood Heights City, excavation permit for work with Cottonwood Heights City rights-of-way, see Right of Way/Road Excavation Permit | Cottonwood Heights, UT (utah.gov) Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Permits Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 50 00-3 4. Construction General Storm Water Permit (CGP)/ Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP), Utah Division of Water Quality, construction general (storm water) permit for Utah Pollution Discharge Elimination System (UPDES), see General Construction (Storm Water): UPDES Permits - Utah Department of Environmental Quality END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Utilities Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 51 00-1 SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes requirements related to furnishing, installing, operating, maintaining, and decommissioning temporary utilities as necessary to complete the Work, such as: 1. Electricity and lighting. 2. Telephone and communications. 3. Heating. 4. Sanitary facilities. 5. Water service. 6. First-aid facilities. 7. Fire protection. B. Refer to Section 01 52 00 – Construction Facilities for requirements related to temporary field offices required for the Project. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 31 19  Project Meetings B. Section 01 52 00 – Construction Facilities 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 241 – Standard for Safeguarding Building Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Temporary utilities and temporary facilities shall be adequate for personnel using the Site and requirements of Project. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Utilities Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 51 00-2 B. Materials and equipment for temporary systems may be new or used but shall be adequate for purposes intended and shall not create unsafe conditions and shall comply with Laws and Regulations. C. Provide required materials, equipment, and facilities, including piping, wiring, and controls. D. Electrical system shall consist of wiring, switches, insulated supports, poles, fixtures, sockets, receptacles, lamps, guards, cutouts and fuses as required for completion of the Work. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Make arrangements with utility service companies for temporary services and obtain required permits and approvals for temporary utilities. B. Pay utility service costs, including connection fees, required for the Work as needed. C. Continuously maintain adequate utilities for all purposes during the Project, until removal of temporary utilities and temporary facilities. At minimum, provide and maintain temporary utilities through Substantial Completion and removal of temporary field offices and sheds. D. Maintain, including cleaning, temporary utilities and continuously provide consumables as required. E. Provide temporary utilities and temporary facilities in compliance with Laws and Regulations and, when applicable, requirements of utility owners. 3.02 USE OF EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Use of Owner’s System 1. Existing Utility Systems a. Do not use systems in existing buildings or structures for temporary utilities without Owner’s written permission and mutually acceptable basis agreed upon by the parties for proportionate sharing of costs between Owner and Contractor. 2. Use of Permanent Utility Systems Provided Under the Project a. Permanent lighting, water, heating, ventilating, and fire protection systems and first-aid facilities may be used to provide temporary utilities and temporary facilities if the following are met: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Utilities Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 51 00-3 1) Obtain Owner’s written permission to use permanent systems. 2) Permanent systems to be used for temporary utilities or temporary facilities shall have achieved Substantial Completion, including complete functionality of all controls. 3) Contractor shall pay all costs while using permanent system, including operation, maintenance, replacement of consumables, and provide replacement parts. b. Do not use the following permanent facilities: 1) Telephone and communication facilities. 2) Sanitary facilities. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install temporary facilities in neat, orderly, manner, and make structurally, mechanically, and electrically sound throughout. B. Locate temporary systems for proper function and service. C. Temporary systems shall not interfere with or provide hazards or nuisances to: the Work under this and other contracts, movement of personnel, traffic areas, materials handling, hoisting systems, storage areas, finishes, Owner operations, and work of utility companies. D. Do not install temporary utilities on the ground, with the exception of temporary extension cords, hoses, and similar systems in place for short durations. E. Modify and extend temporary systems as required by progress of the Work. 3.04 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Electricity: 1. Provide electrical service for construction field offices, sheds, storage containers, lighting, etc. and as required for the Work. 2. General 120/240 V service requirements: a. Provide 120/240 V, single phase, 3-wire temporary system for small power requirements and general lighting. b. Provide separate main disconnects, overcurrent protection, meter outlets, branch circuit breakers, and wiring for temporary service to the Contractor’s and Engineer’s field office service connections. Contractor shall provide Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Utilities Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 51 00-4 equipment and appurtenances in accordance with electricity service provider and applicable standards and codes. c. Contractor shall register the 120/240 V electrical service meter in the Contractor’s name and shall be responsible for electrical charges at no additional cost to the Owner. d. Provide electrical service other than 120/240 V, single phase, 3-wire service as required for the Work at the Contractor’s own expense. 3. The electrical system shall be energized at all times through the Project duration unless otherwise approved. 4. Provide an independent grounding cable connected directly to the structure, building, and equipment for erection and fabrication by electrical welders. Grounding by adjacent conduit, piping, etc. shall be prohibited at the Site. 5. Coordinate usage of temporary electrical system with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Owner including the following: a. Usage is suitable for 120V, single phase, 60 Hz operation with a maximum operating input of 1,500 volt-amperes. b. Usage shall be limited to one unit connected to a single outlet. c. Restrict usage in case of overloading circuits to correct loading. B. Lighting: 1. Provide a minimum of 10 foot candles for enclosed and partially enclosed structures for performing the Work. 2. Provide a night lighting circuit for security. Light intensity shall be a minimum of 2 foot candles. 3. At a minimum, energize the night lighting system at end of typical working day and de-energize at start of typical working day. System shall be continuously energized on Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays. C. Telephone and Communications 1. Provide temporary telephone and communications required for Contractor’s and Engineer’s operations at the Site and for summoning emergency medical assistance. D. Heating and Ventilation Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Utilities Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 51 00-5 1. Provide temporary heating, ventilation coverings, and enclosures necessary to protect the Work and materials against wetness and temperature damage, to dry out the Work, and to facilitate the Work in structures. 2. Equipment, fuel, materials, personnel and methods used shall be adequate to maintain critical installation temperatures and ventilation of Work at all times in areas where necessary to perform the Work. 3. Enclosed structures shall have a minimum temperature of 50°F, unless otherwise specified, where Work is performed. 4. Provide sufficient heat to maintain a minimum temperature of 65°F before and during application of interior finishing, painting, coating, etc. 5. Replace any Work damaged by dampness or insufficient/abnormal heating at no cost to the Owner. E. Sanitary facilities 1. Provide suitably-enclosed chemical or self-contained toilets for Contractor’s employees and visitors to the Site. Location of temporary toilets shall be acceptable to Owner and screened from public observation. 2. Provide and maintain facilities in accordance with State of Utah Labor Regulations and local ordinances. Contents shall be removed and disposed of in accordance with local and state or commonwealth regulations as required. 3. Contractor shall be prohibited from committing nuisances within, on, or in the vicinity of the Site. F. Water service 1. Provide temporary water service for the Work including for construction purposes, sanitary facilities, fire protection, field offices, and cleaning purposes. 2. Provide potable water for Contractor’s personnel either by portable containers or drinking fountains. 3. Provide temporary hose bibs, hoses, and watertight barrels for the distribution of water. 4. Provide freeze protection for water service. G. First-aid facilities 1. Provide temporary first-aid stations at or immediately adjacent to the Site’s major work areas. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Utilities Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 51 00-6 2. Provide temporary first-aid stations inside Contractor’s and Engineer’s temporary field offices. 3. Locations of first-aid stations shall be determined by Contractor’s safety representative. 4. Provide list of emergency telephone numbers at each hardwired telephone at the Site. List shall be in accordance with the list of emergency contact information required in Section 01 31 19  Project Meetings. H. Fire protection 1. Comply with NFPA 241, Safeguarding Building Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations, and requirements of fire marshals and authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. 2. Provide temporary fire exits, fire extinguishers, hoses and safety devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Notify Engineer, Owner, and fire marshals in the event of fire at the Site including, but not limited to, fuel tanks and similar hazardous utilities and devices. Cooperate with Owner of fuel tank and utilities to prevent occurrence of fire or explosion. 4. Perform safety precautions and comply with fire marshal’s instructions in the event of fire. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain temporary systems to provide safe, continuous service as required. B. Properly supervise operation of temporary systems. 1. Enforce compliance with Laws and Regulations. 2. Enforce safe practices. 3. Prevent abuse of services. 4. Prevent nuisances and hazards caused by temporary systems and their use. 5. Prevent damage to finishes. 6. Ensure that temporary systems and equipment do not interrupt continuous progress of construction. C. Check temporary systems at the end of each work day and verify that sufficient consumables are available to maintain operation until work is resumed at the Site. Provide additional consumables if the supply on hand is insufficient. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Utilities Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 51 00-7 D. Replace broken and burned out lamps, blown fuses, and damaged wiring and appurtenances as required to maintain adequate and safe operating conditions. E. Permit subcontractors and others at a mutually agreed arrangement to use temporary electrical system that meet the following requirements: 1. Equipment is suitable for 120 V, single phase, 60 Hz operation. 2. Operating input does not exceed 1,500 volt-amperes. 3. Single piece of equipment connected to one outlet. F. Restrict use of equipment as required to prevent overloading circuits. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITES A. Completely remove temporary utilities, facilities, equipment, and materials when no longer required. Repair damage caused by temporary systems and their removal and restore the Site to condition required by the Contract Documents; if restoration of damaged areas is not specified, restore to preconstruction condition. B. Contractor is responsible for and shall return to original condition those portions of permanent electric system used in completing the Work. C. Where temporary utilities are disconnected from the existing utility, provide suitable, watertight or gastight (as applicable) cap or blind flange, as applicable, on service line, in accordance with requirements of utility owner. D. When permanent utilities and systems were used for temporary utilities, replace all consumables such as filters and light bulbs and parts used during the Work upon Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Construction Facilities Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 52 00-1 SECTION 01 52 00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Provide construction facilities for performance of the Work, including field offices, sheds, storage containers, and project signs. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 01 51 00 – Temporary Utilities C. Section 09 90 00 – Painting 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide all submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Provide project identification sign layout, details, and materials of construction for Owner’s review/approval prior to ordering materials. C. Provide copies of permits and approvals for construction as required by Laws and Regulations and governing agencies. D. Provide the following temporary construction submittals: 1. Access Roads: Routes, cross-sections, and drainage facilities. 2. Parking area plans. 3. Contractor’s field office, storage yard(s), and storage building plans, including gravel surfaced area. 4. Fencing and protective barrier locations and details. 5. Traffic and Pedestrian Control and Routing Plans a. Contractor to prepare detailed traffic control plan using general traffic routing information included in Contract Documents. Changes to this plan shall be made only by written approval of Engineer. Secure approvals for necessary changes so as not to delay progress of the Work. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Construction Facilities Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 52 00-2 b. Show sequences of construction affecting use of roadways, time required for each phase of the Work, provisions for decking over excavations and phasing of operations to provide necessary access, and plans for signing, barricading, and striping to provide passages for pedestrians and vehicles. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Owner’s safety rules while on Owner’s property. B. Keep Owner informed of serious onsite accidents and related claims. C. Use of Explosives: No blasting or use of explosives will be allowed on this project. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTRACTOR’S FIELD OFFICE, SHEDS, AND STORAGE A. Size and Furnishings 1. As required by Contractor B. Features 1. Exterior Contractor identification sign, night lighting for security, and temporary utilities specified in Section 01 51 00  Temporary Utilities. C. Location 1. As shown on the Contract Documents and approved by Owner. 2.02 ENGINEER’S FIELD OFFICE: A. Provide an Engineer’s Field Office in accordance with the following requirements. 1. Separate structure with a minimum of 720 sq ft of floor area with minimum two separate office spaces and one larger common area. 2. Separate covered porch with a minimum of 72 sq ft of floor area at main entrance to structure. Cover shall have separate roof and rainproof seal to main structure. 3. Doors and windows provided with locking devices and hardware to prevent unauthorized entry. Door keys shall be provided to Engineer for the duration of the Project. Door keys will be returned to Contractor following completion of Project. 4. Functional, totally enclosed restroom and mirror shall be provided. 5. Minimum temporary utilities requirements as follows: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Construction Facilities Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 52 00-3 a. Heating: Maintain 68°F in winter. b. Cooling: Maintain 75°F in summer. c. Interior electrical outlets: Minimum one outlet per wall of structure d. Electrical service: Adequate temporary electrical service for fully functional field office e. Individual, direct line telephone service with equipment for up to four persons. f. Individual, direct high-speed internet service (DSL or cable), at minimum 50 Mbps up and down Internet speed, with hardwired networking up to four persons and Wi-Fi for exclusive use by the Engineer. g. Potable water service to water closet and lavatory. Coordinate with utility owners for connections to water and sewer to meet connection requirements. h. Interior and exterior lighting: Conforms to Section 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities and as specified in this Section. 6. Provide the following furnishings 2 Flat top desk, 2-1/2 x 5 feet, with drawers at each end 1 Flat top conference table, 4 x 12 feet 1 Plywood drawing table, 3 x 6 feet tilt top with drafting stool 12 Straight chairs 2 Four-drawer, legal size steel filing cabinets with lock and key (HON 210P Series full-suspension files) 1 23-gallon metal or heavy-duty plastic waste baskets with lids 3 28-quart metal or heavy-duty plastic waste baskets 1 Hanging drawing racks with appurtenances 2 Wall-mounted fire extinguishers 1 Bookcase with 4 shelves, 3 feet wide 3 Metal/plastic office folding tables, 30 x 60 inches (minimum) 1 Metal/plastic office folding table, 30 x 96 inches (minimum) 1 Steel storage cabinets (72” H x 36” W x 24” D) with four adjustable shelves and locks Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Construction Facilities Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 52 00-4 1 First aid cabinet (conforms with OSHA requirements for construction site of up to five people) 2 Tilt/swivel type desk chairs 1 4 cu ft capacity refrigerator 1 1.4 cu. ft. countertop microwave with double-oven cart 1 Laser copying/printing/scanner/facsimile machine with local service contract (printing/scanning in full color up to 11” x 17” paper size) 1 Office hard drive (1 TB minimum) and router networked for up to 4 personnel with high speed internet and 4-in-1 printer 7. Exterior Engineer Identification Sign a. 24” x 36” plywood sign painted white with blue, centered 3-inch high lettering with the following inscription: Field Office Hazen and Sawyer Office Location 8. Location a. As shown on the Contract Documents. 9. Consumables a. Provide consumables and supplies for the Engineer’s Field Office including, but not limited to, waste basket heavy-duty liners, floor entry mats, mud- cleaning brushes, paper towels, toilet paper, printer ink, copying machine paper (all sizes), etc., for the duration of the Contract. 2.03 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN A. Sign Panel 1. 3/4-inch thickness (minimum) marine plywood rabbeted in a 2” x 4” wood frame. 2. Panel shall be fastened to sign supports with six 3/8” dia galvanized bolts, nuts and washers (minimum). B. Sign Supports 1. Two, 4” x 4” treated wood posts C. Fasteners and Hardware Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Construction Facilities Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 52 00-5 1. Galvanized D. Painting 1. Paint sign supports, trim, and back of sign panel with two coats (minimum) of same paint for sign face. 2. Use exterior grade paint, suitable for wood application in accordance with Section 09 90 00  Painting. E. Wording, Colors, and Arrangement 1. Sign shall bear name of Project including project logo, Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and other participating agencies (SLCDPU). 2. Lettering shall be blue applied on a white background. 3. Confirm information to be included on sign with Owner during pre-construction meeting prior to submitting layout. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Furnish and erect Contractor’s field office, sheds, storage containers and associated necessary temporary utilities within 20 days of Notice to Proceed on the Project. B. Provide and maintain one set of Contract Documents, latest approved Shop Drawings, Field Orders, request for interpretations, clarification notices, Work Change Directives, proposal requests, Change Proposals, Change Orders, and other pertinent Project related correspondence at the field office at all times. 3.02 MOBILIZATION A. Mobilization shall include, but not be limited to these principal items: 1. Obtaining required permits. 2. Moving Contractor’s field office and equipment required for first month operations onto Site. 3. Installing temporary utilities in accordance with Section 01 51 00 – Temporary Utilities, including, but not limited to: a. Construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities b. Onsite communication facilities, including telephones. 03 2 6 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Construction Facilities Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 52 00-6 c. Onsite sanitary facilities and potable water facilities as specified and as required by Laws and Regulations, and governing agencies. 4. Arranging for and erection of Contractor’s work and storage yard. 5. Posting OSHA required notices and establishing safety programs and procedures. 6. Having Contractor’s superintendent at Site full time. B. Use area designated for Contractor’s temporary facilities as shown on Drawings. 3.03 ENGINEER’S FIELD OFFICE A. Furnish and erect Engineer’s field office and associated necessary temporary utilities within 20 days of Notice to Proceed on the Project. B. Respond and address maintenance issues that occur at the Engineer’s field office with 24 hours notification. C. Provide qualified, professional cleaning services to clean Engineer’s field office a minimum of two times per week for the duration of the Project. 3.04 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN: A. Provide, install, and maintain project identification sign in accordance with this Section. Erect sign and panel within 21 days of Notice to Proceed on the Project. B. Maintain project identification sign for the duration of the Contract. Contractor shall not receive additional payment for restoring/repairing sign deterioration or for replacement of names and other pertinent sign information throughout the duration of the Project. C. Remove and dispose project identification sign at the completion of the Project when notified by the Engineer. 3.05 STORAGE YARDS AND BUILDINGS A. Temporary Storage Yards 1. Construct temporary storage yards for storage of products that are not subject to damage by weather conditions. B. Temporary Storage Buildings: 1. Provide environmental control systems that meet recommendations of manufacturers of equipment and materials stored. 2. Arrange or partition to provide security of contents and ready access for inspection and inventory. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Construction Facilities Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 52 00-7 3. Store combustible materials (paints, solvents, fuels) in a well-ventilated and remote building meeting safety standards. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contractor Access and Parking Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 00-1 SECTION 01 55 00 CONTRACTOR ACCESS, PARKING, AND SECURITY PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Provide and maintain temporary laydown and parking areas and associated appurtenances required for use by Contractor, Contractor’s employees, subcontractors, Owner, and emergency vehicles, as indicated on the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 01 55 26 – Traffic Control 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Access Road Easements 1. If additional easements are required for access roads, provide written documentation to the Engineer for Contractor-secured easements across privately held property. Easement agreements shall specify terms and conditions of use and provisions for Site restoration. 2. Written release from property owner certifying that terms of the easement agreement have been complied with by the Contractor shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to final payment. C. Access Road Design 1. Design drawings for all weather access roads, culverts and other facilities required for new access roads. 2. Calculations for culvert sizing and loading to be completed by an Engineer licensed in the state of Utah. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 03 2 6 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contractor Access and Parking Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 00-2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Design and maintain laydown areas, access roads, and employee parking areas to be fully passable to vehicles in all weather conditions. B. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and Site entrances. 3.02 NEW ACCESS ROADS A. Construct and maintain temporary access roads as required to perform the Work. B. Construct access roads, where possible, in locations over the areas of future road systems. C. Locate access roads within the property lines of the Owner unless the Contractor independently secures easements for use and convenience. D. Maintain drainage ways. Install and maintain culverts to allow water to flow beneath access roads. Provide corrosion-resistant culvert pipe of adequate strength to resist construction loads. E. Provide gravel, crushed rock, or other stabilization material to permit access by all motor vehicles at all times. F. Maintain road grade and crown to eliminate potholes, rutting, and other irregularities that restrict access. G. Coordinate with Engineer detours and other operations affecting traffic and access. Provide at least 72 hours’ notice to Engineer of operations that will alter access to the Site. H. Upon completion of construction, restore ground surface disturbed by access road construction to original grade. 3.03 EXISTING ACCESS ROADS A. Contractor will be allowed to use Owner’s existing roads where indicated on the Drawings. B. Prevent interference with traffic on existing roads and parking areas. At all times, keep access roads and entrances serving the Site clear and available to Owner, Owner’s employees, emergency vehicles, and other contractors. Do not use access roads or Site entrances for parking or storage of materials or equipment. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contractor Access and Parking Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 00-3 C. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer from expenses caused by Contractor’s operations over existing roads and parking areas. D. Maintain existing access roads at Contractor’s expense for the duration of the Contract time. 3.04 CONTRACTOR PARKING AREAS: A. Contractor employee vehicles shall park in area(s) designated by Owner or as shown on the Drawings. B. Contractor shall construct and maintain parking area at the Site. C. Control vehicular parking to preclude interference with public traffic or parking, access by emergency vehicles, Owner’s operations, or construction operations. D. No employee or equipment parking will be permitted on Owner’s existing paved areas, except as specifically designated for Contractor’s use. 3.05 STATE AND LOCAL REGULATIONS: A. Obtain and pay all cost associated with bonds required by authorized entity (i.e. State Department of Transportation, Cottonwood Heights City, etc.) for the use of State or City maintained roads. B. Obey traffic laws and comply with requirements, rules and regulations of the authorized entity (i.e. State Department of Transportation), including local authorities having jurisdiction, to maintain necessary traffic control measures in accordance with Section 01 55 26 – Traffic Control for the protection of traffic on public roadways. 3.06 SITE SECURITY A. Contractor shall safely guard all the Work, the Project, products, equipment, and property from loss, theft, damage, and vandalism until Final Completion. Contractor’s duty includes safely guarding Owner’s property in vicinity of the Work and Project, and other private property in the vicinity of the Project from injury and loss in connection with performance of the Project. B. Employ watchmen as required to provide required security and prevent unauthorized entry. C. Costs for security required under this Section shall be paid by Contractor. D. Make no claim against Owner for damage resulting from trespass. E. Pay full compensation for, or repair or replace, damage to property of Owner and others arising from failure to furnish adequate security. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Contractor Access and Parking Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 00-4 F. Security requirements specified in the Section shall begin as soon as the Contractor delivers materials to the Site and/or begins work, and shall continue until the date of Final Completion. G. Security Procedures 1. Conform to Owner’s security procedures and access restrictions at Site throughout entire Project. 2. Comply with the following: a. Personnel Identification 1) All Contractor personnel shall always wear a badge bearing Contractor’s name, employee’s name and, as applicable, employee number while on the Project site. b. Parking 1) Do not park outside of designated Contractor parking area, which is shown on the Drawings. Prepare and maintain parking area as required. Personal vehicles are not allowed outside Contractor parking areas. 3.07 SECURITY FENCING A. Provide, install, and maintain temporary security fencing as required to secure the Project site, or if existing security fencing or barriers are breached or temporarily removed from the Project at no additional cost to the Owner. Temporary security fencing shall be equal to existing, unless otherwise specified, and provided and maintained in a manner satisfactory to Engineer and Owner throughout the Project. B. Repair damage to temporary fencing and replace fencing when required to maintain site security. C. Remove temporary fencing when permanent site security fencing is in place and fully functional, or when otherwise directed by Owner or Engineer. END OF SECTION CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 1 SECTION 01 55 50 TRAFFIC CONTROL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. Temporary traffic control requirements, signs, devices, and personnel necessary to control vehicular and pedestrian traffic flow in a safe and efficient manner in construction zones. B. Work zone traffic control devices, arrow boards, and pilot cars. C. Contractor’s responsibilities to warn, guide and protect motorists and pedestrians affected by the construction zone. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 55 58 – Temporary Pavement Markings 1.3 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. AASHTO Roadside Design Guide, Current Edition B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C. Americans with Disabilities Act D. ATSSA: American Traffic Safety Services Association Quality Standards for Work Zone Traffic Control Devices E. Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE) Standard on Vehicle Control Signal Heads F. International Safety Equipment Association (ISEA) G. MASH 2016: AASHTO Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware published 2016 H. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), Current Edition I. UDOT traffic control and safety requirements J. Work Zone Traffic Control Guide K. NCHRP – Report 350 Recommended Procedures for the Safety Performance Evaluation of Highway Features 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 2 L. UDOT Flagger Training Handbook M. UDOT Guidelines for Crash Cushions 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Temporary Pedestrian Access Route (TPAR) – A temporary detectable pedestrian route that is provided when existing routes are disrupted, closed or relocated and includes accessibility features present in the existing facility. B. Temporary Portable Rumble Strips (TPRS) – An array of three heavy rubber strips that create noise when they are run over and are used to alert drivers to the presence of road construction. C. Temporary Portable Traffic Signal System (TPTSS) – A complete, integrated, and functional system deployed in the field that manages the movement of vehicular traffic, pedestrian traffic, or both in a particular place for a particular purpose. D. Traffic Slow Down – An isolated planned event where traffic on a highway is reduced in speed to provide a gap for work to proceed. 1. Examples include the crossing of the highway with heavy equipment or the adjustment of traffic control devices. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit traffic control plan to Cottonwood Heights City and UDOT (where applicable based on jurisdiction) for review and approval before beginning work. Submit traffic control plan in accordance with Cottonwood Heights City Right of Way/Road Excavation Permit (https://www.cottonwoodheights.utah.gov/how-do-i/right-of-way-road-excavation- permit) requirements and no less than 21 days prior to start of work. 1. Include at least the following: a. Traffic control measures for each phase of work in sufficient detail to provide for the safe and efficient movement of traffic, pedestrians, and bicycles during construction. 1) Describe equipment, devices, and implementation instructions. b. Work elements to be accomplished in each phase. c. Details for each change to traffic control that is planned for the duration of the project. d. Expected duration of each traffic control configuration. 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 3 e. Length of Need (LON) for temporary barriers. f. Taper lengths, lane shift widths, device spacing, and sign locations for temporary and existing signs. g. Removal or masking of traffic control elements that conflict with temporary traffic control measures, such as existing traffic signs, traffic signals, and markings. h. Worker parking, work vehicle access, and equipment access. i. Location and hours of use for TPRS. j. TPAR and devices for pedestrian access. 2. Provide supporting engineering calculations. 3. Provide the seal of a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Utah on drawings and calculations. B. Traffic Control Inspection forms weekly for information. 1. Submit on a day and time acceptable to the Engineer. C. Traffic Slow Down. 1. Submit for approval at least 3 working days prior to Traffic Slow Down. 2. Include at least the following: a. The route, b. The beginning and ending mileposts or mile markers, c. Direction of the closure, and d. The date and time of the beginning of closure D. Traffic Control Maintainer certification or certificate of completion for information. E. Utah flagger certification for information F. TPTSS manufacturer’s signal training program certificate of completion for information. 1. Certificates of completion from the TPTSS manufacturer are valid for three years from date of issue. 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 4 G. Submit Authorized Products List Compliance Form and manufacturers installation instructions. Refer to UDOT Section 01455 for the following product when used. 1. Temporary Steel Barrier H. Request to work on Category II Holidays, for approval. Refer to this Section, Article 1.6 C. I. Request to reinstate removed employee, for review. Refer to this Section, Article 1.7. 1.6 LIMITATION OF OPERATIONS A. Minimize interference with local traffic during performance of the work. B. Saturday, Sunday, and observed holiday work on the following days: Martin Luther King, Jr. Day, Presidents’ Day, Juneteenth, Columbus Day, and Veterans Day. 1. Provide advance notice to the Engineer no later than noon on Wednesday, or four calendar days prior, whichever is greater before any Saturday, Sunday, or Category I holiday work, unless otherwise restricted in the contract. C. Work on the following observed holidays: New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Pioneer Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day. 1. Do not perform any work without approval except for repairing or servicing equipment, protecting work, maintaining or curing concrete, and maintaining traffic on Category II holiday. 2. Provide notice to the Engineer no later than noon on the Wednesday, or four calendar days prior, whichever is greater before any Category II holiday work, unless otherwise restricted in the contract. D. Nighttime Construction Work: 1. Nighttime construction work is permitted as approved and coordinated by UDOT and Cottonwood Heights City. 2. Noise permit from Salt Lake County Health Department is required. E. Notify property owners and occupants two weeks in advance of any work that may be done in front of or adjacent to their property. F. Access. The roadway can be closed to through traffic during construction under the following conditions: 1. Maintain access to all businesses, residences, and occupants at all times unless written authorization has been obtained in advance from the property owner 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 5 allowing partial or full closure. Provide a copy of the written authorization to the Engineer. 2. Notify all owners and occupants at least two weeks in advance of any partial/full closures or impact to their property access. 3. Coordinate with property owners to maintain mail delivery, garbage pick-up, other deliveries, etc. 4. Provide temporary mailboxes as needed during construction. 5. Accommodate special needs individuals. 6. Coordinate so that all access driveways appear and perform as they did before construction began. 1.7 NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Service Notifications: The contractor is required to notify the following services at least two (2) working days prior to commencement of the Work via phone or written correspondence for all Department approved full road closures and lane closures: 1. Cottonwood Heights Police Department 2. Unified Fire Authority 3. Utah Transit Authority 4. Canyons School District Transportation Department B. Residents and Businesses: The contractor is required to adhere to the following minimum notification requirements: 1. A CHC Approved notification shall be delivered by hand to every residence and/or business fronting the Work and within two hundred fifty (250’) feet of the Work. 2. The notification shall contain the following: a. Description of Work and expected impacts to the business/resident; and b. Contact number and/or e-mail address to contact 24 hours with questions. 3. Notify the residents and/or businesses along the road where the work is to be conducted at least Five (5) working days in advance of the Work. 4. Provide weekly updated schedules to the City inspector for use on the City’s web page and social media sites. 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 6 5. Hold a public meeting with the affected residents and/or businesses when deemed necessary by the City Public Works Department. 6. Comply with the public communication plan as described in herein. 1.8 CHARACTER OF WORKERS A. Provide sufficient resources to complete all work according to the contract. Employ workers with the skills and experience necessary to perform the work. B. Remove from the project any employee who performs the work in an improper or unskilled manner or who is unsafe, intemperate, or disorderly. 1. The Engineer may stop work for the Contractor’s failure to remove the employee. 2. Obtain the Engineer’s authorization before allowing a removed employee to return to the project. C. The Engineer may stop work for the Contractor’s failure to furnish suitable and sufficient personnel to perform the work. Employ a competent superintendent who is: 1. Experienced with the work being performed 2. Capable of reading and understanding the contract documents 3. Authorized to act as an agent for the Contractor 4. Authorized to execute instructions and directions from the Engineer or authorized representatives. D. An authorized agent of the Contractor must be at the project site at all times that work is being performed. 1.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL COORDINATION MEETING A. At least the following must attend a meeting before beginning construction at the time and location determined by the Engineer: 1. Contractor’s Traffic Control Designer 2. Contractor’s Traffic Control Maintainer 1.10 DEVICE CRASHWORTHINESS A. Crashworthiness requirements. 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 7 1. Devices manufactured on or before December 31, 2019 and that meet NCHRP 350 crashworthiness criteria may be used on projects advertised, or having a Request for Proposal (RFP) Issue date for construction before July 1st, 2025. 2. Devices manufactured after December 31, 2019 are required to meet MASH 2016 crashworthiness criteria or have a current UDOT Certification Letter. B. Devices in the following Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) device category are required to meet crashworthiness requirements: 1. Category 1 - cones, barrels and delineators 2. Category 2 - barricades and sign stands 3. Category 3 - barriers, crash cushions and truck mounted attenuators 4. Category 4 - arrow boards and portable variable message signs a. Category 4 devices are certified by a UDOT Certification Letter. C. UDOT Certified devices can be found at UDOT Traffic & Safety Division. 1.11 TRAFFIC CONTROL REQUIREMENTS A. Meet the following requirements for traffic control and document them in the traffic control plan: 1. Meet the requirements in the Traffic Control (TC) series Standard Drawings, Utah MUTCD, and the Americans with Disabilities Act. 2. Provide for the safe and efficient movement of traffic. a. Address expected delay with the Engineer and Project Public Involvement Team. 3. Provide for the safe and efficient movement of pedestrians and cyclists when existing facilities are disrupted, closed or relocated by a work zone. a. Provide detectable temporary facilities that include accessibility features consistent with the features present in the existing pedestrian facility b. Temporary removal of parking is possible with approval of local agencies and coordination with Project Public Involvement in order to provide a temporary bikeway c. Detour Length should not exceed original bike route length by more than a half mile 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 8 4. Provide concrete barrier, crash cushions and attenuators including: a. Protection as required for hazard mitigation for workers. Refer to TC 3 Series Standard Drawings. b. Protect all hazards to motorists within the appropriate AASHTO clear zone including bridge parapets, barrier blunt ends, poles, and large equipment. Refer to the UDOT Guidelines for Crash Cushions and Barrier End Treatments for acceptable devices. 5. Provide and remove temporary pavement markings as needed for traffic control. Remove any existing permanent pavement markings that conflict with temporary markings. Refer to Section 01 55 58. 6. Incorporate proposed traffic signal timing, phasing, and detection plans if the operation or equipment of permanent traffic signals will be impacted by construction. 7. Temporary Traffic Signals a. Red, yellow, and green times and basis of timing calculations. b. Temporary traffic signal plans and list of proposed equipment 1.12 TRAFFIC CONTROL MAINTAINER A. Provide a traffic control maintainer to install, maintain and remove temporary traffic control devices according to the authorized traffic control plan. B. Qualifications: 1. Certified by UDOT or by the American Traffic Safety Services Association (ATSSA) as a Traffic Control Technician. A list of approved training providers is available at TCT Training Resources. C. Authority 1. Obtains and uses labor, equipment, and materials necessary to maintain traffic control. 2. Changes traffic control operations according to the authorized traffic control plan, except for any adjustment to timing, phasing, or detection, or any other settings in the signal controller for permanent traffic signals. D. Responsibilities and Duties 1. Oversee traffic control operations and TPAR devices. 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 9 2. Be present and an active participant during the installation, maintenance, and removal of temporary traffic control devices. 3. Implement the authorized traffic control plan. 4. Remain available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week and can be on-sitewithin 30 minutes of notification. 5. Correct deficiencies immediately upon notification from the Engineer. 6. Manage traffic control inspections. a. Document inspections on a form acceptable to the Engineer. 1) Include at least the following: a) Assessment of device quality. b) Items in compliance with the authorized traffic control plan. b. Persons that have passed the TCT course but do not have the required experience for certification may also perform the inspections and sign documentation. c. Inspect at least four times each day with at least one of the inspections conducted during nighttime hours when construction work is occurring: 1) Before beginning of shift, 2) At mid-shift, 3) Half-hour after shift ends, and 4) At the midpoint of the off-shift period. d. Conduct traffic control inspections twice each day when construction is not occurring, but traffic control is present. 1) Once during daylight hours. 2) Once during nighttime hours. 3) At least 8 hours between inspections. 7. Coordinate project traffic control with emergency services and local law enforcement agencies. 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 10 8. Monitor traffic queue lengths and adjust advanced warning signs to provide adequate warning of the actual back of queue resulting from construction activities. 9. Adjust the TPRS as necessary to maintain proper alignment, spacing and location. 10. Adjust the TPAR devices as necessary to maintain a detectable route that is consistent with the accessibility present in the existing pedestrian facility. 1.13 FLAGGERS A. Flaggers must have a current Utah flagging certificate and must present proof of certification upon request. 1. Refer to https://www.udot.utah.gov/connect/business/contractortraining/flagger- training/ for a list of acceptable courses taught by certified instructors. 1.14 TEMPORARY PORTABLE TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEM (TPTSS) TRAINING A. The setup, programming, signal timing changes, maintenance, and repairs of a TPTSS must be performed by at least one person who has successfully completed a signal training program for the TPTSS in use. 1.15 PRICE ADJUSTMENTS A. Reduction in payment may occur when traffic control is not in compliance with the authorized traffic control plan or when the Contractor fails to meet all requirements cited or referenced in this Section. 1. The amount per day by which the Contractor’s compensation will be reduced is calculated using the contract lump sum bid price for Traffic Control divided by the number of contract days. 1.16 SPECIAL TRAFFIC CONTROL REQUIREMENTS A. Scheduling of work within UDOT right-of-way must be coordinated and approved by UDOT in coordination with local governments to determine impacts to local City roads. B. Scheduling of work within Cottonwood Heights City right-of-way must be coordinated and approved by Cottonwood Heights City. C. Construction within UDOT jurisdiction on Wasatch Blvd or Big Cottonwood Canyon Road must be performed at night and be fully operational by 5:00 AM. D. Detours routes must be approved by Cottonwood Heights City and/or UDOT. E. Temporary access roads shall meet Utah SWPPP, including stabilized road entrance and washdown area. 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 11 F. Portable restroom installation in work areas will be placed as approved by owner or owner’s representative. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PILOT CAR A. Equip with a retroreflective sign. 1. Refer to UDOT Specification Section 02890 – Retroreflective Sheeting. 2. Utah MUTCD sign G20-4. B. Equip with at least two rotating, oscillating, or strobe lights. 1. Minimum 4-inch diameter/width and minimum 6 ft mounting height. 2. Yellow color. 2.2 FLAGGER EQUIPMENT AND CLOTHING A. Refer to the UDOT Flagger Training Handbook. B. Safety Clothing 1. Flagger vest and hard hat – Orange, red-orange, or fluorescent version of these colors. a. Wear safety apparel meeting the requirements of ANSI/ISEA "American National Standard for High-Visibility Apparel and Headwear" or equivalent revisions and labeled as meeting the current ANSI/ISEA publication year, standard performance for Class 3 risk exposure. b. Hard hat with 10 square inches of white or strong yellow-green retroreflective tape placed around the base of the hard hat and visible to traffic from all directions. 2.3 TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNING AND DEVICES A. Signs 1. Comply with UDOT Specification Section 02890 – Retroreflective Sheeting. 2. Comply with TC Series Standard Drawings. 3. Comply with sign SN Series Standard Drawings when using post mounted signs. 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 12 B. Channelizing Devices 1. Comply with TC Series Standard Drawings. 2. Comply with UDOT Specification Section 02890 – Retroreflective Sheeting. C. Precast Concrete Barrier 1. Comply with BA Series Standard Drawings. 2. Comply with UDOT Specification Section 02844 – Concrete Barrier. a. Uncoated reinforcing steel may be used for precast concrete barrier constructed for use in work zone applications and stamped “Work Zone Only”. D. Temporary Steel Barrier 1. MASH Compliance 2. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and procedures E. Use properly rated truck-mounted attenuator for the preconstruction posted speed limit. 1. Test Level 2 for speeds 45 mph or less. 2. Test Level 3 for speeds greater than 45 mph. 3. Do not use a truck-mounted attenuator (TMA) to protect blunt end for more than 72 hours. 2.4 ARROW BOARD A. Comply with all standards as specified in the Utah MUTCD, Section 6F.61 Arrow Boards. B. Refer to the TC Series Standard Drawings and the Utah MUTCD. 2.5 TEMPORARY PORTABLE RUMBLE STRIPS (TPRS) A. Roadquake 2 Series (or equal/better) Temporary Portable Rumble Strip manufactured by: Plastic Safety Systems 2444 Baldwin Road Cleveland, OH 44104 (800) 662-6338 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 13 2.6 TEMPORARY WALKWAY AND RAMPS A. Refer to TC Series Standard Drawings and the Utah MUTCD 2.7 TEMPORARY PORTABLE TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEM (TPTSS) A. Utah MUTCD-compliant. B. Manufactured according to the latest edition of NEMA TS 5. C. Trailer 1. General a. Self-contained trailer-mounted unit, consisting of at least two signal heads per trailer. 1) At least one signal head mounted on an overhead mast arm capable of extending over the travel lane. 2) One signal head mounted on a vertical upright. b. Safety orange color finish. 2. Accessories a. Removable or lockable self-storing tongue. b. Lifting ring that is integral to the TPTSS trailer and structurally sufficient to facilitate the lifting and placing of a fully equipped TPTSS trailer. c. Four stabilizer jacks rated for the full anticipated load. 3. Power a. Batteries sufficient to operate the signal for a minimum of 21 days at temperatures of 50 degrees F or higher without supplemental charging. b. Equipped with a charging system for solar collection capability, and an onboard battery charger capable of being used with a 120VAC power source. 4. Wind Load a. The TPTSS trailer and all mounted equipment must withstand winds of 90 mph. D. Lift System 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 14 1. Equipped with a hydraulic lift system sufficient to raise and lower the vertical upright and horizontal mast arm to and from the operating position. 2. Overhead mast arm and signal head bracket must allow a minimum vertical clearance of 17.5 ft measured from the bottom of the lowest portion of the signal head or bracket to the road surface. E. Signal Heads 1. Cast aluminum or polycarbonate and have 12 -inch LED indications, conforming to ITE Standard on “Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads.” 2. Include back plates and retroreflective tape border. 3. Refer to SL Series Standard Drawings. F. Operation 1. Equipped with at least one Controller Unit (CU). 2. All CUs within a traffic control setup must be in communication with each other, with signal timings coordinated. 3. Each CU equipped with a Malfunction Management Unit (MMU) conforming to NEMA TS 5. a. Each signal within the signal system must be equipped with its own MMU to ensure redundancy within the Malfunction Management System. G. Detection 1. Installed with vehicle detection hardware that communicates to the CU. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Implement and maintain traffic control according to the authorized traffic control plan. 1. Make changes immediately and notify the Engineer if traffic control changes that deviate from the authorized traffic control plan are required to make the work zone safe for workers or the traveling public. 2. Update the traffic control plan with the changes and resubmit for review. 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 15 B. Maintain traffic control as required by the authorized traffic control plan when traffic control is in place and work is not actively occurring, including overnight, weekends and holidays. Inspect according to this Section. C. Maintain traffic control devices during and after all snow plowing operations. 1. Clear snow and ice away from the following: a. Traffic control devices to function as intended. b. TPAR devices to function as intended. c. Contractor provided TPAR features. D. The ATSSA publication Quality Standards for Work Zone Traffic Control Devices identifies different levels of device quality. Meet the acceptable device quality level for all traffic control devices. 1. Wash or replace devices as needed to meet acceptable level. E. Remove equipment, material, traffic control devices and debris that encroaches upon or inhibits travel in the travel lanes, bike lanes or TPAR identified in the traffic control plan. 3.2 TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNING AND DEVICES A. Use preconstruction posted speed limit to compute sign spacing, taper lengths, buffer zones, and construction clear zone. 1. Use plastic drums or directional barricades for lane closure taper devices for speeds 50 mph and greater. 2. Refer to the TC Series Standard Drawings for use of cones or tubular markers at night. B. Use preconstruction posted speed limit during construction to compute the tangent spacing for channelizing devices. C. Remove all traffic control devices from site of work that are no longer necessary for the authorized traffic control plan. 1. Relocate traffic control devices from the roadway a distance twice that of the Work Clear Zone if they will be used within 24 hours of the daily work stoppage and are not required for immediate traffic control. Refer to the TC Series Standard Drawings. a. Obtain written permission from property owner before storing traffic control devices on private property. 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 16 2. Crashworthy traffic control devices moved with a barrel mover or similar equipment may be relocated to the hard surface shoulder within 1 ft of the outer edge of shoulder if they will be used for traffic control within 48 hours of the daily work stoppage and are not required for immediate traffic control. 3. Cover post mounted signs completely with an opaque and durable covering when the signs are not applicable. D. Use an approved construction zone attenuator or permanent style end sections, as listed in the UDOT Guidelines for Crash Cushions & Barrier End Treatments. 1. Use a construction zone attenuator when approach ends of temporary precast barrier are within the maximum AASHTO clear zone. a. Use AASHTO Roadside Design Guide to determine proper clear zone distance requirements. b. Refer to the Crash Cushions (CC) Series Standard Drawings and manufacturer’s recommendations to install crash cushions. E. Maintain cable barrier and anchor systems during construction. 1. Protect existing hazards when cable barrier and anchor systems are rendered inoperable by work. a. Address barrier length of need for the hazard. 2. Maintain the required tension in the cable barrier system when the cable is disconnected by installing anchor systems on each end of the disconnect. a. Do not cut cable. Disconnect cable at cable splice or anchor system locations only. 3. Install manufacturer’s approved terminal compatible with existing cable system. a. Tension cable to manufacturer’s requirements. 4. Remove anchor system when cable barrier is reestablished. 3.3 ARROW BOARD A. May substitute Type C units for Type B units. Refer to the TC Series Standard Drawings. B. Do not substitute Type B units for Type C units. 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 17 C. Remove Arrow Board from the site of work when not needed for the control of traffic within a four-hour period. 3.4 TRAFFIC SIGNALS A. Use uniformed police officer when construction activities are impacting an operating signalized intersection. B. Use of flaggers at traffic signals permitted when the signals have been turned to red flash mode or are inoperable. Signal change over is not considered an inoperable signal. 1. Control each approach by separate flaggers. a. Flaggers can control only two lanes of approach traffic. 1) Third lane control permitted when left or right turn bays present. C. UDOT will make all changes to timing, phasing, detection, or any other settings in the signal controller for permanent traffic signals. 1. Notify the Engineer at least 72 hours in advance of any needed changes. D. Maintain at least two signal heads for the primary movement at a signalized intersection on all approaches. E. Temporary Traffic Signals 1. Span Wire Signals a. Use only for durations greater than 30 days, unless needed for: 1) Signal head placement. 2) Number of signal heads for desired movements and phases. b. Do not attach span wire to existing signal poles or luminaire poles. c. Refer to SL Series Standard Drawings for clearance and signal head requirements. 2. Temporary Portable Traffic Signal System (TPTSS) a. Limit use of TPTSS to a maximum of 30 days. b. Position at least one signal head within the dimensions of each travel lane. c. Left turn phases are not allowed while using TPTSS. 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 18 d. Maintain at least 2 feet of distance from travel shoulder line and edge of any TPTSS equipment. e. Maintain appropriate channelization around TPTSS equipment according to channelization for arrow boards in TC Series Standard Drawings. f. Setup each Controller Unit (CU) within the allowable communication range of each other. g. Setup, maintenance, and operation of TPTSS during construction is the responsibility of the contractor. 3.5 CONSTRUCTION ZONE SPEED LIMIT REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain approval for regulatory and advisory speed reductions. 1. Use speed reductions only during impacted times and areas. 2. Restore preconstruction regulatory speed limit at locations where traffic is not being impacted by work activities. 3. Refer to http://www.udot.utah.gov/go/standardsreferences for policy information. 4. Refer to TC Series Standard Drawings. 5. Use speed reduction only when construction activities impact traffic. 3.6 TRAFFIC SLOW DOWN A. Obtain approval from the Cottonwood Heights City and/or UDOT and coordinate with law enforcement at least 48 hours before slow down. B. Use a Highway Patrol Trooper, or other law enforcement officer, in a marked vehicle with overhead flashing lights to conduct the slow down. C. Use the officer in the marked vehicle to slow down one or two lanes. 1. Use, in any combination either, contractor-supplied vehicles equipped with overhead amber flashing lights or additional officers in marked vehicles at the rate of one vehicle per lane thereafter for all lanes of the highway to affect the traffic slow down. D. Additional vehicles as described in this article may be used in the traffic slow down to supplement the law enforcement vehicle when required by the officer. E. The duration of any traffic slow down is not to exceed five minutes. 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 19 3.7 TEMPORARY PORTABLE RUMBLE STRIPS (TPRS) A. Space and locate TPRS according to TC Series Standard Drawings. B. Clean road surface with broom or blower to remove all gravel, sand, dust, or other debris. C. Assemble modular pieces into strips that match the width of the travel lane as closely as possible. 1. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations so that pieces are properly interlocked. D. Place TPRS perpendicular to traffic and centered in lane. 1. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations and TC series standard drawings for installation and product orientation. 2. Do not glue, nail, or otherwise affix TPRS to the road surface. E. Place TPRS at the same time as other traffic control devices, prior to work taking place. 1. Maintain the TPRS in proper condition, alignment, spacing, and location. a. Set TPRS perpendicular to the travel lane. 1) Adjust TPRS when any one rumble strip becomes skewed by a distance of 3 ft or more. Skew distance is the distance parallel to direction of travel between the ends of the strip. 2) Adjust the TPRS if the parallel distance between the individual rumble strips decreases by 5 ft or more. 3) Temporary paint marks may be placed to give reference of original locations. b. Make adjustments to TPRS as often as necessary during working hours, but at least during each traffic control inspection. 1) Adjustments to TPRS must be made within 30 minutes of discovery or notification of misalignment. c. Remove TPRS during non-working hours. d. Implement a Traffic Slow Down if necessary to enter the travel lanes to deploy or reset TPRS. 1/3/2024 Demolition CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Traffic Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 50 - 20 F. Do not use TPRS during snow events, or at temperatures outside of the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.8 LANE CLOSURES A. Notify the Engineer and the UDOT Traffic Operations Center and/or Cottonwood Heights City in advance of every lane closure. 1. Provide notification: a. As soon as it is known that a lane closure is necessary to execute the work, but not less than 72 hours before the closure begins. b. As soon as practical when the schedule, location, or need for an upcoming lane closure arises or changes. 1) Contact the Engineer immediately in person, by email, by phone call, or by text message. c. Send information to the UDOT Traffic Operations Center by email at tc- controlroom@utah.gov. 2. Include at least the following: a. The route, b. The beginning and ending mileposts or mile markers, c. Number of lanes to be closed, d. Direction of the closure, e. The date and time of the beginning of closure, and f. The date and time of the ending of the closure B. Enter lane closure information into the UDOT Traffic Lane Closure system via the UDOT Traffic website before lane closure begins. 1. Contact the Control Room Manager at tc-controlroom@utah.gov to obtain access to the UDOT Traffic Lane Closure system. 2. Include Traffic Control Maintainer contact information. 3. Make requests for the use of overhead VMS at least 72 hours before lane closure begins. 1/3/2024 Demolition a. Send request to tc-controlroom@utah.gov. END OF SECTION CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 temporary pavement markings Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 58 - 1 SECTION 01 55 58 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Materials and procedures for installation of temporary pavement markings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 55 50: Traffic Control 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 4592: Preformed Retroreflective Pavement Marking Tape for Limited Service Life. B. ASTM D 4956 - Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control C. Utah MUTCD 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. None PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT AND GLASS BEADS A. Refer to UDOT Section 02765 – Pavement Marking Paint 2.2 PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE A. Refer to ASTM D 4592, Type I (Removable). 2.3 TEMPORARY RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS A. Provide plastic raised pavement markers that have reflective material with clear covers as needed for the particular application. 1. Supply marker body manufactured of polyurethane plastic in color specified for required type. a. Width 4 inch, height 2 inch, thickness 0.06 inch. CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 temporary pavement markings Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 58 - 2 2. Retroreflective sheeting to be at least 1 square inch and according to Section 02890 for retroreflective sheeting requirements. 3. Provide clear polyvinyl chloride covers attached to marker body with heavy duty staples. 4. Supply marker with a method of attaching to pavement surface. B. Raised Pavement Marker Types 1. Type Y1 – Yellow body with yellow reflective sheeting on both sides. a. Optional – Type B1, black body with yellow reflective sheeting on both sides. 2. Type W1 – White body with white reflective sheeting on both sides. a. Optional – Type B2, black body with white reflective sheeting on both sides. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Apply temporary pavement markings along the entire length of any roadway surfaces opened to traffic. 1. Refer to the authorized traffic control plan for the pavement markings layout. a. Duplicate pre-project pavement markings layout when not shown in the traffic control plan, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer 2. Use the same segment and cycle length of permanent markings for all temporary broken-line pavement markings. B. Use channelizing devices or other delineation as directed by the Engineer to indicate road user paths in work zones when it is not possible to provide a clear path with temporary pavement markings. 3.2 PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT AND GLASS BEADS A. Re-apply pavement marking paint at two week intervals to maintain markings that provide a clear path during night and twilight periods and wet pavement conditions. 3.3 PAVEMENT MARKING TAPE A. Apply pavement marking tape according to manufacturer’s directions. CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 temporary pavement markings Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 58 - 3 B. Maintain or re-apply pavement marking tape to maintain markings that provide a clear path during night and twilight periods and wet pavement conditions. C. Inspect and replace immediately any loose, missing, or damaged pavement markings. D. Remove the tape immediately before paving. 3.4 TEMPORARY RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS A. Attach raised pavement marker according to manufacturer’s directions. B. Space raised pavement markers as follows: 1. Solid line on 10 ft centers. 2. Broken line Three on 5 ft centers spaced on a 40 ft cycle length. C. Inspect and replace immediately any loose, missing, or damaged markers. D. Remove markers immediately before paving. END OF SECTION CRS Engineers Project No.: 2022-0037 11/9/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 temporary pavement markings Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 55 58 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Controls Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 00-1 SECTION 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIRMENT A. Provide and maintain methods, equipment, and temporary construction as required to control environmental conditions at the Site and adjacent areas. B. Maintain controls until no longer required. C. Temporary controls include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Dust control. 2. Noise controls. 3. Pest and rodent control. 4. Pollution control. D. See Section 01 57 13 – Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control for additional requirements. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 57 13 – Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 DUST CONTROL A. Control dust from Contractor’s operations and prevent spillage of excavated materials on public roads. B. Remove spillage of excavated materials, debris and dust from public roads by methods approved by Engineer. C. Conduct operations of dumping rock and of carrying rock away in trucks to cause a minimum of dust. Give unpaved streets, roads, detours, or haul roads used in 70 088 -001 03 2 6 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Controls Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 00-2 construction area a dust-preventive treatment or periodically water to prevent dust. Strictly adhere to applicable environmental regulations for dust prevention. D. Provide and maintain temporary dust-tight partitions, bulkheads, or other protective devices during construction to permit normal operation of existing facilities. Construct partitions of plywood, insulating board, plastic sheets, or similar material. Cons truct partitions in such a manner that dust and dirt from demolition and cutting will not enter other parts of existing building or facilities. Remove temporary partitions as soon as need no longer exists. E. Refer to applicable sections of local and State regulations on dust control for additional guidance. 1. Apply water at locations, quantities, and frequencies required by Engineer to control dust. 2. Provide dust control and cleaning measures at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Provide suitable mud and dirt contai nment. 3.02 NOISE CONTROL A. Contractor’s vehicles and equipment shall minimize noise emissions to the greatest degree practicable. Provide mufflers, silencers, and sound barriers when necessary. B. Noise levels shall comply with Laws and Regulations, including OSHA requirements and local ordinances. C. Noise emissions shall not interfere with the work of Owner or others. D. Provide acoustical barriers so noise emanating from tools or equipment will not exceed legal noise levels. E. Propose plan to mitigate construction noise and to comply with noise control ordinances, including method of construction, equipment to be used, and acoustical treatments. 3.03 PEST AND RODENT CONTROL A. Provide rodent and pest control as required to prevent infestation of the Site and storage areas. B. Employ methods and use materials that do not adversely affect conditions at the Site or on adjoining properties. C. In accordance with laws and regulations, promptly and properly dispose of pests and rodents trapped or otherwise controlled. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Controls Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 00-3 3.04 POLLUTION CONTROL A. General 1. Provide means, methods, and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere caused by discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. 2. Equipment used during construction shall comply with local and State Laws and Regulations. B. Spills and Contamination 1. Provide equipment and personnel to perform emergency measures required to contain spills and to remove contaminated soils and liquids. 2. Excavate contaminated material and properly dispose of it off-site. Replace excavated material with suitable compacted fill and topsoil. C. Protection of Surface Waters 1. Implement special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering surface waters. Prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals, and other such substances in or adjacent to surface waters and open drainage routes, in sanitary sewers, or in storm sewers. 2. Divert sanitary sewage and non-storm waste flow interfering with construction and requiring diversion to sanitary sewers. Do not cause or permit action to occur which would cause an overflow to existing waterway. 3. Prior to commencing excavation and construction, obtain Owner’s agreement with detailed plans showing procedures intended to handle and dispose of sewage, groundwater, and stormwater flow, including dewatering pump discharges. 4. Comply with procedures outlined in U.S. Environmental Protection Agency manuals entitled, “Guidelines for Erosion and Sedimentation Control Planning” and “Implementation, Processes, Procedures, and Methods to Control Pollution Resulting from All Construction Activity,” and “Erosion and Sediment Control - Surface Mining in Eastern United States.” 5. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, chemicals, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains. Disposal of wastes into streams or waterways is prohibited. Provide acceptable containers for collection and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. 6. Provide berms, channels or other erosion and flood control measures as necessary to prevent flooding and saturation of subgrade. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Controls Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 00-4 D. Atmospheric Pollutants 1. Provide systems for controlling atmospheric pollutants related to the Work. 2. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals and vapors. 3. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into atmosphere. 4. Burning a. Flammable debris and refuse may be burned onsite provided requirements set forth by proper fire authorities and air quality control agencies are met. b. Authority to burn shall not relieve Contractor from damages that may result from its operations. E. Solid Waste 1. Provide systems for controlling and managing solid waste related to the Work. 2. Prevent solid waste from becoming airborne, and from discharging to surface waters and drainage routes. 3. Properly handle and dispose of solid waste. F. Erosion, Sediment, and Flood Control 1. Provide, maintain, and operate temporary facilities to control erosion and sediment releases, and to protect the Work and existing facilities from flooding during construction period. 3.05 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Clean Site during construction in accordance with General Conditions, as may be specified in other Specification sections, and as required herein. B. Wet down exterior surfaces prior to sweeping to prevent blowing of dust and debris. At least weekly, sweep all floors (basins, tunnels, platforms, walkways, roof surfaces), and pick up all debris and dispose. C. Provide approved containers for collection and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. At least at weekly intervals, dispose of such waste materials, debris, and rubbish offsite. D. At least weekly, brush sweep entry drive, roadways, and all other streets and walkways affected by the Work and where adjacent to the Work. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Controls Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 00-5 END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 13-1 SECTION 01 57 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIRMENT A. This section covers work necessary for stabilization of soil to prevent erosion during and after construction and land disturbing activities. The work shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, and equipment to perform the work and services necessary as herein specified and as indicated on the Drawings. This shall include installation, maintenance, and final removal of all temporary soil erosion and sediment control measures. B. The minimum areas requiring soil erosion and sediment control measures are indicated on the Drawings. The right is reserved to modify the use, location, and quantities of soil erosion and sediment control measures based on activities of the Contractor and as the Engineer considers to be to the best interest of the Owner. C. See additional information noted on the Drawings. D. All activities shall conform to the Utah Department of Transportation standards and Specifications, latest version. E. Soil erosion stabilization and sedimentation control consist of the following elements: 1. Maintenance of existing permanent or temporary storm drainage piping and channel systems, as necessary. 2. Construction of new permanent and temporary storm drainage piping and channel systems, as necessary. 3. Construction of temporary erosion control facilities such as silt fences, check dams, etc. 4. Topsoil and Seeding: a. Placement and maintenance of Temporary Seeding on all areas disturbed by construction. b. Placement of permanent topsoil, fertilizer, and seed, etc., in all areas not occupied by structures or pavement, unless shown otherwise. 5. Soil Stabilization Seeding: Placement of fertilizer and seed, etc., in areas as specified hereinafter. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 13-2 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 31 23 23 – Fill and Backfill C. Utah Department of Environmental (DEQ) SWPPP 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Utah Department of Transportation (UDOT) Standard Specifications. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures: 1. Certificates of inspection of seed by state or federal authorities and copies of delivery invoices or other proof of quantities of fertilizer. 2. Manufacturer’s certificate of compliance attesting that the geotextile meets the requirements of these Specifications. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 SEED A. In accordance with Utah Department of Transportation Standards and Specifications, latest version. 2.02 TOP SOIL A. Topsoil shall be as specified under Section 31 23 23 – Fill and Backfill. 2.03 FERTILIZER A. Fertilizer shall be commercial, chemical type, uniform in composition, free-flowing conforming to state and federal laws, and suitable for application with equipment designed for that purpose. B. Fertilizer shall have a minimum percentage of plant food by weight for the following: Permanent fertilizer mix shall be 10 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphoric acid, and 10 percent potash. 2.04 LIME A. Ground dolomitic limestone not less than 85 percent total carbonates and magnesium, ground so that 50 percent passes through a 100-mesh sieve and 90 percent passes a Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 13-3 20-mesh sieve. Coarser material will be acceptable provided the specified rates of application are increased proportionately on the basis of quantities passing the 100- mesh sieve. 2.05 STRAW MULCH A. Threshed straw of oats, wheat, barley, or rye, free from seed of noxious weeds, or clean salt hay. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall install erosion and sediment control measures and maintain in accordance with the Drawings. The sequence of construction shown on the Drawings is made a part of these Contract Documents. B. The Contractor shall provide and maintain Temporary Seeding at all times. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for phasing Work in areas allocated for his exclusive use during this Project, including any proposed stockpile areas, to restrict sediment transport. This will include installation of any temporary erosion control devices, ditches, or other facilities. D. The areas set aside for the Contractor’s use during the Project may be temporarily developed to provide satisfactory working, staging, and administrative areas for his exclusive use. Preparation of these areas shall be in accordance with other requirements contained within these Specifications and shall be done in a manner to both control all sediment transport away from the area. 3.02 SILT FENCE A. The Contractor shall construct silt fence (SF) in accordance with the Utah Department of Transportation Standards and Specifications, latest edition. 3.03 SEEDING A. General 1. The Contractor shall give at least 3 days notice to the Engineer prior to seeding to allow the Owner to inspect the prepared areas. The Contractor shall rework any areas not approved for seeding to the Owner’s satisfaction. 2. The Contractor shall keep the Engineer advised of schedule of operations. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 13-4 3. Seed shall be clean, delivered in original unopened packages and bearing an analysis of the contents, guaranteed 95 percent pure with minimum germination rate of 85 percent. B. Schedules 1. Seeding shall be performed between September 15 to December 1. C. Soil Stabilization and Temporary Seeding 1. Soil stabilization seeding shall consist of the application of the following materials in quantities as further described herein for stockpiles and disturbed areas left inactive for more than 14 days. a. Lime b. Fertilizer c. Seed d. Mulch e. Maintenance 2. Hydroseeding will be permitted as an alternative method of applying seed and associated soil conditioning agents described above. Should the Contractor elect to apply soil stabilization seeding by hydroseeding methods, he shall submit his operational plan and methods to the Engineer. 3. Temporary Seeding is to be placed and maintained over all disturbed areas prior to Permanent Seeding. Maintain Temporary Seeding until such time as areas are approved for Permanent Seeding. As a minimum, maintenance shall include the following: a. Fix-up and reseeding of bare areas or redisturbed areas. b. Mowing for stands of grass or weeds exceeding 6 inches in height. D. Topsoil and Permanent Seeding 1. Topsoil and Permanent Seeding shall consist of the application of the following materials in quantities as further described herein: a. 4-inch depth of topsoil. b. Lime. c. Fertilizer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 13-5 d. Permanent seed mix. e. Mulch. 2. Topsoil is to be placed over all disturbed areas that are not surfaced with concrete, asphalt, or pavers. 3. Preparation a. After rough grading is completed and reviewed by the Engineer, Contractor shall spread topsoil as hereinbefore specified over all areas to receive Permanent Seeding to a minimum compacted depth of 6 inches with surface elevations as shown. Loosen the finished surface to a depth of 2 inches and leave in smooth condition, free from depressions or humps, ready for seeding. b. Finish Grading 1) Contractor shall rake the topsoiled area to a uniform grade, so that all areas drain as indicated on the grading plan. 2) Contractor shall remove all trash and stones exceeding 1 inch in diameter from area to a depth of 2 inches. 4. Permanent Seed a. After soil has been scarified, apply seed and other products at the rate and proportion specified below: 1) Seed Mix: 150 pounds per acre. 2) 10-10-10 Fertilizer: 1,000 pounds per acre. 3) Lime: 3 tons per acre. 4) Water: As necessary. 5. Maintenance a. Contractor shall begin maintenance immediately after each portion of permanent grass is planted and continue for 8 weeks after all planting is completed. b. Contractor shall water to keep surface soil moist. Repair washed out areas by filling with topsoil, liming, fertilizing, and seeding. Replace mulch on banks when washed or blown away. Mow to 2 inches after grass reaches 3 inches in height, and mow frequently enough to keep grass from exceeding 3-1/2 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 13-6 inches. Weed by local spot application of selective herbicide only after first planting season when grass is established. 6. Guarantee a. If, at the end of the 8-week maintenance period, a satisfactory stand of grass has not been produced, the Contractor shall renovate and reseed the grass or unsatisfactory portions thereof immediately, or, if after October 15 during the next planting season. If a satisfactory stand of grass develops by July 1 of the following year, it will be accepted. If it is not accepted, a complete replanting will be required during the planting season meeting all of the requirements specified under paragraph Permanent Seed. b. A satisfactory stand is defined as grass or section of grass that has a substantial establishment of new grass, strongly rooted, and uniformly green in appearance from a distance of 50 feet. No noticeable thin or bare areas as determined by the Engineer. 3.04 STOCKPILES A. All permanent stockpiles shall be seeded with soil stabilization seed and protected by construction of silt fences and permanent 2-foot, minimum depth, ditches, completely surrounding stockpiles and located within 10 feet of the toes of the stockpile slopes. B. Sediment transport and erosion from working stockpiles shall be controlled and restricted from moving beyond the immediate stockpile area by construction of temporary toe-of-slope ditches and accompanying silt fences, as necessary. The Contractor shall keep these temporary facilities in operational condition by regular cleaning, regrading, and maintenance. Stockpiles remaining in place longer than 14 calendar days shall be considered permanent stockpiles for purposes of erosion and sediment control. 3.05 SILT TRAPS A. All silt traps shall be cleaned of collected sediment after every storm or as determined from the biweekly inspections. Cleaning shall be done in a manner that will not direct the sediment into the storm drain piping system. Removed sediment shall be taken to an area selected by the Engineer where it can be cleaned of sticks and debris, then allowed to dry. Final sediment and debris disposal shall be onsite as designated by Engineer. 3.06 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all elements of the Soil Erosion Stabilization and Sedimentation Control systems and facilities to be constructed during this Project for the duration of his activities on this Project. Formal inspections made jointly by the Contractor and the Engineer shall be conducted every 2 weeks to evaluate the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 13-7 Contractor’s conformance to the requirements of both these Specifications, Utah Division of Water Quality, and Utah County. B. Replacement or repair of failed or overloaded silt fences, check dams, or other temporary erosion control devices shall be accomplished by the Contractor within 2 days after receiving written notice from the Engineer. C. Unpaved earth drainage ditches shall be regraded as needed to maintain original grade and remove sediment buildup. If a ditch becomes difficult to maintain, the Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer and install additional erosion control devices such as check dams, temporary paving, or silt fences as directed by the Engineer. D. If the Contractor has not complied with any of the above maintenance efforts to the satisfaction of the Engineer within 2 working days after receiving written notification from the Engineer, the Owner shall have the prerogative of engaging others to perform any needed maintenance or cleanup, including removal of accumulated sediment at constructed erosion control facilities, and deduct from the Contractor’s monthly partial payment the costs for such efforts plus a $500 administration fee. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Pumping Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 40-1 SECTION 01 57 40 TEMPORARY PUMPING SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnishing, installing, testing, operating, and maintaining temporary pumping systems. B. The temporary pumping system contractor must have a service or operations center within 180 miles of the project site to be eligible to perform the work. This requirement will not be waived. The temporary pumping system contractor shall also provide 5 references for projects that have been successfully completed in the last 5 years with firm capacities equal to or greater than that specified herein. The reference information shall include contact information for the Owner and the Contractor that the temporary pumping system contractor provided the services for. The number and size of the pumps; the size and length of the force mains and the duration of the temporary pumping system service shall also be included with the reference contact information. All the reference materials shall be submitted prior to any bypass pumping submittals. Contractors may submit this information prior to bidding if there is any concern of eligibility. C. Equipment shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 46 00 00 – Equipment General Provisions. D. Provide all materials, labor, equipment, power, maintenance, associated items and superintendence to implement temporary pumping systems for diverting flow as required to maintain continuous operation of existing facilities during construction. Provide all additional temporary pumping systems needed using Contractor’s means and methods at no additional cost to Owner. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Bypass Pumping System: The bypass pumping system shall consist of all equipment, piping, valves, plugs, power supply, instrumentation, controls, and lines and other appurtenances required to divert flows from the facilities being rehabilitated to the discharge location illustrated on the drawings. The bypass pumping system shall be comprised of pumping setups in addition to all bypass piping necessary for bypass pumping. Temporary and bypass pumping systems are terms used to describe the same facilities in this specification. Temporary bypass pumping system contractor and supplier also have the same meaning in this specification. B. Bypass Pipe: The bypass pipe shall consist of the pipe, valves and other appurtenances including, but not limited to, air relief valves and dewatering connections. The bypass pipe includes both the suction and discharge pipe for each bypass pump setup. 09 1 9 0 6 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Pumping Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 40-2 C. Primary Pump(s): The primary pump(s) is/are the main pump(s) located at each setup. The primary pump(s) shall be capable of pumping the peak flow, be connected to the bypass pipe, be isolated with valves, and be complete with power supplies. D. Backup Pump(s): The backup pump(s) is/are located at each primary setup. The backup pump(s) shall be capable of pumping peak flow, be operational, be connected to the bypass pipe, be isolated with valves, and be complete with power supplies. E. Standby Pump(s): The standby pump(s) shall be located within 30 minutes of the project site. The standby pump(s) shall be capable of pumping the peak flow and be able to be connected to the bypass pipe at each setup. The standby pump(s) shall have the capacity of the largest pump at each location. F. Discharge Connection: The discharge connection is where the pumped flow exits the bypass pipe and flows onward into a gravity system or force main. G. Interruption in Operations: Any activity that will result in a change in the current method of operation of an existing facility being bypassed. Contractor shall request such "interruption of operations" from the Owner in writing no less than three (3) weeks in advance with a subsequent written confirmation of date and time ninety-six (96) hours in advance of the “interruption of operations”. Owner may reject the request if the change will increase project costs or negatively impact the operation of any existing facilities. H. Partial Utilization, Substantial Completion, and Warranty Period for Items in Continuous Service: Refer to the Contract Documents for definition. I. The terms "open, close, start, stop, operate, verify, energize, de-energize, transfer, switchover, etc." when used in conjunction with equipment that is in service or about to be placed in service are understood to mean: The Owner's operation or maintenance staff shall perform the operation upon written request from the Contractor. J. Operational Test: The period of specified duration that the installed system is tested to verify operational integrity of a system prior to placing the system in service. Operational testing requires that representatives of the equipment manufacturers be on site for timely identification and resolution of system issues. K. Firm Capacity: Shall be the capacity of the bypass pumping system with the largest pump included in the system out of service. L. Cycling Pump Control: Shall mean the use of starting and stopping of single speed and output pumps to achieve the bypass pumping requirements. M. Variable Pump Control: Utilizes variable speed and output pumps in the design of the system to try and match the output of the system with the variable flow conditions of the application. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Pumping Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 40-3 1.03 REFERENCES A. Publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. D1248 Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable b. D2657 Heat Fusion Joining of Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings c. D3261 Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design the installation and operation of temporary pumping systems in accordance with Federal, State or Commonwealth, and Local Municipality Laws and Regulations, including local noise and light ordinances. B. The temporary pumping system shall be designed by the Contractor and provide uninterrupted service throughout construction. C. For all bypass pump arrangements, multiple pumps are necessary. 1. One backup pump for each size pump utilized shall be installed at each bypass pump location, ready for use in the event of primary pump failure. 2. One standby pump shall be required for each system. If the standby pump is placed in operation, an additional standby pump shall be delivered to the bypass pumping site within four hours. 3. The backup pump shall be piped into the suction and discharge headers and shall have the capability of being brought online in the piping system by operating installed isolation valves. D. The system shall be designed to pump the following flows: Location Service Peak Flow Rate (gpm) Variable flow or cycling pump controls SLAR STA 28+81 (SLAR-U-01) 8” Sewer 30 Variable SLAR STA 87+30 (SLAR-U-03)8” Sewer 225 Variable Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Pumping Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 40-4 SLAR STA 126+50 TO 129+30 (SLAR-U-04) 8” Sewer with lateral connections 50 Variable SLAR STA 129+30 (SLAR-U- 04) 8” Sewer 50 Variable CC-1 STA 224+30 (CC-1-U-01)8” Sewer 20 Variable CC-1 STA 221+30 TO 224+30 (CC-1-U-01)10” Sewer 340 Variable CC-1 STA 230+00 (CC-1-U-02)8” Sewer 20 Variable CC-1 STA 230+00 (CC-1-U-02)10” Sewer 340 Variable E. The temporary pumping system must be monitored continuously (24 hours per day, 7 days per week) during operation by a representative of the Contractor trained and certified by the pump supplier. F. Temporary pumping systems shall be equipped with noise reduction features that limit the noise output to 65 db[A] within 50 feet of the equipment or to 60 db[A] at the nearest property line, whichever is less. Diesel-driven engines shall be equipped with critical- rated mufflers. G. Provide pressure and vacuum gauges on the suction and discharge headers. H. Provide level controls to start and stop the pumps. Each pump shall be equipped with a separate control panel. All pumps provided shall be variable speed and output type pumps such that the system design may operate as continuously as possible and spikes in flow conditions are minimized by the design. Cycling pumps shall not be an acceptable design unless allowed by this specification. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Bypass Pumping Plan: The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and approval detailed drawings and descriptions outlining all provisions and precautions to be taken by the Contractor regarding the handling of existing flows. The plan must be specific and complete, including such items as schedules, locations, elevations, capacities of equipment, materials, and all other incidental items necessary and/or required to ensure proper protection of the facilities, including protection of the access and bypass pumping locations from damage due to the discharge flows, and compliance with the requirements and permit conditions specified in these Contract Documents. No temporary pumping shall begin until all provisions and requirements have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer. Engineer will coordinate approvals with Utility Owners. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Pumping Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 40-5 B. All the descriptive terms used in the presentation of the plan shall be as defined in this specification. No other terms with similar meaning shall be used to prevent miscommunication of the prescribed plan. C. Submit a specific detailed description of each proposed temporary pumping system at least 30 days prior to intended use. The submittal shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. A written description of the plan. 2. Quantity, capacity, dimensions and location of all pumping equipment. 3. Pump performance curves and head capacity curves demonstrating the capability to meet all required flows. 4. Pump net positive suction head required (NPSHr) curves demonstrating the net positive suction head available (NPSHa) exceeds the NPSHr by an acceptable margin defined by the manufacturer of the supplied pump. 5. Pump power curves demonstrating the temporary power system is adequately sized for pump startup and operation. 6. Pump diesel engine sizing, dimensions, emissions data, and location plan. 7. Diesel engine fuel-consumption curves. 8. Fuel storage tank details, including spill containment. 9. The size, type and routing of all suction and discharge pipe and the means of connecting the system. 10. Calculations of static lift, frictional losses, all pipe velocities, total dynamic head (TDH) requirements, and net positive suction head available (NPSHa). 11. Existing facility plugging or bulkheading plan, including type, location and manufacturer of plugs with emergency release procedures. 12. Thrust and restraint block sizes and locations, if necessary. 13. Any temporary pipe supports, location, and anchoring requirements. 14. Description of controls, monitoring, mode of operation, sequence of starting and stopping pumps, and emergency power source. 15. Method of noise control for each pump and/or generator for all operations. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Pumping Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 40-6 16. Show force main pipe material and thickness can withstand all normal operating and surge pressures with a safety factor of 2.0. 17. Denote any conditions that will cause pumps to lose suction lift (prime) and describe procedures to rectify. 18. Show that the emergency switchover from primary to secondary pumping will be automatic should equipment fail. 19. Show emergency plan to be used if flooding occurs at work site. 20. Show suction and discharge piping is protected from possible damage from varying flood levels and construction activities. 21. Show any planned shifting of bypass equipment during construction. 22. Complete information on instruments, including calibration certificates. 23. Qualifications of pump supplier on-site operators. 24. Emergency contact telephone numbers. D. The plan must be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State or Commonwealth where the system will be installed and operated. E. Sequence of Construction Plan: Furnish in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 1. Contractors Sequence of Construction defining work to be performed, including the following items: a. Definition of the start date, duration, and end date b. Define activities to be performed by or witnessed by the Owner and date on which these activities are to be performed. c. Scheduling/timing of manufacturers field services required to train all personnel that will be responsible for the operation of the bypass system and to verify that all system components are installed as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.06 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS AND LIABILITIES A. Contractor is responsible for fines levied on Owner by state/commonwealth, federal, and/or other agencies due to spills caused by failure of temporary pumping systems. The Contractor shall also be responsible for repairing any damage to existing facilities including erosion of soils or contamination caused by a spill that is a direct result of the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Pumping Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 40-7 bypass pumping system failure. The cost of all repair and the immediate action required to facilitate the repairs are also the responsibility of the Contractor. This liability is limited to the firm capacity of the bypass pumping system as defined by this specification. B. The Owner is not responsible for any damage to the bypass pumping system under any circumstance. The bypass pumping system supplier by submitting a design for approval accepts that temporary pumping facilities for collection and treatment facilities have unknown materials and debris in them and that any damage to any of the bypass pumping equipment due to unknown materials are the responsibility of the supplier. It shall be the responsibility of the suppler to take precautions as deemed necessary by the supplier against any and all materials that may be present in the liquid pumped by the system to prevent damage to the equipment and to prevent failures that may cause a spill. C. Provide barriers in all locations where temporary pumps, pipe and other accessories are in roadways, driveways, and other vehicle-accessed areas. D. When overnight pumping is necessary, provide security fencing for all temporary pumps when not located within a secured area to prevent tampering. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PUMPS A. The pumps and drives shall be rated for continuous duty and shall be capable of pumping the required flow ranges without surging, cavitation, or vibration. Pumps shall not overload drives at any point on the pump operating curve. B. Pumps shall be suitable for the service specified and the debris contained within it. C. Pumps shall be self-contained units designed for temporary use. D. Pumps shall have fully automatic self-priming units that do not require the use of foot- valves, vacuum pumps, or diaphragm pumps in the priming system, or they shall be submersible. E. All pumps must be constructed to allow dry running for long periods of time to accommodate the cyclical nature of flows. F. Provide the necessary start/stop/variable speed and level controls for each pump. G. The primary pumps shall be diesel powered. 1. Contractor shall be responsible for providing and storing a sufficient quantity of diesel fuel on site to continually operate the pumps for the duration of the temporary bypass pumping period. If this is impractical for industry available fuel storage devices, a refueling plan shall be developed and submitted as part of the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Pumping Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 40-8 bypass pumping submittal. There shall be no excuses for not providing fuel to the bypass pumping system including any natural disaster or weather event. Once started the Contractor shall provide fuel until all work is complete and bypass pumping is no longer needed. Diesel-powered pumps shall have adequate fuel storage capacity to operate continuously for 24 hours without refueling. 2. Contractor shall check the pump fuel levels and shall refill the tanks to full capacity at a frequency based on fuel consumption but not less than daily. Fuel deliveries shall only be made during normal daytime working hours. 3. Each pump and drive shall be rated for continuous duty operation over the specified range of conditions without cavitating or overheating, and without excessive vibration or noise. In addition, each pump and drive shall be rated to operate intermittently at shutoff head against a closed discharge valve for periods of not less than 5 minutes without excessive cavitation, overheating, or vibration. 4. All pumps are to be Godwin Dri-Prime Automatic self-priming pumps as manufactured by Xylem Dewatering Solutions, Inc., or Engineer approved equal. 5. Furnish each pump with the necessary stop/start controls. 6. Contractor will not be permitted to stop or impede the main flows under any circumstances except as otherwise defined under the Sequence of Construction. 2.02 PIPE A. In order to prevent accidental spillage, all temporary pipe must be constructed of rigid or semi-rigid pipe with positive, leak proof connections. All pipe materials and joints for temporary pipe systems must be High Density Black Polyethylene Pipe - ANSI/ASTM D1248, butt heat fusion type joint fittings shall conform to ASTM D2657 and D3261. Flexible hose of any type shall not be permitted. B. Pump discharge piping shall be valved and manifolded so that pumped liquid can be conveyed to the dedicated discharge location. Provide check valves for each pump discharge. Air-relief valves shall be provided at high points in the discharge piping as required. Air-relief valves shall expel air upon pipe filling, admit air upon pipe dewatering, and release small amounts of entrained air during operation. Air-relief valves shall be suitable with the specified service. C. Different pipe diameter sizes can be used, as long as the maximum discharge pipe velocity at the exit does not exceed 10 feet per second. D. The bypass system pipe shall be rated for at least 3 times the shut off head of the largest pump supplied in the system. The rating of the pipe with supporting calculations and pump curves shall be part of the bypass pumping system submittal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Pumping Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 40-9 E. The bypass pumping supplier shall provide a plan for freeze protection of all exposed piping that may be subject to freezing. The method and materials of freeze prevention will be the responsibility of the temporary pumping system supplier. Damage or spills caused by freezing piping shall be the sole responsibility of the bypass pumping system supplier. 2.03 TEMPORARY PLUGS AND BULKHEADS A. Provide temporary plugs and bulkheads, as required, for successful operation of the temporary pumping systems. Acceptable temporary plugs and bulkheads include inflatable dams specifically designed for such service, brick bulkheads, timer bulkheads, sandbags, and other bulkhead methods suitable for the specified service. B. Plugs shall be designed for the specific purpose of providing temporary plugging of active pipes. Each plug and temporary bulkhead shall be suitable for the maximum pressure encountered. C. All plugs shall be firmly attached to a stationary object at ground level by a cable in order to prevent loss of plugs in pipelines. D. Piping plugs shall be capable of accommodating the maximum allowable surcharge heads within the gravity system that may be experienced during construction. All plugs shall be designed with a minimum factor of safety of 1.5. Where temporary plugs and bulkheads are under pressure or surcharged, provide either two plugs or a plug and a temporary bulkhead. E. The plugs shall be readily removed from the system during emergency shutdowns and shall be operated pneumatically. 2.04 PIPE SUPPORTS A. Pipe supports shall be provided for all pipe that is elevated above the ground. B. The design, construction and dismantling of all temporary pipe supports shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All pipe supports shall be designed using the required building codes and regulations and accounting for all potential loads including flood water hydrostatic and flotation loads. C. All piping systems shall be designed to resist all forces associated with liquid pumping. The pipe and supports shall resist all of these forces or the Contractor shall provide supports, thrust blocks or any other facility required to prevent damage to the bypass pumping system. 2.05 ALARM SYSTEMS A. The minimum acceptable alarm system shall consist of high-water float(s) and automatic dialer with a battery backup. The alarm system design shall be the responsibility of the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Pumping Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 40-10 bypass pumping system supplier. The alarm system must be capable of full operation in the absence of electrical power and must provide redundancy in case of alarm system component failure. B. The automatic dialer system shall be provided with either cellular or satellite phone as appropriate to provide reliable contact during any failures. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install, operate and maintain temporary pumping systems and appurtenances, including but not limited to, associated pipe, valves, instrumentation, controls and accessories, in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for each component and as required by the approved bypass pumping submittal. B. Provide all oil, fuel, grease, lubricants, tools and spare parts required for operation and maintenance of the temporary pumping systems for the duration of use. Spill containment around diesel-powered pumps, including filling operations, shall be provided per applicable regulations. C. Adequate hoisting equipment for each pump and accessory shall be maintained on Site. D. Temporary pumping systems shall remain operable until all components of new work requiring temporary pumping systems have successfully completed all required testing and have been accepted by the Owner. E. The design of the bypass pumping system must allow for prompt dewatering of the system during periods of non-use or if leakage occurs. F. The sewer system shall be returned to gravity flow during periods when bypass pumping is not necessary for the installation of work. G. The Contractor will not be permitted to stop or impede the sewer flow under any circumstances without having the primary setups operational. H. Before placing the system in operation, it shall be tested for at least 8 hours of continuous operation. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of temporary fall-protection devices around all removed manhole covers, grating, openings, etc. J. The Contractor shall assemble a list of 24-hour emergency telephone numbers that shall include the Contractor’s project manager, the Contractor’s foreman, and a responsible representative from the pump supplier, and submit it to the Engineer for review and approval. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Pumping Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 40-11 3.02 SITING OF FACILITIES A. In all instances, unobstructed roadway access must be maintained as shown on the drawings. All driveways and connections to roadways must be kept clear. B. The pumps shall be placed in the locations designated on the drawings. All suction piping shall also be in this designated area and shall be placed in the temporary wet well as required to complete the bypass pumping system installation. C. A corridor for all bypass system piping has been delineated on the drawings and all piping and supports must be installed within this corridor. D. The discharge of the bypass pumping system shall be placed and designed in such a way to facilitate proper flow momentum on the direction of normal flow in the receiving facility structure. The bypass pumping contractor will be responsible for the design of the discharge piping and ensuring that no spills occur as a direct result of the design of the discharge. 3.03 PREPARATION A. The Contractor is responsible for locating any existing utilities in the area selected for installation of the bypass pumps and pipelines. The Contractor shall minimize the disturbance to existing utilities and shall obtain approval from the Owner for any relocation of the bypass pipeline. All costs associated with the relocation of utilities and obtaining approvals shall be included in the contract price. B. During all bypass pumping operations, the Contractor shall protect the bypass pumping facilities and existing collection system from damage inflicted by equipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for all intentional or accidental physical damage to the bypass pumping system caused by human or mechanical failure or interference. C. During installation of the bypass pumping pipes, the Contractor shall make every effort to minimize the disruption of normal facility flows and pump station operation. D. The Contractor shall protect all mature vegetation and structures or other obstacles in the path of the pipeline from damage through use of shields and buffering devices. All private property that must be relocated to construct the work must be stored at a location acceptable to the property owner. E. In instances where fences must be disturbed for the construction of the pipeline, temporary fencing shall be required. F. The Contractor shall maintain sewer flow around the work area in a manner that will not cause surcharge or damage to tributary sewers and that will protect public and private property from damage. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Pumping Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 40-12 G. Temporarily burying the bypass piping may be required to provide access over the piping during operations. All fittings and costs associated with this temporary piping location shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All locations where temporary burying of the pipe will be required shall be included in the bypass pumping system submittal. Rehabilitation and returning the area of temporary burying back to the original condition including paving or seeding or any other item removed to facilitate pipe installation shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.04 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL A. The Contractor shall pipe sections or make connections to the existing piping systems and construct temporary bypass pumping structures only at the access location and as may be required to provide an adequate suction conduit. B. The temporary bypass pumping system shall be tested before placing the system in operation. Testing periods shall occur only between the hours of 8:30 a.m. and 3:00 p.m., Monday through Thursday. Testing of bypass pumping system shall NOT be allowed Friday through Sunday, on the Owner's scheduled Holidays, or on the day immediately prior to an Owner's scheduled Holiday. In addition, testing of bypass pumping system shall only be performed during the Owner's normally scheduled work days. Testing shall include leakage testing, pressure testing, operational testing, and alarm testing. C. Leakage and pressure test: Contractor shall perform leakage and pressure testing for a minimum of two (2) hours on the pump duty suction piping and duty discharge piping in accordance with Article 3.05, Paragraph A. Contractor shall then remove the duty piping and shall install the standby suction piping and standby discharge piping and perform the same test for an additional two (2) hours. D. Operation test: Contractor shall operate the temporary bypass pumping system for as long as necessary, but no less than 8 hours, without failure to demonstrate reliable operation of the entire system, including but not limited to pumps and controls, to the satisfaction of the Owner. E. Plugging or blocking of flows shall incorporate primary and secondary plugging devices. When plugging or blocking is no longer needed for performance of the work, the plugs are to be removed in a manner that permits the flow to slowly return to normal without surge, surcharging, or causing other major disturbances upstream or downstream. F. The Contractor shall remove manhole sections or make connections to the existing gravity conveyance system and construct temporary bypass pumping structures only as the access locations indicated on the Contract Drawings and as may be required to provide adequate suction conduit. G. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining any approvals for placement of the temporary pipeline within public right of ways. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Pumping Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 40-13 H. Upon system removal, all wastewater must be discharged into the wastewater collection system and pipes flushed using potable water supplied by the Contractor. 3.05 QUALITY CONTROL AND MAINTENANCE A. Testing: Contractor shall perform leakage and pressure tests of the bypass pump suction and discharge piping using potable or approved surface water prior to actual operation. Low pressure air test shall be conducted at a test pressure of 15 psi before any liquid is pumped to ensure the system is assembled correctly. The system will pass the low-pressure air test if it holds the test pressure for 2 hours. The Engineer shall be given 24 hours’ notice prior to testing. The force main shall be tested to 1.5 times the normal working pressure of the system at the firm capacity specified and will be considered ready for service if the pressure is held for 2 hours. Surface water or potable water shall be supplied and used by the Contractor for this test. B. Once installation and testing of the temporary pumping systems are complete, a trained representative from the pump supplier shall inspect the installation and verify in writing that the installation is complete in all aspects and ready to run as intended on a continuous basis. C. Inspection: during operation of the temporary pumping system the Contractor shall inspect all components every two (2) hours to ensure that the system is working correctly and shall keep a written log of the system inspection results. Contractor shall inspect the bypass pumping fuel system a minimum of either one (1) time per day or as often as necessary to ensure full fuel tanks for the bypass pumps. D. Maintenance service: Contractor shall ensure that the temporary pumping system is properly maintained, and a responsible and competent mechanic/operator shall be on call at all times. The Contractor shall supply all necessary lubrication, fuel, and supplies necessary to maintain the entire installation. E. Besides the Owner and the Engineer, only employees of the Contractor or the system supplier are allowed on site. F. Someone with knowledge of the bypass pump system operation must arrive on site within one hour of any bypass pump start-up event. If the system must be operated continuously, then an operator that can troubleshoot failure and make repairs to the system must be on site while the system is in operation. The temporary pumping system must be monitored continuously (24 hours per day, 7 days per week) during operation by a representative of the Contractor trained and certified by the pump supplier. 3.06 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION A. Contractor shall propose a Sequence of Construction incorporating all constraints detailed in this Section and shall secure concurrence of Owner prior to starting work. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Temporary Pumping Systems Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 40-14 B. The Contractor shall submit a construction plan and schedule, which details the methods, means, techniques, and sequences to be used to establish a base element of surety against a spill, to the Engineer for review and approval by the Owner as part of the bypass pumping system submittal. One month prior to connections being made to existing structures or pipes, a coordination meeting shall be held between the Contractor, Engineer, and Owner to discuss the construction plan previously submitted by the Contractor. A detailed schedule of all construction activities requiring bypass pumping system operations shall be delivered in the meeting with the intention of discussing all major milestones. No temporary pumping shall take place until after satisfactory completion of the coordination meeting. C. Schedule of construction, interconnection details, and other revisions necessary for proper interfacing of the Work are to be subsequently modified by Contractor accounting for results of said coordination meeting. The Engineer and Owner are to be notified one week prior to any actual interruptions or connections being made. No work shall be undertaken prior to securing Owner's approval of respective connection plan and work schedule. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Dewatering and Flow Diversion for Streamwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 52-1 SECTION 01 57 52 DEWATERING AND FLOW DIVERSION FOR STREAMWORK PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. This work shall consist of flow diversion, dewatering and maintaining water level for preparing work areas when construction activities take place within stream areas as specified in the Contract Documents or as directed by the Owner or Owner’s Representative, and shall be in accordance with the requirements of the applicable State, District or Commonwealth in which the project is located: 1. Utah: General Permit for Strom Water Discharges from Construction Activities (2020 or most current version) as developed by the State of Utah Department of Environmental Quality (UPDES). B. This item includes placement, operation, maintenance and removal upon completion. Diversions are used to isolate work areas from flow during the construction of in-stream projects. Diversions which have an insufficient flow capacity can fail and severely erode the disturbed channel section under construction. Therefore, in-channel construction activities should occur only during conditions where the diversion is designed to convey the anticipated flow such as periods of low rainfall. The cost for maintenance of these devices is solely the Contractor's responsibility. These works are temporary and shall be removed and the area restored to its original state when they are no longer needed or permanent measures are installed. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS 1. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 2. Section 31 00 01 – Earthwork 3. Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sediment Control 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide all required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Provide product data for each type and/or size of dewatering coffer dam or pump around equipment as described on the Contract Documents. C. Provide one (1) copy of a stream Dewatering and Flow Diversion plan to the Owner or Owner’s Representative for review and approval. The plan shall include a description of means and methods plus a list of materials including pump equipment, etc., that shall be 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 10 - 2 6 - 2 0 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Dewatering and Flow Diversion for Streamwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 52-2 employed. The Contractor shall document the flow volume anticipated to be passed around the work area during normal operations. Specifications for any proprietary devices will be required for review and approval by the Owner or Owner’s Representative. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Coffers 1. It is suggested that the Contractor utilize sand bags with plastic sheeting to impound water as necessary to construct stream work. However, the Contractor may submit for review by the design Owner or Owner’s Representative alternative methods for coffer systems including proprietary devices. B. Impervious Sheeting 1. Sheeting shall consist of ten (10) mil or thicker polyethylene plastic, which is impervious and resistant to puncture and tearing. C. Pump(s) 1. Pump(s) shall be large enough for dewatering stream section in a timely fashion without creating unsafe conditions or producing additional erosion or sediment discharge. 2. The pump around shall include a hose, high density polyethylene (HDPE) or metal pipe suitable to convey water overland to the downstream discharge point. Pump inlets will have a screen (mesh size <1 inch) over opening. 3. The pump(s) shall be shut off at night unless otherwise indicated on the Construction Documents. 4. The size and number of pumps shall be determined by the Contractor based on his/her review of field conditions, interpretation of the Contract Documents and experience. 5. All pipe work shall be secured in place. D. Sand bags 1. Sandbags shall consist of materials, which are resistant to ultraviolet radiation, tearing and puncture, and woven tightly enough to prevent leakage of fill material (i.e., sand, fine gravel, etc.). E. Filter Bags and Dewatering Sumps Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Dewatering and Flow Diversion for Streamwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 52-3 1. Shall be per Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sediment Control PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND REMOVAL A. Installation and Removal 1. Installation of piping, sand bags, sheeting and pump around shall be in accordance with the approved Erosion and Sediment Control Plan in the Contract Documents or as directed by the Owner or Owner’s Representative. 2. Unless otherwise specified on the Contract Documents, install diversion structures from upstream to downstream. 3. Relocate the discharge pipe(s) as necessary to complete all work as shown on the Contract Documents at no additional expense to the Owner. 4. Provide piping, sumps, sedimentation tanks, dewatering basins or non-woven dewatering bags as required by the Owner or Owner's Representative. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring water is adequately filtered or otherwise treated per State/Commonwealth, County, and City sediment control requirements before discharging into a stream or storm drain system. Contractor shall use filter bags and dewatering sumps where directed by the Contract Documents or directed by the Owner or Owner’s Representative. Cost of filter bags and dewatering sumps are considered incidental to this item and will not be paid for separately. 5. Provide standby equipment on-site, installed, and available for immediate operation, to maintain dewatering if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. 6. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to the Owner. 7. Remove dewatering system from project site upon completion of construction activities related to the dewatering areas only with the approval of the Owner or the Owner’s Representative. B. Pump-around Length and Stream Aquatics 1. In order to protect the existing benthic, fish and other aquatic organisms, do not exceed the pump-around work area limits as shown on the Contract Documents (usually less than 300 feet) without written authorization from the Owner or Owner’s Representative. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Dewatering and Flow Diversion for Streamwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 52-4 2. Do not operate the pumps beyond the time frames as specified on the Contract Documents. It is anticipated and necessary that base flow be passed back over work areas at night unless specifically called out as a "24 hour" dry work area on the Contract Documents. Fish trapped within "pockets" of water shall be removed by hand netting or sieving and shall be placed downstream of the work area or as directed by the Owner at the Contractor’s expense. C. Disposal of Water 1. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids sediment deposition, endangering public health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. D. Daily Work Area Pump-down 1. Pump down any flooded work areas prior to each day's work so that operations are "in the dry". If water removed from work areas is turbid, it shall be pumped first to a filter bag or other approved filtration device prior to this water re-entering the stream; see Section 31 25 00 Erosion and Sediment Control for more detail. E. Hours of Operation 1. If pump operations occur between 5 PM and 7 AM, then the Contractor must always have an employee on site to monitor pumping operations. F. Noise 1. Pumps utilized in the stream diversion must comply with Local Noise Ordinances. If necessary, construct devices to muffle pump noise at no additional compensation. Should noise reduction be required, then noise-abatement dewatering shall be accomplished by the use of a “quiet” brand of critically silenced Dri-Prime Pump(s) manufactured by Godwin or approved equal. These quiet pumps shall be enclosed in 14-gauge sheet metal lined with 1-inch and 2- inch layers of polydamp acoustical sound deadening material to achieve a noise reduction to 69dBA at 30 feet. All exhaust pipes must be muffled. G. Pump Line Placement 1. Any piping that crosses paved trails shall have a wooden ramp at a slope of 1:20 (vertical: horizontal) for pedestrian and bike passage. A warning sign must also be placed in advance of the pipe crossing on both sides of trail. H. Inspection 1. Inspect pipes regularly for leaks and repair as necessary. Repairs are considered incidental to this item and will not be paid for separately. I. Elimination of Concentrated Flow Scour Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Dewatering and Flow Diversion for Streamwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 57 52-5 1. All stream diversion outfalls shall utilize a velocity reduction device such as a temporary riprap pad to prevent erosion. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-1 SECTION 01 58 00 UTILITY RELOCATION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. This section sets forth provisions and relocation requirements relating to existing utilities affected by the Project. The Contractor is required to protect in place, relocate, or coordinate the relocation of existing utilities as necessary or appropriate in order to complete the Project as specified herein. The Contractor is responsible for performing all efforts and costs needed to expedite each relocation of a utility within the Project. The Contractor’s responsibilities and obligations with regard to each relocation shall include, but not limited to, the following: 1. Performing the Work specified in the Contract Documents. 2. Investigate, identify, and verify the location of existing utilities. 3. Coordinate the design and relocation of private utility relocations such as gas, power, telephone, fiber optic, communications, etc. with Private Utilities. 4. If relocation of a utility cannot reasonably be avoided, the Contractor shall: a. Minimize the extent of the utility relocation. b. Identify the extent of each utility relocation required and coordinate as necessary to accomplish each, including providing and specifying a mutually agreeable proposed relocation solution; coordinate the proposed relocation with the location of other utility facilities present at the site to ensure that all utility facilities are accommodated. c. Provide all coordination, scheduling, surveying, and traffic control to accommodate each Utility Company’s relocation work. These costs shall be borne by the Contractor and will not be back-charged to the Utility Companies. d. Pursue the above goals by taking into consideration the impact of utility relocations on the Project as a whole, and without regard to whether the Contractor is entitled to a Change Order. 5. Performing such tasks as are assigned to the Contractor including, where indicated, protecting existing utilities in place, coordinating the relocation of utilities, and the design and/or construction work. 70 088 -001 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-2 6. The Contractor is responsible for all temporary relocations implemented to accommodate the Contractor’s own construction operations, including any necessary coordination with the Utility Companies. 7. Where the Contractor is performing construction work, obtaining, paying the costs of, and complying with all relocation permits. 8. Performing any other tasks assigned to the Owner which fall within the scope of the Contractor’s responsibilities as stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, and undertaking all reasonable efforts necessary to schedule, coordinate, and facilitate all utility work in connection with all service line relocations, all fiber optic cables, and associated facilities relocations. 9. Provide documentation that shows the horizontal and vertical location of existing and relocated utilities. B. Relocation Costs a. The Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with utility relocations required to complete the Project. C. The Utility Relocation Work excludes the following: 1. Those efforts and costs that are identified as the responsibility of the Utility Company or of the Owner; or 2. Those efforts and costs that are otherwise specifically excluded from the Work; and 3. Betterments. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Utility Company (or Companies) 1. All owners of utilities both private and public within the limits of the Project. Utilities owned by this group include all utilities shown in the design drawings and also any undiscovered utilities (not shown in the design drawings) that might be found during construction within the limits of the Project. B. Private Utility (or Utilities) 1. Owners of any “dry” utilities such as gas, power, telephone, fiber optic, communications, etc. C. Public Utility (or Utilities) Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-3 1. All owners of SS, SD, W, PI, and IRR utilities. Most of these types of utilities are owned by public entities. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 1. Utility Relocation Plans a. If required by the Utility Company or not shown on the Drawings, submit Preliminary and Final Utility Relocation Plans to the Owner and Utility Companies for review and approval. 2. Utility Record Plans a. For all utility relocation work designed and/or constructed by the Contractor, provides As-Built or Record Utility Plans to the Owner and to each Utility Company in the electronic file format specified by the Owner and also as a hard copy. The plans shall show the locations of existing utilities, structures, trees, streets, and ROW limits. Obtain the signature of the Owner and Utility Company on two original set of plans; retain the original set, and deliver the other original set to the Owner. 3. Project-Wide Utility Plans a. Transfer as-built information to a separate set of Project-wide Utility Plans, prepared using the Project plan sheet format. The purpose of this set is to show a comprehensive picture of all as-built Utilities (both existing and adjusted as a part of the Project) for the Project on a single set of plans in the same format, as is required for all other Project As-built Plans. b. Include on the plans Project survey control information and sheets. Show points along the relocated Utility lines via stations, offsets to the dominant control line at the following intervals along with northing coordinates, easting coordinates, Project elevation of natural ground, and facility elevation (invert or bottom of facility), as follows: 1) Every 100 feet and/or at angle points. 2) At ROW boundaries. 3) At roadway control points. 4. Monthly Updates a. Maintain the Owner’s current utility contact list and update it monthly. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-4 b. Provide the Owner a monthly updated schedule of Utility Company coordination meetings, design progress, and construction progress. c. Submit biweekly summaries of utility relocation activities as outlined in herein. 5. Warranties a. Provide the agreed-upon warranties of the relocation work on Third-Party Utility facilities and in accordance with the executed Utility License Agreement and/or Supplemental Agreement(s). 1.04 UTILITY RELOCATION TEAM A. Owner Responsibilities 1. Activities to Date: The Owner has coordinated with all known Utility Companies and has: a. Identified known existing utilities. b. Performed Subsurface Utility Engineering (SUE) on selected utilities as shown in the Drawings. c. Developed Contact List of known Utility Companies in the Project area, and contact personnel, where known. d. Developed preliminary utility relocation design drawings for the relocation of select storm sewer, and sanitary sewer. 2. Owner’s Responsibilities During Construction a. Amending Utility License Agreements from all utilities affected by the Project work, with assistance as requested by the District from the Contractor and Utility Owner. b. Owner’s construction management team provides oversight during construction. B. Contractor’s Utility Relocation Management Team 1. The Contractor shall provide a Utility Relocation Management Team that is experienced in large utility relocation infrastructure type projects requiring coordination between the Contractor, Owner, and multiple utility companies. The Contractor’s team shall include a full time Utility Relocation Manager (URM), Utility Relocation Design Engineer (URDE), and support staff as required for the timely completion of design and construction of utility relocations. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-5 2. Utility Relocation Manager (URM) a. The URM is responsible for managing all utility relocation activities for the duration of the Project. This person is required to have a bachelor’s degree in civil engineering or related engineering or construction degree plus a minimum of 10 years of related experience in utility relocation projects. As alternate to the educational requirements, the URM could be someone of equivalent experience that has at least 20 years’ experience in underground utility relocation work. The URM acts as a facilitator between the Contractor’s Utility Relocation Team, the Owner, and Utility Companies to design, construct, and resolve utility conflicts. The URM is to be one of the Contractor’s key personnel, and is to be available at all times during construction activities. The URM shall have the responsibility to affect direction of the Contractor’s work if utilities are in conflict with the work. 3. The Utility Relocation Management Team’s responsibilities include: a. Coordinating all design and construction activities with the Utility Company (regardless of who performs any proposed utility relocation work) b. Coordinating the location of the utility facility, or the potential impacts of relocation c. Designing, protecting, temporarily relocating, and/or constructing the facility as applicable for the utility type. 4. The Contractor’s Utility Relocation Management Team shall maintain the positive working relationship the Owner has developed with the Utility Companies in their cooperative participation and support of the Project. 5. The following requirements are highly important to the Owner and Utility Companies and are assigned to the Contractor: a. Designate a URM as the principal contact to coordinate, cooperate, and work with the Utility Company contact persons designated in Article Utility Notification and Coordination, or as otherwise assigned by the Utility Company. b. Maintain the Owner’s current utility contact list and update it monthly. c. Keep Utility Companies well informed of Project construction progress and schedules and notify them at least 7 days in advance of any Work in the vicinity of their facilities and 14 days notice of potential impacts on service. d. Keep Utility Companies well informed of Project changes and involved in making the Project design decisions so they can provide uninterrupted service to their customers or minimize interruption of services. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-6 e. Cooperate with the Utility Companies to resolve relocation installation issues and to allow Utility Company betterments without causing the Owner or Utility Companies to incur any unnecessary expense and remaining consistent with the Contractor’s Scope of Work. All costs associated with Utility Company betterments shall be paid to contractor by the Utility Company under a separate agreement, negotiated by Contractor and Utility Company. f. For Utility Companies performing their own work, Contractor shall schedule adequate time for Utility Companies to complete their work in a timely manner; and for utilities which the Contractor is responsible to perform the work. g. Develop procedures for addressing utility conflicts discovered during design and/or construction. h. Provide to the Owner a monthly updated schedule of Utility Company coordination meetings, design progress, and construction progress. i. Monitor the progress of Utility Company work and notify the Owner if there is cause to believe that the Utility Company will not meet the specified time frame(s) for design review of the Contractor’s plans, construction, or timely inspection. Provide such notice to the Owner within 24 hours of discovery. 6. Utility Relocation Design Engineer (URDE) Responsibilities a. The URDE is a licensed professional engineer in the State of Utah, who will be responsible for leading the design effort of utility relocations, if required, and shall maintain a record of the design and construction activities of all utility relocations that have been performed by the Contractor, and have been designed and released for construction after Notice to Proceed. b. The URDE shall include the following information in its biweekly summary of utility relocation activities: 1) Utility Relocation Plans that have been reviewed by the Utility Company and received Consultation and written comment by the Owner. 2) Notification of construction dates. 3) Record of meetings with Utility Company. 4) Signature of Owner and Utility Company on Utility Relocation Plans indicating that the plans are released for construction. 5) Record of Utility Company inspector present at any time. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-7 6) Any revisions to the Utility Relocation Plans. 7) Date(s) that construction was completed. 8) Signature and acceptance of Utility Companies on Record Plans and all other requirements stipulated in the owning Utility Regulations. C. Utility Company Responsibilities 1. It is anticipated that Utility Companies will: a. Attend coordination meetings. b. Comply with executed Utility License Agreements and Supplemental Agreements. c. Cooperate in the scheduling of construction. d. Provide design, design review, and construction within the negotiated schedule. e. Within 60 days of request, provide the Contractor with detailed invoices (with sufficient documentation) for work accomplished. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 AVOIDING RELOCATIONS A. Regardless of who is required to bear the cost of any proposed relocation or to perform the Work relating to such relocation, the location of utilities and potential impact of relocation of such facilities shall be considered in the construction of the Project, with the following goals: 1. Avoiding relocation of utilities to the extent practicable. 2. If relocation of a utility is not reasonably avoidable, protecting the utility in place to the extent practicable. 3. Otherwise minimizing the potential costs relating to relocations to the extent practicable. 4. The foregoing goals shall be pursued by taking into consideration the impact of utility relocations on the Project as a whole without regard to who is required to bear the cost of any proposed relocation or to perform the Work relating to such 10 2 2 0 8 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-8 relocation and without regard to whether or not the Contractor is entitled to a change order with respect thereto. 3.02 MEETINGS AND CORRESPONDANCE A. Utility Company Startup Meetings 1. Within 28 calendar days of the Notice To Proceed (NTP), Contractor shall schedule startup meetings with each Utility Company, the Contractor’s URM, and the Owner to review the following: a. Inventory of facilities. b. Terms of the Utility License Agreements, including allocation of responsibilities. c. All potential items of work that affect the Project schedule. d. The schedule for the Project. e. Potential Utility conflicts and relocations. f. Time frames to design, procure Materials for, and construct relocations. g. Startup Meeting Goals: 1) Reach concurrence on the number and extent of known affected utility lines and issues. 2) Discuss the possible elimination of conflicts. 3) Establish the mitigation approach to be used at each specific location. 4) Establish procedures for addressing conflicts discovered during design and/or construction. 2. Progress Meetings a. Jointly schedule at least monthly utility meetings with the Owner to discuss Project progress, issues, and planned Work for all phases of utility work, including design and construction. Notify the Owner at least 10 working days in advance of each meeting. Develop the agenda for these meetings jointly with the Owner. At these meetings, include the Contractor’s and the Owner’s key personnel who have responsibilities for utilities. Take and maintain meeting minutes of all the utility meetings and distribute copies of the minutes to participants, including representatives of Utility Companies who have facilities in the areas reviewed (even if they did not attend the meeting) within 5 working days after the meeting. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-9 3. Correspondence a. Provide to the Owner copies of all correspondence between the Contractor and any Utility Company within 2 working days of receiving it or sending it, as applicable. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION OF UTILITIES AND INVESTIGATIONS BY THE CONTRACTOR A. Investigations 1. The Owner has investigated many of the utilities likely to be impacted by the Work. However, the Owner does not warrant this work. Accordingly, the Contractor shall perform the following investigations prior to commencement of design and construction in a particular area: a. The Contractor shall take all reasonable actions necessary to establish the existence, size, and exact location of all utilities and associated facilities and service lines in such areas that are impacted by any Work, including, making diligent inquiry at the offices of the Utility Companies, consulting public records, and conducting field studies (such as potholing), as appropriate; and b. If a surface inspection of the area shows the existence or gives the Contractor cause to suspect the existence of any previously unidentified utilities or Contractor otherwise has cause to suspect that other previously unidentified utilities exist, then the Contractor shall undertake all appropriate investigations (which may include contacting Utility Companies and consulting public records as well as field investigations as necessary to verify the existence, location, and size of such other utilities). B. If the Contractor’s investigations identify utilities not described in the Contract Documents or if they result in a determination that any utility was not accurately indicated therein then the Contractor shall notify the Owner of the same within five working days after discovery. C. Accuracy 1. For purposes of this Specification, a utility shall be considered accurately indicated on the Contract Documents to the following extent: a. The facility’s actual location is within the following: b. Five feet for underground utilities except for buried telephone lines that are considered accurate to within 10 feet. c. Three feet for overhead utilities of the approximate horizontal centerline location of the utility indicated in the Contract. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-10 2. The facility’s actual location is within six inches vertically of any point or feature where an elevation for such point or feature is shown in the Contract Documents (if no elevation is shown, there is no limitation on vertical location). 3. The facility’s actual size does not differ from the size indicated in the Contract Documents by more than 25 percent of the size originally indicated (provided, however, that if the sizes indicated in the Contract Documents differ for any reason, the size closer to the actual size will be used for this calculation). For example, if the Contract Documents shows a four inch pipeline which is in fact a five inch pipeline actually located two feet away from the location shown, such facility shall be deemed to be accurately indicated. 3.04 UTILITY NOTIFICATION AND COORDINATION A. Contractor shall take the coordination lead role and be proactive in coordinating with other contractors, Utility Companies, and land owners for the construction of the Project. B. Where necessary, the Contractor shall install and maintain bypass facilities required to keep necessary existing utilities in service for the Work to be performed on schedule. C. For utility relocations performed by Contractor, notify applicable Utility Company a minimum of 30 days prior to commencing work on any conflicting utilities. D. In addition to giving such other notices as may be required, the Contractor, as the "excavator" in the area of "underground facilities" within the site, shall give such notices of excavation as are required under governmental rules including “Blue Stakes” procedures. The Contractor shall be solely responsible and liable for any damage to any underground facilities which might have been avoided had such notices been delivered. E. Coordinate the Work with various utilities within Project limits. Notify applicable utilities prior to commencing Work, if damage occurs, or if conflicts or emergencies arise during Work. Utility Companies listed on the drawings have been contacted by the Owner during the design phase of the Project. 3.05 UTILITY LICENSE AGREEMENTS A. The Owner has existing or has entered into Utility License Agreements with many of the Utility Companies which establish a general framework for the relocations of utilities. For existing utilities located within the Project right-of-way (ROW) that do not currently have a Utility License Agreement, the Owner may enter into a Utility License Agreement (as appropriate) with the Utility Company to address protection of these utilities in place or relocations. B. Copies of Utility License Agreements with Utility Companies that have been executed are available for reference purposes only at the office of the Owner. The Owner will provide to the successful Contractor copies of such agreements within 14 calendar days after a request for such by the Contractor. The terms of all utility agreements and Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-11 supplemental agreements and any amendments thereto shall be at Owner’s sole discretion. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner at the Contractor’s expense as reasonably requested by the Owner in connection with negotiating and preparing agreements with Utility Companies, including preparing and providing such written information concerning the Project (such as reports, plans, and surveys) as is requested by the Owner and providing staff to attend negotiation sessions. It is the goal of the Owner to have Utility License Agreement or amendments to existing Utility License Agreement for every utility that is within the ROW by the time utilities are relocated and the project is complete. C. Authority to Execute Agreements 1. The terms of all Utility License Agreements and any amendments will be set by the Owner and the Utility Company; the Contractor shall have no authority to enter into any agreements with any Utility Company on the Owner’s behalf. 2. If the Contractor identifies conflicts with a Utility for which the Owner does not have an existing Utility License Agreement, the Owner may execute a Utility License Agreement with the unlisted Utility Company. 3. In the case of an inconsistency between an executed Utility License Agreement and information provided elsewhere in these Contract Documents, the terms and conditions in the executed Utility License Agreement shall govern. D. Supplemental Agreements 1. Coordinate with the Owner for preparing information needed for the negotiations of all supplemental and amended Utility License Agreements. Prepare and provide any related documentation such as reports, plans, surveys, pothole data, and estimates of cost, and provide personnel to attend negotiation sessions with Utility Companies. 3.06 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION CRITERIA A. Coordinate all utility design and construction activities with the Utility Companies, including design and construction of utility facilities as applicable for each utility type, subject to the requirements of the Utility License Agreements. For all design and construction work, reviews, and approvals, comply with the requirements in the Contract Documents. Verify that the plans prepared and the construction performed is consistent and compatible with the Project design and construction. B. Design and Construction Responsibility 1. Preliminary design drawings for storm sewer, and sanitary sewer utilities have been included in the Contract Documents to help provide a cost basis for the Contractor’s Lump Sum Bid price listed for each utility identified. The Contractor is required to verify the location of all utilities as specified and complete the design Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-12 and prepare Utility Relocation Plans prior to construction of utility relocations whose design is not included in the Contract Documents or provided by Utility Companies. 2. The responsibilities for the design and construction of utility relocations are listed in Table 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordinating and scheduling the relocation of all utilities. 3. For Utility Companies that elect to design and construct any required utility relocations, coordinate and correlate these utility designs with the Project design for review by the Owner prior to beginning the utility reconstruction. Table 1 Utility Quantity Responsibility Cottonwood Heights City 2 Contractor Cottonwood Improvement District 7 Contractor Dominion Energy 11 Utility Lumen/Century Link 3 Utility Rocky Mountain Power 1 Utility SLCDPU 6 Contractor Telecon/Comcast 1 Utility Verizon 2 Utility C. Utility Relocation Plans 1. Where required, prepare utility relocation design far enough in advance for the following outlined review period requirements to be completed without delaying or impacting Project schedule. 2. After the utility relocation design has been advanced sufficiently to clearly define Utility impacts, finalize and submit preliminary Utility Relocation Plans to the Owner and Utility Company for initial review. Allow 2-week time period for Owner and Utility Company to review initial plans. Identify the extent of the relocation required, clearly show the proposed utility design, and coordinate as necessary to accomplish each relocation, including providing and clearly indicating a mutually agreeable proposed location for the relocated facility. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-13 3. Submit Final Utility Relocation Plans to the Owner and the Utility Company for review and approval. Allow 2-week time period for Owner and Utility Company to review final plans. All Contractor prepared Utility Relocation Plans shall be signed and stamped by a Utah licensed professional engineer. Also submit to the Utility Company for review and written approval all subsequent changes to designs that have previously been approved. Correlate all Utility Company relocation plans with the Project design information and submit them to the Owner for review prior to construction. 4. Review Utility-Company-prepared relocation plans for consistency and compatibility with the Project design and obtain Utility Company’s approval before construction, whether construction is to be performed by the Contractor or the Utility Company. a. For relocation designs prepared by the Utility Company, provide two separate sets of plans for each Utility relocation, as follows: 1) Prepare and provide to the Utility Company, Project design information such that the Utility Company can prepare a detailed plan for each specific utility type. Provide an electronic copy and a hard copy to the Owner for review. Acceptable electronic format for drawings and information submitted to the Utility Company and the Owner include AutoCAD files and/or Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) files. Provide to the Owner a final Release–for-Construction plan set signed by both the Utility Company and the Contractor for Owner concurrence; and signature prior to relocation construction. 2) Prepare the second plan set in the Project plan sheet format. Include sufficient design detail to allow review and verification of conflicts and to show all relocations and known existing Utilities, as identified by the Owner and Contractor. Deliver an electronic copy and a hard copy to the Owner for review. Electronic copy shall be compatible with current version of Civil 3D using project coordinate system and benchmarks. b. For relocation designs prepared by the Contractor, prepare two separate sets of plans for each utility relocation, as follows: 1) Prepare a detailed design plan for each specific utility type, in the format desired by the Owner. Deliver an electronic copy and a hard copy to the Owner and Utility Company for review. Obtain signatures of the Utility Company on the final design as a Release-for- Construction verification prior to construction. Provide the final signed Release-for-Construction plan set signed by the Utility Company and Contractor for the Owner’s concurrence and signature prior to relocation construction. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-14 2) Prepare the second plan set in the Project plan sheet format. Include sufficient design detail to allow review and verification of conflicts and to show all relocations and known existing utilities, as identified by the Owner and Contractor. Deliver an electronic copy and a hard copy to the Owner for review. Electronic copy shall be compatible with current version of Civil 3D using project coordinate system and benchmarks. D. Notify each Utility Company in writing a minimum of 30 days prior to commencing the work. E. Utility Companies have the right to inspect the work performed by the Contractor. Utility Companies will communicate any concerns or irregularities with the progression of relocation work to the Owner within 48 hours, which will forward the concerns to the Contractor. Testing of Contractor relocated utilities shall be performed and paid for by the Contractor in accordance with the applicable testing requirements of each Utility Company. F. There are three different types of Utility Work Limits, each of which present different levels of responsibility for the Contractor: 1. Inside the Project (PE) a. The limits of Utility Work extend as far as is necessary to accommodate the Work and the Utility Company’s relocation requirements only where inside the Project ROW and limits. 2. Outside the Project PE and Inside Existing Road Easements a. The Contractor shall coordinate with the owner of the roadway for access. 3. Outside the Project PE and Outside Existing Road Easement a. Contractor shall verify extents of utility easement with Utility Company and shall submit easement mapping for approval by the Utility Company at least 30 days prior to beginning construction. Any additional easements required to facilitate a utility relocation shall be obtained and paid for by the Utility Company. G. The Contractor shall give such notices of excavation as are required under Utah Code Title 54 Chapter 8a-2 (known as the Blue Stakes Law). Contact Blue Stakes at (800) 662-4111 before all Utility work, or Utility Company if such owner is responsible to provide blue stake locations. All Utility Companies shall provide utility location assistance as requested by Contractor. H. Before working adjacent to overhead lines, give appropriate notice to the Utility Company. Obtain the minimum clearances (between the utility lines and the Project’s construction equipment, permanent finished grade, and/or temporary grade) directly from the Utility Companies as necessary. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-15 I. Where performing utility construction work, obtain, pay the cost of, and comply with all relocation permits for utility locations, both within and outside the ROW. J. Abandonment and Protection-in-Place 1. Unless specifically noted otherwise in the Contract Documents or directed otherwise in writing by the Utility Company, removal of abandoned underground utilities or pipes within the planned ROW limits that do not interfere with the Work is not required of the Contractor. For underground utilities and pipes that are to be left in place, abandon them by capping all open ends with minimum 18 inches of concrete; for pipes 12 inches or greater in diameter, the cap must be at least 24 inches thick. 2. Protect existing utilities not requiring relocation, removal, or abandonment in accordance with the Utility Company’s requirements. Actively protect all Utilities to be left in place and communicate its status to the Subcontractors and other Utility Companies. Repair or replace any existing utility that is damaged by the Contractor to the satisfaction of, and at no cost to the Owner or Utility Company. All costs for repairing utility, including loss of revenue costs experienced by the owner of the utility being out of service as a result of the damage shall be borne by the Contractor. K. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of coordination, design, permits, construction, and coordination of all temporary utility relocations that are implemented for the convenience of the Contractor’s construction operation. L. Carry out all Work carefully and skillfully, and support and secure utilities to avoid damage and to keep them satisfactorily maintained and functional. Do not move or remove any utility without the Utility Company’s written consent unless otherwise directed by the Owner. At the completion of the Work, ensure that the condition of all utilities is as safe and permanent as before the Work was begun. M. If any utility is damaged by the Contractor, notify the affected Utility Company and repair the damage or allow the Utility Company to repair the damage. If the Contractor is found to be responsible for the repair costs of the damaged utility and fails to make any required payment within thirty days after receipt of the Utility Company’s invoice, the Owner will have the right to pay the Utility Company from the Owner’s funds and to deduct an amount sufficient to cover the cost from any moneys due or that may become due to the Contractor under this Contract. N. Betterments: 1. Utility Companies may request betterments to their facilities as a result of required relocations of their lines. In such cases, Contractor is solely responsible to reach an agreement with the Utility Company to perform these betterments as separate contracts to which the Owner is not a party and has no responsibility, actual or implied, subject to the Owner’s permitting process. If the Utility Company utilizes Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-16 its own construction forces, coordinate with and allow the approved Third-Party Utility contractor to enter the work zone to perform utility betterment work. Establish a time and schedule for these betterments as part of the Supplemental Agreement(s) with the Utility Company. 2. Under no circumstances shall betterments affect or jeopardize the schedule and timely completion of the Work included in the Contract Documents. Work with the Owner to amend License Agreements to reflect the betterment(s). 3. Utility betterment work shall not impact the design of any other element or feature of the Project Work. O. Obtain written approval by the respective Third Parties of all as-built or record construction plans for which the Contractor has been responsible. 3.07 UTILITY DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND REFERENCES A. Perform all required utility work in accordance with the relevant requirements of the standards listed in this Specification section, the Contract Documents, and Utility Company. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain clarification of any unresolved ambiguity in standards before proceeding with design or construction. 3.08 FAILURE OF UTILITY COMPANIES TO COOPERATE A. The Contractor shall make diligent efforts to obtain the cooperation of each Utility Company as necessary for the Project. If the Contractor becomes aware that a Utility Company is not cooperating in providing needed work or approvals, then the Contractor shall notify Owner immediately of such problem. After such notice, the Contractor shall continue to diligently seek to obtain the Utility Company’s cooperation and shall assist Owner as reasonably requested by Owner with regard to the problem. 3.09 CHANGES IN SCOPE A. If any utility requiring relocation is not indicated at all in the Contract Documents or if any underground utility requiring relocation is not accurately indicated therein then the Contractor shall be entitled to a change order with respect to any increase in the Contractor’s costs of performing the Work that is directly attributable thereto. B. If any underground utility identified in the Contract Documents as requiring relocation is not accurately indicated therein and if as a result it is not necessary to relocate such utility or there is a reduction in the Work necessary to relocate such utility or drainage facility, then the Owner shall be entitled to a change order reducing the total Contract amount to reflect the value of the reduction in the Work directly attributable to such correction in location and/or size. C. Change in Allocation of Duties between the Contractor and the Utility Company Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-17 1. Change orders resulting from a reallocation of duties between the Contractor and the Utility Company from that found in the Contract shall be governed the following: a. Change in Allocation of Duties from the Utility Company to the Contractor: If the Contract Documents allocates to the Utility Company the responsibility to perform design and construction for the relocation of a particular utility and after the execution of the Agreement the Owner gives notice to the Contractor that all or part of such Work is being reallocated to the Contractor, then the scope of the Contractor’s duties for such utility shall be expanded to include those duties specifically reallocated to the Contractor as described in said notice. The Contractor shall be entitled to a change order increasing the total Contract amount to reflect the Contractor’s additional costs incurred directly attributable to such additional duties. If the change in allocation of duties impacts the baseline schedule critical path an adjustment in time may be included in the change order. b. Change in Allocation of Duties from Contractor to the Utility Company: If the Contract Documents allocates to the Contractor the responsibility to perform construction for the relocation of a particular utility and after execution of the Agreement the Owner gives notice to the Contractor that all or part of such Work is being reallocated to the Utility Company, then the scope of the Contractor’s duties with respect to such utility shall be reduced to exclude those duties specifically reallocated to the Utility Company as described in said notice. The Owner shall be entitled to issue a change order reducing the total Contract amount to reflect the value of the reduction in the Work directly attributable to such reduced duties. If the change in allocation of duties impacts the baseline schedule critical path an adjustment in time may be included in the change order. D. Additional Restrictions on Change Orders 1. Whenever the Contractor claims entitlement to a change order in addition to all the other requirements and limitations contained in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear the burden of proving that the utility relocation could not reasonably have been avoided and of proving the amount of any costs and/or delays claimed by the Contractor. 2. In cases where the Contractor is entitled to a change order, the change order shall allow a price increase only for the incremental costs arising from the circumstances giving rise to such change order. 3. In no event will the Contractor be awarded any increase in the total Contract amount for any increased costs of coordinating with the affected utility or drainage facility owner on account of any utility relocation for which a change order is merited. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-18 4. In general, the parties anticipate that change orders for utility relocations will be executed as the changes occur. However, the Owner and the Contractor may agree to consolidate certain changes into a single change order. The Contractor’s markups shall be deemed to include compensation for all costs associated with any time differential between performance of the relocation work and the date of issuance of the change order. 5. The Contractor shall not be entitled to a change order for increased costs of the Work resulting from or for any extension of time for delays associated with any temporary relocations of utilities implemented for the convenience of the Contractor's own construction operations. 6. The provisions of this Specification section shall not apply to any increase or reduction in costs to either the Contractor or Owner as a result of the following: a. An Owner-directed change; b. A necessary basic Project configuration change; or c. Any other material change in basic configuration or in the other Contract requirements. 7. Any increase or reduction in costs due to an Owner-directed change or necessary basic Project configuration change involving utilities shall be accounted for in the change order. 8. The Contractor will be entitled to the actual cost and time associated with replacement of a broken, malfunctioning, or defective valve only if Owner or Engineer orders the Contractor to make said replacement provided said valve(s) were not planned for replacement as part of the utility relocations described in the Contract. E. Change Orders Only as Specified 1. Excluding the work identified as “excluded from scope” herein, the Contractor has provided for all the Work described in this Specification and Contract Documents in the total Contract amount and the Contractor has determined that it is feasible to obtain all necessary relocations within the time deadlines of this Contract. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Contractor acknowledges and agrees to the following: a. Prior to execution of the Agreement, the Contractor analyzed the risks involved and in calculating the total Contract amount including adjustments which it deemed appropriate to account for the potential risks of additional costs and delays relating to relocations, including the following: 1) Inaccuracies in the Contract which do not merit change orders hereunder; and Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 12/6/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Utility Relocation Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 58 00-19 2) The possibility that Utility Companies may not have an incentive to cooperate with the Contractor in meeting the Contractor’s schedule and expediting the relocation process. 3.10 WORK BY OTHER CONTRACTORS AND AGENCIES A. The Owner reserves the right to contract with others to perform other or additional work on or near the site. The Contractor shall cooperate with such other contractors and interfacing parties to the extent reasonably necessary for the performance by such other contractors and interfacing parties of their work and shall cause its employees, agents, officers, and subcontractors and other persons for whom the Contractor may be contractually or legally responsible to so cooperate. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Product Requirements and Options Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 61 00-1 SECTION 01 61 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS AND OPTIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes general requirements for products, options for selecting products, and warranty requirements. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 01 75 00 – Checkout and Startup Procedures 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 1. Warranty Log Book a. Prepare warranty log book specifically for this Project. Submittal shall include a summary listing of all equipment and material warranties furnished in the Contract, date received, and start/end date of warranty period. Individual warranty documentation shall be provided in the submittal. b. Submit prior to submittal of final application for payment. 2. Patent Documentation a. Submit licensing arrangement and agreement documentation. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Products 1. Materials, equipment, machinery, components, fixtures, systems, and other goods incorporated in the Work. “Products” do not include machinery and equipment used for preparing, fabricating, conveying, erecting, or installing the Work. Products include Owner-furnished goods incorporated in the Work where use of such goods is specifically required in the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranties 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 05 - 0 4 - 2 0 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Product Requirements and Options Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 61 00-2 1. Additions or modifications to standard warranty requirements specified in the Contract Documents. 1.05 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Common Products 1. Provide products that have not been previously incorporated into another project or facility unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Provide products of the same generic kind from a single source. 3. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items shown, indicated, or required for a complete installation for the indicated use and performance. 4. Standard Products a. When available, and unless custom or non-standard options are specified or indicated, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 5. Visual Matching a. Where required in the Contract Documents, provide products that match referenced existing construction, approved mock-ups, or approved samples, as determined by Engineer. 6. Where the Contract Documents include the phrase “as selected” for product color, finish pattern, option, or similar phrase, provide products selected by Engineer as follows: a. Standard Range 1) Where the Contract Documents include the phrase “standard range of colors, patterns, textures” or similar phrase, provide color, pattern, density, or texture selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range 1) Where the Contract Documents include the phrase “full range of colors, patterns, textures” or similar phrase, Engineer will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer’s entire product line, including standard and premium items. B. Product Compatibility Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Product Requirements and Options Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 61 00-3 1. Similar products by the same Supplier shall be compatible with each other, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Provide products compatible with products previously selected or installed on the Project. C. Product Options 1. For products specified only by reference standard or description, without reference to Supplier, provide products meeting that standard, by a Supplier or from a source that complies with the Contract Documents. 2. For products specified by naming one or more products or Suppliers, provide the named products that comply with the Contract Documents, unless an “or equal” or substitute product is approved by Engineer. 3. For products specified by naming one or more products or Suppliers and the term, “or equal”, when Contractor proposes a product or Supplier as an “or equal”, submit to Engineer a request for approval of an “or equal” product or Supplier. 4. For products specified by naming only one product or manufacturer and followed by words indicating that no substitution is allowed, there is no option and no substitution will be allowed. D. Concerning Patents 1. Owner shall be provided a guarantee by Contractor and equipment Supplier that equipment and material furnished in accordance with the Contract Documents is not the subject of patent litigation. 2. Patent litigation or controversy shall include, but not limited to, the following: a. Actual furnished equipment and material the is subject or could be subject to patent litigation or is known to infringe on a patent. b. Furnished equipment and material that may result in a process that use of equipment and material in a manner that infringes upon or violates a patent. 3. When patent infringement may occur, Contractor and Supplier shall submit license arrangements among parties, including Contractor, Supplier, and patent owner (controller of patent) at a minimum, which shall permit use of equipment and material as specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Supplier shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer against all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to any infringement or patent rights or copyrights incident to the use of equipment and material specified in the Contract Documents and as required in General Conditions and as modified in the Supplemental Conditions. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Product Requirements and Options Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 61 00-4 E. “Or Equal” Products 1. For proposed products not named in the Contract Documents and considered as an “or equal” as defined in the General Conditions, request in writing Engineer’s approval of the “or equal”. Request for approval of an “or equal” product shall accompany the Shop Drawing or product data submittal for the proposed product and shall include: a. Contractor’s request that the proposed product be considered as an “or equal” in accordance with the General Conditions, accompanied by Contractor’s certifications required in the General Conditions. b. Documentation adequate to demonstrate that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that proposed product is consistent with the Contract Documents, and that proposed product will produce results and performance required in the Contract Documents, and that proposed product is compatible with other portions of the Work. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with the products and manufacturers named in the Contract Documents. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, performance and specific features and requirements shown or indicated. d. Evidence that proposed product manufacturer will furnish warranty equal to or better than specified, if any. e. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and physical addresses of installation along with the names, telephone numbers, email addresses and physical address of design professionals and owners associated with the referenced installation, if requested. f. Samples, if requested. g. Other information requested by Engineer. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranties specified for products shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, Contractor’s general warranty and guarantee and requirements for the required correction period as outlined in Section 00700. Disclaimers and limitations in specific product warranties do not limit Contractor’s general warranty and guarantee. 1. Product manufacturer’s warranty is preprinted written warranty published by product manufacturer and specifically endorsed by product manufacturer to Owner. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Product Requirements and Options Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 61 00-5 2. Equipment and material shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship, design, and/or materials for a period of one (1) year unless otherwise specified in the individual Specification Section for a Special Warranty. 3. Warranty period shall start on the date of the particular equipment and material is substantially complete, which includes requirements specified in Section 01 75 00 – Checkout and Startup Procedures for start-up certification and specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 4. Warranty requirements may be added to or modified in the individual Specification Sections. Special warranty is written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by product manufacturer’s warranty or to provide increased rights to Owner. 5. Special warranty information, if any, will be located in the Specification Section for that product. B. Requirements for Special Warranties 1. Provide written special warranty document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by product manufacturer and Owner. Submit draft warranty with submittals required for product. 2. Manufacturer’s Standard Form a. Form shall be modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed by product manufacturer and other parties as appropriate. 3. Specified Form a. When specified forms are included in the Contract Documents, prepare written document, properly executed by product manufacturer and Owner, using appropriate form. 4. Refer to Specifications for content and requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submit product manufacturer’s warranties and special warranties as submittals in accordance with Schedule of Submittals accepted by Engineer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Product Requirements and Options Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 61 00-6 PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Product Delivery Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 65 00-1 SECTION 01 65 00 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes general requirements for shipping, delivering, and handling materials and equipment. B. Make all arrangements for transporting, delivering, and handling of materials and equipment required for prosecution and completion of the Work. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to individual Specification Sections for submittal requirements relative to delivery and handling materials and equipment. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 SHIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. When practical, factory-assemble materials and equipment. Match mark or tag separate parts and assemblies to facilitate field assembly. Cover machined and unpainted parts that may be damaged by the elements with strippable, protective coating. B. Package materials and equipment to facilitate handling, and protect materials and equipment from damage during shipping, handling, and storage. Mark or tag outside of each package or crate to indicate the associated purchase order number, bill of lading number, contents by name, Owner’s contract name and number, Contractor name, equipment number, and approximate weight. Include complete packing lists and bills of materials with each shipment. C. Protect materials and equipment from exposure to the elements and always keep thoroughly dry and dust-free. D. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. E. Lubricate bearings and other items requiring lubrication in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. F. Keep Engineer informed of delivery of all materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 05 - 0 4 - 2 0 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Product Delivery Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 65 00-2 G. Do not ship materials and equipment until: 1. Related Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals have been approved or accepted (as applicable) by Engineer, including, but not necessarily limited to, Submittals associated with the materials and equipment being delivered. 2. Manufacturer’s instructions for handling, storing, and installing the associated materials and equipment have been submitted to and accepted by Engineer in accordance with the Specifications. 3. Results of source quality control testing (factory testing), when required by the Contract Documents for the associated materials or equipment, have been reviewed and accepted by Engineer. 4. Facilities required for handling materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions are in place and available. 5. Required storage facilities have been provided. 3.02 DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS A. Scheduling and Timing of Deliveries 1. Arrange deliveries of materials and equipment in accordance with the accepted Progress Schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation. a. Equipment and material shall not be delivered to the Site prior to 90 days in advance of scheduled installation. b. Partial payment requests will not be processed for materials delivered prior to 90 days before installation or for materials that are improperly stored. 2. Schedule deliveries to minimize space required for and duration of storage of materials and equipment at the Site or delivery location, as applicable. 3. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflicting with the Work and conditions at Site, and to accommodate the following: a. Work of other contractors and Owner. b. Owner’s operations and maintenance. c. Storage space limitations. d. Availability of equipment and personnel for handling materials and equipment. e. Owner’s use of premises. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Product Delivery Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 65 00-3 4. Deliver materials and equipment to the Site during regular working hours. 5. Deliver materials and equipment to avoid delaying the Work and the Project, including work of other contractors, as applicable. Deliver anchor system materials, including anchor bolts to be embedded in concrete or masonry, in ample time to avoid delaying the Work. B. Deliveries 1. Deliver shipments with Contractor’s name, Subcontractor’s name (if applicable), Site name, Project name, and contract designation clearly marked. 2. Site may be listed as the “ship to” or “delivery” address; but Owner shall not be listed as recipient of shipment unless otherwise directed in writing by Engineer. 3. Provide Contractor’s telephone number to shipper; do not provide Owner’s telephone number. 4. Arrange for deliveries while Contractor’s personnel are at the Site. Contractor shall receive and coordinate shipments upon delivery. Shipments delivered to the Site when Contractor is not present will be refused by Owner, and Contractor shall be responsible for the associated delays and additional costs, if incurred. C. Containers and Marking 1. Have materials and equipment delivered in manufacturer’s original, unopened, labeled containers. 2. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of materials and equipment to identify materials and equipment, to allow easy accumulation of parts, and to facilitate assembly. D. Inspection of Deliveries 1. Immediately upon delivery, Contractor shall inspect shipment to verify that: a. Materials and equipment comply with the Contract Documents and approved or accepted (as applicable) submittals. b. Quantities are correct. c. Materials and equipment are undamaged. d. Containers and packages are intact and labels are legible. e. Materials and equipment are properly protected. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Product Delivery Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 65 00-4 2. Promptly remove damaged materials and equipment from the Site and expedite delivery of new, undamaged materials and equipment, and remedy incomplete or lost materials and equipment to furnish materials and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents, to avoid delaying progress of the Work. 3. Advise Engineer in writing when damaged, incomplete, or defective materials and equipment are delivered, and advise Engineer of the associated impact on the Progress Schedule. 3.03 HANDLING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle materials and equipment, including those furnished by Owner, by methods that prevent soiling or damaging materials and equipment and packaging. B. Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent scraping, marring, and otherwise damaging materials and equipment and surrounding surfaces. C. Handle materials and equipment by methods that prevent bending and overstressing. D. Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points. E. Handle materials and equipment in a safe manner and as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent damage. Do not drop, roll, or skid materials and equipment off delivery vehicles or at other times during handling. Hand-carry or use suitable handling equipment. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Product Storage and Protection Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 66 00-1 SECTION 01 66 00 PRODUCT STORAGE AND PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes general requirements for storing and protecting equipment and materials. Detailed storage and protection requirements are included in the applicable specification section. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 65 00 – Product Delivery Requirements PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Store and protect materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and the Contract Documents. B. Make all arrangements and provisions necessary for, and pay all costs for, storing materials and equipment. C. Do not store unnecessary equipment and materials at the Site. 3.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipping, handling, and storage, in accordance with Section 01 65 00 – Product Delivery Requirements. B. Do not open manufacturer’s containers until time of installation, unless recommended by the manufacturer, directed by Engineer, or otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. 3.03 STORAGE LOCATION AND CONFIGURATION A. Construction equipment, and materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be placed to avoid injuring the Work and existing facilities and property, and so that free access is maintained at all times to all parts of the Work and to public utility installations in vicinity of the Work. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Product Storage and Protection Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 66 00-2 B. Store materials and equipment neatly and compactly in locations that cause minimum inconvenience to Owner, other contractors, public travel, and owners, tenants, and occupants of adjoining property. C. Arrange storage in a manner to allow easy access for inspection. D. Areas available at the Site for storing materials and equipment are shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or as approved by Engineer. E. Do not store materials or equipment in structures being constructed unless approved by Engineer in writing. F. Do not use lawns or other private property for storage without written permission of the owner or other person in possession or control of such premises. G. Prevent structures from being loaded with a weight that endangers its security and/or safety of persons. H. Do not store equipment and materials within 10 feet of fire hydrants. I. Always keep gutters, drainage channels, and inlets unobstructed. J. Store all materials and equipment off the ground (or floor) on raised supports such as skids or pallets. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Store materials and equipment to become Owner’s property to facilitate their inspection and ensure preservation of quality and fitness of the Work, including proper protection against damage by freezing, moisture, and high ambient temperatures. Store in indoor, climate-controlled storage areas all materials and equipment subject to damage by moisture, humidity, heat, cold, and other elements, unless otherwise acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor shall be fully responsible for loss or damage, including theft, to stored materials and equipment. C. Contractor shall provide temporary storage containers/facilities, if required, to protect equipment and materials at the Site. D. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Painted equipment surfaces that are damaged or marred shall be repainted in their entirety in accordance with equipment manufacturer and paint manufacturer requirements, to the satisfaction of Engineer. 3.05 SPECIFIC STORAGE REQUIREMENTS A. Uncovered 05 - 0 4 - 2 0 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Product Storage and Protection Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 66 00-3 1. The following types of materials may be stored outdoors without cover on supports so there is no contact with the ground: a. Piping, except polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or chlorinated PVC (CPVC) pipe. B. Covered 1. The following materials and equipment may be stored outdoors on supports and completely covered with covering impervious to water: a. Grout and mortar materials. b. Rough lumber. c. PVC and CPVC pipe. 2. Tie down covers with rope, and slope covering to prevent accumulation of water. C. Fully Protected 1. All materials and equipment not named as uncovered or covered in this Section, shall be stored on supports in buildings or trailers that have concrete or wooden flooring, roof, and fully closed walls on all sides. Covering with plastic sheeting or similar material in space without floor, roof, and walls is not acceptable. Comply with the following: a. Provide heated storage for materials and equipment that could be damaged by low temperatures or freezing. b. Provide air-conditioned storage for materials and equipment that could be damaged by high temperatures. c. Protect mechanical and electrical equipment from being contaminated by dust, dirt, and moisture. d. Maintain humidity at levels recommended by manufacturers of electrical and electronic equipment. e. Energize space heaters for electrical equipment and material. D. Maintenance of Storage 1. On scheduled basis, periodically inspect stored materials and equipment to ensure the following: a. Condition and status of storage facilities is adequate to provide required storage conditions. b. Required environmental conditions are maintained on a continual basis. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Product Storage and Protection Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 66 00-4 c. Materials and equipment exposed to elements are not adversely affected. 3.06 RECORDS A. Keep an up-to-date account of materials and equipment in storage to facilitate preparation of Applications for Payment if the Contract Documents provide for payment for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Field Engineering Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 71 23-1 SECTION 01 71 23 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT 1. Provide field engineering and professional services of the types indicated for the Project, including: Furnishing civil, structural, and other professional engineering services specified or required to execute Contractor’s construction methods. 2. Developing and making all detail surveys and measurements required for construction. 3. Keeping a transit, theodolite, or total station (theodolite with electronic distance measurement device); leveling instrument; and related implements such as survey rods and other measurement devices, at the Site at all times, and having a skilled instrument person available when necessary for laying out the Work. 4. Being solely responsible for all locations, dimensions and levels. No data other than Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order shall justify departure from dimensions and levels required by the Contract Documents. 5. Rectifying all Work improperly installed because of not maintaining, not protecting, or removing without authorization established reference points, stakes, marks, and monuments. 6. Providing such facilities and assistance necessary for Engineer to check lines and grade points placed by Contractor. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 25 00  Substitution Procedures B. Section 01 26 00  Contract Modification Procedures C. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures D. Section 01 61 00  Product Requirements and Options E. Section 01 78 39  Project Record Documents 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 07 1 5 2 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Field Engineering Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 71 23-2 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 1. Field Engineer’s qualification statements 2. Surveying a. Plan for conducting survey Work, submitted ten days prior to beginning of survey Work. b. Field books after completing survey Work. c. Survey in accordance with this Section. d. Certification that elevations and locations of Work are in conformance with Contract Documents, with explanations of deviations, signed by Contractor or Contractor’s surveyor. e. Surveyor’s qualification statements PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 DEPARTURES FROM CONTRACT DRAWINGS: A. Contract Drawings show the extent and arrangement of the Work. B. Notify Engineer of departures from the Drawings that Contractor deems required for incorporation of the Work at the Site in accordance with Section 01 26 00  Contract Modification Procedures. C. Provide field engineering services for equipment and materials that require modifications to existing structures, auxiliary equipment, piping, and electrical controls that are not indicated for modifications in the Contract Documents. D. Structural Design Criteria 1. Structural design in the Contract Documents of facilities, structures, supports, roofs and floors are based on typical weights for equipment and materials and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Field Engineering Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 71 23-3 2. Notify Engineer of equipment and materials to be considered as substitutions and “or equals” in accordance with Section 01 25 00  Substitution Procedures and Section 01 61 00  Product Requirements and Options. 3. Provide services for incorporation of equipment and materials that exceed structural design criteria at no additional cost to Owner. 3.02 SERVICES AND RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor’s Field Engineer: 1. Employ and retain field engineer at the Site capable of performing field engineering tasks required, including: a. Provide reports to Engineer on the Work. b. Check formwork, reinforcing, inserts, structural steel, bolts, sleeves, piping and other equipment and materials for conformance with Contract Documents. c. Maintain field office files and drawings, record documents, and coordination with Subcontractors. d. Prepare layout and coordination drawings for construction operations. e. Check and coordinate Work for conflicts, interferences, and discrepancies with notification to Engineer. f. Cooperate with Engineer and Owner in observing the Work and field inspections. g. Review and coordinate the Work with Shop Drawings and other submittals. B. Contractor’s Surveyor: 1. Employ or retain the services, as needed, of a surveyor with experience and capability of performing surveying and layout tasks required in the Contract Documents and as required for the Work. Surveyor's tasks include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: a. Providing required surveying equipment including transit or theodolite, level, stakes, and surveying accessories. b. Establishing required lines for constructing all facilities, structures, pipelines, and site improvements. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Field Engineering Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 71 23-4 c. Preparing and maintaining professional quality, accurate, well organized, legible notes of all measurements and calculations made while surveying and laying out the Work. d. Complying with requirements of the Contract Documents relative to surveying and related work. 3.03 SURVEYING A. Establish baselines for location of pipeline, equipment, materials and structures of the Work with bench marks and batter boards adjacent to Work. B. Provide detailed surveys necessary for the Work including, but not limited to, slope stakes, batter boards, working points, lines and elevations. C. Specific surveying 1. [add as needed] 3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Provide Project record documents for field engineering and surveying in accordance with Section 01 78 39  Project Record Documents. B. [add as needed] 3.05 PROTECTION A. Preserve and protect existing benchmarks, reference points, property markers, monuments, and stakes. B. Re-establish damaged, destroyed, or lost benchmarks, reference points, property markers, monuments, and/or stakes. C. Remove and re-install equipment and material installed based on Contractor-established benchmarks, reference points, property markers, monuments, and/or stakes that have been damaged, destroyed, or lost at no additional cost to Owner. D. Provide computations and calculations to establish location of replacement Work. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Protection of Work and Property Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 71 33-1 SECTION 01 71 33 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Protect existing and installed utilities, structures, equipment, and materials from damage as necessary to complete the Work. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 26 00  Contract Modification Procedures 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Existing utilities 1. Both publicly-owned and privately-owned utilities such as, but are not limited to, electric power and lighting, telephone, water, gas, storm drains, process lines, sanitary sewers and all appurtenant structures. B. Surface structures 1. Existing buildings, structures, and other facilities at or above ground surface, including their foundations or any extension below ground surface. Surface structures include, but are not limited to, buildings, tanks, walls, channels, open drainage, exposed piping and utilities, poles, exposed wires, posts, signs, markers, curbs, walks, fencing, and other facilities visible at or above ground surface. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Contractor shall be responsible for taking all precautions, providing all programs, and taking all actions necessary to protect the Work and all public and private property and facilities from damage, as specified in the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and this Section. B. To prevent damage, injury, or loss, Contractor’s actions shall include the following: 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Protection of Work and Property Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 71 33-2 1. Storing apparatus, materials, supplies, and equipment in an orderly, safe manner that does not unduly interfere with progress of the Work or work of other contractors or utility companies. 2. Providing suitable storage facilities for equipment and materials subject to damage or degradation by exposure to weather, theft, breakage, or other cause. 3. Placing upon the Work or any part thereof only loads consistent with the safety and integrity of that portion of the Work and existing construction. 4. Frequently removing and disposing of refuse, rubbish, scrap materials, and debris caused by Contractor’s operations so that, at all times, the Site is safe, orderly, and workmanlike in appearance. C. Contractor has full responsibility for preserving public and private property and facilities on and adjacent to the Site. Direct or indirect damage done by, or on account of, any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct by Contractor in executing the Work, shall be restored by Contractor, at his expense to condition equal to that existing before damage was done. D. Comply with safety regulations required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with and correct unsafe conditions created or caused by Contractor’s personnel. In the event Contractor fails to comply, Owner receives the right to take necessary measures to correct conditions or practices for reimbursement by Contractor. 3.02 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES AND STRUCTURES A. General 1. Location of Existing Utilities and Structures a. Confirm and verify location of existing utilities and structures at the Site prior to commencing the Work. b. Notify and obtain approval from authority having jurisdiction prior to performing the Work in the vicinity of the existing utilities and structures. 2. Methods and procedures for protection shall be to Engineer’s satisfaction and be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to proceeding with the Work. 3. Provide temporary support and protection, as required, to existing utilities and structures during the Work, including excavation. a. Temporary support and protection of existing utilities shall be provided in accordance with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. 03 2 6 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Protection of Work and Property Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 71 33-3 4. Contractor shall be responsible for costs incurred for temporary support or protection provided by a third-party or authority having jurisdiction to ensure safety of the existing utility, Owner, and public and private parties. B. Existing Buried Utilities 1. Perform field investigations to identify conflicts or interferences between existing utilities and utility Work prior to excavation. a. Perform investigation of conflicts and interferences on Site locations, elevations, slopes, etc. of the existing utilities identified during the field investigations. b. Notify Engineer and Owner in writing of identified conflicts or interferences. Do not proceed with the Work until written authorization is provided by the Engineer. c. Handle identified conflicts and interferences in accordance with the Contract Documents. If required, modify the Contract Documents in accordance with Section 01 26 00  Contract Modification Procedures. 2. Perform the Work to prevent disruption of existing service and damage to existing utilities. a. Provide temporary connections as required to provide un-interrupted service of existing utilities. b. Repair damage to existing utilities as directed by the Engineer or the authority having jurisdiction at Contractor’s own expense. c. Contractor shall be responsible for damages and repair costs to the authority having jurisdiction if third-party or authority having jurisdiction personnel repair damaged existing utilities. C. Protection of Existing Structures: 1. Protect existing surface structures in place and protect from direct or indirect injury located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work as required by the party owning or controlling such structure or facility. 2. Contractor shall bear all risks attending the presence or proximity of all surface structures within or adjacent to limits of the Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for damage and expense for direct or indirect injury caused by his Work to structures and facilities. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Protection of Work and Property Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 71 33-4 4. Immediately repair damage caused by Work to the satisfaction of owner of damaged structure or facility at no cost to the Owner. 5. Provide temporary weather protection for existing structures and buildings where exterior walls or roofs are modified or disturbed in the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for damages due to inadequate protection of existing structures and building. D. Relocation of Surface Structures 1. Existing surface facilities including, but not limited to, guard rails, posts, guard cables, signs, poles, markers, curbs, and fencing, that are temporarily removed to facilitate the Work shall be replaced and restored to their original condition at Contractor’s expense. 2. Specific requirements: a. ________________________. 3.03 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Protect installed equipment and materials to prevent damage, injury, or loss from subsequent operations including, but not limited, providing necessary traffic control and coverings. Remove protection facilities when no longer needed prior to completion of the Work. 3.04 PROTECTION DURING INCLEMENT WEATHER A. Do not perform Work during inclement or unsuitable weather that will affect the quality of the completed Work. B. Contractor shall take necessary precautions in the event of impending inclement weather to protect equipment, materials and Work from damage or deterioration due to floods, driving rain, wind, or snow storms. 1. Owner reserves the right to require additional protection measures beyond Contractor’s proposed protection measures to protect the Work. 2. Contractor shall not claim additional compensation for additional protection measures required by Owner nor for damages to equipment, material, or Work due to the inclement weather. C. Stop Work when directed by the Engineer and protect new Work by protective covering during rain storms for, but not limited to, the following: 1. Concrete mixing and placement. 2. Paving placement. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Protection of Work and Property Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 71 33-5 3. Masonry installation. 4. Buried piping, valve and appurtenance installation. 5. Additional inclement weather requirements and limitations are specified in individual Specification Sections. 3.05 REPORTING OF ACCIDENTS A. Immediately report, in writing, to Engineer and Owner accidents out of, or in conjunction with, the performance of Work. 1. Accident reporting includes those accidents on Site and adjacent to Site, which cause death, personal injury, or property damage. 2. Written report shall provide full details and witness statements. 3. If claim is made against Contractor, Supplier, or Subcontractor due to accident, Contractor shall promptly report facts, in writing, to Engineer and Owner, with full account of the claim. B. Immediately report death, serious injury, or serious damage by telephone or messenger to Engineer and Owner. 3.06 BARRICADES AND WARNING SIGNALS A. Where the Work is performed on or adjacent to roadway, access road, right-of-way, or public place: 1. Provide barricades, fences, lights, warning signs, danger signals, watchmen, and take other precautionary measures for protecting persons, property, and the Work. 2. Paint barricades to be visible at night. 3. From sunset to sunrise, furnish and maintain at least one light at each barricade. 4. Erect sufficient barricades to keep vehicles from being driven on or into Work under construction. 5. Furnish watchmen in sufficient numbers to protect the Work. B. Provide temporary barricades to protect personnel and property for Work not in or adjacent to vehicular travel areas, including indoor work, in accordance with Laws and Regulations. C. Contractor’s responsibility for maintaining temporary barricades, signs, lights, and for providing watchmen shall continue until the Work is accepted in accordance with the Contract Documents. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Protection of Work and Property Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 71 33-6 END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Execution of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 00-1 SECTION 01 73 00 EXECUTION OF WORK PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Provide labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals shown, specified, and required for execution of the Work as specified in this Section, including the following: 1. Construction Electronic Documentation 2. General requirements for demolition as specified in Section 02 41 00 – Demolition. 3. Installation 4. General requirements for installation of equipment and material. Additional installation requirements are included in the individual Specification Sections. 5. Requirements for cutting and coring, and rough and finish patching of holes and openings in existing construction. Provide cutting, coring, fitting, and patching, including attendant excavation and fill, required to complete the Work, and to: a. Remove and replace defective Work. b. Remove samples of installed Work as specified or required for testing. c. Remove construction required to perform required alterations or additions to existing work. d. Connect to completed Work not performed in proper sequence. e. Remove or relocate existing utilities and pipes that obstruct the Work in locations where connections must be made. f. Make connections or alterations to existing or new facilities. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS 1. Section 01 14 00  Coordination 2. Section 01 51 00  Temporary Utilities 3. Section 01 57 00  Temporary Controls 4. Section 01 61 00  Product Requirements and Options Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Execution of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 00-2 5. Section 01 66 00  Product Storage and Protection Requirements 6. Section 01 74 00  Cleaning and Waste Management 7. Section 01 79 00  Instruction of Owner’s Personnel 8. Section 02 41 00 – Demolition 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. 29 CFR 1910, OSHA. B. ANSI A10.2, Safety Code for Building Construction 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. “Manufacturer’s installation instructions” includes manufacturer’s written instructions; drawings; illustrative, wiring, and schematic diagrams; diagrams identifying external connections; and other such information pertaining to installation of equipment and materials. Installation instructions are printed instructions, including those attached to the equipment and materials, all inclusive. B. “Salvage” items are equipment and materials shown on the Contract Documents for selective removal by the Contractor to furnish to the Owner. Contractor shall be responsible for removal, handling, and depositing of equipment and material to location designated by Owner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Action/Informational Submittals 1. Construction electronic documentation as specified in this Section. a. Documentation shall be time stamped for verification, including date and time. b. Documentation shall be organized in a logical manner, such as by structure, building, physical site location, etc. for easy of comparison. c. Photographic documentation shall be high resolution electronic versions. d. Documentation shall be submitted to Engineer for review and approval prior to commence Work and at completion of the Work. 2. Demolition Plan: Submit detailed description of methods, equipment, and sequence for demolition Work, including means of ensuring stability of structures during demolition activities. 3. Cutting and Patching Request Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Execution of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 00-3 a. Submit written request to Engineer, well in advance of executing cutting or alteration that affects one or more of the following: 1) Design function or intent of Project. 2) Work of Owner or other contractors. 3) Structural value or integrity of an element of the Project. 4) Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements or systems. 5) Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational elements. 6) Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. b. Request shall include: 1) Identification of Project and contract name and number. 2) Description of affected Work of Contractor and work of others (if any). 3) Necessity for cutting. 4) Effect on work of Owner, other contractors (if any), and on structural or weatherproof integrity of Project. 5) Description of proposed Work, including scope of cutting and patching; trades who will be executing the Work; products proposed to be used; extent of refinishing; schedule of operations; alternatives to cutting and patching, if any. 6) Designation of entity responsible for cost of cutting and patching, when applicable. 7) Written permission of other contractors (if any) whose work will be impacted. 4. Recommendation Regarding Cutting and Patching a. Should conditions of work, or schedule, indicate a change of materials or methods, submit written recommendation to Engineer including: 1) Conditions indicating change. 2) Recommendations for alternative materials or methods. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Execution of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 00-4 3) Items required with substitution request, in accordance with the substitution request requirements of the Contract Documents and Section 01 61 00  Product Requirements and Options. 5. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for the protective compound to be applied to core-drilled surfaces and cut concrete surfaces, as well as means of protecting exposed reinforcement or other metal embedments. 6. Informational Submittal: Submit written indication designating the day and time that the construction associated with cutting and patching will be uncovered, to allow observation. Do not begin cutting or patching operations until submittal is accepted by Engineer. 7. Comply with submittal requirements of individual Specification Sections for patching materials. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General 1. Provide materials and products in accordance with the individual Specification Sections and the Contract Documents. 2. Provide materials and products that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to fullest extent possible for exposed surfaces. 3. If not indicated in the Contract Documents, provide materials and products that are identical to existing materials and products affected by the Work. 4. If identical materials and products are unavailable, provide materials and products that shall equal or exceed performance requirements of existing materials and products. B. Protective Coating Applied to Core-Drilled Surfaces and Cut Concrete Surfaces 1. All concrete surfaces exposed due to cutting or core drilling shall be coated with an epoxy resin coating such as Sikagard 62 by Sika Corporation, Durakote 240 by Tamms Industries or approved equal. 2. Reinforcement or other metal embedment exposed by concrete cutting or core drilling shall be burned back a minimum of ½ inch below surface and resulting void shall be filled with an epoxy resin binder. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Execution of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 00-5 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Coordination 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate Work that must be performed with or before the Work specified in this Section. 2. Notify other contractors in advance of Work for connections to existing facilities to prevent delay of the Work. 3. Remove and dispose of equipment and materials indicated for demolition on the Contract Documents, unless indicated as salvage items for the Owner. Contractor shall obtain ownership of removed equipment and materials following Engineer and Owner approval. Disposal of equipment and materials shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Sequencing 1. Remove and demolish equipment and materials in sequence specified in Section 01 14 00  Coordination and following approval by Engineer and Owner. 2. Replace equipment and materials removed without proper authorization from Engineer, which are necessary for the operation of the existing facilities. Re- installation of equipment and materials shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no cost to the Owner C. Title to Equipment and Materials 1. Equipment and materials indicated for demolition and removal in the Contract Documents, and not designated as Owner’s salvaged items, shall become the Contractor’s property following removal from the Site. Contractor shall be responsible for legally disposing of the equipment and material. 2. Contractor shall have no right or title to any of the equipment, materials, or other items to be removed until the elements have been removed from the Site. 3. Do not sell or assign or attempt to sell or assign any interest in the equipment, materials, or other items until removal from Site. 4. Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner because of the absence of equipment, fixtures, and materials. D. Salvage Equipment and Materials Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Execution of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 00-6 1. Contract Documents indicate equipment and materials that shall be retained by Owner. Owner has the right to request any demolished equipment and materials be retained at their discretion. 2. Move salvaged equipment and materials to storage areas located at the Site as instructed by Owner. 3. Architectural equipment and materials may be salvaged for incorporation into the Work when approved by Engineer. E. Use of Explosives 1. Do not use explosives or blasting equipment and material in the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. F. Site Conditions 1. Owner does not assume responsibility for the actual condition of structures and equipment to be demolished and removed. 2. Existing Site conditions shall be maintained to the greatest extent possible by the Owner to the time of Notice to Proceed. 3. Perform investigations, explorations, and probes as necessary at the Site prior to initiating demolition Work to ascertain any required protective measures before proceeding with demolition and removal. Contractor shall give particular attention to shoring and bracing requirements to prevent damage to the Work and existing structures. 4. Verify measurements, dimensions and other conditions of each existing structure, system, equipment, and material indicated in the Contract Documents for new Work prior to ordering equipment and materials. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTATION A. Pre-Construction Documentation 1. Take photographic and video documentation of the Site where Work is being performed. Engineer and Owner reserve the right to be present during documentation. 2. Provide both photographic and video documentation at grade-level and aerial of the Site prior to commence Work. 3. Submit pre-construction documentation to Engineer and Owner for review. Contractor, Engineer, and Owner shall visit Site to field verify electronic documentation prior to commencing the Work. Site visit verification shall establish existing conditions prior to commencing Work. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Execution of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 00-7 B. Construction Progress Documentation 1. Document Work progress at locations and construction as directed by Engineer, at a minimum. 2. Provide electronic documentation prior to and following any shutdown, switchover, demolition, de-commissioning, cutting, patching, repair, etc. Engineer and Owner reserve the right to be present during documentation. 3. Document following exposure of buried utilities, piping, valve, appurtenances, and other underground elements. 4. Engineer reserves the right to provide construction progress documentation to confirm Contractor electronic documentation. C. Post-Construction Documentation 1. Take photographic and video documentation of the Site where Work has been completed and prior to Substantial Completion or partial utilization by Owner. Engineer and Owner reserve the right to be present during documentation. 2. Provide both photographic and video documentation at grade-level and aerial of the Site following completion of the Work. 3.03 DEMOLITION A. General 1. Demolition Work shall comply with the applicable provisions and recommendation of ANSI A10.2, Safety Code for Building Construction, all governing codes, and as specified in this Section. 2. Furnish competent and experienced personnel for the various type of demolition and removal Work. Demolition and removal Work shall be performed with regard to the safety of Owner employees, individuals at the Site, and the public. 3. Confirm absence of embedded utilities prior to cutting, coring, or demolishing existing concrete and facilities. Verification shall be performed by portable x-ray, ground penetrating radar, or other non-invasive methods. a. Notify Engineer and Owner if embedded utilities are located during the investigation. Contractor shall clearly mark and document location of embedded utilities prior to performing the Work. b. Contractor shall be responsible for repair and damages caused by exploration, investigation, and performance of the Work at no additional cost to Owner. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Execution of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 00-8 4. Remove temporary work, such as enclosures, signs, guards, etc. when such temporary Work is no longer required or when directed at the completion of the Work. 5. Perform patching, restoration and Work in accordance with individual Specification Sections and details shown on Contract drawings. 6. Contractor shall be responsible for damage caused by demolition Work to existing structures, equipment and materials indicated for reuse or to remain at no additional cost to Owner. 7. Maintain a clean working environment during the demolition Work in accordance with Section 01 74 00  Cleaning and Waste Management. 8. Proceed with the demolition work in a sequence designed to maintain the plant in operation in accordance with Section 01 14 00 – Coordination with Owner’s Operations. 9. Excavation caused by demolition shall be backfilled with fill free from rubbish and debris. Select fill or structural fill shall be used where specifically required on Contract Drawings. 10. All debris resulting from the demolition and removal work shall be disposed of by the Contractor at a properly permitted facility as part of the work of this Contract. All regulations covering material handling and disposal shall be followed. Material designated by the Engineer to be salvaged shall be stored on the construction site as directed. All other material shall be disposed of off-site by the Contractor at his expense. Burning of any debris resulting from the demolition will not be permitted at the site. B. Protection during Demolition 1. Provide, erect, and maintain catch platforms, lights, barriers, weather protection, warning signs and other items as required for proper protection of the public, occupants of the building, personnel engaged in demolition Work, and adjacent construction. 2. Provide and maintain weather protection at exterior openings to fully protect the interior premises against damage from the elements until such openings are closed by the Work. 3. Provide and maintain temporary protection of the existing structure designated to remain where demolition, removal and Work is being done, connections made, materials handled, or equipment moved. Temporary protection shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 71 33  Protection of Work and Property. 4. Take necessary precautions to prevent dust from rising by wetting demolished masonry, concrete, plaster, and similar debris. Unaltered portions of the existing Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Execution of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 00-9 buildings affected by the operations in the Contract Documents shall be protected by dust proof partitions and other adequate means. Dust control shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 57 00  Temporary Controls. 5. Provide adequate fire protection in accordance with Section 01 51 00  Temporary Utilities and authorities having jurisdiction. 6. Perform the demolition Work with minimum traffic interference. Do not close or obstruct walkways, passageways, or stairways. Do not store or place materials in passageways, stairs, or other means of egress. 7. Minimize disturbances to exterior walls and roofs to small sections that are readily repaired and patched to maintain watertight conditions in existing structures and buildings. C. Performance of Demolition 1. Equipment, piping, valves, and appurtenances: a. Drain equipment, piping, valves, and appurtenances prior to demolition Work. Contractor shall be responsible for collection, transport, and disposal of drained contents at no additional cost to the Owner. b. Provide line stops, plugs, blind flanges, etc. for equipment, piping, valves, and appurtenance required to remain in service during the Project. Contractor shall provide temporary or permanent supports in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Supports, pedestals and anchors shall be removed with the equipment and piping unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents. d. Concrete bases, anchor bolts and other supports shall be removed to approximately 1 inch below the surrounding finished area and the recesses shall be filled with epoxy resin binder. e. Wall and roof openings shall be closed, and damaged surfaces shall be patched to match the adjacent areas, in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer. f. Wall sleeves, wall pipes, and wall castings shall be plugged or blanked off in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer. g. Openings in concrete shall be closed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer. 2. Electrical components and equipment Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Execution of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 00-10 a. De-energize panelboards, lighting fixtures, switches, circuit breakers, electrical conduits, motors, limit switches, pressure switches, instrumentation such as flow, level and/or other meters, wiring, and similar electrical equipment prior to removal. b. Relocate or isolate electrical equipment and materials that serve equipment, piping, valves, and appurtenance that are to remain in service during the Project. Relocation or isolation Work shall be sequenced and scheduled in accordance with Section 01 14 00  Coordination with Owner’s Operations. 3. Reused and relocated equipment a. Receive approval from Engineer prior to removal and relocation of equipment and material. Equipment and materials removed by Contractor prior to Engineer’s approval that is required for Owner’s operation of the facility shall be reinstalled at no cost to the Owner. b. Prior to removal and relocation Work, equipment and materials indicated for reuse and relocation shall be operated by Owner with Contractor and Engineer present to witness existing functionality and operation. c. Provide personnel responsible for reinstallation of equipment and material for the removal Work. d. Contractor shall be responsible and provide storage and protection of equipment and materials in accordance with Section 01 66 00  Product Storage and Protection Requirements until relocation and reinstallation Work is performed. e. Provide replacement equipment and material that is damaged during the removal Work at new cost to the Owner. Contractor shall be responsible to provide same type, model, electrical components, etc. equipment and material as approved by Engineer and Owner. 4. Structural removal a. Provide and install temporary shoring, struts, and bracing required for the demolition Work to ensure stability during entire demolition process. b. Cut and remove structural material at the interface of demolition Work and the existing structural element. Cutting and removal shall occur in small sections, including masonry units, to prevent instability of structural elements. c. Patch, repair, and refinish adjacent surfaces that remain following demolition Work. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Execution of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 00-11 1) Adjacent surfaces shall be repaired and refinished to the condition prior to the demolition Work and in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2) Adjacent surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, grease, loose paint, etc., prior to refinishing. d. Limit cutting of existing roof areas designated to remain to the limits required for the proper installation of the Work. 1) Cut and remove insulation, joists, flashing, membranes, shingles, and metals, etc. in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer for installation of the Work. 2) Provide temporary weather tight protection as required until new roofing and flashings are installed. 5. Architectural repairs and removal Work, not specifically shown on the Drawings, may include, but not limited to, the following: a. Brickwork: Re-pointing; removing and replacing broken, cracked, disintegrating and missing materials. b. Windows: Removing cracked or disintegrating sealant material; replacing missing or broken glass; re-caulking and sealing frames; glazing sealants. c. Re-finishing: Removing rust, sealing, or peeling paint from surfaces by scraping, sanding or wire brushing; priming and repainting surfaces. d. Roofing: Patching and repairing membrane or built-up roofing; metal flashing repair; correcting roof pitch to eliminate ponding; cleaning and/or replacing roof drains. e. Masonry: Cutting and installing new expansion and control joints. f. Parapets: Removing and construction of new walls and copings; clean and patching of copings; replacing copings where broken. g. Concrete surfaces: Patching, cleaning, sealing and resurfacing floors, walls, lintels, sills, and trim. Replace lintels where broken. Patching or replacing broken, spalled, cracked and disintegrating concrete encased steel columns and piers. h. Openings: Cutting and modifying as required for new Work. Provide new lintels, doors, and frames. i. Doors: Patching and refinishing doors and frames. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Execution of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 00-12 j. Ceilings: Patching, refinishing, and replacing. k. Guards, handrails, and appurtenances: Cleaning and repainting steel materials. Replacing steel material with new aluminum material. l. Demolished Exterior Openings: Remove window sash, frame, sill, stool and trim at exterior doors indicated for enclosure and sealing. Provide brick and/or masonry block for closure and sealing. D. Maintenance during Demolition 1. Maintain the buildings, structures, and public properties free from accumulations of waste, debris and rubbish, generated by the demolition Work. 2. Provide cleaning and waste management of demolition equipment and materials in accordance with Section 01 74 00  Cleaning and Waste Management. 3.04 CUTTING AND CORING A. General 1. Notify Engineer in writing and receiving Engineer’s approval prior to cutting load bearing walls (concrete or masonry) and structural concrete floors. 2. Perform cutting and coring to limit extent of patching required. 3. Structural Elements: Do not cut or core structural elements in manner that would change structural element’s load-carrying capacity or load deflection ratio. 4. Operating Elements: Do not cut or core operating elements in manner that would reduce capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut or core operating elements or related components in manner that would increase maintenance requirements or decrease operational life or safety. 5. Replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and coring Work. Contractor shall use methods that do not void required or existing warranties. 6. Provide temporary or permanent bypass provisions prior to cutting existing pipe, conduit, ductwork, or other utilities serving facilities scheduled to be removed or relocated in accordance with the Contract Documents. 7. Inspection: Examine and prepare surfaces prior to commencing Work. Contractor shall report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 8. Preparation Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Execution of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 00-13 a. Provide temporary support required to maintain structural integrity, to protect adjacent Work from damage, and to support the element(s) to be cut or cored. b. Protection of Existing Construction During Cutting and Coring: 1) Protect existing structures, equipment, and materials during cutting and coring to prevent damage. 2) Provide protection from adverse weather conditions that will be exposed during cutting and coring Work. 3) Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 9. Restoration a. Clean equipment, materials, piping systems, valves, conduit and appurtenances that were damaged due to the Work prior to applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe coverings, including insulation, to original condition. B. Cutting 1. General a. Cut existing structures and appurtenances that provide surfaces for installation or repair of the Work. Cut existing construction using methods to minimize damage and disturbance to retained and adjoining construction elements. b. Cutting equipment used shall be hand or small power tools suitable for sawing or grinding. Avoid using hammering or chopping equipment for cutting Work. c. Cut holes and slots as small as possible and to size required for incorporation of the Work and in accordance with the Contract Documents. d. Cut or drill from exposed or finished side to concealed side to avoid marring finished surfaces. e. Provide adequate bracing of area to be cut prior to cutting. f. Provide equipment and material to remove cut spoils. g. Provide temporary protection for cut openings where and when Work is not being performed. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Execution of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 00-14 2. Concrete and Masonry a. Cut through concrete and masonry using concrete wall saw with diamond saw blades. b. Provide control for slurry generated during sawing on both sides of element being cut. c. After cutting concrete and before installing new Work on or through the opening, coat exposed concrete and steel with protective coating material specified in this Section. Apply protective coating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. C. Coring 1. Core-drill holes through concrete and masonry walls, slabs, or arches, in accordance with the Contract Documents, unless written authorization is furnished by Engineer. 2. Protection: Protect existing structures, equipment, materials, utilities, and adjacent areas from water and other damage by core-drilling Work. 3. Coring a. Perform coring with non-impact rotary tool using diamond core-drills. b. Size holes for pipe, conduit, sleeves, equipment, or mechanical seals, as required, to be installed through the penetration and in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. After core-drilling and before installing equipment and material through the penetration, coat exposed concrete and steel with protective coating material specified in this Section. Apply protective coating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 4. Cleaning: Vacuum or otherwise remove slurry and tailings from the work area following core-drilling. 3.05 PATCHING A. General 1. Construction shall be patched by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing-up, and similar methods at completion of the Work. 2. Provide equipment and materials in accordance with the Contract Documents for patching Work. Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Execution of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 00-15 3. Provide airtight connections to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces when patching the Work. Provide durable patching seams that minimize visual appearance. 4. Patched areas shall be tested to demonstrate integrity of installation as directed by the Engineer. Contractor shall provide testing equipment, material, and services for patch testing. B. Restoration: 1. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas to minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. 2. Contractor shall extend refinishing and restoration into adjoining areas to blend patched areas with existing adjacent areas. a. Refinish to nearest intersection for continuous surfaces. b. Refinish the entire assembly and system for equipment and materials. c. Repair and rehang existing ceilings to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. d. Apply plaster and finishes to match adjacent interior walls and partition areas for openings sealed with brick and/or masonry block. 3.06 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment and materials in accordance with the Contract Documents, approved Shop Drawings, and manufacturer’s installation instructions. When manufacturer’s installation instructions conflict with the Contract Documents, obtain interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding. B. Preparation of surfaces shall be performed prior to installation of equipment and material. 1. New floor finishes: Repair and patch with concrete, asphalt latex type emulsion and underlayment as required for existing surfaces or new flooring surfaces. 2. Ceramic tile flooring or bases installed over concrete floors: Grind away cove, if present, for installation of new Work. C. Concrete surfaces shall achieve compression strength in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to installation of equipment and materials. 1. Anchor bolts and templates shall be provided by Contractor and as specified in the individual Specification Sections. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Execution of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 00-16 2. Concrete foundations shall be treated with sealer to prevent oil from seeping into concrete as specified in the individual Specification Sections. D. Maintain the work area in a broom-clean condition while installing materials and equipment. E. Contractor shall be responsible for equipment for hoisting, lifting, moving, rigging, etc. for installation of equipment and materials. 1. Contractor shall be responsible for design of temporary installation system used for the installation Work, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for damage to existing structure, equipment, and material caused prior, during, and following installation of the Work with the Contractor furnished temporary installation system at no cost to Owner. Repairs shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents, shall return to condition prior to installation Work, and as directed by the Engineer. 3. Owner’s hoists, monorails, bridge cranes, rigging, etc. shall not be used by the Contractor unless written authorization is provided by Owner. F. Alteration or repair of new equipment and materials shall not be permitted without written authorization from Engineer. G. Field welding or burning of new equipment and materials shall not be permitted unless indicated in the Contract Documents or without written authorization from Engineer. H. Install temporary shoring and bracing where necessary during installation of the Work where required: 1. System shall be provided in accordance with the Contract Documents and code requirements. 2. Temporary system shall consist of adjustable sound timbers or rolled shapes easily removable following installation of the Work. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for damage to existing structures and new Work during installation, utilization, and removal of the temporary system at new additional cost to the Owner. I. Manufacturer’s Installation Services: Provide competent, qualified manufacturer’s representatives of equipment and material for services specified in the individual Specification Sections, including, but not limited to: 1. Supervising installation 2. Checking the completed installation Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Execution of Work Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 00-17 3. Adjusting and testing of equipment and materials 4. Instructing Owner’s operations and maintenance in accordance with Section 01 79 00  Instruction of Owner’s Personnel. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Anchorage and Bracing of Nonstructural Components Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 23-1 SECTION 01 73 23 ANCHORAGE AND BRACING OF NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and services required to design and provide anchorage and bracing for all nonstructural components in accordance with the Contract Documents and Building Code requirements, including the seismic design requirements of Chapter 13 in ASCE 7. B. This Section covers requirements for only the anchorage and bracing of nonstructural components. Design requirements for nonstructural components (other than their anchorage and bracing) are covered in the Section for that component. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 01 45 33 – Special Inspections C. Section 05 10 00 – Metal Materials D. Section 05 05 23 – Metal Fastening E. Further requirements for anchorage and bracing are included in other Sections of the Specifications. See Section for the specific nonstructural component in question. 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the Specifications, all work herein shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the following documents. The Building Code shall be the version in effect at the time of Bid within the jurisdiction where the Work is located. All other referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the version as referenced by the Building Code. If no version is referenced by the Building Code, then the most current issue available at the time of Bid shall be used. 1. International Building Code 2. ASCE/SEI 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures 3. FEMA 412 Installing Seismic Restraints for Mechanical Equipment 4. FEMA 413 Installing Seismic Restraints for Electrical Equipment 5. FEMA 414 Installing Seismic Restraints for Duct and Pipe 12 1 3 2 2 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Anchorage and Bracing of Nonstructural Components Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 23-2 6. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association, Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems 7. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary 8. ACI 355.2 Qualifications of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete 9. ACI 355.4 Qualifications of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Nonstructural components: All architectural, mechanical, electrical, or plumbing elements or systems and their supports or attachments provided under this contract which are permanently attached to new or existing structures. 1. Architectural nonstructural components include, but are not limited to, interior nonstructural walls and partitions, exterior wall panels and glazing elements, glass curtain walls, skylights, cabinets, suspended ceilings, fascia, and cladding. 2. Mechanical nonstructural components include, but are not limited to, HVAC units, fans, water and wastewater treatment process equipment, instrumentation cabinets, piping and ductwork. 3. Electrical nonstructural components include, but are not limited to, conduit systems, cable tray systems, boxes, transformers, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, busway, individual motor controllers, motor control centers, variable frequency drives, automatic transfer switches, and lighting systems. 4. Plumbing nonstructural components include, but are not limited to, sprinkler systems and associated piping, and sump pumps. B. Attachment: Elements including anchor bolts, welded connections, and mechanical fasteners which secure nonstructural components or supports to the structure. C. Essential Components: Nonstructural components considered necessary to public safety for which the component importance factor Ip is required by chapter 13 in ASCE 7 to be taken as 1.5, including: 1. Life safety systems which must function following an earthquake, including but not limited to, sprinklers for fire protection, emergency lighting, egress corridors and stairways, and smoke purge systems. 2. Components which contain, convey or support toxic, highly toxic, or explosive substances where the quantity of the material exceeds a threshold quantity established by the Building Code. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Anchorage and Bracing of Nonstructural Components Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 23-3 3. Components which are within or attached to an Occupancy or Risk Category IV structure as defined in ASCE 7 Chapter 1 and are needed for continued operation of the facility or failure could impair the continued operation of the facility. 4. Components which contain, convey, or support hazardous substances and are attached to a structure or portion thereof classified by the Building Code as a hazardous occupancy. 5. Process systems and elements designated below: a. Large diameter piping and associated valves and controls. D. Nonbuilding Structures: All self-supporting structures which are supported by an independent foundation or by other structures which include, but are not limited to, storage tanks, silos, exhaust stacks, storage racks, and towers. E. Delegated Design: Design of a structure or structural element(s) which has been deferred by the contract documents to be performed during the project construction stage, by a registered design professional retained by the Contractor and with the design submitted as a shop drawing to the Engineer. 1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Anchorage and bracing of nonstructural components shall be designed and installed to resist the controlling load combination of gravity loads, operational forces (including static and dynamic), wind forces, seismic forces and any other applicable forces required in accordance with the governing Building Code. B. Anchorage and bracing of nonstructural components shall comply with seismic design requirements of ASCE 7 Chapter 13 unless the nonstructural component meets the criteria to be exempt. The following nonstructural components are exempt from requirements specific to seismic anchorage and bracing: (See paragraph 1.07.F.3 herein for Seismic Design Category) 1. Storage cabinets no more than 6 feet tall, furniture, and movable equipment, regardless of Seismic Design Category. 2. All architectural, mechanical, electrical, and plumbing nonstructural components in Seismic Design Category A. 3. All mechanical, electrical, and plumbing nonstructural components in Seismic Design Category B. 4. Architectural nonstructural components in Seismic Design Category B, other than parapets, provided that Ip = 1.0. 5. Mechanical, electrical, and plumbing nonstructural components in Seismic Design Category C provided that either: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Anchorage and Bracing of Nonstructural Components Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 23-4 a. Ip = 1.0, and the component is positively attached to the structure, or b. Component weighs 20 lbs. or less, or 5 lb/ft or less for distribution systems. 6. Mechanical, electrical, and plumbing nonstructural components in Seismic Design Category D, E or F that are positively attached to the structure, provided that either: a. Ip = 1.0, component weighs 400 lbs or less and its center of mass is 4 ft or less above a floor level, and flexible connections are provided between the components and associated ductwork, piping and conduit: or b. Component weighs 20 lbs. or less, or 5 lb/ft or less for distribution systems. 7. Other exemptions as allowed by the Specifications, Codes and Standards referenced herein. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 1. Anchorage and bracing submittals for all architectural, mechanical, electrical, and plumbing nonstructural components, elements and systems that do not have a design for anchorage and bracing provided within the Contract Documents. Submittals shall include the following: a. Component manufacturer’s cut sheets and fabrication details for equipment bases and foundations, including dimensions, structural member sizes, support point locations and equipment operational loads. Equipment anchorage details shall clearly indicate anchor size, pattern, embedment, and edge distance requirements to satisfy operational, wind, seismic and other forces required by the governing Building Code. Details shall also indicate grout, bearing pads, isolators, etc. required for complete installation. b. Design calculations, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Utah. Design shall include all loads and load combinations required by the governing Building Code. Separate calculation submittals for vertical and lateral load support systems shall not be allowed. c. Detailed Shop Drawings, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Utah, showing specific details of the support design including material, installation, attachments, connection hardware, etc., and the layout and location of all hangers and supports (resisting both gravity and lateral loads), including bracing orientation and direction of force(s) to be resisted. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Anchorage and Bracing of Nonstructural Components Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 23-5 d. Seismic loads and requirements are not required to be included in design for anchorage and bracing of components which are exempt in accordance with Section 1.04B. e. For components required to be certified as seismically qualified in accordance with paragraph 1.06.A.1.f below, submit installation guidelines provided by the equipment manufacturer for proper seismic mounting of the equipment. f. Seismic qualification testing shall be based on ASCE 7 and on a nationally recognized testing standard procedure such as ICC-ES AC 156. 1.07 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Mechanical fasteners used to secure nonstructural components shall meet the requirements of Section 05 05 23 – Metal Fastening. Post-installed concrete anchors shall be prequalified for use in seismic applications. B. No reaction loads (either vertical or lateral) from nonstructural component anchorage and bracing shall be allowed on any element where design has been delegated unless the additional loads on the element have been coordinated with the delegated designer and the submittal is accompanied by a sealed letter from the delegated designer indicating the element has been designed to support the reaction loads. C. Reaction loads from nonstructural component anchorage and bracing shall be transferred directly to the primary structural members (girders, beams, etc.), with no components supported from secondary members (purlins, bracing, etc.) unless otherwise approved. D. No holes shall be drilled into any structural steel for attachment of component supports without prior approval of the Engineer. E. Attachments of nonstructural component anchorage and bracing that cause overstressing of any structural element shall not be permitted. F. Seismic Requirements 1. Seismic anchorage and bracing for nonstructural components shall be subject to the current local Building Code in conjunction with the seismic provisions of the International Building Code (IBC) Section 1613 and referenced ASCE 7 Chapter 13. 2. Where the weight of a nonstructural component is greater than or equal to 25 percent of the effective seismic weight (as defined by ASCE 7) of the structure it is attached to, the component shall be classified as a nonbuilding structure for purposes of seismic design. Seismic design for nonbuilding structures shall comply with Building Code requirements in conjunction with the provisions of ASCE 7 Chapter 15. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Anchorage and Bracing of Nonstructural Components Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 23-6 3. Nonstructural components shall be assigned to the same Seismic Design Category as the structure they occupy or to which they are attached. Design of seismic support system and anchorage shall incorporate the site-specific seismic criteria given on the Contract Drawings. Criteria shall include site-specific spectral response coefficients, Site Class, Seismic Design Category, and Risk Category. 4. Component Importance Factor Ip shall be 1.5 for all essential nonstructural components noted in item 1.03.E above. All other nonstructural components shall utilize Ip = 1.0 unless noted otherwise. 5. Components shall be anchored and braced for earthquake forces both in the vertical and each orthogonal direction. Seismic anchorage and bracing shall limit deflections of components per ASCE 7, and the displacements shall not impede component functionally and containment. 6. Anchorage design shall account for disparate seismic response behavior of supporting structures. Seismic supports or bracing shall not cross structural expansion joints. Nonstructural components shall not be attached to multiple structural elements which may respond differently during a seismic event without provisions to accommodate independent movement. Flexible expansion loops or offsets, flexible joints, bellows type pipe expansion joints, couplings, etc. shall be provided at structure expansion joints to allow for independent structure movement and thermal movement of piping, ductwork, and conduit. Minimum movement capability in the vertical and each orthogonal direction shall equal the width of the joint. 7. Provide flexible connections, piping, conduit, etc. at foundation levels where below grade utilities enter the structure. 8. Design of support system for components with multiple attachments shall consider the stiffness and ductility of the supporting members. Equipment designed as free- standing shall only be attached at its base. Use of non-free-standing equipment requiring both vertical and lateral attachment is contingent upon loads applied to the structure and requires approval by the Engineer. 9. The seismic anchorage and bracing design shall be based on actual equipment data (dimensions, weight, center of gravity, etc.) obtained from the specifications or the approved equipment manufacturer. The equipment manufacturer shall verify the attachment points on the equipment can safely withstand the combination of seismic, self-weight and other loads imposed. G. Powder actuated fasteners in steel or concrete shall not be used for sustained tension loads in Seismic Design Categories D, E or F unless approved for seismic loading or specifically exempted by ASCE 7. Powder actuated fasteners in masonry shall not be used unless approved for seismic loading regardless of Seismic Design Category. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Anchorage and Bracing of Nonstructural Components Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 73 23-7 H. Friction clips shall not be used in Seismic Design Categories D, E or F for supporting sustained tension loads in combination with resisting seismic forces. C-type and large flange clamps may be used for hanger attachments provided restraining straps meeting NFPA 13 requirements are utilized and loosening of threaded connections is prevented by lock nuts, burred threads, etc. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Anchorage and bracing of nonstructural components shall be constructed of appropriate materials and connecting hardware to provide a continuous load path between the component and supporting structure of sufficient strength and stiffness to resist the calculated design seismic forces and displacements. B. Component anchorage, bracing and connection materials shall be compatible with and in general match the component and component gravity support materials. Contact between dissimilar metals shall be prevented. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORAGE AND BRACING A. No anchorage and bracing of nonstructural components shall be installed prior to review and acceptance by the Engineer and permitting agency. B. Equipment shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Fasteners shall meet manufacturer’s requirements. C. Following installation, all anchorage and bracing and seismically qualified equipment shall be inspected. See Section 01 45 33 – Special Inspections for requirements. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cleaning and Waste Management Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 74 00-1 SECTION 01 74 00 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for progress and closeout cleaning at the Site. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 01 77 19 – Closeout Requirements 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. NFPA 241, Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. “Waste Management Coordinator” is the person responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting the status of the Waste Management Plan. Although available for other assignments, the Waste Management Coordinator shall be present at the Site full time for the duration of the Work. B. “Construction waste” is building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. C. “Demolition waste” is building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. D. “Disposal” is removal to an off-Site location of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or disposal in a landfill or incinerator conforming to Laws and Regulations and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.05 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN: A. General: Develop preliminary plan consisting of waste identification. Indicate quantities by weight or volume. Use the same units of measure throughout waste management plan. B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of excavation waste generated by the Work. 03 2 6 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cleaning and Waste Management Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 74 00-2 C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether waste will be disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. 1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in the Work, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporating them into the Work. 2. Disposed Materials: Provide information on how and where materials will be disposed. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility that will be used. 3. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Provide information on the method(s) that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location at the Site where materials separation will be located. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Provide all required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Action/Informational Submittals: 1. Preliminary Waste Management Plan: Prepare in accordance with this Section and submit within 14 days of the Notice to Proceed and prior to removing waste from the Site. 2. Final Waste Management Plan: Submit within 14 days of receiving Engineer’s comments on the preliminary waste management plan. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Provide copy of receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Submit manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Replace loaded containers with empty containers as demand requires. B. Deposit recyclable materials in containers free from debris. C. Transport and deposit waste in containers to minimize dust. Close container covers immediately after materials are deposited. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cleaning and Waste Management Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 74 00-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Execute cleaning during the Project, at completion of the Work, and as required by the General Conditions and this Section. B. Maintain in a clean manner the Site, the Work, and areas adjacent to or affected by the Work. C. Comply with the requirements and procedures for construction waste management and disposal, including developing and implementing a plan for construction waste management and disposal. D. Extent of required construction waste management and disposal includes within the Project limits, as shown or indicated. 3.02 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Clean the Site, work areas, and other areas occupied by Contractor at least weekly. Dispose of materials in accordance with the General Conditions and the following: 1. Comply with NFPA 241 for removing combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold non-combustible materials at the Site more than three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 degrees F. When temperature is less than 80 degrees F, dispose of non-combustible materials within seven days of their generation. 3. Provide suitable containers for storage of waste materials and debris. 4. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately. B. Work Areas 1. Clean areas where the Work is in progress to level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 2. Remove liquid spills promptly and immediately report spills to Owner, Engineer, and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum entire work area, as appropriate. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cleaning and Waste Management Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 74 00-4 4. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. C. Keep installed Work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of material or equipment installed, using only cleaning agents and methods specifically recommended by material or equipment manufacturer. If manufacturer does not recommend specific cleaning agents or methods, use cleaning agents and methods that are not hazardous to health and property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. D. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration until Substantial Completion. E. Cutting and Patching 1. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. 2. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. F. During handling and installation of materials and equipment, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials and equipment already in place. Apply protective covering where required for protection from damage or deterioration, until Substantial Completion. G. Clean completed construction as frequently as necessary throughout the construction period. 3.03 EXCAVATION WORK NEAR PUBLIC OR PRIVATE PROPERTY A. Contractor shall provide cleaning and either temporary or permanent restoration where Work is located in or near streets, right of ways, easements, or private property. B. Contractor shall backfill, compact, grade, and restore excavation or disturbed area to functional condition to permit pedestrian or vehicular traffic and original use of the area as the Work progresses. C. Temporary storage of excavation spoils, including earth, stones, boulders, and debris, shall be removed from the Site or area of disturbance. 3.04 WASTE MANAGEMENT IMPLEMENTATION A. Implement the waste management plan approved by Engineer. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items required to implement the waste management pan during the Project. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cleaning and Waste Management Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 74 00-5 B. Train all installers, Subcontractors, and Suppliers as required on proper waste management procedures required for the Work. 1. Distribute the waste management plan as required within three days of Engineer’s approval. 2. Distribute the waste management plan to Contractor’s personnel, Subcontractors, and Suppliers prior to these entities starting the Work. Review with installers, Subcontractors, and Suppliers the waste management plan’s procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. C. Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent facilities. Designate and label specific areas of the Site necessary for separating materials to be disposed. 3.05 WASTE DISPOSAL A. Except for items or materials to be recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from the Site and properly dispose of waste in facility such as permitted landfill or incinerator or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, remove from the Site all waste and debris from the Work as it accumulates. Upon completion of the Work, remove materials, equipment, waste, and debris and leave the Site clean, neat, and orderly. Comply with the Contract Documents regarding cleaning and removal of trash, debris, and waste. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Properly dispose of waste materials, surplus materials, debris, and rubbish off the Site. 4. Do not discharge volatile or hazardous substances, such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner, into storm sewers or sanitary sewers. 5. Do not discharge wastes into surface waters or drainage routes. B. Do not bury rubbish and waste materials at the Site. C. Do not burn waste materials at the Site. D. Transport waste materials to proper location at site other than Owner’s property for disposal in accordance with Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall be solely responsible for complying with Laws and Regulations regarding storing, transporting, and disposing of waste. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cleaning and Waste Management Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 74 00-6 3.06 FAILURE TO MAINTAIN CLEAN SITE AND WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. Owner will provide written notification to Contractor for failure to maintain a clean Site and waste management plan. B. Written notification shall provide five (5) days for Contractor to remedy Site cleaning and waste management to the Engineer’s and Owner’s satisfaction. C. Following the five (5) day remedy period, Owner shall without prejudice to any other rights provide services to clean Site to the satisfaction of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall be responsible for reimbursement of Owner’s costs and expenses for the cleaning work. 3.07 CLOSEOUT CLEANING A. Complete the closeout cleaning prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion in accordance with Section 01 77 19 – Closeout Requirements. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Checkout and Startup Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 75 00-1 SECTION 01 75 00 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP PROCEDURES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes requirements related to the checkout of products and equipment, and startup procedures of products and equipment. B. Contractor shall initially start up and place equipment installed under the Contract into successful operation, in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s written instructions and as instructed by Supplier at the Site. C. Provide all material, labor, tools, and equipment required to complete equipment checkout and start-up. D. Provide chemicals, lubricants, and other required operating fluids. E. General activities include: 1. Cleaning, as required under other provisions of the Contract Documents. 2. Removing temporary protective coatings. 3. Checking and correcting (if necessary) leveling plates, grout, bearing plates, anchorage devices, fasteners, and alignment of piping, conduits, and ducts that may place stress on the connected equipment. 4. All adjustments required. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Displacement, as used herein, shall mean total peak-to-peak movement of vibrating equipment, in mils; velocity or speed of the vibration cycle, measured in distance per time, velocity and acceleration of the vibration cycle. Displacement, velocity and acceleration shall be measured by instruments/equipment equal to IRD Mechanalysis, Bentley, Nevada. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Checkout and Startup Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 75 00-2 1. Startup Schedule: Detailed summary of schedule, duration, manpower requirement, and Contractor’s means and methods for startup. 2. Vibration testing results 3. Closeout Submittals: Manufacturer’s certification of installation in accordance with this Section. 4. Startup testing and operational demonstration performance data. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Coordination 1. Coordinate checkout and start-up with other contractors performing Work at the Site. 2. Do not start up system or subsystem for continuous operation until all components of that system or subsystem, including instrumentation and controls, have been tested to the extent practicable and proven to be operable as intended by the Contract Documents. 3. Responsibility for proper operation is by Contractor. 4. Supplier shall be present during checkout, start-up, and initial operation, except as otherwise specified. 5. Do not start up system, unit process, or equipment without submitting acceptable preliminary operations and maintenance manuals by Contractor, in accordance with Section 01 78 23  Operations and Maintenance Data. B. Contractor’s Requirements Prior to Owner’s Responsibility 1. Owner will assume responsibility for the equipment upon Substantial Completion. 2. Prior to turning over to Owner responsibility for operating and maintaining system or equipment shall be in accordance with this Section and the following requirements: a. Submit acceptable final operations and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23  Operations and Maintenance Data. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Checkout and Startup Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 75 00-3 b. Provide training of operations and maintenance personnel in accordance with Section 01 79 00  Instruction of Owner’s Personnel. c. Complete system field quality control testing in accordance with the Contract Documents including, but not limited to, the following: 1) Start-up certification shall be performed and completed by the equipment Supplier for the equipment and material prior to be placed into intended use by Owner as specified in the Contract Documents. 2) Equipment and material shall be operated for a minimum 30-day operational period to verify performance. In addition to specific requirements specified in the individual specification sections, process data that is recorded in the PLC shall be submitted to the Engineer in tabular format showing hourly process performance data. A log of all alarms shall also be submitted, along with notes describing corrective measures applied in response to alarm condition. 3) If equipment and material does not perform satisfactorily during the 30- day operational period, then the warranty period start shall be delayed until satisfactorily performance is verified. a) Contractor shall repair or replace equipment and material that does not perform satisfactorily at no cost to Owner. b) Contractor shall furnish all equipment and material, labor, and incidentals necessary to provide equipment and material to the performance level required by the Contract Documents. d. Obtain from Engineer final certificate of Substantial Completion for either entire Work or the portion being turned over to Owner. 3.02 PRELIMINARY REQUIREMENTS A. Prior to the start-up of the facilities, Contractor shall have prepared and tested all equipment, subsystems and systems in accordance with the requirements of the individual Specification Section to check its ability for sustained operation, including inspections and adjustments by Manufacturer's representative. B. Contractor shall develop and submit schedule in accordance with this Section. C. After the facilities are sufficiently complete to permit start-up, Contractor shall furnish competent personnel to start-up the facilities. Contractor will be responsible for startup of all facilities constructed under this Contract. During the initial start-up period the Contractor shall check and provide for mechanical operation in accordance with the Contract Documents. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Checkout and Startup Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 75 00-4 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturers’ Field Services 1. When specified, furnish services of factory trained representatives of material and equipment manufacturers as specified, including supervising installation, adjusting, checkout, start-up, and testing of materials and equipment. 2. Certification a. When services by manufacturer are required at the Site, within 14 days after first test operation of equipment, submit to Engineer a letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer’s letterhead, stating that materials and equipment are installed in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements and installation instructions, and in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Include in the final operations and maintenance manual for the associated equipment a copy of the letter or completed form, as applicable. 3. Manufacturer shall bring any discrepancies to the immediate attention of the Contractor for correction. Contractor shall promptly correct any discrepancies noted by the Manufacturer. Manufacturer shall coordinate correction of discrepancies with the Contractor. Discrepancies and their correction shall be noted in inspection records and in all required reports. Any corrections that result in changes to the work as shown on the Contract Documents shall be approved by the Engineer prior to their execution. 3.04 SYSTEM START-UP A. Equipment and materials shall be provided in conformance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions and in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Provide start-up services as specified in the individual Specification Sections. C. Contractor shall furnish consumables required for startup including, but not limited to, electricity, water, chemicals and lubrication. Contractor shall provide a plan for disposal of water used for testing unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. D. General system requirements 1. Start-up of the plant by Contractor shall include all mechanical systems, including but not limited to, pumps, compressors, and like equipment, and the ventilating, air conditioning (or heating), plumbing, and electrical systems. Start-up of either the heating or air conditioning systems is dependent upon the time of year that the plant start up is initiated. Contractor will be required to return at the beginning of the next heating or air conditioning season (whichever is applicable) to start the appropriate system. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Checkout and Startup Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 75 00-5 2. Cleaning as required under provisions of the Contract Documents. 3. Remove temporary protective coatings. 4. Flushing and replacing greases and lubricants as required by Manufacturer 5. Lubrication. 6. Verify the following: a. Shaft and coupling alignments and reset where needed. b. Set motor, pump and other equipment rotation, safety interlocks, and belt tensions. c. Leveling plates, grout, bearing plates, anchor bolts, fasteners, and alignment of piping, conduits and ducts that may apply stress on equipment. 7. Valves a. Tighten packing glands to ensure no leakage but allow valve stems to operate without galling. b. Replace packing in valves to retain maximum adjustment after system is determined to be complete. c. Replace packing on valves that continue to leak. d. Remove and repair bonnets that leak. e. After cleaning, coat packing gland threads and valve stems with surface preparation of “Molycote” or “Fel-Pro”. 8. Verify that control valve seats are free of foreign matter and are properly positioned for intended service. 9. Tighten flanges and other pipe joints after system has been placed in operation. 10. Replace gaskets that show signs of leakage after tightening. 11. Inspect all joints for leakage: a. Promptly remake each joint that appears to be faulty; do not wait for rust other corrosion to form. b. Clean threads on both parts and apply compound and remake joints. 12. After system has been placed in operation, clean valve seats and headers in fluid system to ensure freedom from foreign matter. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Checkout and Startup Procedures Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 75 00-6 13. Remove rust, scale, and foreign matter from equipment and renew defaced surfaces. 14. Repair damaged insulation. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Closeout Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 77 19-1 SECTION 01 77 19 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes procedural requirements related to Substantial Completion, final inspection, request for final payment and final cleaning. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 01 29 76 – Progress Payment Procedures C. Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Drawings 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Substantial completion procedures for requesting and documenting are in the General Conditions, as modified by Supplemental Conditions. B. Final inspection procedures for requesting and documenting are in the General Conditions, as modified by Supplemental Conditions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures prior to final payment: B. Record Documents: As required in General Conditions and Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents. C. Special bonds, Special Guarantees, and Service Agreements. D. Consent of Surety to Final Payment: As required in General Conditions. E. Releases or Waivers of Liens and Claims: As required in General Conditions. F. Releases from Agreements. G. Final Application for Payment: Submit in accordance with procedures and requirements stated in Section 01 29 00, Payment Procedures. H. Extra Materials: As required by individual Specification sections. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Closeout Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 77 19-2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) 3.01 REQUEST FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Submit request for final payment in accordance with the Agreement and General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. B. Request for final payment shall include: 1. Documents required for progress payments in Section 01 29 76  Progress Payment Procedures. 2. Documents required in the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions. 3. Releases or Waivers of Lien Rights a. Provide a final release or waiver by Contractor and each Subcontractor and Supplier that provided Contractor with labor, material, or equipment totaling $10,000 or more. b. Provide list of Subcontractors and Suppliers for which release or waiver of Lien is required. c. Each release or waiver of Lien shall be signed by an authorized representative of the entity submitting release or waiver to Contractor, and shall include Subcontractor’s or Supplier’s corporate seal, when applicable. d. Release or waiver of Lien may be conditional upon receipt of final payment. e. Manufacturer’s Affidavit of Release of Liens – furnish a separate, completed form from the manufacturer. 4. Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment. 3.02 FINAL CLEANING A. At completion of the Work or of a part thereof and immediately prior to Contractor’s request for certificate of Substantial Completion; or if no certificate is issued, immediately prior to Contractor’s notice of completion, clean entire Site or parts thereof, as applicable. 1. Leave the Work and adjacent areas affected in a cleaned condition satisfactory to Owner. 03 2 6 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Closeout Requirements Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 77 19-3 2. Remove grease, dirt, dust, paint or plaster splatter, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from exposed surfaces. 3. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish and match adjacent surfaces. 4. Broom clean exterior paved driveways and parking areas. 5. Hose clean sidewalks, loading areas, and others contiguous with principal structures. 6. Rake clean all other surfaces. 7. Replace air-handling filters and clean ducts, blowers, and coils of ventilation units operated during construction. 8. Leave water courses, gutters, and ditches open and clean. B. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surfaces to be cleaned. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Operations and Maintenance Data Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 78 23-1 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes requirements for operation and maintenance data, manuals, and documentation. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide all submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. General 1. Submit operation and maintenance data, in accordance with this Section and in accordance with requirements elsewhere in the Contract Documents, as instructional and reference manuals by operations and maintenance personnel at the Site. 2. Required operation and maintenance data groupings are listed in this Section. At minimum, submit operation and maintenance data for: a. All equipment and systems b. Valves, gates, actuators, and related accessories c. Instrumentation and control devices d. Electrical gear 3. For each operation and maintenance manual, submit the following: a. Preliminary Submittal: Printed and bound copy of entire operation and maintenance manual or electronic copy, except for test data and service reports by Supplier. b. Final Submittal: Printed and bound copy of complete operations and maintenance manual and electronic copy, including test data and service reports by Supplier. C. Action/Informational Submittals 05 - 0 4 - 2 0 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Operations and Maintenance Data Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 78 23-2 1. Submit preliminary schedule (listing) of operations and maintenance data for Engineer’s review. Preliminary operations and maintenance data shall be grouped as major equipment and material systems and divided into sub-systems as required for clarity, subject to Engineer’s approval. D. Closeout Submittals 1. Operation and maintenance data: Submit the operations and maintenance data indicated in the Contract Documents, grouped into submittals as approved by Engineer. E. Quantity Required and Timing of Submittals: 1. Preliminary Submittal a. Printed Copies: One copy, exclusive of copies required by Contractor. b. Electronic Copies: One copy. c. Submit to Engineer, whichever occurs first: 1) 60 days prior to starting training of operations and maintenance personnel. 2) 30 days prior to field quality control testing at the Site. d. Furnish preliminary operation and maintenance data submittal in acceptable form and content, as determined by Engineer, before associated materials and equipment will be eligible for payment. 2. Preliminary Submittal shall be reviewed by Engineer. One printed or electronic copy shall be returned to Contractor with required revisions noted. 3. Final Submittal: Provide 14 days prior to checkout and startup procedures specified in Section 01 75 00  Checkout and Startup Procedures, unless Submittal is specified as required prior to an interim Milestone. a. Printed Copies: Two copies. b. Electronic Copies: One copy. F. Format of Printed Copies 1. Binding and Cover a. Bind each operation and maintenance manual in durable, permanent, stiff- cover binder(s), comprising one or more volumes per copy as required. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Operations and Maintenance Data Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 78 23-3 Binders shall be minimum one-inch wide and maximum of three-inch wide. Binders for each copy of each volume shall be identical. b. Provide the following information on cover of each volume: 1) Title: “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS”. 2) Name or type of material or equipment covered in the manual. 3) Volume number, if more than one volume is required, listed as “Volume __ of __”, with appropriate volume-designating numbers filled in. 4) Name of Project and, if applicable, Contract name and number. 5) Name of building or structure, as applicable. c. Provide the following information on spine of each volume: 1) Title: “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS”. 2) Name or type of material or equipment covered in the manual. 3) Volume number, if more than one volume is required, listed as “Volume __ of __”, with appropriate volume-designating numbers filled in. 4) Project name and building or structure name. 2. Drawings a. Bind into the manual drawings, diagrams, and illustrations up to and including 11 inches by 17 inches in size, with reinforcing. b. Documents larger than 11 inches by 17 inches shall be folded and inserted into clear plastic pockets bound into the manual. Mark pockets with printed text indicating content and drawing numbers. Include no more than three drawing sheets per pocket. 3. Copy Quality and Document Clarity a. Contents shall be original-quality copies. Documents in the manual shall be either original manufacturer-printed documents or first-generation photocopies indistinguishable from originals. If original is in color, copies shall be in color. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Operations and Maintenance Data Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 78 23-4 b. Clearly mark in ink to indicate all components of materials and equipment on catalog pages for ease of identification. In standard or pre-printed documents, indicate options furnished or cross out inapplicable content. 4. Organization a. Provide table of contents in each volume for each chapter or section. b. Use dividers and indexed tabs between major categories of information, such as operating instructions, preventive maintenance instructions, and other major subdivisions of data in each manual. G. Format of Electronic Copies 1. Each electronic copy shall include all information included in the corresponding printed copy. 2. Submit electronic copy via transferable method and format acceptable to Engineer. 3. File Format a. Acceptable formats include Adobe PDF, Microsoft Word, Autodesk DWF, and AutoCAD. b. Files shall be electronically searchable. c. Submit separate file for each separate document in the printed copy. d. Within each file, provide bookmarks for the following: 1) Each chapter and subsection listed in the corresponding printed copy document’s table of contents 2) Each figure 3) Each table 4) Each appendix 4. Submit drawings and figures in one of the following formats: “.bmp”, “.tif”, “.jpg”, “.gif”, “dwf”, or “dwg”. H. General Content Requirements 1. Prepare each operations and maintenance manual specifically for the Project. Include in each manual all pertinent instructions, as-built drawings as applicable, bills of materials, technical bulletins, installation and handling requirements, maintenance and repair instructions, and other information required for complete, accurate, and comprehensive data for safe and proper operation, maintenance, Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Operations and Maintenance Data Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 78 23-5 and repair of materials and equipment furnished for the Project. Include in manuals specific information required in the Specification Section for the material or equipment, data required by Laws and Regulations, and data required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Submit complete, detailed written operating instructions for each material or equipment item including: function; operating characteristics; limiting conditions; operating instructions for start-up, normal and emergency conditions; regulation and control; operational troubleshooting; and shutdown. Also include, as applicable, written descriptions of alarms generated by equipment and proper responses to such alarm conditions. 3. Submit written explanations of all safety considerations relating to operation and maintenance procedures. 4. Submit complete, detailed, written preventive maintenance instructions including all information and instructions to keep materials, equipment, and systems properly lubricated, adjusted, and maintained so that materials, equipment, and systems function economically throughout their expected service life. Instructions shall include: a. Written explanations with illustrations for each preventive maintenance task such as inspection, adjustment, lubrication, calibration, and cleaning. Include pre-startup checklists for each equipment item and maintenance requirements for long-term shutdowns. b. Recommended schedule for each preventive maintenance task. c. Lubrication charts indicating recommended types of lubricants, frequency of application or change, and where each lubricant is to be used or applied. d. Table of alternative lubricants. e. Troubleshooting instructions. f. List of required maintenance tools and equipment. 5. Submit complete bills of material or parts lists for materials and equipment furnished. Lists or bills of material may be furnished on a per-drawing or per- equipment assembly basis. Bills of material shall indicate: a. Manufacturer’s name, address, telephone number, fax number, and Internet website address. b. Manufacturer’s local service representative’s or local parts supplier’s name, address, telephone number, fax number, Internet website address, and e- mail addresses, when applicable. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Operations and Maintenance Data Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 78 23-6 c. Manufacturer’s shop order and serial number(s) for materials, equipment or assembly furnished. d. For each part or piece include the following information: 1) Parts cross-reference number. Cross-reference number shall be used to identify the part on assembly drawings, Shop Drawings, or other type of graphic illustration where the part is clearly shown or indicated. 2) Part name or description. 3) Manufacturer’s part number. 4) Quantity of each part used in each assembly. 5) Current unit price of the part at the time the operations and maintenance manual is submitted. Price list shall be dated. 6. Submit complete instructions for ordering replaceable parts, including reference numbers (such as shop order number or serial number). 7. Submit manufacturer’s recommended inventory levels for spare parts, extra stock materials, and consumable supplies for the initial two years of operation. Consumable supplies are items consumed or worn by operation of materials or equipment, and items used in maintaining the operation of material or equipment, including items such as lubricants, seals, reagents, and testing chemicals used for calibrating or operating the equipment. Include estimated delivery times, shelf life limitations, and special storage requirements. 8. Submit manufacturer’s installation and operation bulletins, diagrams, schematics, and equipment cutaways. Where materials pertain to multiple models or types, mark the literature to indicate specific material or equipment supplied. Marking may be in the form of checking, arrows, or underlining to indicate pertinent information, or by crossing out or other means of obliterating information that does not apply to the materials and equipment furnished. 9. Submit original-quality copies of each approved and accepted Shop Drawing, product data, and other submittal, updated to indicate as-installed condition. Reduced drawings are acceptable only if reduction is to not less than one-half original size and all lines, dimensions, lettering, and text are completely legible on the reduction. 10. Submit complete electrical schematics and wiring diagrams, including complete point-to-point wiring and wiring numbers or colors between all terminal points. 11. Submit copy of warranty bond and service contract as applicable. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Operations and Maintenance Data Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 78 23-7 12. When copyrighted material is used in operations and maintenance manuals, obtain copyright holder’s written permission to use such material in the operation and maintenance manual. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULE Specification Section Title Hardcopy Electronic Document Preliminary: Final: Quantity: Format: END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Project Record Documents Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 78 39-1 SECTION 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Section includes requirements for recording changes to record documents, and for electronic files furnished by Engineer. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Closeout Submittals: Provide record documentation as specified in this Section. 1. Submittal of Record Documents a. Submit to Engineer the following record documents: Drawings. b. Prior to readiness for final payment, submit to Engineer one copy of final record documents. Submit complete record documents; do not make partial submittals. c. Submit record documents with transmittal letter on contractor letterhead complying with letter of transmittal requirements in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. d. Record documents submittal shall include certification, with original signature of official authorized to execute legal agreements on behalf of Contractor. 2. Electronic Files Furnished by Engineer: a. CADD files will be furnished by Engineer upon the following conditions: 1) Contractor shall submit to Engineer a letter on Contractor letterhead requesting CADD files and providing specific definition(s) or description(s) of how files will be used, and specific description of benefits to Owner (including credit proposal, if applicable) if the request is granted. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Project Record Documents Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 78 39-2 2) Contractor shall execute Engineer’s standard agreement for release of electronic files and shall abide by all provisions of the agreement for release of electronic files. 3) Layering system incorporated in CADD files shall be maintained as transmitted by Engineer. CADD files transmitted by Engineer containing cross-referenced files shall not be bound by Contractor. Drawing cross-references and paths shall be maintained. If Contractor alters layers or cross-reference files, Contractor shall restore all layers and cross-references prior to submitting record documents to Engineer. 4) Contractor shall submit record drawings to Engineer in same CADD format that files were furnished to Contractor. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Record Documents 1. Furnish qualified and experienced person, whose duty and responsibility shall be to maintain record documents. 2. Accuracy of Records a. Coordinate changes within record documents, making legible and accurate entries on each sheet of Drawings and other documents where such entry is required to show change. b. Purpose of Project record documents is to document factual information regarding aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive Site measurement, investigation, and examination. 3. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that a change in the Work has occurred. 4. Prior to submitting each request for progress payment, request Engineer’s review and approval of current status of record documents. Failure to properly maintain, update, and submit record documents may result in a deferral by Engineer to recommend whole or any part of Contractor’s Application for Payment, either partial or final. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Project Record Documents Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 78 39-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Maintain and submit to Engineer with record documents in accordance with the Specifications, General Conditions, and Supplementary Conditions. B. Maintenance of Record Documents: 1. The following record documents shall be maintained in the Contractor’s field office: a. Drawings, Specifications, and Addenda. b. Shop Drawings, Samples, and other Contractor submittals, including records of test results, approved or accepted as applicable, by Engineer. c. Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, photographic documentation, survey data, and all other documents pertinent to the Work. 2. Update record documents on a monthly basis, minimum. 3. Provide files and racks for proper storage and easy access to record documents. 4. Make record documents available for inspection upon request of Engineer or Owner. 5. Do not use record documents for purpose other than serving as Project record. Do not remove record documents from Contractor’s field office without Engineer’s approval. C. At the start of the Project, label each record document to be submitted as, “PROJECT RECORD” using legible, printed letters. Letters on record copy of the Drawings shall be two inches high. D. Keep record documents current. Make entries on record documents within two working days of receipt of information required to record the change. E. Do not permanently conceal the Work until required information has been recorded. F. Accuracy of record documents shall be such that future searches for items shown on the record documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from Engineer-accepted record documents. G. Marking of Entries: 03 2 6 1 9 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Project Record Documents Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 78 39-4 1. Use erasable, colored pencils (not ink or indelible pencil) for marking changes, revisions, additions, and deletions to record documents. 2. Clearly describe the change by graphic line and make notations as required. Use straight-edge to mark straight lines. Writing shall be legible and sufficiently dark to allow scanning of record documents into legible electronic files. 3. Date all entries on record documents. 4. Call attention to changes by drawing a “cloud” around the change(s) indicated. 5. Mark initial revisions in red. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for subsequent changes. 3.02 RECORDING CHANGES TO DRAWINGS: A. Record changes on copy of the Drawings. Submittal of Contractor-originated or - produced drawings as a substitute for recording changes on the Drawings is unacceptable. B. Record changes on plans, sections, schematics, and details as required for clarity, making reference dimensions and elevations (to Project datum) for complete record documentation. C. Record actual construction including: 1. Depths of various elements of foundation relative to Project datum. 2. Field changes of dimensions, arrangements, and details. 3. Changes made in accordance with Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. 4. Changes in details on the Drawings. Submit additional details prepared by Contractor when required to document changes. 3.03 RECORDING CHANGES FOR SCHEMATIC LAYOUTS: A. In some cases, on the Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping, ducts, and similar items are shown schematically and are not intended to portray physical layout. For such cases, the final physical arrangement shall be determined by Contractor subject to acceptance by Engineer. B. Record on record documents all revisions to schematics on Drawings, including: piping schematics, ducting schematics, process and instrumentation diagrams, control and circuitry diagrams, electrical one-line diagrams, motor control center layouts, and other schematics when included in the Contract. Record actual locations of equipment, lighting fixtures, in-place grounding system, and other pertinent data. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Project Record Documents Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 78 39-5 C. When dimensioned plans and dimensioned sections on the Drawings show the Work schematically, indicate on the record documents, by dimensions accurate to within one inch in the field, centerline location of items of Work such as conduit, piping, ducts, and similar items 1. Clearly identify the Work item by accurate notations such as “cast iron drain”, “rigid electrical conduit”, “copper waterline”, and similar descriptions. 2. Show by symbol or note the vertical location of Work item; for example, “embedded in slab”, “under slab”, “in ceiling plenum”, “exposed”, and similar designations. For piping not embedded, also provide elevation dimension relative to Project datum. 3. Descriptions shall be sufficiently detailed to be related to Specifications. D. Engineer may furnish written waiver of requirements relative to schematic layouts shown on plans and sections when, in Engineer’s judgment, dimensioned layouts of Work shown schematically will serve no useful purpose. Do not rely on waiver(s) being issued. 3.04 REQUIREMENTS FOR SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWINGS: A. In some cases, drawings produced during construction by Engineer or Contractor supplement the Drawings and shall be included with record documents submitted by Contractor. Supplemental record drawings shall include drawings provided with Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders and that cannot be incorporated into the Drawings due to space limitations. B. Supplemental drawings provided with record drawings shall be integrated with the Drawings and include necessary cross-references between drawings. Supplemental record drawings shall be on sheets the same size as the Drawings. C. When supplemental drawings developed by Contractor using computer-aided drafting/design (CADD) software are to be included in record drawings, submit electronic files for such drawings in AutoCAD (latest version) as part of record drawing submittal. 3.05 RECORDING CHANGES TO SPECIFICATIONS AND ADDENDA: A. Mark each Section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually provided. 2. Changes made by Addendum, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. 3.06 RECORDING CHANGES TO DRAWING MODELS A. Record changes on Engineer supplied electronic models to generate record drawings. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Project Record Documents Cottonwoods Connection Page 01 78 39-6 B. Record changes on plans, sections, schematics, and details as required for clarity, making reference dimensions and elevations (to Project datum) for complete record documentation. C. Record actual construction including: 1. Field changes of dimensions, arrangements, and details. 2. Changes made in accordance with Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. 3. Changes in details on the Drawings. Submit additional details prepared by Contractor when required to document changes. D. When required, electronic models shall be updated with as-built asset information in accordance with the Contract Documents. Asset information shall be entered and coordinated with electronic model files. Asset information includes equipment, instrumentation, and appurtenance tagging, pipe and valve identification information, and Owner identified equipment and material. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Demolition Cottonwoods Connection Page 02 41 00-1 SECTION 02 41 00 SITE DEMOLITION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment in accordance with the requirements of applicable sections of Division 1. B. Demolish and remove all concrete and asphalt paving, curbs, sidewalk, piping, utilities, equipment and structures as required and shown on the Contract Drawings during the construction work. C. Demolish, remove, and dispose of portions of SLA and LCC for construction of the SLAR, SLA relocation, and LCC relocation as required and shown on the Contract Documents. D. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate Work that must be performed with or before the Work specified in this Section. 2. Notify other contractors in advance of Work for connections to existing facilities to prevent delay of the Work. 3. Remove and dispose of equipment and materials indicated for demolition on the Contract Documents, unless indicated as salvage items for the Owner. Obtain ownership of removed equipment and materials following Engineer and Owner approval. Disposal of equipment and materials shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents . E. Site Conditions: 1. Owner does not assume responsibility for the actual condition of structures and equipment to be demolished and removed. 2. Existing Site conditions shall be maintained to the greatest extent possible by the Owner to the time of Notice to Proceed. 3. Perform investigations, explorations, and probes as necessary at the Site prior to initiating demolition Work to ascertain any required protective measures before proceeding with demolition and removal. Contractor shall give particular attention to shoring and bracing requirements to prevent damage to the Work and existing structures. 1/3/2024 Demolition Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Demolition Cottonwoods Connection Page 02 41 00-2 F. Title to Equipment and Materials: 1. Equipment and materials indicated for demolition and removal in the Contract Documents, and not designated as Owner’s salvaged items, shall become the Contractor’s property following removal from the Site. Contractor shall be responsible for legally disposing of the equipment and material. 2. Contractor shall have no right or title to any of the equipment, materials, or other items to be removed until the elements have been removed from the Site. 3. Do not sell or assign or attempt to sell or assign any interest in the equipment, materials, or other items until removal from Site. 4. Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner because of the absence of equipment, fixtures, and materials. G. Salvage Equipment and Materials: 1. Contract Documents indicate equipment and materials that shall be retained by Owner. Owner has the right to request any demolished equipment and materials be retained at their discretion. 2. Move salvaged equipment and materials to storage areas located at the Site as instructed by Owner. 3. Architectural equipment and materials may be salvaged for incorporation into the Work when approved by Engineer. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 31 13 – Coordination B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures C. Section 01 42 00 – References D. Section 01 51 00 − Temporary Utilities E. Section 01 57 00 − Temporary Controls F. Section 01 66 00 − Product Storage and Protection Requirements G. Section 01 71 33 − Protection of Work and Property H. Section 01 74 00 − Cleaning and Waste Management 1/3/2024 Demolition Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Demolition Cottonwoods Connection Page 02 41 00-3 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Reference Standards: 1. 29 CFR 1910, OSHA 2. ANSI A10, Construction and Demolition Standards B. Definitions: 1. “Salvage” items are equipment and materials shown on the Contract Documents for selective removal by the Contractor to furnish to the Owner. Contractor shall be responsible for removal, handling, and depositing of equipment and material to location designa ted by Owner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Construction electronic documentation as specified in this Section. 2. Demolition Plan: Submit detailed description of methods, equipment, and sequence for demolition Work, including means of ensuring stability of structures during demolition activities. 3. Copies of all photographs and other records from the joint existing conditions surveys. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Remove and demolish equipment and materials in sequence approved by Engineer and Owner. B. Replace equipment and materials removed without proper authorization from Engineer, which are necessary for the operation of the existing facilities. Re - installation of equipment and materials shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no cost to the Owner . PART 2 – EXECUTION 2.01 GENERAL A. Demolition Work shall comply with the applicable provisions and recommendation of ANSI A10.2, Safety Code for Building Construction, all governing codes, and as specified in this Section. 1/3/2024 Demolition Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Demolition Cottonwoods Connection Page 02 41 00-4 B. Furnish competent and experienced personnel for the various type of demolition and removal Work. Demolition and removal Work shall be performed with regard to the safety of Owner employees, individuals at the Site, and the public. C. Confirm absence of embedded utilities prior to cutting, coring, or demolishing existing concrete and facilities. Verification shall be performed by portable x -ray, ground penetrating radar, or other non-invasive methods. 1. Notify Engineer and Owner if embedded utilities are located during the investigation. Clearly mark and document location of embedded utilities prior to performing the Work. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for repair and damages caused by exploration, investigation, and performance of the Work at no additional cost to Owner. D. Remove temporary work, such as enclosures, signs, guards, etc. when such temporary Work is no longer required or when directed at the completion of the Work. E. Perform patching, restoration and Work in accordance with individual Specification Sections and details shown on Contract drawings. F. Contractor shall be responsible for damage caused by demolition Work to existing structures, equipment and materials indicated for reuse or to remain at no additional cost to Owner. G. Maintain a clean working environment during the demolition Work in accordance with Section 01 74 00 − Cleaning and Waste Management. H. Proceed with the demolition work in a sequence designed to maintain existing pipeline and facility operation in accordance with Section 01 31 13 – Coordination. I. Excavation caused by demolition shall be backfilled with fill free from rubbish and debris. Select fill or structural fill shall be used where specifically required on Contract Drawings. J. All debris resulting from the demolition and removal work shall be disposed of by the Contractor at a properly permitted facility as part of the work of this Contract. All regulations covering material handling and disposal shall be followed. Material designated by the Engineer to be salvaged shall be stored on the construction site as directed. All other material shall be disposed of off -site by the Contractor at his expense. Burning of any debris resulting from the demolition will not be permitted at the site. 2.02 PROTECTION DURING DEMOLITION A. Existing trees within project easement shall be protected unless otherwise noted. 1/3/2024 Demolition Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Demolition Cottonwoods Connection Page 02 41 00-5 B. Contractor shall repair or replace to original or better condition all fences removed or damaged by any project work. New fencing shall be installed at original horizontal location unless otherwise shown. C. Provide, erect, and maintain catch platforms, lights, barriers, weather protection, warning signs and other items as required for proper protection of the public, personnel engaged in demolition Work, and adjacent construction. D. Provide and maintain weather protection at exterior openings to fully protect the interior premises against damage from the elements until such openings are closed by the Work. E. Provide and maintain temporary protection of the existing structure designated to remain where demolition, removal and Work is being done, connections made, materials handled, or equipment moved. Temporary protection shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 71 33 − Protection of Work and Property. F. Take necessary precautions to prevent dust from rising by wetting demolished masonry, concrete, plaster, and similar debris. Unaltered portions of the existing buildings affected by the operations in the Contract Documents shall be protected by dust proof partitions and other adequate means. Dust control shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 57 00 − Temporary Controls. G. Provide adequate fire protection in accordance with Section 01 51 00 − Temporary Utilities and authorities having jurisdiction. H. Perform the demolition Work with minimum traffic interference. Do not close or obstruct walkways, passageways, or stairways. Do not store or place materials in passageways, stairs, or other means of egress. 2.03 EQUIPMENT, PIPING, VALVES, AND APPURTENANCES A. Drain equipment, piping, valves, and appurtenances prior to demolition Work. Contractor shall be responsible for collection, transport, and disposal of drained contents at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Provide line stops, plugs, blind flanges, etc. for equipment, piping, valves, and appurtenance required to remain in service during the Project. Contractor shall provide temporary or permanent supports in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Supports, pedestals and anchors shall be removed with the equipment and piping unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents. D. Concrete bases, anchor bolts and other supports shall be removed to approximately 1 inch below the surrounding finished area and the recesses shall be filled with epoxy resin binder. 1/3/2024 Demolition Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Demolition Cottonwoods Connection Page 02 41 00-6 E. Wall and roof openings shall be closed, and damaged surfaces shall be patched to match the adjacent areas, in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer. F. Wall sleeves, wall pipes, and wall castings shall be plugged or blanked off in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer. G. Openings in concrete shall be closed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer. 2.04 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT A. De-energize panelboards, lighting fixtures, switches, circuit breakers, electrical conduits, motors, limit switches, pressure switches, instrumentation such as flow, level and/or other meters, wiring, and similar electrical equipment prior to removal. B. Relocate or isolate electrical equipment and materials that serve equipment, piping, valves, and appurtenance that are to remain in service during the Project. Relocation or isolation Work shall be sequenced and scheduled in accordance with Section 01 31 13 − Coordination. 2.05 REUSED AND RELOCATED EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall receive approval from Engineer prior to removal and relocation of equipment and material. Equipment and materials removed by Contractor prior to Engineer’s approval that is required for Owner’s operation of the facility shall be reinstalled at no cost to the Owner. B. Prior to removal and relocation Work, equipment and materials indicated for reuse and relocation shall be operated by Owner with Contractor and Engineer present to witness existing functionality and operation. C. Provide personnel responsible for reinstallation of equipment and material for the removal Work. D. Contractor shall be responsible and provide storage and protection of equipment and materials in accordance with Section 01 66 00 − Product Storage and Protection Requirements until relocation and reinstallation Work is performed. E. Provide replacement equipment and material that is damaged during the removal Work at new cost to the Owner. Contractor shall be responsible to provide same type, model, electrical components, etc. equipment and material as approved by Engineer and Owner. 2.06 STRUCTURAL REMOVAL A. Provide and install temporary shoring, struts, and bracing required for the demolition Work to ensure stability during entire demolition process. 1/3/2024 Demolition Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Demolition Cottonwoods Connection Page 02 41 00-7 B. Cut and remove structural material at the interface of demolition Work and the existing structural element. Cutting and removal shall occur in small sections, including masonry units, to prevent instability of structural elements. C. Patch, repair, and refinish adjacent surfaces that remain following demolition Work. 1. Adjacent surfaces shall be repaired and refinished to the condition prior to the demolition Work and in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Adjacent surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, grease, loose paint, etc., prior to refinishing. D. Limit cutting of existing roof areas designated to remain to the limits required for the proper installation of the Work. 1. Cut and remove insulation, joists, flashing, membranes, shingles, and metals, etc. in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer for installation of the Work. 2. Provide temporary weather tight protection as required until new roofing and flashings are installed. 2.07 MAINTENANCE DURING DEMOLITION A. Maintain the buildings, structures, and public properties free from accumulations of waste, debris and rubbish, generated by the demolition Work. B. Provide cleaning and waste management of demolition equipment and materials in accordance with Section 01 74 00 − Cleaning and Waste Management. PART 3 – MISCELLANEOUS A. Existing concrete and asphalt paving, curbs, sidewalk , piping, utilities, and structures within the areas designated for new construction work shall be completely demolished and all debris removed from the site. B. Excavation caused by demolition shall be backfilled with fill free from rubbish and debris. Select fill or structural fill shall be used where specifically required on Contract Drawings. C. Work shall be performed in such manner as not to endanger the safety of the workmen or the public or cause damage to nearby structures. D. Provide all barriers and precautionary measures in accordance with Owner's requirements and other authorities having jurisdiction. 1/3/2024 Demolition Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Demolition Cottonwoods Connection Page 02 41 00-8 E. Where parts of existing pavements or structures are to remain in service, demolish the portions to be removed, repair damage, and leave the pavement or structure in proper condition for the intended use. Remove asphalt or concrete pavement, concrete, and masonry to the lines designated by saw-cutting, drilling, chipping, or other suitable methods. Leave the resulting surfaces reasonably true and even, with sharp straight corners that will result in neat joints with new construction and be satisfactory for the purpose intended. Where existing reinforcement extends into new construction, remove the concrete so that the reinforcing is clean and undamaged. Cut off other reinforcing 1/2-inch below the surface and fill with epoxy resin binder flush with the surface. F. Prior to the execution of the work, the Contractor, Owner and Engineer shall jointly survey the condition of the adjoining and/or nearby pavements and structures. Photographs and records shall be made of any prior settlement or cracking of structures, pavements, and the like, that may become the subject of possible damage claims. Contractor shall provide Owner a copy of all records of the joint survey of conditions before demolition activities may begin. 3.02 DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL A. All debris resulting from the demolition and removal work shall be disposed of by the Contractor at a properly permitted facility as part of the work of this Contract. All regulations covering material handling and disposal shall be followed. Material designated by the Engineer to be salvaged shall be stored on the construction site as directed. All other material shall be disposed of off -site by the Contractor at his expense. B. Burning of any debris resulting from the demolition will not be permitted at the site. END OF SECTION 1/3/2024 Demolition Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Formwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 11 00-1 SECTION 03 11 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Provide materials, labor, and equipment required for the design and construction of all concrete formwork, bracing, shoring and supports in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. Text 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 03 21 00  Reinforcing Steel B. Section 03 15 00  Concrete Accessories C. Section 03 15 16  Joints in Concrete D. Section 03 30 00  Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. Building Code for the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. 2. ACI 318  Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 3. ACI 301  Specifications for Structural Concrete 4. ACI 347  Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork 5. U.S. Product Standard for Concrete Forms, Class I, PS 1 6. ACI 117  Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures. 1. Manufacturer's data on proposed form release agent 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Formwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 11 00-2 2. Manufacturer's data on proposed formwork system including form ties 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Concrete formwork shall be in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 318, and ACI 347. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMS AND FALSEWORK A. All forms shall be smooth surface forms unless otherwise specified. B. Wood materials for concrete forms and falsework shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Lumber for bracing, shoring, or supporting forms shall be Douglas Fir or Southern Pine, construction grade or better, in conformance with U.S. Product Standard PS20. All lumber used for forms, shoring or bracing shall be new material. 2. Plywood for concrete formwork shall be new, waterproof, synthetic resin bonded, exterior type Douglas Fir or Southern Pine high density overlaid (HDO) plywood manufactured especially for concrete formwork and shall conform to the requirements of PS1 for Concrete Forms, Class I, and shall be edge sealed. Thickness shall be as required to support concrete at the rate it is placed, but not less than 5/8-inch thick. C. Other form materials such as metal, fiberglass, or other acceptable material that will not adversely affect the concrete and will facilitate placement of concrete to the shape, form, line and grade indicated may be submitted to the Engineer for approval, but only materials that will produce a smooth form finish equal or better than the wood materials specified will be considered. 2.02 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form ties shall be provided with a plastic cone or other suitable means for forming a conical hole to ensure that the form tie may be broken off back of the face of the concrete. The maximum diameter of removable cones for rod ties, or of other removable form-tie fasteners having a circular cross-section, shall not exceed 7/8-inch, and all such fasteners shall be such as to leave holes of regular shape for reaming. B. Form ties for water-retaining structures shall have integral waterstops. Removable taper ties may be used when acceptable to the Engineer. A preformed mechanical EPDM rubber plug shall be used to seal the hole left after the removal of the taper tie. Plug shall be X- Plug by the Sika Corporation or approved equal. Friction fit plugs shall not be used. C. Form release agent shall be a blend of natural and synthetic chemicals that employs a chemical reaction to provide quick, easy and clean release of concrete from forms. It shall Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Formwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 11 00-3 not stain the concrete and shall leave the concrete with a paintable surface. Formulation of the form release agent shall be such that it would minimize formation of "bug holes" in cast-in-place concrete. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FORM DESIGN A. Forms and falsework shall be designed for total dead load, plus all construction live load as outlined in ACI 347. Design and engineering of formwork and safety considerations during construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Forms shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity to maintain their position and shape under the loads and operations incident to placing and vibrating the concrete. The maximum deflection of facing materials reflected in concrete surfaces exposed to view shall be 1/240 of the span between structural members. C. All forms shall be designed for predetermined placing rates per hour, considering expected air temperatures and setting rates. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION A. The type, size, quality, and strength of all materials from which forms are made shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. No falsework or forms shall be used which are not clean and suitable. Deformed, broken or defective falsework and forms shall be removed from the work. B. Forms shall be smooth and free from surface irregularities. Suitable and effective means shall be provided on all forms for holding adjacent edges and ends of panels and sections tightly together and in accurate alignment so as to prevent the formation of ridges, fins, offsets, or similar surface defects in the finished concrete. Joints between the forms shall be sealed to eliminate any irregularities. The arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly and symmetrical, with the number of seams kept to a practical minimum. C. Forms shall be true to line and grade and shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent displacement and sagging between supports. Curved forms shall be used for curved and circular structures. Straight panels joined at angles will not be acceptable for forming curved structures. Forms shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain their position and shape under a load of freshly placed concrete. Facing material shall be supported with studs or other backing which shall prevent both visible deflection marks in the concrete and deflections beyond the tolerances specified. D. Forms shall be mortar tight to prevent the loss of water, cement and fines during placing and vibrating of the concrete. Specifically, the bottom of wall forms that rest on concrete footings or slabs shall be provided with a gasket to prevent loss of fines and paste during placement and vibration of concrete. Such gasket may be a 1 to 1-1/2-inch diameter polyethylene rod held in position to the underside of the wall form. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Formwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 11 00-4 E. All vertical surfaces of concrete members shall be formed, and side forms shall be provided for all footings, slab edges and grade beams, except where placement of the concrete against the ground is called for on the Drawings. Not less than 1-inch of concrete shall be added to the thickness of the concrete member as shown where concrete is permitted to be placed against trimmed ground in lieu of forms. Such permission will be granted only for members of comparatively limited height and where the character of the ground is such that it can be trimmed to the required lines and will stand securely without caving or sloughing until the concrete has been placed. F. All forms shall be constructed in such a manner that they can be removed without hammering or prying against the concrete. Wood forms shall be constructed for wall openings to facilitate loosening and to counteract swelling of the forms. G. Adequate cleanout holes shall be provided at the bottom of each lift of forms. Temporary openings shall be provided at the base of column forms and wall forms and at other points to facilitate cleaning and observation immediately before the concrete is deposited. The size, number and location of such cleanouts shall be as acceptable to the Engineer. H. Construction joints shall not be permitted at locations other than those shown or specified, except as may be acceptable to the Engineer. When a second lift is placed on hardened concrete, special precautions shall be taken in the way of the number, location and tightening of ties at the top of the old lift and bottom of the new to prevent any unsatisfactory effect whatsoever on the concrete. For flush surfaces at construction joints exposed to view, the contact surface of the form sheathing over the hardened concrete in the previous placement shall be lapped by not more than 1 inch. Forms shall be held against hardened concrete to prevent offset or loss of mortar at construction joints and to maintain a true surface. I. The formwork shall be cambered to compensate for anticipated deflections in the formwork due to the weight and pressure of the fresh concrete and due to construction loads. Set forms and intermediate screed strips for slabs accurately to produce the designated elevations and contours of the finished surface. Ensure that edge forms and screed strips are sufficiently strong to support vibrating screeds or roller pipe screeds if the nature of the finish specified requires the use of such equipment. When formwork is cambered, set screeds to a like camber to maintain the proper concrete thickness. J. Positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) for shores and struts shall be provided and all settlement shall be taken up during concrete placing operation. Shores and struts shall be securely braced against lateral deflections. Wedges shall be fastened firmly in place after final adjustment of forms prior to concrete placement. Formwork shall be anchored to shores or other supporting surfaces or members to prevent upward or lateral movement of any part of the formwork system during concrete placement. If adequate foundation for shores cannot be secured, trussed supports shall be provided. K. Runways shall be provided for moving equipment with struts or legs. Runways shall be supported directly on the formwork or structural member without resting on the reinforcing steel. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Formwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 11 00-5 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, formwork shall be constructed so that the concrete surfaces will conform to the tolerance limits listed in ACI 117. B. Structural framing of reinforced concrete around elevators and stairways shall be accurately plumbed and located within 1/4 in. tolerance from established dimensions. C. The Contractor shall establish and maintain in an undisturbed condition and until final completion and acceptance of the project, sufficient control points and benchmarks to be used for reference purposes to check tolerances. Plumb and string lines shall be installed before concrete placement and shall be maintained during placement. Such lines shall be used by Contractor's personnel and by the Engineer and shall be in sufficient number and properly installed. During concrete placement, the Contractor shall continually monitor plumb and string line form positions and immediately correct deficiencies. D. Regardless of the tolerances specified, no portion of the structure shall extend beyond the legal boundary of the structure. 3.04 FORM ACCESSORIES A. Suitable moldings shall be placed to bevel or round all exposed corners and edges of beams, columns, walls, slabs, and equipment pads. Chamfers shall be 3/4 inch unless otherwise noted. B. Form ties shall be so constructed that the ends, or end fasteners, can be removed without causing appreciable spalling at the faces of the concrete. After ends, or end fasteners of form ties have been removed, the embedded portion of the ties shall terminate not less than 2 inches from the formed face of the concrete that is exposed to water or enclosed surfaces above the water surface, and not less than 1 inch from the formed face of all other concrete. Holes left by the removal of form tie cones shall be reamed with suitable toothed reamers to leave the surface of the holes clean and rough before being filled with mortar as specified in Section 03 35 00  Concrete Finishes. No form-tying device or part thereof, other than metal, shall be left embedded in the concrete. Ties shall not be removed in such manner as to leave a hole extending through the interior of the concrete member. The use of snap-ties which cause spalling of the concrete upon form stripping or tie removal will not be permitted. No snap ties shall be broken off until the concrete is at least three days old. If steel panel forms are used, rubber grommets shall be provided where the ties pass through the form in order to prevent loss of cement paste. 3.05 APPLICATION  FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Forms for concrete surfaces that will not be subsequently waterproofed shall be coated with a form release agent. Form release agent shall be applied on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Formwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 11 00-6 3.06 INSERTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Sleeves, pipe stubs, inserts, anchors, expansion joint material, waterstops, and other embedded items shall be positioned accurately and supported against displacement prior to concreting. Voids in sleeves, inserts, and anchor slots shall be filled temporarily with readily removable material to prevent the entry of concrete into the voids. 3.07 FORM CLEANING AND REUSE A. The inner faces of all forms shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to concreting. Forms may be reused only if in good condition and only if acceptable to the Engineer. Light sanding between uses will be required wherever necessary to obtain uniform surface texture. Unused tie rod holes in forms shall be covered with metal caps or shall be filled by other methods acceptable to the Engineer. 3.08 FORM REMOVAL AND SHORING A. Forms shall not be disturbed until the concrete has attained sufficient strength. Sufficient strength shall be demonstrated by structural analysis considering proposed loads, strength of forming and shoring system, and concrete strength data. Shoring shall not be removed until the supported member has acquired sufficient strength to support its weight and the load upon it. Members subject to additional loads during construction shall be adequately shored to sustain all resulting stresses. Forms shall be removed in such manner as not to impair safety and serviceability of the structure. All concrete to be exposed by form removal shall have sufficient strength not to be damaged thereby. B. Provided the strength requirements specified above have been met and subject to the Engineer's approval, forms may be removed at the following minimum times. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the strength of all such components from which forms are removed prior to the concrete attaining its full design compressive strength. Shoring may be required at the option of the Engineer beyond these periods. Ambient Temperature (°F.) During Concrete Placement Over 95° 70°-95° 60°-70° 50°-60° Below 50° Edge Forms for Slabs on Grade 1 day 1 day 1 day 1 day Walls 5 days 2 days 2 days 3 days Columns 7 days 2 days 3 days 4 days Beam Soffits 10 days 7 days 7 days 7 days Elevated Slabs 12 days 7 days 7 days 7 days Do not remove until directed by Engineer (7 days minimum) C. When, in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions of the work or weather justify, forms may be required to remain in place for longer periods of time. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Formwork Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 11 00-7 D. An accurate record shall be maintained by the Contractor of the dates of concrete placings and the exact location thereof and the dates of removal of forms. These records shall always be available for inspection at the site, and two copies shall be furnished the Engineer upon completion of the concrete work. 3.09 RESHORING A. When reshoring is permitted or required the operations shall be planned and subjected to approval by the Engineer. B. Reshores shall be placed after stripping operations are complete but in no case later than the end of the working day on which stripping occurs. C. Reshoring for the purpose of early form removal shall be performed so that at no time will large areas of new construction be required to support their own weight. While reshoring is under way, no construction or live loads shall be permitted on the new construction. Reshores shall be tightened to carry their required loads but they shall not be overtightened so that the new construction is overstressed. Reshores shall remain in place until the concrete has reached its specified 28-day strength, unless otherwise specified. D. For floors supporting shores under newly placed concrete, the original supporting shores shall remain in place or reshores shall be placed. The shoring or reshoring system shall have a capacity sufficient to resist the anticipated loads and, in all cases, shall have a capacity equal to at least one-half of the capacity of the shoring system above. Reshores shall be located directly under a reshore position above unless other locations are permitted. E. In multi-story buildings, reshoring shall extend over a sufficient number of stories to distribute the weight of newly placed concrete, forms, and construction live loads so the design superimposed loads of the floors supporting shores are not exceeded. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Accessories Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 15 00-1 SECTION 03 15 00 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all materials, labor and equipment required to provide all concrete accessories including waterstops, expansion joint material, joint sealants, expansion joint seals, crack inducing joint inserts, epoxy bonding agent, and neoprene bearing pads. Text 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 03 11 00  Concrete Formwork B. Section 03 15 16  Joints in Concrete C. Section 03 30 00  Cast-in-Place Concrete D. Section 07 90 00  Joint Fillers, Sealants, and Caulking 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. ASTM C881  Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete 2. ASTM D412  Standard Tests for Rubber Properties in Tension 3. ASTM D 624  Standard Test method for Rubber Property - Tear Resistance 4. ASTM D 638  Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics 5. ASTM D1751  Standard Specifications for Preformed Expansion Joint fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (non-extruding and resilient bituminous types) 6. ASTM D 1752  Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction 7. ASTM D 1171  Standard Test Method for Ozone Resistance at 500 pphm 8. ASTM D 471  Standard Test Method for Rubber Properties 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Accessories Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 15 00-2 9. ASTM D 2240 – Standard Test for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures. 1. Manufacturer's literature on all products specified herein including material certifications. 2. Proposed system for supporting PVC waterstops in position during concrete placement. 3. Samples of products if requested by the Engineer. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) WATERSTOPS A. PVC waterstops for construction joints shall be flat ribbed type, 6 inches wide with a minimum thickness at any point of 3/8 inches. B. Waterstops for expansion joints shall be ribbed with a center bulb. They shall be 9 inches wide with a minimum thickness at any point of 3/8 inch unless shown or specified otherwise. The center bulb shall have a minimum outside diameter of 1 inch and a minimum inside diameter of 1/2 inch. C. The waterstops shall be manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride plastic compound and shall not contain any scrap or reclaimed material or pigment whatsoever. The properties of the polyvinyl chloride compound used, as well as the physical properties of the waterstops, shall exceed the requirements of the U.S. Army Corps. of Engineers' Specification CRDC572. The waterstop material shall have an off-white, milky color. D. The required minimum physical characteristics for this material are: 1. Tensile strength  1,750 psi (ASTM D-638). 2. Ultimate elongation  not less than 280% (ASTM D-638). E. No reclaimed PVC shall be used for the manufacturing of the waterstops. The Contractor shall furnish certification that the proposed waterstops meet the above requirements. F. PVC waterstops shall be as manufactured by BoMetals, Inc., DuraJoint Concrete Accessories, or Sika Greenstreak. G. All waterstop intersections, both vertical and horizontal, shall be made from factory fabricated corners and transitions. Only straight butt joint splices shall be made in field. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Accessories Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 15 00-3 2.02 RETROFIT WATERSTOPS A. Retrofit waterstops shall be used where specifically shown on Drawings for sealing joints between existing concrete construction and new construction. B. Retrofit waterstops shall be PVC waterstops fabricated from material as described in Section 2.01 of this Specification. C. Retrofit waterstop shall be attached to existing concrete surface as shown on Drawings. D. Use of split waterstop in lieu of specially fabricated retrofit waterstop will not be acceptable. E. E. Retrofit Waterstop manufacturer must provide a complete system including all Waterstop, stainless steel anchoring hardware, and epoxy for installation. F. For construction joints, retrofit waterstop shall be style number 609 by Sika Greenstreak, RF-638 by BoMetals, Inc., or approved equal. For expansion joints, retrofit waterstop shall be style number 667 by Sika Greenstreak, RF-912 by BoMetals, Inc., Type 36RT Retrofit Kit by DuraJoint Concrete Accessories, or approved equal. 2.03 CHEMICAL RESISTANT WATERSTOPS A. Where specifically noted on Contract Drawings, chemical resistant waterstops shall be used instead of PVC waterstops. B. Chemical resistant waterstops for construction joints shall be ribbed with a center bulb. They shall be 6 inches wide with a minimum thickness at any point of 3/16 inches. C. Chemical resistant waterstops for expansion joints shall be ribbed tear web. They shall be 9 inches wide with a tear web designed to accommodate 1 inch of free movement minimum. D. Chemical resistant retrofit waterstop shall be a minimum of 2½” wide along the ribbed side and a minimum 5” wide along the side attached to the existing concrete surface. Retrofit waterstop shall include a center bulb and shall have a minimum thickness of 3/16”. Retrofit waterstop manufacturer shall provide a complete system including waterstop, stainless steel anchoring hardware and epoxy for installation. E. Chemical resistant waterstops shall be manufactured from a fully crosslinked thermoplastic vulcanizate rubber. F. Waterstops shall be TPER by BoMetals, Inc., Earth Shield TPV/TPE-R by JP Specialties, Inc., Westec TPER by Westec Barrier Technologies, or TPE-R by DuraJoint Concrete Accessories. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Accessories Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 15 00-4 2.04 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE PATCH A. Waterproof membrane patch shall be Sikadur Combiflex by Sika Corporation or approved equal. Minimum width of waterstop material shall be twelve (12) inches unless shown otherwise on Contract Drawings. 2.05 HYDROPHILIC WATERSTOPS A. Hydrophilic waterstops shall be designed to expand under hydrostatic conditions. For hydrostatic head pressure greater than 25 feet, waterstops shall be Adeka Ultra Seal MC-2010MN by Adeka Ultra Seal/OCM, Inc., or Hydrotite CJ-1020-2K by Sika Greenstreak. For hydrostatic head pressure 25 feet or less, Adeka Ultra Seal KBA- 1510FP or Hydrotite CJ-1020-2K shall be used. Concrete cover and confinement requirements shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Waterstops shall be fabricated from a chemically modified natural rubber product with a hydrophilic agent. Use of bentonite based waterstop material will not be allowed. C. Waterstops shall either contain an interior stainless-steel mesh or an interior coextrusion of non-hydrophilic rubber to ensure expansion occurs along the width and thickness of the waterstop thereby restricting the expansion in the longitudinal direction. 2.06 WATERSTOP ADHESIVE A. Adhesive between waterstops and existing concrete shall be Neoprene Adhesive 77-198 by JGF Adhesives, Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel by Sika Corporation, DP-605 NS Urethane Adhesive by 3M Adhesive Systems. B. Hydrophilic, non-bentonite water swelling elastic sealant shall be used to bond hydrophilic waterstops to rough surfaces. Hydrophilic elastic sealant shall be P-201 by Adeka Ultra Seal/OCM, Inc., Leakmaster LV-Z by Sika Greenstreak, or approved equal. 2.07 JOINT SEALANTS A. Joint sealants shall comply with Section 07 90 00  Joint Fillers, Sealants, and Caulking. 2.08 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL A. Preformed expansion joint material shall be non-extruding, and shall be of the following types: 1. Type I  Sponge rubber, conforming to ASTM D1752, Type I. 2. Type II Cork, conforming to ASTM D1752, Type II. 3. Type III  Self-expanding cork, conforming to ASTM D1752, Type III. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Accessories Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 15 00-5 4. Type IV  Bituminous fiber, conforming to ASTM Designation D1751. 2.09 EXPANSION JOINT SEAL A. Expansion Joint Seal System shall consist of a preformed neoprene profile, installed using the same dimensions as the joint gap, bonded with a two-component epoxy adhesive, and pressurized during the adhesive cure time. B. The expansion joint system shall be Hydrozo/Jeene Structural Sealing joint system by Hydrozo/Jeene, Inc. 2.10 CRACK INDUCING JOINT INSERTS A. Crack inducing joint inserts shall be Zip-Cap by Greenstreak Plastic Products, Zip-Joint by BoMetals, Inc. 2.11 EPOXY BONDING AGENT A. Epoxy bonding agent shall conform to ASTM C881 and shall be Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod, Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, N.J.; Euco #452 Epoxy System, Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, OH, MasterEmaco ADH Series by Master Builders Solutions. 2.12 EPOXY RESIN BINDER A. Epoxy resin binder shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-881, Type III, Grade 3, Class B and C for epoxy resin binder and shall be Sikadur 23, Low-Mod-Gel, manufactured by the Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, N.J., Flexocrete Gel manufactured by DuraJoint Concrete Accessories or Euco #352 Gel, Euclid Chemical Company, MasterEmaco ADH 327 or 327 RS by Master Builders Solutions. 2.13 BEARING PADS A. Neoprene bearing pads shall conform to requirements of A4-F3-T.063-B2, Grade 2, Method B, in accordance with the RMA Rubber Handbook. Pads shall be nonlaminated pads having a nominal Shore A durometer hardness of 70 in accordance with ASTM D2240. Adhesive for use with neoprene pads shall be an epoxy-resin compound compatible with the neoprene having a sufficient shear strength to prevent slippage between pads and adjacent bearing surfaces. Adhesive shall be 20+F Contact Cement by Miracle Adhesives Corporation, Neoprene Adhesive 77-198 by IGI Adhesives, Sikadur 31, Hi-Mod Gel by Sika Corporation, or DP-605 NS Urethane Adhesive by 3M Adhesive Systems. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Accessories Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 15 00-6 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PVC AND CHEMICAL RESISTANT WATERSTOPS A. PVC and chemical resistant waterstops shall be provided in all construction and expansion joints in water bearing structures and at other such locations as required by the Drawings. B. Waterstops shall be carefully positioned so that they are embedded to an equal depth in concrete on both sides of the joint. They shall be kept free from oil, grease, mortar or other foreign matter. To ensure proper placement, all waterstops shall be secured in correct position at 12" on center along the length of the waterstop on each side, prior to placing concrete. Such method of support shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. Grommets or small pre-punched holes as close to the edges as possible will be acceptable for securing waterstops. C. Splices in PVC waterstops and chemical resistant waterstops shall be made with a thermostatically controlled heating element. Only straight butt joint splices will be allowed in the field. Factory fabricated corners and transitions shall be used at all intersections. Splices shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommended instructions and procedures. At least three satisfactory sample splices shall be made on the site. The Engineer may require tests on these splices by an approved laboratory. The splices shall exhibit not less than 80 percent of the strength of the unspliced material. D. All splices in waterstops will be subject to rigid review for misalignment, bubbles, inadequate bond, porosity, cracks, offsets, discoloration, charring, and other defects which would reduce the potential resistance of the material to water pressure at any point. All defective joints shall be replaced with material which will pass said review and all faulty material shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Retrofit waterstops shall be installed as shown on Contract Drawings using approved waterstop adhesive and Type 316 stainless steel batten bars and expansion anchors. F. Waterstop installation and splicing defects which are unacceptable include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Tensile strength less than 80 percent of parent material. 2. Overlapped (not spliced) Waterstop. 3. Misalignment of waterstop geometry at any point greater than 1/16 inch. 4. Visible porosity or charred or burnt material in weld area. 5. Visible signs of splice separation when splice (24 hours or greater) is bent by hand at sharp angle. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Accessories Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 15 00-7 3.02 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE PATCH AND HYDROPHILIC WATERSTOPS A. Patches and waterstops shall be installed only where shown on the Drawings. B. Patches and waterstops shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 WATERSTOP ADHESIVE A. Adhesive shall be applied to both contact surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Adhesive shall be used where waterstops are attached to existing concrete surfaces. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL AND SEALANTS A. Type I, II, or III shall be used in all expansion joints in structures and concrete pavements unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings. Type IV shall be used in sidewalk and curbing and other locations specifically shown on the Drawings. B. All expansion joints exposed in the finish work, exterior and interior, shall be sealed with the specified joint sealant. Expansion joint material and sealants shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures and as shown on the Drawings. C. Expansion joint material that will be exposed after removal of forms shall be cut and trimmed to ensure a neat appearance and shall completely fill the joint except for the space required for the sealant. The material shall be held securely in place and no concrete shall be allowed to enter the joint or the space for the sealant and destroy the proper functions of the joint. D. A bond breaker shall be used between expansion joint material and sealant. The joint shall be thoroughly clean and free from dirt and debris before the primer and the sealant are applied. Where the finished joint will be visible, masking of the adjoining surfaces shall be carried out to avoid their discoloration. The sealant shall be neatly tooled into place and its finished surfaces shall present a clean and even appearance. E. Type 1 joint sealant shall be used in all expansion and crack inducing joints in concrete, except where other specific types are required as stated below, and wherever else specified or shown on the Drawings. Sealant shall be furnished in pour grade or gun grade depending on installation requirements. Primers shall be used as required by the manufacturer. The sealant shall be furnished in colors as directed by the Engineer. 3.05 EXPANSION JOINT SEAL A. The expansion joint seal system shall be installed as shown on the Drawings in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Accessories Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 15 00-8 3.06 CRACK INDUCING JOINT INSERTS A. For joints in slabs, inserts shall be floated in fresh concrete during finishing. B. For joints in walls, inserts shall be secured in place prior to casting wall. C. Inserts shall be installed true to line at the locations of all joints as shown on the Drawings. D. Inserts shall extend into concrete sufficient depth as indicated on the Drawings or specified in Section 03 15 16  Joints in Concrete. E. Inserts shall not be removed from concrete until concrete has cured sufficiently to prevent chipping or spalling of joint edges due to inadequate concrete strength. 3.07 EPOXY BONDING AGENT A. The Contractor shall use an epoxy bonding agent for bonding fresh concrete to existing concrete as shown on the Drawings. B. Bonding surface shall be clean, sound, and free of all dust, laitance, grease, form release agents, curing compounds, and any other foreign particles. C. Application of bonding agent shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Fresh concrete shall not be placed against existing concrete if epoxy bonding agent has lost its tackiness. 3.08 EPOXY RESIN BINDER A. Epoxy resin binder shall be used to seal all existing rebar cut and burned off during demolition operations. Exposed rebar shall be burned back 1/2-inch minimum into existing concrete and the resulting void filled with epoxy resin binder. 3.09 BEARING PADS A. Care shall be taken in fabricating pads and related metal parts so effects detrimental to the proper performance of the pads, such as uneven bearing and excessive bulging, will not occur. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Joints in Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 15 16-1 SECTION 03 15 16 JOINTS IN CONCRETE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Provide all materials, labor and equipment required for the construction of all joints in concrete specified herein and shown on the Drawings. B. Types of joints in concrete shall be defined as follows: 1. Construction Joints – Intentionally created formed joints between adjacent concrete placements with 100% of reinforcement continuous through joint. 2. Expansion Joints – Formed joints in concrete which separate adjacent sections to allow movement due to dimensional increases and reduction of adjacent sections (temperature and shrinkage). Reinforcement terminates within concrete on each side of joint. Expansion joints may also be considered isolation joints. 3. Full Contraction Joints – Formed contraction joints with no bonded reinforcement passing through the joint. a. Partial Contraction Joints – Formed contraction joints with no more than 50% of bonded reinforcement passing through the joint. 4. Crack Inducing Joints – Joints formed, tooled, or sawcut in a monolithic placement to create a weakened plane to regulate the location of crack formation due to dimensional reduction of adjacent sections (shrinkage). 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 03 11 00  Concrete Formwork B. Section 03 15 00  Concrete Accessories C. Section 03 30 00  Cast-in-Place Concrete D. Section 07 90 00  Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Joints in Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 15 16-2 1. ACI 301  Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings 2. ACI 318  Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 3. ACI 350 – Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures 4. ACI 224.3 – Joints in Concrete Construction 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures. 1. Layout drawings showing location and type of all joints to be placed in each structure. 2. Details of proposed joints in each structure. 3. For sawcut crack-inducing joints, submit documentation indicating the following: a. Proposed method of sawcutting indicating early entry or conventional sawing. b. Description of how work is to be performed including equipment to be utilized, size of crew performing the work and curing methods. c. Description of alternate method in case of time constraint issues or failure of equipment. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials required for joint construction shall comply with Section 03 15 00 - Concrete Accessories and Section 07 90 00  Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Construction joints shall be as shown on the Drawings. Otherwise, Contractor shall submit description of the joint and proposed location to Engineer for approval. All joints shall be construction joints or expansion joints unless otherwise specified on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer on the joint plan submittal. B. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, construction joints shall be located near the middle of the spans of slabs, beams, and girders unless a beam intersects a girder at Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Joints in Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 15 16-3 this point. In this case, the joints in the girders shall be offset a distance equal to twice the width of the beam. Joints in walls and columns shall be at the underside of floors, slabs, beams, or girders and the top of footings or floor slabs unless noted otherwise on Drawings. Beams, girders, brackets, column capitals, haunches, and drop panels shall be placed at the same time as slabs. Joints shall be perpendicular to the main reinforcement. C. Maximum distance between horizontal joints in slabs and vertical joints in walls shall be 50’-0”. For exposed walls with fluid or earth on the opposite side, the spacing between vertical and horizontal joints shall be a maximum of 25’-0”. D. All corners shall be part of a continuous placement, and should a construction joint be required, the joint shall not be located closer than five feet from a corner. E. All reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric shall be continued across construction joints. Keys and inclined dowels shall be provided as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Longitudinal keys shall be provided in all joints in walls and between walls and slabs or footings, except as specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. Size of keys shall be as shown on the Drawings. F. All joints in water bearing structures shall have a waterstop. All joints below grade in walls or slabs which enclose an accessible area shall have a waterstop. G. Joint plan of walls and slabs shall consider aspect ratio to create placement of sections as close to square as possible. Aspect ratio is defined as the ratio of plan dimensions for slab sections and length to height placement of wall sections. Aspect ratios shall be between 0.65 and 1.5. 3.02 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Size and location of expansion joints shall be as shown on the Drawings. All joints shall be construction joints or expansion joints unless otherwise specified on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer on the joint plan submittal. B. All expansion joints in water-bearing structures shall have a center-bulb type waterstop. All expansion joints below grade in walls or slabs which enclose an accessible area shall have a center-bulb type waterstop. Waterstop shall be as shown on Drawings and specified in Section 03 15 00 – Concrete Accessories. 3.03 JOINT PREPARATION A. No concrete shall be allowed to enter the joint or the space for the sealant and destroy the proper functions of the joint. B. The surface of the concrete at all joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and all laitance removed by wire brushing, air or light sand blasting. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Joints in Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 15 16-4 C. The joint shall be thoroughly clean and free from dirt and debris before the primer and the sealant are applied. Where the finished joint will be visible, masking of the adjoining surfaces shall be carried out to avoid their discoloration. The sealant shall be neatly tooled into place and its finished surface shall present a clean and even appearance. D. All joints shall be sealed as shown on the Drawings and specified in Section 03 15 00  Concrete Accessories. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Reinforcing Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 21 00-1 SECTION 03 21 00 REINFORCING STEEL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Provide all concrete reinforcing including all cutting, bending, fastening and any special work necessary to hold the reinforcing steel in place and protect it from injury and corrosion in accordance with the requirements of this section. B. Provide deformed reinforcing bars to be grouted into reinforced concrete masonry walls. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 03 11 00 – Concrete Formwork B. Section 03 15 00 – Concrete Accessories C. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete D. Section 03 40 00 – Precast Concrete 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. Building Code for the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. 2. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Institute Manual of Standard Practice 3. ACI SP66 - ACI Detailing Manual 4. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcing 5. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 6. WRI - Manual of Standard Practice for Welded Wire Fabric 7. ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 8. ASTM A 1064 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Reinforcing Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 21 00-2 9. ASTM E 3121 – Standard Test Methods for Field Testing of Anchors in Concrete or Masonry 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures. 1. Detailed placing and shop fabricating drawings, prepared in accordance with ACI 315 and ACI Detailing Manual - (SP66), shall be furnished for all concrete reinforcing. These drawings shall be made to such a scale as to clearly show joint locations, openings, and the arrangement, spacing and splicing of the bars. 2. Detailed placing and shop fabricating drawings, prepared in accordance with ACI 315 and ACI Detailing Manual - (SP66), shall be furnished for all deformed bar reinforcing used in masonry. These drawings shall be made to such a scale as to clearly show joint locations, openings, and the arrangement, locations, spacing and splicing of the bars. 3. Mill test certificates - 3 copies of each. 4. Description of the reinforcing steel manufacturer's marking pattern. 5. Requests to relocate any bars that cause interferences or that cause placing tolerances to be violated. 6. Proposed supports for each type of reinforcing. 7. Request to use splices not shown on the Drawings. 8. Request to use mechanical couplers along with manufacturer's literature on mechanical couplers with instructions for installation, and certified test reports on the couplers' capacity. 9. Request for placement of column dowels without the use of templates. 10. Request and procedure to field bend or straighten partially embedded reinforcing. 11. International Code Council–Evaluation Services Report (ICC-ES ESR) for dowel adhesives. 12. Certification that all installers of dowel adhesive systems in horizontal to vertically overhead applications are certified as Adhesive Anchor Installers in accordance with the ACI-CRSI Anchor Installer Certification Program. 13. Adhesive dowel testing plan. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Reinforcing Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 21 00-3 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide samples from each load of reinforcing steel delivered in a quantity adequate for testing. Costs of initial tests will be paid by the Owner. Costs of additional tests due to material failing initial tests shall be paid by the Contractor. B. Provide a list of names of all installers who are trained by the Manufacturer’s Field Representative on this jobsite prior to installation of products. Record must include the installer name, date of training, products included in the training and trainer name and contact information. C. Provide a copy of the current ACI/CRSI “Adhesive Anchor Installer” certification cards, or equivalent, for all installers who will be installing adhesive anchors in the horizontal to vertically overhead orientation. D. Special inspections for adhesive dowels shall be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and Specification Section 01 45 33 – Special Inspections. Downward installations require periodic inspection and horizontal and overhead installations require continuous inspection. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCING STEEL A. Bar reinforcing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 615 for Grade 60 deformed billet-steel reinforcing. All reinforcing steel shall be from domestic mills and shall have the manufacturer's mill marking rolled into the bar which shall indicate the producer, size, type, and grade. All reinforcing bars shall be deformed bars. Smooth reinforcing bars shall not be used unless specifically called for on Drawings. B. Welded wire fabric reinforcing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 1064 and the details shown on the Drawings. C. A certified copy of the mill test on each load of reinforcing steel delivered showing physical and chemical analysis shall be provided, prior to shipment. The Engineer reserves the right to require the Contractor to obtain separate test results from an independent testing laboratory in the event of any questionable steel. When such tests are necessary because of failure to comply with this Specification, such as improper identification, the cost of such tests shall be borne by the Contractor. D. Field welding of reinforcing steel will not be allowed. E. Use of coiled reinforcing steel will not be allowed. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Reinforcing Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 21 00-4 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Accessories shall include all necessary chairs, slab bolsters, concrete blocks, tie wires, dips, supports, spacers, and other devices to position reinforcing during concrete placement. Wire bar supports shall be plastic protected (CRSI Class 1). B. Concrete blocks (dobies), used to support and position bottom reinforcing steel, shall have the same or higher compressive strength as specified for the concrete in which it is located. 2.03 MECHANICAL COUPLERS A. Mechanical couplers shall develop a tensile strength which exceeds 100 percent of the ultimate tensile strength and 125 percent of the yield strength of the reinforcing bars being spliced. The reinforcing steel and coupler used shall be compatible for obtaining the required strength of the connection. B. Where the type of coupler used is composed of more than one component, all components required for a complete splice shall be supplied. C. Hot forged sleeve type couplers shall not be used. Acceptable mechanical couplers are Dayton Superior Dowel Bar Splicer System by Dayton Superior, Dayton, Ohio, or approved equal. Mechanical couplers shall only be used where shown on the Drawings or where specifically approved by the Engineer. D. Where the threaded rebar to be inserted into the coupler reduces the diameter of the bar, the threaded rebar piece shall be provided by the coupler manufacturer. 2.04 DOWEL ADHESIVE SYSTEM A. Where shown on the Drawings, reinforcing bars anchored into hardened concrete with a dowel adhesive system shall use a two-component adhesive mix which shall be injected with a static mixing nozzle following manufacturer's instructions. B. All holes shall be drilled in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions except that core drilled holes shall not be permitted unless specifically allowed by the Engineer. Cored holes, if allowed by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer, shall be roughened in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. C. Thoroughly clean drill holes of all debris, drill dust, and water in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to installation of adhesive and reinforcing bar. D. Degree of hole dampness shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Installation conditions shall be dry, or water saturated unless otherwise permitted by the engineer. If water saturated installation is approved, appropriate reduction factors in accordance with manufacturer’s design requirements should be considered. Water filled or submerged holes shall not be permitted unless specifically approved by the Engineer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Reinforcing Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 21 00-5 E. Injection of adhesive into the hole shall be performed in a manner to minimize the formation of air pockets in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. F. Embedment Depth: 1. The embedment depth of the bar shall be as shown on the Drawings. Although all manufacturers listed below are permitted, the embedment depth shown on the Drawings is based on “Pure 110+” by DeWalt” ESR 3298 issued 7/2022 If the Contractor submits one of the other named dowel adhesives from the list below, the Engineer shall evaluate the required embedment and the Contractor shall provide the required embedment depth stipulated by the Engineer specific to the approved dowel adhesive. 2. Where the embedment depth is not shown on the Drawings, the embedment depth shall be determined to provide the minimum allowable bond strength equal to the tensile strength of the rebar according to the manufacturer’s ICC-ES ESR. 3. The embedment depth shall be determined using design parameters listed below. In no case shall the embedment depth be less than the minimum, or more than the maximum, embedment depths stated in the manufacturer’s ICC-ES ESR. 4. Design of adhesive anchor system shall be based on the following parameters: a. Actual compressive strength of concrete. b. Cracked concrete state. c. Dry or water saturated condition for installation. d. Base material temperature between 40- and 104-degrees Fahrenheit. e. Installation with either a hammer drill with carbide bit or hollow-drill bit system drilling methods. f. Minimum age of concrete 21 days at time of installation. G. Engineer's approval is required for use of this system in locations other than those shown on the Drawings. H. The adhesive system shall be IBC compliant for use in both cracked and uncracked concrete in all Seismic Design Categories and shall be "HIT-HY 200 Adhesive Anchoring System" as manufactured by Hilti, Inc. “SET-3G Epoxy Adhesive Anchors” as manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie Co. or “Pure 110+ Epoxy Adhesive Anchor System” by DeWalt. Fast-set epoxy formulations shall not be acceptable. No or equal products will be considered, unless pre-qualified and approved. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Reinforcing Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 21 00-6 I. All individuals installing dowel adhesive systems in horizontal to vertically overhead applications shall be certified as an Adhesive Anchor Installer in accordance with the ACI-CRSI Anchor Installation Certification Program, or equivalent. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately formed to the dimensions and shapes shown on the Drawings and the fabricating details shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 315 and ACI 318, except as modified by the Drawings. B. The Contractor shall fabricate reinforcing bars for structures in accordance with the bending diagrams, placing lists and placing Drawings. C. No fabrication shall commence until approval of Shop Drawings has been obtained. All reinforcing bars shall be shop fabricated unless approved to be bent in the field. Reinforcing bars shall not be straightened or bent in a manner that will injure the material. Heating of bars will not be permitted. D. Welded wire fabric with longitudinal wire of W9.5 size or smaller shall be either furnished in flat sheets or in rolls with a core diameter of not less than 10 inches. Welded wire fabric with longitudinal wires larger than W9.5 size shall be furnished in flat sheets only. 3.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All reinforcing shall be neatly bundled and tagged for placement when delivered to the job site. Bundles shall be properly identified for coordination with mill test reports. B. Reinforcing steel shall be stored above ground on platforms or other supports and shall always be protected from the weather by suitable covering. Reinforcing steel shall be stored in an orderly manner and plainly marked to facilitate identification. C. Reinforcing steel shall always be protected from conditions conducive to corrosion until concrete is placed around it. D. The surfaces of all reinforcing steel and other metalwork to be in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, grease, loose scale and rust, grout, mortar and other foreign substances immediately before the concrete is placed. Where delay in depositing concrete occurs, reinforcing shall be inspected again and if necessary recleaned. 3.03 PLACING A. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately positioned as shown on the Drawings and shall be supported and wired together to prevent displacement, using annealed iron wire ties or suitable clips at intersections. All reinforcing steel shall be supported by concrete, plastic Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Reinforcing Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 21 00-7 or plastic protected (CRSI Class 1) metal supports, spacers or metal hangers which are strong and rigid enough to prevent any displacement of the reinforcing steel. Where concrete is to be placed on the ground, supporting concrete blocks (or dobies) shall be used in sufficient numbers to support the reinforcing bars without settlement. In no case shall concrete block supports be continuous. B. The portions of all accessories in contact with the formwork shall be made of plastic or steel coated with a 1/8-inch minimum thickness of plastic which extends at least 1/2 inch from the concrete surface. Plastic shall be gray in color. C. Tie wires shall be bent away from the forms to provide the specified concrete coverage. D. Reinforcing bars additional to those shown on the Drawings, which may be found necessary or desirable by the Contractor for the purpose of securing reinforcing in position, shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Reinforcing placing, spacing, and protection tolerances shall be within the limits specified in ACI 318 except where in conflict with the Building Code, unless otherwise specified. F. Reinforcing bars may be moved within one bar diameter as necessary to avoid interference with other concrete reinforcing, conduits, or embedded items. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter, or enough to exceed placing tolerances, the resulting arrangement of bars shall be as acceptable to the Engineer. G. Welded wire fabric shall be supported on slab bolsters spaced not less than 30 inches on centers, extending continuously across the entire width of the reinforcing mat and supporting the reinforcing mat in the plane shown on the Drawings. H. Reinforcing shall not be straightened or bent unless specifically shown on the drawings. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings shall not be used. Coiled reinforcement shall not be used. I. Dowel Adhesive System shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and as required in Article 2.04 above. A representative of the manufacturer must be on site prior to adhesive dowel installation to provide instruction on proper installation procedures for all adhesive dowel installers. Testing of adhesive dowels shall be as indicated below. If the dowels have a hook at the end to be embedded in subsequent work, an approved mechanical coupler shall be provided at a convenient distance from the face of existing concrete to facilitate adhesive dowel testing while maintaining required hook embedment in subsequent work. J. All adhesive dowel installations in the horizontal or overhead orientation shall be conducted by a certified Adhesive Anchor Installer as certified by ACI/CSRI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification program, or equivalent, per ACI 318-11 D.9.2.2 or ACI 318- 14 17.8.2.2. Current AAI Certificates must be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to commencement of any adhesive anchor installations. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Reinforcing Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 21 00-8 K. Adhesive Dowel Testing 1. At all locations where adhesive dowels are shown on the Drawings, at least 10 percent of all adhesive dowels installed shall be tested to 80% of the yield load of the reinforcing bar, with a minimum of one tested dowel per group. 2. Contractor shall submit a plan and schedule indicating locations of dowels to be tested, load test values, and proposed dowel testing procedure (including a diagram of the testing equipment proposed for use) prior to conducting any testing. Proof testing procedures shall be in accordance with ASTM E 3121. 3. Where Contract Documents indicate adhesive dowel design is the Contractor’s responsibility, the Contractor shall submit a plan and schedule indicating locations of dowels to be tested and load test values, sealed by a Professional Engineer currently registered in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. The Contractor shall also submit documentation indicating the Contractor’s testing procedures have been reviewed and the proposed procedures are acceptable. 4. Adhesive Dowel shall have no visible indications of displacement or damage during or after the load test. Dowels exhibiting damage shall be removed and replaced. If more than 5 percent of tested dowels fail, then 100 percent of dowels shall be load tested. 5. Load testing of adhesive dowels shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory hired directly by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for costs of all testing, including additional testing required due to previously failed tests. 3.04 SPLICING A. Reinforcing bar splices shall only be used at locations shown on the Drawings. When necessary to splice reinforcing at points other than where shown, the splice shall be as acceptable to the Engineer. B. The length of lap for reinforcing bars, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings shall be in accordance with ACI 318 for a class B splice. C. Laps of welded wire fabric shall be in accordance with ACI 318. Adjoining sheets shall be securely tied together with No. 14 tie wire, one tie for each 2 running feet. Wires shall be staggered and tied in such a manner that they cannot slip. D. Mechanical splices shall be used only where shown on the drawings or when approved by the Engineer. E. Couplers which are located at a joint face shall be a type which can be set either flush or recessed from the face as shown on the Drawings. The couplers shall be sealed during concrete placement to eliminate concrete, or cement paste from entering. After the concrete is placed, couplers intended for future connections shall be plugged and sealed Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Reinforcing Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 21 00-9 to prevent any contact with water or other corrosive materials. Threaded couplers shall be plugged with plastic plugs which have an O-ring seal. 3.05 INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of his intentions to place concrete and shall allow him adequate time to inspect all reinforcing steel before concrete is placed. B. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of his intentions to place grout in masonry walls and shall allow him adequate time to inspect all reinforcing steel before grout is placed. 3.06 CUTTING OF EMBEDDED REBAR A. The Contractor shall not cut embedded rebar cast into structural concrete without prior approval. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-1 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Provide all labor, equipment, materials, and services necessary for the manufacture, transportation, and placement of all plain and reinforced concrete work, as shown on the Drawings or as required by the Engineer. B. The requirements in this section shall apply to the following types of concrete: 1. Class A1 Concrete: Normal weight structural concrete to be used in all structures qualifying as environmental concrete structures designed in accordance with ACI 350 including pump stations, tanks, basins, process structures, and any structures containing fluid or process chemicals, or other materials used in treatment process. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 03 11 00  Concrete Formwork B. Section 03 21 00  Reinforcing Steel C. Section 03 15 00  Concrete Accessories D. Section 03 15 16  Joints in Concrete E. Section 03 35 00  Concrete Finishes F. Section 03 39 00  Concrete Curing G. Section 03 60 00  Grout 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the Specifications, all work herein shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. International Building Code 2018 2. ACI 214  Guide to Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete 3. ACI 301  Specifications for Structural Concrete 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-2 4. ACI 304  Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete 5. ACI 305  Specification for Hot Weather Concreting 6. ACI 306  Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting 7. ACI 309R  Guide for Consolidation of Concrete 8. ACI 318  Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary 9. ACI 350  Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures 10. ASTM C 31  Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field 11. ASTM C 33  Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 12. ASTM C 39  Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens 13. ASTM C42  Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete 14. ASTM C 88  Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate 15. ASTM C 94  Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete 16. ASTM C 114  Standard Test Method for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement 17. ASTM C 136  Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates 18. ASTM C 138  Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete 19. ASTM C 143  Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete 20. ASTM C 150  Standard Specification for Portland Cement 21. ASTM C 157 - Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic Cement, Mortar and Concrete 22. ASTM C 172  Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete 23. ASTM C 192  Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-3 24. ASTM C 231  Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method 25. ASTM C 260  Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete 26. ASTM C 295  Standard Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for Concrete 27. ASTM C 457  Standard Test Method for Microscopical Determination of the Air- Void System in Hardened Concrete 28. ASTM C 494  Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 29. ASTM C 595  Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements 30. ASTM C 618  Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete 31. ASTM C 989  Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars 32. ASTM C 1012 – Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hydraulic Cement Mortars Exposed to a Sulfate Solution 33. ASTM C 1077  Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation 34. ASTM C 1157 – Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement 35. ASTM C 1260  Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar Bar Method) 36. ASTM C 1567  Standard Test Method for Determining the Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method) 37. ASTM C 1579 – Standard Test Method for Evaluating Plastic Shrinkage Cracking of Restrained Fiber Reinforced Concrete (Using a Steel Form Insert) 38. ASTM C 1602  Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete 39. ASTM C 1609 – Standard Test Method for Flexural Performance of Fiber Reinforced Concrete (Using Beam with Third-Point Loading) 40. ASTM C 1778  Standard Guide for Reducing the Risk of Deleterious Alkali – Aggregate Reaction in Concrete Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-4 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures. 1. Sources of all materials and certifications of compliance with specifications for all materials. 2. Certified current (less than 1 year old) chemical analysis (mill test report) of the Portland Cement or Blended Cement to be used. The chemical analysis must include the equivalent alkali content of the Portland Cement or Blended Cement. 3. Certified current (less than 1 year old) chemical analysis of fly ash or slag cement to be used. 4. Aggregate test results showing compliance with required standards, i.e., sieve analysis, potential reactivity, aggregate soundness tests, petrographic analysis, mortar bar expansion testing, etc. 5. Manufacturer's data on all admixtures stating compliance with required standards. 6. Concrete mix design for each class of concrete specified herein. 7. Verification concrete mix and individual constituents in concrete meet requirements for NSF 61 approval for potable water applications where required. 8. Field experience records and/or trial mix data for the proposed concrete mixes for each class of concrete specified herein. 9. Drying shrinkage test results from trial concrete mixes. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tests on materials used in the production of concrete shall be required as specified in Part 2  Products. These tests shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Trial concrete mixes shall be tested when required in accordance with Article 3.01 at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Field quality control tests, as specified in Article 3.11, unless otherwise stated, will be performed by a materials testing consultant employed by the Owner. However, the Contractor shall be charged for the cost of any additional tests and investigation on work performed which does not meet the Specifications. Any individual who samples and tests concrete to determine if the concrete is being produced in accordance with this Specification shall be certified as a Concrete Field-Testing Technician, Grade I, in accordance with ACI CP-2. Testing laboratory shall conform to requirements of ASTM C- 1077. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-5 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 NSF/ANSI STANDARD 61 CERTIFIED CONCRETE A. NSF/ANSI Standard 61 certified concrete is required only where the concrete is uncoated and in contact with potable water, the volume of water is less than 350,000 gallons, and the ratio of the concrete surface area in contact with potable water to the volume of water exceeds 0.8 square inches per liter for static water conditions or 0.08 square inches per liter for flowing water conditions. The following structures and utilities require this certification: 1. Cottonwoods Conduit Vault 1 2. Cottonwoods Conduit Vault 2 B. Potable water is water at the start of flash mixing in drinking water treatment plants, and at all locations downstream of flash mixing in the water treatment, storage, and distribution system. Concrete surface area in contact with potable water shall include submerged surfaces and surfaces above the water where water can condense and drip back into the water. C. Where NSF/ANSI certified concrete is required by the paragraphs above, certification of compliance with NSF/ANSI Standard 61 shall be included with the concrete mix design submittal(s) and shall be provided by either one of the following two options: 1. NSF/ANSI Standard 61 certified testing of concrete aggregates, hydraulic cement, and supplemental cementitious materials shall be provided individually for each constituent showing that each constituent complies with NSF/ANSI Standard 61 2. NSF/ANSI Standard 61 testing of concrete cylinders formed from the trial batch concrete containing all the proposed constituents of the concrete shall be provided showing that the concrete mix complies with NSF/ANSI Standard 61. D. Regardless of whether NSF/ANSI Standard 61 certified concrete is required by the paragraphs above, all admixtures used in concrete where the concrete is uncoated and in contact with potable water shall be individually tested and confirm to follow NSF/ANSI Standard 61. 2.02 HYDRAULIC CEMENT A. Portland Cement 1. Portland Cement shall be Type II conforming to ASTM C 150. Type I cement may be used provided either fly ash or slag cement is also included in the mix in accordance with Articles 2.03 or 2.04, respectively. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-6 2. The proposed Portland Cement shall not contain more than 8% tricalcium aluminate and more than 12% tetracalcium aluminoferrite. 3. Portland Cement shall also meet performance requirements of ASTM C 1157. B. Blended Cement 1. Blended cements shall be Type IP (Portland Fly Ash Cement), Type IS (Portland Slag Cement), or Type IL (Portland Limestone Cement) conforming to ASTM C 595. 2. Type IP cement shall be an inter-ground blend of Portland Cement and fly ash in which the fly ash constituent is between 15% and 25% of the weight of the total blend. 3. Type IS cement shall be an inter-ground blend of Portland Cement and slag cement in which the slag cement constituent is between 30% and 40% of the weight of the total blend. 4. Type IL cement shall be an inter-ground blend of Portland Cement and limestone in which the limestone constituent is between 5% and 15% of the weight of the total blend. 5. Fly ash, slag cement, and limestone used in the production of blended cements shall meet the requirements of Articles 2.03, 2.04, and 2.05 respectively. 6. Cements meeting ASTM C 1157 shall not be used in the manufacture of blended cements. 7. Blended cement shall meet the Physical Requirements of Tables 2 and 3 of ASTM C 595 including the requirements for high sulfate resistance in Table 3 as tested per ASTM C1012. C. Different types of cement shall not be mixed, nor shall they be used alternately except when authorized in writing by the Engineer. Different brands of cement or the same brand from different mills may be used alternately. A resubmittal will be required if different cements are proposed during the Project. D. Cement shall be stored in a suitable weather-tight building to prevent deterioration or contamination. Cement which has become caked, partially hydrated, or otherwise damaged will be rejected. 2.03 FLY ASH A. Fly ash shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 618 for Class F, except that the loss on ignition shall not exceed 4%. Fly ash shall also meet the optional physical requirements for uniformity as shown in Table 3 of ASTM C 618. Fly ash shall be considered as a supplemental cementitious material. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-7 B. For fly ash to be used in the production of Type IP cement, the Pozzolan Activity Index shall be greater than 75% as specified in Table 3 of ASTM C 595. C. Where reactive aggregates as defined in Article 2.08 are used in the concrete mix, the fly ash constituent shall be as needed to satisfy the concrete alkali loading requirements stipulated in Section 2.06. The percentage of fly ash shall also be set to meet the mean mortar bar expansion requirements in the provisions of Article 2.08.G.2. Where fly ash is used, the minimum fly ash content shall be 15%. D. For Type A1 concrete as required for use in environmental concrete structures, i.e., process structures or fluid containing structures, inclusion of fly ash or slag cement in the concrete mix, is mandatory. E. Additional fly ash shall not be included in concrete mixed with Type IS or IP cement. 2.04 SLAG CEMENT A. Slag cement shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 989 including tests for effectiveness of slag in preventing excessive expansion due to alkali-aggregate reactivity as described in Appendix X-3 of ASTM C 989. B. Where reactive aggregates as defined in Article 2.08 are used in concrete mix, the slag cement constituent shall be as needed to satisfy the concrete alkali loading requirements stipulated in Section 2.06. The percentage of slag cement shall also be set to meet the mean mortar bar expansion requirements in provisions of Article 2.08.G.2. Where Slag Cement is used, the minimum Slag Cement content shall be 30%, and the maximum Slag Cement content shall be 40%. C. For Type A1 concrete as required for use in environmental concrete structures, i.e., process structures or fluid containing structures, inclusion of fly ash or slag cement in the concrete mix, is mandatory. D. Additional slag cement shall not be included in concrete mixed with Type IS or IP cement. 2.05 PORTLAND LIMESTONE CEMENT (TYPE IL) A. Portland Limestone Cement (Type IL) cement shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 595. B. Limestone used for blended cement Type IL shall be naturally occurring and meet the requirements of ASTM C 33. C. Fly ash or slag cement shall be used with Type IL cement to meet requirements for durability, ASR resistance, sulfate resistance, and use for environmental structures, as specified herein. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-8 2.06 CONCRETE ALKALI LOADING A. All concrete mixes containing potentially reactive aggregates shall have a maximum alkali loading of the concrete of 3.0 pounds per cubic yard. B. The alkali loading of concrete is the Portland Cement equivalent alkali content multiplied by the Portland Cement content of the mix in pounds per cubic yard divided by 100. The Portland Cement equivalent alkali content shall be included in the certified chemical analysis of the Portland Cement. C. Means of evaluating alkali loading of concrete and proportioning constituents of concrete to minimize alkali loading of content shall also conform to the guidelines of ASTM C1778. 2.07 WATER A. Water used for mixing concrete shall be clear, potable, and free from deleterious substances such as objectionable quantities of silty organic matter, alkali, salts, and other impurities. B. Water shall not contain more than 100 PPM chloride. C. Water shall not contain more than 500 PPM dissolved solids. D. Water shall have a pH in the range of 4.5 to 8.5. E. Water shall meet requirements of ASTM C 1602. 2.08 AGGREGATES A. All aggregates used in normal weight concrete shall conform to ASTM C 33. B. Fine Aggregate (Sand) in the various concrete mixes shall consist of natural or manufactured siliceous sand, clean and free from deleterious substances, and graded within the limits of ASTM C 33. C. Coarse aggregates shall consist of hard, clean, durable gravel, crushed gravel, or crushed rock. Coarse aggregate shall be size #57 or #67 as graded within the limits given in ASTM C 33 unless otherwise specified. D. For Class A4 concrete, coarse aggregate shall be Size #8 in accordance with ASTM C33. E. Aggregates shall be tested for gradation by sieve analysis tests in conformance with ASTM C 136. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-9 F. Aggregates shall be tested for soundness in accordance with ASTM C 88. The loss resulting after five cycles shall not exceed 10 percent for fine or coarse aggregate when using either magnesium sulfate or sodium sulfate. G. All aggregates shall be evaluated in accordance with ASTM C 1778 to determine potential reactivity. All aggregates shall be considered reactive unless they meet the requirements below for non-reactive aggregates. Aggregates with a lithology like sources in the same region found to be reactive in service shall be considered reactive regardless of the results of the tests above. 1. Non-reactive aggregates shall meet the following requirements: a. A petrographic analysis in accordance with ASTM C295 shall be performed to identify the constituents of the fine and coarse aggregate. Non-reactive aggregates shall meet the following limitations: 1) Optically strained, micro-fractured, or microcrystalline quartz, 5.0%, maximum. 2) Chert or chalcedony, 3.0%, maximum. 3) Tridymite or cristobalite, 1.0%, maximum. 4) Opal, 0.5%, maximum. 5) Natural volcanic glass in volcanic rocks, 3.0%, maximum. 2. Concrete mixed with reactive aggregates shall meet the following requirements: a. If aggregates are deemed potentially reactive as per ASTM C1778 and fly ash or slag cement is included in proposed concrete mix design, proposed concrete mix including proposed aggregates shall be evaluated by ASTM C- 1567. Mean mortar bar expansions at 16 days shall be less than 0.08%. Tests shall be made using exact proportion of all materials proposed for use on the job in design mix submitted. b. If aggregates are deemed potentially reactive as per ASTM C-1778 and a straight cement mix without fly ash or slag cement is proposed for concrete mix design, aggregates shall be evaluated by ASTM C-1260. Mean mortar bar expansions at 16 days shall be less than 0.08%. c. If the proposed aggregates are deemed potentially reactive, the concrete mix shall be evaluated and confirmed to meet the requirements for concrete alkali loading as stipulated in Section 2.06. H. Contractor shall submit a new trial mix to the Engineer for approval whenever a different aggregate or gradation is proposed. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-10 2.09 ADMIXTURES A. Admixtures containing intentionally added chlorides shall not be used. B. Admixtures containing 1,4 Dioxane shall not be used in Projects located in a State or Commonwealth where 1,4 Dioxane limits are required. C. Air entraining admixture shall be added to all concrete unless noted otherwise. The air entraining admixture shall conform to ASTM C 260. The admixture proposed shall be selected in advance so that adequate samples may be collected, and the required tests made. Air content of concrete, when placed, shall be within the ranges given in the concrete mix design. D. The following admixtures are required or used for water reduction, slump increase, and/or adjustment of initial set, and enhancing durability. Admixtures permitted shall confirm to the requirements of ASTM C 494. Admixtures shall be non-toxic after 30 days and shall be compatible with and made by the same manufacturer as the air-entraining admixtures. 1. Water reducing admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type A and shall contain no more than 0.05% chloride ions. Acceptable products are “Eucon Series” by the Euclid Chemical Company, “Master Pozzolith Series or Master Polyheed Series” by Master Builders Solutions, and “Plastocrete Series” by Sika Corporation. 2. High range water reducer shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type F or G. The high range water reducer shall be added to the concrete at the batch plant and may be used in conjunction with a water reducing admixture. The high range water reducer shall be accurately measured, and pressure injected into the mixer as a single dose by an experienced technician. A standby system shall be provided and tested prior to each day’s operation of the job site system. Concrete shall be mixed at mixing speed for a minimum of 100 mixer revolutions after the addition of the high range water reducer. Acceptable products are “Eucon 37” or Plastol 5000 by the Euclid Chemical Company, “Master Rheobuild 1000 or Master Glenium Series” by Master Builders Solutions, and “Daracem 100 or Advaflow Series” by W.R. Grace. 3. A non-chloride, non-corrosive accelerating admixture may be used where specifically approved by the Engineer. The admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type C or E. The admixture manufacturer must have long-term non-corrosive test data from an independent testing laboratory (of at least a year’s duration) using an acceptable accelerated corrosion test method such as that using electrical potential measures. Acceptable products are “MasterSet AC 534 or MasterSet FP 20” by Master Builders Solutions, “Accelguard 80/90 or NCA” by the Euclid Chemical Company and “Daraset” by W.R. Grace. 4. A retarding admixture may be used where specifically approved by the Engineer. The admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, Type B or D. Acceptable products are “Eucon NR or Eucon Retarder 100” by the Euclid Chemical Company, Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-11 “MasterSet R Series or MasterSet DELVO Series” by Master Builders Solutions, and “Plastiment” by Sika Corporation. 5. Workability Retaining Admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type S. The admixture shall retain concrete workability without affecting time of setting or early- age strength development. Acceptable products are “MasterSure Z 60” by Master Builders Solutions, or equal. 6. A crystalline permeability reducing admixture shall be used where specifically indicated on the Drawings. The admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type D or S. The admixture shall be of the crystalline type that chemically controls and permanently fixes a non-soluble crystalline structure throughout the capillary voids of the concrete. The admixture shall cause the concrete to become sealed against penetrations of liquids from any direction and shall protect the concrete from deterioration due to harsh environmental conditions. The admixture shall be capable of sealing hairline cracks and resisting extreme hydrostatic pressure. Acceptable products are “Xypex Admix C-500 NF” by Xypex Chemical Corporation, “MasterLife® 300 Series” by Master Builders Solutions, and “Krystol Internal Membrane (KIM)” by Kryton International Inc. Submit certified letter from manufacturer of crystalline admixture stating required dosage rate for job specific concrete mix. Concrete truck ticket shall confirm crystalline admixture was included in concrete being placed. E. Admixtures containing calcium chloride, thiocyanate or more than 0.05 percent chloride ions are not permitted. The addition of admixtures to prevent freezing is not permitted. F. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data including the chloride ion content of each admixture and certification from the admixture manufacturer that all admixtures utilized in the design mix are compatible with one another and properly proportioned prior to mix design review. 2.10 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. The proportions of cement, aggregates, admixtures, and water used in the concrete mixes shall be based on laboratory trial mixes in conformance with ACI 301. Trial mixes shall also conform to Article 3.01 of this Specification. Trial mix data used as the basis for the proposed concrete mix design shall be submitted to the Engineer along with the proposed mix. B. Structural concrete shall conform to the following requirements. Cementitious materials refer to the total combined weight of all cement, fly ash, and slag cement contained in the mix. 1. Compressive Strength (28-Day) Concrete Class A1 4,500 psi (min.), 6500 psi (max.) Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-12 2. Water/cementitious materials ratio, by weight Maximum Minimum Concrete Class A1 0.42 0.39 3. Slump range a. 4" nominal unless high range water reducing admixture is used b. 8” max if high range water reducing admixture is used. 4. Air Content Concrete Class A1 6% ±1.5% PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 TRIAL MIXES A. Trial mixes shall be used to confirm the quality of a proposed concrete mix in accordance with ACI 301. An independent qualified testing laboratory designated and retained by the Contractor shall test a trial batch of each of the preliminary concrete mixes submitted by the Contractor. The trial batches shall be prepared using the aggregates, cement, supplementary cementitious materials, and admixtures proposed for the project. The trial batch materials shall be of a quantity such that the testing laboratory can obtain enough samples to satisfy requirements stated below. Tests on individual materials stated in PRODUCTS should already be performed before any trial mix is done. The cost of laboratory trial batch tests for each specified concrete mix will be borne by the Contractor and the Contractor shall furnish and deliver the materials to the testing laboratory at no cost to the Owner. B. The independent testing laboratory shall prepare a minimum of fifteen (15) standard test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 31 in addition to conducting slump (ASTM C 143), air content (C 231) and density (C 138) tests. Compressive strength test on the cylinders shall subsequently be performed by the same laboratory in accordance with ASTM C 39 as follows: Test 3 cylinders at age 7 days; test 3 cylinders at age 21 days; test 3 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-13 cylinders at age 28 days and test 3 cylinders at 56 days. The cylinders shall be carefully identified as "Trial Mix, Contract No. “. If the average 28-day compressive strength of the trial mix is less than that specified, or if any single cylinder falls below the required strength by more than 500 psi, the mix shall be corrected, another trial batch prepared, test cylinders taken, and new tests performed as before. Any such additional trial batch testing required shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. Adjustments to the mix shall be considered refinements to the mix design and shall not be the basis for extra compensation to the Contractor. 3.02 SHRINKAGE TEST A. Concurrent with the trial batch requirements stated in Article 3.01, the testing laboratory shall perform drying shrinkage tests for the trial batches as specified herein. B. Fabricate, cure, dry, and measure specimens in accordance with ASTM C157 modified as follows. 1. Remove specimens from molds at an age of 23 hours ± 1 hour after trial batching. 2. Place specimens immediately in water at 70 oF ± 3 oF for at least 30 minutes. 3. Measure within 30 minutes thereafter to determine original length, then submerge in saturated lime water at 73 oF ± 3 oF. 4. At age seven days, measure to determine expansion, expressed as a percentage of original length. This length at age seven days shall be the base length for drying shrinkage calculations (zero days’ drying age). 5. Store specimens immediately in a humidity-controlled room maintained at 73 oF ± 3 oF and 50 percent ± 4 percent relative humidity for the remainder of the test. 6. Make and report separately measurements to determine shrinkage expressed as base length percentage for 7, 14, 21, and 28 days of drying after 7 days of moist curing. C. Compute the drying shrinkage deformation for each specimen as the difference between the base length (at zero days’ drying age) and the length after drying at each test age. Compute the average drying shrinkage deformation for the specimens to the nearest 0.0001 inch at each test age. If the drying shrinkage for any specimen departs from the average test age for that test by more than 0.0004 inch, disregard the results obtained from that specimen. Report results from the shrinkage test to the nearest 0.001 percent of shrinkage. Take compression test specimens in each case from the same concrete used for preparing drying shrinkage specimens. These tests shall be considered part of the normal compression tests for the project. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-14 D. The maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the laboratory from the trial batch, as measured at 21-day drying age or at 28-day drying age, shall be 0.036 or 0.042 percent, respectively. Use a mix design for construction that has first met the trial batch shrinkage requirements. E. If the trial batch specimens do not meet both the strength and shrinkage requirements, revise the mix designs and/or materials and retest. 3.03 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE F. All concrete shall be machine mixed. Hand mixing of concrete will not be permitted. The Contractor may supply concrete from a ready-mix concrete plant or from a site mixed plant. In selecting the source for concrete production, the Contractor shall carefully consider its capability for providing quality concrete at a rate commensurate with the requirements of the placements so that well bonded, homogenous concrete, free of cold joints, is assured. G. Ready-Mixed Concrete 1. At the Contractor's option, ready-mixed concrete may be used meeting the requirements for materials, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing as specified herein and in accordance with ASTM C 94. 2. Truck mixers shall be equipped with electrically actuated counters by which the number of revolutions of the drum or blades may be readily verified. The counter shall be of the resettable, recording type, and shall be mounted in the driver's cab. The counters shall be actuated at the time of starting mixers at mixing speeds. 3. Each batch of concrete shall be mixed in a truck mixer for not less than 100 revolutions of the drum or blades at the rate of rotation designated by the manufacturer of equipment. Additional mixing, if any, shall be at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed. All materials including mixing water shall be in the mixer drum before actuating the revolution counter for determining the number of revolutions of mixing. 4. Truck mixers and their operation shall be such that the concrete throughout the mixed batch, as discharged, is within acceptable limits of uniformity with respect to consistency, mix and grading. If slump tests taken at approximately the 1/4 and 3/4 points of the load during discharge give slumps differing by more than one inch when the specified slump is 3 inches or less, or if they differ by more than 2 inches when the specified slump is more than 3 inches, the mixer shall not be used on the work unless the causing condition is corrected and satisfactory performance is verified by additional slump tests. All mechanical details of the mixer, such as water measuring and discharge apparatus, condition of the blades, speed of rotation, general mechanical condition of the unit and clearance of the drum, shall be checked before a further attempt to use the unit will be permitted. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-15 5. Ready-mixed concrete shall be delivered to the site for the work and discharge shall be completed within the time requirements stated in Article 3.04 of this Section. 6. Every concrete delivery shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket containing at least the following information: a. Date and truck number b. Ticket number c. Mix designation of concrete d. Cubic yards of concrete e. Cement brand, type, and weight in pounds f. Weight in pounds of fine aggregate (sand) g. Weight in pounds of coarse aggregate (stone) h. Air entraining agent, brand, and weight in pounds and ounces i. Other admixtures, brand, and weight in pounds and ounces j. Water, in gallons, stored in attached tank k. Water, in gallons, maximum that can be added without exceeding design water/cementitious materials ratio l. Water, in gallons, used (by truck driver) m. Time of loading n. Time of delivery to job (by truck driver) 7. Any truck delivering concrete to the job site, which is not accompanied by a delivery ticket showing the above information will be rejected and such truck shall immediately depart from the job site. 8. The use of non-agitating equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be permitted. Combination truck and trailer equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be permitted. The quality and quantity of materials used in ready- mixed concrete and in batch aggregates shall be subject to inspection at the batching plant by the Engineer. H. Site Mixed Concrete Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-16 1. Scales for weighing concrete ingredients shall be accurate when in use within ±0.4 percent of their total capacities. Standard test weights shall be available to permit checking scale accuracy. 2. Operation of batching equipment shall be such that the concrete ingredients are consistently measured within the following tolerances: a. Cement, fly ash, or slag cement ± 1 percent b. Water ± 1 percent c. Aggregates ± 2 percent d. Admixtures ± 3 percent 3. Each batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some water will enter in advance of the cement and aggregates. Water shall continue for a period which may extend to the end of the first 25 percent of the specified mixing time. Controls shall be provided to prevent batched ingredients from entering the mixer before the previous batch has been completely discharged. 4. The concrete shall be mixed in a batch mixer capable of thoroughly combining the aggregates, cement, and water into a uniform mass within the specified mixing time, and of discharging the concrete without harmful segregation. The mixer shall bear a manufacturer's rating plate indicating the rate capacity and the recommended revolutions per minute and shall be operated in accordance therewith. 5. Mixers with a rated capacity of one cubic yard or larger shall conform to the requirements of the Plant Mixer Manufacturers' Division of the Concrete Plant Manufacturers' Bureau. 6. Except as provided below, batches of one cubic yard or less shall be mixed for not less than one minute. The mixing time shall be increased 15 seconds for each cubic yard or fraction thereof of additional capacity. 7. Shorter mixing time may be permitted provided performance tests made in accordance with of ASTM C 94 indicate that the time is sufficient to produce uniform concrete. 8. Controls shall be provided to ensure that the batch cannot be discharged until the required mixing time has elapsed. At least three-quarters of the required mixing time shall take place after the last of the mixing water has been added. 9. The interior of the mixer shall be free of accumulations that will interfere with mixing action. Mixer blades shall be replaced when they have lost 10 percent of their original height. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-17 10. Air-entraining admixtures and other chemical admixtures shall be charged into the mixer as solutions and shall be measured by means of an approved mechanical dispensing device. The liquid shall be considered a part of the mixing water. Admixtures that cannot be added in solution may be weighed or may be measured by volume if recommended by the manufacturer. 11. If two or more admixtures are used in the concrete, they shall be added separately to avoid possible interaction that might interfere with the efficiency of either admixture or adversely affect the concrete. 12. Addition of retarding admixtures shall be completed within one minute after addition of water to the cement has been completed, or prior to the beginning of the last three-quarters of the required mixing, whichever occurs first. Retarding admixtures shall not be used unless approved by the Engineer. 13. Concrete shall be mixed only in quantities for immediate use and within the time and mixing requirements of ASTM C 94. 3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. No concrete shall be placed prior to approval of the concrete mix design. Concrete placement shall conform to the recommendations of ACI 304. B. Prior to concrete placement, all reinforcement shall be securely and properly fastened in its correct position. Formwork shall be clean, oiled and form ties at construction joints shall be retightened. All bucks, sleeves, castings, hangers, pipe, conduits, bolts, anchors, wire, and any other fixtures required to be embedded therein shall be in place. Forms for openings to be left in the concrete shall be in place and anchored by the Contractor. All loose debris in bottoms of forms or in keyways shall be removed and all debris, water, snow, ice, and foreign matter shall be removed from the space to be occupied by the concrete. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in advance of placement, allowing sufficient time for a concurrent inspection and for any corrective measures required. C. On horizontal joints where concrete is to be placed on hardened concrete, flowing concrete containing a high range water reducing admixture or cement grout shall be placed with a slump not less than 8 inches for the initial placement at the base of the wall. Concrete or cement grout shall meet all strength and service requirements specified herein for applicable class of concrete. This concrete shall be worked well into the irregularities of the hard surface. D. All concrete shall be placed during the daylight hours except with the consent of the Engineer. If special permission is obtained to carry on work during the night, adequate lighting must be provided. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-18 E. When concrete arrives at the project with slump below that suitable for placing, as indicated by the Specifications, water may be added to bring the concrete within the specified slump range provided the design water-cementitious materials ratio is not exceeded. The water shall be incorporated by additional mixing equal to at least half of the total mixing required. Water may be added only to full trucks. On-site tempering shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing a concrete mix meeting all specified requirements. F. Concrete shall be conveyed as rapidly as practical to the point of deposit by methods which prevent the separation or loss of the ingredients. The concrete shall be deposited so that additional handling will be unnecessary. Discharge of the concrete to its point of deposit shall be completed within 90 minutes after the addition of the cement to the aggregates unless workability-retaining admixtures are included and approved by the Engineer. In hot weather, or under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete, the time between the introduction of the cement to the aggregates and discharge shall not exceed the requirements stated in Article 3.10 of this Section. G. Where concrete is conveyed to position by chutes, a continuous flow in the chute shall be maintained. The angle and discharge arrangement of the chute shall be such to prevent segregation of the concrete ingredients. The delivery end of the chute shall be as close as possible to the point of deposit and in no case shall the free pour from the delivery end of the chute exceed five feet, unless approved otherwise. H. Special care must be exercised to prevent splashing of forms or reinforcement with concrete, and any such splashes or accumulations of hardened or partially hardened concrete on the forms or reinforcement above the general level of the concrete already in place must be removed before the work proceeds. I. Placing of concrete shall be regulated so the pressure caused by the wet concrete shall not exceed that used in the design of the forms. J. All concrete for walls shall be placed through openings in the form spaced at frequent intervals or through tremies (heavy duct canvas, rubber, etc.), equipped with suitable hopper heads. Tremies shall be of variable lengths so the free fall shall not exceed five (5) feet, and enough tremies shall be placed in the form to ensure the concrete remains level. K. When placing concrete which will be exposed, sufficient illumination shall be provided in the interior of the forms so the concrete, at places of deposit, is visible from deck and runways. L. Concrete shall be placed to thoroughly embed all reinforcement, inserts, and fixtures. M. When forms are removed, surfaces shall be even and dense, free from aggregate pockets or honeycomb. Concrete shall be consolidated using mechanical vibration, supplemented by forking and spading by hand in the corners and angle of forms and Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-19 along form surfaces while the concrete is plastic under the vibratory action. Consolidation shall conform to ACI 309. N. Mechanical vibration shall be applied directly to the concrete, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The bottom of vibrators used on floor slabs must not be permitted to ride the form supporting the slab. Vibration shall be applied at the point of deposit and in freshly placed concrete by a vertical penetration of the vibrator. Vibrators shall not be used to move concrete laterally within the forms. O. The intensity of vibration shall be sufficient to cause settlement of the concrete into place and to produce monolithic joining with the preceding layer. Vibration shall be of sufficient duration to accomplish thorough compaction and complete embedment of reinforcement and fixtures with a vibrator transmitting not less than 7,500 impulses per minute. Since the duration of vibration per square foot of surface is dependent on the frequency (impulses per minute), size of vibrator, and slump of concrete, the length of time must therefore be determined in the field. Vibration shall not be continued in any one location to the extent that pools of grout are formed. P. Care shall be taken to prevent cold joints when placing concrete in any portion of the work. The concrete placing rate shall ensure that each layer is placed while the previous layer is soft or plastic, so the two layers can be made monolithic by penetration of the vibrators. Maximum thickness of concrete layers shall be 18 inches. The surface of the concrete shall be level whenever a run of concrete is stopped. Q. To prevent featheredges, construction joints located at the tops of horizontal lifts near sloping exposed concrete surfaces shall be inclined near the exposed surface, so the angle between such inclined surface and the exposed concrete surface will be not less than 50°. R. In placing unformed concrete on slopes, the concrete shall be placed ahead of a non- vibrated slip-form screed extending approximately 2-1/2 feet back from its leading edge. The method of placement shall provide a uniform finished surface with the deviation from the straight line less than 1/8 inch in any concrete placement. Concrete ahead of the slip-form screed shall be consolidated by internal vibrators to ensure complete filling under the slip-form. Prior to placement of concrete on sloped walls or slabs, the Contractor shall submit a plan specifically detailing methods and sequence of placements, proposed concrete screed equipment, location of construction joints and water stops, and/or any proposed deviations from the stated requirements to the Engineer for review and approval. S. Concrete shall not be placed during rains sufficiently heavy or prolonged to prevent washing of mortar from coarse aggregate on the forward slopes of the placement. Once placement of concrete has commenced in a block, placement shall not be interrupted by diverting the placing equipment to other uses. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-20 3.05 PLACING FLOOR SLABS ON GROUND A. The subgrade for slabs on ground shall be well drained and of adequate and uniform loadbearing nature. The in-place density of the subgrade soils shall be at least the minimum required by the specifications. No foundation, slab, or pavement concrete shall be placed until the depth and character of the foundation soils have been inspected and approved by the materials testing consultant. B. The subgrade shall be free of frost before concrete placing begins. If the temperature inside a building where concrete is to be placed is below freezing, the temperature shall be raised and maintained above 50° long enough to remove all frost from the subgrade. C. The subgrade shall be moist at the time of concreting. If necessary, the subgrade shall be dampened with water in advance of concreting, but no free water shall remain standing on the subgrade nor any muddy or soft spots when the concrete is placed. D. Thirty-pound felt-paper shall be provided between edges of slabs-on-ground and vertical and horizontal concrete surfaces, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. E. Contraction joints shall be provided in slabs-on-ground at locations indicated on the Drawings. Contraction joints shall be installed as per Section 03 15 16  Joints in Concrete. F. Floor slabs shall be screeded level or pitched to drain as indicated on the Drawings. Finishes shall conform with requirements of Section 03 35 00  Concrete Finishes. Interior floor slabs shall be placed with non-air-entrained concrete (Class A3) if a steel troweled or hardened finish is required. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE UNDER PRESSURE A. Where concrete is conveyed and placed by mechanically applied pressure, the equipment shall have the capacity for the operation. The operation of the pump shall produce a continuous stream of concrete without air pockets. To obtain the least line resistance, the layout of the pipeline system shall contain minimum bends with no change in pipe size. If two sizes of pipe must be used, the smaller diameter should be used at the pump end and the larger at the discharge end. When pumping is completed, the concrete remaining in the pipelines shall be ejected in such a manner that there will be no contamination of the concrete or separation of the ingredients. B. Priming of the concrete pumping equipment shall be with cement grout only. Use of specialty mix pump primers or pumping aids will not be allowed. C. No aluminum parts shall be in contact with the concrete during the placing of concrete under pressure. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-21 D. Prior to placing concrete under pressure, the Contractor shall submit the concrete mix design together with test results from a material’s testing consultant proving the proposed mix meets all requirements. In addition, an actual pumping test under field conditions is required prior to acceptance of the mix. This test requires a duplication of anticipated site conditions from beginning to end. The batching and truck mixing shall be the same as will be used during construction, and the pipe and pipe layouts will reflect the maximum height and distance contemplated. All submissions shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. E. If the pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory end results, the Contractor shall discontinue the pumping operation and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods. F. The pumping equipment must have two cylinders and be designed to operate with one cylinder only in case the other one is not functioning. In lieu of this requirement, the Contractor may have a standby pump on the site during pumping. G. The minimum diameter of the hose (conduits) shall be four inches. H. Pumping equipment and hoses (conduits) that are not functioning properly shall be replaced. I. Concrete samples for quality control in accordance with Article 3.11 will be taken at the placement (discharge) end of the line. 3.07 ORDER OF PLACING CONCRETE A. To minimize the effects of shrinkage, the concrete shall be placed in units as bounded by construction joints shown on the Drawings and maximum lengths as indicated on Drawings. Where required on the Drawings and wherever else practical, the placing of such units shall be done in a strip pattern in accordance with ACI 302.1. A minimum of 72 hours shall pass prior to placing concrete directly adjacent to previously placed concrete. 3.08 CONCRETE WORK IN COLD WEATHER A. Cold weather concreting procedures shall conform to the requirements of ACI 306.1. B. The Engineer may prohibit the placing of concrete at any time when air temperature is 40°F. or lower. If concrete work is permitted, the concrete shall have a minimum temperature, as placed, of 55°F. for placements less than 12" thick, 50°F. for placements 12" to 36" thick, and 45°F. for placements greater than 36" thick. The temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed these minimum values by more than 20°F, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. C. All aggregate and water shall be preheated. Precautions shall be taken to avoid the possibility of flash set when aggregate or water are heated to a temperature greater than 100°F. to meet concrete temperature requirements. The addition of admixtures to the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-22 concrete to prevent freezing is not permitted. All reinforcement, forms, and concrete accessories shall be defrosted by an approved method. No concrete shall be placed on frozen ground. 3.09 CONCRETE WORK IN HOT WEATHER A. Hot weather concreting procedures shall conform to the requirements of ACI 305.1. B. When air temperatures exceed 85°F., or when extremely dry or high wind conditions exist even at lower temperatures, the Contractor and his concrete supplier shall exercise special and precautionary measures in preparing, delivering, placing, finishing, curing, and protecting the concrete mix. The Contractor shall consult with the Engineer regarding such measures prior to each day's placing operation, and the Engineer reserves the right to modify the proposed measures consistent with the requirements herein. All necessary materials and equipment shall be in place prior to each placing operation. C. Preparatory work at the job site shall include thorough wetting of all forms, reinforcing steel and, in the case of slab pours on ground or subgrade, spraying the ground surface on the preceding evening and again just prior to placing. No standing puddles of water shall be permitted in those areas which are to receive the concrete. D. The temperature of the concrete mix when placed shall not exceed 95°F. E. Temperature of mixing water and aggregates shall be carefully controlled and monitored at the supplier's plant, with haul distance to the job site being considered. Stockpiled aggregates shall be shaded from the sun and sprinkled intermittently with water. If ice is used in the mixing water for cooling purposes, the ice must be entirely melted prior to addition of the water to the dry mix. F. Delivery schedules shall be carefully considered in advance to ensure concrete is placed as soon as practical after mixing. For hot weather concrete work (air temperature greater than 85°F), discharge of the concrete to its point of deposit shall be completed within 60 minutes from the time the concrete is batched, unless workability-retaining admixtures are included and approved by the Engineer. G. The Contractor shall arrange for an ample work force to be on hand to accomplish transporting, vibrating, finishing, and covering of the fresh concrete as rapidly as possible. 3.10 QUAILITY CONTROL A. Field Testing of Concrete Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-23 1. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer's project representative the on- site scheduling of the materials testing consultant personnel as required for concrete testing. 2. Concrete for testing shall be supplied by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner, and the Contractor shall assist the materials testing consultant in obtaining samples. The Contractor shall dispose of and clean up all excess material. B. Consistency 1. The consistency of the concrete will be checked by the materials testing consultant by standard slump cone tests. The Contractor shall make any necessary adjustments in the mix as the Engineer and/or the materials testing consultant may direct and shall upon written order suspend all placing operations in the event the consistency does not meet the intent of the specifications. No payment shall be made for any delays, material, or labor costs due to such occurrences. 2. Slump tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C 143. Slump tests will be performed as deemed necessary by the materials testing consultant and each time compressive strength samples are taken. 3. Concrete with a specified nominal slump shall be placed having a slump within 1” (higher or lower) of the specified slump. Concrete with a specified maximum slump shall be placed having a slump less than the specified slump. C. Density 1. Samples of freshly mixed concrete shall be tested for density by the materials testing consultant in accordance with ASTM C 138. 2. Density tests will be performed as deemed necessary by the Engineer and each time compressive strength samples are taken. D. Air Content 1. Samples of freshly mixed concrete will be tested for entrained air content by the materials testing consultant in accordance with ASTM C 231. 2. Air content tests will be performed as deemed necessary by the materials testing consultant and each time compressive strength samples are taken. 3. In the event test results are outside the limits specified, additional testing shall occur. Admixture quantity adjustments shall be made immediately upon discovery of incorrect air entrainment. E. Compressive Strength Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-24 1. Samples of freshly mixed concrete will be taken by the materials testing consultant and tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 172, C 31, and C 39, except as modified herein. 2. In general, one sampling shall be taken for each placement more than five (5) cubic yards, with a minimum of one (1) sampling for each day of concrete placement operations, or for each one hundred (100) cubic yards of concrete, or for each 5,000 square feet of surface area for slabs or walls, whichever is greater. 3. Each sampling shall consist of at least five (5) 6x12 cylinders or (8) 4x8 cylinders. Each cylinder shall be identified by a tag, which shall be hooked or wired to the side of the container. The materials testing consultant will fill out the required information on the tag, and the Contractor shall satisfy himself that such information shown is correct. 4. The Contractor shall be required to furnish labor to the Owner for assisting in preparing test cylinders. The Contractor shall provide approved curing boxes for storage of cylinders on site. The insulated curing box shall be of sufficient size and strength to contain all the cylinders made in any four consecutive working days and to protect the specimens from falling over, being jarred, or otherwise disturbed during the period of initial curing. The box shall be erected, furnished, and maintained by the Contractor. Such box shall be equipped to provide the moisture and to regulate the temperature necessary to maintain the proper curing conditions required by ASTM C 31. The curing box shall be placed in an area free from vibration such as pile driving and traffic of all kinds and such that all cylinders are shielded from direct sunlight and/or radiant heating sources. No concrete requiring testing shall be delivered to the site until such storage curing box has been provided. Cylinders shall remain undisturbed in the curing box until ready for delivery to the testing laboratory, but not less than sixteen hours. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the temperatures of the curing box during the initial curing of cylinders with the temperature preserved between 60°F and 80°F as measured by a maximum-minimum thermometer. The Contractor shall maintain a written record of curing box temperatures for each day the curing box contains cylinders. Temperature shall be recorded a minimum of three times a day with one recording at the start of the day and one recording at the end of the day. 6. When transported, the cylinders shall not be thrown, dropped, allowed to roll, or be damaged in any way. 7. Compression tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C 39. For 6x12 cylinders, two test cylinders will be tested at seven days and two at 28 days. For 4x8 cylinders, three test cylinders will be tested at seven days, three at 28 days. The remaining cylinders will be held to verify test results, if needed. F. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-25 1. Evaluation and acceptance of the compressive strength of concrete shall be according to the requirements of ACI 214, ACI 318, and ACI 350. 2. The strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if the following conditions are satisfied. a. Every arithmetic average of any three consecutive strength tests equals or exceeds the minimum specified 28-day compressive strength for the mix (see Article 2.11). b. No individual compressive strength test result falls below the minimum specified strength by more than 500 psi. 3. If any of the conditions listed above are not met, the mix proportions shall be corrected for the next concrete placing operation. 4. If condition 3.11.F.2.b is not met, additional tests in accordance with Article 3.11, Paragraph H shall be performed. 5. When a ratio between 7-day and 28-day strengths has been established by these tests, the 7-day strengths shall subsequently be taken as a preliminary indication of the 28-day strengths. Should the 7-day test strength from any sampling be more than 10% below the established minimum strength, the Contractor shall: a. Immediately provide additional periods of curing in the affected area from which the deficient test cylinders were taken. b. Maintain or add temporary structural support as required. c. Correct the mix for the next concrete placement operation, if required to remedy the situation. 6. All concrete which fails to meet the ACI requirements, and these specifications is subject to removal and replacement at no additional cost to the Owner. G. When non-compliant concrete is identified, test reports shall be sent immediately to the Engineer for review. H. Additional Tests 1. When ordered by the Engineer, additional tests on in-place concrete shall be provided and paid for by the Contractor. 2. If the 28-day test cylinders fail to meet the minimum strength requirements as outlined in Article 3.11, Paragraph F, the Contractor shall have concrete core specimens obtained and tested from the affected area immediately. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-26 a. Three cores shall be taken for each sample in which the strength requirements were not met. b. The drilled cores shall be obtained and tested in conformance with ASTM C 42. The tests shall be conducted by a materials testing consultant approved by the Engineer. c. The location from which each core is taken shall be approved by the Engineer. Each core specimen shall be located, when possible, so its axis is perpendicular to the concrete surface and not near formed joints or obvious edges of a unit of deposit. d. The core specimens shall be taken, if possible, so no reinforcing steel is within the confines of the core. e. The diameter of core specimens should be at least 3 times the maximum nominal size of the coarse aggregate used in the concrete but must be at least 2-inches in diameter. f. The length of specimen, when capped, shall be at least twice the diameter of the specimen. g. The core specimens shall be taken to the laboratory and when transported, shall not be thrown, dropped, allowed to roll, or damaged in any way. h. Two (2) copies of test results shall be mailed directly to the Engineer. The concrete in question will be considered acceptable if the average compressive strength of a minimum of three test core specimens taken from a given area equal or exceed 85% of the specified 28-day strength and if the lowest core strength is greater than 75% of the specified 28-day strength. 3. If the concrete placed by the Contractor is suspected of not having proper air content, the Contractor shall engage a materials testing consultant approved by the Engineer, to obtain and test samples for air content in accordance with ASTM C 457. 3.11 CARE AND REPAIR OF CONCRETE A. The Contractor shall protect all concrete against injury or damage from excessive heat, lack of moisture, overstress, or any other cause until final acceptance by the Owner. Care shall be taken to prevent the drying of concrete and to avoid roughening or otherwise damaging the surface. Care shall be exercised to avoid jarring forms or placing any strain on the ends of projecting reinforcing bars. Any concrete found to be damaged, or which may have been originally defective, or which becomes defective at any time prior to the final acceptance of the completed work, or which departs from the established line or grade, or which, for any other reason, does not conform to the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Cast in Place Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 30 00-27 requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be satisfactorily repaired or removed and replaced with acceptable concrete at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Areas of honeycomb shall be chipped back to sound concrete and repaired as directed. C. Concrete formwork blowouts or unacceptable deviations in tolerances for formed surfaces due to improperly constructed or misaligned formwork shall be repaired as directed. Bulging or protruding areas, which result from slipping or deflecting forms shall be ground flush or chipped out and redressed as directed. D. Areas of concrete in which cracking, spalling, or other signs of deterioration develop prior to final acceptance shall be removed and replaced or repaired as directed. This stipulation includes concrete that has experienced cracking due to drying or thermal shrinkage of the concrete. Structural cracks shall be repaired using an approved epoxy injection system. Non-structural cracks shall be repaired using an approved hydrophilic resin pressure injected grout system unless other means of repair are deemed necessary and approved. All repair work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Concrete which fails to meet the strength requirements as outlined in Article 3.11, Paragraph F, will be analyzed as to its adequacy based upon loading conditions, resultant stresses, and exposure conditions for the area of concrete in question. If the concrete in question is found unacceptable based upon this analysis, that portion of the structure shall be strengthened or replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. The method of strengthening or extent of replacement shall be as directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Finishes Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 35 00-1 SECTION 03 35 00 CONCRETE FINISHES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide finishes of all concrete surfaces specified herein and shown on the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 03 11 00 – Concrete Formwork B. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete C. Section 03 60 00 – Grout 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. ACI 301 – Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings 2. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Manufacturer's literature on all products specified herein. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER A. Floor sealer shall be Diamond Clear VOX or Super Diamond Clear VOX by the Euclid Chemical Company, MasterKure CC 300 SB by Master Builders Solutions. 2.02 CONCRETE LIQUID DENSIFIER AND SEALANT A. Concrete liquid densifier and sealant shall be a high performance, deeply penetrating concrete densifier and sealant. Product shall be odorless, colorless, VOC-compliant, 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Finishes Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 35 00-2 non-yellowing siliconate based solution designed to harden, dustproof, and protect concrete floors subjected to heavy vehicular traffic and to resist black rubber tire marks on concrete surfaces. The product must contain a minimum solids content of 20% of which 50% is siliconate. Acceptable products are Diamond Hard by the Euclid Chemical Company, and Seal Hard by L&M Construction Chemicals, and Masterkure HD 200 WB by Master Builders Solutions. 2.03 NON-SLIP FLOORING ADDITIVE A. Non-slip flooring additives for slip resistant floors shall be non-metallic. Non-slip flooring additives shall be MasterTop 120SR by Master Builders Solutions, A-H Alox by Anti- Hydro, or Euco Grip by the Euclid Chemical Company. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FINISHES ON FORMED CONCRETE SURFACES A. After removal of forms, the finishes described below shall be applied in accordance with Article 3.06 - Concrete Finish Schedule. Unless the finish schedule specifies otherwise, all surfaces shall receive at least a Type I finish. See Article 3.05 for surfaces to receive paint or protective coatings. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of acceptability of all concrete finish work. 1. Type I - Rough: All fins, burrs, offsets, marks, and all other projections left by the forms shall be removed. Projections, depressions, etc. below finished grade required to be removed will only be those greater than ¼-inch. All holes left by removal of ends of ties, and all other holes, depressions, bug holes, air/blow holes or voids shall be filled solid with cement grout after first being thoroughly wetted and then struck off flush. The only holes below grade to be filled will be tie holes and any other holes larger than ¼-inch in any dimension. Honeycombs shall be chipped back to solid concrete and repaired as directed by the Engineer. All holes shall be filled with tools, such as sponge floats and trowels, that will permit packing the hole solidly with cement grout. Cement grout shall consist of one-part cement to three parts sand, epoxy bonding agent (for tie holes only) and the amount of mixing water shall be as little as consistent with the requirements of handling and placing. Color of cement grout shall match the adjacent wall surface. 2. Type II - Grout Cleaned: Where this finish is required, it shall be applied after completion of Type I finish. After the concrete has been pre-dampened over an extended amount of time to reach the condition of saturated surface dry (SSD), a slurry consisting of one part cement (including an appropriate quantity of white cement to produce a color matching the surrounding concrete) and 1-1/2 parts sand passing the No. 16 sieve, by damp loose volume, shall be spread over the surface with clean burlap pads or sponge rubber floats. Mix proportions shall be submitted to the Engineer after a sample of the work is established and accepted. Any surplus shall be removed by scraping and then rubbing with clean burlap. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Finishes Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 35 00-3 3. Type III - Smooth Rubbed: Where this finish is required, it shall be applied after the completion of the Type II finish. No rubbing shall be done before the concrete is thoroughly hardened and the mortar used for patching is firmly set. A smooth, uniform surface shall be obtained by wetting the surface and rubbing with a carborundum stone to eliminate irregularities. Unless the nature of the irregularities requires it, the general surface of the concrete shall not be cut into. Corners and edges shall be slightly rounded using a carborundum stone. Brush finishing or painting with grout or neat cement will not be permitted. A 100 square foot example shall be established at the beginning of the project to establish acceptability. 3.02 SLAB AND FLOOR FINISHES A. The finishes described below shall be applied to floors, slabs, flow channels and top of walls in accordance with Article 3.05 - Concrete Finish Schedule. Do not apply water (i.e. sprinkle) to any surface of concrete when finishing slabs. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of acceptability of all such finish work. 1. Type "A" - Screeded: This finish shall be obtained by placing screeds at frequent intervals and striking off to the surface elevation required. When a Type "F" finish is subsequently to be applied, the surface of the screeded concrete shall be roughened with a concrete rake to 1/2” minimum deep grooves prior to final set. 2. Type "B" - Wood or Magnesium Floated: This finish shall be obtained after completion of a Type "A" finish by working a previously screeded surface with a wood or magnesium float or until the desired texture is reached. Floating shall begin when the water sheen has disappeared and when the concrete has sufficiently hardened so that a person's foot leaves only a slight imprint. If wet spots occur, water shall be removed with a squeegee. Care shall be taken to prevent the formation of laitance and excess water on the finished surface. All edges shall be edged with an 1/8-inch tool as directed by the Engineer (wood, aluminum or magnesium is preferred, steel is acceptable). The finished surface shall be true, even, and free from blemishes and any other irregularities. 3. Type "D" - Steel Troweled: This finish shall be obtained after completion of a Type "B" finish. When the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess fine material from working to the surface, the surface shall be compacted and smoothed with not less than two thorough and complete steel troweling operations. In areas which are to receive a floor covering such as tile, resilient flooring, or carpeting, the applicable Specification Sections and Contract Drawings shall be reviewed for the required finishes and degree of flatness. In areas that are intermittently wet such as pump rooms, only one troweling operation is required to provide some trowel marks for slip resistance. All edges shall be edged with an 1/8-inch tool as directed by the Engineer (wood, aluminum or magnesium is preferred, steel is acceptable). The finish shall be brought to a smooth, dense surface, free from defects and blemishes. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Finishes Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 35 00-4 4. Type "E" - Broom or Belt: This finish shall provide the surface with a transverse scored texture by drawing a broom or burlap belt across the surface immediately after completion of a Type "B" finish. All edges shall be edged with an 1/8-inch tool as directed by the Engineer (wood, aluminum or magnesium is preferred, steel is acceptable). 5. Type “G” Hardened Finish: This finish shall be applied after completion of a Type “B” or Type “C” finish and prior to application of a Type “D” finish. Hardeners shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. Hardeners shall be applied using a mechanical spreader. The hardener shall be applied in two shakes with the first shake comprising 2/3 of the total amount. Type “D” finish shall be applied following completion of application of the hardener. Non-oxidizing, heavy-duty metallic floor hardener shall be applied at the loading docks and where specifically required on the Contract Drawings or specified herein at the rate of 1.5 pounds/ft.2. 3.03 CONCRETE SEALERS A. Concrete sealers shall be applied where specifically required on the Contract Drawings or specified herein. Concrete sealers and densifiers shall not be used as concrete curing compounds. Curing compounds, when allowed, shall be in accordance with Section 03 39 00 – Concrete Curing. B. Sealers shall be applied after installation of all equipment, piping, etc. and after completion of any other related construction activities. Application of sealers shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. C. Sealers shall be applied to all floor slabs not painted and not intended to be immersed. D. Floor slabs subjected to vehicular traffic shall be sealed with the concrete liquid densifier and sealer. E. All other floor slabs to receive sealer shall be sealed with concrete floor sealer. 3.04 FINISHES ON EQUIPMENT PADS A. Formed surfaces of equipment pads shall receive a Type III finish. B. Top surfaces of equipment pads, except those surfaces subsequently required to receive grout and support equipment bases, shall receive a Type "D" finish, unless otherwise noted. Surfaces which will later receive grout shall, before the concrete takes its final set, be made rough by removing the sand and cement that accumulates on the top to the extent that the aggregate will be exposed with irregular indentations in the surface up to 1/2 inch deep. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Finishes Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 35 00-5 3.05 FINISHES FOR SURFACES TO RECEIVE PAINT OR COATINGS A. Surfaces indicated or specified to receive paint or special coatings shall be prepared per specifications in Division 09. All products applied to the concrete surfaces during the placement, finishing, and curing process shall be compatible with the painting or coating system as required by the manufacturer. 3.06 CONCRETE SCHEDULE Item Type of Finish Concrete surfaces indicated to receive textured coating (as noted on Drawings and in Section 09 97 00 – Special Coatings) I Inner face of walls of vaults and miscellaneous concrete structures: Exterior concrete walls below grade I Exterior exposed concrete walls, ceilings, beams, manholes, hand holes, and miscellaneous structures to one foot below grade. All other exposed concrete surfaces not specified elsewhere II All interior exposed concrete walls and vertical surfaces II Interior exposed ceiling, including beams II All interior finish floors D Exterior concrete sidewalks, steps, ramps, decks, slabs on grade and landings exposed to weather E END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Curing Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 39 00-1 SECTION 03 39 00 CONCRETE CURING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Protect all freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and from the weather elements. The concrete shall be maintained with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for a period necessary for the hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the concrete in accordance with the requirements specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 03 11 00 – Concrete Formwork B. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete C. Section 03 35 00 – Concrete Finishes 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. ACI 301 – Specifications for Structural Concrete 2. ACI 304 – Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete 3. ACI 305.1 – Specification for Hot Weather Concreting 4. ACI 306.1 – Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting 5. ACI 308.1 – Specification for Curing Concrete 6. ASTM C171 – Standard Specifications for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete 7. ASTM C309 – Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete 8. ASTM C1315 – Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Curing Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 39 00-2 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 1. Proposed procedures for protection of concrete under wet weather placement conditions. 2. Proposed normal procedures for protection and curing of concrete. 3. Proposed special procedures for protection and curing of concrete under hot and cold weather conditions. 4. Proposed method of measuring concrete surface temperature changes. 5. Manufacturer's literature and material certification for proposed curing compounds. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use workers knowledgeable of ACI 301, 305, & 306 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 LIQUID MEMBRANE-FORMING CURING COMPOUND A. Clear curing and sealing compound shall be a clear styrene acrylate type complying with ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A with a minimum solids content of 30%. Moisture loss shall not be greater than 0.40 kg/m2 when applied at manufacturer’s recommended volume for square feet of area. Manufacturer’s certification is required. Acceptable products are Super Diamond Clear VOX by the Euclid Chemical Company. B. Where specifically approved by Engineer, on slabs to receive subsequent applied finishes, compound shall conform to ASTM C 309. Acceptable products are “Kurez DR VOX” or “Kurez W VOX” by the Euclid Chemical Company. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. 2.02 EVAPORATION REDUCER A. Evaporation reducer shall be "MasterKure ER 50” by Master Builders Solutions, or "Euco-Bar" by Euclid Chemical Company. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION AND CURING A. All freshly placed concrete shall be protected from the elements, flowing water and from defacement of any nature during construction operations. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Curing Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 39 00-3 B. As soon as the concrete has been placed and horizontal top surfaces have received their required finish, provisions shall be made for maintaining the concrete in a moist condition for at least a 7-day period thereafter, except for high early strength concrete, for which the period shall be at least the first three days after placement. Horizontal surfaces shall be kept covered, and intermittent, and localized drying will not be permitted. C. Walls that will be exposed on one side with either fluid or earth backfill on the opposite side shall be continuously wet cured for a minimum of seven days. Use of a curing compound will not be acceptable for applications of this type. D. The Contractor shall use one of the following methods to ensure that the concrete remains in a moist condition for the minimum period stated above. 1. Ponding or continuous fogging or sprinkling. 2. Application of mats or fabric kept continuously wet. 3. Continuous application of steam (under 150°F). 4. Application of sheet materials conforming to ASTM C171. 5. If approved by the Engineer, application of a curing compound in accordance with Article 3.04. E. The Contractor shall keep absorbent wood forms wet until they are removed. After form removal, the concrete shall be cured by one of the methods in paragraph D. F. Any of the curing procedures used in Paragraph 3.01-D may be replaced by one of the other curing procedures listed in Paragraph 3.01-D after the concrete is one-day old. However, the concrete surface shall not be permitted to become dry at any time. 3.02 CURING CONCRETE UNDER COLD WEATHER CONDITIONS A. Suitable means shall be provided for a minimum of 72 hours after placing concrete to maintain it at or above the minimum as placed temperatures specified in Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete, for concrete work in cold weather. During the 72-hour period, the concrete surface shall not be exposed to air more than 20°F above the minimum as placed temperatures. B. Stripping time for forms and supports shall be increased as necessary to allow for retardation in concrete strength caused by colder temperatures. This retardation is magnified when using concrete made with blended cements or containing fly ash or slag cement. Therefore, curing times and stripping times shall be further increased as necessary when using these types of concrete. C. The methods of protecting the concrete shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be such as will prevent local drying. Equipment and materials approved for this purpose Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Curing Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 39 00-4 shall be on the site in sufficient quantity before the work begins. The Contractor shall assist the Engineer by providing holes in the forms and the concrete in which thermometers can be placed to determine the adequacy of heating and protection. All such thermometers shall be furnished by the Contractor in quantity and type which the Engineer directs. D. Curing procedures during cold weather conditions shall conform to the requirements of ACI 306. 3.03 CURING CONCRETE UNDER HOT WEATHER CONDITIONS A. When air temperatures exceed 85°F, the Contractor shall take extra care in placing and finishing techniques to avoid formation of cold joints and plastic shrinkage cracking. If ordered by the Engineer, temporary sunshades and/or windbreakers shall be erected to guard against such developments, including generous use of wet burlap coverings and fog sprays to prevent drying out of the exposed concrete surfaces. B. Immediately after screeding, horizontal surfaces shall receive an application of evaporation reducer. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Final finish work shall begin as soon as the mix has stiffened sufficiently to support the workmen. C. Curing and protection of the concrete shall begin immediately after completion of the finishing operation. Continuous moist-curing consisting of method 1 or 2 listed in paragraph 3.01D is mandatory for at least the first 24 hours. Method 2 may be used only if the finished surface is not marred or blemished during contact with the coverings. D. At the end of the initial 24-hour period, curing and protection of the concrete shall continue for at least six (6) additional days using one of the methods listed in paragraph 3.01D. E. Curing procedures during hot weather conditions shall conform to the requirements of ACI 305. 3.04 USE OF CURING COMPOUND A. Curing compound shall be used only where specifically approved by the Engineer. Curing compound shall never be used for curing exposed walls with fluid or earth backfill on the opposite side. A continuous wet cure for a minimum of seven days is required for these applications. Curing compound shall not be used on surfaces exposed to water in potable water storage tanks and treatment plants unless curing compound is certified in accordance with ANSI/NSF Standard 61. B. When permitted, the curing compound shall maintain the concrete in a moist condition for the required time, and the subsequent appearance of the concrete surface shall not be affected. C. The compound shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations after water sheen has disappeared from the concrete surface and Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Concrete Curing Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 39 00-5 after finishing operations. Coverage rates for the curing and sealing compound shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s requirements for the specific type of finish required. For rough surfaces, apply in two directions at right angles to each other. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Precast Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 40 00-1 SECTION 03 40 00 PRECAST CONCRETE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall construct all precast concrete items as required in the Contract Documents, including all appurtenances necessary to make a complete installation. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 33 05 61  Utility Structures B. Section 03 21 00  Reinforcing Steel C. Section 03 30 00  Cast-in-Place Concrete D. Section 03 35 00  Concrete Finishes E. Section 03 39 00  Concrete Curing F. Section 03 60 00  Grout G. Section 05 10 00  Metal Materials H. Section 05 05 13  Galvanizing I. Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these Specifications, all work specified herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the end of the Bid. 1. International Building Code 2018 2. ACI 318  Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 3. ASTM D2240 – Standard Test for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness 4. PCI Standard MNL-116  Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products 5. PCI Design Handbook 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Precast Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 40 00-2 6. ASTM C857, ASTM C858 – Design of Utility Precast Units 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit the following for review in accordance with Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures. 1. Shop drawings for all precast concrete items showing all dimensions, locations, and type of lifting inserts, and details of reinforcement and joints. 2. A list of the design criteria used by the manufacturer for all manufactured, precast items. 3. Design calculations, showing at least the design loads and stresses on the item, shall be submitted. Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. 4. Certified reports for all lifting inserts, indicating allowable design loads. 5. Information on lifting and erection procedures. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All manufactured precast concrete units shall be produced by an experienced manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such items. All manufactured precast concrete and site-cast units shall be free of defects, spalls, and cracks. Care shall be taken in the mixing of materials, casting, curing, and shipping to avoid any of the above. The Engineer may elect to examine the units at the casting yard or upon arrival of the same at the site. The Engineer shall have the option of rejecting any or all the precast work if it does not meet with the requirements specified herein or on the Drawings. All rejected work shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: The precast concrete manufacturing plant shall be certified by the Prestressed Concrete Institute, Plant Certification Program, prior to the start of production. Certification is only required for plants providing prestressed structural members such as hollow core planks, double-T members, etc. C. Plant production and engineering must be under direct supervision and control of an Engineer who possesses a minimum of five years’ experience in precast concrete work. D. All welders shall be certified AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Precast Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 40 00-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE A. Concrete materials including Portland cement, aggregates, water, and admixtures shall conform to Section 03 30 00  Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. For prestressed concrete items, minimum compressive strength of concrete at 28 days shall be 5,000 psi unless otherwise specified. Minimum compressive strength of concrete at transfer of prestressing force shall be 3,500 psi unless otherwise specified. C. For non-prestressed concrete items, minimum compressive strength of concrete at 28 days shall be 4,500 psi for fluid containing and other environmental concrete structures and 4,000 for other structural concrete structures, unless otherwise specified. 2.02 GROUT A. Grout for joints between panels shall be a cement grout in conformance with Section 03 60 00  Grout. B. Minimum compressive strength of grout at 7 days shall be 3,000 psi. 2.03 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing steel used for precast concrete construction shall conform to Section 03 21 00  Reinforcing Steel. 2.04 STEEL INSERTS A. Steel inserts shall be in accordance with Section 05 10 00  Metal Materials. B. All steel inserts protruding from or occurring at the surface of precast units shall be galvanized in accordance with Section 05 05 13  Galvanizing. 2.05 WELDING A. Welding shall conform to Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening. 2.06 BEARING PADS A. Neoprene bearing pads shall conform to the requirements of A4-F3-T.063-B2, Grade 2, Method B, in accordance with the RMA Rubber Handbook. Pads shall be nonlaminated pads having a nominal Shore A durometer hardness of 70 in accordance with ASTM D2240. Adhesive for use with neoprene pads shall be an epoxy-resin compound compatible with the neoprene having a sufficient shear strength to prevent slippage between pads and adjacent bearing surfaces. Adhesive shall be 20+F Contact Cement by Miracle Adhesives Corporation, Neoprene Adhesive 77-198 by IGI Adhesives, Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Precast Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 40 00-4 Sikadur 31, Hi-Mod Gel by Sika Corporation, or DP-605 NS Urethane Adhesive by 3M Adhesive Systems. B. Plastic bearing pads shall be multi-monomer plastic strips which are non-leaching and support construction loads with no visible overall expansion, manufactured specifically for the purpose of bearing precast concrete. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION AND CASTING A. All precast members shall be fabricated and cast to the shapes, dimensions and lengths shown on the Drawings and in compliance with PCI MNL-116. Precast members shall be straight, true, and free from dimensional distortions, except for camber and tolerances permitted later in this clause. All integral appurtenances, reinforcing, openings, etc., shall be accurately located and secured in position with the form work system. Form materials shall be steel and the systems free from leakage during the casting operation. B. All cover of reinforcing shall be the same as detailed on the Drawings. C. Because of the critical nature of the bond development length in prestressed concrete panel construction, if the transfer of stress is by burning of the fully tensioned strands at the ends of the member, each strand shall first be burned at the ends of the bed and then at each end of each member before proceeding to the next strand in the burning pattern. D. The Contractor shall coordinate the communication of all necessary information concerning openings, sleeves, or inserts to the manufacturer of the precast members. E. Concrete shall be finished in accordance with Section 03 35 00  Concrete Finishes. Grout all recesses due to cut tendons which will not otherwise be grouted during erection. F. Curing of precast members shall be in accordance with Section 03 39 00  Concrete Curing. Use of a membrane curing compound will not be allowed. G. The manufacturer shall provide lifting inserts or other approved means of lifting members. 3.02 HANDLING, TRANSPORTING AND STORING A. Precast members shall not be transported away from the casting yard until the concrete has reached the minimum required 28-day compressive strength and a period of at least 5 days has elapsed since casting, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Precast Concrete Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 40 00-5 B. No precast member shall be transported from the plant to the job site prior to approval of that member by the plant inspector. This approval will be stamped on the member by the plant inspector. C. During handling, transporting, and storing, precast concrete members shall be lifted and supported only at the lifting or supporting points as indicated on the shop drawings. D. All precast members shall be stored on solid, unyielding, storage blocks in a manner to prevent torsion, objectionable bending, and contact with the ground. E. Precast concrete members shall not be used as storage areas for other materials or equipment. F. Precast members damaged while being handled or transported will be rejected or shall be repaired in a manner approved by the Engineer. 3.03 ERECTION A. Erection shall be carried out by the manufacturer or under his supervision using labor, equipment, tools, and materials required for proper execution of the work. B. Contractor shall prepare all bearing surfaces to a true and level line prior to erection. All supports of the precast members shall be accurately located and of required size and bearing materials. C. Installation of the precast members shall be made by leveling the top surface of the assembled units keeping the units tight and at right angles to the bearing surface. D. Connections which require welding shall be properly made in accordance with Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening. E. Grouting between adjacent precast members and along the edges of the assembled precast members shall be accomplished as indicated on the drawings, care being taken to solidly pack such spaces and to prevent leakage or droppings of grout through the assembled precast members. Any grout which seeps through the precast members shall be removed before it hardens. F. In no case shall concentrated construction loads, or construction loads exceeding the design loads, be placed on the precast members. In no case shall loads be placed on the precast members prior to the welding operations associated with erection, and prior to placing of topping (if required). G. No Contractor, Subcontractor or any of his employees shall arbitrarily cut, drill, punch or otherwise tamper with the precast members. H. Precast members damaged while being erected will be rejected or shall be repaired in a manner approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Grout Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 60 00-1 SECTION 03 60 00 GROUT PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide all grout used in concrete work and as bearing surfaces for base plates, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Text 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Requirements of related work are included in Division 01 and Division 02 of these Specifications. 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. CRD-C 621 – Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-shrink Grout 2. ASTM C 33 – Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 3. ASTM C 109 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 inch or 50 mm cube Specimens) 4. ASTM C 531 – Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings 5. ASTM C 579 – Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical -Resistant Mortars and Monolithic Surfacings 6. ASTM C 827 – Standard Test Method for Early Volume Change of Cementitious Mixtures 7. ASTM C 1107 – Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic Cement Grout (Nonshrink) 8. ASTM D 695 – C ompressive Properties of Rigid Plastics 70 088 -001 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Grout Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 60 00-2 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 1. Certified test results verifying the compressive strength and shrinkage and expansion requirements specified herein. 2. Manufacturer's literature containing instructions and recommendations on the mixing, handling, placement, and appropriate uses for each type of grout used in the work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Tests 1. Compression test specimens will be taken during construction from the first placement of each type of grout and at intervals thereafter as selected by the Engineer to ensure continued compliance with these Specifications. The specimens will be made by the Engineer or its representative. a. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for cement grout and non - shrink grout will be performed as specified in ASTM C 109 at intervals during construction as selected by the Engineer. A set of three specimens will be made for testing at seven days, 28 days, and any additional times as appropriate. b. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for epoxy grout will be performed as specified in ASTM C 579, Method B, at intervals during construction as selected by the Engineer. A set of three specimens will be made for testing at seven days and any other time as appropriate. 2. The cost of all laboratory tests on grout will be borne by the Owner, but the Contractor shall assist the Engineer in obtaining specimens for testing. The Contractor shall be charged for the cost of any additional tests and investigation on work performed which does not meet the specifications. The Contractor shall supply all materials necessary for fabricating the test specimens, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. All grout, already placed, which fails to meet the requirements of these Specifications, is subject to removal and replacement at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement Grout Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Grout Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 60 00-3 1. Cement grout shall be composed of Portland Cement and sand in the proportion specified in the Contract Documents and the minimum amount of water necessary to obtain the desired consistency. If no proportion is indicated, cement grout shall consist of one-p art Portland Cement to three parts sand. Water amount shall be as required to achieve desired consistency without compromising strength requirements. White Portland Cement shall be mixed with the Portland Cement as required to match color of adjacent concrete. 2. The minimum compressive strength at 28 days shall be 4000 psi. 3. For beds thicker than 1-1/2 inch and/or where free passage of grout will not be obstructed by coarse aggregate, 1-1/2 parts of coarse aggregate having a top size of 3/8 inch should be added. This stipulation does not apply for grout being swept in by a mec hanism. These applications shall use a plain cement grout without coarse aggregate regardless of bed thickness. Cement grout used for surfaces swept in by a mechanism shall also contain micro -synthetic fibers in accordance with Section 03 30 00. 4. Sand shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C33. B. Non-Shrink Grout 1. Non-shrink grout shall conform to CRD -C 621 and ASTM C 1107, Grade B or C when tested at a max. fluid consistency of 30 seconds per CDC 611/ASTM C939 at temperature extremes of 45°F and 90°F and an extended working time of 15 minutes. Grout shall have a min. 28-day strength of 7,000 psi. Non-shrink grout shall be, "Euco N-S" by the Euclid Chemical Company, "Sikagrout 212" by Sika Corporation, “Conspec 100 Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout” by Conspec, “MasterFlow 928” by Master Builders Solutions. C. Epoxy Grout 1. Epoxy grout shall be "Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod" by Sika Corporation, "Duralcrete LV" by Tamms Industries, or "Euco #452 Series" by Euclid Chemical, “MasterEmaco ADH 1090 RS” by Master Builders Solutions. 2. Epoxy grout shall be modified as required for each application with aggregate per manufacturer's instructions. D. Epoxy Base Plate Grout 1. Epoxy base plate grout shall be “Sikadur 42, Grout -Pak” by Sika Corporation, or “MasterFlow 648” by Master Builders Solutions. 2.02 CURING MATERIALS A. Curing materials shall be as specified in Section 03 39 00 – Concrete Curing for cement grout and as recommended by the manufacturer for prepackaged grouts. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Grout Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 60 00-4 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The different types of grout shall be used for the applications stated below unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents. Where grout is called for in the Contract Documents which does not fall under any of the applications stated below, non -shrink grout shall be used unless another type is specifically referenced. 1. Cement grout shall be used for grout toppings and for patching of fresh concrete, when approved by the Engineer. Grout toppings swept in by equipment mechanisms shall contain micro-synthetic fibers as specified in Section 03 30 00. 2. Non-shrink grout shall be used for grouting beneath base plates of structural metal framing. 3. Epoxy grout shall be used for bonding new concrete to hardened concrete. 4. Epoxy base plate grout shall be used for precision seating of base plates including base plates for all equipment such as engines, mixers, pumps, vibratory and heavy impact machinery, etc. B. New concrete surfaces to receive cement grout shall be as specified in Section 03 35 00 – Concrete Finishes, and shall be cleaned of all dirt, grease, and oil -like films. Existing concrete surfaces shall likewise be cleaned of all similar contamination and debris, including chipping, or roughening the surface if a laitance or poor concrete is evident. The finish of the grout surface shall match that of the adjacent concrete. Curing and protection of cement grout shall be as specified in Section 03 39 00 – Concrete Curing. C. All mixing, surface preparation, handling, placing, consolidation, and other means of execution for prepackaged grouts shall be done according to the instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer. D. The Contractor, through the manufacturer of a non -shrink grout and epoxy grout, shall provide on-site technical assistance upon request, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 CONSISTENCY A. The consistency of grouts shall be that necessary to completely fill the space to be grouted for the application. Dry pack consistency is such that the grout is plastic and moldable but will not flow. 3.03 MEASUREMENT AND INGREDIENTS A. Measurements for cement grout shall be made accurately by volume using containers. Shovel measurement shall not be allowed. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Grout Cottonwoods Connection Page 03 60 00-5 B. Prepackaged grouts shall have ingredients measured by means recommended by the manufacturer. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Grout shall be placed quickly and continuously, shall completely fill the space to be grouted and be thoroughly compacted and free of air pockets. The grout may be poured in place, pressure grouted by gravity, or pumped. The use of pneumatic pressure or dr y- packed grouting requires approval of the Engineer. For grouting beneath base plates, grout shall be placed from one side only and allowed to flow across to the open side to avoid air-entrapment. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanizing Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 05 13-1 SECTION 05 05 13 GALVANIZING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Where galvanizing is called for in the Contract Documents, the galvanizing shall be performed in accordance with the provisions of this Section unless otherwise noted. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Further requirements for galvanizing specific items may be included in other Sections of the Specifications. See section for the specific item in question. 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. International Building Code 2018 2. ASTM A123  Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip 3. ASTM A153  Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 4. ASTM A653  Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized), or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 5. ASTM A924  Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process 6. ASTM A780  Standard Practice of Repair of Damaged Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings 7. ASTM F2329  Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners 8. ASTM E376 – Measuring Coating Thickness by Magnetic-Field or Eddy-Current (Electromagnetic) Test Methods. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanizing Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 05 13-2 9. TT-P-641 – Primer Coating, Zinc Dust – Zinc Oxide (for Galvanized Surfaces) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures. 1. Certification that the item(s) are galvanized in accordance with the applicable ASTM standards specified herein. This certification may be included as part of any material certification that may be required by other Sections of the Specifications. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested by Owner or Owner’s Representative, verify weight of zinc coating in accordance with ASTM E376. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GALVANIC COATING A. Material composition of the galvanic coating shall be in accordance with the applicable ASTM standards specified herein. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATED PRODUCTS A. Products fabricated from rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, plates, bars, and strips, 1/8 inch thick and heavier which are to be galvanized shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Products shall be fabricated into the largest unit which is practicable to galvanize before the galvanizing is done. Fabrication shall include all operations necessary to complete the unit such as shearing, cutting, punching, forming, drilling, milling, bending, and welding. Components of bolted or riveted assemblies shall be galvanized separately before assembly. When it is necessary to straighten any sections after galvanizing, such work shall be performed without damage to the zinc coating. The galvanizer shall be a member of American Galvanizers Association. B. Components with partial surface finishes shall be commercial blast cleaned prior to pickling. C. Sampling and testing of each lot shall be performed prior to shipment from the galvanizer’s facility per ASTM A123. 3.02 HARDWARE A. Iron and steel hardware which is to be galvanized shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 and ASTM F2329. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Galvanizing Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 05 13-3 3.03 ASSEMBLED PRODUCTS A. Assembled steel products which are to be galvanized shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. All edges of tightly contacting surfaces shall be completely sealed by welding before galvanizing. B. Assemblies shall be provided with vent and drain holes as required by the fabricator. Vent and drain hole sizes and locations shall be included in the structural steel shop drawings required in Section 05 12 00  Structural Steel for approval. All vent and drain holes shall be plugged and finished to be flush with and blend in with the surrounding surface. Where water intrusion can occur, the plug shall be carefully melted into the surrounding zinc coating using an appropriate fluxing agent. 3.04 METAL DECK A. Unless noted otherwise, metal deck shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 G60 minimum. In moist environments or as indicated on the Contract Drawings, galvanizing shall meet the requirements of ASTM A653 G90. B. Galvanized metal deck shall meet the requirements of ASTM A924. 3.05 REPAIR OF GALVANIZING A. Galvanized surfaces that are abraded or damaged at any time after the application of zinc coating shall be repaired by thoroughly wire brushing the damaged areas and removing all loose and cracked coating, after which the cleaned areas shall be painted with 2 coats of zinc rich paint meeting the requirements of Federal Specification DOD-P- 21035A and shall be thoroughly mixed prior to application. Zinc rich paint shall not be tinted. The total thickness of the 2 coats shall not be less than 6 mils. In lieu of repairing by painting with zinc rich paint, other methods of repairing galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM A780 may be used provided the proposed method is acceptable to the Engineer. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Fastening Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 05 23-1 SECTION 05 05 23 METAL FASTENING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide all metal welds and fasteners not otherwise specified, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 05 10 00 – Metal Materials B. Section 05 05 13 – Galvanizing C. Section 05 13 00 – Stainless Steel D. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel E. Section 05 14 00 – Structural Aluminum 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. International Building Code 2018 2. AC 193 – Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements 3. AC 308 – Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements 4. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 5. ACI 355.2 – Qualifications of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete 6. ACI 355.4 – Qualifications of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete 7. AISC – RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts 8. AISC – Code of Standard Practice 9. AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code – Steel 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Fastening Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 05 23-2 10. AWS D1.2 – Structural Welding Code – Aluminum 11. AWS D1.6 – Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel 12. Aluminum Association – Specifications for Aluminum Structures 13. ASTM A572/A572M-94C – Standard Specification for High Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel Grade 50 14. ASTM A36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 15. ASTM A489 – Standard Specification for Eyebolts 16. ASTM A563 – Standard Specifications for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts 17. ASTM D1785 – Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe 18. ASTM E3121 – Standard Test Methods for Field Testing of Anchors in Concrete or Masonry 19. ASTM F436 – Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers 20. ASTM F467 – Standard Specification for Nonferrous Nuts for General Use 21. ASTM F593 – Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts; Hex Cap Screws, and Studs 22. ASTM F594 – Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts 23. ASTM F1554 – Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength 24. ASTM F3125 – Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi and 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimension 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 1. Shop Drawings providing the fastener's manufacturer and type and certification of the fastener's material and capacity. 2. Anchor design calculations sealed by a Professional Engineer currently registered in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. Only required if design not shown on Contract Drawings. 3. A current Evaluation Report shall be submitted for all anchors that will be considered for use on this project. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Fastening Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 05 23-3 4. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 5. Copy of valid certification for each person who is to perform field welding. 6. Certified weld inspection reports, when required. 7. Welding procedures. 8. Installer qualifications. 9. Certification of Installer Training. 10. Inspection Reports. 11. Results of Anchor Proof Testing. 12. Manufacturer’s Literature for Resistance of Adhesive to Appropriate Chemical Exposure, where deemed necessary. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fasteners not manufactured in the United States shall be tested and certification provided with respect to specified quality and strength standards. Certifications of origin shall be submitted for all U.S. fasteners supplied on the project. B. Evaluation Report: A current Evaluation Report from an independent testing and evaluation agency (ITEA) shall be submitted for all anchors that will be used on this project. The ITEA producing the evaluation report shall be accredited in accordance with the requirements for ITEA’s in ACI 355.2 (for mechanical anchors) or 355.4 (for adhesive anchors). Acceptable ITEA’s include but are not necessarily limited to the International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) and the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials Uniform Evaluation Service (IAPMO-UES). C. Installer Qualifications: All concrete anchors shall be installed by an Installer with at least three years of experience performing similar installations. Concrete adhesive anchor installers for anchor installations in horizontal to vertically overhead applications shall be certified as an Adhesive Anchor Installer in accordance with ACI-CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installation Certification Program. D. Installer Training: For concrete anchors, conduct a thorough training with the manufacturer or the manufacturer’s representative for the Installer on the project. Training shall consist of a review of the complete installation process to include but not be limited to the following: 1. Hole drilling procedure. 2. Hole preparation and cleaning technique. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Fastening Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 05 23-4 3. Adhesive injection technique and dispenser training/maintenance. 4. Concrete adhesive anchor preparation and installation. 5. Proof loading/torquing. 6. Provide a list of names of all installers who are trained by the Manufacturer’s Field Representative on this jobsite prior to installation of products. Record must include the installer name, date of training, products included in the training and trainer name and contact information. 7. Provide a copy of the current ACI/CRSI “Adhesive Anchor Installer” certification cards for all installers who will be installing adhesive anchors in the horizontal to vertically overhead orientation. E. All steel welding shall be performed by welders certified in accordance with AWS D1.1. All aluminum welding shall be performed by welders certified in accordance with AWS D1.2. All stainless-steel welding shall be performed by welders certified in accordance with AWS D1.6. Certifications of field welders shall be submitted prior to performing any field welds. F. Welds and high strength bolts used in connections of structural steel will be visually inspected in accordance with Article 3.04. G. The Owner may engage an independent testing agency to perform testing of welded connections and to prepare test reports in accordance with AWS. Inadequate welds shall be corrected or redone and retested to the satisfaction of the Engineer and/or an acceptable independent testing laboratory, at no additional cost to the Owner. H. Provide a welding procedure for each type and thickness of weld. For welds that are not prequalified, include a Performance Qualification Report. The welding procedure shall be given to each welder performing the weld. The welding procedure shall follow the format in Annex E of AWS D1.1 with relevant information presented. I. Special inspections for concrete adhesive anchors shall be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and Section 01 45 33 – Special Inspections. Downward installations require periodic inspection and horizontal and overhead installations require continuous inspection. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ANCHOR RODS A. Anchor rods shall conform to ASTM F1554 Grade 55 except where stainless steel or other approved anchor rods are shown on the Drawings or stated herein. Anchor rods shall have hexagonal heads and shall be supplied with hexagonal nuts meeting the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Fastening Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 05 23-5 requirements of ASTM A563 Grade A. Washers shall meet the requirements of ASTM A436. B. All anchors into concrete shall be cast-in-place anchors unless specifically referenced otherwise on Drawings. C. Where anchor rods are used to anchor galvanized steel or are otherwise specified to be galvanized, anchor rods and nuts shall be hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM F1554. D. Where pipe sleeves around anchor rods are shown on the Drawings, pipe sleeves shall be cut from Schedule 40 PVC plastic piping meeting the requirements of ASTM D1785. 2.02 HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS A. High strength bolts and associated nuts and washers shall be in accordance with ASTM F3125, Grade A325 Type 1 or Grade F1852 Type 1. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall meet the requirements of RCSC “Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts”. B. Where high strength bolts are used to connect galvanized steel or are otherwise specified to be galvanized, bolts, nuts, and washers shall be hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A325. 2.03 STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS A. Stainless steel bolts shall conform to ASTM F-593 for alloy groups 1 and 2, Condition CW1, or ASTM F-3125. All underwater fasteners, fasteners in confined areas containing fluid, and fasteners in corrosive environments shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless noted otherwise. Fasteners for aluminum and stainless-steel members not subject to the above conditions shall be Type 304 stainless steel unless otherwise noted. B. Stainless steel bolts shall have hexagonal heads with a raised letter or symbol on the bolts indicating the manufacturer and shall be supplied with hexagonal nuts meeting the requirements of ASTM F594. Nuts, washers, and lock washers shall be of the same alloy as the bolts. 2.04 CONCRETE ANCHORS A. General 1. Where concrete anchors are called for on the Drawings, one of the types listed below shall be used; except, where one of the types listed below is specifically called for on the Drawings, only that type shall be used. If no specific type is indicated on the Drawings, the concrete anchor shall be a cast-in-place anchor. The determination of anchors equivalent to those listed below shall be based on test data performed by an approved independent testing laboratory. Two types of anchors shall be used: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Fastening Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 05 23-6 a. Mechanical anchors include any of the following anchors: 1) Expansion anchors shall be mechanical anchors of the wedge, sleeve, or drop-in type that are set by expanding against the sides of the drilled hole. 2) Screw anchors are mechanical anchors that derive tensile holding strength by the mechanical interlock provided by threads cutting into the concrete during installation. Screw anchors shall be one-piece, heavy duty screw anchors with a finished head. b. Adhesive anchors shall consist of threaded rods or bolts anchored with an adhesive system into hardened concrete. Adhesive anchors shall be two- part injection type using the manufacturer’s static mixing nozzle and shall be supplied as an entire system. 2. Adhesive anchors shall conform to the requirements of ACI 355.4 or alternately to AC 308. Mechanical anchors shall conform to the requirements of ACI 355.2 or alternately to AC 193. Anchors in Seismic Design Categories C through F shall conform to the International Building Code and ACI 318 Appendix D requirements as applicable, including seismic test requirements. 3. Fire Resistance: All anchors installed within fire resistant construction shall either be enclosed in a fire-resistant envelope, be protected by approved fire-resistive materials, be used to resist wind and earthquake loads only, or anchor non- structural elements. 4. Engineer’s approval is required for use of concrete anchors in locations other than those shown on the Drawings. B. Wedge Anchors: 1. Do not use when subjected to vibration. 2. Do not use in exterior locations or locations subjected to freezing. 3. Do not use in submerged, intermittently submerged, or buried locations. 4. Suitable for use in overhead applications. C. Screw Anchors: 1. Do not use when subjected to vibration. 2. Do not use in exterior locations or locations subjected to freezing. 3. Do not use in submerged, intermittently submerged, or buried locations. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Fastening Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 05 23-7 4. Do not use in overhead applications. D. Sleeve Anchors: 1. Do not use when subjected to vibration. 2. Do not use in exterior locations or locations subjected to freezing. 3. Do not use in submerged, intermittently submerged, or buried locations. 4. Suitable for use in overhead applications. E. Undercut Anchors: 1. Suitable for use where subjected to vibration. 2. Do not use in exterior locations or locations subjected to freezing. 3. Do not use in submerged, intermittently submerged, or buried locations. 4. Suitable for use in overhead applications. F. Adhesive Anchors in Concrete: 1. Suitable for use where subjected to vibration. 2. Suitable for use in exterior locations or locations subjected to freezing. 3. Suitable for use in submerged, intermittently submerged, or buried locations. 4. Do not use in overhead applications, unless otherwise shown or approved by Engineer. 5. Suitable for use in chemical areas provided manufacturer’s literature confirms appropriate chemical resistance. 6. Do not use for pipe hangers, unless otherwise shown or approved by Engineer. G. Adhesive Anchors in Masonry 1. Suitable for use where subjected to vibration. 2. Suitable for use in exterior locations or locations subjected to freezing. 3. Do not use for pipe hangers, unless otherwise shown or approved by Engineer. 4. Suitable for use in precast hollow core planks. H. Concrete Anchor Design: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Fastening Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 05 23-8 1. Basis of design shall include the following design parameters: a. Actual compressive strength of concrete. b. Cracked concrete conditions. c. Dry or water saturated installation conditions. d. Base material temperature between 40- and 104-degrees Fahrenheit. e. Installation with hammer drill or hollow-drill bit system drilling methods. f. Installation not prior to 21-day minimum age of concrete. 2. An anchor design consists of specifying anchor size, quantity, spacing, edge distance and embedment to resist all applicable loads. Where an anchor design is indicated on the Drawings, the anchors shall be installed to the prescribed size, spacing, embedment depth, and edge distance. If all parts of an anchor design are provided on the Drawings except embedment depth, the Contractor shall provide the embedment depth as indicated in Paragraph B.3 unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Where an anchor design is not indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall provide the anchor design per the requirements listed below. a. The Contractor shall submit design with signed and sealed calculations and drawings performed by an Engineer currently registered in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. Anchors shall be of a type recommended by the anchor manufacturer for use in cracked concrete and shall be designed by the Contractor in accordance with ACI 318 Appendix D. b. Embedment Depth 1) Minimum anchor embedment shall be as indicated on the Drawings unless anchor design is stipulated to be by Contractor or equipment provider. The provider of equipment including pumps, blowers, etc. shall provide anchor design including size of anchors, pattern, and embedment depth. If the equipment provider is unable to provide design of embedment depth, the design shall be provided by the contractor using the loads furnished by the equipment provider. Although all manufacturers listed are permitted, the embedment depth indicated on the Drawings is based on ““Pure 110+ by DeWalt” ESR 3298 issued 7/2012 If the contractor submits one of the other concrete adhesive anchors listed, the Engineer shall evaluate the required embedment and the Contractor shall provide the required embedment depth stipulated by the Engineer specific to the approved dowel adhesive. 2) Where the embedment depth is not shown on the Drawings, concrete anchors shall be embedded no less than the manufacturer’s standard Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Fastening Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 05 23-9 embedment (expansion or mechanical anchors) or to provide a minimum allowable bond strength equal to the allowable yield capacity of the rod according to the manufacturer (adhesive anchors). 3) The embedment depth shall be determined using the actual concrete compressive strength, a cracked concrete state, maximum long-term temperature of 110 degrees F, and maximum short-term temperature of 140 degrees F. In no case shall the embedment depth be less than the minimum or more than the maximum stated in the manufacturer’s literature. I. Anchors: 1. Mechanical Anchors: a. Wedge Anchors: Wedge anchors shall be “Kwik Bolt TZ” by Hilti, Inc., “Strong-Bolt 2” by Simpson Strong-Tie Co. or “Power-Stud+SD1” or “Power-Stud+ SD-2” by DeWalt. b. Screw Anchors: Screw anchors shall be “KWIK HUS-EZ”, “KWIK HUS-EZ-I”, or “KWIK HUS-EZ CRC” by Hilti, Inc., “Titen HD” or “Stainless Steel Titen HD” by Simpson Strong-Tie Co., or “Screw-Bolt+” by DeWalt. c. Sleeve Anchors: Sleeve anchors shall be “HSL-3 Heavy Duty Sleeve Anchor” by Hilti, Inc. or “Power-Bolt +” by DeWalt. d. Shallow Embedment Internally Threaded Insert (3/4” max embedment): “Mini-Undercut +Anchor” by DeWalt, “HDI-P-TZ” by Hilti, Inc. or approved equal. e. Concrete Undercut Anchors: Concrete undercut anchors shall be “HDA Undercut Anchors” by Hilti, Inc, “DUC Ductile Undercut Anchor”, by USP Structural Connectors, or approved equal. f. Mechanical anchor systems shall comply with ACI 355.2 or alternatively the latest revision of AC 193 and shall have a valid evaluation report in accordance with the applicable building code. 2. Adhesive Anchors: a. Adhesive anchors shall be “HIT HY-200 Adhesive Anchoring System” by Hilti, Inc., “SET-3G Epoxy Adhesive Anchors” by Simpson Strong-Tie Co., or “Pure 110+ Epoxy Adhesive Anchor System” by DeWalt. b. Adhesive anchor systems shall be IBC compliant and capable of resisting short term wind and seismic loads (Seismic Design Categories A through F) as well as long term and short term sustained static loads in both cracked and uncracked concrete in all Seismic Design Categories. Adhesive anchor Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Fastening Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 05 23-10 systems shall comply with ACI 355.4 or alternatively the latest revision of AC308 and shall have a valid evaluation report in accordance with the applicable building code. No or equal products will be considered unless prequalified and approved by the Engineer and Owner. J. Concrete Anchor Materials: 1. Concrete anchors used to anchor structural steel shall be a threaded steel rod per manufacturer’s recommendations for proposed adhesive system but shall not have a yield strength (fy) less than 58 ksi nor an ultimate strength (fu) less than 72.5 ksi, unless noted otherwise. Where steel to be anchored is galvanized, concrete anchors shall also be galvanized unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Concrete anchors used to anchor aluminum, FRP, or stainless steel shall be manufactured from stainless steel unless noted otherwise. All underwater fasteners, fasteners in confined areas containing fluid, and fasteners in corrosive environments shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless noted otherwise. Fasteners for aluminum and stainless-steel members not subject to the above conditions shall be Type 304 stainless steel unless otherwise noted. 3. Nuts, washers, lock washers and other hardware shall be of a material to match the anchors. 2.05 WELDS A. Electrodes for welding structural steel and all ferrous steel shall comply with AWS Code, using E70 series electrodes for shielded metal arc welding (SMAW), or F7 series electrodes for submerged arc welding (SAW). B. Electrodes for welding aluminum shall comply with the Aluminum Association Specifications and AWS D1.2. C. Electrodes for welding stainless steel and other metals shall comply with AWS D1.6. 2.06 WELDED STUD CONNECTORS A. Welded stud connectors shall conform to the requirements of AWS D1.1 Type C. 2.07 EYEBOLTS A. Eyebolts shall conform to ASTM A489 unless noted otherwise. 2.08 HASTELLOY FASTENERS A. Hastelloy fasteners and nuts shall be constructed of Hastelloy C-276. Hastelloy fasteners shall be used for fasteners located in chemical areas containing Hydrochloric Acid (Muriatic Acid), Hydrofluosilicic Acid (Fluoride), or Sulfuric Acid. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Fastening Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 05 23-11 2.09 TITANIUM FASTENERS A. Titanium fasteners, washers, and nuts shall conform to ASTM B348, Grade 2. Titanium fasteners shall be used for fasteners located in chemical areas containing Ferric Chloride or Sodium Hypochlorite. 2.10 ANTISIEZE LUBRICANT A. Antiseize lubricant shall be C5-A Anti-Seize by Loctite Corporation, Molykote P-37 Anti- Seize Paste by Dow Corning, 3M Anti-Seize by 3M, or equal. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 MEASUREMENTS A. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions and review the Drawings and shall report any discrepancies to the Engineer for clarification prior to starting fabrication. 3.02 FASTENER INSTALLATION A. Anchor Rods, Concrete Anchors, and Masonry Anchors 1. Anchor rods shall be installed in accordance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice" by setting in concrete while it is being placed and positioned by means of a rigidly held template. Overhead adhesive anchors, and base plates or elements they are anchoring, shall be shored as required and securely held in place during anchor setting to prevent movement during anchor installation. Movement of anchors during curing is prohibited. 2. The Contractor shall verify that all concrete and masonry anchors have been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and that the capacity of the installed anchor meets or exceeds the specified safe holding capacity. 3. Concrete anchors shall not be used in place of anchor rods without Engineer's approval. 4. All stainless-steel threads shall be coated with anti-seize lubricant. B. High Strength Bolts 1. All bolted connections for structural steel shall use high strength bolts. High strength bolts shall be installed in accordance with RCSC “Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts”. All bolted joints shall be Type N, snug-tight, bearing connections in accordance with AISC Specifications unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Fastening Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 05 23-12 C. Stainless Steel Bolts 1. Where connections indicate the use of stainless-steel bolts, the bolts shall be installed to the snug tight condition. Connections shall include stainless steel washers under both the bolt head and the nut head. Lock washers shall be utilized for all connections and shall be placed under the nut head. D. Concrete Anchors 1. Concrete at time of anchor installation shall be a minimum age of 21 days, have a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi, and ambient temperature at time of installation shall be at least 50 degrees F. 2. Concrete Anchor Testing: a. At all locations, at least 10 percent of all concrete anchors installed shall be proof tested to 80% of the yield strength of the anchor rod, with a minimum of one tested anchor per anchor group. b. Contractor shall submit a plan and schedule indicating locations of anchors to be proof tested, load test values and proposed anchor testing procedure (including a diagram of the testing equipment proposed for use) to the Engineer for review prior to conducting any testing. Proof testing of anchors shall be in accordance with ASTM E3121 for the static tension test. If additional tests are required, inclusion of these tests shall be as stipulated on Contract Drawings. c. Where Contract Documents indicate anchor design to be the Contractor’s responsibility, the Contractor shall submit a plan and schedule indicating locations of anchors to be proof tested and load test values, sealed by a Professional Engineer currently registered in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. Documentation shall also be submitted indicating the Contractor’s proof testing procedures have been reviewed and the proposed procedures are acceptable. Proof testing procedures shall be in accordance with ASTM E3121. d. Concrete Anchors shall have no visible indications of displacement or damage during or after the proof test. Concrete cracking in the vicinity of the anchor after loading shall be considered a failure. Anchors exhibiting damage shall be removed and replaced. If more than 5 percent of tested anchors fail, then 100 percent of anchors shall be proof tested. e. Proof testing of concrete anchors shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory hired directly by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for costs of all proof testing, including additional testing required due to previously failed tests. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Fastening Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 05 23-13 3. All concrete anchors shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. A representative of the manufacturer shall be on site when required by the Engineer. 4. All holes shall be drilled in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions except that cored holes shall not be allowed unless specifically approved by the Engineer. If cored holes are allowed, cored holes shall be roughened in accordance with manufacturer requirements. Thoroughly clean drill holes of all debris, drill dust, and water in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions prior to installation of adhesive and threaded rod unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. Degree of hole dampness shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Installation conditions shall be either dry or water saturated. Water filled or submerged holes shall not be permitted unless specifically approved by the Engineer. Injection of adhesive into the hole shall be performed to minimize the formation of air pockets in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Wipe rod free from oil that may be present from shipping or handling. 5. All adhesive anchor installations in the horizontal to vertically overhead orientation shall be conducted by a certified Adhesive Anchor Installer as certified by ACI/CSRI per ACI 318-11 D.9.2.2. Current AAI Certificate must be submitted to the Engineer of Record prior to commencement of any adhesive anchor installations. E. Other Bolts 1. All dissimilar metal shall be connected with appropriate fasteners and shall be isolated via an approved dielectric. 2. All stainless-steel bolts shall be coated with anti-seize lubricant. 3.03 WELDING F. All welding shall comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, quality of welds, qualifications of welders and methods used in correcting welded work. G. Welded stud connectors shall be installed in accordance with AWS D1.1. H. Welds shown on the Drawings with a field weld symbol shall be field welded. All other welds shall be shop welded unless specifically approved by the Engineer. 3.04 INSPECTION A. High strength bolting will be visually inspected in accordance with RCSC “Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts”. Rejected bolts shall be either replaced or retightened as required. B. Field welds will be visually inspected in accordance with AWS Codes. Inadequate welds shall be corrected or redone as required in accordance with AWS Codes. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Fastening Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 05 23-14 C. Post-installed concrete anchors shall be inspected as required by ACI 318. 3.05 CUTTING OF EMBEDED REBAR A. The Contractor shall not cut embedded rebar cast into structural concrete during installation of post-installed fasteners without prior approval of the Engineer. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Materials Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 10 00-1 SECTION 05 10 00 METAL MATERIALS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Metal materials not otherwise specified shall conform to the requirements of this Section. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Materials for fasteners are included in Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening. B. Requirements for specific products made from the materials specified herein are included in other sections of the Specifications. See the section for the specific item in question. 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. ASTM A36  Standard Specification for Structural Steel B. ASTM A47  Standard Specification for Malleable Iron Castings C. ASTM A48  Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings D. ASTM A53  Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless E. ASTM A167  Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip F. ASTM A276  Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes G. ASTM A307  Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners H. ASTM A446  Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural (Physical) quality I. ASTM A500  Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes J. ASTM A501  Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Materials Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 10 00-2 K. ASTM A529  Standard Specification for Structural Steel with 42 000 psi (290 Mpa) Minimum Yield Point (1/2 in. (12.7 mm) Maximum Thickness) L. ASTM A536  Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings M. ASTM A570  Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality N. ASTM A572  Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel O. ASTM A992  Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes P. ASTM A666  Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar for Structural Applications Q. ASTM A1085  Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded Carbon Steel Hollow Structural Sections (HSS) R. ASTM B26  Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings S. ASTM B85  Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings T. ASTM B108  Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings U. ASTM B138  Standard Specification for Manganese Bronze Rod, Bar, and Shapes V. ASTM B209  Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate W. ASTM B221  Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes X. ASTM B308  Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Standard Structural Shapes, Rolled or Extruded Y. ASTM B574  Standard Specification for Nickel-Molybdenum-Chromium Alloy Rod Z. ASTM F468 - Standard Specification for Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use AA. ASTM F593  Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Fasteners 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Material certifications shall be submitted along with any shop drawings for metal products and fabrications required by other sections of the Specifications. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Materials Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 10 00-3 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Owner may engage the services of a testing agency to test any metal materials for conformance with the material requirements herein. If the material is found to be in conformance with Specifications the cost of testing will be borne by the Owner. If the material does not conform to the Specifications, the cost of testing shall be paid by the Contractor and all materials not in conformance as determined by the Engineer shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. In lieu of replacing materials, the Contractor may request further testing to determine conformance, but any such testing shall be paid for by the Contractor regardless of outcome of such testing. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CARBON AND LOW ALLOY STEEL A. Material types and ASTM designations shall be as listed below: Steel W, C, and MC Shapes A992 Steel HP Shapes A572 Grade 50 Steel M and S shapes and Angles, Bars, and Plates A36 Rods F 1554 Grade 36 Pipe - Structural Use A53 Grade B Hollow Structural Sections A500 Grade C or A1085 Grade A Cold-Formed Steel Framing A 653 2.02 STAINLESS STEEL A. All stainless steel fabrications exposed to underwater service shall be Type 316. All other stainless steel fabrications shall be Type 304, unless noted otherwise. B. Material types and ASTM designations are listed below: Plates and Sheets ASTM A167 or A666 Grade A Structural Shapes ASTM A276 Fasteners (Bolts, etc.) ASTM F593 2.03 ALUMINUM A. All aluminum shall be alloy 6061-T6, unless otherwise noted or specified herein. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Materials Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 10 00-4 B. Material types and ASTM designations are listed below: Structural Shapes ASTM B308 Castings ASTM B26, B85, or B108 Extruded Bars ASTM B221 - Alloy 6061 Extruded Rods, Shapes and Tubes ASTM B221 - Alloy 6063 Plates ASTM B209 - Alloy 6061 Sheets ASTM B221 - Alloy 3003 C. All aluminum structural members shall conform to the requirements of Section 05 14 00  Structural Aluminum. D. All aluminum shall be provided with mill finish unless otherwise noted. E. Where bolted connections are indicated, aluminum shall be fastened with stainless steel bolts. 2.04 CAST IRON A. Material types and ASTM designations are listed below: Gray ASTM A48 Class 30B Malleable ASTM A47 Ductile ASTM A536 Grade 60-40-18 2.05 BRONZE A. Material types and ASTM designations are listed below: Rods, Bars and Sheets ASTM B138 - Alloy B Soft 2.06 HASTELLOY A. All Hastelloy shall be Alloy C-276. 2.07 DISSIMILAR METALS A. Dielectric isolation shall be installed wherever dissimilar metals are connected according to the following table. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Materials Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 10 00-5 Zinc Galvanized Steel Aluminum Cast Iron Ductile Iron Mild Steel/ Carbon Steel Copper Brass Stainless Steel Zinc ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Galvanized Steel ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Aluminum ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Cast Iron ● ● ● ● ● ● Ductile Iron ● ● ● ● ● ● Mild Steel/ Carbon Steel ● ● ● ● ● ● Copper ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Brass ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Stainless Steel ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1."●" signifies dielectric isolation is required between the two materials noted. 2. Consult Engineer for items not listed in table. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Structural Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 12 00-1 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and services required to provide all structural steel work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The term "structural steel" shall include items as defined in the AISC "Code of Standard Practice". 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 05 10 00 – Metal Materials B. Section 05 05 13 – Galvanizing C. Section 05 05 23 – Metal Fastening 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the Specifications, all work specified herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. 1. International Building Code 2018 2. AISC – "Code of Standard Practice" 3. AISC – "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" 4. AISC – RCSC “Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts” 5. AWS – "Structural Welding Code" 6. ASTM A786 – Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. 1. Certified Mill Test Reports 2. Affidavit of Compliance with grade specified 3. Shop Drawings which include the following: 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Structural Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 12 00-2 a. Layout drawings indicating all structural shapes, sizes, and dimensions. b. Beam and column schedules. c. Detailed drawings indicating jointing, anchoring and connection details and vent and drain holes where required. 4. Structural Steel Survey 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Shop inspection may be required by the Owner at his own expense. The Contractor shall give ample notice to the Engineer prior to the beginning of any fabrication work so that inspection may be provided. The Contractor shall furnish all facilities for the inspection of materials and workmanship in the shop, and the inspectors shall be allowed free access to the necessary parts of the work. Inspectors shall have the authority to reject any materials or work which do not meet the requirements of these Specifications. Inspection at the shop is intended as a means of facilitating the work and avoiding errors, but is expressly understood that it will in no way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for furnishing proper materials or workmanship under this Specification. B. The structural steel erector shall be a qualified installer who participates in the AISC Certification program and is designated an AISC Certified Erector. C. The structural steel fabricator shall be a qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Certification program and is designated an AISC Certified Building Fabricator. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel 1. Structural steel for W, C, and MC shapes shall conform to ASTM A992 unless otherwise indicated. 2. Structural steel for HP shapes shall conform to ASTM A572 Grade 50 unless otherwise indicated. 3. Structural steel for S and M shapes and angles and plates shall conform to ASTM A36 unless otherwise indicated. 4. Steel pipe shall be ASTM A53, Grade B. 5. HSS shall be ASTM A500, Grade C or ASTM A1085. All members shall be furnished full length without splices unless otherwise noted or accepted by the Engineer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Structural Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 12 00-3 6. All unidentified steel will be rejected and shall be removed from the site and replaced by the Contractor, all at the expense of the Contractor. 7. Fasteners for structural steel shall be in accordance with Section 05 05 23 – Metal Fastening. B. Welds 1. Electrodes for welding shall be in accordance with Section 05 05 23 – Metal Fastening. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 MEASUREMENT A. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions and shall make any field measurements necessary and shall be fully responsible for accuracy and layout of work. The Contractor shall review the Drawings and any discrepancies shall be reported to the Engineer for clarification prior to starting fabrication. 3.02 FABRICATION A. Fabrication shall be in accordance with the AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings and AISC "Code of Standard Practice". Fabrication shall begin only after Shop Drawing approval. B. Except where otherwise noted on the Drawings or in this Specification, all shop connections shall be welded. C. All holes in structural steel members required for anchors, anchor rods, bolts, sag rods, vent and drain holes or other members or for attachment of other work shall be provided by the fabricator and detailed on the Shop Drawings. D. All materials shall be properly worked and match-marked for field assembly. E. Where galvanizing of structural steel is required, galvanizing shall be done in accordance with Section 05 05 13 – Galvanizing. F. Checkered floor plate shall meet the requirements of ASTM A786. 3.03 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Structural members shall be loaded in such a manner that they may be transported and unloaded without being over-stressed, deformed or otherwise damaged. B. Structural steel members and packaged materials shall be protected from corrosion and deterioration. Material shall be stored in a dry area and shall not be placed in direct Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Structural Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 12 00-4 contact with the ground. Materials shall not be placed on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members or the supporting structures. The Contractor shall repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 3.04 ERECTION A. The erection of all structural steel shall conform to the applicable requirements of the AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" and AISC "Code of Standard Practice". All temporary bracing, guys and bolts as may be necessary to ensure the safety of the structure until the permanent connections have been made shall be provided by the Contractor. B. Structural members shall be set accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. The various members shall be aligned and adjusted to form a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastened. C. No cutting of structural steel members in the field will be allowed except by the written approval of the Engineer. D. Bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before assembly. E. Field welding shall not be permitted unless specifically indicated in the Drawings or approved in writing by the Engineer. All field welding shall comply with Section 05 05 23 – Metal Fastening. F. All bolted connections shall use high strength bolts in accordance with Section 05 05 23 – Metal Fastening. High strength bolts shall be installed in accordance with RCSC “Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts”. Bolts specified or noted on the Drawings to be a tension or slip critical “SC” type connection shall be fully pretensioned with proper preparation of the faying surfaces. All other bolts shall be snug tightened unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. G. All field connections shall be accurately fitted up before being bolted. Drifting shall be only such as will bring the parts into position and shall not be sufficient to enlarge the holes or to distort the metal. All unfair holes shall be drilled or reamed. H. Misfits at Bolted Connections 1. Where misfits in erection bolting are encountered, the Engineer shall be immediately notified. The Contractor shall submit a method to remedy the misfit for review by the Engineer. The Engineer will determine whether the remedy is acceptable or if the member must be refabricated. 2. Incorrectly sized or misaligned holes in members shall not be enlarged by burning or by the use of drift pins. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately and shall submit a proposed method of remedy for review by the Engineer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Structural Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 12 00-5 3. Where misalignment between anchor rods and rod holes in steel members are encountered, the Engineer shall be immediately notified. The Contractor shall submit a method to remedy the misalignment for review by the Engineer. I. Grouting of Base Plates and Bearing Plates 1. The bottom surface of the plates shall be cleaned of all foreign materials, and concrete or masonry bearing surface shall be cleaned of all foreign materials and roughened to improve bonding. 2. Accurately set all base and bearing plates to designated levels with steel wedges or leveling plates. 3. Baseplates shall be grouted with non-shrink grout to assure full uniform bearing. Grouting shall be done prior to placing loads on the structure. Non-shrink grout shall conform to Section 03 60 00 – Grout. 4. Anchor rods shall be tightened after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed and the non-shrink grout has attained its specified strength. J. Where finishing is required, assembly shall be completed including bolting and welding of units before start of finishing operations. 3.05 PAINTING A. Painting shall be performed according to Section 09 90 00 – Painting and the following additional requirements. 1. Concrete Encased Steel: Steel members which will be encased in concrete shall be cleaned but not painted prior to encasement. 2. Contact Surfaces: Contact surfaces such as at field connections, shall be cleaned and primed but not painted. 3. Finished Surfaces: Machine finished surfaces shall be protected against corrosion by a rust-inhibiting coating which is easily removed prior to erection or which has characteristics that make removal unnecessary prior to erection. 4. Surfaces Adjacent to Field Welds: Surfaces within 2 inches of any field weld location shall be free of materials that would prevent proper welding or produce objectionable fumes while welding is being done. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Stainless Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 13 00-1 SECTION 05 13 00 STAINLESS STEEL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and erect the stainless steel work as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. B. Stainless steel work shall be furnished complete with all accessories, mountings and appurtenances of the type of stainless steel and finish as specified or required for a satisfactory installation. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures B. Section 05 10 00 – Metal Materials C. Section 05 05 23 – Metal Fastening D. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. ASTM A193 – Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service B. ASTM A194 – Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High- Temperature Service C. ASTM A262 – Practice for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in Austenitic Stainless Steel D. ASTM A276 – Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes E. ASTM A314 – Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Billets and Bars for Forging F. ASTM A380 – Practice for Cleaning and Descaling Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment and Systems G. ASTM A473 – Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Forgings H. ASTM A666 – Austenitic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar I. ASTM A774 – Stainless Steel Pipe Fittings 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Stainless Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 13 00-2 J. ASTM A778 – Stainless Steel Pipe K. ASTM A967 – Standard Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for Stainless Steel Parts L. ASTM F593 – Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs M. ASTM F594 – Stainless Steel Nuts N. ANSI/ASME B1.1 – Unified Inch Screw Thread (UN and UNR Thread Form) 1.04 TESTS A. All stainless steel materials including stainless test welds, shall be checked for compliance with tests for susceptibility to intergranular attack. Such tests shall be Practices A, B and E of ASTM A262. Detailed procedures for the tests shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to start of work. Practice A shall be used only for acceptance of materials but not for rejection of materials, and shall be used for screening material intended for testing in Practice B and Practice E. The maximum acceptable corrosion rate under Practice B shall be 0.004 inch per month, rounded off to the third decimal place. If the certified mill report indicates that such test has been satisfactorily performed, the fabricator may not be required to repeat the test. Material passing Practice E shall be acceptable. B. Sample selection for the susceptibility to intergranular attack tests shall be as follows: 1. One (1) sample per heat treatment lot for plates and forgings; 2. One (1) sample per each Welding Procedure Qualification regardless of the joint design; 3. If tests indicate a reduction in corrosion resistance, welding procedure shall be adjusted, or heat treatment determined as needed to restore required corrosion resistance. 4. The samples so chosen shall have received all the post-weld heat treatments identical to the finished part. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval shop drawings for all stainless steel fabrication in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Certified test reports for susceptibility to intergranular attack. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Stainless Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 13 00-3 2. Affidavit of compliance with type of stainless steel shown on the Contract Drawings or specified herein. 3. Certified weld inspection reports. 4. Cleaning and handling of stainless steel in accordance with Paragraph 3.04, Cleaning and Handling. C. Samples of finish, on each type of stainless steel to be furnished, shall be submitted to the Engineer upon request. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Shop inspections may be made by the Engineer. The Contractor shall give ample notice to the Engineer prior to the beginning of any stainless steel fabrication work so that inspection may be provided. The Contractor shall furnish all facilities for the inspection of materials and workmanship in the shop, and the inspectors shall be allowed free access to the necessary parts of the works. B. Inspectors shall have the authority to reject any materials or work which does not meet the requirements of the Contract Drawings or the Specifications. C. Inspection at the shop is intended as a means of facilitating the work and avoiding errors, but is expressly understood that it will in no way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for furnishing proper materials or workmanship. 1.07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions and shall make any field measurements necessary and shall be fully responsible for accuracy and layout of the work. B. The Contractor shall review the Contract Drawings and any discrepancies shall be reported to the Engineer for clarification prior to starting fabrication. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Stainless steel shall be Type 304 unless it is used for underwater service. Stainless steel for underwater service shall be Type 316. Minimum mechanical finish shall be No. 4 as stated in Table 2 unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings. B. The basic mill forms (sheet, strip, plate and bar) are classified by size as shown on Table 1. Tables 2, 3 and 4 identify finishes and conditions in which sheet, bar and plate are available. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Stainless Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 13 00-4 C. Tables 2, 3 and 4 show numbered finishes and conditions for sheet, bar and plate. While there are no specific designations for polished finishes on bar or plate, the sheet finish designations are used to describe the desired effect. This also applies to finishes on ornamental tubing. D. There are three standard finishes for strip, which are broadly described by the finishing operations employed: 1. No. 1 Strip Finish 2. No. 1 strip finish is approximately the same as No. 2D Sheet Finish. It varies in appearance from dull gray matte to a fairly reflective surface, depending largely on alloy composition and amount of cold reduction. 3. No. 2 Strip Finish is approximately the same as a No. 2B sheet finish. It is smoother, more reflective than No. 1, and likewise varies with alloy composition. 4. Bright annealed finish is a highly reflective finish that is retained by final annealing in a controlled atmosphere furnace. Table 1: Classification of Stainless Steel Product Form Dimensions Item Description Thickness Width Diameter or Size Coils and cut length: Mill finishes Nos. 1, 2D and 2B Sheet Polished finishes Nos. 3, 4, 6, 7 & 8 under 3/16" 24" and over all widths - Cold finished, coils or cut lengths: Strip Polished finishes Nos. 3, 4, 6,7 & 8 under 3/16" under 24" all widths - Plate Flat rolled or forged 3/16" and over over 10" - Hot finished rounds, squares, octagons and hexagons - - 1/4" and over Hot finished flats 1/8" to 8" incl. 1/4" to 10" incl. - Cold finished rounds, squares, octagons and hexagons - - over 1/8" Bar Cold finished flats 1/8" to 4-1/2" 3/8" to 4-1/2" - Cold finishes only: (in coil) Wire Round, square, octagon, hexagon and flat wire under 3/16" under 3/8" - Pipe & Tubing Several different classifications, with differing specifications, are available. Extrusion Not considered “standard” shapes. Currently limited in size to approximately 6-1/2" diameter or structurals. Table 2: Standard Mechanical Sheet Finishes Unpolished or Rolled Finishes Polished Finishes Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Stainless Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 13 00-5 No. 1 A rough dull surface which results from hot rolling to the specified thickness followed by annealing and descaling. No. 3 An intermediate polish surface obtained by finishing with a 100 grit abrasive. Generally used where a semi-finished polished surface is required. A No. 3 finish usually receives additional polishing during fabrication No. 2D A dull finish which results from cold rolling followed by annealing and descaling, and may perhaps get a final light roll pass through unpolished rolls. A 2D finish is used where appearance is of no concern. No. 4 A polished surface obtained by finishing with a 120-150 mesh abrasive, following initial grinding with coarser abrasives. This is a general purpose bright finish with a visible "grain" which prevents mirror reflection. No. 2B A bright cold-rolled finish resulting in the same manner as No. 2D finish, except that the annealed and descaled sheet receives a final light roll pass through polished rolls. This is the general purpose cold-rolled finish that can be used as is, or as a preliminary step to polishing. No. 6 A dull satin finish having lower reflectivity than No. 4 finish. It is produced by Tampico brushing the No. 4 finish in a medium of abrasive and oil. It is used for architectural applications and ornamentation where a high luster is undesirable, and to contrast with brighter finishes. No. 7 A high reflective finish that is obtained by buffing finely ground surfaces but not to the extent of completely removing the "grit" lines. It is used chiefly for architectural and ornamental purposes. No. 8 The most reflective surface, which is obtained by polishing with successively finer abrasives and buffing extensively until all grit lines from preliminary grinding operations are removed. It is used for applications such as mirrors and reflectors. Table 3: Conditions and Finishes for Bar Conditions Surface Finishes1 Hot worked only (a) Scale not removed (excluding spot conditioning) (b) Rough turned 2 (c) Pickled or blast cleaned and pickled. Annealed or otherwise heat treated (a) Scale not removed (excluding spot conditioning) (b) Rough turned (c) Pickled or blast cleaned and pickled (d) Cold drawn or cold rolled (e) Centerless ground (f) Polished Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Stainless Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 13 00-6 Annealed and cold worked to high tensile strength3 (a) Cold drawn or cold rolled (b) Centerless ground (c) Polished Table 4: Conditions and Finishes for Plate Condition and Finish Description and Remarks Hot rolled Scale not removed. Not heat treated. Plates not recommended for final use in this condition.4 Hot rolled, annealed or heat treated Scale not removed. Use of plates in this condition is generally confined to heat resisting applications. Scale impairs corrosion resistance.1 Hot rolled, annealed or heat treated, blast cleaned or pickled Condition and finish commonly preferred for corrosion resisting and most heat resisting applications. Hot rolled, annealed, descaled and temper passed Smoother finish for specialized applications. Hot rolled, annealed, descaled cold rolled, annealed, descaled, optionally temper passed Smooth finish with greater freedom from surface imperfection than the above. Hot rolled, annealed or heat treated, surface cleaned and polished Polished finishes refer to Table 2. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Holes for bolts and screws shall be drilled. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Joints exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude water. B. As far as practicable, all fabricated units shall be fitted and assembled in the shop, with all cuts and bends made to precision measurements in accordance with details shown on approved shop drawings. C. Work shall be fabricated so that it is installed in a manner that will provide for expansion and contraction, prevent the shearing of bolts, screws and other fastenings, ensure rigidity, and provide close fitting of sections. D. All finished and/or machined faces shall be true to line and level. Stainless steel sections shall be well formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angles; curved work shall be sprung evenly to curves. E. All work shall be fitted together at the shop as far as possible, and delivered complete and ready for erection. Proper care shall be exercised in handling all work so as not to injure the finished surfaces. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Stainless Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 13 00-7 3.02 WELDING A. Welding shall be done in a manner that will prevent buckling and in accordance with Section 05 05 23 – Metal Fastening, and as modified hereinafter. B. All welds exposed in the work shall be ground smooth and finished to match the finish of the adjacent stainless steel surfaces. C. Select weld rods that provide weld filler metal having corrosion resistant properties as nearly identical or better than the base metal to insure preservation of the corrosion- resistant properties. Provide heat treatment at welds where testing of weld procedure indicates it is required to restore the corrosion resistance. D. Thermal conductivity of stainless steel is about half that of other steels; and the following methods may be used to accommodate this situation: 1. Use lower weld current setting. 2. Use skip-weld techniques to minimize heat concentration. 3. Use back-up chill bars or other cooling techniques to dissipate heat. E. Edges of the stainless steel to be welded shall be cleaned of contaminants. 3.03 FASTENERS A. Stainless steel fasteners shall be used for joining stainless steel work. B. Stainless steel fasteners shall be made of alloys that are equal to or more corrosion resistant than the materials they join. 3.04 CLEANING AND HANDLING A. All stainless steel surfaces shall be precleaned, descaled, passivated and inspected before, during and after fabrication in accordance with the applicable sections of ASTM A380 and as detailed in the procedures to be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to start of work. Chemical passivation in accordance with ASTM A967 is required for all stainless steel in contact with process water. Degreasing and passivation of stainless steel articles shall be conducted as the last step after fabrication. B. Measures to protect cleaned surfaces shall be taken as soon as final cleaning is completed and shall be maintained during all subsequent handling, storage and shipping. 1. The Contractor shall submit for approval specific procedures listing all the steps to be followed in detecting contamination and in descaling, cleaning, passivation and protecting of all stainless steel. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Stainless Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 13 00-8 2. Area showing clear indications of contamination shall be recleaned, repassivated and reinspected. C. At approved stages in the shop operations, contaminants such as scale, embedded iron, rust, dirts, oil, grease and any other foreign matter shall be removed from the metal, as directed or approved by the Engineer. The adequacy of these operations shall be checked by the Engineer. Operations in the shop shall be conducted so as to avoid contamination of the stainless steel and to keep the metal surfaces free from dirt and foreign matter. D. In order to prevent incipient corrosion during fabrication, special efforts shall be made at all times to keep all stainless steel surfaces from coming in contact with other metals. 1. Stainless steel and stainless steel welds shall be cleaned with clean sand free of iron, stainless steel wool, stainless steel brushes, or other approved means and shall be protected at all times from contamination by any materials, including carbon steel, that shall impair its resistance to corrosion. 2. Approved methods of cutting, grinding and handling shall be used to prevent contamination. If air-arc, or carbon-arc cutting is used, additional metal shall be removed by approved mechanical means so as to provide clean, weldable edges. All grinding of stainless steel shall be performed with aluminum oxide or silicon carbide grinding wheels bonded with resin or rubber. Grinding wheels used on carbon steel shall not be used on stainless steel. 3. Sand, grinding wheels, brushes and other materials used for cleaning stainless steel shall be checked periodically by the Engineer for contaminants. Cleaning aids found to contain contaminants shall not be used on the work. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. All stainless steel fabrications shall be erected square, plumb and true, accurately fitted, adequately anchored in place, set at proper elevations and positions. B. All inserts, anchor rods and all other miscellaneous work specified in the Detailed Specifications or shown on the Contract Drawings or required for the proper completion of the work, which are embedded in concrete, shall be properly set and securely held in position in the forms before the concrete is placed. C. All stainless steel fabrications shall be installed in conformance with details shown on the Contract Drawings or on the approved shop drawings. 3.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Mechanical damage (e.g., scratches and gouges) to the stainless steel material shall not be permitted and is cause for rejection. Care shall be taken in the material handling since such mechanical damage will result in the passive oxide film being "punctured" Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Stainless Steel Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 13 00-9 leading to a possible lower resistance to the initiation of corrosion than the surrounding chemically-passivated surface. B. Stainless steel plates and sheets shall be stored vertically in racks and not be dragged out of the racks or over one another. Racks shall be protected to prevent iron contamination. C. Heavy stainless steel plates shall be carefully separated and chocked with wooden blocks so that the forks of a fork-lift could be inserted between plates without mechanically damaging the surface. D. Stainless steel plates and sheets laid out for use shall be off the floor and be divided by wooden planks to prevent surface damage and to facilitate subsequent handling. E. Plate clamps, if used, shall be used with care as the serrated faces can dig in, indent and gouge the surface. F. Stainless steel fabrications shall be loaded in such a manner that they may be transported and unloaded without being overstressed, deformed or otherwise damaged. G. Stainless steel fabrications and packaged materials shall be protected from corrosion and deterioration and shall be stored in a dry area. Materials stored outdoors shall be supported above ground surfaces on wood runners and protected with approved effective and durable covers. H. Stainless steel fabrications shall not be placed in or on a structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the fabrication. The Contractor shall repair or replace damaged stainless steel fabrications or materials as directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Structural Aluminum Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 14 00-1 SECTION 05 14 00 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and services required to provide all structural aluminum work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The term "structural aluminum" shall include items as defined in the Aluminum Association "Specifications for Aluminum Structures". 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 05 10 00  Metal Materials B. Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening C. Section 09 90 00  Painting 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of the Specifications, all work specified herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of the Bid. 1. International Building Code 2018 2. Aluminum Association "Specifications for Aluminum Structures" 3. AWS D1.2  "Structural Welding Code" 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures. 1. Certified Mill Test Reports 2. Affidavit of Compliance with grade specified 3. Shop Drawings which include the following: a. Layout drawings indicating all structural shapes, sizes, and dimensions. b. Beam and column schedules. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Structural Aluminum Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 14 00-2 c. Detailed drawings indicating jointing, anchoring and connection details. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Shop inspection may be required by the Owner at his own expense. The Contractor shall give ample notice to the Engineer prior to the beginning of any fabrication work so that inspection may be provided. The Contractor shall furnish all facilities for the inspection of materials and workmanship in the shop, and the inspectors shall be allowed free access to the necessary parts of the work. Inspectors shall have the authority to reject any materials or work which do not meet the requirements of these Specifications. Inspection at the shop is intended as a means of facilitating the work and avoiding errors, but is expressly understood that it will in no way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for furnishing proper materials or workmanship under this Specification. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural aluminum shall comply with Section 05 10 00  Metal Materials. B. Fasteners for structural aluminum shall be in accordance with Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening. C. Electrodes for welding shall be in accordance with Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 MEASUREMENT A. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions and shall make any field measurements necessary and shall be fully responsible for accuracy and layout of work. The Contractor shall review the Drawings and any discrepancies shall be reported to the Engineer for clarification prior to starting fabrication. 3.02 FABRICATION A. Fabrication shall be in accordance with the Aluminum Association "Specifications for Aluminum Structures". Fabrication shall begin only after Shop Drawing approval. B. Except where otherwise noted on the Drawings or in this Specification, all shop connections shall be welded. C. All holes in structural aluminum members required for anchors, anchor rods, bolts, or other members or for attachment of other work shall be provided by the fabricator and detailed on the Shop Drawings. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Structural Aluminum Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 14 00-3 D. All materials shall be properly worked and match-marked for field assembly. 3.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Structural members shall be loaded in such a manner that they may be transported and unloaded without being over-stressed, deformed or otherwise damaged. B. Structural aluminum members and packaged materials shall be protected from corrosion and deterioration. Material shall be stored in a dry area and shall not be placed in direct contact with the ground. Materials shall not be placed on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members or the supporting structures. The Contractor shall repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 3.04 ERECTION A. All temporary bracing, guys and bolts as may be necessary to ensure the safety of the structure until the permanent connections have been made shall be provided by the Contractor. B. Structural members shall be set accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. The various members shall be aligned and adjusted to form a part of a complete frame or structure before being permanently fastened. C. No cutting of structural aluminum members in the field will be allowed except by the written approval of the Engineer. D. Bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before assembly. E. Field welding shall not be permitted unless specifically indicated in the Drawings or approved in writing by the Engineer. All field welding shall comply with Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening. F. All bolted connections shall comply with Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening. G. All field connections shall be accurately fitted up before being bolted. Drifting shall be only such as will bring the parts into position and shall not be sufficient to enlarge the holes or to distort the metal. All unfair holes shall be drilled or reamed. H. Misfits at Bolted Connections 1. Where misfits in erection bolting are encountered, the Engineer shall be immediately notified. The Contractor shall submit a method to remedy the misfit for review by the Engineer. The Engineer will determine whether the remedy is acceptable or if the member must be refabricated. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Structural Aluminum Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 14 00-4 2. Incorrectly sized or misaligned holes in members shall not be enlarged by burning or by the use of drift pins. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately and shall submit a proposed method of remedy for review by the Engineer. 3. Where misalignment between anchor bolts and bolt holes in aluminum members are encountered, the Engineer shall be immediately notified. The Contractor shall submit a method to remedy the misalignment for review by the Engineer. I. Grouting of Base Plates and Bearing Plates 1. The bottom surface of the plates shall be cleaned of all foreign materials, and concrete or masonry bearing surface shall be cleaned of all foreign materials and roughened to improve bonding. 2. Accurately set all base and bearing plates to designated levels with steel wedges or leveling plates. 3. Baseplates shall be grouted with non-shrink grout to assure full uniform bearing. Grouting shall be done prior to placing loads on the structure. Non-shrink grout shall conform to Section 03 60 00  Grout. 4. Anchor bolts shall be tightened after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed and the non-shrink grout has attained its specified strength. J. Where finishing is required, assembly shall be completed including bolting and welding of units before start of finishing operations. 3.05 PAINTING A. Painting shall be performed according to Section 09 90 00  Painting. B. Aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete or dissimilar metals shall be thoroughly protected with two coats of epoxy paint with a minimum total thickness of 16 mils or other approved isolating material in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 90 00  Painting. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Fabrication Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 50 00-1 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide all metal fabrications not specifically included in other Sections, complete and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 05 10 00  Metal Materials B. Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening C. Section 05 05 13  Galvanizing D. Certain specific items are included in other Sections of the Specifications. See the section for the specific item in question. 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of the Specifications, all work specified herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. International Building Code 2018 2. AISC  Specification for Structural Steel Buildings 3. AISI  Specifications for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members 4. Aluminum Association Specifications for Aluminum Structures 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures. 1. Complete fabrication and erection drawings of all metalwork specified herein. 2. Other submittals as required in accordance with Section 05 10 00  Metal Materials and Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Fabrication Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 50 00-2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL MATERIALS A. Metal materials used in metal fabrications shall conform to Section 05 10 00  Metal Materials, unless noted otherwise. 2.02 METAL FASTENING A. All welds and fasteners used in metal fabrication shall conform to Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening, unless noted otherwise. 2.03 LINTELS A. Provide lintels as shown on the Drawings and specified herein with 8 inches minimum bearing each side unless noted otherwise. B. All lintels shall be steel in accordance with Section 05 12 00  Structural Steel and shall be galvanized in accordance with Section 05 05 13  Galvanizing, unless noted otherwise. 2.04 GUARD POSTS (BOLLARDS) A. Guard posts shall be 6-inch diameter Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe in accordance with ASTM A53. B. Guard posts shall be concrete filled and crowned, as detailed in the Drawings. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. All measurements and dimensions shall be based on field conditions and shall be verified by the Contractor prior to fabrication. Such verification shall include coordination with adjoining work. B. All fabricated work shall be shop fitted together as much as practicable, and delivered to the field, complete and ready for erection. All miscellaneous items such as stiffeners, fillets, connections, brackets, and other details necessary for a complete installation shall be provided. C. All work shall be fabricated and installed in a manner that will provide for expansion and contraction, prevent shearing of bolts, screws, and other fastenings, ensure rigidity, and provide a close fit of sections. D. Finished members shall conform to the lines, angles, and curves shown on the Drawings and shall be free from distortions of any kind. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Metal Fabrication Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 50 00-3 E. All shearings shall be neat and accurate, with parts exposed to view neatly finished. Flame cutting is allowed only when performed utilizing a machine. F. All shop connections shall be welded unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. Bolts and welds shall conform to Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening. All fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. G. Fabricated items shall be shop painted when specified in Section 09 90 00  Painting. 3.02 GENERAL A. Not Applicable 3.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Not Applicable 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Assembly and installation of fabricated system components shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. All miscellaneous metalwork shall be erected square, plumb and true, accurately fitted, adequately anchored in place, and set at proper elevations and positions. C. Metal work shall be field painted when as specified in accordance with Section 09 90 00  Painting. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Ladders Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 51 33-1 SECTION 05 51 33 LADDERS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide all ladders in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 05 10 00  Metal Materials B. Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the Specifications, all work specified herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. 1. International Building Code 2018 2. Aluminum Association Specifications for Aluminum Structures 3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures. 1. Complete fabrication and erection drawings of all metalwork specified herein. 2. Other submittals as required in accordance with Section 05 10 00  Metal Materials and Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Warranty shall be as specified in 01 61 00 Product Requirement and Options. Warranty period shall be minimum two (2) years from substantial completion. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Ladders Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 51 33-2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL MATERIALS A. Metal materials used for ladders shall conform to Section 05 10 00  Metal Materials, unless noted otherwise. 2.02 METAL FASTENING A. All welds and fasteners used for ladders shall conform to Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening, unless noted otherwise. 2.03 LADDERS A. Ladders shall be furnished with all mounting brackets, baseplates, fasteners, and necessary appurtenances for a complete and rigid installation. B. All ladders shall be aluminum alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-T5, with a clear, anodized finish, Aluminum Association M12C22A41. C. All ladders shall conform to dimensions indicated on the Drawings and shall comply with OSHA requirements. D. Side rails shall be 1-1/2 inch diameter Schedule 80 pipe, minimum. E. Rungs shall be serrated 3/4 inch diameter, minimum. F. All exposed connections shall be welded and ground smooth. G. Ladders shall be as manufactured by Thompson Fabricating Company, or equal. 2.04 LADDER SAFETY SYSTEM A. All ladders with an uninterrupted climb length exceeding 24 feet between rest platform landings or floors shall be installed with a ladder safety system. B. Ladder safety system shall comply with all OSHA requirements and meet ANSI A14.3 design requirements. C. Ladder safety system shall include all necessary components to provide a fully operational system, including one full body safety harness with a 310 lb. weight capacity for each ladder safety system. D. Ladder Safety Systems shall be Miller Vi-Go by Honeywell, LAD_SAF by DBI Sala, or approved equal. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Ladders Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 51 33-3 2.05 LADDER RETRACTABLE SAFETY EXTENSION A. Where the Contract Documents indicate fixed ladders are required under access doors and checkered floor plates, they shall be provided with “LadderUp, Model LU-4” by Bilco Company, “L1E Ladder Extension” by Halliday Products Inc., or “Ladder Climb-out Device” by Thompson Fabricating. B. For access doors, the safety extension shall be manufactured from the same material as the access door with telescoping tubular sections that lock automatically when fully extended. C. Upward and downward movement shall be controlled by a stainless-steel balancing mechanism. D. Safety extension shall be assembled in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. All measurements and dimensions shall be based on field conditions and shall be verified by the Contractor prior to fabrication. Such verification shall include coordination with adjoining work. B. All fabricated work shall be shop fitted together as much as practicable, and delivered to the field, complete and ready for erection. C. All work shall be fabricated and installed in a manner that will provide for expansion and contraction, prevent shearing of bolts, screws, and other fastenings, ensure rigidity, and provide a close fit of sections. D. Finished members shall conform to the lines, angles, and curves shown on the Drawings and shall be free from distortions of any kind. E. All shearings shall be neat and accurate, with parts exposed to view neatly finished. Flame cutting is allowed only when performed utilizing a machine. F. All shop connections shall be welded unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. Bolts and welds shall conform to Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening. All fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. G. Fabricated items shall be shop painted when specified in accordance with Section 09 90 00  Painting. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Ladders Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 51 33-4 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Assembly and installation of fabricated system components shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. All miscellaneous metalwork shall be erected square, plumb and true, accurately fitted, adequately anchored in place, and set at proper elevations and positions. C. Metalwork shall be field painted when specified in accordance with Section 09 90 00  Painting. END OF SECTION 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Guards and Railings Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 52 00-1 SECTION 05 52 00 GUARDS AND RAILINGS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide all metal guards and railings in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 05 10 00 − Metal Materials B. Section 05 05 23 − Metal Fastening 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. International Building Code 2018 2. Aluminum Association Specifications for Aluminum Structures 3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 − Submittal Procedures. 1. Complete fabrication and erection drawings of all metal work specified herein, sealed by a Professional Engineer currently licensed in the State or Commonwealth in which the Project is located. 2. Other submittals as required in accordance with Section 05 10 00 − Metal Materials and Section 05 05 23 − Metal Fastening. 3. Structural calculations on guard and handrail system sealed by a Professional Engineer currently licensed in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. 70 088 -001 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Guards and Railings Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 52 00-2 1.05 WARRANTY A. Warranty shall be as specified in 01 61 00 Product Requirement and Options. Warranty period shall be minimum two (2) years from substantial completion. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL MATERIALS A. Metal materials used for guards and railings shall conform to Section 05 10 00 − Metal Materials, unless noted otherwise. 2.02 METAL FASTENING A. All welds and fasteners used in guards and railings shall conform to Section 05 05 23 − Metal Fastening, unless noted otherwise. 2.03 GUARDS AND RAILINGS A. General – Design of guard and handrail systems is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Guard systems shall consist of all railings, posts, toeboards, baseplates, anchors, and accessories required for a complete and rigid installation. 1. All guard systems shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum alloy 6061 -T6 or 6105-T5, with Aluminum Association M12C22A41 finish, unless otherwise noted. 2. Metal railings shall be fabricated from 1-1/2 inch Schedule 40 minimum pipe. Metal railing support posts shall be fabricated from 1-1/2 inch Schedule 80 minimum pipe. 3. The top of the upper guard rail shall be 42 inches above the walking surface for level guards. For stair guards, the top of the upper guard rail shall be 42 inches above the leading edge of the tread nosing. The top of stair handrail shall be 34 inches above the leading edge of the tread nosing. 4. Posts a. Maximum horizontal spacing between posts for level rail shall be six feet. b. Maximum horizontal spacing between posts for stair rail shall be five feet. 5. All rail joints shall be finished flush and shall occur only at supports. Posts shall not interrupt the continuation of the top rail at any point along the railing, including corners and end terminations. The top surface of the top railing shall be smooth and shall not be interrupted by projecting fittings. 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Guards and Railings Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 52 00-3 6. Toeboards a. Toeboards shall project 4-inches above the walking surface and shall not infringe on the minimum required walkway width. b. Aluminum toeboards shall be extruded from aluminum alloy 6063 -T6 unless otherwise noted. c. d. Toeboards shall have a minimum thickness of 1/8" at any point. Geometry of toeboard shall closely resemble geometry shown on Drawings. 7. Expansion joint splices shall be provided at 30 foot maximum spacing and at all expansion joints in the structure supporting the guards. 8. The guard system shall be designed to resist the design loads specified by both OSHA and the International Building Code. 9. Provide handrail extensions at top and bottom of stairs and ramps in accordance with the International Building Code. B. The Contractor shall have the option of providing a guard system of either an all welded type construction or a component type construction. 1. With both the all welded or component type construction, the baseplates and toeboards shall be furnished as shown on the Drawings. 2. Component Type System a. All fittings and brackets shall be designed for stainless steel concealed set screws with internal tyne type connectors. b. Exposed fittings shall be cast or extruded aluminum, or stainless steel to match guard material, except where corrosion -resistant steel is employed as a standard fabricator's item for use. c. Component type guards shall be as manufactured by Thompson Fabricating Company, Inc., or Hollaender Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Welded guards may be field assembled using component type fittings as described herein. C. Guards shall be either Type I or Type II guards as shown on the Drawings. If no type is indicated on Drawings, guards shall be Type I. 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Guards and Railings Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 52 00-4 1. Type I guards shall be a two-rail system. The intermediate rail shall be located as required to prevent passage of a 21 -inch diameter sphere at any point. 2. Type II guards shall be a three-rail system with vertical posts spanning between the two intermediate rails. a. The centerline of the lower intermediate rail shall be 7 inches above the walking surface. b. The upper intermediate members, whether additional rails or vertical posts, shall be located below the top rail at a spacing as required to prevent passage of a 4 -inch diameter sphere between the two rails. c. Vertical posts spanning between the intermediate rails shall be 1/2" diameter schedule 40 pipe or fiberglass rod. d. Spacing of vertical posts shall be as required to prevent passage of a 4 -inch diameter sphere at any point. D. Where gates are required in guards as shown on the Drawings, they shall be self -closing and shall be provided by the same manufacturer as the guards. Gates shall swing away from the opening being protected by the guards. E. Where safety chains are required in guards as shown on the Drawings, chains shall be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel. Chains shall be straight link style, 3/16-inch diameter, with at least twelve links per foot, and with snap hooks on each end. Snap hooks shall be boat type and eye bolts for attachment of chains shall be 3/8 -inch bolts with 3/4-inch eye diameter welded to the railing posts. Two (2) chains, four inches longer than the anchorage spacing shall be supplied for each guarded area. 2.04 FREE STANDING RAILING SYSTEM A. Free standing railing system shall be installed on roof ledges where accessible equipment is provided on roof and roof does not have a perimeter parapet wall of a minimum height of 42 inches. Free standing railing system shall be Safety Rail 2000 Guardrail System by BlueWater Mfg., Inc. or approved equal. B. Toe Board brackets shall be used when the parapet wall is less than 3 -1/2” in height. C. Performance Characteristics: Shall meet and exceed OSHA (Standards - 29 CFR) 1926.502 (b). 1. Railing System shall be designed to withstand a minimum 200 pounds of test load in any direction. 2. Railing System shall consist of a top rail and rail at mid height between top rail and walking surface. 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Guards and Railings Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 52 00-5 3. Railing system shall extend to a height of at least 42" from the finished roof deck. 4. Railing system shall be free of sharp edges and snag points. D. Railing and Base 1. Rail shall be 1 5/8” O.D. Hot Rolled Pickled Electric Weld Tubing 2. Each support post shall have a free standing base cast from Class 30 Gray Iron material. 3. Each base shall have four (4) receiver posts for accepting the rails. 4. The receiver posts shall have a positive locking system. A friction locking system will not be acceptable. 5. The receiver posts shall have a slot to enable the rails to be mounted in any direction. E. Hardware 1. The securing pins shall be made from 1010 carbon steel. The pins shall be zinc plated and yellow chromate dipped. The pins shall consist of a collared pin and a lanyard that connects to a lynch pin. 2. For Gate Assemblies Only. Bolts and washers shall be 3/8" x 3 ½" and 3/8" x 3" grade 5, zinc plated. 3. Finish a. Rails: Specify factory finish Safety Yellow Powder Coat Paint, Hot Dipped Galvanized or a color to match the building. b. Bases: Specify factory finish Safety Yellow Powder Coat Paint, Hot Dipped Galvanized or a color to match the building. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. All measurements and dimensions shall be based on field conditions and shall be verified by the Contractor prior to fabrication. Such verification shall include coordination with all adjoining work. B. All fabricated work shall be shop fitted together as much as practical, and delivered to the field, complete and ready for erection. 1/4/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Guards and Railings Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 52 00-6 C. All work shall be fabricated and installed in a manner that will provide for expansion and contraction, prevent shearing of bolts, screws, and other fastenings, ensure rigidity, and provide a close fit of sections. D. Finished members shall conform to the lines, angles, and curves shown on the drawings and shall be free from distortions of any kind. E. All shearings shall be neat and accurate, with parts exposed to view neatly finished. Flame cutting is allowed only when performed utilizing a machine. F. Concrete anchors and bolts for attachment of guard baseplates to supporting members shall conform to Section 05 05 23 − Metal Fastening. G. All fabricated items shall be shop painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00 − Painting. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Assembly and installation of guards and railings shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. All guards and railings shall be erected square, plumb and true, accurately fitted, adequately anchored in place, and set at proper elevations and positions. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Gratings, Checkered Floor Plates, and Access Doors Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 53 00-1 SECTION 05 53 00 GRATINGS, CHECKERED FLOOR PLATES, AND ACCESS DOORS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide all gratings, floor plates, and access doors in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 05 10 00  Metal Materials B. Section 05 05 13 – Galvanizing C. Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. International Building Code 2018 2. Aluminum Association Specifications for Aluminum Structures 3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations 4. ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 – NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manual 5. ASTM C1802 – Design, Testing, Manufacture, Selection, and Installation of Fabricated Metal Access Hatches for Utility, Water, and Wastewater Structures 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Not Applicable 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures. 1. Complete fabrication and erection Drawings of all gratings, floor plates, and access doors specified herein. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Gratings, Checkered Floor Plates, and Access Doors Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 53 00-2 2. For checkered floor plates, structural calculations signed and sealed by a currently registered Professional Engineer in the State or Commonwealth in which the Project is located verifying the proposed floor plate meets the minimum load and deflection requirements stipulated herein. 3. For access doors provided by a manufacturer not specifically named herein, structural calculations signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer currently registered in the State or Commonwealth in which the Project is located verifying the proposed access door meets the minimum load and deflection requirements stipulated herein. For access doors provided by a named manufacturer, sealed calculations are not required provided the applicable ASTM C1802 load rating is clearly indicated in the submittal for each proposed product. 4. Other submittals as required in accordance with Section 05 10 00  Metal Materials and Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Not Applicable 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Not Applicable 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Not Applicable PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL MATERIALS A. Metal materials used for gratings, floor plates, and access doors shall conform to Section 05 10 00  Metal Materials, unless noted otherwise. 2.02 METAL FASTENING A. All welds and fasteners used for gratings, floor plates, and access doors shall conform to Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening, unless noted otherwise. 2.03 GRATING A. General - Grating, including support frames, fastenings, and all necessary appurtenances for a complete installation, shall be furnished as indicated on the Drawings. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Gratings, Checkered Floor Plates, and Access Doors Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 53 00-3 1. All exposed bearing ends of grating shall be enclosed in a perimeter band of the same dimensions and material as the main bars, including ends at all cutouts. 2. Grating shall be fabricated into easily removable sections and shall be fastened at each corner and as required with fasteners provided by the grating manufacturer. No fasteners shall be permitted to project above the walking surface. 3. Grating shall be designed for a loading of 150 psf unless otherwise required by the Drawings. Grating deflection shall not exceed 1/4 inch under a uniform load of 100 psf. Minimum grating depth shall be 1-1/2 inches, unless structural requirements based on clear span require more depth. 4. Grating installed in cast-in-place concrete shall be provided with embedded support frames on all perimeter and bearing edges. Support frames shall be extruded frames with continuous means of anchoring frames to concrete around entire perimeter of frame. Support frames shall be fabricated from the same material as the grating. B. Aluminum Grating 1. Aluminum grating shall be of I-bar type and shall consist of extruded bearing bars positioned and locked by crossbars. All supports, cross members, etc. shall be aluminum. Plank clips for grating attachment to frames and any other required attachments, shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Bolts shall be stainless steel. Provide embedded aluminum support frames for cast-in-place concrete installations. 2. Grating shall be “IB” by Harsco Industrial IKG, “I-Bar 19SGI4", by Ohio Grating Inc., or “I-Bar” by Thompson Fabricating LLC. C. Aluminum Plank Grating 1. Aluminum plank grating shall be unpunched planks of extruded aluminum welded together to form panels. Panel ends shall have an extruded aluminum end bar welded in place. All support members shall be aluminum. Plank clips for grating attachment to frames and any other required attachments, shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Bolts shall be stainless steel. Provide embedded aluminum support frames for cast-in-place concrete installations. 2. Aluminum plank grating shall be HD-P manufactured by Harsco Industrial IKG., Heavy Duty Series manufactured by Ohio Gratings, Inc., or Unpunched Duo-Grip Extruded Series manufactured by Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO). D. Heavy Duty Steel Grating 1. Heavy duty steel grating shall be galvanized according to Section 05 05 13  Galvanizing. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Gratings, Checkered Floor Plates, and Access Doors Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 53 00-4 2. Main bearing bars shall conform to ASTM A36. Cross bars shall be flush with the top of the grating. Provide embedded galvanized steel support frames for cast-in- place concrete installations. 3. Grating span shall be 36 inches maximum and shall satisfy AASHTO loading for HS-20 truck. 4. Grating shall be manufactured by Harsco Industrial IKG and Ohio Gratings, Inc. 2.04 CHECKERED FLOOR PLATES A. Floor plates shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1802 for Load Level 1 – Light Pedestrian Load, minimum, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. B. Floor plates shall be aluminum unless noted otherwise. C. All floor plates shall be checkered plate with an approved raised pattern, non-skid surface. D. Openings greater than 42 inches in either direction shall require two plates opening via hinges in opposite directions. E. Floor plates shall be designed to carry a minimum service level live load of 150 psf, or a concentrated load of 300 pounds applied over a 5.50 inch by 5.50 inch area, whichever produces the greatest stress, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Loading shall be positioned to produce the greatest stresses, both due to maximum moment and maximum shear load conditions. F. All components of checkered floor plates shall have a minimum tensile yield strength of 23,000 psi and a minimum compressive yield strength of 21,000 psi. Yield strengths shall be indicated on both the structural calculations and the fabrication drawings. G. Live load deflection shall be limited to L/200 of the span, but no greater than 3/16 inch. H. All checkered floor plates shall be fabricated from 1/4" plate, minimum and shall be stiffened as required to maintain allowable stress and deflection requirements specified herein. I. Stiffeners shall consist of angles or bars welded to the bottom of the plate. J. Checkered floor plate hinges shall be either stainless steel or aluminum with stainless steel pins and fasteners. K. All checkered floor plates shall be provided with recessed handles. Handle material shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. L. Air-tight and water-tight checkered floor plates shall be provided with a 1/8-inch-thick neoprene gasket between the checkered plate and the support frame. Gasket material Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Gratings, Checkered Floor Plates, and Access Doors Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 53 00-5 shall be bonded to the support frame and checkered floor plates shall be bolted to the structural support frame with countersunk stainless-steel flathead screws. M. All floor plates shall be clearly marked with the information listed below. Markings shall be indicated on metal or plastic tags permanently attached to the floor plate or frame or shall be permanently painted or printed. 1. The manufacturer’s name or trademark, location, and telephone contact number. 2. The manufacturer’s model number and ASTM designation. 3. The design load level as indicated in ASTM C1802. If the design requires deviation from the Load Level requirements specified in ASTM C1802, a description of the modifications shall be included. 4. Date of manufacture and/or serial number. 2.05 ACCESS DOORS A. General 1. Door opening sizes, number, and direction of swing of door leaves, and locations shall be as shown on the Drawings. The Drawings shall indicate the dimensions of the openings in the concrete. Clear opening dimensions shall be no smaller than six inches less than the concrete opening. 2. All doors shall be aluminum unless otherwise noted. 3. All door components shall have a minimum tensile yield strength of 23,000 psi and a minimum compressive yield strength of 21,000 psi. Yield strengths shall be indicated on both the structural calculations and the fabrication drawings. 4. Openings larger than 42 inches in either direction shall have double leaf doors. 5. Doors shall be designed for flush mounting and for easy opening from both inside and outside. 6. All doors shall be provided with an automatic hold-open arm with release handle. 7. Double leaf doors shall be provided with safety bars to go across the open sides of the door, when in the open position. Brackets shall be provided on the underside of the doors to hold the safety bars when not in use. 8. All hardware, including but not limited to, all parts of the latch and lifting mechanism assemblies, hold open arms and guides, brackets, hinges, springs, pins, and fasteners shall be stainless steel. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Gratings, Checkered Floor Plates, and Access Doors Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 53 00-6 9. All doors specifically required to be watertight shall be installed with a continuous gasket. 10. Access door frames with integral gutter systems shall be equipped with a 1-1/2- inch minimum drainpipe located by the manufacturer. The drainpipe shall be provided by the Contractor and shall extend to the nearest point of discharge acceptable to the Engineer. 11. All doors shall be clearly marked with the information listed below. Markings shall be indicated on metal or plastic tags permanently attached to the door or frame or shall be permanently painted or printed. a. The manufacturer’s name or trademark, location, and telephone contact number. b. The manufacturer’s model number and ASTM designation. c. The design load level as indicated in ASTM C1802. If the design requires deviation from the Load Level requirements specified in ASTM C1802, a description of the modifications shall be included. d. The nominal door opening dimensions and/or the manufacturer’s model number. e. Date of manufacture and/or serial number. B. Floor, Wet Well and Dry Pit Access Doors 1. Door leaves shall be 1/4 inch, minimum, diamond pattern plate with an approved raised pattern, non-skid surface. Plate shall be stiffened as required to maintain allowable stress and deflection requirements. Stiffeners shall consist of angles or bars welded to the bottom of plate. 2. Doors shall be designed for flush mounting and for easy opening from both inside and outside. 3. All doors shall have an enclosed compression spring assist and open to 90 degrees. 4. Doors not required to support traffic loading shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1802 for Load Level 2 – Pedestrian Load as a minimum and the following: a. Doors shall be designed to carry a minimum service level live load of 300 psf or a concentrated load of 600 pounds applied over a 5.50 inch by 5.50 inch area, whichever produces the greatest stress, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Loading shall be positioned to produce the maximum stresses, both due to maximum moment and maximum shear load conditions. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Gratings, Checkered Floor Plates, and Access Doors Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 53 00-7 b. Live load deflection shall be limited to L/200 of the span, but not greater than 3/16 inch. c. Unless otherwise noted, exterior doors shall have an integral gutter system and be Type “FDDP” by Nystrom, Type ”W1S” or “W2S” by Halliday Products Inc., Type "TPS" or "TPD", by U.S.F. Fabrication Inc., or Type "THG" or "THG-D", by Thompson Fabricating LLC, or Type “J-AL” or “JD_AL” by the Bilco Company. d. Unless otherwise noted, interior doors shall be Type "FDNP” by Nystrom, Type ”S1S” or “S2S” by Halliday Products Inc., Type "APS300" or "APD300", by U.S.F. Fabrication Inc., or Type "TH" or "TH-D", by Thompson Fabricating LLC. 5. Doors required to support traffic loadings shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1802 for Load Level 4 – Occasional Truck Traffic, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. a. For openings less than or equal to 48 inches, the design loading shall consist of a service level 16,000 pound load applied over a 10 inch by 20 inch area with traffic both parallel and perpendicular to the span considered. Loadings shall be positioned to produce the maximum stresses, both due to maximum moment and maximum shear load conditions. b. For openings greater than 48 inches, two load cases shall be considered. Load Case 1 shall consist of two service level 16,000 pound loads spaced at 48 inches on center with each load applied over a 10 inch by 20 inch area and assuming the traffic direction is perpendicular to the span of the door. Load Case 2 shall consist of two service level 12,500 pound loads spaced at 48 inches on center with each load applied over a 10 inch by 20 inch area and assuming the traffic direction is parallel to the span of the door. Loadings for both cases shall be positioned to produce the maximum stresses, both due to maximum moment and maximum shear load conditions. c. Live load deflections shall be limited to L/250 of the span, but not greater than 3/16 inch, and shall be determined based off a service level 16,000 pound load. d. Unless otherwise noted, doors rated for HS-20 traffic loading shall have an integral gutter system and be Type “FDDH” by Nystrom, Type “H1C” or “H2C” by Halliday Products, Inc., Type “THS” or “THD” by U.S.F. Fabrication Inc., Type “THG-H20” by Thompson Fabricating LLC, or “Type JAL-H20” or “JDAL-H20” by the Bilco Company. C. Roof Access Doors Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Gratings, Checkered Floor Plates, and Access Doors Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 53 00-8 1. Doors shall be designed for 40 psf live load unless noted otherwise. 2. Doors for service stairs shall be Bilco Type L roof Scuttles. 3. Doors for ladder access shall be Bilco Type S or SS Roof Scuttle. 2.06 FALL THROUGH PREVENTION SYSTEM A. All checkered floor plates and access doors covering openings measuring 12 inches or more in its least dimension through which persons may fall shall be equipped with a fall through prevention system, except as noted on the Contract Drawings. Checkered floor plates and access doors shall be provided with a permanent installed fall through prevention grate system that provides continuous safety assurance in both its closed and open positions. The grate system shall be made with 6061-T6 aluminum or FRP and be designed for a 300 psf minimum live load, unless noted otherwise. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. All measurements and dimensions shall be based on field conditions and shall be verified by the Contractor prior to fabrication. Such verification shall include coordination with adjoining work. B. All fabricated work shall be shop fitted together as much as practicable, and delivered to the field, complete and ready for erection. All miscellaneous items such as stiffeners, fillets, connections, brackets, and other details necessary for a complete installation shall be provided. C. All work shall be fabricated and installed in a manner that will provide for expansion and contraction, prevent shearing of bolts, screws, and other fastenings, ensure rigidity, and provide a close fit of sections. D. Finished members shall conform to the lines, angles, and curves shown on the Drawings and shall be free from distortions of any kind. E. All shearings shall be neat and accurate, with parts exposed to view neatly finished. Flame cutting is allowed only when performed utilizing a machine. F. All shop connections shall be welded unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. Bolts and welds shall conform to Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening. All fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. 3.02 GENERAL G. Not Applicable Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Gratings, Checkered Floor Plates, and Access Doors Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 53 00-9 3.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING H. Not Applicable 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Assembly and installation of fabricated system components shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. All gratings, checkered floor plates, and access doors shall be erected square, plumb and true, accurately fitted, adequately anchored in place, and set at proper elevations and positions. Embedded support frames shall be set level and square. C. Where access doors utilize leveling bolts, or are placed on irregular surfaces, and are not to be embedded in concrete, the area beneath the frames shall be fully grouted with non-shrink grout to create a uniformly loaded bearing surface. D. Grating shall not be field cut or modified unless approved by Engineer. E. Grating shall not be used for equipment support or anchorage. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL F. Not Applicable 3.06 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES A. Not Applicable 3.07 CLEANING A. Not Applicable 3.08 TESTING A. Not Applicable 3.09 TRAINING A. Not Applicable 3.10 SUPPLEMENTS A. Not Applicable END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Steel Treads and Nosings Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 55 00-1 SECTION 05 55 00 STEEL TREADS AND NOSINGS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide all stair treads and nosings in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 05 10 00  Metal Materials B. Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening C. Section 05 51 00  Metal Stairs D. Section 06 51 00  Glass Fiber and Resin Fabrications 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. International Building Code 2018 2. Aluminum Association Specifications for Aluminum Structures. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures. 1. Complete fabrication and erection drawings of all work specified herein. 2. Other submittals as required in accordance with Section 05 10 00  Metal Materials and Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL MATERIALS A. Metal materials used for stair treads and nosings shall conform to Section 05 10 00  Metal Materials, unless noted otherwise. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Steel Treads and Nosings Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 55 00-2 2.02 METAL FASTENING A. All welds and fasteners used for stair treads and nosings shall conform to Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening, unless noted otherwise. 2.03 SAFETY STAIR NOSINGS A. Abrasive cast aluminum, safety stair nosings shall be provided on all concrete or concrete filled steel pan stairs, including the top stair of metal stairs that attach to concrete, and as shown on the Drawings unless noted otherwise. B. Nosing shall be 3 inches wide and shall extend the full width of the stairway minus 3 inches on either side. Nosing shall be cast into the concrete and held in place with butterfly type extruded anchors. C. The nosing shall be "Style 231-A", by Amstep Products, “Alumogrit Type 101", by Wooster Products, Inc., "Type AX", by Safe-T-Metal Company. For steel pan concrete filled stairs, nosing shall be "Type 101-SP", Wooster Products, Inc., or "Type AXPE", by Safe-T-Metal Company. For pan stairs, nosing shall be continuous over corner of stair treads to fully protect corner of treads from abrasion. All exposed fasteners shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 2.04 STAIR TREADS A. Stair treads shall be aluminum with an abrasive nosing as shown on the Drawings. B. Stair treads shall be designed for the live load specified in Section 05 51 00  Metal Stairs. C. Stair treads shall be as manufactured by IKG Industries, Ohio Gratings, Inc., or Safe-T- Metal Company. 2.05 FRP STAIR NOSINGS A. FRP stair nosings shall be provided on all concrete stairs in sodium hypochlorite areas and as indicated on the Drawings. B. FRP stair nosings shall conform to Section 06 51 00  Glass Fiber and Resin Fabrications as indicated on the Drawings. 2.06 FRP STAIR TREADS A. FRP stair treads shall be provided for FRP stairs in sodium hypochlorite areas and as indicated on the Drawings. B. FRP stair treads shall conform to Section 06 51 00  Glass Fiber and Resin Fabrications. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Steel Treads and Nosings Cottonwoods Connection Page 05 55 00-3 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. All measurements and dimensions shall be based on field conditions and shall be verified by the Contractor prior to fabrication. Such verification shall include coordination with adjoining work. B. All fabricated work shall be shop fitted together as much as practicable, and delivered to the field, complete and ready for erection. All miscellaneous items such as stiffeners, connections, brackets, and other details necessary for a complete installation shall be provided. C. All work shall be fabricated and installed in a manner that will provide for expansion and contraction, prevent shearing of bolts, screws, and other fastenings, ensure rigidity, and provide a close fit of sections. D. All shearings shall be neat and accurate, with parts exposed to view neatly finished. Flame cutting is allowed only when performed utilizing a machine. E. All shop connections shall be welded unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. Bolts and welds shall conform to Section 05 05 23  Metal Fastening. All fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Assembly and installation of stair treads and nosings shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. All stair treads and nosings shall be erected square, plumb and true, accurately fitted, adequately anchored in place, and set at proper elevations and positions. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Waterproofing Cottonwoods Connection Page 07 13 50-1 SECTION 07 13 50 WATERPROOFING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for the complete execution of the Work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Principal items of work include: 1. Waterproofing on the exterior sides of walls below grade. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00  Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents: 1. ASTM D146  Sampling and Testing Felted and Woven Fabrics Saturated with Bituminous Substances for Use in Waterproofing and Roofing 2. ASTM D412  Tests for Rubber Properties in Tension 3. ASTM E96  Tests for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials in Sheet Form 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Manufacturers product literature, specification data sheets and installation instructions. 2. Samples of composite drainage panel and waterproofing. 3. Complete layout and installation drawings and schedules with clearly indicated dimensions. 4. Detail drawings showing all anchoring details and construction details at corners, penetrations, and flashing. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Waterproofing Cottonwoods Connection Page 07 13 50-2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Specifications provide products manufactured by one of the following: 1. Grace Construction Products. 2. Carlyle Coating and Waterproofing 3. Polyguard Products. 2.02 PRODUCTS A. Waterproofing Membrane: Self-adhering membrane consisting of a minimum 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a minimum 4 mils of polyethylene to form a minimum of 60 mil membrane. Provide a cold-applied membrane which requires no special adhesives or heating equipment. B. Physical Properties Properties Test Method Result Pliability (@ -25 f) ASTM D-146 No Effect Tensile Strength Membrane ASTM D-412 250 psi min. Tensile Strength Film ASTM D-412 4000 psi min. Elongation ASTM D-412 300% min. Puncture Resistance Membrane ASTM E-154 40 lbs. min. Puncture Resistance Film ASTM D-781 250 in. oz. tear Permeance ASTM E-96 (B) 0.1 max. grains/sf/hr/in.Hg Water Absorption ASTM D-570 0.2 max. (% by weight) Adhesion to Concrete ASTM D-903 5.0 lbs./in. width max. C. Primer: As recommended by manufacturer. D. Mastic: As recommended by manufacturer. Use mastic to seal cut edge terminations. 2.03 COMPOSITE DRAINAGE PANEL A. Composite drainage panel: Three dimensional, high impact, polystyrene core with a nonwoven filter fabric bonded to the core. Provide a polymeric sheet adhered to the flat Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Waterproofing Cottonwoods Connection Page 07 13 50-3 side of the polystyrene core. Extend filter fabric beyond the edges to provide total filtering integrity of the drainage system. B. Physical Properties Properties Test Method Result Compressive Strength (Core) ASTM D-1621 15,000 psf Apparent Opening Size (Filter Fabric) ASTM D-4751 100 United States Standard Sieve Water Flow Rate (Filter Fabric) ASTM D-4491 150 gpm/ft Water Flow (Composite System) ASTM D-4716 15 gpm/ft. width C. Composite System Requirements 1. Provide one inch flange on longitudinal edge. 2. Bond filter fabric to each dimple of polymeric core. 3. Extend filter fabric beyond toe edge of polymeric core to provide total filtering integrity of the drainage system. 4. System shall be approved for use over waterproofing membrane. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION OF SURFACES A. Examine all surfaces and installation of work done by other trades. B. Coordinate all work under this Section with contiguous work of other trades. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Install waterproofing membrane and composite drainage system in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. B. Where drainage piping is shown on Drawings, extend systems to allow for proper drainage. C. Cover and seal all terminal edges. Cut systems and seal around penetrations. D. Provide a written report from the Manufacturer's representative stating that the waterproofing membrane and composite drainage system were installed correctly. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Waterproofing Cottonwoods Connection Page 07 13 50-4 3.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers identified with name, brand, type, grade, class and all other qualifying information. B. Store materials in dry location, in such manner as to prevent damage or intrusion of foreign matter. Conspicuously mark "Rejected" on materials which have been damaged and remove from the job site. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Building Insulation Cottonwoods Connection Page 07 21 00-1 SECTION 07 21 00 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for complete execution of Work as shown on Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00  Cast-in-Place Concrete B. Section 04 20 00  Unit Masonry C. Section 09 29 00  Gypsum Drywall System 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications Work shall conform to applicable requirements of the following documents: 1. ASTM C726  Insulation Board, Thermal (Mineral Fiber) 2. ASTM C 578  Specification for Preformed, Block Type Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation 3. ASTM C 665  Specification for Mineral fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00  Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Manufacturer's literature, specifications, installation instructions, technical data, and general recommendations. 2. Samples of each type of insulation specified. 3. Shop drawing for tapered insulation. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Building Insulation Cottonwoods Connection Page 07 21 00-2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide products as manufactured by the following: 1. Manufacturers of Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation a. Hunter b. Amoco Foam Products Company c. Dow Chemical U.S.A. d. UC Industries e. Or Approved Equal 2.02 MATERIALS A. Wall and Roof Slab Insulation: rigid insulation panel composed of a closed cell polyisocyanurate foam core manufactured online to 15 mil glass fiber reinforced foil facers extruded into 2 inch thick boards as indicated on Drawings. Provide insulation conforming to the requirements ofASTM C 518 and ASTM C 1289 Type 1 Class 2 Grade 2; with a 5 year aged R-value of 13. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Insulation shall be provided on walls, roof slabs where shown on Drawings. 3.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in unopened, undamaged original packaging with bearing the manufacturer's name. B. Store materials in clean, dry, protected areas. Do not leave materials exposed to the weather or sunlight, except to the extent necessary to perform the work. C. Protect against ignition. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Building Insulation Cottonwoods Connection Page 07 21 00-3 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions to provide maximum sound and thermal benefits for material specified. Install to fill or cover voids. Cut neatly to snugly fit angles, corners and irregular areas and carefully wrapped around pipes, conduits, outlets, switches, beams, etc., to maintain continuity of insulation. Avoid gaps or bridges. B. Foundation and Under-Slab Insulation 1. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Stagger vertical joints, except ends over line of expansion joints. 2. On horizontal surfaces, set units level, unless otherwise noted. C. Gap Sealant: Seal all gaps at perimeter of walls and penetrations and openings. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Remove excess gap sealant to finish flush with the adjacent materials where visible or required to allow installation of finish materials. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking Cottonwoods Connection Page 07 90 00-1 SECTION 07 90 00 JOINT FILLERS, SEALANTS AND CAULKING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment, and appliances required for the complete execution of Work shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 03 15 00 – Concrete Accessories B. Section 03 15 16 – Joints in Concrete C. Section 08 80 00 – Glass and Glazing 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. ASTM C-920 – Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. ASTM D-1056 – Flexible Cellular Materials – Sponge or Expanded Rubber 3. SWRI – Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Manufacturers literature and installation instructions. Label each product submitted with Type as indicated in paragraph 2.01 A. 2. Color samples of each type of sealant. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator shall be a company specializing in the installation of sealants with a minimum of five years of experience. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking Cottonwoods Connection Page 07 90 00-2 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sealants 1. Type 1: Multi-component, non-sag, low-modulus polyurethane rubber sealant meeting ASTM C-920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, use NT, M, A, and O. Capable of withstanding 50% in extension or compression such as Sikaflex-2C NS/SL, Sika Corporation, or Sonolastic NP-2, Sonneborn, or DynaTrol II by Pecora Corporation. 2. Type 2: Single component polyurethane sealant meeting ASTM C-920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, A, and O. Capable of withstanding 25% in extension or compression such as Sikaflex 1A by Sika Corporation, DynaTrol 1-XL by Pecora Corporation, or Sonolastic NP-1 by Master Builders Solutions. 3. Type 3: Single component, low-modulus moisture curing silicone meeting ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G, and A. Capable of withstanding 50% extension and compression. Pecora 890 by Pecora Corporation, Sonolastic Omni Seal by Master Builders Solutions. 4. Type 4: Single component, mildew resistant, moisture-curing silicone meeting ASTM C-920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G, and A. Pecora 898 by Pecora Corporation, Sonolastic Omni Plus by Master Builders Solutions. 5. Type 5: Single component, acrylic latex meeting ASTM C-834. AC-20+ Silicone by Pecora Corporation, Sonneborn Sonolac by Master Builders Solutions. 6. Type 6: High grade butyl sealant meeting Federal Specification TT-S-00-1657. BC- 158 by Pecora Corporation or equal. 7. Type 7: Multi-component chemical resistant polysulfide sealant conforming to ASTM C-920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25 such as Deck-O-Seal by W.R. Meadows, Tammsflex by DuraJoint Concrete Accessories, or Synthacalk GC2+ by Pecora Corporation. 8. Type 8: Nonsag, Multi Component, traffic grade polyurethane sealant meeting ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, use T, M, A, and O. DynaTread by Pecora Corporation, Sonolastic Ultra by Master Builders Solutions. B. Primer: Non-staining primer recommended by sealant manufacturer for the substrates on this project. C. Backer Rod: Closed cell foam, nonreactive with caulking materials, non-oily, and approved by the sealant manufacturer. Minimum density shall be 2.00 pounds per cubic foot. Use no asphalt or bitumen-impregnated fiber with sealants. D. Joint Cleaner: Recommended by sealant or caulking compound manufacturer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking Cottonwoods Connection Page 07 90 00-3 E. Bond breaker: Either polyethylene film or plastic tape as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. F. Color: Where manufacturer’s standard colors do not closely match materials being sealed, provide a custom color. PART 2 – EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in unopened labeled packages. B. Store materials in location protected from freezing or damages. C. Reject and remove from the site materials within broken or damaged packaging. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Coordinate work with details shown on approved shop drawings prepared by other trades. B. Verify conditions in the field. C. Schedule work to follow closely the installation of other trades. D. Apply sealants and related items in temperatures and dry conditions recommended by the manufacturers. E. Do not paint sealant, unless recommended by sealant and paint manufacturer. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Protect finished surfaces adjoining by using masking tape or other suitable materials. B. Clean and prime joints before starting any caulking or sealing work. C. Thoroughly clean joints and spaces of mortar and other foreign materials. Cleaning agent shall be Xylol or similar noncontaminating solvent to remove any film from metal surfaces. Masonry or concrete surfaces shall be brushed or air jet cleaned. D. Joint Requirements 1. All joints and spaces to be sealed in exterior work shall be less than ½-inch deep and not less than 1/4 inch wide. If joints in masonry are less than that specified herein, the mortar shall be cut out to the required width and depth. All joints and spaces to receive sealant shall be completely prepared and thoroughly dry before installation of sealant. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking Cottonwoods Connection Page 07 90 00-4 2. Unless otherwise specified, joints and spaces which are open to a depth of 1/2 inch or greater shall be solidly filled with backup material to within 1/4 inch of the surface. Backup material shall be packed tightly and made continuous throughout the length of the joints. Bond breaker shall be applied as required. If joints are less than ¼-inch deep, the backup material may be omitted, a bond breaker substituted and the joint completely filled with sealant. The backup material shall not project beyond the ¼-inch depth of the open space in any joint. The following width-to- depth ratio table shall be adhered to, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. Sealant Depth Joint Width Minimum Maximum ¼ inch 1/4 inch 1/4 inch Over 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch 1/4 inch Equal to width Over 1/2 inch to 1 inch 1/2 inch Equal to width Over 1 inch to 2 inches 1/2 inch 1/2 of width 3.04 APPLICATION A. Exercise care before, during, and after installation so as not to damage any material by tearing or puncturing. All finished work shall be approved before covering with any other material or construction. B. Apply sealant by an approved type of gun except where the use of a gun is not practicable, suitable hand tools shall be used. Avoid applying the compound to any surface outside of the joints or spaces to be sealed. Mask areas where required to prevent overlapping of sealant. C. All joints shall be waterproof and weathertight. D. Point sealed joints to make a slightly concave joint, the edges of which are flush with the surrounding surfaces. Exposed joints in the interior side of the door and other frames shall be neatly pointed flush or to match adjacent jointing work. E. Adjacent materials which have been soiled shall be cleaned immediately and the work left in neat and clean condition. F. Comply with sealant manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified and except where manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking Cottonwoods Connection Page 07 90 00-5 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove misplaced sealant compounds promptly using methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer, as the work progresses. B. Allow sealants to cure and remove protective edging, of doors, louvers, saddles windows etc. as directed by the Engineer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking Cottonwoods Connection Page 07 90 00-6 3.06 SCHEDULING Schedule of Sealants Application Sealant Color Vertical and horizontal expansion and construction joints in concrete structures unless noted otherwise herein or on Drawings. Type 1 To closely match adjacent surfaces or mortar and as selected by the Owner. Vertical and horizontal joints bordered on both sides by masonry, precast concrete, natural stone or other porous building material, unless noted otherwise herein or on Drawings. Type 2 To closely match adjacent surfaces or mortar and as selected by the Owner. Vertical and horizontal joints bordered on both sides by painted metals, anodized aluminum, mill finished aluminum, PVC, glass or other non-porous building material. Type 3 To closely match adjacent surfaces and as selected by the Owner. Masonry expansion and control joints less than 1¼" wide. Type 2 To closely match adjacent surfaces and as selected by the Owner. Masonry expansion and control joints equal or greater than 1¼ inches wide and not to exceed 2”. Type 1 To closely match adjacent surfaces and as selected by the Owner. Interior – wood trim and finish joints. Type 5 Color to be selected by Owner Perimeter sealing of doors, windows, louvers, piping, ducts, and electrical conduit.2 Type 2 OR Type 3 To closely match adjacent surfaces and as selected by the Owner. Below thresholds. Type 6 Manufacturer's standard Submerged in liquids.3,4 Type 1 Manufacturer's standard Submerged in liquids with high concentration of chlorine (> 2 ppm) or wastewater. Type 7 Manufacturer’s standard Horizontal Joints exposed to vehicular or pedestrian traffic. Type 8 To closely match adjacent surfaces. Other joints indicated on the drawings or customarily sealed but not listed. Type recommended by manufacturer To closely match adjacent surfaces and as selected by the Owner. 1 Sealant for Laboratory Countertop shall be as recommended by countertop manufacturer. 2 Provide UL approved sealants for penetrations thru fire-rated walls 3 Sealants which will come in contact with potable water shall meet the requirements of NSF 61. 4 Where sealant will be immersed in liquid chemicals verify compatibility prior to installation of sealant. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Painting Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 90 00-1 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment, and appliances required for complete execution of Work shown on Drawings and Specified herein. B. Section Includes: 1. Paint Materials 2. Shop Painting 3. Field Painting a. Surface Preparation b. Piping and Equipment Identification c. Schedule of Colors d. Work in Confined Spaces e. OSHA Safety Colors 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 09 90 10 – Pipeline Coatings and Linings B. Section 40 05 24.23 – Steel Pipe for Water Service 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications, the Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents: 1. SSPC – The Society for Protective Coatings Standards a. SSPC-Vis 1 – Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Structures b. SSPC-SP2 – Hand Tool Cleaning c. SSPC-SP3 – Power Tool Cleaning 70 088 -001 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Painting Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 90 00-2 d. SSPC-SP5/NACE 1 – White Metal Blast Cleaning e. SSPC-SP6/NACE 3 – Commercial Blast Cleaning f. SSPC-SP7/NACE 4 – Brush-off Blast Cleaning g. SSPC-SP10/NACE 2 – Near-White Metal Blast h. SSPC-SP11 – Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal i. SSPC-SP13/NACE6 – Surface Preparation of Concrete 2. ICRI – International Concrete Repair Institute 3. NACE – National Association of Corrosion Engineers 4. NAFP – The National Association of Pipe Fabricators 5. ASTM D1737 – Test Method for Elongation of Attached Organic Coatings with Cylindrical Mandrel Apparatus 6. ASTM B117 – Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing 7. ASTM D4060 – Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coating by the Taber Abraser 8. ASTM D3359 – Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Manufacturer's literature and Material Safety Data Sheets for each product. 2. Painting schedule identifying surface preparation and paint systems proposed. Cross reference with Tables 1 and 2. Provide the name of the paint manufacturer, and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer's representative who will inspect the work. Submit schedule for approval as soon as possible following the Award of Contract, so approved schedule may be used to identify colors and specify shop paint systems for fabricated items. Manufacturer shall substitute paint system with equal performance where req uired for VOC compliance. 3. Pipeline Supplier shall submit Q.C. Inspection plan describing all tests and inspections task to be performed. Include copy of daily log showing environmental conditions measurements and frequency. Copy of completed log shall be provided at completion of work. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Painting Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 90 00-3 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Work shall include surface preparation, paint application, inspection of painted surfaces and corrective action required, protection of adjacent surfaces, cleanup and appurtenant work required for the proper painting of all surfaces to be painted. Surfaces to be painted are designated within the Painting Schedule and may include new and existing piping, miscellaneous metals, equipment, buildings, exterior fiberglass, exposed electrical conduit and appurtenances. B. Perform Work in strict accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations and instructions, unless the Engineer stipulates that deviations will be for the benefit of the project. C. Paint surfaces which are customarily painted, whether indicated to be painted or not, with painting system applied to similar surfaces, areas and environments, and as approved by Engineer. D. Piping and equipment shall receive color coding and identification. Equipment shall be the same color as the piping system. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty shall be as specified in 01 61 00 Product Requirement and Options. Warranty period shall be a minimum of two (2) years from substantial completion. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Painting operations shall be accomplished by skilled craftsman and licensed by the state/commonwealth to perform painting work. B. Provide a letter indicating that the painting applicator has at least five years of experience, and 5 references which show previously successful application of the specified or comparable painting systems. Include the name, address, and the telephone number for the Owner of each installation for which the painting applicat or provided services. C. Pipeline Supplier shall coordinate Q.C Inspections for all shop-applied coatings. D. Notify Owner and Engineer at completion of surface preparation, priming application and final cure to allow inspection by Owner and Engineer or their Third -Party Inspector. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Per Section 01 11 80 – Environmental Conditions 1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. As specified in the Contract Documents. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Painting Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 90 00-4 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL INFORMATION A. The term "paint" is defined as both paints and coatings including emulsions, enamels, stains, varnishes, sealers, and other coatings whether organic or inorganic and whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. B. Purchase paint from an approved manufacturer. Manufacturer shall assign a representative to inspect application of their product both in the shop and field. The manufacturer's representative shall submit a report to the Engineer at the completion the Work identifying products used and verifying that surfaces were properly prepared, products were properly applied, and the paint systems were proper for the exposure and service. C. Provide primers and intermediate coats produced by same manufacturer as finish coat. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and only within manufacturer's recommended limits. D. Ensure compatibility of total paint system for each substrate. Test shop-primed equipment delivered to the site for compatibility with final paint system. Provide an acceptable barrier coat, or totally remove shop -applied paint system when incompatible with system specified and repaint with specified paint system. E. Use painting materials suitable for the intended use and recommended by paint manufacturer for the intended use. F. Require that personnel perform work in strict accordance with the latest requirements of OSHA Safety and Health Standards for construction. Meet or exceed requirements of regulatory agencies having jurisdiction and the manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations. Maintain a copy of all Material Safety Data Sheets at the job site of each product being used prior to commencement of work. Provide and require that personnel use protective and safety equipment in or about the project site. Provide respiratory devices, eye and face protection, ventilation, ear protection, illumination and other safety devices required to provide a safe work environmen t. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Specifications, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Tnemec Company Inc. 2. PPG 3. CARBOLINE 4. Sherwin-Williams Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Painting Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 90 00-5 5. International Paints (Akzo Nobel) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 SHOP PAINTING A. Shop prime fabricated steel and equipment with at least one shop coat of prime paint compatible with finish paint system specified. Prepare surface to be shop painted in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations and as specified. Finish c oats may be shop applied, if approved by the Engineer. Package, store and protect shop painted items until they are incorporated into Work. Repair painted surfaces damaged during handling, transporting, storage, or installation to provide a painting system equal to the original painting received at the shop. B. Identify surface preparation and shop paints on Shop Drawings. Verify compatibility with field applied paints. C. Coordinate shop painting and field coating to ensure item is delivered and field coating occurs within recoat window of shop painted system requirements. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General 1. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and dry, and free of dust, rust, scale, and foreign matter. No solvent cleaning, power or hand tool cleaning shall be permitted unless approved by the Engineer. 2. Protect or remove, during painting operations, hardware, accessories, machined surfaces, nameplates, lighting fixtures, and similar items not intended to be painted prior to cleaning and painting. Reposition items removed upon completion of painting operations. 3. Examine surfaces to be coated to determine that surfaces are suitable for specified surface preparation and painting. Report to Engineer surfaces found to be unsuitable in writing. Do not start surface preparation until unsuitable surfaces have been corrected. Starting surface preparation precludes subsequent claim that such surfaces were unsuitable for the specified surface preparation or painting. 4. Surface preparation shall be in accordance with specifications and manufacturer's recommendations. Provide additional surface preparation, and fill coats where manufacturer recommends additional surface preparation, in addition to requirements of specification. 5. Touch-up shop or field applied coatings damaged by surface preparation or any other activity, with the same shop or field applied coating; even to the extent of applying an entire coat when required to correct damage prior to application of the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Painting Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 90 00-6 next coating. Touchup coats are in addition to the specified applied systems, and not considered a field coat. 6. Protect motors and other equipment during blasting operation to ensure blasting material is not blown into motors or other equipment. Inspect motors and other equipment after blasting operations and certify that no damage occurred, or where damage occurred, the proper remedial action was taken. 7. Field paint shop painted equipment in compliance with Color Coding and as approved by Engineer. B. Metal Surface Preparation 1. Prepare all welds to a minimum NACE weld preparation level “C” per NACE Standard SP0178. Provide additional weld preparation where required by the coating manufacturer. Contractor shall provide NACE SP0178 weld mold visual aids on site for evaluation of all weld preparation. 2. Conform to current The Society for Protective Coatings Standards (SSPC) Specifications for metal surface preparation. Use SSPC -Vis-1 pictorial standards or NACE visual standards TM-01-70 or TM-01-75 to determine cleanliness of abrasive blast cleaned steel. 3. Perform blast cleaning operations for metal when following conditions exist: a. Moisture is not present on the surface. b. Relative humidity is below 80%. c. Ambient and surface temperatures are 5°F or greater than the dew point temperature. d. Painting or drying of paint is not being performed in the area. e. Equipment is in good operating condition. f. Proper ventilation, illumination, and other safety procedures and equipment are being provided and followed. 4. Abrasive blast ferrous metals to be shop primed, or component mechanical equipment in accordance with SSPC-SP5, White Metal Blast. 5. Abrasive blast field prepared ferrous metals in accordance with SSPC -SP10, Near White Metal Blast, where metal is to be submerged, in a corrosive environment, or in severe service. Provide a 3.0 mil minimum angular anchor profile unless recommended otherwise by the coating manufacturer in writing. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Painting Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 90 00-7 6. Abrasive blast field prepared ferrous metals in accordance with SSPC -SP6 Commercial Blast, where metal is to be used in mild or moderate service, or non - corrosive environment or weathering exposure. Provide a 1.5 mil minimum angular anchor profile unless r ecommended otherwise by the coating manufacturer in writing. 7. Clean nonferrous metals, copper, or galvanized metal surfaces in accordance to SSPC-SP1, Solvent Cleaning, or give one coat of metal passivator or metal conditioner compatible with the complete paint system. Galvanized metal shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-16. Abrasive blast clean to increase mechanical adhesion in accordance with ASTM D6386, Standard Practice for Preparation of Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coated Iron and Steel Product and Hardware Surfaces for Painting when required by coating manufacturer. Provide a 1.5 mil minimum angular anchor profile unless recommended otherwise by the coating manufacturer in writing. 8. Abrasive blast clean internal and external ductile iron pipe surfaces prior to coating in accordance with NAPF 500-03-04, Surface Preparations Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaning of Ductile Iron Pipe. Abrasive blast clean internal and external cast ductile iron and cast-iron fitting surfaces in accordance with NAPF-03-05. 9. Prime cleaned metals immediately after cleaning to prevent rusting. 10. Clean rusted metals down to bright metal by abrasive blasting and immediately field primed. C. Previously Painted Surfaces 1. Totally remove existing paint when: surface is to be submerged in a severe environment, paint is less than 75% intact, brittle, eroded or has underfilm rusting. 2. Surfaces which are greater than 75% intact require removal of failed paints and then spot primed. Spot priming is in addition to coats specified. 3. Remove surface contamination such as oil, grease, loose paint, mill scale, dirt, foreign matter, rust, mold, mildew, mortar, efflorescence, and sealers. 4. Clean and dull glossy surfaces prior to painting in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Check existing paints for compatibility with new paint system. If incompatible, totally remove existing paint system or apply a barrier coat recommended by the paint manufacturer. Remove existing paints of undetermined origin. Prepare a test patch of approximately 3 square feet over existing paint. Allow test patch to dry thoroughly and test for adhesion. If proper adhesion is not achieved remove existing paint and repaint. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Painting Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 90 00-8 3.03 APPLICATION OF PAINT A. Apply paint by experienced painters with brushes or other applicators approved by the Engineer, and paint manufacturer. B. Apply paint without runs, sags, thin spots, or unacceptable marks. C. Apply at rate specified by the manufacturer to achieve at least the minimum dry mil thickness specified. Apply additional coats, if necessary, to obtain thickness. D. Special attention shall be given to nuts, bolts, edges, angles, flanges, welds, etc., where insufficient film thicknesses are likely. Stripe paint outside corners and edges in accordance with SSPC PA Guide 11. Stripe painting shall be in addition to coats specified. E. Perform thinning in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and with the full knowledge and approval of the Engineer and paint manufacturer. F. Allow paint to dry a minimum of twenty -four hours between application of any two coats of paint on a particular surface, unless shorter time periods are a requirement by the manufacturer. Longer drying times may be required for abnormal conditions as defin ed by the Engineer and paint manufacturer. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended drying time between coats. G. Suspend painting when any of the following conditions exist: 1. Rainy or excessively damp weather. 2. Relative humidity exceeds 85%. 3. General air temperature cannot be maintained at 50°F or above through the drying period, except on approval by the Engineer and paint manufacturer. 4. Relative humidity will exceed 85% or air temperature will drop below 40°F within 18 hours after application of paint. 5. Surface temperature of item is within 5 degrees of dewpoint. 6. Dew or moisture condensation are anticipated. 7. Surface temperature exceeds the manufacturer's recommendations. H. Where application of coating across concrete control joints or expansion joints has the potential to crack, turn coating into joints and caulk joints with a sealant compatible with coating rated for the intended service per Section 07 90 00 – Joint Fillers, Sealants, Caulking. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Painting Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 90 00-9 3.04 INSPECTION A. Each field coat of paint will be inspected and approved by the Engineer or his authorized representative before succeeding coat is applied. Tint successive coats so that no two coats for a given surface are exactly the same color. Tick -mark surfaces to receive black paint in white between coats. B. Use magnetic dry film thickness gauges and wet fiber thickness gauges for quality control. Furnish magnetic dry film thickness gauge for use by the Engineer. C. Coatings shall pass a holiday detector test. D. Determination of Film Thickness: Randomly selected areas, each of at least 107.5 contiguous square feet, totaling at least 5% of the entire control area shall be tested. Within this area, at least 5 squares, each of 7.75 square inches, shall be randomly selected. Three readings shall be taken in each square, from which the mean film thickness shall be calculated. No more than 20 percent of the mean film thickness measurements shall be below the specified thickness. No single measurement shall be below 80 percent of the specified film thickness. Total dry film thickness greater than twice the specified film thickness shall not be acceptable. Areas where the measured dry film thickness exceeds twice that specified shall be completely redone unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. When measured dry film thickness is less than that specified additional coats shall be applied as required. 1. Holiday Testing: Holiday test painted ferrous metal surfaces which will be submerged in water or other liquids, or surfaces which are enclosed in a vapor space in such structures. Mark areas which contain holidays. Repair or repaint in accordance with paint manufacturer's printed instructions and retest. Dry Film Thickness Exceeding 20 Mils: For surfaces having a total dry film thickness exceeding 20 mils: Pulse -type holiday detector such as Tinker & Rasor Model AP - W, D.E. Stearns Co. Model 14/20, shall be used. The unit shall be adjusted to operate at the voltage required to cause a spark jump across an air gap equal to twice the specified coating thickness. 2. Dry Film Thickness of 20 Mils or Less: For surfaces having a total dry film thickness of 20 mils or less: Tinker & Rasor Model M1 non -destructive type holiday detector, K-D Bird Dog, shall be used. The unit shall operate at less than 75 -volts. For thicknesses between 10 and 20 mils, a non-sudsing type wetting agent, such as Kodak Photo -Flow, shall be added to the water prior to wetting the detector sponge. E. Paint manufacturer’s NACE certified representative shall provide their services as required by the Engineer. Services shall include, but not be limited to, inspecting existing paint, determination of best means of surface preparation, inspection of complet ed work, and final inspection of painted work 11 months after the job is completed. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Painting Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 90 00-10 3.05 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT PAINT AND FINISHED SURFACES A. Use covers, masking tape, other method when protection is necessary, or requested by Owner or Engineer. Remove unwanted paint carefully without damage to finished paint or surface. If damage does occur, repair the entire surface adjacent to and including t he damaged area without visible lap marks and without additional cost to the Owner. I. Take all necessary precautions to contain dispersion of abrasive blasting debris and paint to the limits of the work. Take into account the effect of wind and other factors which may cause dispersion of the abrasive blasting debris and paint. Suspend paint ing operations when abrasive blasting debris or paint cannot be properly confined. Assume all responsibilities and cost associated with damage to adjacent structures, vehicles, or surfaces caused by the surface preparation and painting operations. 3.06 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Piping and equipment identification shall be in accordance with Section 40 05 97 – Piping and Equipment Identification Systems. 3.07 SCHEDULE OF COLORS A. Match colors indicated. Piping and equipment colors are indicated in Section 40 05 97 – Piping and Equipment Identification Systems. Colors which are not indicated shall be selected from the manufacturer's full range of colors by the Engineer. No variation shall be made in colors without the Engineer's approval. Color names and numbers shall be identified according to the appropriate color chart issued by the manufacturer of the particular product in question. 3.08 WORK IN CONFINED SPACES A. Provide and maintain safe working conditions for all employees. Supply fresh air continuously to confined spaces through the combined use of existing openings, forced draft fans and temporary ducts to the outside, or direct air supply to individual workers. Exhaust paint fumes to the outside from the lowest level in the contained space. Provide explosionproof electrical fans, if in contact with fumes. No smoking or open fire s will be permitted in, or near, confined spaces where painting is being done. Follo w OSHA, state/commonwealth, and local regulations at all times. 3.09 OSHA SAFETY COLORS A. Paint wall around wall-mounted breathing or fire apparatus with the appropriate safety red color; area not to exceed 2 feet wide by 3 feet high, unless apparatus covers the area. Fire apparatus include fire hoses, extinguisher, and hydrants. B. Paint hazardous areas and objects in accordance with OSHA regulations. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Painting Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 90 00-11 3.10 VOC REGULATIONS A. Provide paint systems in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. Where paint systems shown in schedule do not comply, substitute equal products with VOC limits which comply with local, state, and federal regulations. Table 1: Painting Schedule Surface Application Painting System and No. of Coats Product Reference (Table 2) Total Min. Dry Film Thickness (Mils) Concrete and Masonry Interior masonry and concrete walls and ceilings All new structures 1 coat sealer 2 coats acrylic epoxy 101 116 75-85 sq.ft./gal. 4-6/coat Interior masonry and concrete walls in chemical rooms 1 coat sealer 2 coats epoxy polyamide 117 102 60-80 sq.ft./gal. 4-6/coat Exterior below grade if interior is dry Accessible areas (e.g. pipe galleries, pump rooms, basements, etc.) Waterproofing See Section 07 13 50 Submerged water Water retaining side of new wall surfaces where opposite side of wall is interior and dry and where indicated "epoxy waterproofing" on drawing 2 coats NSF 61/600 approved epoxy polyamide Provide filler as required and recommended by manufacturer 105 4-6/coat Submerged wastewater 2 coats high solids epoxy Provide filler as required and recommended by manufacturer 119 6-10/coat Containment liner1 Interior and exterior secondary containment floors, tank supports and walls 2 coats high solids epoxy coating 119 6-10/coat Metals Interior and exterior non-submerged (gloss) All new blowers, pumps, motors and mechanical equipment, piping, etc. 1 coat epoxy polyamide primer 1 coat epoxy polyamide 2 coat aliphatic polyurethane 104 102 115 4-6 4-6 3-5 Interior insulated 1 coat acrylic latex 103 4 Submerged water All metal piping and mechanical equipment, etc. 2 coats NSF 61/600 approved epoxy polyamide 105 4-6/coat Submerged wastewater 2 coats high solids epoxy 119 8-10/coat Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Painting Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 90 00-12 Steel doors, windows and door frames, steel stairs, monorails, structural steel, misc. metals (steel), galvanized lintels 1 coat epoxy polyamide 2 coat aliphatic polyurethane 102 115 5-8 3-4 Aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete 2 coats coal tar 107 26 Shop primed structural steel Pre-engineered buildings 1 tie coat 1 coat epoxy 1 coat epoxy 113 114 120 2-3 3-4 3-4 Other Interior: gypsum wallboard All new structures 2 coats acrylic latex matte or satin 103 2-3/coat Interior: tar-dipped piping where color is required 1 coat epoxy resin sealer 1 coat epoxy polyamide 112 102 2-3/coat 5-8/coat PVC piping 1 coat epoxy polyamide 1 coat aliphatic polyurethane 102 115 5-8 3-4 1 Painting manufacturer shall verify compatibility of containment liner and chemical to be contained. Where incompatible substitute a compatible coating system. Table 2: Product Listing Ref. System Purpose Product Tnemec Series PPG/AMERON CARBOLINE Sherwin-Williams 101 Acrylic filler Primer-sealer 130-6601 BLOXFIL 4000 Sanitile 100 Cement-Plex 875 102 Epoxy polyamide Finish coat semi- gloss or gloss N69 AMERLOCK 2 Carboguard 890 Macropoxy 646 103 Acrylic latex Sealer 1028/1029 PITT TECH PLUS Carbocrylic 3359DTM DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish 104 Epoxy Polyamide – metal Primer 66 AMERCOAT 385 Carboguard 893SG Macropoxy 646 105 Epoxy polyamide Primer/Finish L140 AMERLOCK 2 Carboguard 61/891VOC Macropoxy 646 PW 106 Coal tar epoxy Finish high-coat build 46H-413 AMERCOAT 78HB Bitumastic 300M Hi-Mil Sher Tar Epoxy 107 Coal tar Sealer 46-465 AMERCOAT 78HB Bitumastic 300M Hi-Mil Sher Tar Epoxy 108 Alkyd-medium oil Finish coat 2H DEVGUARD 4308 Carbocoat 8215 Industrial Enamel 109 Alkyd-long oil Finish coat 1029 DEVGUARD 4308 Carbocoat 8215 Industrial Enamel 110 Epoxy polyamide Primer 66-1211 AMERCOAT 385 Carboguard 893SG Macropoxy 646 112 Epoxy polyamide Sealer 66-1211 AMERCOAT 385 Carboguard 893SG Macropoxy 920 Pre-Prime 113 Urethane Barrier coat 530 AMERLOCK SEALER Rustbond - 114 Polyamine Epoxy Intermediate coat 27 AMERLOCK 385 Carboguard 893SG - Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Painting Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 90 00-13 115 Aliphatic Polyurethane Finish coat 1094 or 1095 AMERCOAT 450 HS Carbothane 134HG Acrolon 218HS 116 Acrylic epoxy Finish coat 113 or 114 AQUAPON WB Sanitile 255 Water-Based Catalyzed Epoxy 117 Epoxy block filler Sealer 1254 AMERLOCK 114 Sanitile 500 Kem Cati-Coat HS Epoxy Filler 118 Catalyzed epoxy Finish coat 84 AMERLOCK 2/400 Carboguard 890 Macropoxy 646 119 High solids epoxy Finish coat 104 AMERLOCK 400 Carboguard 890 Dura-Plate 235 120 Epoxy Top coat N69 AMERLOCK 2/400 Carboguard 890 - 3.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Bring materials to the job site in the original sealed and labeled containers. B. Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Store paint materials at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 3.12 INSTALLATION A. Per Manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Each coat will be inspected. Strip and remove defective coats, prepare surfaces and recoat. When approved, apply next coat. B. Control and check dry film thicknesses and integrity of coatings. C. Measure dry film thickness with calibrated thickness gauge. D. Dry film thicknesses on ferrous-based substrates may be checked with Elcometer Type 1 Magnetic Pull-Off Gage or Positector 6000. E. Verify coat integrity with low-voltage sponge or high -voltage spark holiday detector, in accordance with SP0188 06. Allow Engineere to use detector for additional checking. F. Arrange for services of coating manufacturer's field representative to provide periodic field consultation and inspection services to ensure proper surface preparation of facilities and items to be coated, and to ensure proper application and curing: 1. Notify Engineer 24 hours in advance of each visit by coating manufacturer's representative. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Painting Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 90 00-14 2. Provide Engineer with a written report by coating manufacturer's representative within 48 hours following each visit. 3.14 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES A. Provide manufacturer's field representative to train application personnel and inspect the first application of each unique coating system. 3.15 CLEANING A. As work proceeds and upon completion, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of work, keep premises free from unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-1 SECTION 09 90 10 PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. This Section covers the work necessary to apply external coating and internal mortar lining on steel, field coating of joints, and field repair of coating damage, complete. B. Steel pipe shall be provided with either a tape wrap with cement mortar overcoat or polyurethane coating system. C. All exposed steel pipe, fittings, and appurtenances in vaults and above grade shall be coated in accordance with Section 09 90 0 0 Painting. D. Hand applied tape wrap shall not be allowed under any conditions . 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. 09 90 00 – Painting B. 40 05 24.23 – Steel Pipe for Water Service 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. This specification section recognizes standards as minimum industry standards and are referenced for purpose of conformance, except where modified in this section. The requirements of this specification section have been written to a higher design standard with the intent of achieving a long -term coating performance. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: American Water Works Association (AWWA) AWWA C205 Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe-4-Inch and Larger- Shop Applied AWWA C209 Cold Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines AWWA C210 Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines AWWA C214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines AWWA C215 Extruded Polyolefin Coatings for Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines AWWA C216 Heat-shrinkable Cross-linked Polyolefin Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines AWWA C217 Cold-Applied Petrolatum Tape and Petroleum Wax Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines AWWA C222 Polyurethane Coatings for Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipe and Fittings Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-2 National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) NACE RP 0274 High Voltage Electrical Inspection of Pipeline Coatings Prior to Installation Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) SSPC-SP-1 Solvent Cleaning Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-2 Hand Tool Cleaning Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-3 Power Tool Cleaning Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-5 White Metal Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-6 Commercial Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation SSPC-SP-10 Near White Metal Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) SSPC-SP-11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures, and the following supplemental requirements defined herein as applicable. B. Action Submittals 1. Shop Drawings: Catalog cuts and other information for all products proposed. Provide copy of approved coating system submittals to the coating applicator. Provide copies of coating manufacturer application procedures and repair procedures. Provide copies of the heat shrink sleeve manufacturer’s application procedures. C. Informational Submittals 1. Quality Control Submittals: Furnish the following: a. Applicator's Experience with list of references substantiating compliance. b. Coating manufacturer's certification stating the applicator meets or exceeds their coating application requirements and recommendations. c. Coating manufacturer shall provide a copy of the manufacturer’s coating application quality assurance manual. d. If the manufacturer of field-applied coating differs from that of the shop applied primer, provide written confirmation from both manufacturers that the two coating materials are compatible. e. Provide certification from the coating manufacturer that the coatings are being applied in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s specifications at the start of coating and/or lining operations . Additionally, submit reports from monthly follow-up site visits from coating manufacturer that the coatings are Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-3 being applied in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s specifications based upon the monthly site visits. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Product Requirements and Options. B. The Contractor and coating applicator shall warrant to the Owner and guarantee the Work under this Section against defective workmanship and materials for a period of 2 years commencing on the date of final acceptance of the Work . C. This warranty shall be in addition to the prime CONTRACTOR’s warranty that covers repair of all defective work, including linings and coatings. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coating Applicator's Experience and Certification: 1. Coating Application Company and coating application supervisor (Certified Applicator) shall have a minimum of 5 years’ experience applying the specified coating system. 2. Coating application personnel, who have direct coating application responsibility, shall have a minimum of 2 years practical experience in application of the indicated coating system. 3. Coating applicator shall be certified by the coating manufacturer as an approved applicator. B. Coating and/or lining manufacturer’s technical representative shall be present for a minimum of 3 days technical assistance and instruction at the start of coating and/or lining operations within the shop. During this visit, the technical representative shall observe surface preparation and coating application and conduct tests of the coating to insure conformance with application instructions, recommended methods, and conditions. C. Coating and/or lining manufacturer’s technical representative shall be onsite for 3 working days, minimum, at the start of each construction season to inspect coating application and procedures in the field. During this visit, the technical representative shall observe surface preparation and coating application and conduct tests of the coating to insure conformance with application instructions, recommended methods, and conditions. D. Coating and/or lining manufacturer shall include 8 hours per month of field or shop coating technical support when requested by the Engineer. E. Technical representative shall provide a written report to the Engineer for each visit. Report shall include copies of test data collected, description of observations, and all recommended corrective actions. Report shall be submitted within 5 working days after the visit. When deemed necessary by the Engineer, work will not be permitted to proceed until the recommended corrective actions have been implemented. After all corrective recommendations have been completed; the manufacturer representative Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-4 shall return and certify that the application complies with the manufacturer’s coating application recommendations. F. Additional visits by the manufacturer’s representative shall be made at sufficient intervals during surface preparation and coating or lining as may be required for product application quality assurance, and to determine compliance with manufacturer’s instructions, and as may be necessary to resolve problems attributable to, or associated with, manufacturer’s products furnished for this project. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. See Section 01 11 80, Environmental Conditions. 1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. The Contractor shall give the Owner’s representative a minimum of 30 days’ advance notice of the start of any work to allow scheduling for shop or field observation. Provide Owner’s representative a minimum 5 days’ notice for actual start of surface preparation and coating application work. B. Provisions shall be made to allow Owner’s representative full access to facilities and appropriate documentation regarding coating application. C. Observation by the Owner’s representative or the waiver of observation of any particular portion of the Work shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. Materials shall be subject to testing for conformance with this Section as the Owner’s representative may determine, prior to or during incorporation into the Work. E. Perform such work only in the presence of the Owner’s representative, unless the Owner’s representative grants prior approval to perform such work in their absence. 1.10 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Pipe shall be handled in such a manner as to protect the pipe and coating from damage. B. Coated pipe shall not be shipped or installed until coating has developed full adhesion and cure. C. During coating application, storage, loading, transportation, unloading, laying and installation, every precaution shall be taken to protect and prevent damage to pipe, lining, and coating. Forklift equipment shall have all bearing surfaces padded with suitable padding material. Lift pipe with web slings a minimum of 12-inch wide and of a type that will not damage the coating. Metal chains, cable, tongs, forklifts or other equipment likely to damage the coating will not be permitted. Dragging or skidding of pipe on grade or in the trench will not be pe rmitted. D. Provide transportation vehicles with padded bolsters between each layer of pipe and heavy padding under load ties. Bolsters shall be curved to fit the outside of the pipe and 12 inches wide, minimum. All pipe contact locations shall be heavily padded with carpet Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-5 and strips of the outer tape wrap material (adhesive side against the carpet) during shipment to the Site and from the storage yard to the point of installation. E. Pipe shall not be stored on rocks, gravel, or other hard materials that might damage the coating. Provide padded 12-inch-wide skids and chucks, sand bags, select loamy or sand berms, or suspended from cutback ends, where possible, to minimize coating damage. Pipe shall not be laid on asphalt without suitable padding at all contact points. F. Pipe shall be inspected by the Contractor at the Site for damage. Any damage to the pipe, lining, or coating shall be repaired as directed if, in the opinion of the Engineer, a satisfactory repair can be made; otherwise, the damaged section shall be replaced at the sole expense of the Seller. G. No metal tools or heavy objects shall be permitted to come into contact unnecessarily with the finished coating. Workmen shall not be permitted to walk on the coating except when absolutely necessary and approved by the Engineer. When permitted, shoes with rubber or composition soles and heels or other suitable footwear that will not damage coating shall be used. H. Long-term Exposure: Pipe shall either be provided with UV inhibitor for storage longer than one year or above grade exposure or covered to prevent UV degradation of outer wrap. Amount of UV stabilizers required will depend on the Project location, laying schedule, anticipated length of exposure, and type of outer wrap. Manufacturer shall be consulted for recommended UV inhibitors requirements or pipe shall be stored under a protective cover. Protective covering can be colored plastic sheeting, canvas, or ot her UV blocking material. Clear plastic sheets are not acceptable. Areas of coating that display UV degradation shall be removed and repaired at sole cost of the Seller. I. End Caps: Pipe ends of mortar lined pipe and fittings shall be tightly closed with a plastic wrap to aid in curing and to minimize drying out of and contamination of the lining. Plastic end cap shall consist of a minimum of one 10-mil sheet of polyethylene or other suitable material. End caps shall be substantial enough to resist shipment, handling, and storage loads and firmly attached in place. The plastic end cap shall remain intact and in place until pipe installation. Damaged or missing plastic end caps shall be repaired or replaced. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Exterior and interior pipe and fitting surfaces shall be prepared and coated in accordance with referenced standards, written directions of the coating or lining manufacturers, and the Specifications, whichever is more stringent. B. Coatings and linings will be stored, handled, and applied per manufacturer’s written directions. C. Pipeline coating or lining shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Product substitutions during the Project will not be permitted. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-6 2.02 CONTRACTOR-FURNISHED TEST EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall provide the following coating test equipment for field testing of pipe for holidays or approved equal test equipment: 1. Holiday Test Equipment: a. Elcometer Model D236, 0 to 30 kV high voltage tester. b. External Pipe rolling spring probe, sized for the Project pipe diameter. c. Right Angle Wire Brush Probe, 20 inches or larger. d. Telescopic probed extension handle, 2- to 4-f oot length range. B. Equipment is to be turned over to the Owner upon completion of the Work. Equipment shall be in full working condition with all manuals, cases, and accessories supplied with equipment or required to be provided. 2.03 EXTERIOR SHOP-APPLIED COATINGS A. General: 1. Steel shall be coated in accordance with AWWA C214 with cement mortar overcoat per C205, C215, or C222, or polyurethane coated, except as modified herein. 2. Steel pipe specified to receive a cement mortar overcoat shall be shop -coated with the required coating system and a 3/4-inch thick, minimum, cement mortar overcoat as specified herein. 3. Pipe that is atmospherically exposed shall be shop primed as specified herein and Section 09 90 00 Painting. 4. Buried dielectrically coated pipe and fittings passing through a concrete structure wall or floor shall be coated for a minimum of two inches beyond the interior wall or floor surface. B. Polyethylene Tape Wrap 1. Pipe shall be coated with an 80 mil (nominal), tape-coating systems applied in accordance with AWWA C214, except as modified herein. a. Primer: Polyken 1019, 1027, 1029, or as recommended by the coating manufacturer. b. Weld Stripe Tape: Polyken 931 (no backing), 25 mils nominal, 4 -inches wide minimum. c. Inner Wrap: Polyken 989 YGIII, 20 mils nominal, corrosion protection layer. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-7 d. Middle Wrap: Polyken 955 YGIII, 30-mils nominal, mechanical protection layer. e. Outer Wrap: Polyken 956 YGIII, 30 mils nominal, mechanical protection layer. f. Surface Preparation: (1) Steel Pipe: SSPC-SP5, White Metal blast, 2.5 mils blast profile, minimum. 2. Tape Coating: a. Tape layers shall have adhesive for the full width of the tape. Adhesive shall have the ability to stick to itself and to the preceding tape layer or pipe. b. Each layer shall be a different color or shade with the outer layer white. c. Outer wrap shall have sufficient ultraviolet (UV) inhibitors to resist above grade exposure for a minimum of 12 months or the proposed storage and construction time, whichever is greater. d. Tape width shall be 12-inches maximum. Wider tape will be conditionally allowed if the coating applicator can demonstrate that proper tensioning can be maintained and mechanical wrinkling prevented throughout the coating application. If, at any time during the pipe fabrication, tape quality becomes inconsistent with a wider tape, the Engineer can require the remainder of the pipe to be coated using the maximum specified tape width. C. Plural Component Polyurethane: 1. General: Plural component, polyurethane coating system (referred to as a polyurethane system) shall be applied in accordance with AWWA C222, and as modified herein. 2. Shop Surface Preparation: a. Steel pipe: SSPC-SP5, White Metal blast, 3.5-mil angular profile, minimum, or as required by the manufacturer, whichever is greater using standardized testing procedures such as Press -O-Film and micrometer. 3. Shop Applied Coating Requirements: a. Self-priming, plural component, 100 percent solids, non-extended polyurethane, suitable for burial or immersion. Extended polyurethane coatings will not be acceptable. Polyurethane shall be manufactured within 30 days of shipping to application facilities, and polyurethane shall not be taken from previous inventory. b. One coat, 35 mils total dry film thickness, minimum, or as required to meet the holiday and coating defects limits specified in this Section. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-8 c. Shall be one of the following products, subject to review and acceptance of submitted product performance reports: (1) Protec II, Futura Coatings, Hazelwood, Missouri. (2) Chemthane 2265, Chemline, Inc., St. Louis, Missouri. (3) Polyclad 777, Carboline, St. Louis, Missouri. (4) Approved Equal. D. Exterior Coating for Exposed Steel Pipe: 1. All atmospherically exposed or vault piping and appurtenances shall be shop primed with the coating system as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING. 2. Manufacturer of shop-applied primer shall be coordinated with field application to provide a completed system by a single manufacturer. Engineer approval of a coating system with two or more coating manufacturers will require written approval from all coating manufacturers as to compatibility and acceptance under warranty. E. Cement Mortar Coating or Overcoat 1. Apply cement mortar coating system on steel pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA C205, except as modified herein. 2. Cement mortar overcoat shall be applied over a dielectric coating system on steel pipe in accordance with AWWA C205, except as modified herein. 3. Holdback: a. Mortar overcoat shall be held back of dielectric coating a minimum of 6 inches for overlap of field applied joint coating onto dielectric coating system. 4. Shop Applied Coating System: a. Cement: Conform to ASTM C150, Type II. b. Aggregate shall be silica sand or other aggregate that is not subject to leaching. Conform to ASTM C33. c. Cement mortar mixture shall consist of 1 part cement to not more than 3 parts aggregate. d. Water for cement mortar: Clean and free from organic matter, strong alkalis, vegetable matter, and other impurities. Use no more than 4-1/2 gallons of water per sack of cement. 5. Cement mortar coating: Nominal 1-inch-thick coating with permitted tolerance of ±1/4-inch. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-9 2.04 INTERIOR SHOP -APPLIED LININGS A. Cement Mortar Lining shall be in accordance with Section 40 05 24.23, Steel Pipe for Water Service B. Liquid Applied Epoxy Coatings : 1. Provide liquid epoxy primer and lining in all cement mortar lined metallic pipe at insulating joints for a minimum of two pipe diameters on each side of the insulated joint. 2. Epoxy coatings shall be NSF approved coatings suitable for potable water contact in accordance with ANSI/NSF Standards 60 and 61. 3. Epoxy shall be applied over the cement mortar lining where specified for the pipeline lining material. 4. Prepare the cement mortar lining by abrasive blasting to remove all laitance and provide a surface profile. 5. Cement mortar shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of 15 days prior to surface preparation and coating application or 7 days with steam curing. 6. Mortar lining shall be dry when epoxy lining is applied. 2.05 SPECIALS, FITTINGS, AND CONNECTIONS A. Coating and lining application for special sections, connections, and fittings for steel or ductile iron pipe shall conform to coating system and application requirements as specified in this Section. B. Specials, fittings, and connections shall be defined as any pipe section with turnouts for blowoffs, interconnects, any valve, or other appurtenances; tees; crosses; wyes; laterals; manholes; mitered angles or elbows; and pipes which require special fabric ation that prevents mechanical production application of the specified coating system from end to end of pipe joint. C. In addition to the items listed as specials, the following items shall also be considered as specials: 1. Pipe joints with pass through holes. D. Internal mortar lining shall be applied to all specials fittings, and pipes with outlets. E. Hand-applied tape coatings will not be permitted on any specials, fittings, connections, and elbow fittings. F. Specials, fittings, and connections shall be externally coated with either tape wrap and cement mortar armor coat or polyurethane coating system applied over the entire fitting. Fabrication cutting and welding is not allowed on coated surfaces. No hybrid coating system, such as tape and polyurethane combination, will be allowed . Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-10 2.06 EXTERIOR FIELD JOINT COATING A. Pipe joints shall be field coated after pipe assembly in accordance with AWWA C205, C216, or C217, whichever is applicable and as specified herein. B. Field joint coating shall be compatible with the shop -applied coating system and provided by the same manufacturer or a manufacturer approved by the pipe coating manufacturer. C. All joints on pipe coated with polyurethane coating system and tape wrapped pipe shall be coated with a heat shrink coating material. D. Buried flexible couplings shall be coated with wax tape or heat shrink coating system. E. Field joint coating materials shall be as follows or an approved equal. 1. Heat Shrink Sleeves: a. Filler Material: (1) Provide filler material for all push-on, flange, and coupling type joints and at all changes in outside diameter are greater than 1/8 inch , unless manufacturer’s requirement is more stringent than this specification. (2) Filler material shall adhere to the pipe and heat shrink sleeve. Size and type shall be as recommended by the sleeve manufacturer for type of pipe and joint. (3) Filler mastic for joints subject to weld after backfill shall exceed 500 F melt point temperature. (4) Filler material shall be applied in a manner of sufficient thickness, that no tenting or voids remain under the heat shrink sleeve. (5) Filler material shall be Canusa Aqua Seal SG79 or Covalence 939 Filler. b. Joint Coating: (1) Heat shrink, cross-linked polyolefin wrap or sleeve with a mastic sealant, 85-mils minimum nominal thickness, suitable for pipeline operating temperature, as recommended by the manufacturer , and shall meet the requirements of AWWA C216. (2) Provide standard recovery sleeve for welded or bell and spigot steel pipe joints. High recovery sleeves shall be provided for flange j oints and coupling style joints. (3) Width of heat shrink sleeves shall be sufficient to overlap existing coating 2 -inches minimum. Overlap on tape coated steel pipe shall be Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-11 based on a sequential 2-inch wide step from outer wrap to middle wrap to inner wrap. (4) Contractor shall consider sleeve shrinkage during installation and joint profile in determining sleeve width required. Overlapping of two or more heat shrink sleeves to achieve the necessary width on pipe joints will not be permitted without Engineer approval. 2. Holdback Primer: As specified in this Section. a. Heat Shrink Sleeve: The outer sleeve shall be Canusa Aqua Shield AQW- HS or Covalence Water Wrap-WAB. For “Weld After Backfill”, a 6” underlay sleeve shall be centered over the weld area prior to the installation of the outer sleeve. The underlay sleeve shall be Aqua Shield AQW -WAB or equivalent Covalence Water Wrap-WAB. 3. Wax Tape Coating: a. Apply coating in accordance with AWWA C217, except as modified herein. b. Wax tape coatings shall be field applied on all buried flexible joints, thrust restraint rods and brackets, and on joints, fittings, or irregular shapes or complex configurations that are not suited for the use of heat shrink coating systems and are not ce ment overcoated. c. Do not use wax tape coating systems on vault piping, atmospherically exposed piping and appurtenances, or where subject to UV exposure. d. Provide filler material to fill and smooth all irregular surfaces, such that no tenting or voids remain under the applied wax tape. e. Use sand backfill or flowable fill to protect wax coating from damage. f. Coating System: (1) Surface Preparation: SP11 Power Tool to Bare Metal. (2) Primer: Petroleum or petrolatum wax. (3) Filler Material: Filled Petroleum or petrolatum wax sealer/filler with closed cell plastic filler. (4) Inner Tape: Petroleum or petrolatum wax impregnated fabric, 6 -inch width maximum, 40 mils thick. (5) Outer Wrap: PVC or tape suitable for application to inner tape. g. Wax tape coating system shall be as manufactured by: (1) Denso North American. (2) Trenton. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-12 (3) Approved equal. 4. Cement Mortar Coating or Overcoat: a. Joints of cement mortar coated steel pipe shall be mortar coated as specified herein after application of the specified joint coating materials, where applicable. b. Polyethylene foam-lined fabric with steel strapping of sufficient strength to hold the fresh mortar, resist rodding of the mortar and allow excess water to escape. (1) 100 percent closed-cell (2) Chemically inert, insoluble in water, resistant to acids, alkalis, and solvents. (3) Manufacturer and Product: Dow Chemical Company; Ethafoam 222. c. Fabric Backing: (1) Cut and sewn into strips wide enough to overlap shop -coated areas by 4 inches on either side. (2) Strips shall have slots for steel strapping on outer edges. 2.07 INTERIOR FIELD JOINT COATING A. Mortar Lining: 1. After the backfill has been completed to final grade, the interior joint recess shall be filled with grout. The grout shall be tightly packed into the joint recess and troweled flush with the interior surface. Excess shall be removed. 2. At no point shall there be an indentation or projection of the mortar exceeding 1/1 6 inch. 3. With pipe smaller than 24 inches in diameter, before the spigot is inserted into the bell, the bell shall be daubed with grout. The joint shall be completed and excess mortar on the inside of the joint shall be swabbed out. 2.08 REPAIR OF COATINGS AND LININGS A. General: 1. Coating or lining repair materials shall be compatible with the shop -applied coating or lining system and shall be approved by the coating or lining manufacturer. 2. Coating repair materials shall be as required for the coating system and repair classification as defined in this Section. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-13 3. All major repairs on pipe coated with polyurethane coating system shall be repaired using heat shrink sleeves as specified for field joint coating in accordance with C216, except as modified herein. 4. Minor coating repairs for polyurethane coated or exposed pipe shall be as specified herein. B. Coating Repair Materials: 1. Heat Shrink Sleeves (major repair): a. Filler Mastic: Provide mastic filler to fill tape void as required. b. Full Wrap Coating: Cross-linked polyolefin wrap with a mastic sealant, 85 -mil thickness nominal, suitable for pipeline operating temperature, sleeve material recovery as recommended by the manufacturer. Sleeve length shall provide a nominal of 3 inches overlap onto intact pipe coating. c. Manufacturer’s: Canusa Aqua Shield AQW-HS or Covalence WaterWrap – WAB. 2. Heat-Applied Patches (minor repair): a. Heat applied adhesive, polyolefin backed, mastic coated tape, 12-inch maximum size. b. CRP patch as manufactured by Canusa, PERP patch as manufactured by Covalence or equal. C. Polyurethane Coating: 1. Polyurethane coating system repair shall be in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s recommended procedures. 2. Coating material for minor repairs shall be single use kits or other mix ratio- controlled packages of slow set polyurethane coating material similar to the existing coatin g. 3. Major repairs in the shop will be completed using the coating material specified for the coating or the lining. Coating shall be reapplied using plural component spray equipment by a manufacturer certified coating applicator. 4. Major repairs in the field shall be completed using heat shrink sleeves as specified in this section. 5. Pinhole holidays or adhesion test coating repairs shall be with minor repair coating material specified or Protal 7125 Fast Cure Epoxy. D. Exposed Pipe Coating System: Touch-up repair all damage to the primer and/or intermediate coats with the specified coating system prior to final coating of the pipeline in accordance with Section 09 90 00 Painting. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-14 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 ENVIRONMENTAL LIMITATIONS A. General: 1. Products shall comply with federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds and worker exposure. 2. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local, air pollution and environmental control regulations for surface preparation, blast cleaning, disposition of spent aggregate and debris, and coating application. 3. Do not perform abrasive blast cleaning whenever the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, whenever surface temperature is less than 5 ⁰F above the dew point of the ambient air. 4. Do not apply coatings when: a. Surface and ambient temperatures exceed the maximum or minimum temperatures recommended by the coating manufacturer or the Specifications, b. In dust or smoke-laden atmosphere, blowing dust or debris, damp or humid weather, or under conditions that could cause icing on the metal surface. c. For epoxy coatings or linings when it is expected that surface temperatures would drop below 5⁰F above dew point within 4 hours after application of coating. d. Whenever relative humidity exceeds 85 percent for polyurethane coating application. 5. Where weather conditions or Project requirements dictate, C ontractor shall provide and operate heaters and/or dehumidification equipment to allow pipe surfaces to be abrasive blasted and coated as specified and in accordance with the manufacturers coating application recommendations. 6. Work activities can be restricted by the E ngineer until adequate temperature and humidity controls are in place and functioning within the environmental limits specified. 7. Coating applicator shall provide a monitoring system approved by the coating manufacturer that constantly records pipe and coating conditions during coating application. Recorded monitoring parameters shall include pipe temperature, line speed, surface preparation, holiday test and other parameters applicable to the type of coating. B. Temperature Control: 1. In cold weather or if moisture collects on the pipe, preheat pipe to a temperature between 45⁰F and 90⁰F, or 5⁰F above dew point, whichever is greater. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-15 2. When temperatures are above or below the coating manufacturer’s recommended application temperatures, the C ontractor will provide temperature controls as necessary to permit Work to precede within the manufacturer’s temperature limitations. 3. Provide tenting, insulating blankets, baffles, or bulkheads as required to zone and control h eating or cooling effectiveness. 4. Heating shall be with indirect fired heaters that do not increase humidity levels within the work area. Heaters shall be sized for the area to be heated. C. Dehumidification (if required to meet specified environmental parameters for surface preparation and coating application): 1. Dehumidification shall be operated in a manner that prevents all condensation or icing throughout surface preparation, coating application, and coating cure. 2. Re-blasting of flash rusted metal surfaces or removal of damaged coatings, as a result of equipment malfunction, shutdown, or other events that result in the loss of environmental control, will be at the sole expense of the Contractor. Cleaned metal surfaces subject to flash rusting shall be cleaned to the same cleanliness as prior to the flash rust formation and shall be approved by the Engineer. 3. Contractor shall monitor ambient temperature, humidity, dew point temperature, and pipe surface temperature (work area only) both outdoors and within the work area at the start, midpoint, and end of each work shift, minimum, but not greater than 5 hours between measurements. 4. Daily environmental condition monitoring and maintenance of the equipment shall be documented in writing and posted near the equipment for review by the Engineer. 5. If the required environmental conditions cannot be maintained throughout the coating process, the Contractor will be required to provide the following: a. Contractor shall provide and operate desiccant dehumidification equipment to maintain environmental conditions for 24 hours a day during abrasive blasting and coating application and cure. Liquid, granular, or loose lithium chloride drying systems will not be acceptable. b. Contractor shall provide dehumidification equipment sized to maintain dew point temperature 5⁰F or more below surface temperature of metal surfaces to be cleaned and coated. System shall provide ventilation within the environmentally controlled areas to meet the following requirements: (1) Two air exchanges per hour, mini mum. (2) Maintenance of personnel exposure limits (PEL) at 50 percent of OSHA PEL limits for all chemicals used in the performance of the Work. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-16 (3) Maintenance of lower explosive limits (LEL) to less than 50 percent of the most volatile solvent used in the performance of the Work. c. Dehumidification equipment shall also provide ventilation at a minimum of 0.75 air exchanges per hour within all non -accessible work areas for worker protection or as required for maintaining PEL and LEL explosive limits as defined herein, whichever is more stringent. d. Dehumidification equipment type, size, air flow, and power requirements shall be designed by a qualified company knowledgeable in dehumidification equipment, and its operation based on Project requirements and anticipated seasonal weather conditions for the Project schedule. Design to include evaluation of existing conditions, humidity, and temperature, proper air exchange requirements, ventilation requirements, ducting requirements for adequate air flow, and any other issues necessary to achieve the specif ied performance and environmental conditions throughout the duration of the Project. e. Contractor to submit written recommendations from dehumidification Subcontractor for enclosure work area size, bulkhead venting, duct work for each bulkhead section, any secondary ventilation requirements for coating cure, dust collection equipment CFM requirements, and drying requirements for blast hose compressed air necessary to maintain environmental control as specified herein. f. At a minimum, work area shall be separated into surface preparation work zones, coating application zones, and coating cure zones. g. Dehumidification Subcontractor shall either operate the equipment or provide training to Contractor on the proper operation and setup of dehumidification equipment. Dehumidification Subcontractor shall provide a technical representative on-Site for a minimum of two 8 hour days to insure proper operation of the equipment, achievement of desired environmental control, and to insure Contractor can properly setup, operate, monitor, and maintain the equipment. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: 1. Inspect and provide substrate surfaces prepared in accordance with the Specifications and the printed directions and recommendations of coating manufacturer whose product is to be applied. 2. Visible oil, grease, dirt, and contamination shall be removed in accordance with SSPC-SP1, solvent cleaning. 3. Surface imperfections such as metal slivers, burrs, weld splatter, gouges, or delamination in the metal shall be removed by filing or grinding prior to abrasive surface preparation. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-17 4. Protect prepared pipe from humidity, moisture, and rain. All flash rust, imperfections, or contamination on cleaned pipe surface shall be removed by blasting. 5. Priming and coating of pipe shall be completed the same day as surface preparation. B. Weld Surface Preparation 1. Requirements: a. Spray applied coating systems do not require weld grinding. b. Welds on tape wrap coated pipe shall be either ground flush or a weld stripe tape applied over the weld, at the pipe fabricator’s option, unless otherwise specified. 2. Weld Grinding : a. Under the weld grinding option, welds higher than 1/32 inch above pipe surface shall be ground to a tolerance of +1/32 inch to 0-inch above the pipe surface as measured on the lowest side of the weld. 3. Weld Stripe Tape: a. Weld stripe tape will be applied to primed metal. b. Tape will either have no polyethylene backing or will be double sided adhesive tape to permit adhesion of the inner corrosion protection layer to the weld stripe tape. c. Apply tape with a pressure roller to fully conform the tape to the weld surface. d. Adhesion of the weld stripe tape shall be as specified for the coating system. C. Steel Surface Preparation: 1. Surface preparation of steel pipe shall be in accordance with SSPC surface preparation standards utilizing the degree of cleanliness specified for the coating system to be applied or as specified herein, whichever is more stringent. 2. Grit and/or shot abrasive mixture and gradation shall be as required to achieve the degree of cleanliness and coating adhesion specified. 3. Pipe cleaned by abrasive blasting with recyclable steel grit and/or shot or other abrasive shall be cleaned of debris and spent abrasive in an air wash separator. 4. Surface shall have a sharp angular surface profile of the minimum depth specified. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-18 5. After abrasive blasting surfaces and before coating application, the metal surface shall be cleaned of residual dust to a minimum of Grade 2 per ISO Standard 8502 - 3, Test for the Assessment of Surface Cleanliness. 6. Work shall be performed in a manner that does not permit the cleaned metal surface to rust back or flash rust. 7. Rust back or flash rust shall be fully removed with the steel surface cleanliness equal to the metal surface cleanliness prior to rust back or flash rusting. Determination of the equivalent surface cleanliness shall be at the Engineer’s discretion. 3.03 SHOP-APPLIED COATING SYSTEMS A. Tape Wrap Coating 1. Applicator shall provide a monitoring system approved by the tape manufacturer that constantly records pipe and tape conditions during coating application. Recorded monitoring parameters shall include, but not be limited to, pipe temperature; line speed, primer and tape roll body temperature, and tape tension. 2. Pipe surface temperature shall be between 45 and 120 degrees and 5 degrees above dew point, whichever is greater. 3. Tape roll temperature shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, but shall not be less than 55 degrees for the inner wrap and 65 degrees for the outer wraps. 4. Apply a uniform coat of primer as recommended by the manufacturer without skips, runs, or sags. Allow to properly dry prior to applying the tape as required by the tape manufacturer and as necessary to achieve maximum tape adhesion. Rug type application will not be allowed. 5. If welds are not ground flush, apply a weld stripe tape to longitudinal or spiral pipe welds prior to application of the inner wrap. 6. Tape layers shall be applied continuously with the use of hydro -tension tape stands. Tension shall be maintained between the manufacturer’s minimum and maximum tension recommendations or as required to achieve approximately 2.0 percent reduction in tape width. 7. Inner tape wrap shall adhere tightly to the pipe surface. Coating shall be 100 percent adhering to the metal surface and shall not have any visible damage, wrinkles, voids, disbondment, contamination, or holidays. 8. Tape coating adhesion testing shall be performed on the pipe as specified in this section. 9. Holiday testing shall be conducted on the inner layer tape prior to proceeding with subsequent tape layers. All holidays detected shall be primed and patched using coating repair procedures specified herein. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-19 10. Perform coating and lining repairs as specified in this section. B. Polyurethane Coating or Lining: 1. Applicator Qualifications: a. Equipment will be certified by the coating manufacturer to meet the requirements for material mixing, temperature control, application rate, and ratio control for multi -part coatings. b. Equipment not meeting the written requirements of the coating manufacturer shall be rejected for coating application until repairs or replacement of the equipment is made to the satisfaction of the Engineer. c. Personnel responsible for the application of the coating system shall have certification of attendance at the coating manufacturer’s training class within the last 3 years. The certified applicator shall be present during all coating application work and shall have responsibility for controlling all aspects of the coating application. 2. Pipe surface temperature shall be between 50⁰F and 100 ⁰F or 5⁰F above dew point, whichever is greater. 3. Coating application shall be performed in an environmentally controlled shop area that meets or exceeds the written environmental application requirements of the coating manufacturer. Application in outdoor conditions will not be acceptable without adequate environmental shelter, environmental controls, and/or dehumidification. 4. Coating adhesion and holidays testing shall be tested as specified in this Section. 5. Coating manufacturer shall provide the Engineer a copy of the manufacturer’s coating application quality assurance manual prior to beginning coating application. Strict conformance to the requirements of the manual will be required. Deviation from the requirements of the manual will be grounds for the Engineer to reject the applied coating. 6. Unacceptable Coating Application: a. Coating applied under improper environmental conditions will be rejected. b. Pipes that exceed the allowable quantity of coating defects, regardless of size or cause, shall be rejected. c. Coating which fails the adhesion or holiday testing as specified in this Section shall be rejected. d. Pipe coating that is subject to off ratio application, blistering, or is not applied in conformance with the coating manufacturer’s written instructions or recommendations shall be rejected. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-20 7. Rejected coating shall be removed from the full length of the pipe to bare metal and reapplied using proper application methods in accordance with the quality assurance manual and the requi rements of the Specifications. 8. Perform coating and lining repairs as specified in this Section. C. Cement Mortar and Overcoat Coatings 1. Steel pipe shall have a cement mortar coating applied in accordance with AWWA C205, except as modified herein. 2. Dielectrically coated steel pipe, when specifically required, shall have a cement mortar overcoat applied over the dielectric pipe coating in accordance with AWWA C205, except as modified herein. 3. Cement Mortar Coating: a. Reinforcement: (1) For pipe and specials smaller than 48 inches in diameter, reinforce coating with spirally-wound No. 12 gage steel wire spaced at 1 inch centers or with No. 14 gage steel wire at 1/2 inch centers positioned approximately in center of mortar coating. (2) For pipe and specials 48 inches in diameter and larger, reinforce coating with 2 layers of spirally-wound No. 12 gage wire spaced at 1 inch centers or with No. 14 gage steel wire spaced at 1/2 inch centers positioned at the third points of mortar coating. (3) Lap ends of reinforcement strips 4 inches and tie or loop free ends to assure continuity of reinforcement. (4) All steel wire reinforcement placed in the mortar coating shall be electrically isolated from the pipe. Electrical isolation will be tested using high voltage spark test by the manufacturer prior to shipment to the project site. Provide certification that electrical isolation of reinforcement wire from steel pipe. b. Special Fittings: (1) Special fittings shall be polyurethane coated as specified. c. Coating Defects: (1) Coating defects shall be repaired as specified in AWWA C205, except as specified in this section. 4. Cement Mortar Overcoat: a. Cement mortar overcoat dielectrically coated steel pipe as specified in AWWA C205, except mortar coating shall be applied over exterior pipe coating. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-21 b. Mortar coating shall be held back 3 inches, minimum, behind dielectric coating system cut back at joints. Holdback shall be increased with extruded polyethylene coating as required to maintain the minimum overlap specified for joint coating application, where specifically required to be cement mortar over coated. c. Coating Defects: (1) Cracking in the mortar “armor” coat less than 1/8 -inch in width will be acceptable. (2) Disbondment of the cement coating over a dielectric coating system should be anticipated and will not be grounds for repair or rejection of the pipe. (3) Losses of cement mortar coating due to impact, movement, or shipping damage shall be repaired in accordance with C205 3.04 EXTERIOR COATING HOLDBACK A. Dielectric coating holdbacks shall be straight and cut through the full thickness of the coating. B. Dielectric coating cutbacks shall be completed in a manner that permits field coating of joints in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and as specified herein. C. Dielectric coating holdbacks shall be as required for pipe joints as listed below. Pipe manufacturer may adjust holdback limits as required for special joint assemblies, and with consideration for the joint coating provided and joint welding requirements : Holdbacks Tape Wrap Coating Push-on joint, spigot 4 inches, minimum Push-on, bell Flush with bell end Welded, spigot 3 inches, minimum Welded, Bell 4 inches, minimum Polyurethane Push-on joint, spigot 1 inch before centerline gasket Push-on, bell Flush with bell end Welded, spigot 3 inches, minimum Welded, Bell 4 inches, minimum D. Dielectric Coating Holdback Corrosion Protection: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-22 1. Holding primer for corrosion protection of cutbacks or holdbacks shall be compatible with the specified joint coating system and weld after backfill requirements, when applicable. 2. Approved holdback primers are: a. Tnemec Omnithane: Suitable for all joints, except joints subject to weld after backfill. b. Tnemec 90E-92 Ethyl Silicate Inorganic Zinc Primer: Suitable for all joints, including weld after backfill joints. c. ICI Devoe Cathacoat 304V Ethyl Silicate Inorganic Zinc Primer: Suitable for all joints including weld after backfill joints. d. Polyken or Other Tape Primers: Not allowed . 3. Holdback coating shall prevent corrosion of prepared pipe ends for duration of storage and construction, and shall be recommended for buried exposures. 4. Primer shall not result in running or melting of the coating or cause toxic fumes when heated during weld after backfill joints. 5. Application and thickness of holding primer shall be in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s recommendations, but shall not impair the clearances required for proper joint installation. 6. Primer application on spigot end of field welded pipe shall be held back 1 to 2 inches from the end of the spigot or as necessary to prevent toxic fumes during field welding. 7. Any corrosion within the holdback areas shall be abrasively blasted to near white metal in accordance with SP10 or power tool cleaned to bare metal in accordance with SP11 prior to applying joint coating. 3.05 PIPE LINING APPLICATION A. As specified in Section 40 05 24.23, Steel Pipe for Water Service or as specified below: B. Shop-applied Cement Mortar Lining: 1. Centrifugally line straight sections of pipe. Lining of special pieces or fittings shall be by mechanical, pneumatic, or hand placement. Provide cement mortar lining of uniform thickness. Finish to a smooth dense surface. 2. Steel plate fittings and specials larger than 16 inches in diameter shall have lining reinforced with 2 -inch-by-4 -inch No. 13 gage welded steel wire mesh. 3. Brace and support pipe during lining application to minimize pipe distortion or vibration. Bracing and supports shall not damage the pipe, coating, or lining. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-23 4. Tightly close ends of pipe and fittings with plastic sheet caps. Plastic end caps shall be of sufficient thickness and strength to resist shipping, handling, and storage stresses. 5. Damage to the cement mortar lining, including spalling, loose, cracking, or blistering, caused by improper curing, shipping, handling, or installation shall be repaired in accordance with AWWA specifications and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 6. Other requirements of mortar lining materials and processes: As specified in AWWA C205. C. Liquid Epoxy Lining: 1. Clean and coat the interior of cement mortar lined pipe at insulating joints or where specified with two coats of epoxy coating. 2. Epoxy coating applied at insulating joints shall be applied to both sides of the insulating joint for a minimum of one pipe diameter. If only one side of the joint can be coated the coating shall be applied for a minimum of two pipe diameters. 3. Mortar lining shall be allowed to cure 15 days or steam cured not less than 7 days prior to surface preparation of the mortar and epoxy coating application. Hand applied mortar lining shall be allowed to cure a minimum of 15 days or as required to meet the coating manufacturer’s requirements for application on cement or concrete, whichever is greater. 4. Prepared mortar lining by abrasive blasting to remove all laitance and create a suitable anchor profile. 5. Epoxy coating shall be applied in two coats minimum, at a total coating thickness of 16 mils dry film thickness. Coating applied over cement mortar lining shall be applied in a manner that will minimize gassing and pinholes in the completed lining. 6. Mortar lining shall be dry during epoxy lining application. 3.06 FIELD COATING JOINTS A. General: B. All joints without a holdback primer shall be prepared as follows: C. Remove all oil and grease contamination from pipe and adjacent coating in accordance with SSPC-SP1, Solvent cleaning. D. Clean pipe surface and adjacent coating of all corrosion and other foreign contaminates in accordance with SSPC-SP11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal or abrasive blast joints in accordance with SSPC -SP10, near white metal blast. Clean the full circumference of the pipe and a minimum of 4 inches onto the existing coating. No profile is required with SP -11 preparation. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-24 E. All joints with a holdback primer shall be prepared by removing all oil and grease in accordance with SSPC-SP1, Solvent Cleaning, followed by spot preparation of visible corrosion or rust in accordance with SSPC -SP11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. F. Remove all loose or damaged pipe coating at joint and either repair the coating as specified herein or increase the length of the joint coating, where reasonable and practical. G. Joint bonds shall be installed before application of joint coating as specified in Section 26 42 00 - Impressed Current Cathodic Protection and Section 26 42 10 - Galvanic Cathodic Protection. Joint bonds shall be low profile bonds and all gaps and crevices around the bonds shall be filled with filler mastic. H. Contractor to electrically test completed joint coating for holidays with high voltage spark tester at Engineer’s direction or if damage to the joint coating occurs. I. Heat Shrink Sleeve Joint Coating: 1. Store, handle, and apply field heat shrink sleeve coatings in accordance with AWWA C216 and the Specifications. 2. Store sleeves in shipping box until use is required. Keep dry and sheltered from exposure to direct sunlight. Store off the ground or concrete floors and maintain at a temperature between 60⁰F and 100 ⁰F as recommended by the sleeve manufacturer. 3. Metal surface shall be free of all dirt, dust, and surface corrosion prior to sleeve application. Surface preparation shall be in accordance with the joint coating manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Where corrosion in the holdback area is visible, surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP10, near white metal blast, or SSPC -SP11, power tool cleaning to bare metal. 5. Preheat pipe uniformly as recommended by the sleeve manufacturer. Monitor pipe temperature using a surface temperature gauge, infrared thermometer, or color changing crayons. Protect preheated pipe from rain, snow, frost, or moisture with tenting or shields and do not permit the joint to cool. 6. Fill all cracks, crevices, gaps, and step -downs greater than 1/8 inch with filler mastic in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for the full circumference of the pipe. 7. Apply heat shrink sleeve when it is at a minimum temperature of 40⁰F and while maintaining the pipe temperature above the preheat temperature specified. Apply sleeve in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and center the sleeve over the joint to provide a minimum 2-inch overlap onto the existing pipe coating. 8. Completed joint sleeve shall be fully bonded to the pipe and existing coating surface without voids. Mastic beading shall be visible along the full circumference of the sleeve. There shall be no wrinkling or excessive burns on the sleeves. Sleeves that do not meet these requirements shall be removed and the joint Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-25 recoated as directed by the Engineer. Minor repairs may be repaired using heat applied patch material specified for minor coating repairs. 9. Allow the sleeve to cool before backfilling. In hot climates, provide shading from direct sunlight. Water quenching will be allowed only when permitted by t he sleeve manufacturer. 10. Heat shrink joint coatings which have become wrinkled or disbonded because of prolonged exposure to UV light or thermal cycling shall be removed and replaced. 11. Double coating of defective or damaged heat shrink coatings will not be permitted. Any double coated heat shrink sleeves shall be immediately rejected and Contractor shall remove the existing coating and recoat the joint. J. Cement Mortar Coating: 1. Cement mortar coating shall be applied to the joints of cement mortar over coated steel pipe in accordance with AWWA C205. 2. Field repair cement mortar coating in accordance with AWWA C205. 3. Joint Diapers: a. Polyethylene Foam: (1) Cut into strips wide enough to match uncoated field joint area. 4. Slit to thickness of 1/4 inch that will expose a hollow or open cell surface on one side. 5. Foam liner shall be attached to fabric backing with open or hollow cells facing towards pipe. 6. Foam strip shall cover full interior circumference of grout band with sufficient length to permit 8-inch overlap of foam at or near top of joint. 7. Splices to provide continuity of material will be permitted. 8. Protect polyethylene foam material from direct sunlight. 3.07 REPAIR OF COATING AND LININGS A. General: 1. All areas where holidays are detected or coating is visually damaged, such as blisters, tears, rips, bubbles, wrinkles, cuts, or other defects shall be repaired. Areas where no holidays are detected but are visually damaged shall also be repaired. 2. Maximum defects allowable shall be as specified herein for the coating system. B. Tape Wrap Coating Repairs: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-26 1. General: a. No more than five repairs per joint of pipe will be permitted with tape wrap coating, excluding adhesion test damage. The coating on any pipe with more than five coating repairs or with more than two areas of coating damage greater than five square feet will be rejected. b. Pipes exceeding the maximum number or size of coating defects shall be stripped, reblasted, and recoated. c. Pipe arriving in the field with defects or repairs exceeding the maximum number or size of coating defects will be returned to the shop for recoating at the CONTRACTOR’s expense. d. The number of layers and total thickness of the tape repair coating shall be the same as the shop -applied coating; unless heat applied coating materials is used. e. Wipe the area to be repaired with solvent for a minimum distance of 4 inches outside the damaged area. 2. Defect Size: a. Minor repairs – Any repair less than 6 inches in the greatest dimension, measured after cutout of damaged tape layers. Damage to the corrosion protection tape layer will be considered minor if repairs are made using heat applied patch materials. b. Major repairs - repairs that exceed 6 -inches in the greatest dimension or where damage to the inner tape layer has occurred and hand applied tape repairs will be used. 3. Minor Repairs: a. Complete minor repairs using a heat applied coating patch material. b. Cut patch material to overlap onto the undamaged coating a minimum of 2 inches on all sides with 1 -inch radius on each corner of the patch. c. Carefully remove damaged layers by cutting the coating with a sharp knife without cutting or damaging the inner wrap. d. Cut middle and outer layers in stepped fashion to expose 1-inch or more of the underlying tape layer for the circumference of the repair. 4. Major Repairs (Over 24-inches Diameter): a. Cigarette wrap coating repairs shall be with heat shrink sleeves as specified for joints. b. Carefully remove damaged layers by cutting the coating with a sharp knife without cutting or damaging the inner wrap. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-27 c. Holiday test the inner wrap and if a holiday is detected cut outer layers back to fully exposed the holiday(s) and retest for holidays. d. Cut middle and outer layers in stepped fashion to expose 1-inch or more of the underlying tape layer for the circumference of the repair. e. Width of sleeve shall be the width of the damaged area plus 4 -inch overlap. Multiple sleeves may be used for larger repairs, but must be overlapped a minimum of 2 inches. 5. Major Repairs (24-inch Diameter or Less) a. Cigarette wrap repairs on pipe less than 24 -inches with heat shrink sleeves as specified for major repairs. b. Carefully remove damaged layers by cutting the coating with a sharp knife without cutting or damaging the inner wrap. Holiday test the inner wrap and if a holiday is detected apply one extra layer of repair tape. c. Clean surfaces by solvent wiping and applying primer over the inner tape layer for a minimum of 6-inches onto the outer wrap in all directions. C. Polyurethane Coating or Lining Repairs: 1. General: a. Complete coating or lining repairs in accordance with the coating manufacturers written instructions and the Specifications, whichever is stricter. b. Defect Size: (1) Minor Repairs: Repairs that are less than 6 inches in the greatest dimension. (2) Major Repairs: Repairs that exceed 6 inches in the greatest dimension. c. Pipes exceeding the maximum number or size of coating defects shall be stripped of coating, reblasted, and recoated. 2. Maximum Quantity of Defects Allowed: a. Minor coating or lining repairs on any joint of pipe shall not exceed 1.5 per 100 square feet of surface area. (1) Two or more minor repairs within a 6 inches diameter circle will be considered a single repair. (2) Repairs for adhesion testing will not be included in the total number of repairs. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-28 b. Major repairs shall not exceed two per pipe joint and the combined area shall not be greater than 20 percent of the pipe. c. Pipes exceeding the maximum number or size of coating defects shall be stripped of coating, reblasted, and recoated. d. Pipe arriving in the field with defects or repairs exceeding the maximum number or size of coating defects will be returned to the shop for recoating at the Contractor’s expense. 3. Minor Repairs: a. Surface Preparation: Clean and feather the defect by power tool sanding with 80 grit or coarser sandpaper to roughen the existing coat and feather the edges of the defect for a minimum of 2 inches around the defect. b. Shop repair Materials: (1) Slow setting parent material polyurethane coating material in syringes or other single use packaging that controls mix ratio. (2) Coating manufacturer’s polyurethane coating repair products subject to Engineer approval. c. Field Repair Materials: (1) Melt stick coating repair (not acceptable for repairs greater than 1-inch diameter); ScotchCoat P206, Canusa Melt Stick, or approved equal. (2) Protal 7125 Fast Cure Epoxy . (3) Heat applied coating materials; CRP Patch, Canusa; PERP Patch, Tyco Adhesives, or approved equal. (4) Coating manufacturer’s polyurethane coating repair products subject to Engineer approval. d. Apply a single coat of the specified patch coating material at the specified coating thickness. e. Polyurethane or epoxy repair adhesion shall be 50 percent of the specified coating adhesion. 4. Major Repairs: a. Major repairs shall not exceed two per pipe joint and the combined area shall not be greater than 20 percent of the pipe. b. Major repairs: (1) Surface Preparation: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-29 (a) The metal surface and surrounding coating shall be abrasively blasted in accordance with SSPC -SP10, near white metal, or to equal in cleanliness and profile as the original surface preparation. (b) Existing coating shall be feathered and roughened to the equivalent of 40 grit sandpaper. D. Shop Repair Materials: 1. Same material as the pipeline coating or lining and shall be applied by using plural component spray equipment. a. Field Repair Materials: (1) Same material as the pipeline coating or lining and shall be applied by using plural component spray equipment. (2) Heat shrink sleeves as specified for pipeline joints. b. One coat of the specified original coating material shall be applied over the repaired surface at the specified thickness. c. Repair adhesion shall be equal to the specified coating adhesion. E. Cement Mortar Coating and Lining: 1. Cement mortar that is cracked or disbonded shall be repaired in accordance with AWWA C205, except for mortar overcoat on dielectric coated steel. 2. Disbonded cement mortar shall be removed and patched. 3. Cement mortar with disbondment greater than 25 percent of the pipe surface shall be rejected and recoated. 4. Cracks in cement mortar shall be repaired in accordance with AWWA C205. 3.08 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General: 1. Applicator shall inspect and test the coating system in accordance with referenced standards and the Specifications, whichever is more stringent. 2. The frequency of the testing shall be determined by the applicator, but shall not be less than the requirements of this Section. 3. Owner or Owner’s representative will conduct random independent inspections and tests for the final acceptance or rejection of pipe coating or lining. 4. Contractor to perform holiday testing in the field using equipment provided as specified in Paragraph 2.02. Tests will be completed in the presence of the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-30 Owner’s representative on each joint of pipe and fitting once the pipe has been lifted to be lowered into the trench. Holidays shall be repaired as specified. B. Surface Profile Testing 1. Surface profile of abrasive blasted surfaces to be tested with “Press -O -Film” tester tape or equivalent in accordance with NACE RP287. 2. Tester tape shall be suitable for the intended profile height. 3. Profile shall be measured to a minimum tolerance of 0.1 mils, maximum. 4. Electronic surface profilometers shall be used, as deemed necessary, to verify tester tape measurements. C. Adhesion Testing: 1. General: a. Adhesion testing shall be conducted at the shop prior to shipment. Pipe shipped without adhesion testing will be field-tested. Pipe rejected in the field will be returned to the shop for repair at the sole expense of the Contractor. b. A minimum of two pipes shall be tested for adhesion from each lot of pipe coated up to 2500 square feet of pipe. An additional adhesion test shall be conducted on every increment up to 15 00 square feet of pipe coated in excess of the first 2500 square feet of pipe. (i.e., if one workday of production is 3000 square feet of pipe, three adhesion tests would be conducted on the pipe lot.) Adhesion testing shall be conducted on not less than 25 percent of each pipe produced within a lot. c. A pipe lot is defined as the quantity of pipe that is coated by a single crew within a work shift, but not to exceed 10 hours. d. The pipe coating applicator shall repair all coating damage from shop adhesion testing performed by applicator and Owner’s Representative. Contractor shall be responsible for coating repairs for all field adhesion testing. e. Adhesion tests shall be performed not less than 24 hours after coating application. Tests conducted prior to 24 hours will be acceptable only if the test meets or exceeds the adhesion criteria specified and the test was requested by the pipe fabricator. f. Pipe shall be randomly selected for adhesion testing. The Owner reserves the right to perform adhesion testing at any time or location. 2. Rejection of Coating: a. If any pipe within a lot fails to meet the test criteria specified for the coating type, that pipe shall be rejected along with all other pipes within the lot. Each pipe within the rejected pipe lot will then be individually tested and rejected Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-31 on a pipe-by-pipe basis in conformance with the test procedures and criteria specific for the coating type. b. If more than 25% of the pipes within a lot fail, then the entire lot shall be rejected. c. All rejected pipe shall have all coating removed from the full length pipe and the pipe abrasive blasted and recoated. 3. Tape Coating Adhesion Testing: a. Inner tape coating shall have an adhesion to steel of 20 pounds per inch width or 15 pounds per inch width for ductile iron, minimum, when tape is pulled in a continuous manner at an angle of 180 degrees to the pipe surface. b. Tape adhesion testing shall be conducted prior to application of the cement mortar overcoat. Pipe that has been mortar coated prior to adhesion testing shall have the mortar coating removed by the CONTRACTOR as directed by the Engineer and of sufficient dimensional area to permit the adhesion test to be conducted. c. Adhesion tests shall be conducted at temperatures above 60 degrees and less than 75 degrees. d. Pulling tension shall be continuous, without stopping, and monitored throughout the length of the pull, which shall be not less than 12 -inches in length. e. Adhesion test shall be prepared by making two parallel cuts through the coating, 1 -inch apart, of sufficient length for the test pull. Peel the coating back at one end and attach the tension scale to the coating with a suitable clamp. Mark the coating at one inch increments from 0 to 12-inches. f. The pull tension shall be recorded for each inch of pull. The two highest and two lowest readings shall be discarded and the remaining values averaged. Pull speed shall be not less than 5 seconds per inch or greater than 10 seconds per inch. If elongation of the tape backing occurs, pull speeds may exceed 10 seconds per inch provided the minimum adhesion rating can still be achieved. g. Failure shall be by cohesive failure of the adhesive only. Delamination failure, defined as separation of the adhesive from the backing material, will result in rejection of the tape lot. Intermittent skip failures will be counted as zero pounds of adhesion and included in the calculations for average coating adhesion. Adhesive failure, defined as separation of the adhesive from the metal substrate, will be rejected. h. Pipe that fails the test by delamination will be retested on two other pipes within the same lot of coated pipe. Failure of any two pipes within the lot will result in rejection of all pipes coated with the rejected tape lot. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-32 4. Polyurethane Adhesion Testing: a. Polyurethane coatings or linings shall have an adhesion to steel of 2,000 pounds per square inch, minimum. One pull test will be required. If the test shows adhesive or cohesive failure values less than 2,000 psi, then two additional tests shall be taken within 4 inches of the failing pull test. If the average of the three tests is less than 2,000 psi, or any test is below 1500 psi, then the adhesion test shall be deemed a failed test and the pipe will be rejected. If the average is above 2,000 psi and no single pull is below 1500 psi, then the test will be deemed a passing test. If a test fails, then all pipe segments within the lot shall be tested using three adhesion pulls per pipe segment within 4 inches of each other. If the average of three tests is less than 2,000 psi, or a single pull is less than 1500 psi, then the pipe segment will be rejected. If more than 25% of the segments within a lot fail, then the entire lot shall be rejected. D. Polyurethane coating adhesion to steel substrates shall be tested using pneumatic pull off equipment, such as Delfesko Positest, in accordance with ASTM D4541 and AWWA C222, except as modified in this section. All adhesion tests shall be performed at an applied load rate of 100 psi per second, plus or minus 10 psi. Automatic pull rate adhesion test equipment shall be used. 1. Adhesion tests shall utilize 20 mm diameter dollies. 2. When three tests are required on a single pipe, all three tests shall be conducted by the same person, test equipment, and test procedure. 3. All dollies shall be scored to metal substrate using manual methods and tools, normal to the pipe surface, and in a manner that does not stress or overheat the coating. 4. Adhesion testing shall be performed at temperatures between 55- and 100- degrees F. Tests may be performed at temperatures up to 115-degrees F or as low as 45 degrees if testing can demonstrate no statistically detectable affect in the test results and subject to Engineer approval. E. Adhesion testing records shall include pipe identification, surface tested (interior or exterior), surface temperature, coating thickness, tensile force applied, mode of failure, and percentage of substrate failure relative to dolly surface. Records of all adhesion tests shall be maintained in an electronic spreadsheet that includes pipe identification, pipe coating date, adhesion test date, surface tested (interior or exterior), surface temperature at time of test, coating thickness, tensile force applied, applied load rate per second, mode of failure, and percentages of failure types present relative to dolly surface area. 1. Polyurethane coatings shall be scored around the dolly prior to conducting the adhesion test. 2. Failure shall be by adhesive and cohesive failure only. Adhesive failure is defined as separation of the coating from the steel substrate. Cohesive failure is defined as failure within the coating, resulting in coating remaining both on the steel substrate and dolly. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-33 3. Partial substrate and glue failures will be retested if the substrate failure is less than 50 percent relative of the dolly surface area and the applied tension was less than the specified adhesion. Pipes that have partial substrate failures greater than 50 percent and less than the specified adhesion will be rejected as a substrate adhesion failure. 4. Glue failures in excess of the minimum required tensile adhesion would be accepted as meeting the specified adhesion requirements. 5. Adhesion tests will be conducted on polyurethane pipe coating and lining independently and will be accepted or rejected independently of the other. 6. Repair patches on the polyurethane coating shall be randomly selected for adhesion testing in a manner as described herein and at the discretion of the coating inspector conducting the adhesion tests. Adhesion of repairs shall be as specified for the type of repair. A minimum of two adhesion tests per week shall be provided for repair patches. F. Holiday Testing: 1. Holiday test the inner layer of tape wrap coatings after application and prior to the subsequent tape layer in accordance with AWWA C214 and NACE Standard RP-0274 2. Holiday tests on polyurethane coatings or linings will be conducted on the completed coating or lining after cure or 24-hours, whichever is less, using a high voltage spark test in accordance with NACE Standard RP 0274 and the Specifications. In addition, the pipe shall be holiday tested after storage and delivery to the jobsite, approximately one day prior to installation in the trench. 3. Coating thickness used for holiday testing shall be the minimum specified coating thickness. G. Dry Film Thickness Testing: 1. Coatings shall be tested for dry film thickness using a properly calibrated magnetic pull off or eddy current equipment. 2. Coating thickness measurements shall be conducted as necessary and without limitation. Testing conformance to the requirements of SSPC PA -2 is specifically excluded from this Section. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 1/3/2024 MWDSLS Project No.: SA061 Pipeline Coatings and Linings Cottonwoods Connection Welded Steel Pipe Preselection 09 90 10-34 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Coating Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 97 00-1 SECTION 09 97 00 SPECIAL COATING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install special coating systems in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCED SECTIONS A. Section 03 35 00 – Concrete Finishes B. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel C. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications 1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these specifications, all work hereunder shall conform to the applicable requirements of the reference portions of the following documents, to the extent that the requirements therein are not in conflict with the provisions of this Section. 1. Codes and Standards a. NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) Standard 61 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. C. Submit Material Data Sheets for each coating product provided. D. The manufacturer shall submit certification that coating product is proper for the exposure and service. E. Submit manufacturer's standard color chart for each coating product supplied. F. Submit manufacturer's representative name, address and telephone number who will inspect work. 70 0 8 8 - 0 0 1 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Coating Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 97 00-2 G. Submit manufacturer's Certification that coating products which may come in contact with potable water shall meet National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard 61 H. Submit letter from manufacturer stating that secondary containment lining is compatible with chemicals to be stored in area. 1.05 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified manufacturer's technical representative who shall adequately supervise the surface preparation and application of the coating products. B. The manufacturer's technical representative shall submit to the Engineer a report, at the completion of the work, identifying the products used and verifying that surfaces were properly applied, and that the paint systems were proper for the exposure and surface. 1.06 WARRANTY C. Warranty shall be as specified in 01 61 00 Product Requirement and Options. Warranty period shall be minimum two (2) years from substantial completion. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products shall be manufactured by company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with a minimum of five continuous years of experience of performance of similar applications in wastewater treatment plants or water treatment plants. B. Applicator shall be specialized in performing work of this Section with a minimum of five continuous years of experience and shall be approved by the manufacturer. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CEMENTITIOUS COATING A. Cementitious coating shall be a blend of hydraulic cements, lime, pigments, plasticizer, dispersants, and fine-grade siliceous aggregates. B. Cementitious coating shall be MasterSeal 581 by BASF, Tamoseal by Euclid Chemical Company, or approved equal. C. Cementitious coating shall be applied in a minimum of two coats to achieve a minimum total thickness of 1/8 inch. The coating material shall fill all holes, pores, surface irregularities, joints, patches, and other surface defects. D. Color shall be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer's standard colors. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Coating Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 97 00-3 2.02 CONTAINMENT LINING A. Secondary containment areas shall be coated with a chemical resistant flake filled coating. Fill voids with Series 800 Patching Mortar by Carboline or equal. Lining shall be Plasite 4100 by Carboline, or equal. Where chemicals are not compatible with coating specified provide a substitute product compatible with chemicals stored. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Surfaces to receive coating shall be clean and free of dirt, oil, grease, and other foreign materials. B. Concrete and masonry surfaces shall cure for 28 days minimum prior to coating. Moisture content of concrete and masonry surfaces shall not exceed manufacturer's recommended limits. 3.02 APPLICATION A. All methods, procedures of mixing, application and curing of the coating material shall be accomplished in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. B. Provide radius inside corners, ease outside corners, and terminate coatings in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions. 3.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Bring materials to the job site in the original sealed and labeled containers. B. Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Per Manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Each coat will be inspected. Strip and remove defective coats, prepare surfaces and recoat. When approved, apply next coat. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Special Coating Cottonwoods Connection Page 09 97 00-4 B. Control and check dry film thicknesses and integrity of coatings. C. Measure dry film thickness with calibrated thickness gauge. D. Dry film thicknesses on ferrous-based substrates may be checked with Elcometer Type 1 Magnetic Pull-Off Gage or Positector 6000. E. Verify coat integrity with low-voltage sponge or high-voltage spark holiday detector, in accordance with SP0188 06. Allow Engineere to use detector for additional checking. F. Arrange for services of coating manufacturer's field representative to provide periodic field consultation and inspection services to ensure proper surface preparation of facilities and items to be coated, and to ensure proper application and curing: 1. Notify Engineer 24 hours in advance of each visit by coating manufacturer's representative. 2. Provide Engineer with a written report by coating manufacturer's representative within 48 hours following each visit. 3.06 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES A. Provide manufacturer's field representative to train application personnel and inspect the first application of each unique coating system. 3.07 CLEANING A. As work proceeds and upon completion, promptly remove coating where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of work, keep premises free from unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean. END OF SECTION Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pre-Fabricated Equipment Centers Cottonwoods Connection Page 13 34 23.26-1 SECTION 13 34 23.26 PRE-FABRICATED EQUIPMENT CENTERS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish, install, and place in satisfactory operation pre -fabricated equipment centers as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. B. Pre-fabricated equipment centers shall be used to enclose equipment that is furnished under Division 26, and that equipment shall be as specified in the respective Section. Equipment furnished under other Divisions shall also be located in the pre -fabricated equipment centers as shown on the Drawings. C. Unless otherwise noted herein or on the Drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating whether the electrical raceways and wire between equipment shown within the pre-fabricated equipment center will be furnished and installed by the equipment center manufacturer, or the Contractor’s field personnel. D. Reference Section 10 14 00 − Identifying Devices; Section 26 05 00 − Basic Electrical Requirements; Section 26 05 33.13 − Conduit; Section 26 05 36 − Cable Trays; Section 26 05 19 − Low Voltage Wire and Cable; Section 26 05 33.16 − Boxes; Section 26 27 26 − Wiring Devices; and Section 26 50 00 − Lighting. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Products specified herein shall be in conformance with the following codes and standards as applicable: 1. Governing Building Codes a. Current Building Code of the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located. 2. ANSI Z97.1 – Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings 3. 16 CFR 1201 – Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00 − Submittal Procedures, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings 06 0 7 16 Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pre-Fabricated Equipment Centers Cottonwoods Connection Page 13 34 23.26-2 2. Spare Parts List 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 4. Third Party Inspection and Certification Documentation 5. Manufacturer’s Representative’s Installation Certification B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable specification section. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: 1. A Compliance, Deviations, and Exceptions (CD&E) letter. If the shop drawings are submitted without this CD&E letter, the submittal will be rejected. The letter shall include all comments, deviations and exceptions taken to the Drawings and Specifications by the Contractor AND Equipment Manufacturer/Supplier. This letter shall include a copy of this Specification Section. In the left margin beside each and every paragraph/item, a letter "C", "D", or "E" shall be typed or written in. The letter "C" shall be for full compliance with the requirement. The letter "D" shall be for a deviation from the requirement. The letter "E" shall be for taking exception to a requirement. Any requirements with the letter "D" or "E" beside them shall be provided with a full typewritten explanation of the deviation/exception. Handwritten explanation of the deviations/exceptions is not acceptable. The CD&E letter shall also address deviations, and exceptions taken to each Drawing related to this Specification Section. 2. Detailed drawings as follows: a. Drawings shall show plan, front, and side views as well as appropriate section views of the pre-fabricated equipment center. b. Drawings shall be annotated with appropriate linear dimensions , identify any shipping split locations, and include the shipping weight for each section of the equipment center. c. Drawings shall adequately detail the conduit stub -up areas below each piece of equipment. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pre-Fabricated Equipment Centers Cottonwoods Connection Page 13 34 23.26-3 d. Equipment center erection drawings showing comprehensive details of wall panels, roof panels, base and floor. Erection drawings shall include connection details and anchoring details. e. Structural calculations of structural system for equipment center showing compliance with governing building code for all components, connections, and anchorage of system shall be submitted with detailed erection drawings. Calculations shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer currently registered in the State or Commonwealth in which the project is located . 3. Product data sheets for all appurtenances and accessories (air conditioning unit, light fixture, etc.) that are furnished and installed within the equipment center. 4. Bill of material list. 5. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 6. Manufacturer’s warranty statement. 7. Manufacturer’s installation certification. 8. Calculations used to size air conditioning units. D. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being met. Copies of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "soft -cover" catalogs, and similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment items the Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted. E. Final approval of shop drawings will not be granted until all equipment shown within the pre-fabricated equipment center has been reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 01. The manuals shall include: 1. Instruction books and/or leaflets. 2. All product data sheets previously included in the shop drawing submittals. 3. Final as-built layout drawing of the equipment center, incorporating all changes made during construction. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pre-Fabricated Equipment Centers Cottonwoods Connection Page 13 34 23.26-4 1.06 SPARE PARTS A. All spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor. B. In addition to the manufacturer recommended spare parts, the Contractor shall furnish the following spare parts: No. Required Description 4 sets Air filters for each air conditioning unit 2 gallons Paint for re-coating floor after construction is complete 1.07 IDENTIFICATION A. Each pre-fabricated equipment center shall be identified with the name and/or number shown on the Drawings. A sign shall be provided on each door in accordance with Section 10 14 00 − Identifying Devices. 1.08 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer's warranty shall in no event be for a period of less than three (3) years from date of delivery of equipment to the project site and shall include repair labor, travel expense necessary for repairs at the jobsite, and expendables used duri ng the course of repair. Submittals received without written warranties as specified shall be rejected in their entirety. B. The Contractor shall provide a complete warranty covering the equipment center structure as well as all accessories and appurtenances that are furnished and installed with the equipment center. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The equipment center shall be provided with length and width dimensions no less than those shown on the Drawings, but large enough to accommodate all equipment shown to be installed inside. B. The equipment center shall designed to be [split into sections as shown on the Drawings] [split by the manufacturer into as many sections as required ] to be transported to the project site. C. Equipment that is not specified to be provided under Division 26 (ex. PLC provided under Division 40) may also be shown to be located within the equipment center. Equipment center manufacturer is cautioned to properly coordinate the size of the Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pre-Fabricated Equipment Centers Cottonwoods Connection Page 13 34 23.26-5 equipment center and location of conduit stub-ups with the approved shop drawings for any equipment furnished outside of Division 26. 2.02 EQUIPMENT CENTER STRUCTURE A. Base and Floor 1. The base of the equipment center shall be constructed of welded steel I-beams, channels, and angle supports sized and reinforced to accommodate loading requirements. The height of the base steel shall be same around the entire outer perimeter of the equipment center to prevent debris and animals from getting under the base. 2. The base structure shall be designed to support the equipment center when installed on a concrete slab, piers, or a vault. Reference the Drawings for base support details. 3. The base shall be cleaned and epoxy painted after welding is complete. The entire underside of the base shall be coated with a minimum 8 mil bituminous mastic. Base paint color shall be ANSI 61 light gray. 4. The floor of the equipment center shall be constructed of ¼ inch thick (minimum) steel plate welded to the base framework. Floor material shall be painted tread plate to provide slip resistance, or flat steel coated with an enamel containing immersed sand. Floor paint color shall be ANSI 61 light gray. 5. All components of the base and floor shall be designed to withstand all applicable vertical and lateral loads in accordance with the requirements of the governing building code. 6. Anchorage of equipment center base to foundation slab or structure shall be designed and detailed by the equipment center manufacturer. Anchorage shall be designed to withstand all applicable vertical and lateral loads in accordance with the requirements of the governing building code. B. Walls and Roof 1. Wall panel material shall be 12 gauge (minimum) aluminum or 14 gauge (minimum) galvanized steel formed in an interlocking design which is self-framing. No other material types are acceptable. Wall panels shall be capable of withstanding all applicable vertical and lateral loads in accordance with the requirements of the governing building code. 2. Roof panel shall be material shall be 12 gauge (minimum) aluminum or 14 gauge (minimum) galvanized steel formed in a standing rib design eliminating the possibility of water entry. No other material types are acceptable. Roof panels shall be capable of withstanding all applicable vertical and lateral loads in accordance with the requirements of the governing building code. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pre-Fabricated Equipment Centers Cottonwoods Connection Page 13 34 23.26-6 3. Interior and exterior of wall and roof panels shall be painted in a 6-mil (minimum) ANSI 61 light gray color. C. Doors 1. Personnel Entry Doors a. Entry doors shall be double-wall construction with tempered or laminated safety glass windows meeting CPSC 16 CFR 1201 or ANSI Z97.1. The safety glass window shall large enough to cover no less than 1/3 of the door surface. b. Automatic door closers, cellular neoprene gaskets, panic hardware, threshold, and door bottom seal shall be provided for each door. Doors shall open outward. c. Lockset hardware shall be provided for each door with cylinder to match the Owner’s master key system. Coordinate keying with Owner. [Provide 24VDC electric door strikes for each door for interface with the Owner’s access control system]. d. Minimum single door size shall be 7 feet tall by 3 feet wide. Taller doors shall be provided as required for equipment installation/removal. Double doors shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings. Doors shall be provided with a continuous hinge or three ball bearing hinges for doors 7 feet tall and an additional ball bearing hinge for every additional 2 feet in door height. 2. Equipment Access Doors a. Access doors for equipment located within the pre-fabricated equipment center shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings, and where required for outdoor access to rear-accessible equipment. b. Equipment access doors shall be sized for the equipment that they serve and shall be provided with gaskets to maintain the rain -tight integrity of the enclosure. c. Equipment access doors shall be hinged on one side and have a pad- lockable 3-point latching system on the other side. Provide doors with wind- stop hardware. 3. Vault Entry Doors a. Provide hinged vault entry doors in the floor of the equipment center for personnel access to the vault as shown on the Drawings. Access doors shall be 36 inches square, constructed of aluminum. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pre-Fabricated Equipment Centers Cottonwoods Connection Page 13 34 23.26-7 b. Door leaves shall be 1/4 inch, minimum, diamond pattern plate with an approved raised pattern, non-skid surface. Plate shall be stiffened as required to maintain allowable stress and deflection requirements. Stiffeners shall consist of angles or bars welded to the bottom of plate. c. Doors shall be designed for a 300 psf live load minimum, and shall be designed for flush mounting and for easy opening from both inside and outside. Doors shall have an enclosed compression spring assist and open to 90 degrees. D. Insulation 1. The underside of the floor shall be provided with rigid foam insulation or spray - foam insulation to achieve a minimum value of R11. 2. The walls and roof shall be provided with rigid foam or fiberglass batt insulation t o achieve a minimum value of R20. 2.03 FEATURES A. Lighting 1. Provide interior and exterior lighting fixtures in the quantities, types, and locations as shown on the Drawings. Lighting fixtures shall be as specified in Section 26 50 00 − Lighting. 2. Exterior lighting shall be provided over each personnel door. Exterior lighting shall be LED type with integral photocell. 3. Emergency and exit lighting shall be provided within the equipment center. Emergency lighting shall integral nickel-cadmium battery backup and provide illumination in accordance with NFPA -101, Life Safety Code. Exit fixtures shall be LED type and wall mounted over each equipment center personnel door. B. Receptacles and Switches 1. Provide 3-way light switches at each personnel door to control the interior lighting of the equipment center. 2. Provide receptacles in the quantity and location as shown on the Drawings. If receptacles are not shown on the Drawings, a minimum of two receptacles shall be provided near each personnel door, one on the exterior and one on the interior of the equipment center. 3. Light switches and receptacles shall be as specified in Section 26 27 26 − Wiring Devices. C. Raceways, Boxes, and Wiring Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pre-Fabricated Equipment Centers Cottonwoods Connection Page 13 34 23.26-8 1. All conduit factory-installed within the interior of the equipment center shall be electrical metallic tubing (EMT). Conduit shall be furnished and installed in accordance with Section 26 05 33.13 − Conduit. 2. All cables and wiring factory-installed within the equipment center shall be furnished and installed in accordance with Section 26 05 19 − Low Voltage Wire and Cable. 3. Pull and junction boxes, furnished and installed in accordance with Section 26 05 33.16 − Boxes, shall be provided within the equipment center as required. Provide junction boxes on each side of an equipment center shipping split where factory - installed conduits need cross the split. 4. All cable tray factory-installed within the equipment center shall be furnished and installed in accordance with Section 26 05 36 − Cable Trays. D. Climate Control 1. Calculations a. The equipment center manufacturer shall perform calculations to determine the proper size of heating and air conditioning units for the equipment center. Calculations shall be submitted for review. The following parameters shall be used in the calculations: 1) 85 degree F maximum allowable indoor air temperature 2) 55 degree F minimum allowable indoor air temperature 3) Outdoor ambient high and low temperatures published in the ASHRAE Handbook for the location of equipment center installation 4) Heat gain of all equipment within equipment center shall be calculated based on each piece of equipment operating at 75% of its full load. 5) Insulation R values as specified elsewhere herein 2. Heating Air Conditioning Units a. Package heating and air conditioning units shall be provided in the location as indicated on the Drawings, and at the calculated size required. Two (2) units shall be provided, allowing for 100% redundancy of heating and cooling. b. Heating and air conditioning units shall be factory wired to a 480V source located in the equipment center. Air conditioning units shall be provided with a Heresite phenolic coil coating for corrosion prevention. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pre-Fabricated Equipment Centers Cottonwoods Connection Page 13 34 23.26-9 c. If the calculated heat gain of the equipment within the equipment center is enough to keep the indoor air temperature above the allowable minimum, electric heating shall not be required to be provided as part of the heating and air conditioning unit. 3. An automatic temperature controller shall be provided as part of the heating and air conditioning system, factory wired to each unit, with the following features: a. Temperature setpoint control and display b. Controls to alternate the operation of each unit and equalize run times c. DPDT contact rated 5A (minimum) at 120VAC to indicate air conditioning unit failure d. DPDT contact rated 5A (minimum) at 120VAC to indicate a low air temperature inside the equipment center, with adjustable setpoint (initially set at 50 degrees F) e. DPDT contact rated 5A (minimum) at 120VAC to indicate a high air temperature inside the equipment center, with adjustable setpoint (initially set at 95 degrees F) E. Grounding 1. A stainless steel grounding attachment pad shall be welded to the exterior base on each corner of the equipment center. Pad shall be provided with a threaded hole to allow a one- hole wire lug to be affixed. 2. A [tin-plated] copper grounding bar shall be provided around the entire interior perimeter of the equipment center. Grounding bar shall be installed at a height just below the ceiling and shall be 2 inches tall by ¼ inch thick. Install a #4/0 AWG bare copper grounding electrode conductor from at least two points on the grounding bar through the floor and out to the grounding electrode or grounding electrode system shown on the Drawings. F. Miscellaneous 1. Provide a fire extinguisher on the interior of the equipment center at each personnel door. Fire extinguisher shall be 10 lb. capacity, hand portable, carbon dioxide type, with Underwriters' Laboratories rating of 4 -A: 60 BC. 2. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide a free-standing double-door painted steel storage cabinet for the Owner’s use in storing spare parts and operation and maintenance manuals. Storage cabinet shall be lockable with a 3 -point locking system. Storage cabinet shall be provided with at least 4 adjustable shelves and shall be no less than 72 inches tall by 18” deep by 36” wide. Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pre-Fabricated Equipment Centers Cottonwoods Connection Page 13 34 23.26-10 PART 3 – EXECUTION: 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer shall acquire all necessary permits to transport the pre -fabricated equipment center through each state between the factory and project site. B. If the equipment center is split into multiple pieces for shipping, the open ends of the equipment center shall be weatherproofed to protect the equipment inside during transport and re-assembly of the shipping sections. C. Contractor shall furnish and install all anchoring required for the equipment center in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. D. Exposed electrical raceways installed within the equipment center by the Contractor’s field personnel shall be coordinated with the equipment center manufacturer to ensure the raceways can be properly supported in accordance with the NEC. Raceways shall be [conduits, cable tray is not acceptable] [conduits and/or cable tray as indicated on the Drawings]. E. Exposed electrical raceways installed within the equipment center by the equipment center manufacturer shall be [conduits, cable tray is not permitted] [conduits and/or cable tray as indicated on the Drawings]. F. Automatic door closers shall be adjusted after installation to prevent doors from slamming shut or taking an unnecessary amount of time to close. G. At the conclusion of all work within the equipment center, the floor shall be thoroughly cleaned and repainted with the same paint used to initially coat the floor. 3.02 INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION A. A third-party shall inspect and provide a certification label for the equipment center in accordance with the industrialized building code. Certification documentation shall be provided to the Owner and an adhesive certification label shall be placed in a conspicuous place within the equipment center. 3.03 SERVICES OF A MANUFACTURERS REPRESENTATIVE A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified, factory -trained manufacturer's technical representative who shall adequately supervise the installation and/or assembly of the pre-fabricated equipment center. The manufacturer's representative shall certify in writing that the equipment center has been installed and/or assembled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. No further work may be performed inside the equipment center until this certification is accepted by the Owner. B. The services of the manufacturer's representative shall be provided for a period of not less than as follows: Hazen and Sawyer Project No.: 70088-001 10/27/2023 MWDSLS – Project No.: SA061 Pre-Fabricated Equipment Centers Cottonwoods Connection Page 13 34 23.26-11 1. One (1) trip of two (2) working days during the installation and/or assembly of the equipment center. 2. One (1) trip of one (1) working day two (2) months before the warranty expiration to identify any issues to be corrected under warranty. C. Any additional time required to achieve successful installation shall be at the expense of the Contractor. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK